Today’s News 12th August 2020

  • You'll Never Guess Which Country Has The Most Widespread Adoption Of Crypto In The World
    You’ll Never Guess Which Country Has The Most Widespread Adoption Of Crypto In The World

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/12/2020 – 02:45

    Reliance on remittances and the prevalence of peer-to-peer phone payments have led to a steep rise of cryptocurrency use in Africa’s largest economy.

    As Statista’s Katharina Buchholz details below, out of 65 countries in the Statista Global Consumer Survey, Nigerians were the most likely to say they used or owned cryptocurrency.

    Almost a third of Nigerians said this applied to them.

    The high cost of sending money across borders the conventional way has caused many to turn to local cryptocurrency exchanges catering to overseas workers and their families, according to Bitcoin.com. Nigerians also often use their phones to send money to each other also to pay in shops. Recently, businesses in the country have been adding crypto plugins to their phone payment options, adding another way in which Nigerians can use cryptocurrency in their everyday lives.

    Infographic: How Common is Crypto? | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    High rates of cryptocurrency ownership and use were also recorded in Vietnam, South Africa, Turkey and Peru.

    One world region where many cryptocurrency users were located was Latin America, according to the survey. Brazil, Colombia, Argentina, Mexico and Chile all scored in the double digits when it comes to the adoption of cryptocurrency.

    Incidentally, Spain was the country with one of the highest adoption rates in Europe, together with Ireland (10 percent each) and Greece (11 percent). Asian and African countries also scored higher than European and English-speaking nations, where crypto currency adoption was still very low.

    Japan, finally, was the country in the survey where the fewest people had ever dealt in crypto currency. Only three percent said they had experience with crypto products, the lowest in the survey together with respondents in Sweden and Denmark.

  • Britain's Enemies Will Tremble At The Sight Of Our Diversity & Inclusion…
    Britain’s Enemies Will Tremble At The Sight Of Our Diversity & Inclusion…

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/12/2020 – 02:00

    Authored by Simon Black via SovereignMan.com,

    Not long ago, the British Army realized that it needed to completely revamp its recruiting campaign.

    The younger generation simply wasn’t responding to the Army’s previous ‘Be All You Can Be’ style of advertising. So British leadership changed the recruiting message to keep up with the massive cultural shift that has been sweeping the world.

    Their updated campaign focused on– you guessed it– diversity and inclusion.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Army’s new priority was to show off how woke they are, and to make new recruits feel safe and happy… as opposed to building a lethal, highly effective fighting force.

    One of the best examples of this ad campaign shows British soldiers on a combat patrol, ostensibly in the mountains of Afghanistan.

    But suddenly the mission stops… because one of the soldiers is Muslim and needs to pray.

    The ad shows the rest of the unit happily and patiently waiting. At one point, the radio squawks (which is usually because the command headquarters or another nearby unit needs to communicate with your squad.)

    But one of the soldiers shushes the radio operator. So we not only need to stop the entire freaking war, but we have to cut ourselves off from potentially critical communication, just so this guy can continue to pray without being disturbed.

    Just to be clear, I respect anyone’s religious beliefs. I don’t care if someone prays to the sun, Allah, or Joe Pesci.

    But they don’t stop a war when someone gets SHOT. Duh. So why stop just because someone needs to pray? What kind of priority is this??

    It’s as if the Army leadership actually believes “Our enemies will tremble at the sight of our diversity and inclusion. . .”

    But in reality, the entire world now knows that the British military will stop in the middle of a war to coddle the needs of every individual soldier.

    Again– this is a major shift in priorities. Military service is supposed to be about selfless sacrifice, not the needs of the individual.

    Unsurprisingly, the Chinese have figured this out.

    In its new recruiting campaign, China’s military leadership shows the sacrifices that its soldiers make… the early mornings, the long days, the time away from family, and the difficult life.

    But the Chinese ads attract exactly the type of person they’re looking for– people who don’t want to take the easy path.

    China’s recruiting ads also show off a bonanza of high-tech weaponry, including some of the most advanced fighter jets, tanks, and ships in the world.

    Take a look at these two side-by-side and ask yourself, “Gee I wonder who would win that war?”

    I wrote about this yesterdayyou can see this major shift in priorities just about everywhere.

    The top priority of the world’s biggest corporations is no longer running their businesses and turning a profit. Now it’s all about showing off their woke credentials.

    You can’t just sell shoes anymore. You have to run political ads to demonstrate how deeply you believe in the new religion of wokeness.

    Nike built an entire ad campaign around Colin Kaepernick– the former NFL player who started the movement to kneel during the US national anthem.

    And last month when Kaepernick tweeted that July 4th was a “celebration of white supremacy,” Disney almost immediately hired him to produce content.

    Beyond wokeness, economic priorities have also shifted. National, state, and local governments all over the world are paying people to NOT work, and refusing to allow small businesses to operate at normal capacity.

    Rather than work, produce, and contribute to a healthy economy, they want us all to be terrified of a virus and dependent on mother government.

    As I wrote yesterday, economic prosperity is no longer the priority.

    They will rack up limitless amounts of debt, print infinite quantities of money, make interest rates negative– all to protect people from Covid, regardless of the cost to the economy or individual liberty.

    Then you have Bolshevik politicians to contend with, like Congresswoman Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez, who led a ridiculous crusade last year to banish Amazon from her district.

    Amazon had originally announced that they would establish a second headquarters in Long Island City, New York (which AOC represents).

    “HQ2” as it was called, would have brought billions of dollars in benefits– high paying jobs, investment, additional tax revenue. And in exchange, Amazon would have received some minor tax breaks.

    The deal was a win/win for everyone. Amazon would have benefited, the local community would have benefited, and the government would have benefited.

    But Bolsheviks don’t like win/win situations. They can’t stand it when a wealthy person or big business wins. They’re only willing to do a win/lose deal. And absent that, they’ll do a lose/lose deal.

    And that’s exactly what AOC got– a lose/lose deal. Amazon walked away, and her district ended up with no big investment or additional tax revenue.

    If economic prosperity were still the priority in the United States, angry voters would have revolted against AOC for her irrational, destructive behavior.

    Instead she was celebrated… because, again, economic prosperity is no longer the priority.

    Universities, which used to prioritize scientific advancement, vigorous debate, and the transfer of knowledge to the next generation, have embraced wokeness and become intolerant of any intellectual dissent.

    And in the case of Great Britain, the new woke priorities even extend to national defense.

    Their Army’s priority is now diversity and inclusion. It’s no longer about defending the nation, and, if necessary, fighting and winning wars.

    Ultimately these new priorities cultivate weakness– a weaker national defense, a weaker economy, a weaker, more fractured society.

    And it’s hard to imagine any nation thriving long-term when it consistently cultivates weakness.

    *  *  *

    We think gold could DOUBLE and silver could increase by up to 5 TIMES in the next few years. That’s why we published a new, 50-page long Ultimate Guide on Gold & Silver that you can download here.

  • Engdahl: Towards A US-China War? The Creation of A Global Totalitarian "One World Government" System?
    Engdahl: Towards A US-China War? The Creation of A Global Totalitarian “One World Government” System?

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/12/2020 – 00:05

    Authored by F. William Engdahl via GlobalResearch.ca,

    If we step back from the details of daily headlines around the world and try to make sense of larger patterns, the dominant dynamic defining world geopolitics in the past three years or more is the appearance of a genuine irregular conflict between the two most formidable powers on the planet – The Peoples’ Republic of China and the United States of America. Increasingly it’s beginning to look as if some very dark global networks are orchestrating what looks to be an updated rerun of their 1939-1945 World War. Only this time the stakes are total, and aim at creation a universal global totalitarian system, what David Rockefeller once called a “one world government.” The powers that be periodically use war to gain major policy shifts.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On behalf of the Powers That Be (PTB), World War II was orchestrated by the circles of the City of London and of Wall Street to maneuver two great obstacles – Russia and Germany – to wage a war to the death against each other, in order that those Anglo-Saxon PTB could reorganize the world geopolitical chess board to their advantage. It largely succeeded, but for the small detail that after 1945, Wall Street and the Rockefeller brothers were determined that England play the junior partner to Washington. London and Washington then entered the period of their global domination known as the Cold War.

    That Anglo-American global condominium ended, by design, in 1989 with the collapse of the Berlin Wall and the disintegration of the Soviet Union by 1991.

    Around this time, with the onset of the Bill Clinton presidency in 1992, the next phase– financial and industrial globalization– was inaugurated. With that, began the hollowing out of the industrial base of not only the United States, but also of Germany and the EU. The cheap labor outsourcing enabled by the new WTO drove wages down and destroyed one industry after the next in the industrial West after the 1990s. It was a necessary step on the path to what G.H.W. Bush in 1990 called the New World Order. The next step would be destruction of national sovereignty everywhere. Here the USA was the major obstacle.

    “A little help from our friends…”

    For the PTB, who owe no allegiance to nations, only to their power which is across borders, the birth of the World Trade Organization and their bringing China in as a full member in 2001 was intended as the key next step. At that point the PTB facilitated in China the greatest industrial growth by any nation in history, possibly excepting Germany from 1871-1914 and USA after 1866. WTO membership allowed Western multinationals from Apple to Nike to KFC to Ford and VW to pour billions into China to make their products at dirt-cheap wage levels for re-export to the West.

    One of the great mysteries of that China growth is the fact that China was allowed to become the “workshop of the world” after 2001, first in lower-skill industries such as textiles or toys, later in pharmaceuticals and most recently in electronics assembly and production. The mystery clears up when we look at the idea that the PTB and their financial houses, using China, want to weaken strong industrial powers, especially the United States, to push their global agenda. Brzezinski often wrote that the nation state was to be eliminated, as did his patron, David Rockefeller. By allowing China to become a rival to Washington in economy and increasingly in technology, they created the means to destroy the superpower hegemony of the US.

    By the onset of the Presidency of Xi Jinping in 2012, China was an economic colossus second in weight only to the United States. Clearly this could never have happened – not under the eye of the same Anglo-American old families who launched the Opium Wars after 1840 to bring China to heel and open their economy to Western financial looting – unless the Anglo-Americans had wanted it.

    The same British-owned bank involved in the China opium trade, Hong Kong and Shanghai Bank (HSBC), founded by a Scotsman, Thomas Sutherland in 1865 in the then-British colony of Hong Kong, today is the largest non-Chinese bank in Hong Kong. HSBC has become so well-connected to China in recent years that it has since 2011 had as Board member and Deputy HSBC Chairman, Laura Cha. Cha was formerly Vice Chairman of the China Securities Regulatory Commission, being the first person outside mainland China to join the Beijing Central Government of the People’s Republic of China at vice-ministerial rankIn other words the largest bank in the UK has a board member who was a member of the Chinese Communist Party and a China government official. China needed access to Western money and HSBC and other select banks such as JP MorganChase, Barclays, Goldman Sachs were clearly more than happy to assist.

    “Socialism with Xi Jinping Characteristics…”

    All told until 2012 when Xi took charge of the CCP in Beijing, China seemed to be willing to be a globalist “team player,” though with “Chinese characteristics.”

    However, in 2015 after little more than two years in office, Xi Jinping endorsed a comprehensive national industrial strategy, Made in China: 2025. China 2025 replaced an earlier Western globalist document that had been formulated with the World Bank and the USA, the China 2030 report under Robert Zoellick. That shift to a China strategy for global tech domination might well have triggered a decision by the globalist PTB that China could no longer be relied on to play by the rules of the globalists, but rather that the CCP under Xi were determined to make China the global leader in advanced industrial, AI and bio-technologies. A resurgent China nationalist global hegemony was not the idea of the New World Order gang.

    China:2025 combined with Xi’s strong advocacy of the Belt Road Initiative for global infrastructure linking China by land and sea to all Eurasia and beyond, likely suggested to the globalists that the only solution to the prospect of their losing their power to a China global hegemon would ultimately be war, a war that would destroy both nationalist powers, USA AND China. This is my conclusion and there is much to suggest this is now taking place.

    Tit for Tat

    If so, it will most likely be far different from the military contest of World War II. The USA and most of the Western industrial economies have “conveniently” imposed the worst economic depression since the 1930’s as a bizarre response to an alleged virus originating in Wuhan and spreading to the world. Despite the fact that the death toll, even with vastly inflated statistics, is at the level of a severe annual influenza, the insistence of politicians and the corrupt WHO to impose draconian lockdown and economic disruption has crippled the remaining industrial base in the US and most of the EU.

    The eruption of well-organized riots and vandalism under the banner of racial protests across the USA has brought America’s cities to a state in many cases of war zones resembling the cities of the 2013 Matt Damon and Jodie Foster film, Elysium. In this context, anti-Washington rhetoric from Beijing has taken on a sharp tone in their use of so-called “Wolf Diplomacy.”

    Now after Washington closed the China Consulate in Houston and China the US Consulate in Chengdu, both sides have stepped up rhetoric. High tech companies are being banned in the US, military displays of force from the US in the South China Sea and waters near Taiwan are increasing tensions and rhetoric on both sides. The White House accuses the WHO of being an agent of Beijing, while China accuses the US of deliberately creating a deadly virus and bringing it to Wuhan. Chinese state media supports the explosion of violent protests across America under the banner of Black Lives Matter. Step-wise events are escalating dramatically. Many of the US self-styled Marxists leading the protests across US cities have ties to Beijing such as the Maoist-origin Revolutionary Communist Party, USA of Bob Avakian.

    “Unrestricted Warfare”

    Under these conditions, what kind of escalation is likely? In 1999 two colonels in the China PLA, Qiao Liang and Wang Xiangsui, published a book with the PLA Press titled Unrestricted Warfare. Qiao Liang was promoted to Major General in the PLA Air Force and became deputy secretary-general of the Council for National Security Policy Studies. The two updated their work in 2016. It gives a window on high-level China military strategy.

    Reviewing published US military doctrine in the aftermath of the 1991 US Operation Desert Storm war against Iraq, the Chinese authors point out what they see as US over-dependence on brute military force and conventional military doctrine. They claim,

    “Observing, considering, and resolving problems from the point of view of technology is typical American thinking. Its advantages and disadvantages are both very apparent, just like the characters of Americans.”

    They add,

    “military threats are already often no longer the major factors affecting national security…these traditional factors are increasingly becoming more intertwined with grabbing resources, contending for markets, controlling capital, trade sanctions, and other economic factors, to the extent that they are even becoming secondary to these factors. They comprise a new pattern which threatens the political, economic and military security of a nation or nations… “

    The two authors define the new form of warfare as, “encompassing the political, economic, diplomatic, cultural, and psychological spheres, in addition to the land, sea, air, space, and electronics spheres.”

    They suggest China could use hacking into websites, targeting financial institutions, terrorism, using the media, and conducting urban warfare among the methods proposed. Recent revelations that Chinese entities pay millions in ad revenues to the New York Times and other mainstream USA media to voice China-positive views is one example. Similarly, maneuvering a Chinese national to head the US’ largest public pension fund, CalPERS, which poured billions into risky China stocks, or persuading the New York Stock Exchange to list dozens of China companies without requiring adherence to US accounting transparency increase US financial vulnerability are others.

    This all suggests the form that a war between China and the US could take. It can be termed asymmetrical warfare or unrestricted war, where nothing that disrupts the enemy is off limits. Qiao has that, “the first rule of unrestricted warfare is that there are no rules, with nothing forbidden.” There are no Geneva Conventions.

    The two Beijing authors add this irregular warfare could include assaults on the political security, economic security, cultural security, and information security of the nation. The dependence of the US economy on China supply chains for everything from basic antibiotics to militarily-vital rare earth minerals is but one domain of vulnerability.

    On its side, China is vulnerable to trade sanctions, financial disruption, bioterror attacks and oil embargoes to name a few. Some have suggested the recent locust plague and African Swine Fever devastation to China’s core food supplies, was not merely an act of nature. If not, then we are likely deep into an undeclared form of US-China unrestricted warfare. Could it be that the recent extreme floods along the China Yangtze River that threaten the giant Three Gorges Dam and have flooded Wuhan and other major China cities and devastated millions of acres of key cropland was not entirely seasonal?

    A full unrestricted war of China and the USA would be more than a tragedy. It could be the end of civilization as we know it.

    Is this what characters such as Bill Gates and his superiors are trying to bring about?

    Do they plan to introduce their draconian dystopian “Reset” on the ashes of such a conflict?

  • Fox News Ratings Surge, Leading 'Primetime Pack' Despite Boycotts As CNN, MSNBC Lag
    Fox News Ratings Surge, Leading ‘Primetime Pack’ Despite Boycotts As CNN, MSNBC Lag

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/11/2020 – 23:45

    While the national polls proclaim Joe Biden as the clear frontrunner, just like they did for Hillary Clinton back in the summer of 2016, signs of growing dissatisfaction with Biden, who has spent the last five months cowering in his basement in Rehobeth, abound, especially as more Americans grow weary of the progressives insistence on economy-crushing social distancing measures, even in areas where case numbers have declined substantially. They continue to hysterically condemn President Trump for causing 160,000 deaths (the number of Americans who have succumbed to the virus so far) without saying one word about the lapses in Wuhan that opened Pandora’s Box in the first place. 

    As spread slows dramatically from New Jersey to Arizona to California, Americans consistently rate President Trump as “better” on the economy than Biden, though some carefully worded polls have pointed to a surge in public frustration with a federal response that has been characterized as slow and inept.

    But through it all, as the mainstream press doubled-down on its progressive slant – openly referring to violent rioters as “peaceful protesters” and reporting on ultra-progressive concepts like “white supremacy” and “the patriarchy” as if these theoretical interpretations are indisputable realities – conservative outlets like Fox News have picked up steam.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And this week, even the New York Times is being forced to admit that – love it or hate it – Fox News is America’s most popular news organization in television. And as the NYT’s Michael Grynbaum reported, while Fox has struggled with several recent “scandals”, things at the cable news channel “have never been better,” as it maintained its ratings dominance in June and July. And not just for cable: for all of television.

    In one sense, this has been a difficult period for Fox News: a star anchor fired after being accused of sexual harassment, a lawsuit depicting a misogynist workplace, a top writer exposed as a racist internet troll, advertiser boycotts and outrage after Tucker Carlson called protesters “criminal mobs” and questioned the patriotism of a senator who lost her legs in Iraq.

    In another sense, business has never been better.

    In June and July, Fox News was the highest-rated television channel in the prime-time hours of 8 to 11 p.m. Not just on cable. Not just among news networks. All of television. The average live Fox News viewership in those hours outstripped cable rivals like CNN, MSNBC and ESPN, as well as the broadcast networks ABC, CBS and NBC, according to Nielsen.

    And nowhere is Fox more dominant than the prime-time slot, between 8 to 11, where Martha McCallum, Tucker Carlson and Sean Hannity rule the day. And even the return of sports didn’t shake Fox’s grip on an audience that has tuned in to its brand of news during a crisis that many complain has been politicized by both the left and the right.

    Of course, Fox isn’t the only news channel that’s benefited; news consumption is up overall. But Fox has seen by far the biggest benefit as CNN, MSNBC, CBS, ABC, NBC etc all seem to speak with one voice that’s controlled by radical leftists masquerading as journalists.

    Even the return of live sports did little to stop the momentum: The Fox News programs hosted by Mr. Carlson and Sean Hannity drew more live viewers than competing baseball and basketball games, including a Yankees-Nationals matchup on Opening Day.

    Fox News’s big summer has been boosted by a rise in audience for news programming in general, an increase driven by interest in the pandemic, civil rights protests and the presidential election. ABC, CBS, and NBC, meanwhile, have more reruns on the summer schedule; the coronavirus has suspended most TV productions; and viewers are being lured away by streaming services and on-demand Hollywood movies.

    But the Fox News ratings also demonstrate the size and resilience of America’s audience for pro-Trump opinion, and the loyalty of Fox News viewers who shrug off the controversies that routinely swirl around the network.

    As Lachlan Murdoch bragged during last week’s earnings call, Fox’s advertising revenue is actually up over the past year. And though the NYT doesn’t come out and say clearly, the various “scandals” being pushed by leftists surrounding Trump’s handling of the virus simply don’t land with conservatives.

    In other words, conservatives don’t blame Trump for the outbreak like liberals do.

    “Massive news events that conservatives view through a highly partisan lens are driving the ratings, and none of the controversies really land with loyal Fox News viewers,” said Nicole Hemmer, a scholar at Columbia University and a historian of American conservative media.

    Lachlan Murdoch, the executive chairman of Fox News’s parent company, bragged on an earnings call last week about the network’s “astronomical” ratings. He also said its ad revenue was up from a year ago — a reminder that Fox News, for all the flak it takes from critics, politicians and the advertisers that fled Mr. Carlson, remains an unrivaled profit engine for the Murdoch empire.

    But perhaps the biggest reason why Fox has enjoyed such heightened popularity can be found in the NYT story itself, as America’s paper of record claims hydroxychloroquine has been “proven” to be “useless and even dangerous”. The medication has been in use treating malaria patients for more than half a century, and a study claiming it caused serious medical complications in COVID-19 patients was later corrected.

    Complaints that Fox News prime-time hosts downplayed the coronavirus — and, in the case of Laura Ingraham, encouraged the use of hydroxychloroquine, a drug shown to be useless, and even dangerous, for Covid-19 patients — made little difference.

    But the NYT doesn’t care, and why? Because that’s the narrative that the NYT, and Fox News’s main TV-based competitors, are working together to propagate.

  • Escape From New York: Wealthy Residents Flee In Droves As The City Degenerates Into A Hellhole
    Escape From New York: Wealthy Residents Flee In Droves As The City Degenerates Into A Hellhole

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/11/2020 – 23:25

    Authored by Michael Snyder via TheMostImportantNews.com,

    Hundreds of thousands of wealthy residents have already left New York City, and more are leaving every day as America’s biggest city rapidly degenerates into a hellhole.  This is incredibly sad to watch, because in many ways New York had been an incredible success story over the past several decades. 

    The 1970s and 1980s were nightmarish times for the city, but over the past several decades it was transformed into a virtual paradise for the wealthy and famous.  Crime rates absolutely plummeted, the city was given a dramatic facelift and a booming financial community brought an unprecedented amount of wealth into New York. 

    But now many of the old problems are starting to come back again, and a lot of wealthy New Yorkers have decided that it is time to look for greener pastures.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Of course the COVID-19 pandemic has been the primary motivation for a lot of the wealthy individuals that have been fleeing the city.  According to the New York Times, there was a mass exodus of 420,000 New Yorkers between March 1st and May 1st

    Roughly 5 percent of residents — or about 420,000 people — left the city between March 1 and May 1. In the city’s very wealthiest blocks, in neighborhoods like the Upper East Side, the West Village, SoHo and Brooklyn Heights, residential population decreased by 40 percent or more, while the rest of the city saw comparably modest changes.

    Can you imagine 40 percent of your neighborhood leaving in just two months?

    Wealthy people can often pick up and move a lot more easily than the rest of us, because many of them are not tied to traditional jobs and a lot of them already own second homes.  And it is definitely understandable that a lot of them would have wanted to leave during the peak of the pandemic in the New York area, but now that infection rates are a lot lower they still aren’t coming back and this has become a hot political issue for New York politicians.

    Just a few days ago, New York Governor Andrew Cuomo lamented the fact that this mass exodus is hitting tax revenues really hard

    A single percent of New York’s population pays half of the state’s taxes, he said, “and they’re the most mobile people on the globe.”

    “I literally talk to people all day long, who are now in their Hamptons house, who also lived here, or in their Hudson Valley house or in their Connecticut weekend house,” Cuomo continued. “They’re not coming back right now. And you know what else they’re thinking, if I stay there, they pay a lower income tax because they don’t pay the New York City surcharge. So, that would be a bad place if we had to go there.”

    But New York City Mayor Bill de Blasio is taking a completely different tone.  At this point, he doesn’t seem to care whether the wealthy come back or not

    Mayor de Blasio couldn’t care less if wealthy people leave the city for good because of the coronavirus pandemic, telling reporters on Friday that he won’t bend over backward for the one percent to return to NYC.

    In a briefing from City Hall, de Blasio for a second day in a row sneered at Gov. Cuomo’s suggestion that the Big Apple’s ballooning deficit can only be bridged if rich people who fled at the outset of the pandemic come back and start paying taxes again.

    Mayor de Blasio can continue to deny reality if he wishes, but without a doubt the lack of revenue is starting to have a major impact.

    The sanitation budget was cut by more than 100 million dollars, and at this point giant mountains of trash are starting to pile up around the city

    Photos show bags filled with leftover food scraps, cans and bottles piled high on sidewalks or overflowing out of corner litter baskets.

    Dead rats have been found among the waste and raccoons have been spotted climbing out of garbage cans.

    At one time such scenes would have been unthinkable in New York City, but now they have become a daily reality.

    Meanwhile, crime rates are absolutely skyrocketing.  In fact, the number of shootings in the city during the month of July was up 177 percent compared to the same month a year ago…

    The NYPD recorded 244 shootings in July 2020 versus 88 in July 2019, which is a 177% increase. Shootings rose in July in every borough, police said. Through July 31, the city has experienced a 72% spike in shootings compared to the same time last year—772 versus 450 in 2019.

    Murders in July rose 59% compared to last year with 54 in 2020 versus 34 a year ago. Burglaries were up 31% percent year-over-year. Police said 309 more auto thefts were reported for the month compared to a year earlier.

    This explosion of criminal activity is being called a “crime wave”, and even the wealthiest neighborhoods are being hit hard

    New York City’s wealthiest neighborhood is grappling with a spike in armed robberies, new data reveals.

    Manhattan’s Upper East Side has seen 27 robberies over the past four weeks – a 286 percent increase when compared to the same period last year, according to the NYPD.

    Some of the wealthiest people on the entire planet call the Upper East Side home, and they paid a lot of money for their homes so that they would be insulated from this sort of thing.

    But now even their neighborhoods aren’t safe.

    Over on the Upper West Side, a different sort of problem is making headlines

    Hundreds of homeless people who have been put up in luxury hotels on Manhattan’s Upper West Side by the city as part of its efforts to prevent COVID-19 outbreaks in shelters are terrifying residents by urinating, sleeping and taking drugs in the streets.

    In July, it emerged that 139 of the city’s iconic hotels – which had been forced closed for months – had agreed to take in homeless people for $175 per person, per night as part of a scheme by the city to try to avoid a breakout of COVID-19 in homeless shelters.

    Can you imagine paying millions of dollars for your home and seeing homeless people urinate and take drugs right on the sidewalk in front of your building on a regular basis?

    Even worse, it has been revealed that quite a few of the individuals that are being housed in these luxury hotels are registered sex offenders

    Of greatest concern for parents are the sex offenders — 10 are living at the Belleclaire as of Thursday, the state sex offender registry said. That’s just one block from PS 87’s playground.

    And of those ten, there are four that actually victimized children

    There are also four offenders whose victims were children: Ronald Butler, 62, convicted in June 2013 of raping a 16-year-old girl; Eddie Daniel, 59, convicted of abusing a 10-year-old in 2011; Jonathan Evans, 29, convicted of abusing a 6-year-old; and Michael Hughes, 55, convicted of possessing child pornography in 2007.

    This is what life is like for the wealthy in New York City in 2020.

    No wonder so many of them have left and have no plans to come back.

    Sadly, similar things are happening in major cities all over the nation, and what we have witnessed so far is just the beginning.

    I certainly don’t blame anyone for wanting to leave New York.  If I was living there, I would want to leave too.

    All over America, major cities that are being run by Democrats are being transformed into hellholes, but most of those Democrats just keep winning elections over and over again.

    When will we ever learn?

  • Gundlach, Who Correctly Called The 2016 Presidential Election, Predicts Trump Will Win Again
    Gundlach, Who Correctly Called The 2016 Presidential Election, Predicts Trump Will Win Again

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/11/2020 – 23:05

    Back in early, DoubleLine’s Jeff Gundlach made a prediction that was viewed as anathema in “serious” circles: he said that Donald Trump would win the 2016 presidential election. And much to the chagrin of all his “serious” colleagues, he was proven correct which is why earlier today we said that the one thing we were most curious about from Gundlach’s latest webcast was who he thinks would win this time around.

    Well, we got the answer, and once again if Gundlach is correct a whole lot of “experts” (not to mention pollsters) will again be humiliated on Nov 4, because according to the bond king Trump will once again emerge victorious.

    One would know it based on such online betting sites as PredictIt (which incidentally are remarkably illiquid, and extremely easy to manipulate by anyone with modestly deep pockets), which show Biden as a clear favorite with a roughly 15 point lead…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … but then again the “experts” and odds in 2016 also said Trump had no chance of victory.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So it makes sense to ignore the pollsters, the online bookies and the exports who were dead wrong in 2016, and focus on those who called it right.

    With that in mind, during a Q&A on his Tuesday afternoon webcast, Gundlach said that “my base case is actually that Donald Trump will win re-election,” adding that he’d “bet against” former Vice President Joe Biden defeating Trump in November.

    “I think polls are very, very squishy right now because of the highly toxic political environment in which we live,” the 60-year-old billionaire said. Gundlach said he’s come across data suggesting that about “two-thirds of conservatives or moderate conservatives say that they have lied about their support for Donald Trump either directly or by omission.”

    “I just think there’s a lot, a lot of time here. There’s going to be twists and turns,” Gundlach added.

    Gundlach also voiced another contrarian view when he said that he expects “significant” volatility for markets, something which markets generally don’t as it is now conventional wisdom that whoever wins will be good for risk assets.

    “This go-around, I expect much greater volatility around the election as the progressive policies, so-called, of tremendous increased deficit spending for basically wealth manipulation, that could get pretty heated, and we’ll see what happens.”

    Finally, Gundlach did not spare criticism for Biden’s just announced running mate, saying said he didn’t think Kamala Harris was a “good pick,” adding that Harris is “maybe a little too charismatic.”

    “She might be a little bit dominant with her personality, but I don’t have any particular thoughts on Kamala Harris. I’m not surprised that she’s the pick.”

    Needless to say, if Gundlach is right again, there will be a whole lot more of this from the “resistance” who will then have another 4 years – in collaboration with the deep state – to come up with bizarre conspiracy theories “explaining” why they were dead wrong yet again.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    One final observation non-political from the bond king: with the S&P now trading at all time highs, and more than 1,000 points above the March low, Gundlach remains confident that in the remaining 4 and a half months, the market will crash again, and that “we will see the March lows again this year.”

  • Precious Metal Pummeling Continues In Early Asia Trading
    Precious Metal Pummeling Continues In Early Asia Trading

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/11/2020 – 22:45

    As Bloomberg’s Mark Cranfield noted this evening, small reversals are just not gold’s style after a major advance (typically somewhere between a 15% and 20% drop is more common), and the selling pressure on precious metals has continued as Japan and then China opens this evening with Silver futures back at a $23 handle and Gold futures back below $1900.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Sending the gold/silver ratio soaring…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    After finding support at 2017 lows…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As Peter Schiff noted earlier:

    Nothing goes up every single day, and gold and silver are not going to be the exception to that rule. There are no bull markets that are up every day. You’re always going to have down days.”

    Peter said the fundamentals are better than any he’s ever seen.

    The Federal Reserve is printing trillions of dollars. Fed Chair Jerome Powell has said it isn’t even thinking about thinking about raising interest rates. And there are reports that the central bank is set to make a commitment to ramping up inflation. All of this is extremely bullish for gold.

    In a CNBC interview, US Global Investors CEO Frank Holmes said he can see $4,000 gold in the relatively near future with G-20 finance ministers and central banks “working together like a cartel and they’re all printing trillions of dollars.”

    We’ve not seen this level where central banks are printing money at a zero interest rate. At zero interest rates, gold becomes a very, very attractive asset class,” Holmes said.

    You have to focus on the fundamentals. A lot of investors aren’t doing that.

    They’re not looking into the future and realizing the monetary fiscal policies that have already driven gold past $2,000 are going to continue and drive it past $3,000, $4,000, $5,000… And therein lies the opportunity.”

    Finally, we note that Central banks added another net 18.1 tons of gold to their reserves in June, according to the latest data from the World Gold Council, who also found that 20% of central banks globally plan to expand their gold holdings in 2020.

    Factors related to the economic environment – such as negative interest rates – were overwhelming drivers of these planned purchases. This was supported by gold’s role as a safe haven in times of crisis, as well as its lack of default risk.

    This year’s surge in precious metals, as Peter Schiff warns, is not a happy occasion because it really portends some real big problems on the horizon. I mean, most Americans don’t have any gold. There is severe economic hardship that the vast majority of Americans are going to be enduring, and gold is basically letting you know that that hardship is on the way.”

     

  • Food Bank Strains Emerge As Economy Falls Off Fiscal Cliff 
    Food Bank Strains Emerge As Economy Falls Off Fiscal Cliff 

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/11/2020 – 22:25

    The latest economic data suggest the US recovery stalled. One look at the Citi US econ surprise index, as of this week, shows the recovery ran out of steam last month. A fiscal cliff is already underway, set to enter the second week on Friday (Aug. 14) as tens of millions of Americans are unemployed and have yet to receive their stimulus checks. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The recovery, so far, is a massive economic sugar rush, entirely a function of the Trump administration on a reckless spending spree. One way the administration can artificially supercharge consumption is through issuing direct transfer payments to the working poor. The extra money has been used by households to pay down credit card bills, put food on the table, and pay housing expenses, while others used the free money to buy automobiles and FANG stocks. 

    President Trump signed an executive order over the weekend to fund another round of stimulus checks of approximately $400 per week, a reduction from the $600 federal aid seen in the first round from March to the end of July. 

    Massive federal spending has transformed America into a welfare state under the GOP watch. Tea Party politicians aren’t pleased with the Republican establishment’s wild spending spree. 

    With a fiscal cliff coming up on the second week, tens of millions of folks are unable to consume because they are insolvent and jobless, and their amount of consumption is dependent on the government. We’ve noted before, a quarter of all household income is derived from the government. And with no stimulus checks in the mail, that means Americans are returning to food banks: 

    Claudia Raymer, who manages a network of food-security groups in Ohio County, West Virginia, told Bloomberg when stimulus checks stopped arriving in late July, there was an immediate impact on households, resulting in rising food bank activity among the working poor.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The fiscal cliff will be more damaging in lower-income communities (than major metros), such as small towns in West Virginia, where folks were being paid handsomely by the federal government to sit at home. The problem is, once the payments end, consumption plunges, and the local communities return to a recessionary environment. With federal aid already running out for the stimulus program, the fiscal cliff has already been realized in West Virginia: 

    “We’ve definitely already seen food-security needs increase, just in a week, since the extra unemployment has ended,” Raymer said.

    Treasury Secretary Steven Mnuchin said Monday the next round of stimulus checks could take a couple of weeks to distribute, which would suggest households might not receive their stimulus checks until the end of August. 

    Days before the stimulus program ended (late July), a sizeable food bank line appeared in Baltimore, Maryland. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The economic crisis is far from over. Households are entirely screwed as depressionary unemployment levels will continue into the election. Many folks are dependent on direct transfer payments from the government and food banks for survival. Who would’ve ever thought this would be the case in the “greatest economy ever.” 

  • Tucker: We Need A Principled Anti-Lockdown Movement
    Tucker: We Need A Principled Anti-Lockdown Movement

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/11/2020 – 22:05

    Authored by Jeffrey Tucker via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    Shell-shocked is a good way to describe the mood in the U.S. for a good part of the Spring of 2020. Most of us never thought it could happen here. I certainly did not, even though I’ve been writing about pandemic lockdown plans for 15 years. I knew the plans were on the shelf, which is egregious, but I always thought something would stop it from happening. The courts. Public opinion. Bill of Rights. Tradition. The core rowdiness of American culture. Political squeamishness. The availability of information. 

    Something would prevent it. So I believed. So most of us believed. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Still it happened, all in a matter of days, March 12-16, 2020, and boom; it was over! We were locked down. Schools shut. Bars and restaurants closed. No international visitors. Theaters shuttered. Conferences forcibly ended. Sports stopped. We were told to stay home and watch movies…for two weeks to flatten the curve. Then two weeks stretched to five months. How lucky for those who lived in the states that resisted the pressure and stayed open, but even for them, they couldn’t visit relatives in other states due to quarantine restrictions and so on. 

    Lockdowns ended American life as we knew it just five months ago, for a virus that 99.4-6% of those who contract it shake off, for which the median age of death is 78-80 with comorbidities, for which there is not a single verified case of reinfection on the planet, for which international successes in managing this relied on herd immunity and openness. 

    Still the politicians who had become dictators couldn’t admit such astonishing failure so they kept the restrictions in place as a way of covering up what they had done. 

    That shock of Spring has now turned to a Summer of wickedness, with everyone pointing fingers at everyone else for the sorry state of life. Patience has run out and a national viciousness has taken its place. It is evident not only online but in person where strangers scream at each other for behaving in ways in which they disapprove. 

    What many states are calling “open” today would have been called “closed” six months ago. Sports are rare. Theaters aren’t open. In some places, you still can’t go to gyms or eat inside. Mask mandates are everywhere, and mask enforcers too. People are ratting out their neighbors, sending drones to ferret out house parties, and lashing out at each other in public places. 

    In a mere five months, lockdowners have manufactured a new form of social structure in which everyone is expected to treat everyone else as a deadly contagion. Even more preposterously, people have come to believe that if you come closer than six feet of another person, a disease spontaneously appears and spreads.

    America has become an extremely ugly place. This is what lockdowns did. 

    All of this has occurred in the midst of the greatest political divide in many generations. Oddly, you almost predict a person’s politics based on their attitude toward the virus, as if sitting political figures are responsible for creating or controlling pathogens that have been part of the human experience since we first walked and talked. The politicization of this disease has been a terrible noise that has distracted from the wise disease management that characterized the American way for more than a century. 

    But the American people support this, right? I’m not so sure. It’s true that the TV and online media are blaring panic all day every day. If that’s where you get your information, it surely must feel like a plague. There is also the problem that people feel tremendously powerless right now. They have been locked down, silenced, humiliated, brutalized. The few attempts to get out and protest the lockdowns were greeted with jeers and derision by mainstream media. But it turned out that this was because they were protesting the wrong thing. When the protests against police brutality and racism swept the country, the media wholly approved. Yes, it all felt like gaslighting

    Where precisely does American opinion stand on lockdowns today? The polls one cannot trust: people know exactly what they are supposed to say to pollsters during a police-state lockdown. It’s usually a good guess that one-third of Americans take a position that is more-or-less consistent with human liberty – it’s not a fixed group and it shifts depending on the issue – so that’s probably a good guess now. 

    The incredible frenzy of the lying media has confused vast numbers. A poll revealed that many Americans think that 9% of us have died from C-19 whereas it is really 0.04%.

    So yes, we have a propaganda problem, starting with the New York Times, which just today…

    …demanded “more aggressive shutdowns than have been carried out in the past. The United States has not had a true national lockdown, shuttering only about half the country, compared with 90 percent in other countries with more successful outbreak control.”

    None of which is true. This is pure ideological propaganda. The people who are saying true things seem to be only the 1% vs. the barrage of nonsense coming from media culture today. 

    We see almost no discussion in the mainstream press of the empirical evidence at home and abroad that the lockdowns make no sense from a medical and economic perspective. Medical experts for many decades have warned against disturbing social functioning in the event of disease. Preserving freedom has always been the policy priority: 1949-521957-581968-69, and 2005. The American revolution itself took place in the midst of a smallpox outbreak. Liberalism arose during centuries of pandemics

    And yet here we are. 

    This country needs a serious anti-lockdown movement, one that is not just political but cultural and intellectual, one that is deeply educated on history, philosophy, law, economics, and all sciences, and can rally around traditional American civic postulates concerning individual freedom and the limits of governments, and also around universal principles of human rights. If liberty means anything, it means that we are not locked down. It means, moreover, that lockdowns are unconscionable.

    What should this movement – which need not be formally organized – study, believe, and teach?

    Because property rights are the first violated in lockdown, the movement needs to embrace and champion the right of private ownership and control: of businesses, homes, and ourselves. The liberal tradition has long affirmed this principle, and it is nothing but appalling that the lockdowns took place as if private property doesn’t exist. Suddenly everything and everyone belonged to the state, and it would be the state to declare what is or is not essential, or even what is elective vs. nonelective for your medical care. 

    It should embrace the freedom to choose our associations, since that is what came under attack next: we couldn’t gather in groups, hold conferences, go to the movies, do anything not “socially distant” (I’m so sick of that phrase, wth dubious origins, that I could barely type it), or even go to another state to visit friends and relatives. 

    This movement needs to celebrate and defend religious freedom, since, incredibly, most houses of worship were forcibly closed by government. The modern idea of freedom came about in the late Middle Ages when exhaustion from religious wars gradually gave rise to the idea of tolerance. Religious toleration was the first great freedom that came to be codified in law. It’s stunning that it was so flagrantly violated this year. 

    It must come to terms with free enterprise and the innovation that comes with it. How much wealth and creativity has been lost in the lockdowns? It’s unfathomable. The biggest victims have been small and medium-sized businesses, whereas the large tech firms have thrived. To start and manage a commercial enterprise is a human right, the realization of which was the great achievement of modern life, as it spread prosperity throughout the world and lifted up the world’s people from the state of nature and to levels of the entrenched hierarchies of old. 

    Part of this liberal ideal is free trade, which has come under fire from both the left and right. Don’t forget that Donald Trump kicked off this dictatorial frenzy with his sudden and shocking bans of travel from China and Europe, which resulted in a frenzied and frantic mass crowding of airports in the days following. He did it with a stroke of a pen, overriding all his advisors. He still brags about it. 

    How much did his extreme reaction here inspire governors to do the same? Of course his actions reflect his persistent isolationism on not only trade but immigration too. Even now, Trump is refusing to allow foreign workers into the U.S. (except for emergency cases) because he incorrectly believes this will help the American job market. It’s an outrage: free enterprise entitles the employment of anyone from anywhere. This is a policy that is good for everyone. 

    So long as we are talking about freedom fundamentals, let’s talk about masks. They have become exactly what the New England Journal of Medicine called them: a talisman. They are symbols of social commitment and political loyalty. A free society rallies around individual choice, so if masks make a person feel safe, or if it makes them feel they are keeping others safe from their breath, fine. But when people attack others for resisting wearing them, and are apparently upset at the seeming appearance of rebellion from rules, this is imposition and intolerance – perhaps understandable given the times, but still illiberal. 

    Laws requiring face coverings in public would never have been tolerated even six months ago. And yet here we are, not only with laws but a growing number of recruits within the public to enforce them with appalling rudeness. It’s hardly the first time in history. American sumptuary laws in Colonial times mandated that people not dress in fancy clothes for reasons of piety and social conformism. Part of the capitalist revolution included the freedom to dress as one wants and the mass availability of fashion for everyone. The mandatory mask movement and its shock troops among the public is but a revival of puritanism. 

    The lockdowns crushed the economic prospects of millions, and government attempted to make up for that with wild spending of other people’s money and an unprecedented use of the printing press, as if government can somehow paper over the destruction it caused. Therefore, the anti-lockdown movement needs a commitment to fiscal sanity and sound money. We now know that a government with the capacity to create unlimited amounts of paper money cannot be constrained. This needs to be fixed. 

    As for health, the topic or excuse that unleashed the lockdowns in the first place, we surely should learn from this experience that politics and medicine need to be separated with a high wall. We have medical professionals who are traditionally in charge of mitigating disease, and they do so in line with their own professional associations and best judgement. Politics should never override the doctor/patient relationship, nor presume to know what is better for us than our own physicians. 

    On the matter of education, governors all over the country cruelly locked down all the schools, though there is near-zero threat to kids from the virus and there is no verified case of a child passing C-19 to an adult. Perhaps a small silver lining is that we have learned more about how parents can exercise more control over education than they have previously had. The anti-lockdown movement needs to embrace a multiplicity of educational alternatives including the possibility of full privatization so that education can again be part of the free enterprise matrix. 

    It’s true that anti-lockdown carries a negative connotation. Is there a better word to convey the positive dimension? My preference: liberalism. Progressives have abandoned it. It is also correct from a historical and international perspective. Liberalism and modernity are inextricably linked in history, says Benjamin Constant. A liberalism of the future needs to be prepared to understand, advocate, and fight for freedom in a non-lockdown world. No exceptions. 

    Which takes us to the final point. Whether this movement is working in the realms of academia, culture, journalism, or politics, there is an absolute urgency that it exercise unrelenting moral courage and integrity. Ferociously. It should be uncompromising on crucial points. It must be willing to speak even when it is unfashionable to do so, even when the media is screaming the opposite, even when the Twitter mob floods your notifications, even when you are shamed for thinking for yourself. 

    This time around, as you have surely noticed, even the voices of good people with good ideas fell silent in fear. This fear must be banished. The blowback against this despotism will come but it is not enough. We need character, integrity, courage, and truth, and this perhaps matters more than ideology and knowledge. Knowledge without the willingness and courage to speak is useless, because (as E.C. Harwood taught us) for integrity there is no substitute. 

    In the end, the case for unlocking society is a spiritual matter. What is your life worth and how do you want to live it? How important are the hard-won freedoms you exercise daily? What of the lives and liberties of others? These are everything. Freedom has never prevailed without passionate and courageous voices to defend it. We have the tools now, many more than before. They can throttle us but can’t finally shut us down. The notion that we would fail to speak for fear of the Twitter mob is absurd. 

    This movement, whether it is called anti-lockdown or just plain liberalism, must reject the wickedness and compulsion of this current moment in American life. It needs to counter the brutalism of lockdowns. It needs to speak and act with humane understanding and high regard for social functioning under freedom, and the hope for the future that comes with it.

    The enemies of freedom and human rights have revealed themselves for the world to see. Let there be justice. The well-being of us all is at stake. 

  • University Of Georgia Suggests "Wearing A Face Mask" During Sex
    University Of Georgia Suggests “Wearing A Face Mask” During Sex

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/11/2020 – 21:45

    Just when you thought all universities were good for was churning out uninformed Marxists, the University of Georgia breaks that stigma by offering up some groundbreaking sexual health advice in the midst of the coronavirus pandemic. 

    The University had written a section called “Covid-19 Considerations” on its University Health Center website several days ago, but the document was pulled down after the university was subjected to ridicule for its content, which actually suggested “wearing a face mask during sex.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Heavy breathing and panting can further the spread of the virus and wearing a mask can reduce the risk,” the entry on the site had said.

    The site had also suggested practicing “solo sex”, which we’re guessing is now the gender-neutral politically-correct-approved non-binary non-triggering term for what used to be called masturbating. “You are your safest sex partner,” the site said. 

    The site offered up other confidence inspiring notes like “Wash your hands for 20 seconds before and after sexual activity” and “We do not know if Covid-19 can be spread through vaginal or anal sex.”

    Happy to see that tuition money going to good use…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, peers at the University of Maryland have disagreed and said that wearing a mask is “not likely to prevent transmission if one of the partners has COVID-19” on their website.

    UGA spokesman Greg Trevor told the Athens Banner-Herald

    “The information was consistent with language that appears on multiple health and medical sites across the country, including the Mayo Clinic. However, when the information was mocked, ridiculed and criticized on social media, we decided to take it down.” 

  • Pennsylvania Is Playing Politics With Drug Rationing
    Pennsylvania Is Playing Politics With Drug Rationing

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/11/2020 – 21:25

    Authored by Zachary Yost via The Mises Institute,

    “Never let a crisis go to waste,” the old adage goes, and the coronavirus fiasco has demonstrated this principle in action more times than one can count. From declarations of veritable society-wide house arrest to crazed government spending and monetary policy, there has been no shortage of opportunistic actors working to live out their dreams of power and dominion over others that “normal” times would not allow.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Another such instance of gleeful advantage taking has come to light in the form of the Pennsylvania Department of Health’s “Ethical Allocation Framework for Emerging Treatments of COVID-19” guideline, a document that barely conceals its authors’ desire to use the current fiasco as an opportunity to engage in their own schemes of egalitarian social engineering.

    Just as a reminder of the kind of central planners we are dealing with, this is the same Pennsylvania Department of Health that decreed on May 12 that nursing homes “must continue to take new admissions, if appropriate beds are available, and a suspected or confirmed positive for COVID-19 is not a reason to deny admission.” Months later, nearly 70 percent of coronavirus fatalities in the state have occurred in nursing homes.

    Not being content with causing such a disaster, the state health department has issued guidance on how healthcare facilities should ration the limited supply of the new drug Remdesivir in the event that there are not enough doses to go around, but notes that the guidelines should apply to any scarce form of treatment. While certainly an unpleasant subject to address, it is true that in the face of scarcity the limited supply of Remdesivir or any other treatment will need to be rationed and that some kind of method of choosing will be needed. Scarcity is simply a fact of life that must be dealt with. However, because the distribution of Remdisivir has been taken over by the federal government, which distributes it to state governments, which in turn distribute it to healthcare providers, the process has unavoidably become political.

    Putting all the jargon aside, the guideline is very clear about several points. First, it is not considered acceptable to distribute care via a random lottery, or on a first-come-first-served basis. Rather, healthcare providers must take into consideration “community-benefit” when rationing care and the department recommends the use of a weighted lottery system.

    As you can see, the example lottery that the health department provides uses three different criteria to determine how a patient’s lottery chance is weighted: membership in a disadvantaged community, being an essential worker, and likelihood of death in the next year.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While the state’s determination of who is and who is not an essential worker is arbitrary and has been full of problems, one can at least see the logic behind such a consideration, as well as for those patients who are not likely to live much longer, although one must question where the state gets the authority to dictate such things to hospitals.

    What raises the most concern is the idea that members of “disadvantaged communities” should be given a better chance at receiving treatment than others.

    According to the guidance, because “low-income communities and certain racial/ethnic minorities” are being disproportionately burdened by the coronavirus, the end goal of public health is served by benefitting some groups over others.

    According to the guidance, “the rationale is that a core goal of public health is to redress inequities that make health and safety less accessible to disadvantaged groups.”

    One might have thought that the main goal of public health was to save as many lives as possible. But instead, it seems that the state department of health considers the emergency room to be the perfect place to start “mitigating the structural inequities that cause certain communities to bear the greatest burden during the pandemic.”

    This formulation makes it unclear what the guidance means when it states that the first goal of the ethical framework is “to safeguard the public’s health by allocating scarce treatments to maximize community benefit.” Does community benefit mean saving as many lives as possible? Or is it some kind of grievance studies conception of equality where arriving at a more “equally distributed” survival rate based on race and socioeconomic status is the goal?

    One can certainly argue that certain populations do not have very good access to healthcare resources, but it seems outrageous to think that the time to attempt to remedy such inequality is when triaging patients.

    Similarly concerning is the way the guidance recommends that the treating physicians be removed from the rationing process and that it be left in the hands of hospital bureaucrats instead, effectively tying doctors’ hands to treat their patients. Is this the kind of state-run healthcare that we have to look forward to in the future? Doctors as helpless as their patients as bureaucrats “assess” a patient’s social suitability to be worthy of treatment?

    The guidance goes on to recommend some procedures for how membership in a “disadvantaged community” should be determined. After noting that both members of low-income communities and racial minorities have been adversely affected by the virus and therefore deserve an increased chance of receiving treatment, the racial component drops entirely from consideration in recommendations, no doubt because such discrimination would be highly illegal and result in a torrent of lawsuits against the state and any hospital foolish enough to try it. The guideline is explicit that “no one is excluded from access based on age, disability, religion, race, ethnicity, national origin, immigration status, gender, sexual orientation, or gender identity and to ensure that no one is denied access based on stereotypes, perceived quality of life, or judgments about a person’s worth.” However, one can’t help but think that if racial discrimination were not illegal the logic of this guidance would dictate that it be undertaken in the name of “equality.”

    What that list is lacking is a prohibition on discrimination based on socioeconomic status, which is the method the guidance suggests should be used for the purposes of weighing the lottery. Specifically, it recommends the use of the Area Deprivation Index, which is based on data from the 2015 American Community Survey. Hospitals would use the index’s Neighborhood Atlas to enter a patient’s address and determine if they are a disadvantaged community member.

    One can’t help but feel that such a system is arbitrary to the extreme. When I entered my address into the Neighborhood Atlas I discovered that no one in my neighborhood would receive any weighted advantage if Remdisivir were needed. However, when I Google mapped the distance between my home and the nearest sector considered to be disadvantaged, I discovered that it was a mere two-minute drive away. Can anything based on something so arbitrary as five-year-old aggregated census block data be considered a useful tool for the fair rationing of treatment?

    This entire scheme is just a taste of the ways medical care would be infected with politics if it were to be run by the government. In a system of socialized medicine would we see similar redistributionist schemes of rationing introduced? No doubt, many people of all political persuasions would view it as a fertile field for attempts at social engineering. Similarly, it is not hard to see politicians scheming to ensure that favored constituents and voting blocs have access to care at the expense of their opponent’s supporters, or that whole classes of people are purposefully and consciously disadvantaged based on whoever holds the keys to power at the moment.

    The middle of a pandemic is no time for social engineering, but it is also not a time for state involvement in healthcare to begin with. That involvement has led to thousands of nursing home patients dying and has now led to a blatant redistributionist drug-rationing scheme. Further involvement is only going to make matters worse and continue to poison a crucial aspect of our lives with politics even more than it already is.

  • Mississippi School Reopens Only To Send 100 Students Home When Teacher Appears Sick
    Mississippi School Reopens Only To Send 100 Students Home When Teacher Appears Sick

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/11/2020 – 21:05

    School districts across the nation are on edge now that we’re entering mid-August into September, when K-12 schools typically open. And during more normal times Fall sports like football are already in full swing in terms of practices, which in some places, for example in most parts of Texas, appears to be resuming as normal.

    Many districts especially in the South are offering an ‘online option’ especially for middle through high school students while simultaneously opening their doors, albeit with strict safety measures in place, such as temperature checks and the wearing of masks.

    But one Mississippi public school opened its doors as scheduled in early August, only to now be living the nightmare that most fear: “Roughly 100 students were sent home from a southern Mississippi high school on Tuesday after coming into contact with a teacher who was exhibiting mild COVID-19 symptoms,” The Hill reports.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Gulfport High School in Gulfport, Mississippi, via WLOX News.

    Amid raging school board debates and varying opinions among administrators over re-opening, many who say schools should stay closed altogether this fall argue that the moment a cluster of COVID-19 confirmations emerges in any given school they are going to shut their doors anyway.

    In this latest case in Gulfport, Mississippi it’s not even as yet clear whether the teacher actually has coronavirus. But while a test is pending students were sent home anyway “out of an abundance of caution to keep everyone safe,” the district said in a statement.

    Any students and faculty that had contact with the teacher will enter a 14-day quarantine – again estimated at about 100 – not returning to campus, pending the teacher’s test results return, The Hill continues. In the case of a negative test, the school said classes will resume as normal. The school says social distancing measures have been in place. 

    The whole episode presents a serious dilemma which high schools and hesitant colleges are sure to experience: assuming a school reopens, how much panic will ensue the moment students and teachers naturally catch common colds or other viruses? 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Stock image: Infection Control Tech

    Outbreaks of various types of illnesses, or coughs, or also bacterial illnesses like Strep throat tend to be all-too-common on school campuses particularly in the fall and winter months.

    It begs the question: will schools go on lockdown every time someone catches a common cold?

    Add to this scenario the concern that many doctors and health officials have expressed, namely there’s a greater likelihood that after multiple months of much of the nation staying at home and social distancing, people’s immune systems tend to be much weaker, and thus could experience a ‘shock’ of sorts (in the form of illness) the moment individuals are back among crowds.

  • Commercial Real Estate Bankruptcy Legislation Introduced
    Commercial Real Estate Bankruptcy Legislation Introduced

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/11/2020 – 20:45

    Two weeks ago we reproted that “in an uprecedented move, Congress proposes taxpayer-funded bailout Of $550 billion CMBS industry.” And now this: according to Chain Store Age, legislation has been introduced that would make “meaningful” temporary changes to bankruptcy laws, related to commercial real estate.

    The bill, introduced by Sen. Thom Tillis (R-NC) and supported by the International Council of Shopping Centers, would allow for the facilitation of commercial tenant rent deferrals and providing additional flexibility for small business tenants that file Chapter 11 bankruptcy.

    “The legislation will help businesses struggling with bankruptcy to weather the storm,” ICSC president and CEO Tom McGee said. “The bill provides significant relief to small business debtors and landlords. It also reinforces what many landlords have done since spring, as well as encourage deferred deals going forward.”

    Under current law, rent deferral agreements waiving some or all of the current rent to be repaid in the future can be undone if the commercial tenant later files for bankruptcy. This risk discourages such agreements from happening. Specifically, Bankruptcy Code Section 547 deems the installment payments as “preferences” and commercial landlords can be forced by the court to forfeit such payments. 

    The Tillis bill would prevent this from happening, providing “certainty” to business landlords, as well as tenants, according to ICSC.

    Additionally, the Tillis bill would allow an extra 90 days for commercial tenants in bankruptcy to decide whether to continue with current leases. And for certain small businesses, the bill would give tenants the ability to spread the payment of some post-bankruptcy rent over a longer period. The extra time would provide liquidity to small businesses, preserving jobs and businesses, noted ICSC.

    As we reported previously, a parallel attempt to bail out the ultra-rich investors who are holding impaired commercial mortgage-backed securities was introduced by Reps Van Taylor (R., Texas) Rep. Al Lawson (D., Fla.). According to the initial proposal, and as usual, taxpayers would end up being on the hook via the various Fed-Treasury JVs that will fund these programs, as any new money injected to rescue CMBS debt will by default be junior to existing insolvent debt as “many of these borrowers have provisions in their initial loan documents that forbid them from taking on more debt without additional approval from their servicers. The proposed facility would instead structure the cash infusions as preferred equity, which isn’t subject to the debt restrictions.”

  • Central Bank Balance Sheets To Hit $28 Trillion Next Year
    Central Bank Balance Sheets To Hit $28 Trillion Next Year

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/11/2020 – 20:25

    As noted earlier, silver is crashing as much as 15% today, a plunge which if it had spread to stocks would prompt a panic at the Fed and an injection of at least several trillion. The fact that precious metals do not need a rescue from the Fed – and in fact anything the Fed does do will only send them higher – is probably worth its own take, but for now we will simply look at how we got here, where we are going and update details on the balance sheets of the Federal Reserve, European Central Bank (ECB), Bank of England (BoE), Bank of Japan (BoJ), Reserve Bank of Australia (RBA), and Bank of Canada (BoC) balance sheets, as well as on the programs implemented by each central bank.

    As BofA shows, central bank balance sheet have never been bigger with the Fed now “holding” 34% of US GDP, and expected to see this number rise to 38%. For the other central banks the number is 25% for Canada and 123% for Japan.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Putting an actual number to the liquidity firehose, central banks have injected $24 trillion, or about a quarter of global GDP, into the market to keep it from crashing and expectations are that this number will increase to $28 trillion by the end of next year (this excludes the tens of trillions in assorted liquidity instruments in China). That would be a very optimistic expectation.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And since these days chart inflation means that one picture is worth a trillion words, we will focus on the visuals as they are self-explanatory.

    Fed:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    ECB:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    BOE:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    BOJ:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    RBA:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    BoC:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

  • Exposing COVID-19's "Orgy Of Incoherence"
    Exposing COVID-19’s “Orgy Of Incoherence”

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/11/2020 – 20:05

    Authored by Omar Khan via Medium.com,

    Of late, despite flashes of social media mania, there has been heartening focus in a number of countries from policy makers on evidence based COVID responses, localized interventions where needed, encouraging prudent social distancing and hygiene measures. This deserves to be supported.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    An Orgy of Incoherence

    Each day, in “COVID panic land” statements are issued that are never seemingly challenged, or even questioned, or even unpacked, or even “quizzed” for minimal coherence.

    First, just a canopy bit of perspective, quoting Lord Sumption, former High Court Judge in the UK, who has become a lightning rod for speaking out about the mass invalidation of civil liberties over hyped hysteria.

    “COVID-19 is a serious disease, but historically it is at the bottom end of the scale. For anyone under 50 the risk of death is tiny, less than for seasonal flu. In the great majority of cases the symptoms are mild or non-existent. Our ancestors lived with far worse epidemic diseases without rushing to put their heads in a bag. In other parts of the world they still do (world-wide, tuberculosis kills many more than COVID-19).”

    While there is some outrage evident in Lord Sumption’s assessment, the above statements are all factually true, and can be objectively corroborated. Relative to our ancestral experience with viruses, I will spell that out further below as well, so as to pacify the “here and now” doomsayers.

    Samples of Mindlessness

    “What if COVID never goes away?”

    Since it kills virtually no one in statistical terms below 60, and above 60 without comorbidities recovery rates are still highly encouraging, and since the impact on net mortality is not anywhere close to seismic on the actual numbers, the answer is, “We live with it.” Or “We end all life as we know it due to what is tantamount to a bad influenza period.”

    It’s a virus, so likely may not disappear. We will develop greater immunity, our hygiene habits will improve, we might get a vaccine, but we need a “vaccine” against panic and the myopia of “risk-free” living, which we have not imposed on ourselves in reaction to anything else in history: from terrorism to earthquakes to tuberculosis to race car driving (so from the man-made catastrophes to natural disasters, to global diseases to human hobbies).

    So, the question emerges, other than the now clearly discredited “optics” of warning us of millions of deaths, inflamed by modelers who have perfected the art of imperfection in their predictions (and our saying that is as “factual” as it gets), and other than reality being “gas-lighted” by deranged and virtually unremitting media reports urging panic and paralysis upon us, what triggers this bizarre new threshold of absurd self-preservation, even when the opportunity cost is the virtual end of social and economic life as we know it? We “sneezed” civilization away?

    “What if there’s a second wave?”

    It will, if following the patterns of virtually all viruses, be even less dangerous, immunity will be greater, we may be sane enough to protect nursing homes, and we will find the rebuilding of society a better place to focus our attention.

    And why on God’s earth are we so infatuated with caseloads? A mild upward tick in Catalonia, and the UK in sheer panic imposes quarantine on anyone returning from Spain? Overall net mortality is no worse than the UK (zero in the last two days, August 1st and 2nd), and we are just postponing the inevitable, unless the UK is going to not only leave Europe but take leave of its senses at the same time, and operate as an “anti-COVID fortress” with dwindling economic and cultural and social prospects.

    “But, by God, I’m NOT getting a fever or a dry cough, forget number of deaths annually by influenza, pneumonia, crossing the street, diabetes, heart attacks… all acceptable EXCEPT the dread… theme music please!… scourge of “COVID!”

    Vietnam, which marshaled its sanity and responses so remarkably and reports to date no deaths from COVID, found three residents infected in DaNang, after months of no local cases reported apparently, and in a fit of over-reaction, shut DaNang down, and evacuated the (mostly local) tourists from there. Elephant guns and mosquitoes come to mind. (Several days later, updating on August 10th, there are now 11 deaths in Vietnam, averaging about 20 cases a day for the last few days; compared to anywhere else in the world, scant argument for panicked evacuation or shutdown).

    Some large global multinationals have proclaimed no face-to-face meetings, even if crucially needed in local markets, until 2021! On what basis? Surely, this should be assessed locally? And if you are in a community which is recovering, now has 1,000 people gathering thresholds, or marriages of up to 500 or more taking place in Asia, and if you are a newly forming team that needs to engage, to rally, to align, to build the necessary relationships for greater virtual work to be possible, in fact, why would a HQ “declare” themselves a medical authority on gatherings per se, large or small, decoupled from the leadership discretion of leaders you have entrusted brands, livelihoods of your employees and hundreds of millions (or more) dollars in revenue to? And should not a “factual” threshold, rather than a calendar one be established?

    We surely cannot manically shut down whole communities when infection rates and lethality rates show a serious but statistically modest viral challenge. But the economic meltdown, psychological impacts, social disruption, while not reducible to lab results, are every bit as palpable, arguably more devastating in the medium to longer term, and will not recover if societies and economies are being turned “on” and “off” by every “spasm” of control fetishism.

    And the “Facts” Keep Rolling In

    Just taking the “florid” Floridian over-reaction, a cursory look at July 25th shows 124 deaths reported, of which only one, only one I reiterate, took place that day! The rest were merrily backfilled from May 28th cumulatively! Should this not be taken as scandalously distorting? No, just another day in the “porn media” sweepstakes. As I write (August 2nd), hospital capacity in Florida is greater than it was on July 2nd, despite 300,000 tests administered since.

    We also hear from numerous studies, including from Professor Francois Balloux in a pre-print, reconfirming evidence that eight out of 10 who never had COVID-19 seem to have an immune response triggered by T-cells based on prior exposure to other illnesses, including the common cold. That would argue for an affinity between this coronavirus and other more common strains, rather than this being a world ravaging contagion unlike any seen before. One wonders if we never encountered a virus prior to 2020?

    Hot on the heels of that, The Wall Street Journal reported: Flu wiped out in Southern Hemisphere virtually, from reports. As an example, Chile had recorded as of the time of the article going to print, 1,134 respiratory illnesses compared to 20,949 last year. Could it be that people diagnosed with flu or influenza are being “tagged” as COVID-19, particularly those who die, hence the cases of flu and influenza seem to be on a precipitous decline?

    As the plummeting numbers of seasonal respiratory viral infections from Argentina to South Africa to New Zealand continue to confound, the myopic are congratulating draconian COVID containment measures for this positive byproduct, ignoring the far more likely rationale that these are still there, “baked” into the COVID numbers. After all, other than via notoriously fallible tests, based on the symptoms, how could you know?

    Once More a Plea for Perspective

    Despite only 2% of DC’s hospital capacity being utilized, school has been cancelled for the fall due to the demands by the teacher’s union. With overwhelming global evidence of school openings being unconnected with any spikes thereafter, children not being at risk by and large (statistically being far more likely to be killed riding over to school, and over nine times as statistically likely to drown — source CDC — than from deaths “ascribed” to COVID), we have to more than wonder. Specifically, in the US,138 COVID “ascribed” deaths in that age group versus 995 from drowning in an average year, 4,000 in auto accidents for school age kids and teens over a similar period.

    The Lancet has now also weighed in that Lockdowns don’t work, in a country by country analysis. But we already knew that! Just compare Japan to Belgium! Compare Taiwan to the UK. And we’ll get to Sweden, as fatality numbers plummet, and it was the only western country to have grown economically last quarter (Taiwan grew first quarter 2020, too). But for some reason we should insist rather that our “poster children” for COVID rectitude should be the shattered economies with no viral “breakthrough” to show for it? Virtually all of Europe has said, no hardcore lockdowns going forward, localized restrictions, prudent, evidence-based reactions, and following key elements of the Swedish model, would be the essential playbook.

    As a percentage of the global population, even with all the likely “mis-stated” COVID fatalities, taking the numbers as gospel, we come in at .0052%. Swine Flu (2009–10) was .0029%, HIV .565%, Hong Kong flu of 1968 also much higher at .027%, Asian Flu of 1957/58 still higher at .070%, the Spanish flu of 1918 a ravaging 2.73%. The global economy persevered, the world progressed and moved on to fresh prosperity through all of these. Just yesterday we read the sheer collapse of GDP in the US has eliminated the last 5 years of growth in one fell swoop in a matter of months.

    For those who relish historical comparisons, the true pandemic “terrors” were the Black Death of 1347–51 with 42.11% as a percentage of global population and the Plague of Justinian 541–542 with 28.51%. Doubtless the rudimentary understanding of medicine in those eras was a sharp contributing factor to the exponential growth of the respective contagions.

    The Perpetuation of Fraudulent Panic-Mongering

    Though mass congested protests are seemingly of no “superspreader” concern through some unexplained medical voodoo (pandering for political advantage being one of the “vaccines” against public health nostrums it seems), when “panic” seemed on the wane, mainstream media stopped tracking “deaths” (despite even those being periodically miscounted as per the CDC or back-filled), and decided that all “infections” past or present would now be anointed “new cases.” And voila, the floodgates are open once more via some linguistic legerdemain.

    Not sick? No problem! No symptoms? Easy. Symptoms which could be mild and seasonal? You dare not make light! Not dying? Give it time… stop society!

    Then came the mask mandates. We all know about them, so let me simply make the point that they are far from settled science, and they are downright dangerous when exercising, as the deaths of several Chinese students while running a race during PE with these contraptions heart-breakingly revealed.

    The Norwegian health authorities, not noted for their reckless or libertine ways (and with some of the best COVID stats in Europe), doubled down recently on their recommendation for those without symptoms not to wear face masks, arguing the number of infections in Norway made them moot.

    Taking the most optimistic efficacy number, medical masks prevent roughly 40% of infections. Keep in mind that most of us outside the medical profession are not wearing medical masks. 200,000 would have to wear them to prevent one new infection per week in Norway. As the agency wrote,

    “The number of people who experience undesirable effects (difficulty breathing, communicating when that is critical, or dropping other hygienic prudence being given a false sense of security) is likely to be much larger than the number of infections prevented.”

    They concede that in congested community settings, public transport etc., there “might” be some benefit, but again largely with medical masks. They note even then, “However, study results vary greatly.” This meshes with the recent conclusion from the Dutch government indicating they will not require universal mask wearing as effectiveness of overall “masking” has not been demonstrated to their empirical satisfaction. Oxford University points out that no government should be able to mandate this usurpation of civil liberties for something that is not “settled science” by any stretch of the imagination, based on observational assertions. The suggestion is that “liberties” are not to be trifled with, or annulled absent overwhelming “evidence” not assertion.

    The Great Lockdown Lacuna

    There was a gaping policy hole that “lockdown” sought to furtively fill, the pseudo-scientific reflexive obeisance to untested modeling.

    From the reliably inaccurate doomsday prognosticator Neil Ferguson had come the “second Spanish flu” prediction (which had led to 50 million deaths when the world’s population was a fraction of today’s, roughly 1.7 billion, one third of which became infected) re COVID, predicting 500,000 deaths in the UK alone, and if Sweden continued its flirtation with disaster, “at least” 80,000+ there. Since Sweden has less than 6,000 deaths with no lockdown and 75% of those were from nursing home cases which they tragically mismanaged, and as we have countries that have not locked down, which have not produced such torrents of mortality, perhaps we can leave the modelers alone at last?

    Even by the end of February, the Diamond Princess Cruise Ship provided a perfect sample to extrapolate from. And this was evidence-based, not model-based. 3,711 passengers and crew, quarantined after a virus outbreak, with an average age of 58 were repeatedly tested. There were 705 cases (19% infection rate), 6 deaths (case fatality rate of 1%) by the end of March, eventually 14 in total, compared to the 116 that the Imperial model would have predicted.

    Over half the cases were “asymptomatic” which, if you take it at face value, meant many more were infected or “had” been infected, and the tests were picking up residue of the virus (which we are told can be detected for up to two months after it is no longer “live”). Either way the mortality rate would then resemble “severe seasonal influenza” as a saner version of Anthony Fauci had himself written earlier in the New England Journal of Medicine.

    Almost all the deaths on the Diamond Princess were in the over 70 age group. Later the USS Theodore Roosevelt produced one death and three hospitalized cases out of 1,156 infections (much younger and healthier profile, of course), no deaths out of 1,046 cases on the Charles de Gaulle either, and this pattern continued to repeat.

    WHO itself had added to the panic due to a rookie computational error, asserting the population mortality risk to be 3.8%. They arrived at this by taking the then known Chinese deaths and dividing them by the number of confirmed cases, ignoring that likely only a small proportion of infected people had been tested, asymptomatic cases were likely not represented, and those who went in for testing were inevitably those with serious symptoms. This evident computational distortion contributed also to the policy errors relating to both hospital capacity and nursing home fatalities.

    Deaths in care homes are now estimated to have accounted for half of all COVID related mortality. When it was suggested, looking at 96% of Italian mortalities, for example, coming from the elderly with comorbidities, that we isolate the vulnerable, and not shut down the planet, people said it was “unrealistic” and “had never been done.” As if closing down the world, putting the wider economy into enforced seizure with no possible available longer-term financial hedge by which to recover livelihoods and industries, was a sane alternative?

    For perspective, 650,000 COVID deaths globally pale next to 33.4 million deaths to date roughly in 2020 overall, and for most of the population (under 65 with no pre-existing conditions), normal influenza, road accidents, suicides, and a host of other causes of death (TB, cancer, hypertension, diabetes) are statistically far more significant. But the newness of COVID and the frenzied, fevered, unrelenting media hype have stripped most people’s critical faculties of any proportionality on that front it seems.

    Though Stockholm with 2.5 times the population density of New York State outperformed NY State on virtually any COVID metric you care to name overall, and at their respective peaks, and therefore still has a relatively open economy today, far more so that NY State, when facts made it evident the virus had all but disappeared from Sweden, there was from the media enablers and all the governments and who had clung feverishly to the “lockdown” mania, not a word, just deafening silence.

    Researchers from the University of Toronto found that whether a country was locked down or not was “not associated” with the COVID-19 death rate. The noted journal Lancet cites,

    “Government actions such as border closures, full lockdowns, and a high rate of COVID-19 testing were not associated with statistically significant reductions in the number of critical cases or overall mortality.”

    They did plausibly keep, for an initial period, hospitals from being over-run, and that should certainly be evaluated in a focused way on that basis.

    The Bad Science Round Up

    Forcing people walking in parks to wear masks, when even the most fantastic assertions of aerosol transmissibility, which came from machines in lab settings, do not suggest in open air, a mere cough or exhalation magically can be infectiously propelled to unwitting passerby, is moronic.

    Swedes and Danes and the Dutch have been enjoying social interaction in cafes and bars, but don’t let the Irish near those pubs (August 10th may see that finally relaxed). As one commentator mentioned, they doubtless have an obscure Irish custom we don’t know about and they need to be weaned off, that in riotous affection leads them to kiss each other’s noses and hack into each other’s throats whenever in pubs. Otherwise, what happens on “August 10th” that wasn’t true on “July 10th” seems quite inscrutable.

    Melbourne has interrupted its last “Level 3” Lockdown to initiate a new six week “Level 4” Lockdown (replete with overnight curfew) due to the admitted concern of 600 or so cases of what they are calling “community transmission.” But the real precipitating panic during this “surge” was apparently the number of deaths in a 24 hour period. That number is “seven” during a 24 hour period (considered “recovery” numbers in much of the planet) and still the overall COVID ascribed death count for Australia is 208 from February across the entire country! Those seven, were 70, 80 and 90 years of age, with numerous pre-existing conditions. The fragility of the economy there does not suggest immunity to other shocks likely to flow from these overlapping, never ending lockdowns, particularly as it’s winter there, and viruses are known at times to naturally spike over that period.

    And why don’t we finish yet another round-up of our fevered over-reactions with the precarious petulance of the “tests” by which these dire read-outs emerge at all?

    Professor Carl Heneghan, Director of Oxford’s Centre for Evidence Based Medicine, provides a bracing corrective, indicating that at lower prevalence of the virus, “sensitivity” and “specificity” of the testing gets less precise.

    You start first with the “sensitivity” of the test: the proportion of people who test positive out of those who actually have the virus. The second is “specificity” which is the proportion who test negative, out of those who should indeed have done so. The true specificity and sensitivity of the prevailing tests are not known, admitted to by the UK’s Office for National Statistics, owing to the newness of the virus, a tripwire shared globally.

    Let us take the Professor’s operating theater of the UK and assume 1,000 people have the virus, say, .1% (current actual estimates are lower, hovering around 0.04%). Now, say, 10,000 random people go get tested. So, 10 people will have it at the 0.1% infection rate, and 9,990 will not. Estimates tell us 80% of those who have the virus test positive, says the Professor (easily corroborated), this is the “sensitivity” and the “specificity” for those who test negative may be as high as 99.9% with the best (rare) tests.

    So, on this basis, eight people will be correctly identified, and two will receive a false negative.

    Of the 9,990 that are actually negative, all but 10 will be correctly diagnosed as “negative.” But 10 will be told they have COVID-19 when they actually don’t. That gives us 18 positive tests; eight from those who have it, and 10 from those who don’t. So only 44% of the infections indicated are real. Hence, we have to say, alarmingly, the chance of accurately detecting the disease being less than 50% is fairly glaring.

    This isn’t hypothetical, as current viral levels are lower than the above case study. The US Centers for Disease Control kits concede they can generate up to 30% false positives! With the top tests costing upwards of GBP 100 per test, developing countries necessarily opt for more affordable options, with tests where specificity could be as low as 95%.

    Then in the 10,000 test scenario, there would be 500 false positives among the eight genuine positives, so the false positives would far outstrip the genuine results, providing an appearance of a “surge” in infections that seems mystifyingly disconnected from numbers of hospital admissions and deaths.

    So, if at low prevalence, with false positives rising at the same time actual infections plummet, then even if COVID-19 completely disappeared (the aspired to promised land), then even with no actual positives, on the above example, ten people would be wrongly diagnosed as positive, and the official data would obstinately still show a 0.1% prevalence of COVID-19! Off the current testing regimes, we may be incessantly chasing a shadow, and we may endlessly perpetuate panic and social and economic meltdown over a veritable phantom as a result.

    Therefore?

    It’s time to restate terms of reference and redefine thresholds meriting panic. We must clarify actual mortality and not “caseloads” as the relevant metric and compare cost/benefit trade-offs rather than allowing ourselves to be economically devastated and medically cuckolded by episodic ephemera posing as data.

  • Facebook Cracks Down On 'Fake' Local News Networks Run By Political Operatives
    Facebook Cracks Down On ‘Fake’ Local News Networks Run By Political Operatives

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/11/2020 – 19:45

    After taking the unprecedented step of removing a post from President Trump’s page for having the audacity to include a snippet from a Fox News interview where the president exaggerated how children handle COVID infection, Facebook is taking yet another step to crack down on non-mainstream voices on both the left and the right.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Since hard-core progressives are pushing for Facebook to deplatform all conservatives and even some centrists, a decision that could have grave consequences for FB’s business, the decision isn’t a surprise.

    A report in the Columbia Journalism Review drew attention to this trend of  “pink slime” local news earlier this month, and since the 2016 election, a team of researchers has uncovered more than 1,200 ‘fake’ local news sites that repackage community news with a political slant favoring the campaign that they are (often obliquely) backing.

    The original Bernie Sanders Campaign helped mastermind this technique. But by blocking all such sites from accessing Facebook’s “News Exemption”, the social media platform is effectively bringing the same level of scrutiny that it already applies to “national” news platforms to “local news” platforms.

    It’s also notable because FB’s decision comes just one week after the NYT quietly scrubbed “sponsored” news posts paid for by the Chinese government that essentially inserted what appeared to be news stories with a slant that heavily favored the Chinese government.

    A local news outlet will be disqualified as “political” if it meets any of the criteria below, courtesy of Axios:

    • It’s owned by a political entity or a political person (definitions below).
    • If a political person is leading the company in an executive position, such as a CEO, board member, chairman of its board, or a publisher or editor-in-chief.
    • If the publisher shares proprietary information about any of its Facebook accounts or account passwords, API access keys, and/or data about their Facebook readers – like location, demographics, or consumption habits – directly with a Political Person or Entity as they are defined below.
    • If the Page lists a political entity or a political person as its “Confirmed Page Owner” or “Confirmed Page Partner” on Facebook.

    Meanwhile, Facebook defines a “political person” as “a candidate for elected office, a person who holds elected office, a person whose job is subject to legislative confirmation, or a person employed by and/or vested with decision-making authority by a political person or at a political entity.” A “political entity” is “an organization, company, or other group whose predominant purpose is to influence politics and elections.” These generally include PACs and Super PACs, and entities regulated as “Social Welfare Organizations” under Section 501(c)(4) of the US Internal Revenue Code.

  • The Father Of Modern Finance: "Inflation Is Totally Out Of The Control Of Central Banks"
    The Father Of Modern Finance: “Inflation Is Totally Out Of The Control Of Central Banks”

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/11/2020 – 19:25

    Submitted by Christoph Gisiger of TheMarket.ch

    Few economists have had a greater influence on the financial markets than Eugene Fama. According to his Efficient Market Theory, competition among investors is so intense that all information and expectations are immediately and correctly priced in. Therefore, it’s impossible to beat the market in the long-term.

    Never shy of making pointed statements, the Professor of Finance at the University of Chicago doubts the power of the central banks. “The business of central banks is like pornography: In essence, it’s just entertainment and it doesn’t have any real effects”, he says. In contrast, he warns that investors could begin to question the credit worthiness of governments because of the high national debt levels.

    In this in-depth interview with The Market/NZZ, which has been edited and condensed for clarity, Prof. Fama explains why he welcomes the boom in passive investing and why he sees no problem in the high capital concentration at tech giants like Apple, Amazon or Microsoft. In his view, absurd price swings such as negative oil prices are no reason to doubt the rational behavior of markets.

    Professor Fama, the efficient market hypothesis has revolutionized the way people invest. What goes through your mind when you look at the wild swings the stock market made this year?

    The market seems pretty good. It held up even though the economy is deep in the bucket. This is a good example of how forward looking the market really is: It’s looking past what we are going through now, and it’s saying that the future doesn’t look that bad.

    Do you think that’s the correct assumption?

    If I could forecast, I wouldn’t be a professor.

    Still, since the crash in February/March, we basically went from 1929 to 1999 in just a few months. What are the chances stocks are in a bubble?

    Bubbles are things people see in hindsight. They don’t identify them in advance. Sure, you can look at the behavior of prices, and you may be able to identify cases where they are too high. But if you only look back and say: “Oh, stocks went down a lot, so that was a bubble”, then that’s 20/20 hindsight. At the time, there was no evidence that there was a bubble.

    On the other hand, sometimes there are obvious signs of excess. Let’s take the final stage of the great dotcom bull market of the late nineties as an example.

    Let’s go back to that period before the crash. Alan Greenspan, the head of the Federal Reserve, made his famous “irrational exuberance” speech about the market being too high in early December 1996. But even after the crash, the market never went back to the level when he made that speech. So what do you think of that forecast?

    Is there really no way to spot a bubble?

    Here’s another example: In the fifties, there was a famous professor at Stanford who was an agricultural economist. He brought plots of agricultural prices into the faculty lounge and asked people to identify bubbles. Of course, they saw the ups and downs, and all of them identified bubbles. Afterwards, he told them that these were just numbers he had randomly generated. That tells you how good people are with identifying bubbles.

    Against that backdrop, what do you make of the growing discipleship of behavioral finance which focuses on the influence of psychology on investment decisions and questions the efficiency of markets?

    What I say is that we agree on the facts but we disagree on the interpretation. In my view, there is no such thing as behavioral finance. Essentially, it’s just a criticism of efficient markets. They don’t have a theory of their own. Hence, that makes me the most important person in behavioral finance. Without me, they don’t have anybody to disagree with. So I think behavioral finance is just a branch of efficient markets.

    But what about factors like emotions, herd mentality or cycles? Aren’t they important at all?

    Tastes and behavior are important in economics. Nobody denies that. But you have to translate these things into something testable, so we can take the data and test it, looking forward and not looking backward. That’s my response to all that stuff. It never works out.

    Yet, we also know that investors regularly mix up similar-looking stock tickers or company names and thereby cause absurd movements in stock prices. How is this rational behavior?

    It isn’t. You can identify mistakes like that. It’s common that names confuse investors and as a result, you can get temporary price movements. But they are usually tiny and go away quickly. I don’t say markets are completely efficient, but they’re efficient for most questions that I address. Models are never a 100% true. If they were, we would call them reality, not models. But for almost all purposes, market efficiency is a very good approximation. I’ll go even further: Almost all investors should regard markets as efficient for their own investment decisions. If they do that, they will be better off in the long-term.

    Still, recently we saw some truly strange things that are hard to explain rationally, like negative oil prices or credit spreads on fortress balance sheet companies like Apple exploding. Is this the way rational markets are supposed to behave?

    It’s always foolish to look at individual cases because every individual case is different. I don’t know how to judge those particular events and I don’t get into the business of valuing individual companies. But the fact that the oil price went briefly negative tells you that all storages were full. Therefore, people weren’t able to buy oil since there was no place to put it. The negative price didn’t last very long, but it shows you that once you start producing oil, this stuff keeps coming out of the ground no matter what. That means the price can go negative, and someone who has storage capacity can make money at that point.

    Would you ever have expected to see negative oil prices?

    We’ve seen a lot of things that we thought could never happen before. But they did, like negative interest rates all over the countries in Europe.

    Negative interest rates are turning the financial system upside down. Are markets still able to function efficiently when bonds are yielding less than zero?

    Negative interest rates tell you that there is some cost to storing cash. That’s why you get negative rates, mostly in short-term bonds. The alternative to holding those bonds is to hold cash, but holding cash is apparently not costless. This means you’re bound by the cost of holding cash. So, what do you do with your cash? If we’re talking about a position of hundreds of millions of dollars you don’t want to have that in cash.

    And what about the fundamental consequences of negative rates? How are they impacting the real economy?

    I don’t’ think they impact the real economy, but it’s a problem for the financial system. What’s more, in 2008, in response to the financial crisis, the Fed started to pay interest on its reserves. But there is no interest on the currency, and currency is exchangeable for reserves on demand by the banks. So based on classic monetary theory, you don’t really know what’s determining inflation at this point. There is no control over the stock of what qualifies as money, since reserves aren’t really money anymore because they are paying interest. That means you can’t control the currency supply. In other words: Inflation is totally out of the control of central banks.

    In the coming months, the Fed is expected to make a major commitment to ramping up inflation soon. What would it mean for investors if we really get inflation?

    Inflation and return on investments is a tough topic that’s been around since the early seventies. In principle, you can see the effects of inflation on long-term interest rates, but you can’t see them in stocks very well because the volatility is so high. Hence, we don’t know what effect inflation will have on markets. It depends on the effect on real activity: High, but stable inflation wouldn’t be a big deal. What’s really a big deal is when it gets unstable.

    It’s not just the Fed, around the globe central banks are flooding the system with liquidity like never before. Is this a reason for concern?

    Frankly, I think this is just posturing. Actually, the central banks don’t do anything real. They are issuing one form of debt to buy another form of debt. If you are an old Modigliani–Miller person the way I am, you think that’s a neutral activity: You’re issuing short-term debt to buy long-term debt or vice-versa. That’s not something that should have any real effects.

    Then again, the financial markets sure seem to love it. At least it looks like that the S&P 500 is moving upwards in tandem with the expansion of the Fed’s balance sheet.

    Every day we hear a story about the movement of stock prices. But the story is different each day. So basically, these stories are made up after the fact. But when we look at it systematically, we don’t see a big effect of Fed actions on real activity or on stock prices or on anything else. That’s why I use to say that the business of central banks is like pornography: In essence, it’s just entertainment and it doesn’t have any real effects.

    But how about the effects of this “free money” on borrowing? Isn’t the record amount of corporate and government debt a real problem?

    That really bothers me. We haven’t hit it yet, but there has to come a point where people start questioning whether government debt is really riskless. Piling on debt even in good times is a new thing: In the US, we cut taxes and increased the deficit as a consequence, but that happened when the economy was booming. How are we going to pay that back? It has to come out of taxes in the future. As a matter of fact, we didn’t really lower taxes. What we did was we lowered them now and raised them in the future, when we have to pay off that debt. That’s why I worry that investors will become skeptical of whether governments can actually pay off so much debt. Now, we’re piling on like crazy because of the Covid-pandemic. That was unavoidable, but it was avoidable in the past, when we did it in good times. When does the market say “enough”?

    In recent years, we’ve also witnessed a revolution in passive investing. How does the amazing indexing and ETF boom impact valuations of stocks and bonds?

    That’s a complicated question, and nobody knows the answer. For almost sixty years, I have been saying that there should be more passive investing since there’s no evidence that active managers generate a superior performance for their high fees. Finally, passive investing is catching on. Of course, you can’t go 100% passive because somebody has to determine prices.

    But aren’t ETFs undermining the generic price discovery of markets? In principle, they just buy stocks mechanically and don’t care about prices or valuations.

    They don’t but the people who buy ETFs pay attention. But here’s the key issue: Who are you knocking out of the market when you go passive? Are you knocking out bad active investors or good active investors? If you are knocking out bad active investors, you are making the market more efficient. If you are knocking out good active investors, you are making it less efficient. In general, there are very few good active investors. That’s what all the evidence says, going back fifty years now: It’s very difficult to find people who can beat the market.

    How about Warren Buffett for starters?

    The real question is: How do you pick Warren Buffett? The way you pick him is after the fact, since he has done very well. Now, suppose I take 100,000 investors and say: Let’s let them run for 30 years and pick out the winner. Because you roll the dice so many times, even if none of them is a good or bad investor, many investors will do well and many will do poorly purely by chance. Statistically there is also going to be a big winner, but solely due to chance. In other words: There will be extremely good outcomes and extremely bad outcomes, but you just can’t tell who is successful because of luck and who because of skill.

    So you’re saying that Warren Buffett was just lucky?

    The problem with picking a winner after the fact is you can’t tell. If you would have identified him fifty years ago and you looked at him and would have said: “That’s the guy!”, then I would believe you that you can tell if someone’s going to be an investment genius. But you couldn’t do that fifty years ago, because there’s a statistical problem.

    Another concern people are talking about is the extremely high market concentration. Today, five tech giants make up more than 20% of the S&P 500. What does this mean for the efficiency of the stock market?

    In the past, it’s always been the case that the largest fifty companies account for more than 50% of the total value of the market. Now, we’ve got a technological revolution, and it turns out that there are five or six big winners, these trillion-dollar companies. They are a pretty large fraction of the market, but they did it through innovation, not through theft or any other illegal behavior. So I don’t know why that’s a negative. These are all new businesses that provide new services we didn’t have before.

    In addition to that, more trades than ever are based on algorithmic high-speed trading. How does that impact the functioning of financial markets?

    This has been an open question for around fifteen years. No one really knows what effect high speed trading has on prices. One of my colleagues has worked a lot on that topic. His suggestion is to slow trading down to something like a tenth of a second between trades and thereby kill the advantage of these fast traders. I don’t see any problem with that.

    There’s also a fierce debate about factor investing. For example, value has underperformed growth for the past decade. Is value investing death?

    Who knows? The problem is that you can’t tell from ten years of data. We don’t know if the last ten years are just a statistical blip or not, because the variance of returns is so high. Ken French and I recently published a paper called “The Value Premium”. We basically say that it’s not just ten years. If you go back 28 years and compare that period to the previous 28 years, you cannot tell whether expected returns have changed, or whether the premium is zero, or equal to its historical value. The volatility is so high that you can’t make any statements like that. There is no way to know the answer. Besides, the value premium has done poorly in the US, but not in international markets.

    What does this mean for investors?

    The challenge in asset pricing is to come up with the right dimensions of risk and how they relate to expected returns. That’s been a challenge as long as I have been in the business. I suggested solutions every twenty years or so. None of them worked perfectly. Sometimes they work for a while, and then they don’t seem to work anymore. The problem is that we’re always buried in volatility which makes it hard to tell what’s right and wrong.

    What exactly are these risks?

    We’ve identified what we call the five potential dimensions of risks: Stocks relative to bonds, small relative to big stocks, value relative to growth stocks, high versus low profitability stocks, and high investment versus low investment stocks. All of these things seem to capture some of the variation in returns. But whether that’s the right breakdown or not is hard to tell.

    What sort of lesson should investors take from that? For example, can we say that small stocks should theoretically perform better than large stocks over the long run?

    It’s really hard to tell because you get buried in volatility. For instance, the January effect, which refers to a premium of small stocks in the first month of the year, was identified in hindsight. And, once it was identified, it wasn’t there anymore. That begs the question whether the value premium, the size premium, the profitability premium or the investment premium were also temporary. If they are not real dimensions of risks and if they are not things people are concerned about, then you would expect them to go away because that’s fundamental economics: If there is a profit opportunity out there, and it’s generating expected returns, people will bid up or down the price on those things so that they disappear.

    Is there anything you now would watch out for specifically as an investor right now?

    This experience we’re going through is totally unusual. If you go back in the past, we experienced the same kind of pandemic in 1918 towards the end of World War I. But at that time, we didn’t take the same measures we’re taking now, shutting down whole economies. So we really don’t know what the response will be if and when there’s a cure for this disease. For instance, what will the response of consumers be at that point? Everybody wants to know if we are going to get a V-shaped response. But nobody knows because you don’t know what people are going to do when this is over.

    What’s your advice for investors in this environment?

    I don’t do investment advice. But the general prescription is to decide how much risk you’re willing to bear and then let that be guiding your decision into how much to put in stocks versus bonds. Also, stay away from hedge funds because you’re going to lose a lot of money fast.

  • Peak Insanity: Tesla Adds $16 Billion In Market Cap After Announcing 5-For-1 Stock Split
    Peak Insanity: Tesla Adds $16 Billion In Market Cap After Announcing 5-For-1 Stock Split

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/11/2020 – 19:24

    There are only so many “positive news” levers a company can pull in the absence of consistently turning a legitimate profit: stacking up receivables, releasing and taking deposits for “new” products that may not ever materialize, pulling borrow and securing the float while mysterious out of the money call option purchases go off daily, selling regulatory credits to claim profitability while your core auto selling business loses money and adjusting warranty reserves to gear your accounting are a few examples.

    This box of tricks, inclusive of most everything aside from just being a consistently profitable company, includes very few tactics that Tesla hasn’t tapped. But today, the company pulled one more rabbit out of their hat with the announcement of a 5-for-1 stock split. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And to prove the market has reached hysteria, Tesla’s market cap is up by about $16 billion after hours. A stock split, of course, does nothing to add equity or value to a company – instead, it just multiplies the number of shares outstanding and divides the company up into smaller parts. 

    Of course, those “sophisticated” enough to be buying shares in Tesla at a $250 billion valuation may not realize this – as they have added nearly half of General Motors’ market cap to the company in the after market session on the news. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meanwhile, we’re sure the news has nothing to do with the fact that Tesla shares have lagged over the last couple of sessions – and we’re double sure the news has nothing to do with Elon Musk watching Apple shares soar on their announcement of a stock split. 

    “Each stockholder of record on August 21, 2020 will receive a dividend of four additional shares of common stock for each then-held share, to be distributed after close of trading on August 28, 2020. Trading will begin on a stock split-adjusted basis on August 31, 2020,” the company said in a corporate filing.

    Though the split will make Tesla shares more “affordable”, Charles Schwab and other online brokerages are already offering fractions of shares held on their balance sheets for as little as $5. So the idea of luring in more bagholders who have no clue what a market cap is to purchase a stock that appears to be cheaper may not work. 

    So, why is Tesla going ahead with the stock split if retail investors are clearly having no trouble accessing the company’s shares? 

    We’ll let you take a guess.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  • CNN Is Hosed If Trump Loses: Former Exec
    CNN Is Hosed If Trump Loses: Former Exec

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/11/2020 – 19:05

    At CNN, orange man may be bad – but he’s great for ratings. In fact, essential according to one former exec.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Former CNN president Jonathan Klein has told Digiday that the networks’ fate is tied to whether President Trump is re-elected, because no more “bad guy” or “antagonist” will mean viewers won’t be able to feed on the drama inside their leftist echo-chamber.

    “Grandpa is a nice guy,” Klein told the outlet, likely referring to Joe Biden, adding “Everybody might be relieved to not watch as much cable news anymore and go find a book to read, a garden to plant, or a socially-distanced walk to take.”

    Klein, who parted ways with the network in 2010, said that what Trump gave journalistic outlets “was an audience that felt the urgency” to watch, adding “that urgency among 70% of the audience might dissipate a little bit.”

    “I don’t think it was any more complicated than that Trump was good for ratings,” he said, adding “Make no mistake, it’s a symbiotic relationship. The dramatic rise and relevance of CNN for better or worse is tied to Donald Trump.”

    And as Fox News’ Joseph Wilfsohn points out, Klein’s commments come “Despite the suggestion from CNN’s chief media correspondent Brian Stelter on Sunday that anti-Trump news outlets don’t exist,” yet former CNN reporter Peter Hamby told Digiday that consumers have “confused ideas about journalism and think it’s supposed to be resistance-y.”

    If Trump loses, they’ll always have war?

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 11th August 2020

  • Turkey Sends Military For 'Gunnery Drills' Off Rhodes As Contested Gas Exploration Resumes
    Turkey Sends Military For ‘Gunnery Drills’ Off Rhodes As Contested Gas Exploration Resumes

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/11/2020 – 02:45

    Greece’s military is once again said to be in a state of high alert with all troops prevented from leaving their duty stations or going on temporary leave. Not only has Turkey’s Energy Minister Fatih Donmez announced Monday that the Oruc Reis seismic exploration ship has been dispatched to the Mediterranean, but Bloomberg reports Turkey has launched naval exercises in the same region.

    “Turkey launched naval exercises off two Greek islands and announced energy exploration research in the same area, projecting its military might amid heightened territorial tussles in the eastern Mediterranean,” according to the report.

    The naval drills are described as east and to the south of Rhodes and Kastellorizo, both which are among Greece’s easternmost islands, and not far from Turkey’s coast. The drills are expected to go multiple days running through this week.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Turkey’s military engaged in exercises earlier this summer of Libya, via TRT World.

    Greece’s defense ministry says it’s prepared to “counter” any Turkish military maneuvers in a worsening situation which appears ripe for conflict, also given Turkey’s oil and gas exploration plans have been source of intense controversy for the past year, resulting in threatened EU sanctions for violations of Greek and Cypriot waters. This as an urgent Greek Government Council for National Security meeting is expected to kick off Monday in Athens.

    “Turkey doesn’t recognize Greece’s claim that its territorial waters start immediately south of Kastellorizo, the most distant Greek outpost,” Bloomberg continues. “The gunnery exercises that will run through Tuesday, according to a Turkish navy website, are a message that Ankara won’t accept any agreement or move that would limit its own maritime interests in the Mediterranean.”

    Though as of a week ago it appeared a cooling of tensions could be on the horizon, with Athens and Ankara said to be in negotiations, Turkey abruptly halted its diplomacy after the announcement of a Greece and Egyptian deal defining their exclusive economic zones in contradiction to Ankara’s interpretation.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Turkey denied the agreement as “null and void” — which means Turkey’s expansionist claims are being contested by pretty much every Mediterranean country, also including Israel. The exception of course, is the Tripoli-based Libyan Government of National Accord (GNA), which lately inked its own agreement with Turkey defining broad swathes of the Mediterranean as within Turkey’s rights.

    Erdogan’s office has since said that the Greece-Egypt deal effectively cut Turkey out of crucial dialogue, so it is forced to resume its energy exploration. “We were engaged in talks with Greece for the last two-and-a-half months in Berlin and had even agreed on a joint statement but Greece announced its deal with Egypt just a day before it,” the Turkish presidency spokesman Ibrahim Kalin told CNN-Turk television on Sunday.

    Turkey has sought to argue that the so-called Turkish Republic of Cyprus, which remains unrecognized internationally, gives it expansive rights encompassing the whole of Cyprus, including areas that cut into Greece’s waters. The EU, with France’s Macron lately leading the way, has consistently sided with Greece and Turkey, condemning Turkey’s maritime violations of EU member states’ Exclusive Economic Zones.

  • Seattle Police Chief Resigns After City Approves Plan To Defund Department, Axe 100 Cops
    Seattle Police Chief Resigns After City Approves Plan To Defund Department, Axe 100 Cops

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/11/2020 – 02:16

    Seattle Police Chief Carmen Best has announced her resignation, effective September 2nd, after the City Council voted to slash spending on the Seattle Police Department by roughly $4 million out of the department’s $400 million annual budget – or around 1%.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While the cuts may be largely symbolic – aside from the 100 or so of the city’s 1,400 police officers ,who will be laid off or not replaced through attrition – the move, which also reduced Best’s $285,000 annual salary, was enough to make her leave the force after 28 years with SPD.

    Best, who in addition to trying to maintain order during the BLM protests while operating under a ban on tear gas, pepper spray and flash bangs, has been dealing with protesters showing up to her Snohomish County house. She also says she hasn’t been included in any city council discussions regarding budget cuts, according to KING5.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In a Monday night letter, Best wrote:

    “To the Women and Men of the Seattle Police Department –    

    I wanted to notify you that I will be retiring from the Seattle Police Department, effective September 2nd, 2020. I wanted you to hear this from me, but some media have reached this conclusion on their own.   

    This was a difficult decision for me, but when it’s time, it’s time.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Responding to Best’s resignation, Seattle Mayor Jenny Durkan said in a statement:

    “Know that while I understand the Chief’s reasons, I accepted her decision with a very heavy heart. I have had the privilege to be with Chief Carmen Best in so many situations: with her family, at roll calls, in community meetings, and in nearly weekly meetings addressing public safety in Seattle. Her grit, grace and integrity have inspired me and made our city better. These last months, I knew Chief Best was the person to lead our city through this challenging time, to reimagine policing and community safety. Her leadership is unmatched nationwide, which is why it is a sad day for our City to lose her.

    Carmen Best is still devoted to this department and our city. I regret deeply that she concluded that the best way to serve the city and help the department was a change in leadership, in the hope that would change the dynamics to move forward with the City Council.”

    A press conference is scheduled for 11 a.m. Tuesday with Durkan and Best.

    The approved cuts to SPD fall far short of the 50% cut demanded by Black Lives Matter protesters, while several council members said on Monday that the changes were a starting point in what will be a lengthy process to reshape policing and public safety, according to AP.

  • Sweden's Success Is Kryptonite For Lockdown And Mask Advocates
    Sweden’s Success Is Kryptonite For Lockdown And Mask Advocates

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/11/2020 – 02:00

    Authored by Jordan Schachtel via ‘The Mass Illusion’ subastack,

    Here in the United States, we have become inundated with tales of COVID-19 doom and gloom. In America, the mainstream narrative is rife with hopelessness. We are told that there is simply no way to stop this virus without repetitive lockdowns, healthy quarantine, even of asymptomatic individuals, and universal mask mandates. And even with all of those extreme policy measures put in place, the politicians and public health officials tell us that we will have to wait for a vaccine for the country to even think about our “new normal” following the COVID-19 pandemic.

    There’s one country that they don’t seem to want to talk about – Sweden. And for good reason. Sweden debunks the hysteria.

    Sweden shows how unnecessary all of the interventions to “fight” the virus are.

    Sweden shows us that a rational, evidence-based approach to the pandemic is now thriving.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In Sweden, there’s no mandatory masks, no mandatory lockdown, no vaccine, and most importantly, no problem.

    Life has largely returned to normal in Sweden, and it all happened without the economy-destroying non-pharmaceutical interventions (NPI) demanded by the “public health expert” class, who guaranteed that chaos would come to every country that disobeyed their commands to hit the self-destruct button for their nations.

    The Swedish government has provided its advanced metrics on the COVID-19 pandemic to the public, and the data includes the ever-important statistics on actual day of death, and other useful information. I ran the numbers month by month so you can get a very clear picture of Sweden’s downward trend.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In August, Sweden has registered just one death (!) with/from the coronavirus. Yes, you read that correctly. One death so far. 

    For the month of July, Sweden reported 226 deaths. They’ve accounted for 805 June deaths, 1646 in May, and 2572 in April. The deaths attributed to COVID-19 went from about a 50% reduction to falling off of a cliff.

    The story is the same in the hospitals. COVID-19 is hardly registering as a blip on the radar. Sweden has reported just 4 new COVID-19 patients in their ICUs in August. The month of July saw only 52 COVID-19 patients in ICUs.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It doesn’t take a math whiz to come to the conclusion that the epidemic appears to have been wrapped up in Sweden for months. It’s unclear whether this is a result of having achieved the herd immunity threshold, or if the seasonality of the virus is providing indefinite relief. But it’s become absolutely clear that Sweden’s long term pandemic strategy is working.

    Sweden did not do everything perfectly. Stockholm, like much of the West, failed to protect its nursing home population. The majority of the COVID-19 deaths in Sweden have come from the senior care population, with the average age of death (82) being the same as the average lifespan in the country. But remember, people in nursing homes are not mobile. They live in their own ecosystems and are not particularly impacted by COVID-19 policies. It was Sweden’s general population that was supposed to be plagued by their open society model to respond to the virus. We were told that the hospitals would be overrun, and that bodies of all ages would be dropping in the streets. This dystopian pandemia projection never came to fruition. Even during the worst months of the pandemic, Sweden’s general population never pressed their healthcare system. The same is true in the United States, but for whatever reason, many U.S. officials and “public health experts” have pushed the idea that everyone is equally impacted, which could not be further from the truth.

    For this pandemic, the global public health expert class threw the pandemic playbook out the window, disregarding hundreds of years of proven science on herd immunity, in order to attempt to assert human control over a submicroscopic infectious particle. It hasn’t worked, to say the least. There is no evidence anywhere in the world that lockdowns or masks have *stopped* the spread of the virus. Sweden was one of the few places where cooler heads prevailed, and the scientists realized that attempts to stop the virus would be worse than the disease itself, in the form of economic and social ruin.

    *  *  *

    Thanks for reading! I would be honored if you are willing to support my work and subscribe to The Mass Illusion, my newsletter for people concerned about our “new normal.”

  • Huawei Ends Production Of Kirin Smartphone Microchips As US Sanctions Capsize Supply Chain
    Huawei Ends Production Of Kirin Smartphone Microchips As US Sanctions Capsize Supply Chain

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/11/2020 – 01:00

    Back in May, we reported how TSMC, one of the biggest contract chipmakers in Asia, and a critical component of China’s high-tech supply chain, would be forced to cut off supplies of US-designed microchips used in Huawei smartphones. That, in turn, would create serious problems for the company as it seeks to supplant Samsung as the world’s largest seller of smartphones.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    More than three months later, the situation hasn’t changed much: The full force of the newest restrictions out of the US are starting to bite, and on Friday, Yu Chengdong, CEO of Huawei’s consumer business, confirmed to an industry conference that Huawei’s new high-end Mate40 handsets, set to debut this fall, will be the last smartphones featuring the company’s most advanced processor (Huawei has had plenty of time to stockpile components). 

    But starting on Septl 15, the Kirin processors used in these handsets will no longer be produced.

    “From Sept. 15 onward, our flagship Kirin processors cannot be produced. Our AI-powered chips also cannot be processed. This is a huge loss for us. Huawei began exploring the chip sector over 10 years ago, starting from hugely lagging behind, to slightly lagging behind, to catching up, and then to a leader. We invested massive resources for R&D, and went through a difficult process.”

    Before Washington added Huawei and a bunch of its subsidiaries to an American blacklist,

    a subsidiary of Huawei produces its own chips based on designs owned by ARM

    He called it a “huge loss” to the company. But it’s a problem that Huawei can only face once, as it seeks to mimic Apple by producing more of its own chips.

    But since Huawei hasn’t developed nearly as much in terms of resources to developing their manufacturing capacity (as opposed to the company’s design capacity, which has thrived, bolstered by plenty of stolen IP). And the death of Huawei’s Kirin9000 chipsets, manufactured for the company by TSMC, appear to already creating new constraints for Huawei’s 2020 and 2021 smartphone shipments.

    Here’s more on that from Caixin, the Chinese financial news organization:

    The Kirin9000 chipsets have been produced by Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co. (TSMC) with U.S. equipment. In July, the Taiwan contract chipmaker said it stopped taking new orders from Huawei in May.

    Yu said Huawei’s smartphone shipments this year will be less than last year’s 240 million units reflecting the chip shortage caused by the U.S. trade ban. Huawei’s global shipments in the second quarter totaled 55.8 million phones, surpassing Samsung for the first time to become the world’s largest mobile phone vendor.

    However, facing disruptions in its supply chain, Yu said he regretted that Huawei had only invested in developing chips, not in manufacturing them. “After Sept. 15, we will neither be able to produce our flagship chipsets, nor our chips with AI processing capabilities — this is a huge loss to us,” he told the event.

    He said Huawei is determined to solve the problems by making breakthroughs in technology innovations on operation systems, chips, data and cloud services. He also called on China’s chip industry to make advancements on chip manufacturing and new generation semiconductors.

    In the first-half of the year, Huawei’s consumer business garnered 255.8 billion yuan in sales revenue and sold more than 105 million smartphones.

    Since winding up on the Commerce Department’s trade ‘blacklist’, Huawei has invested heavily in R&D. But no matter how fast it innovates, the company still can’t escape the reality of a globally diversified supply chain illustrated in the chart below:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Huawei has still managed to eclipse Samsung in terms of sales, but it is still overwhelmingly dependent on the Chinese market.

    In the second quarter, over 70% of its device shipments were in China, where the Covid-19 pandemic and associated lock-downs is thought to have contributed to boosting sales by 8%. Its shipments in markets outside China, however, dropped 27%.

    “Strength in China alone will not be enough to sustain Huawei at the top once the global economy starts to recover,” said Mo Jia an analyst at Canalys. “Its major channel partners in key regions, such as Europe, are increasingly wary of ranging Huawei devices, taking on fewer models, and bringing in new brands to reduce risk.”

    To be effectively compete against Samsung, Huawei needs to dominate. And the Trump Administration’s sanctions are about to make that much more difficult.

  • From "Corona-Totalitarianism" To The Invasion Of The "New Normals"
    From “Corona-Totalitarianism” To The Invasion Of The “New Normals”

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/10/2020 – 23:55

    Authored by CJ Hopkins (satirically) via The Consent Factory,

    They’re here! No, not the pod people from Invasion of the Body Snatchers.

    We’re not being colonized by giant alien fruit.

    I’m afraid it is a little more serious than that.

    People’s minds are being taken over by a much more destructive and less otherworldly force… a force that transforms them overnight into aggressively paranoid, order-following, propaganda-parroting totalitarians.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    You know the people I’m talking about. Some of them are probably your friends and family, people you have known for years, and who had always seemed completely rational, but who are now convinced that we need to radically alter the fabric of human society to protect ourselves from a virus that causes mild to moderate flu-like symptoms (or absolutely no symptoms at all) in over 95% of those infected, and that over 99.6% survive, which, it goes without saying, is totally insane.

    I’ve been calling them “corona-totalitarians,” but I’m going to call them the “New Normals” from now on, as that more accurately evokes the pathologized-totalitarian ideology they are systematically spreading. At this point, I think it is important to do that, because, clearly, their ideological program has nothing to do with any actual virus, or any other actual public health threat. As is glaringly obvious to anyone whose mind has not been taken over yet, the “apocalyptic coronavirus pandemic” was always just a Trojan horse, a means of introducing the “New Normal,” which they’ve been doing since the very beginning.

    The official propaganda started in March, and it reached full intensity in early April. Suddenly, references to the “New Normal” were everywhere, not only in the leading corporate media (e.g., CNNNPRCNBCThe New York TimesThe GuardianThe AtlanticForbes, et al.)the IMF and the World Bank Group, the WEFUNWHOCDC (and the list goes on), but also on the blogs of athletic organizationsglobal management consulting firmscharter school websites, and random YouTube videos.

    The slogan has been relentlessly repeated (in a textbook totalitarian “big lie” fashion) for going on the past six months. We have heard it repeated so many times that many of us have forgotten how insane it is, the idea that the fundamental structure of society needs to be drastically and irrevocably altered on account of a virus that poses no threat to the vast majority of the human species.

    And, make no mistake, that is exactly what the “New Normal” movement intends to do. “New Normalism” is a classic totalitarian movement (albeit with a pathological twist), and it is the goal of every totalitarian movement to radically, utterly transform society, to remake the world in its monstrous image.

    That is what totalitarianism is, this desire to establish complete control over everything and everyone, every thought, emotion, and human interaction. The character of its ideology changes (i.e., Nazism, Stalinism, Maoism, etc.), but this desire for complete control over people, over society, and ultimately life itself, is the essence of totalitarianism … and what has taken over the minds of the New Normals.

    In the New Normal society they want to establish, as in every totalitarian society, fear and conformity will be pervasive. Their ideology is a pathologized ideology (as opposed to, say, the racialized ideology of the Nazis), so its symbology will be pathological. Fear of disease, infection, and death, and obsessive attention to matters of health will dominate every aspect of life. Paranoid propaganda and ideological conditioning will be ubiquitous and constant.

    Everyone will be forced to wear medical masks to maintain a constant level of fear and an omnipresent atmosphere of sickness and death, as if the world were one big infectious disease ward. Everyone will wear these masks at all times, at work, at home, in their cars, everywhere. Anyone who fails or refuses to do so will be deemed “a threat to public health,” and beaten and arrested by the police or the military, or swarmed by mobs of New Normal vigilantes.

    Cities, regions, and entire countries will be subjected to random police-state lockdowns, which will be justified by the threat of “infection.” People will be confined to their homes for up to 23-hours a day, and allowed out only for “essential reasons.” Police and soldiers will patrol the streets, stopping people, checking their papers, and beating and arresting anyone out in public without the proper documents, or walking or standing too close to other people, like they are doing in Melbourne, Australia, currently.

    The threat of “infection” will be used to justify increasingly insane and authoritarian edicts, compulsory demonstration-of-fealty rituals, and eventually the elimination of all forms of dissent. Just as the Nazis believed they were waging a war against the “subhuman races,” the New Normals will be waging a war on “disease,” and on anyone who “endangers the public health” by challenging their ideological narrative. Like every other totalitarian movement, in the end, they will do whatever is necessary to purify society of “degenerate influences” (i.e., anyone who questions or disagrees with them, or who refuses to obey their every command). They are already aggressively censoring the Internet and banning their opponents’ political protests, and political leaders and the corporate media are systematically stigmatizing those of us who dare to challenge their official narrative as “extremists,” “Nazis,” “conspiracy theorists,” “covidiots,” “coronavirus deniers,” “anti-vaxxers,” and “esoteric” freaks. One German official even went so far as to demand that dissidents be deported … presumably on trains to somewhere in the East.

    Despite this increasing totalitarianization and pathologization of virtually everything, the New Normals will carry on with their lives as if everything were … well, completely normal. They will go out to restaurants and the movies in their masks. They will work, eat, and sleep in their masks. Families will go on holiday in their masks, or in their “Personal Protective Upper-Body Bubble-Wear.” They will arrive at the airport eight hours early, stand in their little color-coded boxes, and then follow the arrows on the floor to the “health officials” in the hazmat suits, who will take their temperature through their foreheads and shove ten-inch swabs into their sinus cavities. Parents who wish to forego this experience will have the option to preventatively vaccinate themselves and their children with the latest experimental vaccine (after signing a liability waiver, of course) within a week or so before their flights, and then present the officials with proof of vaccination (and of their compliance with various other “health guidelines”) on their digital Identity and Public Health Passports, or subdermal biometric chips.

    Children, as always, will suffer the worst of it. They will be terrorized and confused from the moment they are born, by their parents, their teachers, and by the society at large. They will be subjected to ideological conditioning and paranoid behavioral modification at every stage of their socialization … with fanciful reusable corporate plague masks branded with loveable cartoon charactersparanoia-inducing picture books for toddlers, and paranoid “social distancing” rituals, among other forms of psychological torture. This conditioning (or torture) will take place at home, as there will be no more schools, or rather, no public schools. The children of the wealthy will attend private schools, where they can be cost-effectively “socially-distanced.” Working class children will sit at home, alone, staring into screens, wearing their masks, their hyperactivity and anxiety disorders stabilized with anti-depressant medications.

    And so on … I think you get the picture. I hope so, because I don’t have the heart to go on.

    I pray this glimpse into the New Normal future has terrified and angered you enough to rise up against it before it is too late. This isn’t a joke, folks. The New Normals are serious. If you cannot see where their movement is headed, you do not understand totalitarianism. Once it starts, and reaches this stage, it does not stop, not without a fight. It continues to its logical conclusion. The way that usually happens is, people tell themselves it isn’t happening, it can’t be happening, not to us. They tell themselves this as the totalitarian program is implemented, step by step, one seemingly harmless step at a time. They conform, because, at first, the stakes aren’t so high, and their conformity leads to more conformity, and the next thing they know they’re telling their grandchildren that they had no idea where the trains were going.

    If you have made it through to the end of this essay, your mind hasn’t been taken over yet … the New Normals clicked off around paragraph 2.

    What that means is that it is your responsibility to speak up, and to do whatever else you can, to stop the New Normal future from becoming a reality. You will not be rewarded for it. You will be ridiculed and castigated for it. Your New Normal friends will hate you for it. Your New Normal family will forsake you for it. The New Normal police might arrest you for it. It is your responsibility to do it anyway … as, of course, it is also mine.

  • Mapping The World's Nuclear Reactor Landscape
    Mapping The World’s Nuclear Reactor Landscape

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/10/2020 – 23:35

    Following the 2011 Fukushima nuclear disaster in Japan, the most severe nuclear accident since Chernobyl, many nations reiterated their intent to wean off the energy source.

    However, as Visual Capitalist’s Omri Wallach details below, this sentiment is anything but universal – in many other regions of the world, nuclear power is still ramping up, and it’s expected to be a key energy source for decades to come.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Using data from the Power Reactor Information System, maintained by the International Atomic Energy Agency, the map above gives a comprehensive look at where nuclear reactors are subsiding, and where future capacity will reside.

    Increasing Global Nuclear Use

    Despite a dip in total capacity and active reactors last year, nuclear power still generated around 10% of the world’s electricity in 2019.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Part of the increased capacity came as Japan restarted some plants and European countries looked to replace aging reactors. But most of the growth is driven by new reactors coming online in Asia and the Middle East.

    China is soon to have more than 50 nuclear reactors, while India is set to become a top-ten producer once construction on new reactors is complete.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Decreasing Use in Western Europe and North America

    The slight downtrend from 450 operating reactors in 2018 to 443 in 2019 was the result of continued shutdowns in Europe and North America. Home to the majority of the world’s reactors, the two continents also have the oldest reactors, with many being retired.

    At the same time, European countries are leading the charge in reducing dependency on the energy source. Germany has pledged to close all nuclear plants by 2022, and Italy has already become the first country to completely shut down their plants.

    Despite leading in shutdowns, Europe still emerges as the most nuclear-reliant region for a majority of electricity production and consumption.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In addition, some countries are starting to reassess nuclear energy as a means of fighting climate change. Reactors don’t produce greenhouse gases during operation, and are more efficient (and safer) than wind and solar per unit of electricity.

    Facing steep emission reduction requirements, a variety of countries are looking to expand nuclear capacity or to begin planning for their first reactors.

    A New Generation of Nuclear Reactors?

    For those parties interested in the benefits of nuclear power, past accidents have also led towards a push for innovation in the field. That includes studies of miniature nuclear reactors that are easier to manage, as well as full-size reactors with robust redundancy measures that won’t physically melt down.

    Additionally, some reactors are being designed with the intention of utilizing accumulated nuclear waste—a byproduct of nuclear energy and weapon production that often had to be stored indefinitely—as a fuel source.

    With some regions aiming to reduce reliance on nuclear power, and others starting to embrace it, the landscape is certain to change.

  • China Faces Food Shortage As Droughts, Flooding, And Pests Ruin Harvest
    China Faces Food Shortage As Droughts, Flooding, And Pests Ruin Harvest

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/10/2020 – 23:15

    By Nicole Hao of Epoch Times

    Chinese Vice Premier Hu Chunhua recently asked the governors of each province in China to make sure the sown areas of agricultural crops would not shrink and crop yield won’t be reduced this year. At a food security meeting held in Beijing on July 27, he warned that governors would be punished if they failed to uphold the promise, including with dismissals.

    And when Chinese leader Xi Jinping visited northeastern Jilin Province on July 22, he told the local government to treat grain production as a priority task. The top officials’ emphasis on food supplies raised questions about whether China is facing a severe food shortage this year.

    In early July, the government organ China National Grain and Oils Information Center released its estimates that the corn supply gap in the 2020-2021 fiscal year would be 25 million metric tons—more than double the previous estimated 12 million metric tons.

    On Aug. 5, the Center estimated that China would import six million metric tons of wheat in the 12 months from June 2020 to May 2021, which would be the highest amount in the past seven years. The Center said the wheat would likely come from France, Russia, Lithuania, and Kazakhstan.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Farmers work in the fields in Yangzhou, Jiangsu, China on June 6, 2018. (VCG/VCG via Getty Images)

    In late January, Chinese authorities mandated that people stay at home to prevent the spread of COVID-19, farmers among them. Around March, restrictions eased and most farmers were allowed to go out again. But not long after, extreme weather across large swathes of China led to the destruction of crops. Since early June, heavy rain has befallen the country’s south, center, and east. Meanwhile, parts of the northwest and northeast are suffering from droughts. Pests such as locusts and fall armyworms have also invaded crops.  Farmers told The Epoch Times that they suspected that they would lose their harvest this year.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    China’s Vice Premier Hu Chunhua speaks at the Brazil-China Business Seminar in Beijing, China on October 25, 2019. (MADOKA IKEGAMI/POOL/AFP via Getty Images)

    Flooding

    Chinese farmers plant rice in 13 provinces, including Hunan, Hubei, Jiangxi, Anhui, Jiangsu, Zhejiang, Sichuan, Chongqing, Guizhou, Guangdong, Guangxi, Yunnan, and Fujian. All these provinces were impacted by flooding in June and July. Farmers plant rice at three different times of the year. The early season is planted in late March, and harvested in late June. The middle season is planted in early May and harvested in late September. The late season is planted in late June and harvested in mid-October. The flooding in June and July impacted all three seasons of rice planting.

    Mr. Li is from Poyang county, Jiangxi Province. He told the Chinese-language Epoch Times on July 18: “The early rice in our province was ruined before harvest. The mid-season rice was destroyed by the floods. Now it’s too late to plant the late rice.” While sobbing on the phone, Mr. Chen from Hunan Province said farmers in his area had no harvest this year. He and his fellow villagers were worried that they might not have enough food to eat, as flooding has hit the region continually.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A sports ground along the Yangtze River was inundated in Wuhan in China’s central Hubei Province on July 28, 2020. (STR/AFP via Getty Images)

    Droughts

    Wheat is mainly planted in central and northern China. Farmers only harvest once a year in late May to early June. Wheat production in Henan Province contributes to roughly a quarter of China’s total agricultural production. However, droughts killed the crops in Henan, Inner Mongolia, Gansu, Xinjiang, Jilin, and other northern provinces.

    Privately-run Chinese grains and oil wholesale platform CCTIN visited wheat production areas of Henan, Anhui, and Jiangsu provinces and reported that the quality of wheat in 2020 was worse than that in 2019, and production was 15 to 30 percent less than previous years.

    The situation in Inner Mongolia, Gansu, and Xinjiang is worse. State-run media Xinhua reported on June 16 that 50.7 percent of Inner Mongolia’s land suffered heavy droughts this year. The region mainly grows wheat, as well as soybeans and corn. Crops and wild grass were unable to grow, impacting local animal husbandry.

    State-run China News reported on June 3 that the dry bout led to almost no harvesting in Gansu Province this year. “I’m 50 years old. I had never seen a drought like this year,” a farmer in Yuzhong city, Gansu said in the report. One woman in Xinjiang shared a video on social media on July 17, showing large wheat fields that have dried up.

    “You think this yellow color is harvested [wheat]? They all died. Our farmers have no harvest at all this year,” she said.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Chinese media reports also noted that due to a two-month-long drought, two-thirds of the corn crops in northeastern Liaoning Province have dried up.

    Pests

    Meanwhile, nearby Jilin and Heilongjiang provinces reported native locust plagues in June. In late June, a foreign locust invasion entered China’s Yunnan Province in the southwest, from Laos, and continued moving to other regions. On July 27, Chinese Ministry of Agriculture and Rural Affairs organized a drill to wipe out locusts in Yunnan and estimated that more locusts would keep on entering China from Laos before late August.

    Farmers in southern Guangxi and Hunan provinces have also reported native locust plagues in June.

    And the fall armyworm, which enjoys feeding on corn, was reported to have destroyed crops in Shandong, Anhui, Jiangsu, Henan, and other provinces in July.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    An armyworm, which usually comes out at night, is seen on corn crop at a village of Menghai county in Xishuangbanna Dai Autonomous Prefecture, Yunnan Province, China, on July 12, 2019. (Aly Song/Reuters)

    Other Signs

    Recent trends in the Chinese market also indicated that there was a food shortage. China’s leading producer and supplier of processed agricultural products, state-run China Agri-Industries Holdings, announced on Aug. 3 that the central government released 3.6 million metric tons of state-reserved rice to the market recently, which were harvested from 2014 to 2019.

    China has a national grain reserves system in order to maintain food security, but how much the country actually possesses in reserve has been called into question. Meanwhile, all domestic grain prices have gone up in the first week of August, compared to the same period last year, according to data issued by Orient Securities and Huatai Securities.

    Soybean prices, in particular, jumped up 37.83 percent, from 3,454 yuan ($484.85) per metric ton in Aug. 2019 to 4,761 yuan ($682.1) per metric ton in Aug. 2020. The Chinese regime also recently made record purchases of U.S. agricultural goods. On July 29, China purchased its biggest-ever order of U.S. corn, 1.937 million metric tons, which will be delivered during the 2020-21 marketing year that begins on Sept. 1, according to the U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA).

    Orders in July also broke previous records. On July 14, USDA reported that China bought 1.762 million metric tons of corn and 129,000 metric tons of soybeans. On July 10, China ordered 1.365 million metric tons of U.S. corn, 130,000 metric tons of U.S. hard red winter wheat, and 190,000 metric tons of U.S. hard red spring wheat.

    Qin, an agriculture researcher in China who only gave his last name because he was not authorized to speak to foreign media, explained that grains have three primary uses in China, which are: food for human consumption, feed for livestock, and raw materials to make wine and other industrial products.

    He said the current shortage “won’t be as serious as people not having food to eat… The key is no feed for livestock and poultry. Then, people don’t have enough meat to eat,” Qin said.

    One final observation confirming that food in China is indeed becoming scarce: food inflation has been in the double digits for the past 12 months.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

  • Krugman Says Gold's Rise Has Nothing To Do With Investors Expecting Soaring Inflation
    Krugman Says Gold’s Rise Has Nothing To Do With Investors Expecting Soaring Inflation

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/10/2020 – 22:55

    Even in the most obvious of circumstances – the Fed printing trillions of dollars within the span of one fiscal quarter – Paul Krugman seems unable to make the basic link between purchasing power, the money supply and the price of gold, and refuses to even consider the recent worldview reversals in such prominent former deflationistas as Russell Napier, Albert Edwards and Russell Clark (all discussed previously).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Everyone’s favorite financial muppet took to Twitter over the weekend to offer his perfunctory take on an op-ed  written in the New York Times, titled “Why Is Everyone Buying Gold?” in which none other than the chief global strategist at Morgan Stanley, Ruchir Sharma, validated long-ridiculed goldbugs:

    Gold bugs — investors perpetually bullish on gold — have long been seen as a paranoid fringe of the financial world, holding the shiny asset as a hedge against a disaster they always think is near. But lately, they appear to be on to something.

    This year, gold is the best performing traditional asset in the world. Its price just topped $2,000 an ounce for the first time. From serious investors to newly minted day traders, everyone is talking up its virtues.

    “It seems we’re all gold bugs now,” the op-ed capitulates, without mocking that other “expert” from the WSJ who five years ago called gold a “pet rock.”

    It also attributes the rise in gold to Central Banks having lost control (or rather, as Russell Napier put it, conceded control to the government) and that inflation is a foregone conclusion, stating: “But the gold mania is also driven by a hunch that the easy money pouring out of central banks and government stimulus programs could trigger inflation, which makes it a more worrisome economic omen.”

    He’s spot on – but for the fact that the inflation, as defined by an expansion of the money supply and not rising prices, has already been created. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Likely irked by the fact that the NY Times published something on finance that redirects attention from his clueless echo chamber, Krugman took to Twitter in response. “Gold prices aren’t rising because investors expect inflation,” Krugman Tweeted. Instead, he claimed that gold prices were rising because bond yields are falling.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Hiding behind the central bank’s definition of inflation, which according to Keynesians doesn’t even happen until it shows up in the heavily manipulated CPI, Krugman argued: “The implied inflation forecast is actually lower than it was last year; what’s happened is a plunge in yields, reflecting economic pessimism,” he continued.

    He then Tweeted out two charts showing the 10 year breakeven inflation rate. But apparently, during his deep dive for his Twitter rant, the Nobel Prize winner wasn’t able to locate and post a chart of the M2 money supply, which may have offered up more clues as to why everyone bidding up gold. 

    In other words, nobody cares about the inflation forecast, Paul. They care about this:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Incidentally, one other thing that Krugman never even considered, is that gold is now a hedge to both runaway inflation and deflation, something we have discussed extensively here over the past decade.

    Then again, this is the same guy who said the internet’s effect on the world economy would be “no greater than the Fax Machine” (and yes, even the vacuous libtards at Snopes were forced to admit that their econ god is clueless). This is also the same “Nobel prize winner” who the day after Trump won boldly predicted that “markets will never recover” from a Trump victory and that “we are very probably looking at a global recession, with no end in sight.”

    Krugman concluded: “The thing is, we went through exactly this story in 2008-9: rising gold prices without rising inflation expectations bc of falling yields, and even a blip in TIPS prices during the post-Lehman financial disruption. No excuse for being confused now.”

    So thanks for the advice, but the only one confused here is you, Paul.  

  • Three Percent Of The Fed's Corporate Bond Holdings Are Junk Rated
    Three Percent Of The Fed’s Corporate Bond Holdings Are Junk Rated

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/10/2020 – 22:30

    It is only appropriate that on the day Ball Corporation sold a bond with the lowest “high” yield ever for a junk bond, at 2.875%…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … that the Fed would publish its latest corporate bond purchase data, in which we find that as of July 31, some 3% of the corporate bonds purchased by the Fed in its SMCCF facility, and 2.8% of corporate bond purchased via the Fed’s SMCCF broad market index were junk, or BB, rated (technically, some BB credits are likely IG, but for the sake of simplicity we will “round down” and assume all BBs are sub-investment grade).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Some other notable facts: as of last Monday, the Fed owned 916 CUSIPs outright, with a par value of $3.349BN, which include among others bonds issued by Berkshire Hathaway, foreign automakers such as Toyota, Nissan, Daimler, BMW and Hyundai; US giants such as Walmart, General Motors, General Electric, Visa, Microsoft, McDonalds, Novartis and Pfizer; REITs such as Simon Property, Duke Realty, National Retail Properties; Energy companies such as Exxon, Spectra Energy, Sempra Energy, Sabine Pass, Phillips 66, Kinder Morgan; non-ESG names such as Philip Morris and J&J and, of course, Apple.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Looking at just ETFs, as of July 31 the Fed had purchased $8.7ZBN in mostly IG ETFs, but also some high pardon “low yield” junk bond ETFs such as JNK, HYG and so on.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For brokered trades, the Fed purchased $2.37 billion directly from Wall Street firms, of which Morgan Stanley, Amherst Pierpont, Wells Fargo, Goldman and Barclays Capital were the biggest sellers of their own inventory.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Finally, when buying bonds in the open market, the Fed is infinitely generous purchasing CUSIPs at prices far, far above par, which we can only assume is in line with market prices however since the Fed must purchase these bonds, the broker on the trade can declare any offer and the Fed will have to lift it.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: The central planning hedge fund known as the Federal Reserve of the USSA.

  • 35% Of Small-Business Owners Tapped Personal Savings To Pay Rent, Wages During Pandemic
    35% Of Small-Business Owners Tapped Personal Savings To Pay Rent, Wages During Pandemic

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/10/2020 – 22:15

    As the federal government steps in to bail out overleveraged borrowers in the commercial real estate space, a growing body of evidence is highlighting the fact that Congress’s ‘PPP’ lending program – despite the fact that it has been extended through Aug. 8 – still wasn’t enough to save many small business owners from ruin (though there was unsurprisingly no shortage of fraud).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A survey published by CreditCards.com shows that 35% of small-business owners were forced to dip into emergency savings to help tide their business or businesses over.

    * * *

    Our July 2020 Small Business Poll uncovered a worrisome fact – 35% of American small-business decision-makers have tapped into personal funds to finance their businesses since the Coronavirus pandemic struck. That includes those who have dipped into a personal savings account (21%), used a personal credit card (24%) or both (10%).

    “It’s commendable how far these dedicated business owners are willing to go in search of their dreams,” says Ted Rossman, industry analyst at CreditCards.com. “I worry, however, about the debt they’re taking on, and how they’re potentially putting their personal finances at risk.”

    Also notably, 38% of business leaders have turned to either business or personal credit cards during this time, with 20% of those polled leaning on business cards.

    Paying off credit card debt can be stressful, but there’s a way to do so efficiently. Negotiating interest rates and paying more than the minimum are two ways to reduce the total time and amount of money repaid. “Many of the normal debt reduction tools are in shorter supply these days – for instance, 0% balance transfer offers have dried up due to worries about the economy. That’s why it’s so important to be creative and ask for a break,” Rossman added. Another good strategy: If you have multiple cards with balances and are able to put some money toward your debt, prioritize the highest interest rates in order to reduce the total interest expense.

    Meanwhile, the single most popular form of funding was Paycheck Protection Program loans from the Small Business Administration, used by 30% of small businesses.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Unfortunately, the negative effects of the pandemic are ongoing for many small-business owners, many of whom see trouble on the horizon. The majority of small-business leaders (53%) agree that they will need either an increase in sales or some type of assistance just to stay in business this year.

    • To stay afloat until 2021, small business decision-makers say they will need:
    • An increase in sales (32%)
    • Government assistance, such as stimulus funding (19%)
    • Any type of loan (13%)

    “I’m encouraged by the spirit behind these findings. Even in an incredibly difficult year, small businesses remain resilient and optimistic – they’re taking matters into their own hands. They’re important parts of our communities and our economy, and we’re rooting for them,” says Rossman.

    Methodology

    CreditCards.com commissioned YouGov Plc to conduct the survey. All figures, unless otherwise stated, are from YouGov Plc. The total sample size was 499 small-business decision-makers. Fieldwork was undertaken from July 14-20, 2020. The survey was carried out online and meets rigorous quality standards. It employed a non-probability-based sample using both quotas upfront during collection and then a weighting scheme on the back end designed and proven to provide nationally representative results.

    * * *

    Source: CreditCards.com

  • As US Bans 'WeChat', Chinese Turn To 'Signal', But Decentralization Is The Answer
    As US Bans ‘WeChat’, Chinese Turn To ‘Signal’, But Decentralization Is The Answer

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/10/2020 – 21:55

    Authored by Mathew Di Salvo via DeCrypt.co,

    Signal could help worried Chinese based in the US look for solutions to the ban on Chinese apps TikTok and WeChat. A decentralized platform could be the best option…

    President Donald Trump this week announced his intentions to ban US companies from transacting with Chinese payment and messenger app WeChat, leading to a spike in downloads for privacy-first messenger app Signal – and reigniting the debate on decentralized platforms. 

    The US President’s Thursday executive order is so far vague but “any transaction” with the platform from US companies will be prohibited. The order, which also bans such transactions with social media app TikTok will come into effect on September 20.

    Talk of banning TikTok started this year because the Trump administration was worried about the app collecting users’ data and the potential links its parent company, ByteDance, has with the Chinese government. 

    The WeChat ban had also been on the cards for a while. The two countries continue to aggressively clash heads during the coronavirus pandemic. 

    But while the US government was warning of banning WeChat, downloads of private messaging app Signal were soaring in China, according to a CNBC report. Unlike other messaging apps – Telegram, Facebook Messenger or WhatsApp – Signal isn’t banned in China. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So worried Chinese people living, studying, or doing business in the US can turn to the highly secretive app in place of WeChat to communicate with family and friends without fear of government snooping or being shut down—for now. 

    Signal downloads were also on the up in Hong Kong after Mainland China’s new security law hit the region. Despite WeChat’s popularity in China, it doesn’t have the same level of encryption as apps like Signal and WhatsApp.

    The case for blockchain-based chat apps

    But even though Signal is secure, it could technically be banned by the Chinese—or US—government tomorrow. That’s why decentralized chat apps or messaging systems are a must, some say. 

    “Decentralized chat would completely solve this problem [of government bans and snooping],” said Brad Kam, the co-founder of Dapp Unstoppable Domains, a decentralized domain name registrar that has built an Ethereum-based decentralized chat app, Unstoppable Chat.

    “The issue is that user data is sitting on Tencent’s [WeChat’s owner] servers and gets passed directly to the Chinese government. If WeChat were a decentralized chat app, then users would control their own messages stored on P2P storage networks. Not even WeChat would be able to read the messages,” he said.

    He added that Signal can still shut off users and any messaging app can be “hacked or shut down.”

    “Communication channels should not be pawns for geopolitical games,” he said.

    “They should be utilities for the people of the world.” 

    Chris Troutner, a Bitcoin Cash developer, also told Decrypt that decentralized messaging systems are the way forward.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    He said that although Signal and Telegram are highly praised for their privacy features, they could still be banned by governments. 

    “Decentralized, open-source, and end-to-end encrypted,” he added. “You really need all three [with a messaging app].” 

    His highly encrypted messaging system based on Bitcoin Cash transactions, bch-encrypt, went live this year. His team is working on refining it: an end-to-end encrypted messaging system that will look and feel a lot like email. 

  • "Game-Changing Capability" – Air Force One Is Going Hypersonic 
    “Game-Changing Capability” – Air Force One Is Going Hypersonic 

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/10/2020 – 21:35

    The U.S. Air Force and the Presidential and Executive Airlift Directorate announced they have partnered with an Atlanta-based company called Hermeus to develop a hypersonic Air Force One. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The partnership will allow for the development of a hypersonic aircraft for the presidential fleet, that can travel as fast as Mach 5. Hermeus successfully tested a Mach 5 engine prototype earlier this year. A demonstrator vehicle using the Mach 5 engines could be seen within the next five years. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Mach 5 is about 3,300 mph, would travel 2.5x faster than the Aérospatiale/BAC Concorde and about 43% faster than the Virgin Galactic Holdings’ proposed supersonic jet. 

    Here’s an excerpt from the Hermeus press release describing the new contract to build a hypersonic Air Force One: 

    Hermeus Corporation, the aerospace company developing Mach 5 commercial aircraft, has partnered with the U.S. Air Force and the Presidential and Executive Airlift Directorate to work toward hypersonic travel for the Department of Defense.  This award comes under an Other Transaction For Prototype Agreement Direct to Phase II contract through AFWERX after Hermeus successfully tested a Mach 5 engine prototype in February 2020.

    The effort is focused on rapidly assessing modifications to Hermeus Mach 5 aircraft to support the Presidential and Executive Airlift fleet.  Early integration of unique Air Force requirements for high-speed mobility and evaluation of interfaces between high-speed aircraft and existing communications, airport, and air traffic control infrastructure lays the groundwork for a seamless transition to service.  Additionally, Hermeus will prepare test plans to reduce technical risk associated with these modifications to support Air Force requirements. –Hermeus press release

    Brigadier General Ryan Britton, Program Executive Officer for Presidential and Executive Airlift, commented on the project: 

    “Leaps in capability are vital as we work to complicate the calculus of our adversaries. By leveraging commercial investment to drive new technologies into the Air Force, we are able to maximize our payback on the Department of Defense investments. The Presidential and Executive Airlift Directorate is proud to support Hermeus in making this game-changing capability a reality as we look to recapitalize the fleet in the future.”

    Hermeus’ cofounders are ex-Blue Origin, SpaceX, and Generation Orbit could be the team that develops the first hypersonic aircraft for the president. 

  • Predicting The Price Of Gold
    Predicting The Price Of Gold

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/10/2020 – 21:15

    Authored by Ritesh Jain via WorldOutOfWhack.com,

    Real Rates (Inflation-Nominal rates) are currently at -1% levels and it seems they may go down even lower. But they have been negative before during the 1940s in the post WW2 Era and in the 1970s STAGFLATION.

    Decline in real rates sometimes can be a deliberate policy to reduce the Debt burden of govt because the real value of debt falls with rising negative real rates. The policy of negative real rates is always preferred over the bitter pill of allowing companies to go bust.

    The US policy response post-COVID has been to print loads to money to reliquify the banking system and avoid defaults. With the rate of US M2 growth reaching 23%, and no chance of increase in policy rates in next couple of years the real rates can fall further in coming years.

    US real yields collapse as specter of inflation returns

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    When real rates decline, gold’s value tends to go up more because GOLD is a perpetual Zero coupon bond and holding Zero coupon asset with limited supply is better than holding negative real rate asset like US treasury whose supply is unlimited by issuance.Negative real rate also mean that you need to be an asset owner to maintain the purchasing value of depreciating paper currency.

    I strongly believe that we are like ( 1942-51 ) headed to -3% to -4% real rates and if that is the expectation on real rates is there a way of mathematically finding the value of GOLD in that environment?

    While I was grappling with the question of having an input (-3 to -4%) value but not the output i.e value of GOLD at that level of negative real rates, there came along an article from the Bloomberg columnist on this subject.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    [ZH: we note that during the late ’70s negative real yield period, gold soared above $3,000 on an inflation-adjusted basis]

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The analysis by Ven Ram (Currency and rates strategist for Bloomberg’s Markets) shows that the duration of gold is 17 when interest rates go up and 20 when yields trend lower, suggesting that the second derivative of the shift in rates is alive and kicking. Back in 2018, Pimco found a duration of almost 30.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Gold has been on a tear this year, having surged 35% in response to a 120-basis point slump in real interest rates. Other catalysts include low global yields; erosion of confidence in global fiat money in general and a weaker dollar in particular; unbridled global monetary and fiscal stimulus; investor purchases through exchange-traded funds in response to uncertainty about the evolution of the pandemic.

    However, the outlook for gold gets murky once it goes to around $2,500 an ounce. Beyond that level, it would imply a massive plunge in real rates and an even sharper rally in breakevens than what we have already seen.

    Correlations suggest these factors would also imply a big decline in nominal 10-year yields, which currently sit near 0.50%. Such a move would essentially mean the markets are pricing in a depression-like scenario. Should it play out, the study indicates gold may be propelled toward $3,000 should real yields slump to -3.15%.

    Given that gold has a longer duration than linkers, the metal offers a balance sheet-economical way to hedge against inflation.

    Conclusion

    We believe that US is going to have real rates south of -3% and the time period it is analogous to is the 1940s when real rates averaged -3.14%.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On this basis we believe that gold may reach levels of $3000 and go even higher if real rates go below -4%.

  • "Financially Devastated" – 83% Of NYC Restaurants Unable To Pay July Rent
    “Financially Devastated” – 83% Of NYC Restaurants Unable To Pay July Rent

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/10/2020 – 20:55

    The state of the New York City restaurant industry is in dire straits. July proved to be another disastrous month for restaurants, bars, and nightlife establishments across the city with a majority unable to pay rent in July, a new survey found.

    NYC Hospitality Alliance surveyed about 500 owners and operators of eateries in the city, with 83% of respondents indicating they couldn’t pay the entire rent in July while 37% paid no rent at all. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Restaurants and nightlife venues are essential to the economic and social fabric of our city, but they are struggling to survive and absent immediate and sweeping relief so many will be forced to close permanently,” said Andrew Rigie, executive director of The Alliance.

    “While complying with the necessary pause, our industry has been uniquely and financially devasted. Small businesses urgently need solutions from government leaders at the city, state, and federal level, inclusive of extending the moratorium on evictions, extending the suspension of personal liability guarantees in leases, pausing commercial rent taxes, providing landlords with needed support, and infusing small businesses with enough cash to weather the storm,” Rigie said.

    To make matters worse, 71% of owners and operators said landlords “would not waive portions of rent due to COVID-19.” About 61% said, landlords “would not defer rent payments,” while 90% of landlords “would not formally renegotiate leases.”

    Indoor dining in the city remains halted, “outdoor dining service is not generating sufficient revenue to cover rent and other expenses, small business owners in the industry continue to express significant concerns about surviving the pandemic and staying viable in the future,” said The Alliance.

    Through July, OpenTable restaurant data reveals foot traffic at eateries remains depressed. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We recently outlined how high-frequency data suggests New York City’s recovery has stalled, as well as the US recovery has reversed

    Some restaurants in the city are just calling it quits, liquidating everything they have on Facebook Marketplace

    Is New York City in a depression? 

  • Watch: The Moment Secret Service Shoots Gun-Toting Man Outside White House
    Watch: The Moment Secret Service Shoots Gun-Toting Man Outside White House

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/10/2020 – 20:54

    Video has emerged of the man shot by Secret Service Monday afternoon, said to be a -year-old who walked up to an agent and told them he had a weapon. He made a “drawing motion” and “crouched into a shooter stance” before he was fired upon.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *  *  *

    In the latest indication of just how chaotic things are becoming in America, on a day when the city of Chicago is being overrun by violent criminal gangs, President Trump was abruptly pulled from the podium at the start of Monday night’s WH press briefing.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Trump left the podium after a Secret Service agent appeared to speak to say something to him privately. Another agent outside the room locked the doors. No reasons were given. Rumors of a lockdown and shots fired surged through the crowd.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    However, Trump soon returned, and explained that a shooting had just taken place outside the White House.

    “There was a shooting outside of the White House,” Trump said. “There was an actual shooting and somebody’s been taken to the hospital.”

    He added that Fox News reporter John Roberts had heard two gunshots. Asked if he was rattled, Trump replied “do I seem rattled?”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    An individual was shot by the Secret Service outside the White House at 17th and Pennsylvania. The armed suspect has been taken to a nearby hospital.

    Reporters at the briefing tweets photos of locked doors and generally sounded more panicked than the situation probably warranted. And especially since so many of them have actively supported violent rioters and looters.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Some found humor in this discrepancy.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Watch a live feed below.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  • Chaos In Chicago: Bridges Raised To Prevent Gun-Toting Looters Getting Downtown
    Chaos In Chicago: Bridges Raised To Prevent Gun-Toting Looters Getting Downtown

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/10/2020 – 20:43

    Hundreds of ‘mostly peaceful protesters’ swept through the Magnificent Mile and other parts of downtown Chicago early Monday, smashing windows, looting stores, confronting police and at one point exchanging gunfire with officers, authorities said.

    As The Chicago Tribune reports, officers had stopped several people on Lake Street near Michigan Avenue when shots were fired from a passing car around 4:30 a.m., nearly five hours into the widespread vandalism, according to police spokesman Tom Ahern.

    No officers were shot but a squad car was hit, he said. It was not known if anyone in the gunman’s car was shot.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Police made “a lot of arrests” and recovered at least one gun, officials said.

    And that escalation, as Summit News’ Paul Joseph Watson details, prompted Chicago authorities took the decision to raise all major bridges in an effort to prevent looters reaching the downtown area after a night of chaos.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Luxury department stores were ransacked as hundreds of looters caused mayhem in response to the police shooting of an armed suspect in Englewood.

    Police sent to respond to the looting were physically attacked, prompting authorities to raise major bridges in order to keep more people out of the area.

    “All bridges are being raised along the river throughout The Loop,” reports CBS Chicago. “Chicago’s Office of Emergency Management announced street closures throughout areas in the Magnificent Mile, Gold Coast and South Loop.”

    Numerous bus and train services have also been suspended, while large areas of downtown Chicago are also closed.

    Bridges were previously raised last month in an effort to keep Black Lives Matter protesters away from the business district, but the call to do so this time around appears to have come too late.

  • Iran 'Accidentally' Sank Mock US Aircraft Carrier In Wrong Place
    Iran ‘Accidentally’ Sank Mock US Aircraft Carrier In Wrong Place

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/10/2020 – 20:35

    Via AlMasdarNews.com,

    Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC) conducted a large-scale military exercise in the Persian Gulf in late July, as they showcased their naval capabilities and new weapons. During the exercises, the IRGC was seen attacking a mock U.S. aircraft carrier that was positioned near the Strait of Hormuz.

    It was expected that Iran would not fully destroy this replica of the U.S.S. Nimitz, as they would use it for future military drills; however, as shown in the photo below, the aircraft carrier is submerged in the Persian Gulf.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As pointed out by South Front, who quoted an expert from the Forbes article that was previously posted about the vessel, this aircraft carrier was not meant to sink.

    In fact, during the military drills in the Persian Gulf, the IRGC’s soldiers could be seen landing on the aircraft carrier from one of their transport helicopters.

    “The Iranian armed forces, particularly the IRGC-N (Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps Navy) delight in attacking the mock U.S. Navy aircraft carrier. It makes their war games more dramatic. And it may be intended to symbolize that they could, if called upon, sink an American carrier,” the Forbes article said.

    “The carrier itself, actually an elaborate target barge, is not intended to sink, however. It is meant to be reusable and has been symbolically ‘destroyed’ twice already. But now it really has sunk. And in very much the wrong place,” the report continued.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Iranian media image showing military drills utilizing the mock carrier. 

    The Iranian drills have since been condemned by the U.S. because of the IRGC’s exercise near the strategic Strait of Hormuz.

  • Global COVID-19 Pandemic Surpasses 20 Million Confirmed Cases: Live Updates
    Global COVID-19 Pandemic Surpasses 20 Million Confirmed Cases: Live Updates

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/10/2020 – 20:17

    Summary:

    • Global COVID count tops 20 Million
    • Cali sees “encouraging signs”, Gov Newsom says
    • “Big Ten” cancels season
    • California reports 7,751 new cases, says it has fixed reporting issues
    • NJ transmission rate shows virus no longer spreading in state
    • Arizona COVID outbreak continues to slow; ICU rates decline again
    • NY reports just 2 COVID deaths as positivity rate lingers near record low
    • Florida cases continue to decline
    • World on the cusp of 20 million confirmed COVID cases
    • WHO praises Paris mask order
    • Paris mandatory outdoor mask rules take effect
    • WHO warns “majority of world still susceptible” to COVID
    • Germany warns of “alarming” rise in new cases
    • Former Indian president tests positive
    • Situation in Pakistan improves as lockdowns ease
    • Lebanon suffers worst jump in infections yet

    * * *

    Update (2000ET): As expected, Johns Hopkins has just confirmed that the number of confirmed COVID-19 cases worldwide has surpassed 20 million since the start of the pandemic. Of those, more than 700,000 have died.

    It comes just days after the US, the world’s biggest outbreak, topped 5 million, and Brazil, the No. 2, topped 3 million.

    Meanwhile, Cali Governor Gavin Newsom said trends point to “encouraging signs” in California’s virus outbreak. Hospitalizations have dropped 19% in the last 14 days, while the number of people in intensive care fell 13% over the same period.

    Millions more cases are likely unconfirmed…

    * * *

    Update (1600ET): “Big Ten” just became the first major college football conference to cancel the upcoming season, despite insistence that the conference would do whatever it could to continue with play.

    The Big Ten became the first “Power Five” conference to cancel football for the upcoming season, forgoing a major revenue source as the pandemic upends college sports, the Detroit Free Press reported.

    School presidents voted Sunday to cancel fall sports and an official announcement is expected Tuesday, the newspaper said. The tally was 12-2, with only the University of Nebraska and the University of Iowa voting to play, Dan Patrick said Monday on his radio show. Over the weekend, the Mid-American Conference became the first in the FBS, or Football Bowl Subdivision, to scrap its 2020 season.

    It follows UConn’s decision to cancel college football last week.

    A preliminary reading on new US cases found they slowed again on Monday.

    • U.S. VIRUS CASES RISE 0.9% VS 7-DAY AVERAGE GAIN OF 1.1%

    * * *

    Update (1420ET): California reported 7,751 new cases on Monday, slightly above yesterday’s total, though officials said that some of the cases might belong to prior days, as the state has only just finally fixed its lab reporting issues supposedly caused the state to undercount cases for weeks.

    • CALIFORNIA DATA MAY INCLUDE CASES FROM PRIOR DAYS
    • CALIFORNIA SAYS LAB REPORTING ISSUES HAVE BEEN CORRECTED
    • CALIFORNIA SEES 7,751 NEW VIRUS CASES VS 7,240-DAY AVE
    • CALIFORNIA 14-DAY POSITIVITY RATE DROPS TO 6.0% FROM 6.1%

    * * *

    Update (1325ET): NJ has just celebrated a promising milestone: Its statewide transmission rate has hit a promising new low, suggesting that the virus is no longer circulating in the state…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    …for the first time since July 25.

    That’s good news, after a handful of distressingly high readings on the transmission rate sparked fears of a northeastern 2nd wave.

    * * *

    Update (1150ET): Arizona reported just 600 new cases on Monday, along with just 4 new deaths, as the outbreak in the state continues to slow, spurred by Gov. Doug Ducey’s quick reaction time on reimposing restrictions on bars and restaurants, along with other measures, when the numbers started to climb.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, ICU bed availability continues to increase as the number of occupied beds falls.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here’s a summary of Arizona hospital assets from Monday.

    * * *

    Update (1135ET): NY Gov Andrew Cuomo on Monday revealed that the state’s positivity rate remains just above its record lows set last week, while deaths have declined to just 2 New Yorkers.

    Those are some good numbers, and will undoubtedly help strengthen the governor’s case for most of the state to return to “hybrid” learning when schools reopen later this month.

    * * *

    Update (1110ET): South Dakota Gov. Kirsti Noem, who recently was accused by the NYT of angling for VP Pence’s job, just tweeted her critics a dose of perspective.

    Are you saying the government has an obligation to defend personal liberty even during periods of excessive fear? But…but…but

    * * *

    Update (1040ET): Florida reports 91 new COVID-19 deaths for Monday, which was slightly higher than the total from the prior day, while Florida cases increased by 4,155 to 536,961 as a slowdown in newly confirmed cases continued.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Almost as notable: the statewide positivity rate declined to 8.6%, the rate for all tests declined to 12.3%.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, the Orlando Sun-Sentinel, a local paper that has, in our view, done a fantastic job covering local COVID-19-related issues, reported that boaters and partiers at Lake Boca are starting to get on the nerves of state public-health officials.

    The party continues on Lake Boca despite the COVID-19 crisis, and a lack of enforcement by police and state authorities means boaters could be spreading the coronavirus as they soak in the sun.

    Dozens of boaters anchor at the popular site on weekends, some tying their boats together in a practice known as “rafting.”

    Government orders on social distancing prohibit rafting, but no one agency — the city police, the county sheriff or the state wildlife commission – is responsible for policing the boaters’ behavior. And all three say they rely on warnings rather than citations to encourage correct behavior.

    Some local officials say it’s time for things to change.

    Boca Raton City Council Member Andy Thomson said he has heard complaints about rafting on many waterways, including Lake Boca, as people get increasingly eager to return to normalcy.

    “As time has gone on in the midst of the pandemic, more and more people are wanting to go out on the boats,” Thomson said. “They can still go out on their boats; they can go wherever they want. They just can’t be rafting.”

    Others feel the same. Some took to social media expressing concern with the crowds they’ve seen over the past few weeks.

    On July 19, a user posted Facebook photos of dozens of boats gathered with the caption “This is NOT social distancing on lake boca!!!”

    Maybe everybody who has a problem with the way they social distance in ‘Boca can go ‘social distance’ somewhere else.

    Either that, or stop complaining.

    * * *

    As global confirmed COVID-19 cases near 20 million (with potentially millions more that were never catalogued), an uptick in new cases has inspired Paris officials to impose dramatic new restrictions involving mandatory mask wearing. Masks must now be worn in public, even outdoors.

    The order was announced over the weekend. it applies to people aged 11 and over, and covers busy outdoor areas in the French capital and more than 100 streets, although tourist sites such as the Eiffel Tower, the Arc de Triomphe and Champs-Elysees boulevard are not included, as French politicians continue to extend concessions to the badly battered tourism industry.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As the BBC points out, the Paris mask rule is part of a trend of localized restrictions sweeping Europe.

    The new mask rule in Paris is part of a pattern that is spreading across the country – indeed across Europe – as governments try to stamp down the new virus embers.

    It has been obvious for weeks that in some much-frequented parts of the capital, keeping the one-metre (3.2ft) rule is a challenge.

    On the Seine quays for example, walkers, joggers and cyclists brush past revellers at the many riverside bars.

    Masks are already obligatory in France in all enclosed public spaces – including inside tourist attractions like the Louvre and the Eiffel Tower.

    And across the country, well over 1,000 towns and cities have prescribed face coverings in certain streets and neighbourhoods.

    The main target of the rules are young people who gather to enjoy the holiday and the sunshine.

    All the evidence shows that they are the group among whom infection is growing fastest.

    They may be at a lower risk of becoming seriously ill from the virus than older people. It is their role as vectors that is a cause for concern.

    A top US health official has praised Taiwan’s response to the coronavirus pandemic, hailing it as “among the most successful in the world”, during a rare diplomatic visit to the island.

    Elsewhere in Europe, Germany’s economy minister warned of an “alarming” rise in infections. “We need to flatten the curve and turn this around,” Peter Altmaier told German press as schoolchildren in Berlin return to classrooms for the first time in months. Germany has also seen its single-day case count top 1,000 for the first time in weeks.

    With the world on the cusp of reporting 20 million confirmed cases of the coronavirus, the WHO delivered a stark warning during a Monday morning press briefing from Geneva: the majority of the world’s population remains susceptible to infection.

    Dr Maria Van Kerkhove, famously the agency’s technical lead on COVID-19 research who once caused an uproar by declaring asymptomatic transmission a “rare” event, and seemingly undercutting the case for compulsory mask-wearing, told reporters on Monday that there was “no indication that there is seasonality with this virus” and urged people to do everything they could, including physical distancing, wearing a mask where appropriate and avoiding crowded settings, to prevent the spread of infection.

    Earlier, the WHO’s Director General Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus praised the UK’s decision to take “targeted action” by imposing ‘partial lockdowns’ in parts of Leicester and parts of northern England.

    Dr. Tedros told the briefing: “Strong and precise measures like these, in combination with utilizing every tool at our disposal, are key to preventing any resurgence in COVID-19 and allowing societies to be reopened safely.”

    After crossing the 2 million mark last week, infections in India have slowed slightly as antibody surveillance testing suggests that some of the worst-hit slums in Mumbai and New Delhi have achieved roughly 50% infection rates, not far from levels where ‘herd immunity’ might come into play.

    What’s more, on Monday, Pranab Mukherjee, India’s president from 2012-2017, has just announced that he has tested positive for the virus.

    But the world’s second-most-populous country hasn’t had nearly as much success as its neighbor, Pakistan, where the outbreak has continued to wane as the country’s ‘partial lockdowns’ have been slowly unwound.

    Here’s more on that from the BBC:

    With restaurants, cinemas and tourist spots reopening (albeit with some restrictions in place) life in Pakistan is returning to “normal”.

    Partial lockdowns have been in place since March, but have been progressively eased.

    With just over 6,000 coronavirus deaths in a population of about 230 million, despite the country’s weak healthcare system, Pakistan appears to have fared far better than many in the West.

    Finally, as anti-government protesters return to the streets, clashing with security forces, Lebanon reported its highest daily increase in coronavirus infections yet on Monday, compounding the country’s problems after a devastating explosion tore through Beirut last week.

    Another 294 cases were recorded on Sunday, bringing the country’s total number of infections to 6,517, per health ministry data.

  • Police Comb "Thousands Of Hours" Of CCTV Footage, Make Looting Arrests Months After George Floyd Protests
    Police Comb “Thousands Of Hours” Of CCTV Footage, Make Looting Arrests Months After George Floyd Protests

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/10/2020 – 20:15

    Police across multiple US cities that months ago were scenes of often deadly rioting linked to George Floyd and Black Lives Matter protests are pouring through thousands of hours of surveillance footage to nab suspects far after the crimes.

    This comes after business owners whose stores were subject of severe vandalism and mass looting pressured authorities to act after many police departments appeared helpless when the mayhem was initially unleashed during those spring and early summer weeks.

    Philly Voice reports this is especially the case in Atlantic City, New Jersey, where “Police Chief Henry White announced the arrests Thursday, pointing to a lengthy investigation that relied heavily on video evidence recorded by public and private cameras.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    AP image, looting in Minneapolis 

    At the time of the riots, which hit Atlantic City particularly hard starting at the end of May, there was national media pressure for law enforcement not to act, as people unleashing mayhem in the streets, even including looters, seemed to be lionized somehow as part of advancing civil rights. This even as some among protest leaders themselves urged for an end to looting and destruction, saying the movement must remain peaceful.

    The belated arrests were part of a herculean joint effort between law enforcement and local business owners. Philly Voice underscores that after police chief White set up a task force to comb through literally “thousands of hours” of street video surveillance, they identified at least 200 criminal acts, after which specific photos of individuals were released to the public.

    “On June 30, authorities released photos of more than 200 people who they said were involved in criminal acts but whose identities were unknown to the authorities,” the report says. “After following up on every tip and working directly with 57 business owners, police said they have been able to file charges against 95 people.”

    We noted in June that the FBI has its own program for combing through social media and video footage, identifying suspects.

    For example in Chicago people were caught openly bragging about how many goods they stole during the riots, posting their own pictures to boot, leading to arrests.

    Meanwhile, just this weekend in Chicago, police will have more video to examine:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    However, it remains unclear the degree which other major cities will go deep into investigations looking to nab vandals and looters. For many police chiefs and elected city officials, it won’t be a politically correct move and thus is likely to conveniently remain on the back burner, if pursued at all.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 10th August 2020

  • Defiant Erdogan Says Turkey Has Resumed Mediterranean Gas Exploration & Drilling
    Defiant Erdogan Says Turkey Has Resumed Mediterranean Gas Exploration & Drilling

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/10/2020 – 02:45

    While over a week ago it was looking as if Turkey might back down on its ambitious oil and gas exploration aims in the eastern Mediterranean amidst global pressure, especially coming from the EU and US, President Erdogan is defiant once again, announcing Friday the resumption of energy exploration work that Greece and Cyprus says violates their territorial waters.

    Emerging from Friday prayers at Hagia Sophia – which Turkey recently declared a mosque (in another shot aimed at Greece) – Erdogan said: “We have started drilling work again,” and added, “I don’t think we are obligated to talk to those who do not have rights in the areas of maritime powers.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via Reuters

    Erdogan said a seismic survey ship is currently en route to the disputed region to continue its energy exploration.

    The Turkish president’s comments were also seen as a firm rejected of a recent Greece and Egyptian deal defining their exclusive economic zones in contradiction to Ankara’s interpretation.

    Turkey denied the agreement as “null and void” — which means Turkey’s expansionist claims are being contested by pretty much every Mediterranean country, also including Israel. The exception of course, is the Tripoli-based Libyan Government of National Accord (GNA), which lately inked its own agreement with Turkey defining broad swathes of the Mediterranean as within Turkey’s rights.

    Turkey has sought to argue that the so-called Turkish Republic of Cyprus, which remains unrecognized internationally, gives it expansive rights encompassing the whole of Cyprus.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via Anadolu Agency

    Meanwhile Greece has complained of weekly illegal Turkish military incursions of its airspace, in a situation that is becoming militarized by the week.

    Lately Greek forces have been on ‘high alert’ after Athens promised it would never let Turkish ships encroach of Greek maritime territory. The EU has also threatened sanctions over the past month as the crisis has grown. 

  • The NATO Conquest Of Eastern Europe
    The NATO Conquest Of Eastern Europe

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/10/2020 – 02:00

    Authored by ‘G2Mil’ via The Duran,

    General Dwight Eisenhower was the first NATO supreme allied commander.

    After assuming that post in 1951, General Eisenhower wrote about NATO’s goal:

    “If in 10 years, all American troops stationed in Europe for national defense purposes have not been returned to the United States, then this whole project will have failed.”

    It did fail because seven decades later, long after the Soviet Union dissolved, NATO still exists with thousands of American troops deployed throughout Europe.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Warsaw Pact was disbanded in 1991 as Soviet troops withdrew from Eastern Europe. The American empire exploited this peace to expand NATO and absorb former Warsaw Pact nations and even former Soviet republics while deploying NATO forces to Russia’s borders.

    Watched the linked video for details:

  • Big Pharma's 'Narrative' Is Failing
    Big Pharma’s ‘Narrative’ Is Failing

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/09/2020 – 23:45

    Authored by Bretigne Shaffer via LewRockwell.com,

    So now we don’t have to listen to what those doctors said in front of the US Supreme Court, because it turns out that one of them has some whacky beliefs about sex with demons causing reproductive disorders. What a relief.

    I’m not going to pretend that the things Dr. Stella Immanuel has said don’t sound just a little  crazy to me. They do.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But I’ve been observing this game long enough to have a pretty good idea of how this works:

    Someone says something that contradicts the dominant narrative (in this case, the narrative about medical science), and the machine that supports that narrative goes into overdrive to discredit them, with whatever information they can dig up–as long as it doesn’t involve discussing the actual substance of what the person has said.

    I understand that for some people, maybe even for a great many, that is the end of the conversation.

    So for everyone who is satisfied with the “fringe doctors promoting hydroxychloroquine also believe demon sex causes fybroids” narrative–please, stop here. Your ride is over, and you may go on believing that this group of doctors and other professionals has been thoroughly discredited by these statements.

    For everyone else, if you are at all interested in why such a coordinated effort has been launched to silence and discredit this group, why – even before the sex demon stuff was uncovered – videos of the group’s press conference were quickly yanked from YouTube, and why their own website was taken down without warning by its host, SquareSpace, (their new website can now be found here) then please keep reading.

    WHAT THE AMERICA’S FRONTLINE DOCTORS GROUP SAID:

    What follows is a brief summary of the key points made by the group America’s Frontline Doctors at their press conference last week. I will not comment on the validity of their claims, however founder Dr. Simone Gold has provided support for much of what the group said, in a white paper that can be found here.

    1. They believe that hydroxychloroquine is an effective treatment for Covid-19.

    This is the claim made by several of the speakers, including Dr. Immanuel, based on their own clinical experience, as well as on multiple published studies. Many of those studies are listed here, and here.

    2. State licensing boards are using their power to forcibly prevent people from having access to this drug.

    According to Dr. Gold, many states have empowered their pharmacists to not honor prescriptions for hydroxychloroquine to be used in treating Covid-19. This, she says, is unprecedented:

    “It has never happened that a state has threatened a doctor for prescribing a universally accepted safe generic cheap drug off-label.”

    Meanwhile, says Gold, the drug is available over the counter in many other countries, including Iran and Indonesia, where it can be found “in the vitamin section”.

    3. There is a coordinated campaign to discredit and suppress information about the drug hydroxychloroquine as a possible treatment for Covid-19:

    “If it seems like there is an orchestrated attack going on against hydroxychloroquine,” said Dr. James Todaro, “it’s because there is.”

    Dr. Todaro is speaking from experience. He was the co-author of a March 13 white paper arguing for the use of hydroxychloroquine against Covid-19. The paper was made public on Google Docs, received a lot of attention, and was then removed–without warning–by Google. (It has since been put back up.)

    4. The World Health Organization  halted its trials of hydroxychloroquine based on a blatantly fraudulent study that relied on data that it appears never even existed.

    Bear in mind that this is the authority upon which YouTube CEO Susan Wojcicki has said she bases her company’s policy on “misinformation”.

    The WHO later resumed trials after independent investigators discovered the problems and the study’s authors retracted it.

    5. We should be able to have a free and open discussion about this.

    Dr. Dr. Joseph Lapado from UCLA, sums it up:

    “We’ve been using (hydroxychloroquine) for a long time. But all of a sudden it’s been escalated to this area of looking like some poisonous drug. That just doesn’t make sense… At the very least, we can live in a world where there are differences of opinion about the effectiveness of hydroxychloroquine, but still allow more data to come, still allow physicians who feel they have expertise with it to use that medication, and still, you know, talk and learn and get better at helping people with Covid-19.”

    WHY THE ALL-OUT MEDIA ASSAULT ON THE FRONTLINE DOCTORS?:

    The influence that the pharmaceutical industry wields over media outlets is no secret. As of 2018, an estimated 70% of all news advertising in the US came from pharmaceutical companies. I have written elsewhere about how “reporting” on medical issues can be difficult to distinguish from outright marketing for drug companies.

    Social-media platforms are not immune to this influence, whether it comes via advertising dollars; “partnerships” such as that between the CDC Foundation and MailChimp (which like many other platforms, has an explicit policy of censoring content about vaccines that does not align with the positions of the CDC and the WHO); direct investment, such as that of Google’s parent company Alphabet; or indeed at the behest of politicians such as Congressman Adam Schiff, who last year wrote to the CEOs of Amazon, Facebook and Google, requesting that those companies censor information and products that did not conform to the officially sanctioned position on vaccines. All three complied.

    So it should come as small surprise that both Google and YouTube have now taken to removing content supportive of hydroxychloroquine, a drug that is no longer covered by patent, and can be made and sold by any generic producer, for a fraction of the price that Gilead, for example, might charge for its still-patented Remdesivir.

    Twitter and Facebook have likewise removed posts about the drug, most notably–and with no visible sense of irony–removing posts of the video in which the Frontline Doctors speak out about widespread media censorship of the topic. (You can now see those videos on Bitchute.)

    One need not have an opinion on the merits of the drug hydroxychloroquine in order to recognize that something very odd is happening here. Something that doesn’t seem to have anything to do with free and open inquiry or honest scientific discourse.

    Many argue that the politicization of this drug is founded in a desire to unseat President Trump, that the opposition to it is primarily because it was endorsed by Trump, and if it is deemed to be a failure (or even better, dangerous to patients) it will be a powerful strike against the president. That may well be part of what has motivated this. But there is another motivation, having to do with the desire to push a more expensive medication onto the market, and to push a new vaccine on the world’s population.

    More broadly, it has to do with the narrative that those in the business of selling drugs demand we believe: that we are all in desperate need of their products (but only the ones still under patent) if we are to be healthy–or indeed, if we are to survive at all.

    If it turns out that this “new” virus is easily treatable, with hydroxychloroquine or anything else, then the industry’s dreams go up in smoke. If hydroxychloroquine turns out to be a safe and effective way of treating Covid-19 (as multiple studies and the experience in many other countries outside of the US indicate it may be) then there is much less reason for anyone to receive a vaccine for it, let alone the entire world’s population. Likewise, there is no pressing need to develop a new, more expensive treatment.

    But even more than that: If it turns out that hydroxychloroquine is after all a safe and effective treatment for Covid-19, then this whole episode – the silencing of dissenting voices, the “fact-checking” on social media, the campaigns against “misinformation” – will be revealed in plain sight, for what it has always been: Nothing more than a well-funded marketing campaign and damage-control effort on behalf of the industry that wants you to believe that you need to use its expensive products in order to go on living.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So when a group of doctors took to the steps of the US Supreme Court and told the world how they were having success using a cheap anti-malarial that had been in use for 65 years to treat the most deadly contagion of our generation, it was a massive blow to the narrative upon which the pharmaceutical purveyors’ success depends. And over the next few days, as viewers engaged in a race with the censors, quickly downloading videos before they were removed, to post them on other platforms… it became clear that the censors and the gatekeepers had lost control of the conversation.

    This is not only about hydroxychloroquine. Every time media outlets or social-media platforms engage in outright censorship of content, in a way that happens to benefit pharmaceutical companies, both parties lose just a little more credibility. The actions we are witnessing now are not the actions of an industry confident in the value of what it provides to the world. They are the actions of a desperate, threatened creature. They are the actions of an entity that is not strengthened by the truth, but weakened by it. That is what these (increasingly obvious) acts of censorship tell us. What we are witnessing are the pangs of a lumbering, wounded, behemoth.

  • California Will Soon Be Paying $1,250 To People Who Test Positive For Coronavirus
    California Will Soon Be Paying $1,250 To People Who Test Positive For Coronavirus

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/09/2020 – 23:15

    Always looking for ways to one-up its own failed welfare state and run the Covid score up on President Trump, California has now approved a pilot plan to pay $1,250 to anyone who tests positive for coronavirus to encourage them to “stay at home and self isolate”. 

    Alameda County’s Board of Supervisors has set aside $10 million for the program, which will allow payments to 7,500 people, according to the Daily Mail. The program was approved as the county hit a new high in daily coronavirus cases and as California continues to “struggle” to contain the outbreak in its state. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The program is being “welcomed” by local healthcare providers, who say it’ll help those in working class areas stay at home and not spread the virus by leaving the house. 

    Andrea Schwab-Galindo, CEO of Tiburcio Vasquez Health Center in Hayward commented: “Literally every single person that we have spoken to through our contract tracing program, they have all asked for either food, help with rent, or access to be enrolled in healthcare. Most people that test positive are usually the members that are out there working and able to do that.”

    She continued: “You know, they are construction workers, they are grocery workers, so they are more exposed compared to some of the other family members they are trying to support, including their children.”

    Resident Robert Mangrobang also embraced the program, stating: “Yeah, whatever makes it a lot easier for people to deal with this pandemic would be great. Twelve hundred dollars or even more would be ideal for comforting a lot of families.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In order to qualify for the assistance, people who test positive must not be receiving unemployment or sick leave. Approval for the program will require a referral from one of the five approved clinics in the county. The board hopes the program will assist independent contractors, “people who are paid under the table” and “undocumented workers”. 

    Alameda County saw a large spike in cases on Wednesday, with 321 new cases reported. This was a new daily record for the county. 

    The area has a 28% positivity testing rate. For some reason, we bet that number rises. 

  • Escobar: Who Profits From The Beirut Blast?
    Escobar: Who Profits From The Beirut Blast?

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/09/2020 – 22:45

    Authored by Pepe Escobar via The Asia Times,

    The narrative that the Beirut explosion was an exclusive consequence of negligence and corruption by the current Lebanese government is now set in stone, at least in the Atlanticist sphere.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And yet, digging deeper, we find that negligence and corruption may have been fully exploited, via sabotage, to engineer it.

    Lebanon is prime John Le Carré territory. A multinational den of spies of all shades – House of Saud agents, Zionist operatives, “moderate rebel” weaponizers, Hezbollah intellectuals, debauched Arab “royalty,” self-glorified smugglers – in a context of full spectrum economic disaster afflicting a member of the Axis of Resistance, a perennial target of Israel alongside Syria and Iran.

    As if this were not volcanic enough, into the tragedy stepped President Trump to muddy the – already contaminated – Eastern Mediterranean waters. Briefed by “our great generals,” Trump on Tuesday said:

    “According to them – they would know better than I would – but they seem to think it was an attack.”

    Trump added, “it was a bomb of some kind.”

    Was this incandescent remark letting the cat out of the bag by revealing classified information? Or was the President launching another non sequitur?

    Trump eventually walked his comments back after the Pentagon declined to confirm his claim about what the “generals” had said and his defense secretary, Mark Esper, supported the accident explanation for the blast.

    It’s yet another graphic illustration of the war engulfing the Beltway. Trump: attack. Pentagon: accident.

    “I don’t think anybody can say right now,” Trump said on Wednesday. “I’ve heard it both ways.”

    Still, it’s worth noting a report by Iran’s Mehr News Agency that four US Navy reconnaissance planes were spotted near Beirut at the time of the blasts.

    Is US intel aware of what really happened all along the spectrum of possibilities?

    That ammonium nitrate

    Security at Beirut’s port – the nation’s prime economic hub – would have to be considered a top priority. But to adapt a line from Roman Polanski’s Chinatown: “Forget it, Jake. It’s Beirut.”

    Those by now iconic 2,750 tons of ammonium nitrate arrived in Beirut in September 2013 on board the Rhosus, a ship under Moldovan flag sailing from Batumi in Georgia to Mozambique. Rhosus ended up being impounded by Beirut’s Port State Control.

    Subsequently the ship was de facto abandoned by its owner, shady businessman Igor Grechushkin, born in Russia and a resident of Cyprus, who suspiciously “lost interest” in his relatively precious cargo, not even trying to sell it, dumping style, to pay off his debts.

    Grechushkin never paid his crew, who barely survived for several months before being repatriated on humanitarian grounds. The Cypriot government confirmed there was no request to Interpol from Lebanon to arrest him. The whole op feels like a cover – with the real recipients of the ammonium nitrate possibly being “moderate rebels” in Syria who use it to make IEDs and equip suicide trucks, such as the one that demolished the Al Kindi hospital in Aleppo.

    The 2,750 tons – packed in 1-ton bags labeled “Nitroprill HD” – were transferred to the Hangar 12 warehouse by the quayside. What followed was an astonishing case of serial negligence.

    From 2014 to 2017 letters from customs officials – a series of them – as well as proposed options to get rid of the dangerous cargo, exporting it or otherwise selling it, were simply ignored. Every time they tried to get a legal decision to dispose of the cargo, they got no answer from the Lebanese judiciary.

    When Lebanese Prime Minister Hassan Diab now proclaims, “Those responsible will pay the price,” context is absolutely essential.

    Neither the prime minister nor the president nor any of the cabinet ministers knew that the ammonium nitrate was stored in Hangar 12, former Iranian diplomat Amir Mousavi, the director of the Center for Strategic Studies and International Relations in Tehran, confirms. We’re talking about a massive IED, placed mid-city.

    The bureaucracy at Beirut’s port and the mafias who are actually in charge are closely linked to, among others, the al-Mostaqbal faction, which is led by former Prime Minister Saad al-Hariri, himself fully backed by the House of Saud.

    The immensely corrupt Hariri was removed from power in October 2019 amid serious protests. His cronies “disappeared” at least $20 billion from Lebanon’s treasury – which seriously aggravated the nation’s currency crisis.

    No wonder the current government – where we have Prime Minister Diab backed by Hezbollah – had not been informed about the ammonium nitrate.

    Ammonium nitrate is quite stable, making it one of the safest explosives used in mining. Fire normally won’t set it off. It becomes highly explosive only if contaminated – for instance by oil – or heated to a point where it undergoes chemical changes that produce a sort of impermeable cocoon around it in which oxygen can build up to a dangerous level where an ignition can cause an explosion.

    Why, after sleeping in Hangar 12 for seven years, did this pile suddenly feel an itch to explode?

    So far, the prime straight to the point explanation, by Middle East expert Elijah Magnier, points to the tragedy being “sparked” – literally – by a clueless blacksmith with a blowtorch operating quite close to the unsecured ammonium nitrate. Unsecured due, once again, to negligence and corruption – or as part of an intentional “mistake” anticipating the possibility of a future blast.

    This scenario, though, does not explain the initial “fireworks” explosion. And certainly does not explain what no one – at least in the West – is talking about: the deliberate fires set to an Iranian market in Ajam in the UAE, and also to a series of food/agricultural warehouses in Najaf, Iraq, immediately after the Beirut tragedy.

    Follow the money

    Lebanon – boasting assets and real estate worth trillions of dollars – is a juicy peach for global finance vultures. To grab these assets at rock bottom prices, in the middle of the New Great Depression, is simply irresistible. In parallel, the IMF vulture would embark on full shakedown mode and finally “forgive” some of Beirut’s debts as long as a harsh variation of “structural adjustment” is imposed.

    Who profits, in this case, are the geopolitical and geoeconomic interests of US, Saudi Arabia and France. It’s no accident that President Macron, a dutifulRothschild servant, arrived in Beirut Thursday to pledge Paris neocolonial “support” and all but impose, like a Viceroy, a comprehensive set of “reforms”. A Monty Python-infused dialogue, complete with heavy French accent, might have followed along these lines: “We want to buy your port.” “It’s not for sale.” “Oh, what a pity, an accident just happened.”

    Already a month ago the IMF was “warning” that “implosion” in Lebanon was “accelerating.” Prime Minister Diab had to accept the proverbial “offer you can’t refuse” and thus “unlock billions of dollars in donor funds.” Or else. The non-stop run on the Lebanese currency, for over a year now, was just a – relatively polite – warning.

    This is happening amid a massive global asset grab characterized in the larger context by American GDP down by almost 40%, arrays of bankruptcies, a handful of billionaires amassing unbelievable profits and too-big-to-fail megabanks duly bailed out with a tsunami of free money.

    Dag Detter, a Swedish financier, and Nasser Saidi, a former Lebanese minister and central bank vice governor, suggest that the nation’s assets be placed in a national wealth fund. Juicy assets include Electricité du Liban (EDL), water utilities, airports, the MEA airline , telecom company OGERO, the Casino du Liban.

    EDL, for instance, is responsible for 30% of Beirut’s budget deficit.

    That’s not nearly enough for the IMF and Western mega banks. They want to gobble up the whole thing, plus a lot of real estate.

    “The economic value of public real estate can be worth at least as much as GDP and often several times the value of the operational part of any portfolio,” say Detter and Saidi.

    Who’s feeling the shockwaves?

    Once again, Israel is the proverbial elephant in a room now widely depicted by Western corporate media as “Lebanon’s Chernobyl.”

    A scenario like the Beirut catastrophe has been linked to Israeli plans since February 2016.

    Israel did admit that Hangar 12 was not a Hezbollah weapons storage unit. Yet, crucially, on the same day of the Beirut blast, and following a series of suspicious explosions in Iran and high tension in the Syria-Israeli border, Prime Minister Netanyahu tweeted , in the present tense:

    “We hit a cell and now we hit the dispatchers. We will do what is necessary in order to defend ourselves. I suggest to all of them, including Hezbollah, to consider this.”

    That ties in with the intent, openly proclaimed late last week, to bomb Lebanese infrastructure if Hezbollah harms Israeli Defense Forces soldiers or Israeli civilians.

    headline – “Beirut Blast Shockwaves Will Be Felt by Hezbollah for a Long Time” – confirms that the only thing that matters for Tel Aviv is to profit from the tragedy to demonize Hezbollah, and by association, Iran. That ties in with the US Congress “Countering Hezbollah in Lebanon’s Military Act of 2019” {S.1886}, which all but orders Beirut to expel Hezbollah from Lebanon.

    And yet Israel has been strangely subdued.

    Muddying the waters even more, Saudi intel – which has access to Mossad, and demonizes Hezbollah way more than Israel – steps in. All the intel ops I talked to refuse to go on the record, considering the extreme sensitivity of the subject.

    Still, it must be stressed that a Saudi intel source whose stock in trade is frequent information exchanges with the Mossad, asserts that the original target was Hezbollah missiles stored in Beirut’s port. His story is that Prime Minister Netanyahu was about to take credit for the strike – following up on his tweet. But then the Mossad realized the op had turned horribly wrong and metastasized into a major catastrophe.

    The problem starts with the fact this was not a Hezbollah weapons depot – as even Israel admitted. When weapons depots are blown up, there’s a primary explosion followed by several smaller explosions, something that could last for days. That’s not what happened in Beirut. The initial explosion was followed by a massive second blast – almost certainly a major chemical explosion – and then there was silence.

    Thierry Meyssan, very close to Syrian intel, advances the possibility that the “attack” was carried out with an unknown weapon, a missile -– and not a nuclear bomb – tested in Syria in January 2020. (The test is shown in an attached video.) Neither Syria nor Iran ever made a reference to this unknown weapon, and I got no confirmation about its existence.

    Assuming Beirut port was hit by an “unknown weapon,” President Trump may have told the truth: It was an “attack”. And that would explain why Netanyahu, contemplating the devastation in Beirut, decided that Israel would need to maintain a very low profile.

    Watch that camel in motion

    The Beirut explosion at first sight might be seen as a deadly blow against the Belt and Road Initiative, considering that China regards the connectivity between Iran, Iraq, Syria and Lebanon as the cornerstone of the Southwest Asia Belt and Road corridor.

    Yet that may backfire – badly. China and Iran are already positioning themselves as the go-to investors post-blast, in sharp contrast with the IMF hit men, and as advised by Hezbollah Secretary-General Nasrallah only a few weeks ago.

    Syria and Iran are in the forefront of providing aid to Lebanon. Tehran is sending an emergency hospital, food packages, medicine and medical equipment. Syria opened its borders with Lebanon, dispatched medical teams and is receiving patients from Beirut’s hospitals.

    It’s always important to keep in mind that the “attack” (Trump) on Beirut’s port destroyed Lebanon’s main grain silo, apart from engineering the total destruction of the port – the nation’s key trade lifeline.

    That would fit into a strategy of starving Lebanon. On the same day Lebanon became to a great extent dependent on Syria for food – as it now carries only a month’s supply of wheat – the US attacked silos in Syria.

    Syria is a huge exporter of organic wheat. And that’s why the US routinely targets Syrian silos and burns its crops – attempting also to starve Syria and force Damascus, already under harsh sanctions, to spend badly needed funds to buy food

    In stark contrast to the interests of the US/France/Saudi axis, Plan A for Lebanon would be to progressively drop out of the US-France stranglehold and head straight into Belt and Road as well as the Shanghai Cooperation Organization. Go East, the Eurasian way. The port and even a great deal of the devastated city, in the medium term, can be quickly and professionally rebuilt by Chinese investment. The Chinese are specialists in port construction and management.

    This avowedly optimistic scenario would imply a purge of the hyper-wealthy, corrupt weapons/drugs/real estate scoundrels of Lebanon’s plutocracy – which in any case scurry away to their tony Paris apartments at the first sign of trouble.

    Couple that with Hezbollah’s very successful social welfare system – which I saw for myself at work last year – having a shot at winning the confidence of the impoverished middle classes and thus becoming the core of the reconstruction.

    It will be a Sisyphean struggle. But compare this situation with the Empire of Chaos – which needs chaos everywhere, especially across Eurasia, to cover for the coming, Mad Max chaos inside the US.

    General Wesley Clark’s notorious 7 countries in 5 years once again come to mind – and Lebanon remains one of those 7 countries. The Lebanese lira may have collapsed; most Lebanese may be completely broke; and now Beirut is semi-devastated. That may be the straw breaking the camel’s back – releasing the camel to the freedom of finally retracing its steps back to Asia along the New Silk Roads.

  • "Somebody Needs To Go To Jail": Graham Erupts After Document Reveals FBI Lied To Congress
    “Somebody Needs To Go To Jail”: Graham Erupts After Document Reveals FBI Lied To Congress

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/09/2020 – 22:15

    Senate Judiciary Committee Chairman Lindsey Graham (R-SC) was furious during a Sunday appearance with Fox News’ “Sunday Futures with Maria Bartiromo,” after his committee released a document revealing that the FBI misled the Intelligence Committee during the Russia probe when it claimed that Christopher Steele’s salacious dossier was backed up by one of its primary sources.

    “Somebody needs to go to jail for this,” Graham told Bartiromo, adding “This is a second lie. This is a second crime. They lied to the FISA court. They got rebuked, the FBI did, in 2019 by the FISA court, putting in doubt all FISA applications.”

    “A year before, they’re lying to the Senate Intel Committee. It’s just amazing the compounding of the lies,” he added.

    According to John Solomon of Just The News:

    The document in question contains the draft talking points the FBI used to brief the Senate Intelligence Committee in February 2018, including an assessment that the primary sub-source of the information contained in the Steele dossier had backed up the former MI-6 agent’s reporting.

    The primary sub-source “did not cite any significant concerns with the way his reporting was characterized in the dossier to the extent he could identify it,” the FBI memo claimed. “…At minimum, our discussions with [the Primary Sub-source] confirm that the dossier was not fabricated by Steele.”

    What’s more, FBI agents were told by Steele’s primary sub-source that much of the content attributed to him in the dossier was in “jest” or uncorroborated.

    The agency was also warned by the CIA that the memos contained Kremlin disinformation – and had even assembled a spreadsheet which debunked, or could not corroborate most of the claims.

    And according to Graham, the document is so misleading that he wants FBI Director Christopher Wray to identify those involved in the congressional briefing.

    “They misled the hell out of them,” he added.

    More from Just The News:

    There is widespread evidence released by the Judiciary Committee and the DOJ inspector general contradicting the February 2018 FBI briefing memo including that the primary sub-source:

    • told the FBI that he “has no idea” where some of the language attributed to him came from or that his contacts and “never mentioned” some information attributed to him.
    • told the FBI he “did not know the origins” or “did not recall” other information contained in the dossier that was supposedly from his contacts
    • alleged that Steele used “incorrect source characterization” for one of his contacts. told the FBI that the corroboration for the dossier was “zero” and that he takes what the sources for the dossier told him with “a grain of salt.”
    • claimed much of what he told Steele was second-hand or even in jest and never intended it to be treated as intelligence because if was “word of mouth and hearsay” and “conversation that [he] had with friends over beers.”

  • Guess What Happened When New York Put Homeless People In Luxury Hotels
    Guess What Happened When New York Put Homeless People In Luxury Hotels

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/09/2020 – 21:50

    Authored by Rick Moran via PJMedia.com,

    The homeless problem in New York City is bad and getting worse.

    City leaders decided to fix the problem by putting up hundreds of sex offenders, mental patients, and drug addicts in Manhattan luxury hotels.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    How’s that working out for ya?

    New York Post:

    Upper West Side residents say three hotels that are housing hundreds of homeless men during the coronavirus pandemic have turned the area into a spectacle of public urination, catcalling and open drug use.

    Among those staying at the luxury Belleclaire on Broadway and the Lucerne on West 79th Street, and the more down-market Belnord on West 87th Street, are people who are mentally ill, recovering from drug addictions, and registered sex offenders.

    Ten sex offenders are staying in a single hotel — the Belleclaire, which is just one block from the playground of PS 87.

    Yikes.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A nanny in the genteel neighborhood told of being offered crack while with her two-year-old charge.

    “It doesn’t feel safe anymore,” nanny Michele McDowall, 39, told The Post.

    She said she was recently offered crack by a pair of homeless men as she wheeled a toddler along Riverside Park at 79th Street.

    “You want to buy crack?” she said they shouted repeatedly as she hurried past, and as the frightened 2-year-old girl in the stroller put her hands over her ears and cried, “Too loud!”

    Nice.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But maybe the finger of blame should also be pointed at the Department of Homeland Security, which is paying 75 percent of the costs of this social experiment.

    “The DHS is a rogue agency,” one local community board member said of the homeless influx, noting that residents were given no input and little or no notice of the move.

    The board member, who asked to not be identified by name, said they were told the city was paying the hotels $175 a day per homeless person or “two guys in a room at $350 a day.”

    “You do the math,” the board members said. “It’s a lot of money.”

    Obviously, residents of the neighborhood are insufficiently woke. If homeless people want to urinate or defecate on the sidewalk or in the street, or on your front steps, who are you to say they can’t?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What has really upset residents in the neighborhood has been housing 10 sex offenders a block from a public school. What genius thought that one up?

    There are also four offenders whose victims were children: Ronald Butler, 62,  convicted in June 2013 of raping a 16-year-old girl; Eddie Daniel, 59, convicted of abusing a 10-year-old in 2011; Jonathan Evans, 29, convicted of abusing a 6-year-old; and Michael Hughes, 55, convicted of possessing child pornography in 2007.

    “I tell my 10-year old, ‘I’ll be back in two minutes’ — I guess I won’t do that anymore,” mom Mariane Dabo told The Post at the playground after learning of the sex offenders. “It’s scary.”

    A group of rabbis asked to see the mayor. No response. The local PTA sent a concerned letter. It was ignored.

    Maybe Mayor de Blasio and his administration are too humiliated to answer.

  • Shipments Of 20,000 Fake IDs From China Seized By Feds Ahead Of Election
    Shipments Of 20,000 Fake IDs From China Seized By Feds Ahead Of Election

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/09/2020 – 21:25

    With 85 days until the presidential election, fears are increasing that foreign adversaries, such as China, Russia, and Iran, could attempt to undermine the election. 

    Foreign states, more specifically China, could use covert and overt measures to sway votes from President Trump.

    Already, there was an incident in June, when Chinese video app TikTok saw users band together and falsely reserve tickets for President Trump’s rally in Tulsa, Oklahoma, which resulted in an embarrassingly low turnout. As a result, the administration when on the offensive against the app and has since signed an executive order to ban it next month. 

    China could also be attempting to undermine the election by sending counterfeit driver’s licenses to the U.S. So far, the Customs and Border Protection (CBP) officers working at Chicago O’Hare International Airport have intercepted close to 20,000 counterfeit U.S. driver’s licenses shipped from China this year, reported FOX 5 New York

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Hidden within contents of packages arriving via international cargo, the counterfeit driver’s licenses were shipped mainly from Hong Kong and mainland China. Other shipments came from South Korea and the U.K.

    “These counterfeit driver’s licenses can lead to disastrous consequences,” CBP’s Ralph Piccirilli said in a statement.

    “Criminal organizations use these counterfeit I.D.s to avoid attracting attention to their illegal activities.”

    While many of the driver’s licenses were for underage college students, there was an alarming discovery as one was able to be scanned. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “These fraudulent identity documents can lead to identity theft, worksite enforcement, critical infrastructure protection, fraud linked to immigration-related crimes such as human smuggling and human trafficking,” CBP said in a press release, adding that, “these documents can be used by those individuals associated with terrorism to minimize scrutiny from travel screening measures.”

    While one can only assume the intention of these counterfeit driver’s licenses from China is for underage college students to use at bars, readers should keep in mind it is an election year. China is out to get the president, and if that means creating fake driver’s licenses, that could potentially be used to conduct voter fraud. 

  • Bitcoin-Hating Fed President Urges "Stricter Lockdown" To "Save Lives & Save The Economy"
    Bitcoin-Hating Fed President Urges “Stricter Lockdown” To “Save Lives & Save The Economy”

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/09/2020 – 21:00

    Authored by Mathew Di Salvo via Decrypt.co,

    In brief

    • The President of the Federal Reserve Bank of Minneapolis, Neel Kashkari, has called for another strict lockdown.

    • This is at odds with President Donald Trump, who spoke unfavorably on Monday about lockdowns.

    • Kashkari’s ideas have previously confounded the crypto community.

    The President of the Federal Reserve Bank of Minneapolis has called for another lockdown to save the US economy.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In a Friday New York Times op-ed, Neel Kashkari wrote that in order to “save lives, and save the economy, we need another lockdown.” 

    Along with Michael T. Osterholm, director of the Center for Infectious Disease Research and Policy at the University of Minnesota, Kashkari said that a “more restrictive lockdown,” state by state, is necessary to “crush the spread” of COVID-19.

    He argued that “what we have done so far hasn’t worked,” and proposed that the new lockdown be for up to six weeks – and stricter than before

    Not only will a stricter lockdown save lives but “there won’t be a robust economic recovery until we get control of the virus,” wrote Kashkari. 

    The cryptocurrency community has also been at odds with Kashkari since he said in March that the Federal Reserve has an “infinite amount of cash” – prompting Bitcoiners to push the argument for the inflation-proof digital asset.  

    In February, Kashkari likened cryptocurrencies to a “giant garbage dumpster,” arguing that the US dollar’s scarcity is what makes it valuable. 

    One month later, the Federal Reserve launched a record $2.3 trillion rescue package.

    Such a large stimulus package is regarded by some Bitcoin-faithfuls as a reckless; Bitcoin’s monetary policy, however, is hard-coded into its consensus mechanism.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    A life-long Republican, Kashkari’s views may seem to conflict with those of his party – and president. Only this week President Donald Trump said that “a permanent lockdown is not a viable path” for controlling the pandemic. 

    “Lockdowns do not prevent infection in the future,” he said at a Monday press conference.

    “They just don’t. It comes back many times, it comes back.”

  • Chinese National Arrested Illegally Entering The US With Over $28,000 Worth Of Gold Bars
    Chinese National Arrested Illegally Entering The US With Over $28,000 Worth Of Gold Bars

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/09/2020 – 20:35

    If one goes by the official Chinese data, whereas in the summer of 2015 there was a massive capital outflow in the aftermath of the sudden yuan devaluation, recent months have been a paragon of stability despite the yuan trading on the wrong side of 7 for much of the past five months, and according to Goldman’s preferred gauge of FX flows, China experience a modest outflow of around US$9bn in June (vs. US$19bn inflows in May).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Alas, as the recent price action in gold and cryptos indicates, the scramble to circumvent China’s great capital firewall are accelerating, with the following example of smuggling making a clear case that China’s smart money is once again on the march.

    According to an Aug 6 release by the US Customs and Border Protection, while conducting operations near Amity, Maine, U.S. Border Patrol Agents from the Houlton Border Patrol Station apprehended a 36-year-old Chinese national who was found to have illegally entered the United States from Canada.

    On Tuesday, August 4, agents from the Houlton Border Patrol Station encountered a female subject who admitted to being a Chinese national illegally present in the United States. Agents were able to verify the location where she illegally entered the United States by matching foot prints belonging to the suspect the scene. The individual was also in possession of nearly $10,000 U.S. Dollars (USD) and 14.25 ounces of gold bars valued at over $28,500 USD.  The Chinese national was placed under arrest for illegal entry into the United States and transported to the Houlton Border Patrol Station for further processing.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    During processing it was found that the Chinese national had legally entered Canada as a student.  She also admitted to knowingly entering the United States illegally at a place other than a designated port of entry with the purpose of visiting a friend in San Francisco, California. The Chinese national was subsequently expelled to Canada in accordance with title 42 U.S. Code 265.

    “The vigilance, service and integrity of our Border Patrol Agents who continue to apprehend those who are looking to circumvent customs and immigration laws, plays an important role in keeping our communities in Maine and throughout the United States safe,” said Houlton Station Patrol Agent in Charge Brent Conley.

    More importantly, the fact that the Chinese are once again smuggling gold into the US confirms that while not apparent in the official data, capital flight out of China has once again picked up and will likely accelerate especially if the new Cold War between the US and China accelerates into the election. And, if it becomes too substantial, Beijing will have no choice but to reflect as much in the “official” data which would spark a feedback loop of even more capital outflows, even more aggressive clampdowns on money laundering, and an even greater propensity by the Chinese to buy fiat alternatives such as precious metals and crypto.

  • 6 Questions An Honest, Intelligent Reporter Would Ask Dr. Fauci About COVID-19
    6 Questions An Honest, Intelligent Reporter Would Ask Dr. Fauci About COVID-19

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/09/2020 – 20:10

    Authored by Stecey Lennox via PJMedia.ocm,

    If you had been going down the rabbit hole of COVID-19 research for long enough, a few things would be astounding to you.

    • First, how uninformed, uncurious, or deceptive reporters in the corporate media are on a matter of life and death.

    • Second, how much publicly available information about COVID-19 is on the internet contradicts what is reported and said by Health Experts™on cable news.

    • Finally, it is impossible to believe Dr. Anthony Fauci enjoys a 62% approval rating.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Of course, part of the reason Dr. Fauci enjoys this level of trust is that reporters who interview him put a sort of religious faith in every word he utters. Having worked with doctors for years, I don’t suffer from any such affliction. There are some great ones, some awful ones, and some who are great at one thing and not another.

    It is also quite reasonable for doctors to disagree. Medicine is the art of applying science and it is rarely “settled.” This healthy tension is why patients get second opinions. Yet during the COVID-19 pandemic, only one doctor has had almost no pushback in any public interview. This is journalistic malpractice, but not surprising. Most of the corporate media agree with his recommendations or can use panic porn clicks.

    However, if there were a courageous and intelligent reporter who could score an interview with Dr. Fauci, here is a list of questions I would suggest.

    1. How is COVID-19 a novel virus?

    Dr. Fauci, can you please explain how COVID-19 is a novel virus when it has an overlap with the structure of SARS at a rate of 79%? In addition, there are several human coronaviruses that we have dealt with seasonally for years. Is “novel,” as in completely new, an unnecessarily shocking term?

    I cannot find a reference to MERS that calls it a “novel” virus. All coronaviruses have the telltale spike protein we have all become familiar with and MERS was less similar to SARS than COVID-19 is. Why add the qualifier to COVID-19 when even the NIH published an article with the following “facts” on June 26, 2020:

    Only minor differences have been found between the genome sequences of SARS-CoV-2 and SARS-CoV

    In another section of the same paper, it says:

    Genome sequence analysis has shown that SARS-CoV-2 belongs to the Betacoronavirus genus, which includes Bat SARS-like coronavirus, SARS-CoV, and MERS-CoV [6].

    SARS-CoV-2 possesses a genomic structure which is typical of other betacoronaviruses.

    Typical and novel are hardly synonyms. Framing the virus as something completely new makes it scarier.

    2. Why should we worry about COVID mutations?

    Often news reports are discussing new mutations of COVID-19. Aren’t virus mutations expected and common? It appears that there has not been a mutation that significantly increases the way the virus works in the body making it more deadly or dangerous.

    Viruses mutate. This is not news and breathless reports about it in the case of COVID-19 only serve to increase panic. The changes to the virus so far are helpful in documenting its spread. There has not been a single change that warrants additional concern and it is not surprising a single patient may have multiple mutations. Mutations generally happen when the virus replicates. It does this inside the body’s cells.

    3. Doesn’t COVID-19 behave like SARS?

    Both SARS and COVID-19 have a spike protein that uses angiotensin-converting enzyme 2 (ACE-2) receptors to enter the respiratory tract cells, correct? I understand COVID-19 may be more efficient at doing so, but the cell entry is highly similar?

    The method of cell entry was documented to be the same as SARS on January 23, 2020, in the Journal of Virology.

    4. Why not give patients hydroxychloroquine and zinc?

    In 2005 the NIH did a study on chloroquine that found it was effective in inhibiting and eliminating the SARS virus in vitro. It affected the functioning of the ACE-2 receptor. It is also a zinc ionophore that allows zinc to more efficiently enter the cell. In 2010 an NIH study demonstrated zinc interfered with the replication of coronaviruses. What is the scientific basis to reject its use in the outpatient setting where there are significant observational studies indicating it is effective in early illness?

    When asked, Dr. Fauci said he would take this medication if he were diagnosed with COVID-19. It is likely because he clearly understands the drug’s safety profile, how it acts, and previous studies on it. His failure to combat the media narrative of hydroxychloroquine being a terribly dangerous drug was astounding. Standing silently by while governors and professional boards interfere with the doctor-patient relationship by prohibiting or denying prescription is unconscionable.

    The Science Supports the Use of Hydroxychloroquine in COVID-19, So Why Are Doctors Being Censored?

    There is no requirement for a double-blind randomized study for off-label use of an FDA approved drug at the approved dosage. Observational studies are more than acceptable in the medical and research community.  The decision to use this medication needs to remain between a doctor and a patient.

    5. Doesn’t the wide range of symptoms make sense?

    In 2003 an article in New Scientist documented that patients who died from SARS actually died of a cytokine storm. This appeared to be well known in the research community. There are 4,735 NIH-funded studies on the phenomenon after the SARS outbreak. Was this overlooked in preparing for the pandemic response? Doesn’t this immune response explain the myriad of symptoms in severe disease?

    The panic porn industry loves the range of symptoms that COVID-19 causes. Unfortunately for them, these are all explained by the overwhelming damage that can be caused by an immune system overreaction. Blood clots, organ damage, and heart dysfunction can all be caused as the immune system attacks the body’s own tissue.

    6. How does the government respond to broader immunity than you expected?

    There are now several studies that indicate that some significant portion of the population has T-cell or long-term immunity to COVID-19 due to exposure to coronaviruses in the past. How does this research impact public health measures and the approach to the virus?

    Immunologists had theorized about this idea for some time in order to explain the resilience of children and the fact that some members of a household that contained an infected person never fell ill despite close contact. It also may explain so-called “asymptomatic” cases.

    The PCR type test looks for pieces of the COVID-19 virus RNA. It does not determine whether the virus is alive or dead. A T-cell response would leave viral debris in the body for some period of time. A PCR test given in the absence of symptoms may detect this debris, giving the impression of an “asymptomatic” case.

    Because I actively look for information and follow the data about COVID-19, it is easy to see there is a lot of good news. This is not a novel virus and it works in ways very similar to SARS. Cytokine storms have been studied for years and there are some good therapies available. Death rates are falling likely because doctors and patients are employing these therapies.

    The virus is fading in the sunbelt and there are very good data to believe there are large swaths of the population that will not become ill with it. With improved treatment and some level of immunity in the population, everyone should feel confident in our ability to protect the vulnerable and return to a much more normal life.

    The nation should not be discussing wearing goggles, additional lockdowns, testing asymptomatic people, and maintaining any policy that limits the civil liberties of its citizens. There is every reason to take greater steps toward reopening the economy, our schools, and normal life.

  • HBO's Maher Slams ex-Clinton Aide On Live Show: "Horny Bill Clinton" Spotted On Epstein's Orgy Island
    HBO’s Maher Slams ex-Clinton Aide On Live Show: “Horny Bill Clinton” Spotted On Epstein’s Orgy Island

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/09/2020 – 19:45

    “What do we do with the Clintons now?” HBO’s Bill Maher questioned, describing Hillary but especially Bill as a “big distraction” for the Democrats ahead of the November election.

    But former Clinton White House adviser Paul Begala balked, to which Maher immediately pointed out that alleged Epstein victim Virginia Giuffre said she witnessed Bill Clinton at the island along with “two young girls” there also.

    Maher insisted that the Clintons remain a liability for the Democratic Party, not letting Begala ingore the question. At that point the interview with the now CNN commentator got awkward as Maher brought the issue of Bill Clinton’s presence on Epstein’s ‘orgy island’ front and center. Here’s the key segment:

    The HBO Real Time host then alluded to “Bill Clinton, a horny guy, on sex island…”:

    “Now, Bill Clinton. People are saying that there are witnesses who saw him on Jeffrey Epstein’s sex island,” Maher began. “Obviously, it’s denied.”

    Begala, who served as a White House adviser during Clinton’s administration, shook his head in disapproval — but Maher doubled down.

    “You shake your head like, ‘Oh that’s impossible! Bill Clinton, a horny guy, on sex island? Ridiculous!'” Maher mocked.

    “Look, it’s possible,” emphasized in what was a clearly uncomfortable moment for ex-Clinton aide Begala.

    Maher has long argued that it’s better for the DNC if the Clintons both stayed away from the convention and kept a very low profile amidst multiple raging controversies, especially the Epstein saga.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “My question is, you know, [Clinton] has assets and he has … things that are not quite assets,” Maher questioned. “And same with Hillary. What do the Democrats  what should they do?”

    The brief exchange from the Friday night Real Time show generated a number of headlines highlighting the clip, given also the major networks have appeared to conveniently and intentionally ignore the explosive allegations contained in recently unsealed court documents from 2011, centered on Epstein accuser Virginia Giuffre’s testimony.

  • Whistleblower Exposes "The Spies Who Hijacked America"
    Whistleblower Exposes “The Spies Who Hijacked America”

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/09/2020 – 19:20

    Authored by Steven P. Scrage, PhD via Matt Taibbi Substack (emphasis ours),

    Global scandals now labeled Russiagate, Spygate, and what President Trump calls “Obamagate” shook the political world, but hit me closer to home.

    I’m the reason the so-called FBI “spy” at the center of Spygate, Stefan Halper, met Carter Page, the alleged “Russian Asset” in Russiagate’s Crossfire Hurricane investigation. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On May 19, 2018, this realization blindsided me in London as I was about to fly out for my wedding. The New York TimesNBC News and other sources had outed my PhD supervisor, Stefan Halper, as a spy known to the UK’s MI6 intelligence service as “The Walrus.”

    It didn’t seem real. Could a former professor I once trusted as a mentor have betrayed his word, profession, and country to start these disasters? I had moved to England to pursue an academic career and leave DC’s politics behind, only to have my PhD supervisor throw me back into the most outrageous political firestorms I could imagine. Just my luck. Then an even worse question began nagging at me. Did I unintentionally light the match that started it all?

    As I started to piece together what happened over the next few months, I realized something. The stories that The New York Times, Washington Post,and others were pushing didn’t add up. Many seemed planted to cover up or advance the agendas of several individuals whose tentacles secretly ran through these scandals, and who each had longstanding ties to intelligence services like the FBI, CIA, and MI6. I call these individuals the Cambridge Four. 

    Strangely, all four were linked through that sleepy British academic town thousands of miles from the alleged “ground zeroes” of Russiagate’s conspiracies, Moscow and DC. In addition to the central “Spygate” figure Halper, they include the central source of “Russiagate’s” fake conspiracy theories, Christopher Steele; former MI6 Director Sir Richard Dearlove; and Halper’s and Dearlove’s partner in a Cambridge Intelligence Seminar linked to titillating — but false — tales of a “Russian spy” seducing Trump’s top national security advisor. My years of work with Halper provided an inside view of how their four networks interconnected. The more I dug up new pieces of this puzzle, the more I saw how these individuals’ seemingly separate acts might fit together in an absurd picture of how these scandals really started.

    Armed with first-hand knowledge and evidence, I quietly sought to help federal investigators uncover these scandals’ mysteries. It wasn’t my first rodeo. After witnessing the plane that hit the Pentagon on 9/11, I led G8 and State Department international crime and terrorism efforts with Department of Justice (DOJ), FBI, and intelligence officials and had worked for decades in White House, Congressional, and presidential campaign roles. This helped me keep a stiff upper lip when I was falsely accused in 2019 by the House Intelligence Committee’s Ranking Republican and others on television as being part of a secret anti-Trump cabal. As much as I wanted to defend myself, I knew our best shot of exposing the real forces behind these scandals was for me to remain publicly silent and not let those under investigation know what I knew or was willing to say. 

    To continue reading, click here

  • Texas COVID Positivity Rate Hits New Record High As Bill Gates Slams US "Testing Insanity": Live Updates
    Texas COVID Positivity Rate Hits New Record High As Bill Gates Slams US “Testing Insanity”: Live Updates

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/09/2020 – 19:14

    Summary:

    • Texas 7-day average positivity rate hits new high
    • Gates slams US “testing insanity”
    • Washington suffers first teenager COVID death
    • Greece sees new jump in cases
    • UK reports 1k+ new cases
    • Arizona sees lowest cases in 6 weeks
    • EU makes optimistic sign on vaccines
    • Italy says schools will start Sept. 14
    • UK says opening schools a “national priority”

    * * *

    Update (1850ET): After the US added 1 million new cases in roughly 2 weeks to surpass 5 million cases, the New York State’s positivity rate on Sunday tumbled to a record low of 0.78%, while Texas’s positivity rate climbed to a record high for the second straight day.

    Additionally, Maryland’s seven-day average statewide positivity rate has reached a new all-time low of 3.75%, Gov. Larry Hogan announced.

    The Texas Health Department said that its seven-day average for COVID-19 positivity has reached a new record high of 20.3%.

    This was two percentage points higher than the previous record on July 16, according to Health Department data. The average had steadily declined from July 16 to July 29, when it reached a low of 12.09%, however, since July 30, the average has been steadily increasing.

    Texas health authorities reported 116 new deaths, bringing its death toll to 8,459, while new cases climbed by 4,879 to 486,362.

    The Tacoma-Pierce County Health Department announced it recorded the first coronavirus death to affect a Washington state resident under 20 years old.

    Finally, Bill Gates on Sunday decried the “testing insanity” gripping the US, which he said had caused the country to fall behind the rest of the world. It was just another bit of US-bashing from the WHO-aligned Gates, who has criticized the Trump Administration’s efforts at every turn.

    Appearing on Fareed Zakaria’s show on CNN, Gates blamed Trump for the slow turn around times he said were afflicting most of the US (even as many of the worst-hit counties in the Northeast manage to turn results around in under a day, or even a few hours..

    “A variety of early missteps by the U.S. and then the political atmosphere meant that we didn’t get our testing going,” Gates said. “It’s nonsense that any sort of travel ban we did was at all beneficial. That doesn’t pass the common sense test…and now we’ve executed our lockdowns nationwide with less fidelity than other countries.”

    Commercial labs, he said, have left customers struggling with long waits, while “very wealthy people have access to these quick-turnaround tests.”

    “It’s mind-blowing that you can’t get the government to improve the testing because they just want to say how great it is,” he continued. “I’ve said to them, look, have a [Centers for Disease Control and Prevention] website that prioritizes who gets tested. Don’t reimburse any test where the result goes back after three days. You’re paying billions of dollars in this very inequitable way to get the most worthless testing results in the world.”

    “No other country has the testing insanity because they won’t talk about fixing it, because they think they need to just keep acting like they’ve done a competent job,” he added.

    Cue another flood of stories about long wait lines in Texas and Florida.

    * * *

    Update (1515ET): Some more signs of a ‘second wave’ of infections emerging in Europe were confirmed by Greece and the United Kingdom on Saturday.

    Greece reported 203 new coronavirus cases Sunday, the biggest single-day jump since the beginning of the pandemic, bringing its total to 5,623. It also was the biggest jump in daily cases since April 21.

    As infections in the US start to turn lower again following a brief bump, Former FDA Commissioner Scott Gottlieb said the US. looks like it’s headed for an infection surge in rural regions, now that the wave impacting the Sun Belt has subsided. But some critics have called bs on this.

    “We’re probably going to have another wave,” he said on CBS’s “Face the Nation” on Sunday. There’s concern about largely untouched rural communities, which are “probably a bit more complacent” about virus risks, he said.

    Rural spread is “going to be far more difficult to control if it’s more widespread,” he said. “We’re seeing indications of that right now – the wave spreading in the Midwest and the West.”

    The UK reported more than 1,000 new cases for the first time since June 26, bringing its total to 310,825. The 1,062 cases reported Sunday are higher than the seven-day average of 877.

    Arizona reported 816 cases, its lowest since late June, a six week low. The 0.4% increase was below the 0.7% daily average increase of the previous week. Total cases are now 186,923.

    * * *

    As we reported last night, the US surpassed 5 million confirmed cases (according to data compiled by Johns Hopkins) on Saturday evening (East Coast Time).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The US reported 56,070 cases Saturday, a 1.1% increase over the prior day. Total deaths have reached 162,441, the data show.

    As we reported last night, Brazil also passed two critical milestones: it has now confirmed 2 million cases, and more than 100,000 deaths.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Though the numbers have rebounded a bit over the past week, on average, the daily numbers across the US have declined from a recent peak, as the outbreak in the Sun Belt outpaced the outbreak in New York. As the number of new cases in Fla. and Texas and California and Arizona has declined, some northeastern states, like New Jersey and Rhode Island, have seen a slight uptick in recent weeks (which inspired NJ, NY & Conn to add RI to the mandatory quarantine iist).

    Globally, the number of confirmed cases is nearing 19.75 million.

    Over in the EU, as governments sign more deals with major pharmaceutical companies to guarantee supplies of a vaccine that hasn’t even been proven safe and effective yet, EU Commissioner for Health and Food Safety Stella Kyriakides told Germany’s Handelsblatt in an interview that while a vaccine won’t immediately solve all the world’s problems, it will allow a step-by-step return to normality, the newspaper cited Kyriakides as saying.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In contrast, in the US, Dr. Fauci, who has repeatedly reassured Congress (and the American pubic) that a vaccine would be available by the end of the year, admitted yesterday that we really don’t know how effective the vaccine will be: he says it may be only “50% to 60% effective.”

    As Australia’s second-most-populous state, Victoria (the home of its second-largest city, Melbourne) continues to struggle with the country’s largest outbreak yet, neighboring New Zealand has just confirmed its 100th straight day without even a single coronavirus transmission.

    New Zealand on Sunday marked 100 days since it was able to effectively eliminate the spread of coronavirus.

    Here’s JHU’s daily chart reflecting the daily growth rates of the 10 fastest-growing outbreaks in the world.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As New York bucks the trend in the US by moving toward a “hybrid” model of in-person learning this fall, more European economies are moving toward fully restarting in-person learning in a few weeks, almost guaranteeing another outbreak, though ideally one that can be swiftly contained with minimal fatalities. 

    Schools Minister Nick Gibb said in an interview on Times Radio that opening schools is critical for reviving the country’s battered economy, by allowing parents to return to work. Prime Minister Boris Johnson told the Mail on Sunday newspaper the country has a “moral duty” to resume normal teaching and reopening. He called reopening schools a “national priority.”

    Meanwhile, in Iran, the number of new cases fell to a two-month low of 2,020, bringing total infections to 326,712. The death toll climbed to 18,427 with 163 more deaths overnight. That’s compared with 132 the day before.

    Italy’s Health Minister Roberto Speranza confirmed in an interview with Italian newspaper Corriere della Sera that Italian schools will reopen Sept. 14.

    Another lockdown would do an “enormous damage, and we need to avoid it more than anything” Speranza said in the interview, in a reference to Italy’s battered economy, which will – to be sure – benefit from the pan-European rescue fund.

     

  • Baltimore Holds 'Ceasefire Prayer' As Murders On Track For Record Year
    Baltimore Holds ‘Ceasefire Prayer’ As Murders On Track For Record Year

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/09/2020 – 18:55

    Readers may know we sometimes focus on Baltimore City because it’s one of the best examples of what happens to a failed liberal city, that is, the occasional riots, soaring violent crime, murder epidemic, opioid crisis, and large-scale wealth inequality, have created a perfect storm of chaos. 

    In recent years, the streets of Baltimore have transformed into inner-city warzones. Violence flared up after the last recession, ignited even more during the 2015 riots, and with today’s virus-induced recession, the city is quickly descending further into socio-economic turmoil.  

    Organizers of Ceasefire Weekend held a prayer this weekend in west Baltimore, an area ravaged by some of the highest homicides on a per-capita basis in the country. Streets in this part of town are lined with thousands of abandoned row homes, underfunded schools, opioids, and depressionary unemployment. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Scott Slater, a member of the Episcopal Diocese of Maryland, told CBS Baltimore, the prayer walk on Saturday is for a murder free weekend, though two people were killed that day. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    h/t The Baltimore Sun

    Barbara O’Sullivan participated in the prayer walk.

    “Until this stops, every one of us is a victim of gun violence,” O’Sullivan said.

    Slater believes systemic racism is one of the sources of violence.   

    “Stress that is systemic and endemic in our city for those who live in these conditions,” Slater said. “We need to minimize the stress and provide better resources for people, so they don’t have to make decisions to kill each other.”

    The city has seen more than 300 homicides per year since 2015. Cumulative homicides trends suggest the number could top +300 by year-end. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    h/t The Baltimore Sun

    Gun violence is the primary reason for death. Murders are widespread.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    h/t The Baltimore Sun

    The result of all this, as we’ve explained, a mass exodus of people, who still have economic mobility despite the virus-induced recession, are escaping to suburbs or rural communities as city-life becomes too dangerous to raise a family. 

    With no end in sight, America’s metros are imploding. There has been no viable solution offered as a blueprint to fix inner cities. This is all happening at a time when the federal government and Federal Reserve exacerbate the wealth gap by bailing out corporate America and Wall Street as main street is left to die.

  • Black-Hole'd? NASA To Stop Using "Inappropriate" Nicknames For Cosmic Objects
    Black-Hole’d? NASA To Stop Using “Inappropriate” Nicknames For Cosmic Objects

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/09/2020 – 18:30

    Authored by Melanie Sun via The Epoch Times,

    NASA has announced it is revising some unofficial nicknames used to refer to cosmic objects as it joins efforts by some within the scientific community to promote values of “diversity, equity, and inclusion.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The U.S. space agency said in a statement on Aug. 5 that certain nicknames historically used to refer to distant planets, galaxies, or nebulae that it considers “inappropriate” will no longer be used. Instead, the agency will adopt the official International Astronomical Union designations for the cosmic objects.

    “As the scientific community works to identify and address systemic discrimination and inequality in all aspects of the field, it has become clear that certain cosmic nicknames are not only insensitive, but can be actively harmful,” the agency said.

    For example, what has been known as the “Eskimo Nebula” will now be referred to as NGC 2392.

    According to NASA’s statement, the world “Eskimo” is “widely viewed as a colonial term with a racist history, imposed on the indigenous people of Arctic regions.”

    The agency also said it would no longer use the name “Siamese Twins Galaxy,” which it deems inappropriate for referring to NGC 4567 and NGC 4568—a pair of spiral galaxies in the Virgo Galaxy Cluster.

    “The agency will be working with diversity, inclusion, and equity experts in the astronomical and physical sciences to provide guidance and recommendations for other nicknames and terms for review,” it said about its ongoing review.

    Thomas Zurbuchen, the associate administrator of NASA’s Science Mission Directorate, explained in the statement: “Our goal is that all names are aligned with our values of diversity and inclusion, and we’ll proactively work with the scientific community to help ensure that.

    “Science is for everyone, and every facet of our work needs to reflect that value,” he said.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Stephen Shih, NASA’s Diversity and Equal Opportunity associate administrator, said that the nicknames in question “may have historical or culture connotations that are objectionable or unwelcoming” and that “NASA is strongly committed to addressing them.”

    “Science depends on diverse contributions, and benefits everyone, so this means we must make it inclusive,” he added.

    Finally, we note that the hilarious people over at The Babylon Bee had some ideas for new names…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: The Babylon Bee

  • With 160 Vaccine Candidates In Development, Goldman Expects An Economic Boom Once At Least One Is Approved By The End Of 2020
    With 160 Vaccine Candidates In Development, Goldman Expects An Economic Boom Once At Least One Is Approved By The End Of 2020

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/09/2020 – 18:04

    As Deutsche Bank Marion Laboure and Jim Reid wrote last week, whereas vaccines normally require years of testing and additional time to produce at scale, amidst the modern era pandemic scientists are hoping to develop a coronavirus vaccine within 12 to 18 months. The reason for that while normally a vaccine takes years to develop using a traditional process, with covid things are far more accelerated…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    and furthermore, there are already no less than 160 covid vaccine candidates currently in process as the following table shows…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … with the top 6 listed below.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here is what the top vaccine makers have said publicly about the state of affairs courtesy of Deutsche Bank.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Still, there are caveats and there is a distinct possibility a vaccine may not emerge any time soon as various roadblocks may still emerge as the following bulletin of key dates, timelines and road blocks summarizes:

    • Work began in January 2020 with the deciphering of the SARS-CoV-2 genome. The first vaccine safety trials in humans started in March.
    • All candidates have received regulatory approvals to move quickly to human trials, skipping the years of animal trials that are the norm in developing vaccines. Another way to accelerate vaccine development is to combine phases. Some coronavirus vaccines are now in Phase I/II trials combined together.
    • Meanwhile, SARS and SARS-CoV-2, the virus that causes Covid-19, are roughly 80 percent identical, and both use so-called spike proteins to grab onto a specific receptor found on cells in human lungs. So using the already existing research work of SARS scientists have pushed ahead quickly.
    • Global goal is to develop effective vaccine possibly by early 2021. Researchers of Oxford vaccine candidate have announced that their vaccine could be ready for emergency use as soon as September if phase 3 trials are successful.
    • China’s CanSino vaccine was the first to reach Phase 1 and Phase 2. Sinovac, Sinopharm, Astrazeneca, Moderna, CanSino and Pfizer all reached phase 3 in July.
    • However, researchers caution that less than 10 percent of drugs that enter clinical trials are ever approved by the Food and Drug Administration.

    The risk of a failed vaccine however no longer figures in Goldman’s economic forecast, and as Goldman’s Jan Hatzius writes in a report over the weekend, Goldman now expects “that at least one vaccine will be approved by the end of 2020 and will be widely distributed by the end of 2021 Q2. We have incorporated this timeline as our baseline forecast, and now assume  consumer services spending accelerates in the first half of 2021 as consumers resume activities that would previously have exposed them to Covid-19 risk.”

    Yet even though polling has shown that only 42% of Americans would submit to a covid vaccine, Goldman is still optimistic enough to upgrade its growth forecast which becomes more front-loaded. Specifically, the bank’s previous GDP forecast reflected a weighted average across possible vaccine scenarios, including the possibility of no vaccine by the end of 2021

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Since then the vaccine outlook has since become clearer and more positive according to Hatzius who notes that “the economic benefits for the US appear particularly large due to its leadership in the vaccine race and worse virus control. As a result, we now expect that at least one vaccine will be approved this fall with widespread distribution and positive growth effects felt in the first half of 2021 (dark blue line in Exhibit 1).”

    Assuming Goldman’s optimism plays out, and there is an earlier approval of a vaccine, it would have two main effects on the bank’s growth forecast:

    • First, it will accelerate the recovery starting in 2020Q1 as consumers resume high Covid-19 risk activities that could not fully recover prior to a vaccine.
    • Second, the effect of the vaccine is larger in the early approval scenario because it limits scarring effects that could not be undone quickly if the vaccine arrives later.

    Following a vaccine approval, Goldman assumes that the rate of recovery for the most affected spending categories doubles and increases by 50% for categories that are moderately affected. This accelerated recovery speed is applied to all of H1 in 2021 but decelerates the recovery in the second half of the year, to reflect growth pulled forward in time.

    Exhibit 3 shows the new GDP path, which leaves Goldman’s 2020 forecast unchanged, including the assumption that the still-high level of virus spread will keep consumer activity stalled through the end of this month. The updated vaccine outlook is reflected in the rapid decline in the drag from the consumer services sector—shown by the dark blue bars—during the first half of 2021. Under this forecast, the contribution of consumer services spending to the output gap falls to -1.1pp by the end of 2021Q2 (vs. -2.0pp previously). This is partially offset by slower consumer services spending growth in the second half of 2021, leaving our forecast of the level of GDP at the end of 2021 slightly higher. On net, Goldman’s growth forecast “is more front-loaded and modestly upgraded.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What does this mean in terms of an annualized quarterly GDP basis?

    Goldman now expects GDP growth of +10% in Q1 2021, +8% in Q2 2021, +4% in Q3 2021, and +3% in Q4 2021 (vs. +8%, +6.5%, +5%, +4% previously). This raises 2021 growth to +6.2% on an annual average basis (vs. +5.6% previously) and +6.2% on a Q4/Q4 basis (vs. +5.9%).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It also means that if Goldman is correct, and the polls predicting a victory for Biden and a Democratic sweep are also on the money, then Joe Biden faces an impressive first year in the office with near record quarterly GDP gains.

    Still, despite these overly optimistic forecast upgrades, Goldman cautions that downside risks have also risen due to Congress’s failure to pass a Phase 4 fiscal package, and while last night’s executive orders postponed the fiscal cliff through August and the bank still expects a package worth around $1.5 trillion to become law by the end of the month, “the risk of no further legislative action has increased and could pose a threat to the budding recovery.”

     

     

  • Mnuchin 'Willing To Listen' On Stimulus As Pelosi Calls Trump Executive Orders 'Unconstitutional Slop'
    Mnuchin ‘Willing To Listen’ On Stimulus As Pelosi Calls Trump Executive Orders ‘Unconstitutional Slop’

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/09/2020 – 17:40

    After President Trump stepped in on Saturday with an Executive Order to temporarily extend stimulus benefits, Democrats on Sunday lambasted the move which undermined the urgency behind ongoing negotiations over the next bipartisan package.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On Sunday, House Speaker Nancy Pelosi (D-CA) told “Fox News Sunday” that the executive orders were “unconstitutional slop,” adding “We have to reach an agreement.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Children are food insecure. Families are at the risk of being evicted. The virus is moving like a freight train,” she added. “The kindest thing I could say is he doesn’t know what he’s talking about or something’s wrong there — something’s very, very wrong.”

    Senate Minority Leader Chuck Schumer (D-NY) called the EOs ‘paltry,’ along with ‘unworkable, weak and far too narrow.’

    “The event at the country club is just what Trump does — a big show, but it doesn’t do anything,” Schumer told ABC‘s “This Week” on Sunday.

    As Goldman notes:

    President Trump issued executive orders in the four policy areas that had been expected. The extra $400 unemployment payment is likely to last only a month, however. The payroll tax deferment would last through year-end, but consumers might be hesitant to spend extra income without a change in tax law. That said, both policies could put pressure on Congress to agree to a broader fiscal package. We continue to expect a package worth around $1.5 trillion to become law in August. The new executive orders create two deadlines around the end of the month, which could provide a new incentive for Congress to act.

    Treasury Secretary Steven Mnuchin, meanwhile, says that if the Democrats have a new proposal, “I’m willing to listen.”

    On Fox, Mnuchin chided Democrats for their intransigence over weeks of talks, particularly on state and local government funding, which some Republicans have termed a bailout for Democratic states. He urged Pelosi to help pass a bill on “things we agree on” before returning to some of the most contentious issues. –Bloomberg

    On Saturday, President Trump signed executive orders extending the federal unemployment boost by $400 per week, down from $600. He also temporarily deferred payroll taxes for certain workers, pursued eviction protections and student loan relief.

    When it was suggested that Democrats may sue to stop the benefits from flowing, White House economic adviser Larry Kudlow told ABC “Maybe we’re going to go to court on them. We’re going to go ahead with our actions anyway,” adding “Our counsel’s office, the Treasury Department believes it has the authority to temporarily suspend tax collections. So we’re banking on that.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  • "It's Not Clear If Beirut Port Explosion Was Accident Or Attack": Esper Tells FOX
    “It’s Not Clear If Beirut Port Explosion Was Accident Or Attack”: Esper Tells FOX

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/09/2020 – 17:15

    US Defense Secretary Mark Esper appeared on FOX Saturday evening to explain the discrepancy between official Lebanese government statements that the Aug. 4 Beirut port explosion was an accident based on severe “negligence” and President Trump’s initial statements in the aftermath that it was a “terrible attack”.

    Trump had raised eyebrows in saying at a White House press conference in the hours after the tragedy that left over 150 dead, while referencing his generals: “They seem to think it was an attack. It was a bomb of some kind.”

    In the days after both Trump and the Pentagon tried to walk back the statements, now with Esper in the weekend FOX interview saying that ultimately it was not clear whether the explosion was the result of “a deliberate attack or an accident”.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “The bottom line is that we still don’t know. You know, on the first day, as President Trump said, we thought it might have been an attack. Some of us expected it might be, for example, a shipment of weapons to Hezbollah that exploded. Maybe a manufacturing facility,” Esper said.

    “Some of us speculated it could have been for an example a Hezbollah arms shipment that blew up, maybe a Hezbollah bomb-making facility,” Esper told show host Jeanine Pirro.

    “I have said before that it looks like an accident,” Esper continued. “It is unfortunate that some in the media have tried to create divisions within the administration, perhaps between me and the president and others.”

    He concluded, “It is simply not true. I mean, the truth of the matter, it is a great tragedy. Under the leadership of the President, we will do our best to help the Lebanese people and do what is right.”

    It’s been since revealed that not only was an estimated 2,750 tons of ammonium nitrate left unsecured for over 6 years in a warehouse at the port, but a large quantity of fireworks had been impounded in the same warehouse complex, near the highly explosive substance commonly used in fertilizer and manufactured explosives.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Beirut Port blast aftermath: AP file.

    Meanwhile, despite now raging protests in reaction to government negligence which allowed 2,750 metric tons of ammonium nitrate to be “stored unsafely”, Lebanese President Michel Aoun has rejected calls for an international investigation as a “waste of time”.

    “The goal of calls for an international investigation in the port case is to waste time,” the President’s media office cited him as saying.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    It is as yet unclear whether Washington will add pressure on the Lebanese government to allow an international team to head up an official investigation.

    Given current media claims that Hezbollah also conducted operations at the port, it is likely the administration will push for an outside, independent investigation into the cause of what’s been acknowledged as the largest non-military munitions explosion in history.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 9th August 2020

  • China's Indo-Pacific Neighbors Stand Up To Its Hegemonic Ambitions
    China’s Indo-Pacific Neighbors Stand Up To Its Hegemonic Ambitions

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/08/2020 – 23:00

    Authored by Tahir Aslam Gora via The Epoch Times,

    After finding itself cornered over the handling of the novel coronavirus, appropriately named the “CCP virus,” China is embracing an offensive mode globally.

    The Chinese foreign ministry has now instructed its ambassadors to aggressively defend its interests and reputation, even if at the cost of diplomatic niceties. Following what has been named “wolf warrior” diplomacy, these diplomats are now actively pushing the Chinese regime’s agenda by employing the tools of attacks, fake news, propaganda, and conspiracy theories.

    However, countries around the world, instead of being cowed down, are now standing up to this diplomatic offensive and China’s hegemonic ambitions.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Nowhere is this shift more pronounced than with China’s neighbors in the Indo-Pacific. For years, being at the receiving end of Beijing’s assertiveness in territorial disputes, threats of economic coercion, and an aggressive push into their markets, countries of the Indo-Pacific are now making their voices heard.

    Utilizing the opportunity offered by Beijing’s CCP virus cover-up, these countries are now demanding answers from China, re-aligning their defense postures, and coordinating with like-minded allies.

    Australia, which for years, has had a prosperous trade relationship with China and flourishing people-to-people contact, is now willing to take on the growing brazenness from Beijing. Alarmed by the growing Chinese influence in Australia’s neighborhood of the South Pacific, Prime Minister Scott Morrison’s government since coming to power last year has attempted to contain Beijing by offering economic assistance and infrastructure development, combined with growing political outreach to the Pacific island states.

    On top of that, Canberra on July 1 announced the most significant upgrade for its armed forces in decades, by unveiling defense spending worth around $187 billion. The advanced capabilities that Australian defense forces are expected to take on are a long-range anti-ship missile system and hypersonic weapons. These signal a change in Australia’s strategic thinking, in line with the deteriorating security environment in the Indo-Pacific.

    Australia is not just recalibrating its posture, but also coordinating with its allies. Following the virtual summit between Morrison with his Japanese counterpart Shinzo Abe on July 9, both countries agreed to facilitate joint military exercises and other activities of their defense forces in each other’s countries. Moreover, in a move that will certainly rile China, both leaders also agreed that Taiwan should participate in the World Health Organization as an observer. China considers Taiwan a renegade province.

    The Japan–Australia summit followed the ninth round of the Trilateral Defense Ministers’ Meeting between Japanese Defense Minister Taro Kono, U.S. Defense Secretary Mark Esper, and Australian Minister of Defense Linda Reynolds on July 7. The defense ministers in their meeting pointed out other disturbing trends in the Chinese offensive in the South China Sea—“the continued militarization of disputed features, dangerous or coercive use of coast guard vessels and ‘maritime militia,’ and efforts to disrupt other countries’ resource exploitation activities.”

    Over the last few years, Beijing has persisted in its use of this militia, primarily because there has not been a military response from any of the concerned powers. Most recently, Beijing used this tactic against Indonesia in January 2020 to ingress into the country’s Exclusive Economic Zone by 70 nautical miles in a show of strength. However, as Beijing continues to push the envelope, Jakarta has demonstrated that it’s no longer willing to be a docile witness to the former’s antics.

    While the CCP virus provided the necessary impetus for many of China’s neighbors to be vocal, Beijing’s invocation of the national security law in Hong Kong, a former British colony, has given the much-required thrust to the “Five Eyes” countries to push back. In a rare joint statement in May 2020, four members of the alliance—the United States, UK, Australia, and Canada—censured China for imposing the national security law and defended Hong Kong as a “bastion of freedom.”

    Meanwhile, Australia and Canada have announced a review of their ties to Hong Kong. Likewise, the UK has confirmed that it will open a pathway for citizenship for Hong Kong residents with the right to a British National (Overseas) passport.

    Most recently, the fifth member, New Zealand, following a consultation call between the Five Eyes’ foreign ministers on July 8, announced a review of ties with Hong Kong, including a reappraisal of extradition arrangements, controls on exports, and a travel advisory for its nationals.

    Re-alignment caused by the Chinese aggressiveness is not just limited to its neighbors. In Europe, which has been touted by Beijing as the continent receiving the windfall from China’s ambitious infrastructure connectivity project, the Belt and Road Initiative, the consensus is emerging to counter China.

    Most recently, a new coalition of legislators from 16 European countries and the European Union was set up called the Inter-Parliamentary Alliance on China. It describes itself as “an international cross-party group of legislators working towards reform on how democratic countries approach China.” One of its recent most high-profile campaigns urged the member countries to review extradition treaties with Hong Kong.

    This push on political issues is matched by a growing squeeze on Chinese technology companies, which for years have had free rein in markets around the world by offering cheaper low-quality alternatives—hardware and software. However, it appears that Beijing’s hegemonic pursuits may have been nipped in the bud. Following India’s ban of more than 50 Chinese apps, the United States is contemplating a similar move. Besides, the United States, the UK, too, has made up its mind, as evident from its decision to exclude Huawei from its 5G network. France, too, is taking steps to restrict Huawei’s role in its telecom network.

    Even as the global community is united in its response to tackling the mess created by the CCP virus pandemic, Beijing is evidently on a different trip as its actions in Ladakh, the South China Sea, Taiwan, and Hong Kong demonstrate. U.S. officials have already described China as the “most dangerous military rival.” Unless Beijing takes steps to correct its mistakes, dial down its rhetoric, and address the disputes, it’s likely that this growing surge of anti-China sentiment may turn into a tsunami.

  • World's Top Epidemiologists – Masks Don't Work!
    World’s Top Epidemiologists – Masks Don’t Work!

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/08/2020 – 22:55

    Authored by John Miltimore via The Foundation for Economic Education,

    Denmark boasts one of the lowest COVID-19 death rates in the world. As of August 4, the Danes have suffered 616 COVID-19 deaths, according to figures from Johns Hopkins University.

    That’s less than one-third of the number of Danes who die from pneumonia or influenza in a given year.

    Despite this success, Danish leaders recently found themselves on the defensive. The reason is that Danes aren’t wearing face masks, and local authorities for the most part aren’t even recommending them.

    This prompted Berlingske, the country’s oldest newspaper, to complain that Danes had positioned themselves “to the right of Trump.”

    “The whole world is wearing face masks, even Donald Trump,” Berlingske pointed out.

    This apparently did not sit well with Danish health officials.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    From left to right: Professor Henning Bundgaard, Tamara van Ark, Anders Tegnell | Composite image by FEE (Rigshospitalet, Wikimedia Commons)

    They responded by noting there is little conclusive evidence that face masks are an effective way to limit the spread of respiratory viruses.

    All these countries recommending face masks haven’t made their decisions based on new studies,” said Henning Bundgaard, chief physician at Denmark’s Rigshospitale, according to Bloomberg News.

    Denmark is not alone.

    Despite a global stampede of mask-wearing, data show that 80-90 percent of people in Finland and Holland say they “never” wear masks when they go out, a sharp contrast to the 80-90 percent of people in Spain and Italy who say they “always” wear masks when they go out.

    Dutch public health officials recently explained why they’re not recommending masks.

    “From a medical point of view, there is no evidence of a medical effect of wearing face masks, so we decided not to impose a national obligation,” said Medical Care Minister Tamara van Ark.

    Others, echoing statements similar to the US Surgeon General from early March, said masks could make individuals sicker and exacerbate the spread of the virus.

    “Face masks in public places are not necessary, based on all the current evidence,” said Coen Berends, spokesman for the National Institute for Public Health and the Environment.

    “There is no benefit and there may even be negative impact.”

    In Sweden, where COVID-19 deaths have slowed to a crawl, public health officials say they see “no point” in requiring individuals to wear masks.

    “With numbers diminishing very quickly in Sweden, we see no point in wearing a face mask in Sweden, not even on public transport,” said Anders Tegnell, Sweden’s top infectious disease expert.

    The top immunologists and epidemiologists in the world can’t decide if masks are helpful in reducing the spread of COVID-19. Indeed, we’ve seen organizations like the World Health Organization…

    …and the CDC go back and forth in their recommendations…

    For the average person, it’s confusing and frustrating. It’s also a bit frightening, considering that we’ve seen people denounced in public for not wearing a mask while picking up a bag of groceries.

    The truth is masks have become the new wedge issue, the latest phase of the culture war. Mask opponents tend to see mask wearers as “fraidy cats” or virtue-signalling “sheeple” who willfully ignore basic science. Mask supporters, on the other hand, often see people who refuse to wear masks as selfish Trumpkins … who willfully ignore basic science.

    There’s not a lot of middle ground to be found and there’s no easy way to sit this one out. We all have to go outside, so at some we all are required to don the mask or not.

    It’s clear from the data that despite the impression of Americans as selfish rebel cowboys who won’t wear a mask to protect others, Americans are wearing masks far more than many people in European countries.

    Polls show Americans are wearing masks at record levels, though a political divide remains: 98 percent of Democrats report wearing masks in public compared to 66 percent of Republicans and 85 percent of Independents. (These numbers, no doubt, are to some extent the product of mask requirements in cities and states.)

    Whether one is pro-mask or anti-mask, the fact of the matter is that face coverings have become politicized to an unhealthy degree, which stands to only further pollute the science.

    Last month, for example, researchers at Minnesota’s Center for Infectious Disease Research and Policy responded to demands they remove an article that found mask requirements were “not based on sound data.”

    The school, to its credit, did not remove the article, but instead opted to address the objections critics of their research had raised.

    The ethics of medicine go back millennia. 

    The Hippocratic Oath famously calls on medical practitioners to “first, do no harm.” (Those words didn’t actually appear in the original oath; they developed as a form of shorthand.)

    There is a similar principle in the realm of public health: the Principle of Effectiveness.

    Public health officials say the idea makes it clear that public health organizations have a responsibility to not harm the people they are assigned to protect.

    “If a community is at risk, the government may have a duty to recommend interventions, as long as those interventions will cause no harm, or are the least harmful option,” wrote Claire J. Horwell Professor of Geohealth at Durham University and Fiona McDonald, Co-Director of the Australian Centre for Health Law Research at Queensland University of Technology.

    “If an agency follows the principle of effectiveness, it will only recommend an intervention that they know to be effective.”

    The problem with mask mandates is that public health officials are not merely recommending a precaution that may or may not be effective.

    They are using force to make people submit to a state order that could ultimately make individuals or entire populations sicker, according to world-leading public health officials.

    That is not just a violation of the Effectiveness Principle. It’s a violation of a basic personal freedom.

    Mask advocates might mean well, but they overlook a basic reality: humans spontaneously alter behavior during pandemics. Scientific evidence shows that American workplaces and consumers changed the patterns of their travel before lockdown orders were issued.

    As I’ve previously noted, this should come as no surprise: Humans are intelligent, instinctive, and self-preserving mammals who generally seek to avoid high-risk behavior. The natural law of spontaneous order shows that people naturally take actions of self-protection by constantly analyzing risk.

    Instead of ordering people to “mask-up” under penalty of fines or jail time, scientists and public health officials should get back to playing their most important role: developing sound research on which people can freely make informed decisions.

    See the World Health Organization’s Latest Guidelines on Masks and COVID-19…

  • South Dakota Gov Reportedly Made 'Replica' Of Mt Rushmore With President Trump Added On
    South Dakota Gov Reportedly Made ‘Replica’ Of Mt Rushmore With President Trump Added On

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/08/2020 – 22:30

    The nationwide fervor that gripped college students, and a coalition of other “marginalized” groups, comprising the American “anti-neocolonial” coalition, has seemingly dimmed. Just the other day, it seems, Democratic politicians were desperately talking out of both sides of their mouths as “activists” demanded the destruction – via legal or, seemingly just as often, illegal, means – of monuments like Mt. Rushmore.

    But in a New York Times story published Saturday afternoon (just in time to run in the Sunday edition, probably on A1), the paper accuses South Dakota Gov. Kirsti Noem, one of the most outspoken governors in the country when it comes to resisting social distancing measures, of trying to supplant Vice President Mike Pence on the GOP ticket in November.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Despite dedicating two of its most prolific White House reporters (Maggie Haberman and Jonathan Martin, whose bylines appear on the piece, entitled “How Kristi Noem, Mt. Rushmore and Trump Fueled Speculation About Pence’s Job”) to the story, the NYT could only come up with anonymously sourced rumor and some vaguely plausible, previously unreported meetings to substantiate a story about perceived plot to oust Pence – a plot that probably never really existed.

    There’s been no end to infighting both within the White House and across the GOP and Democratic political establishments over the past 4 years – that goes without saying.

    But it seems like the NYT’s fixation on Noem, the paper’s fury over the governor’s opposition to things like mandatory mask laws, and the sick, liberal obsession with destroying Mt. Rushmore, have agglomerated into what will undoubtedly become a must-click NYT story.

    And they say Zero Hedge reporting is “conspiratorial”…

    Here’s the NYT:

    WASHINGTON — Since the first days after she was elected governor of South Dakota in 2018, Kristi Noem had been working to ensure that President Trump would come to Mount Rushmore for a fireworks-filled July 4 extravaganza.

    After all, the president had told her in the Oval Office that he aspired to have his image etched on the monument. And last year, a White House aide reached out to the governor’s office with a question, according to a Republican official familiar with the conversation: What’s the process to add additional presidents to Mount Rushmore?

    So last month, when the president arrived in the Black Hills for the star-spangled spectacle he had pined for, Ms. Noem made the most of it.

    Introducing Mr. Trump against the floodlit backdrop of his carved predecessors, the governor played to the president’s craving for adulation by noting that in just three days more than 125,000 people had signed up for only 7,500 seats; she likened him to Theodore Roosevelt, a leader who “braves the dangers of the arena”; and she mimicked the president’s rhetoric by scorning protesters who she said were seeking to discredit the country’s founders.

    In private, the efforts to charm Mr. Trump were more pointed, according to a person familiar with the episode: Ms. Noem greeted him with a four-foot replica of Mount Rushmore that included a fifth presidential likeness: his.

    But less than three weeks later, Ms. Noem came to the White House with far less fanfare — to meet not with Mr. Trump, but with Vice President Mike Pence. Word had circulated through the Trump administration that she was ingratiating herself with the president, fueling suspicions that there might have been a discussion about her serving as his running mate in November. Ms. Noem assured Mr. Pence that she wanted to help the ticket however she could, according to an official present.

    She never stated it directly, but the vice president found her message clear: She was not after his job.

    The notion that Pence’s place on the ticket is in jeopardy doesn’t seem to be based on much more than speculation surrounding the campaign’s reaction to the national poll numbers, which the NYT continuously cites as the basis for all the personal grudges and office gossip frequently splayed across the pages of America’s “Paper of Record”. However, Pence’s approval ratings among registered Republicans remains huge, even if his standing among moderates isn’t, and he has continuously proven his utility to the administration, along with his adeptness at playing the role of the president’s straight man.

    Liberals have this image in their heads of the Trump administration as this snake pit, where everyone is immediately replaceable, and individual standing really all depends on the president’s daily whims. We suspect this is a deliberately facile oversimplification.

    Around the 15th paragraph, the story involves into an exploration of Noem’s ascendance within Trump’s inner circle, which has apparently ruffled some feathers (shocker).

    Senator Tom Cotton of Arkansas was in New Hampshire late last month, Senator Rick Scott of Florida is angling to take over the Senate Republican campaign arm to cultivate donors, and Representative Liz Cheney of Wyoming is defending Dr. Anthony S. Fauci, the government’s leading expert on infectious disease, while separating herself from Mr. Trump on some national security issues.

    At the same time, Secretary of State Mike Pompeo is attempting to shore up his conservative credentials by pushing a hard line on China, and Senators Ted Cruz of Texas and Rand Paul of Kentucky are attempting to reclaim their standing as fiscal hawks by loudly opposing additional spending on coronavirus relief.

    Drawing less attention, but working equally hard to burnish her national profile, is Ms. Noem. The governor, 48, has installed a TV studio in her state capitol, become a Fox News regular and started taking advice from Mr. Trump’s former 2016 campaign manager, Corey Lewandowski, who still has the president’s ear.

    Next month, she’ll address a county Republican dinner in Iowa.

    “There seems like there might be some interest on her part — it certainly gets noticed,” Jon Hansen, a Republican state representative in South Dakota, said of Ms. Noem’s positioning for national office.

    Aside from a small number of large clusters at meat-processing plants or other large critical facilities – one of which was misleadingly labeled “the worst outbreak in the country” by CNN – South Dakota has reported just 9,371 cases among its population of roughly 885,000 people.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    South Dakota’s rate of transmission is higher than some states, but lower than others, including several of its neighbors. But we suspect this won’t be the last hit piece on the state’s governor tied to her ambition and popularity – two qualities that the NYT says should be ‘celebrated’ in women, so long as it’s the right woman, ie one who subscribes to all of the NYT’s orthodoxies.

  • Social Media Imposing Modern-Day 'Hays Code' On Political Speech
    Social Media Imposing Modern-Day ‘Hays Code’ On Political Speech

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/08/2020 – 22:00

    Authored by Kalev Leetaru via RealClearPolitics.com,

    Social media companies continued to assert their power over the political sphere this week, with Twitter temporarily suspending the Trump campaign’s ability to post until it removed a clip of a Fox News interview with the president regarding COVID-19.

    When the Democratic National Committee reposted the video to debunk it, Twitter similarly banned the DNC from tweeting until it too deleted the footage.

    With Twitter seemingly unbothered by the implications of suspending a presidential campaign’s account just 12 weeks before the election, what might the future hold as control of our public squares is increasingly centralized?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Twitch became the first social media platform to formally suspend a presidential candidate’s account this past June when it deleted two of President Trump’s campaign rally videos for violations of its “hateful conduct” rules.

    In doing so, it emphasized the divide between physical and virtual campaigning. At an in-person rally a candidate can present the policy proposals he or she believes supporters want.

    Virtual rallies, however, are policed by an army of moderators enforcing ever-changing acceptable speech policies, forcing politicians to self-censor or risk deletion from the online world that increasingly shapes elections.

    In the case of this week’s ban, the story is all the more remarkable because the video in question was actually a cable TV interview with the nation’s leader, meaning that social platforms were in effect banning a major news organization’s reporting. As news is increasingly consumed through social media, the upshot is that the online platform’s acceptable speech rules are being applied to traditional news outlets.

    Additionally, rather than link the video to an outside fact check, Facebook simply deleted it as “a violation of our policies around harmful COVID misinformation” while Twitter forced the campaign to delete the post as a “violation of the Twitter Rules on COVID-19 misinformation.”

    Both companies cited as the offending statement Trump’s claim that children have “much stronger immune systems” than adults and thus “they don’t have a problem” when infected. While oversimplifying, Trump’s claims are not that far removed from those of CDC Director Robert Redfield and infectious disease expert Dr. Anthony Fauci, who have cited the pathogen’s significantly reduced severity in children in their calls to safely reopen schools this fall.

    While more measured than the “immunity” claimed by Trump, the gist of his statement — that COVID-19’s impact on children appears to be less severe than its effect on older Americans — aligns with the public statements of his medical advisers.

    Moreover, when Elon Musk tweeted in March that “kids are essentially immune,” Twitter clarified that his tweet did not violate its COVID-19 rules. To this date, Musk’s tweet carries no warnings or fact-checking statements from Twitter refuting it or adding additional context to his claims. Why is Musk’s assertion permissible but Trump’s is banned? Given that both are imprecise summaries of current scientific knowledge, where does Twitter draw the line?

    In many ways, social media platforms have become modern-day incarnations of the Hays Code that governed Hollywood from the 1930s to 1960s, establishing “morality” standards and enforcing them with an army of censors. By shaping popular culture through its control of movies, the Hays Code ensured that generations of Americans were presented an idealized world of benevolent public institutions, including police and politicians whose good works were spotlighted and any wrongdoing was punished. Moreover, as an extrajudicial speech regulation, studios could modify the rules and exempt content at will, much as social platforms do today.

    The Hays Code’s influence came from the fact that the studio system was largely centralized, meaning a small number of companies largely controlled what audiences saw. While niche independent studios could set their own rules, the dominance of the major studios ensured the code had an outsized effect over entertainment speech, the same as Twitter and Facebook’s rules are far more influential than those of upstarts like Parler.

    Nearly a century later, lawmakers are once again awakening to the power of centralized speech controls by turning to social media companies to impose constraints traditionally prohibited under the First Amendment.  Twenty state attorneys general demanded this week that Facebook considerably narrow its speech rules to outlaw anything the government sees as “hate speech.” While the government itself cannot ban most speech, this novel approach suggests it may be legal for the government to instead ask private companies to ban speech it dislikes, nominally complying with the First Amendment by outsourcing the banning process.

    Instagram previewed the impact even subtle algorithmic tweaks can have when, over the last few months, searches for Trump on its platform yielded no negative hashtags, while searches for Joe Biden displayed numerous anti-Biden results. While the company claims this was merely a bug that affected other political hashtags as well, it reminds us of the power socials have in shaping the public debate by hiding or emphasizing negative news about political candidates.

    As platforms embrace the concept of applying their rules to major news outlets, traditional journalism will no longer act as a bulwark against the power of Silicon Valley. Wikipedia ruled last month that Fox News was no longer a reputable source for political and scientific articles and can now be referenced “only when there are additional sources to corroborate or if it is clearly marked as opinion or biased.” This movement is likely to accelerate if Washington turns its sights on regulating Silicon Valley, with platforms almost certain to ban or suppress news coverage and commentary describing them as monopolies.

    With just under three months until the election, Twitter sees nothing wrong with suspending a major presidential campaign’s ability to post. What happens as platforms increasingly embrace their ability to take such steps? Election integrity advisers have for years warned of the dangers of “deep fakes” being released in the days just before an election. While that threat hasn’t materialized yet, we have the very real possibility of social platforms banning a politician the day before an election as a major story breaks, preventing him from responding and undermining public trust in the outcome.

    Despite disappearing half a century ago, the impact of the Hays Code is still felt today in the way it shaped Hollywood’s portrayal of institutions like the police.

    How will we look back half a century from now on the social censorship of today? Will we see it as a momentary experiment that was quickly reversed or will it too shape the course of society for decades?

  • Inside One Of Big Brother's 'Location Harvesting' Contractors, Which Tracks 'Hundreds Of Millions' Of Phones
    Inside One Of Big Brother’s ‘Location Harvesting’ Contractors, Which Tracks ‘Hundreds Of Millions’ Of Phones

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/08/2020 – 21:30

    A Virginia-based software company founded by two US military veterans with backgrounds in intelligence has been tracking hundreds of millions of mobile phones across the world, according to documents reviewed by the Wall Street Journal.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The company, Anomaly Six LLC, draws location data from over 500 apps – partly through their proprietary software development kit (SDK) which they’ve paid to embed directly in some of the apps, while the company gets location data from partner providers. The SDK allows the company to obtain a user’s location if they have allowed the apps in question to access the phone’s GPS coordinates.

    App publishers often allow third-party companies, for a fee, to insert SDKs into their apps. The SDK maker then sells the consumer data harvested from the app, and the app publisher gets a chunk of revenue. But consumers have no way to know whether SDKs are embedded in apps; most privacy policies don’t disclose that information. Anomaly Six says it embeds its own SDK in some apps, and in other cases gets location data from other partners. –Wall Street Journal

    Anomaly Six holds contracts with several branches of the US Government – although they told the Journal that they ‘restrict the sale of US mobile phone movement data to nongovernmental, private sector clients,’ according to the report. Private sector clients – typically marketing companies or others in the advertising space – buy and sell geolocation data, sometimes ‘reselling it to government agencies or contractors‘ according to the report.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And as the Journal notes, in the case of Anomaly Six, “the direct collection of such data by a business closely linked to US national security agencies is unusual.

    Founded by defense-contracting veterans who spent most of their careers in close contact with government agencies, tailored their operation to interface with national-security, according to interviews and court records.

    “Anomaly Six is a veteran-owned small business that processes and visualizes location data sourced from mobile devices for analytics and insights,” the company told The Journal in response to questions for the article. “We leverage detailed location data from numerous first-party sources to provide insights into groups, behaviors, and patterns.”

    The company acknowledges the “intense scrutiny” surrounding government access to private location data – but insists they aren’t breaking any laws, and that the data it peddles is ‘commercially available.’

    Anomaly Six said it would support regulation to require more disclosure by apps of how data is collected and used. The exact apps the company partners with couldn’t be determined and the company declined to comment, citing confidentiality agreements. The partnerships between data brokers and app makers are typically closely held trade secrets within the world of commercial-data sales. -WSJ

    Calls for greater transparency

    Marketing expert and founder of the Location Based Marketing Association, Asif Khan, says government access to harvested consumer location data has been a longstanding problem for the industry – and has insisted that app-makers provide greater transparency with consumers regarding how their data is used once collected.

    “You could argue that the government has the right, just like any commercial entity, to buy the data, if the data is available from a commercial supplier,” said Khan, adding “But you also need to be able to clearly say ‘this data could be used by government.’”

    I think the average consumer doesn’t have a clue,” he added.

    That said, the data harvested from apps typically doesn’t link to the name of the cellphone owner. Instead, devices are typically identified using an alphanumeric code. Still, the movement patterns of a specific phone over time (such as where it is every night) can allow analysts to deduce who owns it.

    Consumers world-wide are often in the dark about governments’ acquisition and use of such data. Despite collecting data from consumer apps, Anomaly Six doesn’t have a privacy policy on its website, nor is it registered as a data broker in California, where a state law passed in 2018 typically requires companies to detail how they are acquiring and using consumer data. The company says it doesn’t meet the definition of a data broker under California law and isn’t required to register. The California attorney general’s office didn’t respond to a request for comment.

    According to interviews with numerous people in the industry, there is little regulation in the U.S. about the buying and selling of location data, leading to what one industry veteran called “the Wild West.” Consumers have come to expect free apps, and app makers have turned to selling user data to pay for the costs of developing and running the software, people familiar with the industry. -WSJ

    Anomaly Six and its founders been sued by a competitor, Babel Street, which provides social-media monitoring services to the intelligence community and law-enforcement agencies. Of note, two founders of Anomaly Six are former Babel Street employees who left in 2018, according to the lawsuit.

    The lawsuit, filed two years ago, offers insight into the secretive world of location harvesting products used by the US government.

    Anomaly Six founder Brandan Huff had managed Babel Street’s relationship with the Defense Department. His co-founder, former Army contractor Jeffrey Heinz, also manage Babel Street’s relationships with the DOJ, US Cyber Command, civilian federal agencies and the intelligence community according to court records.

    For example, one of Babel Street’s products, “Locate X,” provides access to the location records of millions of cell phones harvested from consumer apps. Babel claims their two ex-employees sought to build a competing product.

    Babel Street doesn’t publicly advertise Locate X and binds clients and users to secrecy about even its existence, according to contracts and user agreements reviewed by the Journal. Developed with input from U.S. government officials, according to court records, Locate X is widely used by military intelligence units who work on gathering “open source” intelligence, or information taken from publicly available sources. Babel Street also has contracts with the Department of Homeland Security, the Justice Department, and many other civilian agencies, federal contracting data shows. Babel Street didn’t respond to a request for comment. -WSJ

    What’s more, both Babel Street and Anomaly Six products can be used to combine traditionally gathered intelligence – such as social media data, satellite imagery, confidential human sources, consumer data from the private sector and intercepted communications, according to interviews with people familiar with the process as well as documents reviewed by the Journal.

    The data is combined into what’s known as a “pattern of life” analysis, which allows for a deeper understanding of a potential intelligence target’s habits which can possibly be used to predict future behavior.

    “It’s really alarming to learn about companies like this that claim to have years’ worth of location data from all over the world. Revelations like this just keep coming,” said Georgetown University law professor Laura Moy, who directs the school’s Communications & Technology Law Clinic.

    “Users have no idea that when they install a weather app, a game, or any other innocuous-seeming app that their private location data is going to be harvested and sold. Apparently that’s what’s happening here, and we have no transparency into the practice.”

  • 'TwitTok?': Twitter Reportedly Joins Growing List Of Potential TikTok Suitors
    ‘TwitTok?’: Twitter Reportedly Joins Growing List Of Potential TikTok Suitors

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/08/2020 – 21:29

    The ideological battle over the fate of TikTok is provoking fist fights in the Oval Office, and a scramble among the country’s biggest tech firms to see if they might be able to come up with a workable pitch that would allow them to win approval to buy the US operations (along with New Zealand, Australia and Canada, and possibly more) of the popular Chinese-owned social media platform – the only real obstacle to a deal at a time when corporate credit is essentially free.

    It’s becoming increasingly obvious that the app, which the Trump Administration is threatening to shut down in the US over fears of a “national security threat” (Chinese law forces all Chinese companies to cooperate with state security forces, provoking fears that ByteDance, TikTok’s owner, might be compelled to set up a pipeline of Americans’ private information straight to Beijing), has become perhaps the biggest political football at a time of intense strain in the bilateral relationship.

    But amid the chaos and the geopolitical posturing of the leaders of the world’s two largest economies, America’s tech giants apparently see an opportunity, however unlikely, to circumvent opposition to further tech-industry mergers and seal what very well might be the last major merger in the industry for quite some time.

    And with the world headed into a period of protracted slowdown, companies might as well take advantage of the free money, and lock in that future EPS growth while they can.

    Pursuing TikTok would be an interesting choice for Twitter, mostly because the company once owned Vine, a popular video-sharing app that has been described as a direct forbear to TikTok. Twitter shut down Vine a few years back, a move that was widely denounced as a mistake by the app’s many rabid fans.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Since anti-trust scrutiny is such a hot issue in the world of big tech right now, it seems every company that has reportedly engaged in “talks” about the prospects for a deal has a reason for why it might assuage regulators and lawmakers and convince both Congress and the White House to agree to the deal. Being the smallest of the three major companies rumored to be potential suitors, Twitter obviously has the best case from a purely anti-trust standpoint (although it seems reporters keep coming up with excuses for why Microsoft or Facebook could still make it work).

    Plus, Twitter’s comparatively tiny $29 billion market cap means it would likely need help from outside investors – a great opportunity for Sequoia and the other big VC firms who backed ByteDance who reportedly were in talks about a deal to bring TikTok into the US under their purview. The deal would have valued TikTok at $50 billion, according to unconfirmed reports.

    Because it is much smaller, Twitter has reasoned that it would be unlikely to face the same level of antitrust scrutiny as Microsoft or other potential bidders, said people familiar with the discussions.

    Twitter would almost certainly need help from other investors if it does buy TikTok. The company has far less financial firepower than other major tech players, though it does have high-powered investors such as private-equity firm Silver Lake. Twitter started making a consistent profit in the past couple of years, but reported a $1.23 billion loss in the latest quarter. Twitter reported $7.8 billion in cash and short-term investments as of June, compared with more than $136 billion for Microsoft.

    If a deal does ultimately come together, it would reshape Twitter. Although Twitter allows users to upload videos, the app’s focus is on short messages of text and images.

    Like we said above, if ByteDance does successfully sell TikTok, it could be the last major tech M&A deal for some time that’s (IPOs, fortunately for investment bankers, have nothing to do with anti-trust). We wouldn’t be surprised if every big player takes a sniff.

  • CIA Stuns In Saying "No Evidence" TikTok Giving Its Data To China
    CIA Stuns In Saying “No Evidence” TikTok Giving Its Data To China

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/08/2020 – 21:00

    Authored by Jason Ditz via AntiWar.com,

    Chinese app TikTok remains under fire by President Trump, with allegations that their being Chinese means China could access their user data, making it a serious problem. President Trump is set to ban TikTok next month.

    US officials see this as something China is bound to do with their apps, because Edward Snowden’s leaks showed this is exactly what the US did with its many apps and their user data. And yet did it happen?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Image: Reuters

    The latest report out of the CIA says no. While they said it is possible for China to access such user data, because of course it is, they confirmed that there is no evidence that any such things ever happened with TikTok.

    According to The New York Times on Friday:

    But when the C.I.A. was asked recently to assess whether it was also a national security problem, the answer that came back was highly equivocal.

    Yes, the agency’s analysts told the White House, it is possible that the Chinese intelligence authorities could intercept data or use the app to bore into smartphones. But there is no evidence they have done so, despite the calls from President Trump and Secretary of State Mike Pompeo to neutralize a threat from the app’s presence on millions of American devices.

    TikTok had already said they’d done nothing wrong, faulting Trump’s ban as denying them due process. 

    They promise to “pursue all remedies available to us.” With US tensions toward China growing, it’s likely they’ll try to limit remedies.

  • FTC Weighs In On Mystery Seeds From China, Citing Two Online Shopping Scams As Potential Motives
    FTC Weighs In On Mystery Seeds From China, Citing Two Online Shopping Scams As Potential Motives

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/08/2020 – 20:30

    Days ago, we wrote that the U.S. had finally started to identify some of the mystery seeds being shipped from China, apparently randomly, to U.S. citizens. 

    While the Department of Agriculture was able to identify “14 types of plants” that the seeds belonged to, including cabbage, hibiscus, lavender, mint, morning glory, mustard, rose, rosemary and sage, the question still remained as to why these seeds were being sent. 

    On Friday, the Federal Trade Commission weighed in on the phenomenon for the first time and offered their take. First, they reminded people (in all capital letters): “DON’T PLANT THE MYSTERY SEEDS”. They also postulated that the seeds could be part of a scheme to prove that items were shipped from China from online orders that were ultimately never fulfilled:

    Did you order something and get seeds or other junk instead? If that’s you, dispute the charges for the thing you didn’t get. We hear that some sellers might be sending stuff so they can show payment companies the tracking numbers to prove they delivered something to you. So: tell the payment service you used (PayPal, for example), and your credit or debit card company right away that you got seeds, never got anything, or got something other than what you ordered. If the seller tries to use a tracking number to prove it delivered, point out anything to show that it’s not credible — maybe a weight listed that’s different from the package you got, or a different delivery address.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The FTC also wrote about a scam where, because someone sends you something unordered, it allows them to give themselves a good review under your time. 

    You might have read about the “brushing” scam. In this one, somebody sends you stuff, unordered, because it lets them give themselves a great review in your name. Annoying, but whatever, right? Nope. More than annoying. It could mean that the scammers have created an account in your name, or taken over your account, on online retail sites. Or even created new accounts (maybe lots of them) in other names tied to your address. Letting them post lots of seemingly-real reviews. So keep an eye on your online shopping accounts. If you spot activity that isn’t yours, report it to the site right away, and think about changing your password for that site.

    Finally, the FTC encourages people to contact the government if such packages are received. 

    Recall, it was about two weeks ago that we highlighted a mysterious trend that was sweeping the U.S.: citizens were receiving unsolicited packages of seeds, with return addresses from China, for apparently no reason at all.

    Art Gover, a plant science researcher at Penn State University said the “risk is low” of the plants being involved in biological warfare, but that the seeds “can be troublesome because they can introduce problematic weeds and diseases”.

    Lisa Delissio, a professor of biology at Salem State University in Massachusetts, said: “If any of the unidentified seeds turned out to be invasive species, they could displace native plants and compete for resources and cause harm to the environment, agriculture or human health.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Bernd Blossey, a professor in the department of natural resources at Cornell University commented: “Obviously planting rosemary or thyme in your garden isn’t something that will endanger our environment. But there may be other things in there that have not been identified yet. Any time you gain something unknown, my suggestion is burning them, not even throwing them in the trash.

    In our prior report, we suggested the mailings could be some sort of agricultural warfare brewing between the U.S. and China – where agriculture remains a key point of trade tensions – and where a cold war of sorts appears to be bubbling up under the surface. 

    After multiple reports in the U.S. media regarding the seeds, China’s Foreign Ministry responded last week by saying that China Post (the country’s state owned mail service) “has strictly followed regulations that ban the sending and receiving of seeds,” according to Bloomberg.

    Further, Chinese Foreign Ministry spokesman Wang Wenbin says that the parcels were “forged” and “not from China”. China has supposedly requested that the U.S. mail the seeds back to China so they could investigate further.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We noted last week that the response is anything but re-assuring. We’re not postmaster generals but we find the idea of being able to forge mailing labels – and get products to their final destination – in this day and age where even the decrepit U.S. postal service is mostly digital, as a difficult one. 

    The Washington State Department of Agriculture wrote about the phenomenon on their Facebook page on July 24, 2020 and said that the seeds are being shipping in packaging that identifies the contents as jewelry. Similar advisories have been issued in Virginia, Utah, Kansas, Arizona and Louisiana.

    Facebook users have been adding photos in the comments section of the post sharing photographs of seeds they have received from China. “It’s not a joke. I got some the other day!!!” one user commented, stating that the package identified the contents as a “Rose flower stud earring”.  

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Look’s like it’s all across the country,” stated an Indiana resident who also received seeds in the mail unsolicited. 

    At least 40 residents in Utah were said to have been mailed the unsolicited packages, according to the Daily Mail. The Kansas  Department of Agriculture and the Arizona Department of Agriculture also addressed the phenomenon, as did the Louisiana Department of Agriculture and Forestry, who said: 

    “Right now, we are uncertain what types of seeds are in the package. Out of caution, we are urging anyone who receives a package that was not ordered by the recipient, to please call the LDAF immediately. We need to identify the seeds to ensure they do not pose a risk to Louisiana’s agricultural industry or the environment.”

    There had been similar reports from Virginia’s Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services. “The seeds have yet to be identified, but officials speculate that the seeds may be of an invasive plant species and are advising residents not to use them,” Fox News reported.

    “Taking steps to prevent their introduction is the most effective method of reducing both the risk of invasive species infestations and the cost to control and mitigate those infestations,” VDACS wrote in a press release.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Twitter is also littered with reports of people receiving these seeds:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Washington State Department of Agriculture has advised people on its Facebook page:

    1) DO NOT plant them and if they are in sealed packaging (as in the photo below) don’t open the sealed package.

    2) This is known as agricultural smuggling. Report it to USDA and maintain the seeds and packaging until USDA instructs you what to do with the packages and seeds. They may be needed as evidence.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Anyone who has received seeds in the mail can report them to the United States Department of Agriculture by visiting their website here. The site says:

    If individuals are aware of the potential smuggling of prohibited exotic fruits, vegetables, or meat products into or through the USA, they can help APHIS by contacting the confidential Antismuggling Hotline number at 800-877-3835 or by sending an Email to SITC.Mail@aphis.usda.gov.

    USDA will make every attempt to protect the confidentiality of any information sources during an investigation within the extent of the law.

  • US Passes 5 Million Coronavirus Cases, Brazil Passes 3 Million: Live Updates
    US Passes 5 Million Coronavirus Cases, Brazil Passes 3 Million: Live Updates

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/08/2020 – 20:00

    Summary:

    • US passes 5 million cases
    • Brazil passes 3 million COVID cases
    • Global cases (per JHU): 19,481,330, deaths: 723,599.
    • Texas reports new cases, deaths; extends March emergency declaration
    • Trump signs executive order extending COVID relief
    • South Africa crosses 10k deaths
    • US reports 1.2% increase in confirmed cases
    • Arizona reports 1,054 new cases
    • US deaths top 160k
    • Florida reports another 187 deaths, cases climb
    • NY cases top 700
    • Hong Kong cases top 4,000
    • Germany “R” rate hits highest in 10 days
    • Denmark says may asks citizens to wear masks more frequently

    * * *

    Update (1945ET): Just hours after Brazil passed a similar, but much smaller, milestone, the data gurus at Johns Hopkins have reported that the number of confirmed cases in the US has surpassed 5 million, the highest tally of any country by a margin of 2 million cases (the next closest is Brazil, with 3 million, and India, with 2 million).

    The US reported its millionth case on April 28, more than three months after its first case. The country passed two million cases on June 10, three million on July 7, and four million on July 23.

    The single-day tally peaked on July 16, with 75,697, and has been slowly declining since then, though a second wave did push a handful of hard hit Sun Belt states to experience a later peak in June.

    * * *

    Update (1830ET): Texas reported 247 COVID-19 deaths since yesterday, bringing the state’s death total to 8,343. It also reported 6,959 new cases, bringing the state’s total to

    Hospitalizations dropped 193 to 7872.

    Gov. Greg Abbott has extended the disaster declaration originally issued March 13. The order makes a variety of state resources available to combat the pandemic.

    “Renewing this disaster declaration will provide communities with the resources they need to respond to COVID-19,” Abbott said in a statement. “I urge Texans to remain vigilant in our fight against this virus.”

    The world is approaching 20 million cases, with 19,781,205 confirmed as of Saturday night, according to Worldometer (which lumps in all “probable” and “asymptomatic” cases). JHU put the global number at 19,481,330. Global deaths are 723,599.

    * * *

    Update (1815ET): President Trump has signed an executive order extending some coronavirus relief for families and individuals (like enhanced unemployment benefits and the eviction moratorium).

    But that’s not the only major COVID-related news Saturday evening. A couple of days after India surpassed the critical 2 million case milestone, Brazil has become the second country (after only the US) to pass 3 million confirmed cases. But passing 100,000 deaths is just as big of a deal: only the US and Brazil have more than 100k deaths.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here’s more on the Brazil situation from the Inquirer.net:

    The nation of 210 million people has been reporting an average of more than 1,000 daily deaths from the pandemic since late May and reported 905 for the latest 24-hour period.

    The Health Ministry said there had been a total of 3,012,412 confirmed infections with the new coronavirus — death and infection tolls second only to the United States. And as in many nations, experts believe that both numbers are severe undercounts due to insufficient testing.

    In a tribute to COVID-19 victims Saturday morning, the non-governmental group Rio de Paz placed crosses on the sand on the famed Copacabana beach Saturday and released 1,000 red balloons into the sky.

    “It’s very sad. Those 100,000 represent various families, friends, parents, children”, said Marcio do Nascimento Silva, a 56-year-old taxi driver who lost his children in the pandemic and joined the tribute.

    “We reach that mark (100,000) and many people seem to not see it, both among the government and our people. They are not just numbers but people. Death became normal “, Silva said.

    President Jair Bolsonaro — who himself reported being infected — has been a consistent skeptic about the impact of the disease and an advocate of lifting restrictions on the economy that had been imposed by state governors trying to combat it. He has frequently mingled in crowds, sometimes without a mask.

    “I regret all the deaths, it’s already reaching the number 100,000, but we are going to find a way out of that”, Bolsonaro said in a Thursday night Facebook transmission.

    South Africa, meanwhile, reported 301 more coronavirus deaths on Saturday, bringing the total to 10,210. Africa’s most industrialized country has reported 553,188 cases, the most in Africa, and the fifth-highest tally in the world.

    California reported 7,371 new cases on Saturday, more than the 14-day average of 7,171, bringing its statewide total to 545,787. Deaths rose by 178 to 10,189, compared with an increase of 142 for the prior day.

    * * *

    Update (1435ET): Now that Arizona and California have reported their latest numbers (both states saw a continued slowdown in new cases), JHU and BBG have published their first preliminary estimate of new cases in the US over the last day. With 59,202 new cases (+1.2%) added, equivalent to the average pace from the last week, it looks like cases continue to trend lower, while deaths were over 1,000 again.

    Arizona reported 1,054 new cases (+0.6%), compared with an average 0.9% in the previous seven days. The total for the state is 186,107 cases. Another 56 deaths were reported, compared with 78 the previous day. The positive test rate was 12.5% compared with 15.7% the day before.

    * * *

    It’s official: The US has passed 160,000 confirmed deaths, according to figures reported by state health authorities and catalogued by Bloomberg, Johns Hopkins and other data providers. According to BBG & JHU, the US added 59,202 new cases (+1.2% ),  on par with the average daily over the previous seven days. Some 1,256 deaths were reported yesterday, the fourth consecutive day with more than 1,000, but fewer than the 1,842 reported the previous day. America has now confirmed 4,941,635 cases (plus thousands more logged as ‘probable’ ones, and potentially millions of “asymptomatic” cases that will never be documented) and 161,347 deaths (plus thousands that have probably gone uncounted).

     

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: NYT

    Of course, every time US deaths pass a big, round number, progressives come out with the pitchforks and conveniently try to “remind” indoctrinate the public to believe these deaths are Trump’s fault, and his alone.

    One day after Gov Andrew Cuomo bucked the national Democratic trend and declared that schools in New York would be allowed to reopen, New York reported 703 new cases, a 0.2% rise, which is in line with the average increase from the prior weeks (and months). NY’s state of spread has more or less plateaued at between 500 and 750 cases per day, with few exceptions. Additionally, the state reported five more deaths, the same number as the day before. Total hospitalizations in the state that had been the center of the U.S. outbreak remained low, at 573.

    In Florida, health officials reported 187 COVID-19 deaths on Saturday, along with the highest single-day total of new cases in a week with 8,502 cases, though the 7-day average for cases continued to move lower.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Now, 8,238 people have died and 526,577 people have been infected with the virus. The state’s positivity rate declined slightly, but was mostly steady at 9.9.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It’s been three consecutive days of increases in both COVID-19 cases and deaths as both seem to bounce back after the hurricane (though we sincerely doubt the hurricane’s tour stopped people from succumbing to the virus).

    Florida reported a record 257 deaths on July 31, when the state’s outbreak appeared to peak.

    As we await case and death data from the rest of the US, here’s what else is happening in COVID-19 news world-wide.

    Vietnam’s health ministry reported 21 new cases Saturday, of which 20 cases were linked to the coastal city of Danang, and one case was imported. After a lengthy stretch of no infections and deaths, the country has confirmed 353 infections tied to the Danang July 25 outbreak. Vietnam has a total of 810 cases with 10 deaths.

    Amid a non-stop flurry of vaccine news out of the US, Europe, China and Russia, Tianjin-based CanSino Biologics, one of the most closely-watched (in the west, and China) Chinese vaccine projects. The company said Saturday it may test its coronavirus vaccine on pregnant women to study its ability to protect groups most vulnerable to virus. The Chinese company, which was the first in the world to start human testing of vaccines against the virus in March, “may include pregnant women and look at the shot’s ability to protect” young people during future clinical trials, said CanSino founder Yu Xuefeng during a webinar hosted by Hillhouse Capital on Saturday.

    More signs of slowdown in Iran after deaths and cases surged in the country’s latest wave: single-day deaths fell to the lowest in six weeks with 132, with the number of new cases at a month-low of 2,125. Iran now has 18,264 confirmed deaths and 324,692 infections, with many, many more of both  suspected.

    Belgium, which has emerged as a hotspot in Europe’s nascent “second wave”, said on Saturday that 768 more infections have been detected, after 858 the day before. Five more deaths were reported, bringing the total number of fatalities to 9,866.

    Hong Kong reported 69 new cases Saturday, pushing its total north of 4,000. Indonesia posted 2,277 new infections, lifting its tally above 123,500.

    Meanwhile, in Denmark, where the country’s committee of experts leading its response have disagreed on the efficacy of masks, said the country likely won’t reopen nightclubs – as it had planned – due to an increase in cases. Prime Minister Mette Frederiksen said Danes may also have to get used to wearing face masks in public (at the moment, they are not mandatory, though Danes are asked to wear them on public transit).

    Starting Saturday, Germany will test all returning travelers as the country’s “R” value climbs to 1.16 on Friday, its highest level in a week-and-a-half.

    Here’s how the worst outbreaks in the world are progressing, per JHU:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

  • Deceit And Demagoguery In Montgomery County, Maryland
    Deceit And Demagoguery In Montgomery County, Maryland

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/08/2020 – 20:00

    Authored by James Bovard via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    Across the nation, politicians and bureaucrats have invoked the COVID pandemic to seize dictatorial power to ban activities they disapprove. One of the most brazen examples recently occurred in super-lefty Montgomery County (MoCo), Maryland, where local health czar Travis Gayles announced last Friday that he would impose a $5,000 fine and up to a year in prison on private school teachers that teach students in person between now and October 1. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    New COVID cases have plummeted in MoCo and are at very low levels. Gayles justified banning private schools in part because of rises in COVID transmission rates elsewhere in Maryland, the District of Columbia, and Virginia. Apparently, as long as there are any positive COVID test results within 300 miles, letting teachers teach is too risky.

    Maryland as a whole has been through the Covid wave and now deaths have plummeted. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On Monday, Gov. Larry Hogan overturned Gayles’ decree, ruling that the “blanket closure mandate imposed by Montgomery County was overly broad and inconsistent with the powers intended to be delegated to the county health officer… As long as schools develop safe and detailed plans that follow CDC and state guidelines, they should be empowered to do what’s best for their community.” Hogan declared, “This is a decision for schools and parents, not politicians.”

    On Wednesday, Gayles issued a new dictate claiming that local health officers are entitled to “take any action or measure necessary to prevent the spread of communicable disease” and “issue, when necessary, special instructions for control of a disease or condition.” Gayles claims that as long as more than 8 people test positive for COVID in Montgomery County each day, he is entitled to shut down all private schools at least until October 1. 

    In a closed video briefing for county employees on May 28, Gayles continually invoked “science and data” like a righteous priest invoking God and the Bible to sanctify scourging his enemies.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Travis Gayles

    What does it require to justify boundless power in a county of a million people? A COVID positive rate of 0.000008%.

    Surprise – the dictatorship will last forever – or at least until the Democratic political machine that runs the county decides it can profit from loosening the tourniquet it imposed that helped destroy more than 50,000 jobs and countless small businesses. 

    Montgomery County is suffering from epidemic levels of sexually-transmitted diseases including Hepatitis C and chlamydia. If Gayles has the right to shut down schools based on the 0.000008% rate, the same standard would justify invoking STD numbers to outlaw all sex between unmarried adults. But MoCo would never do that because sexual activity, unlike other private learning, is a freedom that progressives champion. 

    Gayles justified his school shutdown dictate:

    “The purpose of what we’re doing is to keep kids safe.”

    According to Gayles and other MoCo politicians, nothing matters except politicians’ self-proclaimed good intentions. 

    But the school shutdowns have profoundly disrupted lives and are increasingly blighting learning. A recent Wall Street Journal analysis headlined, “The Results Are In for Remote Learning: It Didn’t Work,” noted,

    “In many places, lots of students simply didn’t show up online, and administrators had no good way to find out why not… Soon many districts weren’t requiring students to do any work at all, increasing the risk that millions of students would have big gaps in their learning.” 

    The Center on Reinventing Public Education found that the vast majority of school districts did not require any live teaching over video. An analysis by the Centers for Disease Control (CDC) noted that only “one in three school districts expected teachers to provide instruction, track student engagement, or monitor academic progress for all students.” But since teachers in most places continued collecting full pay, the shutdown is wildly popular with teachers unions. 

    Montgomery County politicians and school officials have endlessly invoked “closing the achievement gap” to justify boosting school spending (and property taxes). But school shutdowns are devastating minorities. The CDC warned last month that “the lack of in-person educational options disproportionately harms low-income and minority children.” 

    An analysis by McKinsey and Company consultants estimated that if schools were entirely online until January, on average white students would lose 6 months of learning, Hispanic students 9 months, Black students 10 months and low-income students more than a year during the time school buildings have closed for the pandemic,” the Baltimore Sun reported.

    Many parents are desperate to get their children back to learning at full speed and are seeking private alternatives to shuttered public schools. Private schools have taken extreme measures to assure the safety of returning students, installing plexiglass shields, banning field trips, restricting time in hallways, and minimizing unnecessary contact. In comments last week, Gayles brushed off their efforts as “niche issues.” Bureaucrats have always considered freedom a niche nuisance. 

    After controversy erupted over the shutdown order, the County Council held a session “really showing its hatred of private schools,” Washington Examiner columnist Tim Carney, a Catholic father of six kids, observed. Carney tweeted, “Montgomery County Councilman Craig Rice said that ‘racism’ was behind the efforts to reopen nonpublic schools–because the bureaucrat who tried to close them is a black doctor.” Carney summarized Rice’s argument:

    “The county shouldn’t allow private schools the same liberty it allowed public schools (whether to reopen) because ‘affluent’ people are more willing to expose their own kids to infection than others are.” 

    Unfortunately, Rice did not bother explaining the “achievement gap” between local public schools and private schools (many of which spend far less per student). These are the same local politicians who cheered on local mass protests over the George Floyd killing in stark violation of “shelter-at-home” orders at the same time they continue outlawing church services.

    While private teaching is considered inherently too risky to permit, Montgomery County announced this week that massage parlors would be permitted to reopen. Local massage parlors are perennially getting busted because Asian masseuses provide more services to patrons than state law permits. But masseuses providing “happy endings” to male customers is apparently less of a public health peril than an adult standing in front of a group of plexiglassed students explaining algebra. 

    MoCo politicians pretending to take the high road have actually turned local children into “revenue hostages.” Gayles’ shutdown order expires on October 1 – one day after local public schools report their expected enrollment, which will largely determine how much subsidies they receive. Keeping private schools shut down could result in tens of millions of additional tax dollars for the school system even if those kids never show up for a single class – simply because parents will not have the opportunity to notify the county of plans to withdraw their kids for private schools. 

    The Montgomery County fight has brought out the usual Twitter mobs proclaiming that any government official who fails to prohibit all purportedly risky activity is to blame for any resulting illnesses or deaths. A Twitter user named TeachersAreNotYourSacrificialLambs responded to Hogan’s action:

    “He now owns it. Every Maryland private school illness, hospitalization, and death now falls squarely on his shoulders. He. Owns. It.”

    A self-described “progressive democrat” Twitter user railed at Hogan:

    “Why does he want dead children & school staff in Maryland?… Gov Larry just part of the #GOPDeathCult.”

    This is typical of how the COVID shutdowns and lockdowns have been scored: politicians are applauded for everything they ban while enjoying zero liability for the vast collateral damage they inflict. Many MoCo school nurses are concerned about the harm from shutdowns of school-based health centers that effectively serve as primary care providers for many low-income families. The CDC cited studies on pandemics that showed “a strong association between length of quarantine and Post Traumatic Stress Disorder symptoms, avoidance behavior, and anger.” Maybe the champions of perpetual shutdowns will solve that problem by making antidepressants mandatory for all children?

    Politicians and bureaucrats who claim a right to outlaw all risks ignore the risk of tyranny. Gayles and other MoCo politicians sneer at their critics as if they were unwashed deplorables incapable of understanding “science.” But their school shutdown policy is simply Political Science 101, using deceit and demagoguery to seize more power.

  • 'Broke And Unemployed' Hunter Biden Slapped With $450K Tax Lien – Which Was 'Resolved' In Six Days
    ‘Broke And Unemployed’ Hunter Biden Slapped With $450K Tax Lien – Which Was ‘Resolved’ In Six Days

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/08/2020 – 19:30

    For a guy claiming to be broke and unemployed in January in order to avoid paying child support, Hunter Biden was able to ‘resolve’ a $450,000 tax lien in mid-July, just six days after it was issued.

    Although Biden claimed that he was broke, he was living in a $12,000-per-month Hollywood Hills rental home and spotted driving a $129,000 Porsche Panamera in Beverly Hills. After a judge ordered Biden to turn over his financial records and travel to Arkansas for a deposition, the former lobbyist agreed to settle the case with Roberts. –Washington Free Beacon

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While fighting with his baby mama, an Arkansas stripper, Biden said in a court filing “I attest that I am unemployed and have had no monthly income since May 2019,” adding “I currently have significant debts (in part as a result of obligations arising from my divorce which was final in April 2017).”

    According to the Washington Free Beacon, “The younger Biden owed $238,562.76 in state income taxes from 2017 and $215,328.16 in state income taxes from 2018, according to records from the District of Columbia’s Office of Tax and Revenue. The District of Columbia filed a $453,890 lien against him on July 9.

    Yet, six days later on July 15, Hunter was released from the tax lien, as confirmed to the Beacon by a spokesman for DC’s Office of the Chief Financial Officer after the “tax issue was resolved.”

    Harvey Bezozi, a tax expert who specializes in large-scale tax debt negotiations, said the only way to get a lien released is to pay the settlement in full—often through a payment plan, penalty abatement, or other compromise with the government—or to prove the lien was filed in error. He said liens can take months or years to resolve.

    “It drags on,” he said. “Six days had to be some kind of expeditious kind of process for this.” -Washington Free Beacon

    This isn’t the first time Hunter has dodged taxes. In 2018, he was slapped with a $112,805 tax lien, which was resolved this March according to the Beacon.

    Biden came under scrutiny over his lucrative positions with foreign entities – reportedly raking in over $50,000 per month sitting on the board of directors for Ukrainian energy giant Burisma, and serving on the board of BHR Partners – “a $1.5 billion private equity arm of Chinese investment fund Bohai Capital,” according to the report.

    According to Biden’s lawyer, he no longer sits on either board.

    Not just Hunter…

    The Beacon also reports that the Biden family has been hit with multiple tax liens over the last several decades.

    James Biden has had at least five tax liens filed against him between 1995 and 2015, including one for $589,095 filed in 2015 and released one year later. Frank Biden, another brother of the presidential candidate, has had at least three liens for unpaid income taxes. He said in 2011 that a $32,500 lien in Kentucky stemmed from his struggle with alcohol addiction and was being paid off through a monthly plan, according to the Broward Palm Beach New Times. Joe Biden’s sister Valerie and her husband John Owens have faced at least five tax liens, including one for $229,749 in 1990.

    Lucky for the Bidens, they’re in the club…

  • Modern Monetary Theory Is Playing With Fire
    Modern Monetary Theory Is Playing With Fire

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/08/2020 – 19:00

    Authored by Ethan Yang via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    Like it or not Stephanie Kelton is an economist whose ideas are making a huge splash in the world of economic thinking. She currently serves as a professor at Stony Brook University but more notably served as the Chief Economist on the Senate Budget Committee as well as the senior economic advisor to the Bernie Sanders presidential campaign. This background should give you some insight into her latest book, titled The Deficit Myth: Modern Monetary Theory and the Birth of the People’s Economy. 

    Published in 2020, this book may be the flagship literature of Modern Monetary Theory (MMT), as it is not only accessible to the average person but also well-written. Perhaps that is also what makes this book rather dangerous as it combines rigorous theoretical concepts with rather deceptive analogies about how these ideas might work, and a decent amount of progressive political talking points. 

    It is part textbook, part persuasion, and part manifesto. Despite my disagreements with the content, I must admit that it is a thought-provoking piece of literature that provides insight on what may be a very real economic idea to be reckoned with in the near future. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Myth Surrounding Deficits 

    Dr. Kelton starts off her book with a basic point about the way the federal government works. Contrary to the way most politicians talk about the federal budget, there is nothing necessarily wrong with running a deficit and accumulating debt. Economists can debate to what extent debt accumulation and spending are healthy but a basic tenet of MMT is the universal truth that the United States government can spend money it doesn’t have. Kelton writes 

    “What if the federal budget is fundamentally different than your household budget? What if I showed you that the deficit bogeyman isn’t real? What if I could convince you that we can have an economy that puts people and the planet first? That finding the money is not the problem?”

    The foundation for MMT is the idea that the federal government is different from a household in that it does not need to raise money before spending it, that it can accumulate debt without any constraints on its fiscal capabilities. The United States government can and has routinely printed money it wishes to spend even though it may not physically possess it, such as the most recent stimulus checks in response to COVID-19.

    With a yes or no vote the federal government has spent trillions of dollars that have not been generated from tax revenue or borrowing money. This is possible because the government is a money supplier. It has a monopoly on currency production and can print as much money as it desires. 

    Whether or not it should spend more than it brings in with taxes is another debate entirely. The core foundation of MMT is the fact that a sovereign currency issuer like the United States, Japan, or Australia can continue to print money and therefore never run out. Under this logic, budget deficits are simply imaginary constraints; the real constraints to spending lie elsewhere.

    Dealing With Inflation 

    This shift in understanding as described by Kelton is that 

    “MMT clarifies what is economically possible and thus shifts the terrain of policy debates that get hamstrung over questions of financial feasibility.”

    In a way, governments around the world essentially practice MMT in a limited capacity as they print the money they don’t have to use in complicated monetary maneuvers. However, Kelton and MMT advocates believe that we should take this way of thinking to its limits. She extols the possibility of building new infrastructure, improving healthcare, and essentially funding a whole slew of projects that would otherwise be impossible without excessive taxation. 

    Essentially we can have our cake and eat it too, getting more government services without higher taxes. Obviously one of the main concerns with this idea is that inflation would skyrocket if we simply pumped trillions of dollars into the economy. If inflation gets out of control, the country will follow in the steps of Weimar Germany, Venezuela, and Zimbabwe, dooming us to economic collapse. Kelton addresses this concern by clarifying 

    “Do I believe the solution to all our problems is to simply spend more money? No, of course not. Just because there are no financial constraints on the federal budget doesn’t mean there aren’t real limits to what the government can (and should) do. Every economy has its own internal speed limit, regulated by the availability of real productive resources.”

    Powerful economies like the United States can afford to print and spend more money than a country like Haiti. MMT doesn’t necessarily posit that poor countries can print themselves to prosperity, more so that all countries with sovereignty over their currency can increase their potential by printing more money. Policymakers also need to be cognizant of what she refers to as “slack” in the economy which would be underutilized resources and opportunities. If there is enough “slack” in the economy, printing money will not result in inflation as productivity would increase with the money supply. 

    The main problem with this premise, however, is trusting politicians and bureaucrats to make these incredibly sophisticated decisions. How could one know how much capital exists in the economy and what the correct amount of money to print in proportion to economic growth will be? This is a knowledge problem that needs to be reckoned with before we embark on this highly theoretical trip to the monetary unknown. 

    The Sovereignty of Currency

    Kelton reminds us that the idea of balanced budgets and deficit constraints may have been important in the past when we were on the gold standard but now that we have moved into the world of fiat currency these restrictions no longer apply. This is again true; however, she believes we should take the idea to its logical extreme.

    To explain the importance of monetary sovereignty she explains that 

    “In addition to the United States, countries like the United Kingdom, Japan, Canada, and Australia enjoy a high degree of monetary sovereignty… Some nations have weakened their monetary sovereignty, either by pegging their exchange rates (e.g. Bermuda, Venezuela, Niger), abandonment of their national currencies (e.g., all nineteen countries in the Eurozone, Ecuador, Panama), or by borrowing heavily in US dollars or other foreign currencies (e.g. Ukraine, Argentina, Turkey, Brazil). Doing any of these things compromises a nation’s monetary sovereignty and diminishes policy flexibility.” 

    By diminishing their monetary sovereignty, these countries have lost their capacity to print money in order to execute policies like stimulus spending during economic downturns and financing more government programs. 

    She adds that 

    “Most developing countries are at the weaker end of the sovereignty spectrum…That’s because most poorer developing nations rely on imports to meet vital social needs.”

    Although this is certainly correct, whether or not this is the reason why some countries are poor or whether or not increased government spending will be more helpful in developing countries is another debate to be had. Whether or not that is a good thing would depend on whether one sees government intervention as the source of prosperity rather than the private sector. Does the government have a significant role to play in directing the economy like the Soviet Union or should it simply guarantee life, liberty, and property so that its enterprising citizens are free to prosper in a way they choose? 

    Lastly, if countries with strong currencies decide to do as Kelton says and start printing trillions of dollars to finance projects even if it’s proportional to inflation what message will that send to users of the currency? An article in Forbes warns that 

    “These numbers are so large that they no longer have any meaning; they are simply abstractions,”

    “Pointing to warnings made by former Fed chairman Paul Volcker that “it is a governmental responsibility to maintain the value of the currency they issue. And when they fail to do that, it is something that undermines an essential trust in government.”

    “After you throw a few trillion dollars around, people start to believe that it’s all a big joke.” 

    Perhaps the United States can get away with a COVID-19 stimulus bill and maybe we can afford to finance a round of infrastructure improvements by printing a few trillion dollars. But what about the next round of repairs, the next crisis, the next pressing issue our government is called upon to address? Can we just keep printing more money and is this sustainable? These are some of the ultimate questions that proponents of MMT must address if this theory is ever to be viewed as sustainable. 

    The Role of Taxes 

    One of the immediate questions one may have when presented with a monetary system that proposes to pay for everything with the printing press, and that budgets are now irrelevant, is why should we keep paying taxes? 

    Kelton is very upfront with her view of taxation, which isn’t to raise funds for programs as the government is already the sole provider of currency. It is as she writes,

    “To get the population to do all that work, the government imposes taxes, fees, fines, or other obligations. The tax is there to create a demand for the government’s currency. Before anyone can pay the tax someone has to do the work to earn the currency.”

    Kelton contends that money was first distributed by the government. In order to make it worth something, the government imposed taxes so that people could exchange them for government services and also work to earn the government’s money. Government is therefore responsible for creating the medium of exchange that society uses to conduct trade and also incentivizing people to conduct useful activity. 

    According to Kelton taxes serve four essential purposes: 

    1. To incentivize work by creating demand and scarcity for money

    2. To manage inflation by taking money out of the economy 

    3. To redistribute income 

    4. To discourage negative activity like smoking and carbon emissions 

    In this view, taxes do not exist to support the operations of the state through a democratic process agreed upon by the electorate, but to simply exercise the levers of power. 

    The conventional theory of money and taxes is that money arose as a convenient medium of exchange amongst individuals in the marketplace desiring a universal system of value exchange. That productive activity exists regardless of government and taxation is a process in which the government either forcefully or consensually takes from the population to fund generally agreed upon public services such as raising a military. 

    These are two fundamentally contrasting views of the role of the state; one positing that it is the central component that enables civilized life and the other holding that it is an entity that is supported by the fruits of a civilized society and is, therefore, a humble servant. 

    Some Thoughts on MMT

    Aside from the concerns with the monetary aspects of MMT such as controlling inflation, maintaining confidence in our currency, and embarking on an unprecedented experiment in monetary theory, I am most concerned with the political economy surrounding MMT. 

    Kelton contends that such policies will create a “people’s economy” where politicians and not the Federal Reserve will make monetary decisions. Where we will not have to abide by the traditional constraints created by budgets, interest rates, and so on. On this topic, AIER has written extensively on why we should not politicize the Federal Reserve and monetary policy more generally.

    Kelton also makes the case for a federal jobs guarantee financed almost entirely by printed money. She contends that such a program would help alleviate job disruption brought about by technological advancement, recessions, and industry disruptions brought about by free trade. This will cost an obscene amount of money combined with the other promises she makes to fix infrastructure, fund Social Security, and provide free college, fund a Green New Deal, and so on. 

    How can we know this will fit within the appropriate spending to economic growth ratio that she keeps reminding us is the real consideration we should be making? Furthermore, a federal jobs guarantee alongside all the other government programs she advocates for will crowd out productivity from the private sector. Large government programs such as a jobs guarantee will not only artificially divert labor and capital from productive sectors, but it will also drive up inflation when countless individuals are being given checks for government jobs that may not be adding any value to the economy. 

    If the country embraced MMT, there would be massive concerns with cronyism as politicians would be unleashed to give virtually as much money to their friends as possible. There will be a populist tug of war over the printing press as the different political interests attempt to supercharge their favorite spending habits. The electorate, emboldened by the prospect of simply enriching itself with the printing press will trap politicians in a position where the one who promises to print the most money wins. We don’t need to look any further than the current welfare state to see this in action. If this happens then the careful management of the money supply and inflation which Kelton holds as the main concern with making MMT work will be broken in short order. 

    Finally, there is a question about the very role of government. Kelton contends that MMT will make it more democratic. I believe that unchaining the state from the constraints of budgets and taxation will make it more despotic. Whatever the government can give, it can also take. MMT seems to favor one that can give endlessly and take everything. 

    When we look to the state, do we see a deity to kneel before? Or do we see a government instituted among men, deriving its just powers from the consent of the governed? A government that will live and serve within the means that which we democratically assign to it. 

    Kelton may be right that the old mechanisms of the gold standard, balanced budgets, and debt may be instruments of the past in the face of MMT and fiat currency. However, they also provide a service that goes beyond money and finance. That is maintaining a government that is prudent, humble, and sustainable. 

    Conclusion 

    Stephanie Kelton’s book is well-written and serves as an accessible insight into the world of Modern Monetary Theory. Although I have many objections, I found it a great read nonetheless, especially knowing that this is a field of economic thought that may be much more relevant in the near future. There are parts of the book that are essential pieces of economic knowledge that define the modern state, some that are questionable premises, and some that are blatant political talking points. As a contribution to economic thought, I find it to be rather questionable. It also features circular logic, as well as bait-and-switch style arguments. As an accessible insight into an increasingly relevant monetary theory and the world of public finance, I believe the book does just that.

  • Navarro And Mnuchin Get Into "Knock Down, Drag Out" Oval Office Brawl Over TikTok Ban
    Navarro And Mnuchin Get Into “Knock Down, Drag Out” Oval Office Brawl Over TikTok Ban

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/08/2020 – 18:30

    In other TikTok-related news, the Washington Post published a lengthy report delineating what was going on inside the West Wing as Trump laid down the executive order, and others who have an interest in getting the deal done.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As Microsoft, under the impression it had the ‘all-clear’, moved ahead with the talks, only to be stymied by Beijing’s fury over Trump’s executive order, which soured the optics of the situation and would have made a sale of TikTok look like a concession on China’s part, others stepped in to intercede with President Trump, who was once again calling the shots while his advisors battled for his ear.

    After a succinct refresher on the history of the Trump Administration’s national security concerns regarding TikTok, WaPo identifies VCs with a major investment in ByteDance who stepped in to intercede on the Chinese giant’s behalf, as big-time Silicon Valley dealmakers tried to get closer to the president.

    TikTok is considered one of the biggest technological success stories to come out of China. People around the world use the app to make short videos about their lives, pets and dance moves. Parent company ByteDance CEO Zhang Yiming calls it a “window” into the world.

    TikTok has 100 million U.S. users, many of whom are under 25 years old. Its success has drawn interest from prominent investors, including Sequoia Capital, a leading Silicon Valley venture capital firm. In 2014, its China arm made a prescient $35 million investment in TikTok’s parent company, giving it a stake that today is reportedly valued at more than $800 million. TikTok’s owner also acquired Musical.ly in 2017 for $1 billion, making it even more attractive to young users.

    But with that success came scrutiny. TikTok was first identified as a potential national security threat in summer 2019, when U.S. officials approached ByteDance about concerns regarding its acquisition.

    That turned into a formal national security investigation this year. It was led by the Committee on Foreign Investment in the United States (CFIUS), an interagency body that screens foreign investment transactions for national security risks and recommends to the president on security grounds whether certain proposed acquisitions should be rejected.as well as completed acquisitions reversed.

    In TikTok’s case, the app has been downloaded more than 175 million times in the United States, and like other apps accesses copious amounts of sensitive personal data, including Internet and browsing activity, location data and search histories. That information is potentially available to the Chinese government under a national intelligence law that requires any Chinese company to “support, assist and cooperate with state intelligence work.”

    The news of the investigation sent shudders through the halls of Sequoia Capital. Global managing partner Doug Leone took the lead on advocating for TikTok with the Trump administration, telling people he could use his influence with Trump to help the company, according to a person familiar with the discussions who spoke on the condition of anonymity to describe a private conversation. Leone and his wife have given $100,000 to Trump’s reelection bid, and Leone sits on the president’s task force for reopening the economy, according to public records.

    As Trump’s anger simmered over the past two weeks, with periods of silence regularly punctuated by threats of a ban, the China trade hawk faction stepped up to try and push back against the horde of wealthy VCs seeking to dissuade Trump from pursuing the ban.

    The hawks accused the finance guys of being dangerously sympathetic to the CCP, and ignoring the good of the country for the sake of the bottom line. Things (reportedly) got heated, and Pete Navarro and Steve Mnuchin got into what was described as a “knock down, drag out fight”.

    In front of Trump, trade adviser Peter Navarro and other aides late last week, Treasury Secretary Steven Mnuchin began arguing that the Chinese-owned video-sharing service TikTok should be sold to a U.S. company. Mnuchin had talked several times to Microsoft’s senior leaders and was confident that he had rallied support within the administration for a sale to the tech giant on national security grounds.

    Navarro pushed back, demanding an outright ban of TikTok, while accusing Mnuchin of being soft on China, the people said, speaking on the condition of anonymity to discuss private discussions freely. The treasury secretary appeared taken aback, they said.

    The ensuing argument — which was described by one of the people as a “knockdown, drag-out” brawl — was preceded by months of backroom dealings among investors, lobbyists and executives. Many of these stakeholders long understood the critical nature of establishing close connections with key figures in the Trump administration.

    Of course, this isn’t the first time Navarro has reportedly “fought” somebody during a meeting, according to the American press. Remember that time he almost beat up Dr. Fauci?

  • David Stockman: The Biggest Threat To Your Prosperity And What You Can Do
    David Stockman: The Biggest Threat To Your Prosperity And What You Can Do

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/08/2020 – 18:00

    Authored by David Stockman via Doug Casey’s International Man,

    If you want to understand America’s dangerously deepening travails, you have to start at the Federal Reserve’s Eccles Building…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    After a 30-year rolling coup d’etat, its occupants have imposed a regime of destructive falsification on America’s financial, economic, political, and social life.

    It has become the heart of mushrooming darkness taking prosperity, liberty, and democracy down for the count.

    How do we get 50 million unemployed… the stock market at record highs… companies trashing their balance sheets to buy back stock and do vastly overpriced M&A deals… doctors and politicians savaging the economy and the livelihoods of millions… and Washington going incontinent on the fiscal front?

    The answer is simple:

    the rapidly-spreading dysfunction is rooted in the giant financial fraud embedded in the Federal Reserve’s $7 trillion balance sheet.

    The latter is blissfully taken for granted by the politicians and C-suites of corporate America and desperately insisted upon by the unhinged gamblers of Wall Street.

    Even if you believe that a regular infusion of money is needed to catalyze the wheels of capitalist growth (we don’t), there is absolutely no economic logic that says the central bank’s balance sheet should grow by orders of magnitude faster than GDP over an extended period of time.

    If the robustly growing GDP of 1987 needed $5 of central bank money per $100 of GDP, there is no reason why that ratio should have differed in 2008 or 2020.

    But it did and does.

    In June 1987, the nominal GDP was $4.8 trillion, and by all current estimates, it clocked in at $19.4 trillion in June 2020. That’s a 4.1X expansion over 33 years.

    In contrast, the Federal Reserve’s balance sheet stood at about $240 billion on the eve of Greenspan’s arrival at the Eccles Building in August 1987 and clocked in at $7.2 trillion at the end of Q2 2020. That’s a 30X gain.

    Since the early 2000s and the dotcom crash, it has only gotten far worse. The chart below of the Fed’s balance sheet and GDP is indexed to 100 as of January 2003. It tells you all you need to know.

    During the past 17 years, the Fed’s balance sheet (purple line) has risen to 983% of its starting value, even as GDP (red line) has risen to only 192%.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What was fostered in the vast area between the two lines above was excess liquidity, debt, speculation, and malinvestment. This was accompanied by a complete breakdown of financial discipline in all sectors of American society.

    These long-term growth factors are not even in the same zip code or planet—and the massive excess of the Federal Reserve’s balance sheet versus GDP did not happen like a tree falling silently in an empty forest.

    On the contrary, it turned the financial and economic world upside down. That’s because the effect was to systematically suppress the cost of debt and speculation and drastically inflate the value of financial assets. As a result, everyone got false price signals and changed their behavior accordingly:

    • Wall Street investors became leveraged speculators;

    • Corporate business builders become financial engineers;

    • Middle-class households became debt slaves living hand-to-mouth on borrowed money; and

    • Washington’s politicians became free lunch spendthrifts piling on public debt like there was no tomorrow.

    The Fed is now a rogue institution that comprises a clear and present danger to the future of prosperity and liberty in America.

    The tragedy is that the clueless speculators on Wall Street, and the politicians of Washington who are riding the most egregiously inflated financial bubble ever, don’t even get the joke.

    So what happens next?

    We’d say nothing very pleasant.

    *  *  *

    The truth is, we’re on the cusp of a economic crisis that could eclipse anything we’ve seen before. And most people won’t be prepared for what’s coming. That’s exactly why bestselling author Doug Casey and his team just released a free report with all the details on how to survive an economic collapse. Click here to download the PDF now.

  • "Leave, You Are All Killers!" Protesters Storm Multiple Government Ministries In Beirut
    “Leave, You Are All Killers!” Protesters Storm Multiple Government Ministries In Beirut

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/08/2020 – 17:30

    The expected protests and riots have broken out in Beirut at the end of a week in which families mourned the over 150 killed in Tuesday’s blast centered on the port, which it’s now been revealed was the result of years of negligence by authorities who allowed 2,750 metric tons of ammonium nitrate to be unsafely stored right alongside a large stash of impounded fireworks

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Like the years-long banking crisis, the government is seen as directly responsible for this week’s epic tragedy, also given the lengthy paper trail showing multiple officials and entities begged the government to do something about the explosive substance stored so near a densely populated area.

    But Lebanese now taking to the streets this weekend could care less about the fine points buck passing among the political class as now a tsunami of rage is being unleashed, additionally as the economy is in shambles with record unemployment.

    On Saturday local TV stations showed footage of thousands of protesters occupying at least four government ministry buildings in downtown Beirut.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    An estimated ten thousand clashed with police, which reportedly involved shots fired, in mayhem that also left at least one police officer dead.

    And Reuters reports that the country’s banking sector remains target of the people’s rage:

    “Lebanese protesters stormed government ministries in Beirut and trashed the offices of the Association of Lebanese Banks on Saturday, TV footage showed, as shots were fired in growing protests over this week’s devastating explosion,” according to the report.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Martyr’s Square on Saturday, via AFP.

    Already the growing number of injuries are an indicator of just how fierce this round of protests promises to be:

    The Red Cross said it had treated 117 people for injuries on the scene while another 55 were taken to hospital. A fire broke out in central Martyrs’ Square.

    Dozens of protesters broke into the foreign ministry where they burnt a framed portrait of President Michel Aoun, representative for many of a political class that has ruled Lebanon for decades and that they say is to blame for its deep political and economic crises.

    It appears that going into the night the ministries now “taken over” the protesters include the Foreign Affairs, Environment, and Energy ministry buildings, as well as the Ministry of Economy.

    Chants of “the people want the fall of the regime” as well as the burning of portraits of top Lebanese leaders and politicians, such as of President Michel Aoun could be observed during mass demonstrations at Martyr’s Square.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Responding to the pressure and popular anger, Prime Minister Hassan Diab called for early parliamentary elections and a two month transition period.

    “We cannot get out of this crisis without early parliamentary elections,” Diab said in a televised address.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Reuters describes further of Saturday’s mayhem in the streets:

    The protesters said their politicians should be hanged and punished over their negligence that they say led to Tuesday’s gigantic explosion that killed 158 people and injured more than 6,000.

    The protesters chanted , reprising a popular chant from the Arab Spring uprisings of 2011. They held posters saying “Leave, you are all killers”.

    Lebanon is still at the height of abanking and currency crisis which previously saw unprecedented restrictions put on patrons of banks: they couldn’t draw from their own savings accounts on fears of a run on cash (specifically the dollar), and had strict controls put on external transfers out of the country. This as the local Lebanese lira had effectively collapsed.

    Lebanese officials estimate that the explosion resulted in between three and five billion dollars worth of destruction, and many thousands of people left homeless given whole buildings were destroyed.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    One thing is for certain: expect much more protests and unrest to come.

  • More Than 84,000 Mail In Ballots Disqualified In New York City Primary
    More Than 84,000 Mail In Ballots Disqualified In New York City Primary

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/08/2020 – 17:00

    If this is foreshadowing for the national election, November could wind up being total chaos.

    Mail in ballots belonging to more than 84,000 Democrats in New York City who were seeking to vote in the presidential primary were disqualified according to newly released data from the Board of Elections.

    According to the NY Post, the city received 403,103 mail in ballots for the June 23 Democratic primary and the certified results on Wednesday confirmed that only 318,995 of these ballots were counted. 

    The 84,108 ballots that were not counted represented 21% of the total mail-in ballots.

    The ballots were disqualified for things like arriving late, lacking a postmark or failing to include the signature of the voter. Roughly 30,000 mail-in ballots from Brooklyn alone were invalidated, the Post reported.

    The report describes the Postal Service as “woefully underprepared” to handle and process an “avalanche” of mail-in ballots that were distributed and encouraged for use as a result of the coronavirus pandemic. The state had paid for pre-paid envelopes to make it easier to vote during the pandemic. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The disaster has now turned into a legal mess, with a federal judge ruling Monday that “thousands of voters” were disenfranchised because of “tardy mailing and processing” of the ballots. Lawyer Arthur Schwartz said: “A 26 percent invalidation rate is astounding. It’s very troubling. The envelope with directions for the signature was so poorly designed.”

    The court is now fighting with the Board of Elections over whether ballots received by June 25 should be counted.

    Doug Kellner, co-chair of the state Board of Elections, had suggested reforms to the ballot but was “blown off” by the BOE back in November. He has urged proper staffing at polling places for November to keep lines short and to tally absentee ballots quicker than the six weeks it took for the primaries. 

    “Add new capacity to process the applications in a timely manner now. Do not wait for a backlog from which you can never recover,” Kellner suggested.

    He concluded, in his notes to the BOE: “To those voters who did not have an opportunity to cast their ballots in the primary election, we should apologize for not doing more. Elected officials and others warned that we were not deploying sufficient resources to mail out absentee ballots in a timely manner, and in hindsight, we could have done more to address the problem.”

  • Kodak Government Deal On Verge Of Collapse: DFC Says "Recent Allegations Of Wrongdoing Raise Serious Concerns"
    Kodak Government Deal On Verge Of Collapse: DFC Says “Recent Allegations Of Wrongdoing Raise Serious Concerns”

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/08/2020 – 16:30

    Ever since Reuters reported last week that Kodak had granted its Chairman, Jim Continenza, some 1.75 million options (in what appears to be less than an “arms-length deal” and as the result of what was called an understanding” with the Board of Directors), just one day before the infamous $765 million loan from the government was announced on July 28, which was meant to transform the one-time photography titan (since bankrupt) into a China supply-chain alternative to produce pharmaceutical products in Rochester and at the company’s facility in St. Paul, Minnesota, and which sent its stock price from $2 to $60 in two days….

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … making the Kodak chairman richer by tens of millions overnight, the stench of impropriety was spreading, sparking demands from Democrats for a probe of potential backroom dealings between the Trump administration and Continenza, and culminating with an alleged SEC probe last week into the legitimacy of the deal.

    And now, just ten days later, it appears that the entire deal is on the verge of collapse with the government’s International Development Finance Corporation tweeting late on Friday that…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    … the same IDFC which on July 28 released a statement quoting Continenza as saying: “Kodak will play a critical role in the return of a reliable American pharmaceutical supply chain.”

    Trump, too, had hailed the development. “I want to congratulate the people in Kodak,” he said at a press briefing. “They’ve been working very hard.” It was Trump’s encouragement that sparked the furious rally in KODK stock and a frenzied scramble by Robinhood traders to buy up every share they could find, even if as the chart below show, the euphoria has clearly peaked.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Peter Navarro, director of the Office of Trade and Manufacturing Policy, tweeted that he is very disappointed that last week’s deal with Kodak was tarnished by allegations.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Last Friday, Kodak announced that it will appoint a special committee to conduct an internal review of the process surrounding the company’s agreement, although if the IDFC is indeed putting the deal on hold that may well be moot; the only question is whether any insiders and funds that liquidated stock and generated impressive overnight profits will be forced to clawback their gains.

  • Trump Signs Executive Orders On Coronavirus Relief, Payroll Tax
    Trump Signs Executive Orders On Coronavirus Relief, Payroll Tax

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/08/2020 – 16:13

    With the ‘swamp’ fighting over pork as unemployed Americans die on the vine, President Trump on Saturday announced sweeping executive actions aimed at coronavirus relief – after stimulus Congressional stimulus talks broke down once again last week.

    The new orders will:

    • Eliminate the payroll tax
    • Extend unemployment benefits by $400 per week, down from $600
    • Defer student loan repayments through the end of the year
    • Extend protections against evictions

    The administration is also looking at cuts to income taxes for lower and middle-income individuals, as well as cuts capital gains taxes.

    Update (1640ET): As anticipated, President Trump has announced that he will be signing executive orders to eliminate the payroll tax, extend a block on evictions, and continue to provide supplemental unemployment benefits.

    Earlier:

    President Trump will be making a major announcement on Saturday which many believe to be linked to rumors of an executive order covering pandemic stimulus funds and other measures.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    On Friday evening, Trump said that if a bipartisan agreement isn’t reached on stimulus legislation, he’s prepared to sign executive orders.

  • TikTok Plans To Sue White House Over 'National Security' Ban
    TikTok Plans To Sue White House Over ‘National Security’ Ban

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/08/2020 – 16:00

    NPR News, the closest thing we have to a CCP mouthpiece in the US, has gotten a rare scoop: TikTok owner ByteDance is planning to sue the Trump Administration over its executive order barring TikTok & Tencent’s WeChat from the US market by mid-September.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The lawsuit, which will be filed in an American court (the Southern District of California, to be exact), alleges that Trump’s executive order is unconstitutional because it didn’t allow TikTok enough time to respond, while also alleging that Trump’s claims that TikTok is a “national security threat” are “baseless”.

    TikTok is planning to sue the Trump administration, challenging the president’s executive order banning the service from the United States.

    The video-sharing app hugely popular with the smartphone generation TikTok will file the federal lawsuit as soon as Tuesday, according to a person who was directly involved in the forthcoming suit but was not authorized to speak for the company. It will be filed in the U.S. District Court for the Southern District of California, where TikTok’s American operations are based, the person said.

    NPR has learned that the lawsuit will argue that the president’s far-reaching action is unconstitutional because it failed to give the company a chance to respond. It also alleges that the administration’s national security justification for the order is baseless, according to the source.

    “It’s based on pure speculation and conjecture,” the source said. “The order has no findings of fact, just reiterates rhetoric about China that has been kicking around.”

    The White House declined to comment on the expected litigation, but defended the president’s executive order. “The Administration is committed to protecting the American people from all cyber related threats to critical infrastructure, public health and safety, and our economic and national security,” according to White House spokesman Judd Deere.

    Fortunately, the American legal system prioritizes the ‘rule of law’, so much so that it’s one of the few jurisdictions in the world where foreign companies can sue the domestic government and stand a reasonable chance of winning. They can’t say the same about courts in China.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 8th August 2020

  • The Hiroshima Myth
    The Hiroshima Myth

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/07/2020 – 23:45

    Authored by John Denson via The Mises Institute,

    Every year during the first two weeks of August the mass news media and many politicians at the national level trot out the “patriotic” political myth that the dropping of the two atomic bombs on Japan in August of 1945 caused them to surrender, and thereby saved the lives of anywhere from five hundred thousand to 1 million American soldiers, who did not have to invade the islands.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Opinion polls over the last fifty years show that American citizens overwhelmingly (between 80 and 90 percent) believe this false history which, of course, makes them feel better about killing hundreds of thousands of Japanese civilians (mostly women and children) and saving American lives to accomplish the ending of the war.

    The best book, in my opinion, to explode this myth is The Decision to Use the Bomb by Gar Alperovitz, because it not only explains the real reasons the bombs were dropped, but also gives a detailed history of how and why the myth was created that this slaughter of innocent civilians was justified, and therefore morally acceptable. The essential problem starts with President Franklin Roosevelt’s policy of unconditional surrender, which was reluctantly adopted by Churchill and Stalin, and which President Truman decided to adopt when he succeeded Roosevelt in April of 1945. Hanson Baldwin was the principal writer for the New York Times who covered World War II and he wrote an important book immediately after the war entitled Great Mistakes of the War. Baldwin concludes that the unconditional surrender policy

    was perhaps the biggest political mistake of the war….Unconditional surrender was an open invitation to unconditional resistance; it discouraged opposition to Hitler, probably lengthened the war, cost us lives, and helped to lead to the present aborted peace.

    The stark fact is that the Japanese leaders, both military and civilian, including the emperor, were willing to surrender in May of 1945 if the emperor could remain in place and not be subjected to a war crimes trial after the war. This fact became known to President Truman as early as May of 1945. The Japanese monarchy was one of the oldest in all of history, dating back to 660 BC. The Japanese religion added the belief that all the emperors were the direct descendants of the sun goddess, Amaterasu. The reigning Emperor Hirohito was the 124th in the direct line of descent. After the bombs were dropped on August 6 and 9 of 1945, and their surrender soon thereafter, the Japanese were allowed to keep their emperor on the throne and he was not subjected to any war crimes trial. The emperor, Hirohito, came on the throne in 1926 and continued in his position until his death in 1989. Since President Truman, in effect, accepted the conditional surrender offered by the Japanese as early as May of 1945, the question is posed, “Why then were the bombs dropped?”

    The author Alperovitz gives us the answer in great detail which can only be summarized here, but he states,

    We have noted a series of Japanese peace feelers in Switzerland which OSS Chief William Donovan reported to Truman in May and June [1945]. These suggested, even at this point, that the U.S. demand for unconditional surrender might well be the only serious obstacle to peace. At the center of the explorations, as we also saw, was Allen Dulles, chief of OSS [Office of Strategic Services] operations in Switzerland (and subsequently Director of the CIA). In his 1966 book The Secret Surrender, Dulles recalled that “On July 20, 1945, under instructions from Washington, I went to the Potsdam Conference and reported there to Secretary [of War] Stimson on what I had learned from Tokyo — they desired to surrender if they could retain the Emperor and their constitution as a basis for maintaining discipline and order in Japan after the devastating news of surrender became known to the Japanese people.”

    It is documented by Alperovitz that Stimson reported this directly to Truman. Alperovitz further points out in detail the documentary proof that every top presidential civilian and military advisor, with the exception of James Byrnes, along with Prime Minister Churchill and his top British military leadership, urged Truman to revise the unconditional surrender policy so as to allow the Japanese to surrender and keep their emperor. All this advice was given to Truman prior to the Potsdam Proclamation which occurred on July 26, 1945. This proclamation made a final demand upon Japan to surrender unconditionally or suffer drastic consequences.

    Another startling fact about the military connection to the dropping of the bomb is the lack of knowledge on the part of General MacArthur about the existence of the bomb and whether it was to be dropped. Alperovitz states,

    MacArthur knew nothing about advance planning for the atomic bomb’s use until almost the last minute. Nor was he personally in the chain of command in this connection; the order came straight from Washington. Indeed, the War Department waited until five days before the bombing of Hiroshima even to notify MacArthur — the commanding general of the U.S. Army Forces in the Pacific — of the existence of the atomic bomb.

    Alperovitz makes it very clear that the main person Truman was listening to while he ignored all of this civilian and military advice was James Byrnes, the man who virtually controlled Truman at the beginning of his administration. Byrnes was one of the most experienced political figures in Washington, having served for over thirty years in both the House and the Senate. He had also served as a United States Supreme Court Justice, and at the request of President Roosevelt, he resigned that position and accepted the role in the Roosevelt administration of managing the domestic economy. Byrnes went to the Yalta Conference with Roosevelt and then was given the responsibility to get Congress and the American people to accept the agreements made at Yalta.

    When Truman became a senator in 1935, Byrnes immediately became his friend and mentor and remained close to Truman until Truman became president. Truman never forgot this and immediately called on Byrnes to be his number-two man in the new administration. Byrnes had expected to be named the vice presidential candidate [to FDR] to replace [Henry A.] Wallace and had been disappointed when Truman had been named, yet he and Truman remained very close. Byrnes had also been very close to Roosevelt, while Truman was kept in the dark by Roosevelt most of the time he served as vice president. Truman asked Byrnes immediately, in April, to become his secretary of state but they delayed the official appointment until July 3, 1945, so as not to offend the incumbent. Byrnes had also accepted a position on the interim committee which had control over the policy regarding the atom bomb, and therefore, in April 1945 became Truman’s main foreign policy advisor, and especially the advisor on the use of the atomic bomb. It was Byrnes who encouraged Truman to postpone the Potsdam Conference and his meeting with Stalin until they could know, at the conference, if the atomic bomb was successfully tested. While at the Potsdam Conference the experiments proved successful and Truman advised Stalin that a new massively destructive weapon was now available to America, which Byrnes hoped would make Stalin back off from any excessive demands or activity in the postwar period.

    Truman secretly gave the orders on July 25, 1945, that the bombs would be dropped in August while he was to be en route back to America. On July 26, he issued the Potsdam Proclamation, or ultimatum, to Japan to surrender, leaving in place the unconditional surrender policy, thereby causing both Truman and Byrnes to believe that the terms would not be accepted by Japan.

    The conclusion drawn unmistakably from the evidence presented is that Byrnes is the man who convinced Truman to keep the unconditional surrender policy and not accept Japan’s surrender so that the bombs could actually be dropped, thereby demonstrating to the Russians that America had a new forceful leader in place, a “new sheriff in Dodge” who, unlike Roosevelt, was going to be tough with the Russians on foreign policy and that the Russians needed to “back off” during what would become known as the “Cold War.”

    A secondary reason was that Congress would now be told about why they had made the secret appropriation to a Manhattan Project and the huge expenditure would be justified by showing that not only did the bombs work but that they would bring the war to an end, make the Russians back off, and enable America to become the most powerful military force in the world.

    If the surrender by the Japanese had been accepted between May and the end of July of 1945 and the emperor had been left in place, as in fact he was after the bombing, this would have kept Russia out of the war. Russia agreed at Yalta to come into the Japanese war three months after Germany surrendered. In fact, Germany surrendered on May 8, 1945, and Russia announced on August 8, (exactly three months thereafter) that it was abandoning its neutrality policy with Japan and entering the war. Russia’s entry into the war for six days allowed them to gain tremendous power and influence in China, Korea, and other key areas of Asia. The Japanese were deathly afraid of communism and if the Potsdam Proclamation had indicated that America would accept the conditional surrender allowing the emperor to remain in place and informed the Japanese that Russia would enter the war if they did not surrender, then this would surely have assured a quick Japanese surrender.

    The second question that Alperovitz answers in the last half of the book is how and why the Hiroshima myth was created. The story of the myth begins with the person of James B. Conant, the president of Harvard University, who was a prominent scientist, having initially made his mark as a chemist working on poison gas during World War I. During World War II, he was chairman of the National Defense Research Committee from the summer of 1941 until the end of the war and he was one of the central figures overseeing the Manhattan Project. Conant became concerned about his future academic career, as well as his positions in private industry, because various people began to speak out concerning why the bombs were dropped. On September 9, 1945, Admiral William F. Halsey, commander of the Third Fleet, was publically quoted extensively as stating that the atomic bomb was used because the scientists had a “toy and they wanted to try it out.” He further stated, “The first atomic bomb was an unnecessary experiment….It was a mistake to ever drop it.” Albert Einstein, one of the world’s foremost scientists, who was also an important person connected with the development of the atomic bomb, responded and his words were headlined in the New York Times: “Einstein Deplores Use of Atom Bomb.” The story reported that Einstein stated that “A great majority of scientists were opposed to the sudden employment of the atom bomb.” In Einstein’s judgment, the dropping of the bomb was a political-diplomatic decision rather than a military or scientific decision.

    Probably the person closest to Truman, from the military standpoint, was Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff Admiral William Leahy, and there was much talk that he also deplored the use of the bomb and had strongly advised Truman not to use it, but advised rather to revise the unconditional surrender policy so that the Japanese could surrender and keep the emperor. Leahy’s views were later reported by Hanson Baldwin in an interview that Leahy “thought the business of recognizing the continuation of the Emperor was a detail which should have been solved easily.” Leahy’s secretary, Dorothy Ringquist, reported that Leahy told her on the day the Hiroshima bomb was dropped, “Dorothy, we will regret this day. The United States will suffer, for war is not to be waged on women and children.” Another important naval voice, the commander in chief of the US Fleet and chief of naval operations, Ernest J. King, stated that the naval blockade and prior bombing of Japan in March of 1945 had rendered the Japanese helpless and that the use of the atomic bomb was both unnecessary and immoral. Also, the opinion of Fleet Admiral Chester W. Nimitz, given in a press conference on September 22, 1945, was reported as: “The Admiral took the opportunity of adding his voice to those insisting that Japan had been defeated before the atomic bombing and Russia’s entry into the war.” In a subsequent speech at the Washington Monument on October 5, 1945, Admiral Nimitz stated, “The Japanese had, in fact, already sued for peace before the atomic age was announced to the world with the destruction of Hiroshima and before the Russian entry into the war.”

    It was learned also that on or about July 20, 1945, General Eisenhower had urged Truman, in a personal visit, not to use the atomic bomb. Eisenhower’s assessment was, “It wasn’t necessary to hit them with that awful thing….[T]o use the atomic bomb, to kill and terrorize civilians, without even attempting [negotiations], was a double crime.” Eisenhower also stated that it wasn’t necessary for Truman to “succumb” to Byrnes.

    James Conant came to the conclusion that some important person in the administration must go public to show that the dropping of the bombs was a military necessity, thereby saving the lives of hundreds of thousands of American soldiers, so he approached Harvey Bundy and his son, McGeorge Bundy. It was agreed by them that the most important person to create this myth was Secretary of War Henry Stimson. It was decided that Stimson would write a long article to be widely circulated in a prominent national magazine. This article was revised repeatedly by McGeorge Bundy and Conant before it was published in Harper’s Magazine in February of 1947. The long article became the subject of a front-page article and editorial in the New York Timesand in the editorial it was stated, “There can be no doubt that the president and Mr. Stimson are right when they mention that the bomb caused the Japanese to surrender.” Later, in 1959, President Truman specifically endorsed this conclusion, including the idea that it saved the lives of a million American soldiers. This myth has been renewed annually by the news media and various political leaders ever since.

    It is very pertinent that in the memoir of Henry Stimson entitled On Active Service in Peace and War, he states, “Unfortunately, I have lived long enough to know that history is often not what actually happened but what is recorded as such.”

    To bring this matter more into focus from the human tragedy standpoint, I recommend the reading of a book entitled Hiroshima Diary: The Journal of a Japanese Physician, August 6–September 30, 1945, by Michiko Hachiya. He was a survivor of Hiroshima and kept a daily diary about the women, children, and old men that he treated on a daily basis in the hospital. The doctor was badly injured himself but recovered enough to help others and his account of the personal tragedies of innocent civilians who were either badly burned or died as a result of the bombing puts the moral issue into a clear perspective for all of us to consider.

    Now that we live in the nuclear age and there are enough nuclear weapons spread around the world to destroy civilization, we need to face the fact that America is the only country to have used this awful weapon and that it was unnecessary to have done so. If Americans would come to recognize the truth, rather than the myth, it might cause such a moral revolt that we would take the lead throughout the world in realizing that wars in the future may well become nuclear and therefore all wars must be avoided at almost any cost. Hopefully, our knowledge of science has not outrun our ability to exercise prudent and humane moral and political judgment to the extent that we are destined for extermination.

  • Airline Will Pay Medical & Funeral Costs To Get People Flying Again In COVID-19 World
    Airline Will Pay Medical & Funeral Costs To Get People Flying Again In COVID-19 World

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/07/2020 – 23:25

    At a moment the trade union for the airline industry, International Air Transport Association (IATA), has issued a dire prediction laying out that it doesn’t expect air travel to recover to pre-pandemic levels until at least after 2024, one major foreign carrier is rolling out with an unexpected, deeply unorthodox policy to gem up business and attention. 

    Emirates, the Dubai-based state-owned airline and flag carrier of the United Arab Emirates, is now offering passengers a ‘safety net’ of sorts, telling customers that if they catch coronavirus while traveling on their flights, the airline will cover all costs related to medical treatment, hotel quarantine, and even their funeral in the event of death.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Emirates file image

    The desperate measure — and no doubt costly in terms of the airline’s insurance premiums — comes as Emirates says it expects to cut as many as 9,000 jobs in the coming weeks.

    Billing itself as “the first airline in the world to offer free, global cover for COVID-19 related costs,” it announced the policy on its website late last week:

    Emirates customers can travel with confidence, as the airline will cover medical expenses of up to EUR 150,000 [$175,000] and quarantine costs of EUR 100 per day for 14 days, should they be diagnosed with COVID-19 during their travel, while they are away from home.

    Emirates Group Chairman Sheikh Ahmed bin Saeed Al Maktoum described that the measure can give travelers some assurances during extremely unpredictable times, hopefully getting them back to flying long distance routes.

    “We know people are yearning to fly as borders around the world gradually re-open, but they are seeking flexibility and assurances should something unforeseen happen during their travel,” he said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Flying in a COVID-19 world, via “Airline Ratings”

    The airline said the policy will remain in effect through the end of October, and is valid for up to a month from the beginning of a passenger’s journey. Though it’s only been in effect for a few days at this point, it’s unclear if anyone has made a claim yet through the “free” COVID-19 insurance policy.

    The New York Post notes that the available medical coverage for passengers who become hospitalized for the virus is significant: “Even sick passengers who don’t pass away after traveling with the airline can receive up to $176,000 in expenses as well as $118 per day to cover quarantine accommodations for up to two weeks,” according to the Post report.

    And given the resulting positive media coverage the Emirates is getting from the unusual initiative, it’s likely other international carriers will follow suit, though most may not want to take the hit insurance-wise. 

  • "I Started A Local Gun And Preparedness Club… And Leftists Tried To Interfere"
    “I Started A Local Gun And Preparedness Club… And Leftists Tried To Interfere”

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/07/2020 – 23:05

    Authored by Brandon Smith via Alt-Market.com,

    I live in the mountains outside a small town in rural Montana, a place you might assume is conservative through and through, and it is, for the most part. However, one rule I have found to be universal no matter where in the US I live or visit is that regardless of how conservative the population of a place is, leftists are almost ALWAYS entrenched into city politics and they almost always run the local newspapers.

    In the past I found this to be a strange thing; why are the viewpoints and ideals of most of the city government and the local journalists the complete opposite of the majority of the citizenry in conservative communities?

    I did not understand until later that this is a product of misaligned priorities. Leftists (specifically extreme leftists) seems to gravitate to positions of influence, even those we might consider small and inconsequential, because they see these positions as an opportunity to exert power over others. Conservatives tend to not care as much about having power over others unless they are a direct threat, and so we don’t have any interest in wasting our precious free time climbing our way through a faceless bureaucracy.

    I actually prefer that mindset. I like the fact that conservatives aren’t always scrambling for position or power. That said, it might behoove us to pay better attention to who is in control of our local governments, because it may cause serious problems for us down the road.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For many years now I have been working with a group of people who have been preparing for the events that are happening today, including economic crisis, supply chain disruptions, civil unrest and government overreach. While many of these groups seek to remain private, I feel it is time for bigger discussions with the wider community on what people plan to do if the dangerous situation does not improve. In other words, are they going to work together? Or, are they going to remain isolated from each other?

    This is a vital question, because it is becoming increasingly possible that a full spectrum collapse will strike the US in the near term. It is time for preppers and liberty minded people to start gauging the sentiment of the community around them and seeking out like-minded individuals. The more active the community is in its own survival, the less likely they will be to conform to draconian rules or fear.

    Private groups should remain private, and so should the extent of your preps. But, it is foolish to think that you are going to survive a collapse on your own without working with others in the community. Think of it this way, if your circle of security is only the size of your property, when trouble arrives it will already be on your doorstep (in other words, you are dead if the attackers are organized and prepared). If your circle of security is your entire town or county, then when trouble arrives you might actually have time to respond.

    Going “gray man” is an extremely short term solution. Eventually, you will be caught alone and unaware and then all the energy and time and money you put into your preps will have been wasted and someone else will be enjoying the fruits of your labor.

    Another problem I see is that conservatives are far less adept at organization than the political left; we tend to be more spontaneous when we group together for a cause. I’m not saying we need our own Antifa or BLM, but we do need to put more effort into working together locally and minimizing our exposure to threats. Conservatives and liberty activists often feel alone, even though there are millions of us out there, and it’s because we refuse to organize in any practical way for fear of ending up on a “list”.

    It’s the threat of being on “the list” that controls conservatives. The list doesn’t even need to exist in real life and we are still dominated by it. I hear it all the time, the “nail that sticks up will get hammered down”. I say, the nail that keeps its head down is more easily stepped on.

    These are some of the reasons I decided to engage with the larger community by starting a local club that discusses firearms, preparedness and current events. I put the word out in as many places as I could, including tacking up fliers around town. These days, it’s hard for anyone to argue that prepping is a “silly idea” for “kooky conspiracy theorists”. We have been proven right, everyone else has been proven wrong, but that doesn’t mean our work ends here; we have to continue to educate as many people as possible on how it’s done while there’s still time. The more we do this, the safer everyone is.

    The initial response was overwhelmingly positive. A lot of people are ready for this kind of information, and setting up the discussions in a more public forum gives people a greater sense of involvement and shows them they are not alone in their concerns. To that end I decided to hold the discussion at a local public park.

    Then, I started getting emails and friends of mine started getting angry Facebook responses when discussing the club…

    Officials from the city council using the primary city government email were not happy, though they did not identify themselves by name.

    They claimed the club could not hold an “event” in the park unless we got permission and permits from the city council, along with insurance. If we did not, then police would be sent to kick us out of the park.

    I thought this was rather bizarre; I didn’t expect hundreds of people to show up to the club meeting, maybe a couple dozen at most. The requirements these people from the city council demanded were traditionally for large events with hundreds or thousands of people. Getting permission would have taken weeks, and the emails suggested that permission was not guaranteed by stating “IF we approve”.

    I could have held a meeting on private property, but using the city park was symbolic of open community engagement; the people of the area were supposed to feel welcome to participate and maybe this is what annoyed the lefties the most.  They feel like they own that wheelhouse.  Frankly, parks are public property paid for with public dollars and the community has every right to use them for free assembly. But if you think this is common knowledge think again; some politicians and officials think otherwise.

    I responded as I usually do to these kinds of things, by digging my heels in. I thoroughly researched the use and legality of public parks for free assembly and found that as long as your group is not blocking access to the park for other people, blocking roads or engaged in criminal activity then the demands for permits do not usually hold up in court and removal by police is not justified. Constitutionally, you are protected.

    I emailed the official or officials back and reminded them that they risk a civil court issue by trying to stop people’s free speech on public property, and warned them that the city would be subject to bad press as well. I was perfectly ready to refuse removal and to be arrested if it came to that.

    Another interesting discovery: The park in question was host to a bunch of BLM protesters only two weeks earlier. Did they have to get permits and insurance to hold their “event” in the park?

    I decided to reach out to the only conservative member of the city council that I knew of and talk with him. He confirmed my suspicions. There were multiple hard leftists in the city government, but no one had actually brought up the issue of my club and the use of the park to rest of the council before sending me the threatening emails.

    So, it was probably only a couple of weasels trying to make it look like they represented the entire city council’s position. He also confirmed that the BLM protesters had no permits or insurance, and that certain council members KNEW ahead of time that their protest was going to happen. In other words, the lefty council members were acting unilaterally to give BLM open access to the park, and then tried to interfere with my gun and preparedness club.

    This was clear political bias applied to the usage of public property.

    I have learned from past experience that these types of people do not like a stand-up fight; so they prefer to try to frighten you away from doing a thing through intimidation instead. They try to get you to give up voluntarily by painting a host of consequences in your mind. You start to worry about all the things that MIGHT happen; no one wants to have confrontations with cops these days, you don’t have to be insane like BLM to have concerns.

    Luckily, my brain doesn’t really think in terms of risk over reward. I only really think about what is necessary. I held the club meeting in the park anyway and I made sure that whoever it was in the city council that was trying to interfere knew I was going to do it.

    Long story short, the meeting was a success. I met a lot of locals that I had not talked with before that had the same concerns I did, and we discussed primarily the issue of community security if the system completely breaks down. The meetings will continue, perhaps even in the same park for a while just to make a point. The police never showed up, so the people making threats either didn’t want to risk a lawsuit and confrontation, they realized they didn’t have as much power as they thought they did, or the cops refused to bother with something that was clearly legal and constitutional.

    The only confrontation happened a hundred yards away. A man looking for the meeting approached a group across the street that was organizing a separate community event. He told me that when he asked them if they were part of the gun club, a woman yelled at him “No, those people are across the street at that ILLEGAL MEETING!”

    And there you have it. I highly recommend you hold an “illegal meeting” of your own for your community. These discussions need to start now, and people need to know that they are not alone during this crisis. It is time for conservatives to start banding together and planning ahead.

    *  *  *

    If you would like to support the work that Alt-Market does while also receiving content on advanced tactics for defeating the globalist agenda, subscribe to our exclusive newsletter The Wild Bunch Dispatch.  Learn more about it HERE.

  • "No Difference Between John Bolton, Brian Hook Or Elliott Abrams": Iran FM
    “No Difference Between John Bolton, Brian Hook Or Elliott Abrams”: Iran FM

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/07/2020 – 22:45

    “There’s no difference between John Bolton, Brian Hook or Elliott Abrams,” Iranian Foreign Ministry spokesman Abbas Mousavi said in a tweet with the hashtag #BankruptUSPolicy on Friday.

    “When U.S. policy concerns Iran, American officials have been biting off more than they can chew. This applies to Mike Pompeo, Donald Trump and their successors,” Mousavi added.

    Indeed in perhaps one of the greatest symbols or representations of the contradictions and absurdity inherent in US foreign policy of the past few decades, and a supreme irony that can’t be emphasized enough: the new US envoy to Iran who will oversee Pompeo’s ‘maximum pressure’ campaign remains the most publicly visible face of the 1980’s Iran-Contra affair.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Elliott Abrams has been named to the position after Brian Hook stepping down. This means the man who will continue to push for the extension of a UN arms embargo against Iran once himself was deeply involved in illegally selling weapons to Iran and covering it up.

    Most famously, or we should say infamously, Abrams pleaded guilty to lying to Congress in 1991 following years of the Iran-Contra scandal engulfing the Reagan administration; however, he was also pardoned by outgoing president George H.W. Bush at around the same time.

    “Pardoned by George H.W. Bush in 1992, Abrams was a pivotal figure in the foreign-policy scandal that shook the Reagan administration, lying to Congress about his knowledge of the plot to covertly sell weapons to the Khomeini government and use the proceeds to illegally fund the right-wing Contras rebel group in Nicaragua,” NY Mag reviews.

    Some are noting this heightens the chances that Washington could get dragged into a war involving Israel and Iran.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Recall too that Abrams has been Trump’s point man for ousting Maduro from Venezuela, and it appears he’ll remain in the post of special envoy for Venezuela as well.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Grayzone journalist, Anya Parampil, who has frequently reported from Venezuela, alleged this week that Abrams will “try and destroy Venezuela and Iran at the same time”.

  • The 1958 "Psychological Warfare" Plan Playing Out Before Us
    The 1958 “Psychological Warfare” Plan Playing Out Before Us

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/07/2020 – 22:25

    Authored by Annie Holmquist via IntellectualTakeout.org,

    I recently wrote about an old 1984 interview with former communist Yuri Bezmenov, who described the “ideological subversion” that could eventually take down America.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It sounds like the stuff of conspiracy theories – until one realizes that his predictions of “demoralization,” “destabilization,” and “crisis” are all unfolding before our eyes.

    Pondering his prophetic words, I hunted up an old book a friend mentioned to me years ago: “The Naked Communist.” The title, I admit, is chuckle-worthy, but the words inside are no laughing matter, particularly when one reads the section titled, “Importance of the Psychological War.”

    Written in 1958, some of the “current strategy goals which the Communists and their fellow travelers are seeking to achieve” seem dated and read like a history book from the past. But then one comes to item number 17:

    “Get control of the schools. Use them as transmission belts for socialism and current Communist propaganda. Soften the curriculum. Get control of teachers’ associations. Put the party line in textbooks.” (Emphasis added.)

    That part in bold especially caught my attention. Haven’t Americans been suspicious for years that public school curriculum has been dumbed down? Prominent public figures have certainly made this claim, while a comparison of middle school reading lists from today’s schools and those of 100 years ago provides further evidence.

    Things take a step closer to home by encouraging the use of “student riots to foment public protests against programs or organizations which are under Communist attack.” We’ve had not a little experience with riots and protests lately, many of which have been heavily attended by young people. Are they mere tools in the hands of an ideology we don’t realize is pulling the strings?

    Even more terrifying, the list progresses from student riots to the cancel culture and statue bashing we are also currently experiencing.

    “Continue discrediting American culture by degrading all forms of artistic expression,” item number 22 commands, while number 31 calls for Communists to “[b]elittle all forms of American culture and discourage the teaching of American history….”

    The document also suggests discrediting both the Constitution and the Founding Fathers.

    Of the latter, it says,

    “[p]resent them as selfish aristocrats who had no concern for the ‘common man.’”

    Sounds similar to the “slave-holding racists” that the Founders are now portrayed as, does it not?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The list is extensive and many of the items listed as eventual goals are now accepted parts of our culture. There is one more, though, that deserves a closer look:

    “Create the impression that violence and insurrection are legitimate aspects of the American tradition; that students and special-interest groups should rise up and use ‘united force’ to solve economic, political or social problems.”

    Since the death of George Floyd, protests and violence have become commonplace. The large gatherings banned by our governments during the COVID-19 pandemic suddenly became necessary for fighting racism.

    Indeed, systemic racism is increasingly labeled as a “public health crisis that Black Lives Matter must wage war against. Furthermore, complete unity is demanded from the public. Those who refuse to go along—or fail to say anything at all—are immediately ostracized.

    Where does this leave us?

    Should we start running around screaming, “The Communists are coming! The Communists are coming!”?

    No. Now isn’t the time to lose our heads. Rather, we should look at this historical list, recognize the parallels it has with our current culture, and ask ourselves whether there’s an ideology working to undermine the values, history, and ideas upon which America was founded.

    If we conclude that there is, we have a decision to make.

    Do we accept that ideology and allow it to take over America?

    If so, it’s time to join the throngs of corporations, politicians, and average citizens in agitating for change.

    But if we decide that ideology isn’t in line with what we believe, nor with the direction we want to see America go, then we must be ready to choose the road less traveled.

    This road is one of standing up for truth and justice. It also involves warning others of the consequences that come from giving way to an ideology completely opposed to what America has sought to protect and advance over the years.

    As “The Naked Communist” implies, the alarm bell has been sounding for many years. Now, we just need the ears to hear and respond to it.

  • Meet The RVs That Are Literally "Driving" Our Country's GDP
    Meet The RVs That Are Literally “Driving” Our Country’s GDP

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/07/2020 – 22:05

    The impact that recreational vehicles have had on GDP has rocketed to all time highs, as the pandemic has Americans looking for new ways to vacation after many traditional summer trips have been cancelled. In fact, as many as 50% of Americans cancelled their summer vacations, according to Inside Hook

    The site also noted that the main RV-sharing website had “the highest recorded booking numbers in company history.” 

    We noted the aberration in a Tweet we put out last week after the U.S. released its historic 32.9% GDP plunge.:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    RV companies are having trouble keeping up with demand and dealers are quickly going out of stock. RV Industry Association President Craig Kirby told Reuters that he thinks “more people will start to work out of RVs come fall.”

    Jon Ferrando, CEO and President at RV Retailer said:  “All models are in high demand and hard to keep in stock. Many models are on order for deliveries in December of 2020, as the demand has been unbelievable for the product over the past 90 days.”

    To give a taste of exactly what is now officially driving U.S. GDP, Inside Hook released information on some of the more popular RVs being sold. 

    This Bushwhacker Teardrop model starts at just $8,990 and is only 13 feet long. It can be “configured with two separate mattresses, wall-mounted air-conditioning, a two-burner cooktop, a built-in sink and one of those electric Coleman coolers that acts like a mini fridge.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This TAB Teardrop Trailer starts at $27,262 and boasts “a seriously spacious bathroom, off-road tires, extra exterior cargo storage and roof racks, and a ‘pitched axle’ which provides better clearance. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Starting at $38,400, this Airstream Basecamp model “can sleep up to four people with a bathroom onboard.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This $225,000 Bowlus Road Chief Endless Highways model costs as much as a small house. The retro design is “because the company traces its roots back to 1934, when designer Hawley Bowlus built a trailer that would go on to inspire the household name.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Then there’s the EarthRomer LTi, which starts at $590,000 and has been called the “best doomsday vehicle”. It sports a “carbon-fiber body, solar power and the ability to go off-grid instead of from RV hookup to RV hookup.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Finally, if you want to go full “Motley Crue on tour”, there’s the Foretravel Realm FS6 Presidential Luxury Villa Bunk with Spa, which starts at about $1.4 million. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With this model you get “a 45-foot condo on wheels that’s bigger than many New York apartments, two full baths featuring a massaging, Chromatherapy and a VibrAcoustic tub.”

    “High end luxury continues to improve year after year,” Ferrando concluded.

    It sure does – though we’re guessing not too many of these $1.4 million models are the ones driving GDP…

    Regardless, here’s what $1.4 million gets you:

  • Debunking The Myth That Lockdowns Stop Pandemics
    Debunking The Myth That Lockdowns Stop Pandemics

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/07/2020 – 21:45

    Authored by Stacey Rudin via RealClearPolitics.com,

    From the beginning of time, humans have used mythology to make sense of a chaotic natural world. Sir G.L. Gomme dubbed myths “the science of a pre-scientific age.” Folklore provided pre-scientific people a comforting sense of control over nature. To address dry spells, they deployed rain dances. Sunless stretches hindering crops prompted offerings to Helios. Then, our ancestors sat back and waited. The rains always came. The sun always reappeared, validating their “wisdom,” the illusion of control reinforced.

    Thanks to science, we know this was pure superstition. Though the same outcomes would have occurred had the tribe taken no action, the tribe leader would still have received credit or blame from his constituents.

    Similarly, today’s politicians race to take credit – or place blame – for COVID-19 “results.” Do politicians really control these outcomes, or are they simply exploiting our ingrained tendencies? 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    When China first deployed lockdown in January to “defeat COVID-19,” The Washington Post approvingly quoted a Georgetown University professor as saying,

    “The truth is those kinds of lockdowns are very rare and never effective…”

    In March, Imperial College London’s dire projections influenced the White House, but a careful reading of the advice contained in the Imperial College report reveals that its authors knew lockdown alone could not eliminate any infections, only delay them:

    “The more successful a strategy is at temporary suppression,” it stated, “the larger the later epidemic is predicted to be in the absence of vaccination, due to lesser build-up of herd immunity.”

    Centers for Disease Control and Prevention pandemic planning documents state non-pharmaceutical interventions such as social distancing are ineffective once a disease infects 1% of a region’s population. Literature on this subject is unanimous worldwide. According to the European Centre for Disease Prevention and Control:

    There are no historical observations or scientific studies that support the confinement by quarantine of groups of possibly infected people for extended periods in order to slow the spread.

    It is hard to imagine that measures like those within the category of social distancing would not have some positive impact by reducing transmission of a human respiratory infection…

    However, the evidence base supporting each individual measure is often weak.” 

    Decades of evidence corroborates this. In 1969, a group of men overwintering in Antarctica experienced a spontaneous respiratory virus outbreak during their 17th week of isolation. Similarly, COVID-19 appeared on an Argentinian naval ship on the 35th day of its voyage, following a 14-day isolation of captain and crew.

    Nature always finds a way.

    No respiratory virus ever needed a “lockdown” to dissipate. What it needs is herd immunity, preferably sooner than later, preferably developed by the young and healthy to minimize mortality.

    Politicians know the disease will eventually leave, yet they strive to convince a critical mass that their actions — modern-day versions of the rain dance — brought about that result. They count on us behaving like renowned psychologist B.F. Skinner’s superstitious pigeons.

    “A pigeon is … put into a cage. A food hopper may be swung into place … so that the pigeon can eat from it … If a clock is [set] to present the hopper at regular intervals with no reference whatsoever to the bird’s behavior, operant conditioning usually takes place. The bird tends to learn whatever response it is making when the hopper appears. The experiment might be said to demonstrate a sort of superstition. The bird behaves as if there were a causal relation between its behavior and the presentation of food, although such a relation is lacking.”

    Publicly available data shows no causal relationship between government orders and COVID-19 mortality outcomes.

    Sweden’s all-cause, per-capita mortality for 2020 is approximately 290 per million above the prior five-year average, while lockdown-loving New Jersey’s is almost 1,900 per million above the prior five-year average, and Michigan’s is over 700 per million. (In case you suspect Sweden “naturally” locked down on its own, mobility data reveals it didn’t.)

    The mainstream media does not report this. Instead, its energetic smearing of Sweden, coupled with its pseudo-scientific insistence that lockdowns do anything more than delay the inevitable, helps politicians exploit the human tendency to mythologize.

    We are faced with a virus with a 997-out-of-1,000 survival rate. We have vanquished fiercer adversaries. We can rid ourselves of this plague less painfully by remembering one simple truth: neither we, nor our politicians, have control over death. 

  • Visualizing The Biggest Ammonium Nitrate Explosions Since 2000
    Visualizing The Biggest Ammonium Nitrate Explosions Since 2000

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/07/2020 – 21:25

    This week, a massive explosion involving ammonium nitrate rocked the city of Beirut, sending shock waves through the media. While this recent tragedy is devastating, unfortunately, as Visual Capitalist’s Carmen Ang details below, it’s not the first time this dangerous chemical compound has caused widespread damage.

    Today’s graphic outlines the biggest ammonium nitrate explosions over the last 20 years.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A Brief Explanation of Ammonium Nitrate

    Before getting into the details, first thing’s first—what is ammonium nitrate?

    Ammonium nitrate is formed when ammonia gas is combined with liquid nitric acid. The chemical compound is widely used in agriculture as a fertilizer, but it’s also used in mining explosives. It’s highly combustible when combined with oils and other fuels, but not flammable on its own unless exposed to extremely high temperatures.

    It’s actually relatively tough for a fire to cause an ammonium nitrate explosion—but that hasn’t stopped it from happening numerous times in the last few decades.

    The Death Toll

    Some explosions involving ammonium nitrate have been deadlier than others. Here’s a breakdown of the death toll from each blast:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    One of the deadliest explosions happened in Tianjin, China in 2015. A factory was storing flammable chemicals with ammonium nitrate, and because they weren’t being stored properly, one of the chemicals got too dry and caught fire. The blast killed 165 people and caused $1.1 billion dollars in damage.

    In 2001, 14 years before the explosion in Tianjin, a factory exploded in Toulouse, France. The accident killed 30 people and injured 2,500. The power of the blast was equivalent to 20 to 40 tons of TNT, meaning that 40 to 80 tons of ammonium nitrate would have ignited.

    In addition to factory explosions, there have been several transportation accidents involving ammonium nitrate. In 2007, a truck in Mexico blew up and killed over 57 people. Filled with explosives, the truck crashed into a pickup, caught fire, and detonated. The blast left a 60-foot long crater in its wake.

    The Aftermath

    While there have been several ammonium nitrate accidents throughout history, the recent tragedy in Beirut is one of the largest accidental explosions ever recorded, with 157 deaths and 5,000 injuries and counting.

    In terms of TNT equivalent, a measure used to gauge the impact of an explosion, it ranks in the top 10 of the largest accidental explosions in history:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Topping the list is yet another ammonium nitrate explosion, this time back in 1947.

    Known to history as the Texas City Disaster, the port accident was one of the biggest non-nuclear explosions to occur in history. The explosion killed over 500 people and injured thousands. The impact from the blast was so intense, it created a 15-foot wave that crashed along the docks and caused flooding in the area.

    A Resource With Trade-Offs

    Despite being dangerous, ammonium nitrate is still a valuable resource. There’s been an increased demand for the chemical from North America’s agricultural sector, and because of this, ammonium nitrate’s market size is expected to see an increase of more than 3% by 2026.

    Because of its increasing market size, it’s more important than ever for trade industries to enforce proper safety measures when storing and transporting ammonium nitrate. When safety regulations aren’t followed, accidents can happen—and as we saw this week, the aftermath can be devastating.

  • Russia Hoax: Are We All Being Played? Put Up Or Shut Up!
    Russia Hoax: Are We All Being Played? Put Up Or Shut Up!

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/07/2020 – 21:05

    Authored by Sara Carter via SaraACarter.com,

    Many people have asked me why I haven’t written a book since the start of my reporting on the FBI’s debunked investigation into whether President Donald Trump’s campaign conspired with Russia.

    I haven’t done so because I don’t believe the most important part of the story has been told: indictments and accountability. I also don’t believe we actually know what really happened on a fundamental level and how dangerous it is to our democratic republic. That will require a deeper investigation that answers the fundamental questions of the role played by former senior Obama officials, including the former President and his aides.

    We’re getting closer but we’re still not there.

    Still, the extent of what happened during the last presidential election is much clearer now than it was years ago when trickles of evidence led to years of what Fox News host Sean Hannity and I would say was peeling back the layers of an onion. We now know that the U.S. intelligence and federal law enforcement was weaponized against President Donald Trump’s 2016 campaign and administration by a political opponent. We now know how many officials involved in the false investigation into the president trampled the Constitution.

    I never realized how terrible the deterioration inside the system had become until four years ago when I stumbled onto what was happening inside the FBI. Those concerns were brought to my attention by former and current FBI agents, as well as numerous U.S. intelligence officials aware of the failures inside their own agencies. But it never occurred to me when I first started looking into fired FBI Director James Comey and his former side kick Deputy Director Andrew McCabe that the cultural corruption of these once trusted American institutions was so vast.

    I’ve watched as Washington D.C. elites make promises to get to the bottom of it and bring people to justice. They appear to make promises to the American people they never intended to keep. Who will be held accountable for one of the most egregious abuses of power by bureaucrats in modern American political history? Now I fear those who perpetuated this culture of corruption won’t ever really be held accountable.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    These elite bureaucrats will, however, throw the American people a bone. It’s how they operate.

    They expect us to accept it and then move on.

    One example is the most recent decision by the Justice Department to ask that charges be dropped on former national security advisor Michael Flynn. It’s just a bone because we know now these charges should have never been brought against the three-star general but will anyone on former Special Counsel Robert Mueller’s team have to answer for ruining a man’s life. No, they won’t. In fact, Flynn is still fighting for his freedom.

    Think about what has already happened? From former Attorney General Jeff Session’s appointment of Utah Prosecutor John Huber to the current decision by Attorney General William Barr to appoint Connecticut prosecutor John Durham to investigate the malfeasance what has been done? Really, nothing at all. No one has been indicted.

    The investigation by the FBI against Trump was never predicated on any real evidence but instead, it was a set-up to usurp the American voters will. It doesn’t matter that the establishment didn’t like Trump, in 2016 the Americans did. Isn’t that a big enough reason to bring charges against those involved?

    His election was an anomaly for the Washington elite. They were stunned when Trump won and went into full gear to save their own asses from discovery and target anyone who supported him. The truth is they couldn’t stand the Trump and American disruptors who elected him to office.

    Now they will work hand in fist to ensure that this November election is not a repeat win of 2016. We’re already seeing that play out everyday on the news.

    But Barr and Durham are now up against a behemoth political machine that seems to be operating more like a steam roller the closer we get to the November presidential elections.

    Barr told Fox News in June that he expects Durham’s report to come before the end of summer but like always, it’s August and we’re still waiting.

    Little is known about the progress of Durham’s investigation but it’s curious as to why nothing has been done as of yet and the Democrats are sure to raise significant questions or concerns if action is taken before the election. They will charge that Durham’s investigation is politically motivated. That is, unless the charges are just brought against subordinates and not senior officials from the former administration.

    I sound cynical because I am right now. It doesn’t mean I won’t trying to get to the truth or fighting for justice.

    But how can you explain the failure of Durham and Barr to actually interview key players such as Comey, or former Director of National Intelligence James Clapper, or former CIA Director John Brennan. That is what we’re hearing from them.

    If I am going to believe my sources, Durham has interviewed former FBI special agent Peter Strzok, along with FBI Special agent Joe Pientka, among some others. Still, nothing has really been done or maybe once again they will throw us bone.

    If there are charges to be brought they will come in the form of taking down the subordinates, like Strzok, Pientka and the former FBI lawyer Kevin Clinesmith, who altered the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act application against short term 2016 campaign advisor Carter Page.

    Remember DOJ Inspector General Michael Horowitz’s report in December, 2019: It showed that a critical piece of evidence used to obtain a warrant to spy on Page in 2016 was falsified by Clinesmith.

    But Clinesmith didn’t act alone. He would have had to have been ordered to do such a egregious act and that could only come from the top. Let’s see if Durham ever hold those Obama government officials accountable.

    I don’t believe he will.

    Why? Mainly because of how those senior former Obama officials have behaved since the troves of information have been discovered. They have written books, like Comey, McCabe, Brennan and others, who have published Opinion Editorials and have taken lucrative jobs at cable news channels as experts.

    It’s frankly disgusting and should anger every American. We would never get away with what these former Obama officials have done. More disturbing is that the power they wield through their contacts in the media and their political connections allows these political ‘oligarchs’ unchallenged power like never before.

    Here’s one of the latest examples.

    Former Special Counsel Robert Mueller’s top prosecutor Andrew Weissmann just went after Barr in a New York Times editorial on Wednesday. He went so far as to ask the Justice Department employees to ignore any direction by Barr or Durham in the Russia investigations. From Weissmann’s New York Times Opinion Editorial:

    Today, Wednesday, marks 90 days before the presidential election, a date in the calendar that is supposed to be of special note to the Justice Department. That’s because of two department guidelines, one a written policy that no action be influenced in any way by politics. Another, unwritten norm urges officials to defer publicly charging or taking any other overt investigative steps or disclosures that could affect a coming election.

    Attorney General William Barr appears poised to trample on both. At least two developing investigations could be fodder for pre-election political machinations. The first is an apparently sprawling investigation by John Durham, the U.S. attorney in Connecticut, that began as an examination of the origins of the F.B.I. investigation into Russia’s interference in the 2016 election. The other, led by John Bash, the U.S. attorney for the Western District of Texas, is about the so-called unmasking of Trump associates by Obama administration officials. Mr. Barr personally unleashed both investigations and handpicked the attorneys to run them.

    But Justice Department employees, in meeting their ethical and legal obligations, should be well advised not to participate in any such effort.

    I think Barr and Durham need to move fast if they are ever going to do anything and if they are going to prove me wrong. We know now that laws were broken and our Constitution was torched by these rogue government officials.

    We shouldn’t give the swamp the time-of-day to accuse the Trump administration of playing politics or interfering with this election. If the DOJ has evidence and is ready to indict they need to do it now.

    If our Justice Department officials haven’t done their job to expose the corruption, clean out our institutions and hold people accountable then it will be a tragedy for our nation and the American people. I’m frankly tired of the back and forth. I’m tired of being toyed with and lied to. I believe they should either put up or shut up.

  • Bernie Sanders Just Proposed A Tax That Would Instantly Cost Bezos $42.8 Billion And Musk $27.5 Billion
    Bernie Sanders Just Proposed A Tax That Would Instantly Cost Bezos $42.8 Billion And Musk $27.5 Billion

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/07/2020 – 20:45

    Nothing says liberty and equality quite like swooping in and passing a piece of legislation that instantly absconds with the wealth of America’s most successful businessmen. 

    But that’s the vision that Bernie Sanders has for America. Apparently unaware that taxation is no longer necessary, as the Fed can now solve the country’s money problems with its printing press, Sanders has proposed a “Make Billionaires Pay Act” that would impose a “one-time 60% tax on wealth gains made by billionaires between March 18, 2020, and Jan. 1, 2021,” according to CNBC

    The proceeds from the tax would be used to pay for out-of-pocket healthcare expenses for all Americans for one year, Sanders says. It would tax $731 billion in wealth accumulated by 467 billionaires since March 18, his PR says. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Essentially, the tax amounts to a massive charge for many executives who have seen their wealth shoot up during the pandemic. The boost in asset prices, of course, has nothing to do with those executives and everything to do with monetary policy. Sanders, like the rest of the left, still hasn’t figured out the problem is the Central Banks – not the billionaires. But we digress.

    According to CNBC, under the new tax, here’s how much some of the country’s richest will pay:

    • Amazon CEO Jeff Bezos would pay a one-time wealth tax of $42.8 billion.
    • Tesla and SpaceX CEO Elon Musk would pay a one-time wealth tax of $27.5 billion.
    • Facebook CEO Mark Zuckerberg would pay a one-time wealth tax of $22.8 billion.
    • The Walton family would pay a one-time wealth tax of $12.9 billion.

    We have to ask, however: how much of Sanders’ wealth has also increased due to the Fed’s flawed policies? He owns two homes – we’re assuming he owns financial assets. Have they appreciated due to the Fed’s bailing out of the market? If so, shouldn’t he be parting with those proceeds and volunteering them up for taxation as well?

    Come on, comrade. We all have to do our part…

  • Trucking Company Refuses To Deliver To Cities Calling To "Defund The Police"
    Trucking Company Refuses To Deliver To Cities Calling To “Defund The Police”

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/07/2020 – 20:25

    Authored by Michael Wing via The Epoch Times,

    While governors and mayors echo calls to “defund the police” across the United States, trucking companies don’t seem all that impressed by the social justice virtue signalling. Some have even asserted there may be consequences if it is implemented.

    Small business owners are at risk, as they store, transport, and sell valuable goods, rent or own property, and pay insurance for all of this.

    Disbanding law enforcement would mean no protection for their businesses (or their lives) from criminals who would profit at their expense.

    But some trucking companies are drawing a line in the sand issuing a simple consequence: no police, no deliveries. Mike Kucharski, co-owner of JKC Trucking, told Fox & Friends First that a disbanded police makes an already risky business even riskier.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    JKC truck (Screenshot/Google Maps)

    “Our first priority is to support our drivers and their safety when they are on the road,” said Kucharski.

    “Defunding the police is a bad idea, because when you’re on the road, you’re for weeks and days at a time driving 11 hours with valuable cargo. Everybody wants to steal this.”

    Truck driving and transportation/material moving are already the top two most dangerous jobs in the United States, Fox Business reports. Meanwhile, 79 percent of drivers say they would not deliver in cities without a police force.

    “When you’re tripping over long enough on the road you know there’s no safe place. Violence is everywhere. So, if you’re gonna be having valuable cargo and there’s gonna be no police to rely on, who’s gonna protect our drivers?”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    People carry signs during a “defund-the-police” march from King County Youth Jail to City Hall in Seattle, Washington, on Aug. 5, 2020. (JASON REDMOND/AFP via Getty Images)

    A survey of 258 police departments across the United States, soon to be released, shows that nearly half of them have had budget cuts, mainly in the areas of training and equipment. Meanwhile, both gun violence and violent crime have increased in different parts of the country, USA Today reported.

    Another risk for trucking businesses in states where police are defunded is insurance, Kucharski says.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    JKC Trucking corporate headquarters in Summit, Il. (Screenshot/Google Maps)

    It remains a question whether JKC will even have cargo, liability, and fiscal damage coverage while delivering in cities with a diminished police force. While the company has domestic coverage, they may have to buy special insurance for those cities, like when shipping to Canada or Mexico.

    “Defunding the police is not the solution,” he adds.

    “We all have to work together with critical thinking and in finding the solution, the problem during this time of crisis. The government’s been behind the steering wheel, and it’s time for small businesses to take back the steering wheel and make the right decisions, to sit down with the politicians. I welcome the politicians to sit down with us.”

  • "Any Inbound Missile Will Be Seen As Nuclear" – Russia's Military Warns Amid Arms Treaty Talks
    “Any Inbound Missile Will Be Seen As Nuclear” – Russia’s Military Warns Amid Arms Treaty Talks

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/07/2020 – 20:05

    Though all eyes have been focused on the emerging ‘new Cold war’ scenario between the US and China, Russia’s military has just issued a rare and eye-opening statement which represents perhaps the most severe threat to come out of ongoing New START extension negotiations thus far.

    “Russia will perceive any ballistic missile launched at its territory as a nuclear attack that warrants a nuclear retaliation, the military warned in an article published Friday,” AP writes.

    “The harsh warning in the official military newspaper Krasnaya Zvezda (Red Star) is directed at the United States, which has worked to develop long-range non-nuclear weapons,” the report continues.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    US Navy ballistic missile launch, via The National Interest

    In the article some of Russia’s top generals, including senior officer of the Russian military’s General Staff, Maj.-Gen. Andrei Sterlin, claimed that in the event of an attack, radar and anti-air systems will have no way of knowing if a ballistic missile has a nuclear warhead or not.

    “Any attacking missile will be perceived as carrying a nuclear warhead,” the Russian military publication said. “The information about the missile launch will be automatically relayed to the Russian military-political leadership, which will determine the scope of retaliatory action by nuclear forces depending on the evolving situation.”

    “Russia has designated the ‘red lines’ that we don’t advise anyone to cross,” the Krasnaya Zvezda article said further. “If a potential adversary dares to do that, the answer will undoubtedly be devastating. The specifics of retaliatory action, such as where, when and how much will be determined by Russia’s military-political leadership depending on the situation.”

    The military publication clearly upped the ante in a huge way, no doubt seeking to bolster Russian diplomats’ leverage as the landmark nuclear arms reduction treaty, New START, could be on the chopping block after the US pulled out of the Intermediate-Range Nuclear Forces Treaty (INF).

    New START will expire in February 2021 if the two sides don’t agree to renew it. So far ongoing talks between Moscow and Washington have failed to extend it by up to five years, despite pressure to strike an extension by America’s allies. 

    There were talks in mid-June that led nowhere, as well as at least three days of talks at the end of July in Vienna. It appears that while Russian diplomats talk nice in Vienna, Russia’s military is engaged in strong arm tactics to give the diplomats bigger bargaining position as the treaties extension is weighed.

    The Kremlin also appears keen on reminding Washington in the clearest terms possible what a post nuclear arms control world looks like – namely, the likelihood of a new nuclear arms race in a deeply uncertain ‘Wild West’ scenario. 

  • Bike Store Cancels Contract With Austin Bike Police After "Woke" Employees Complain
    Bike Store Cancels Contract With Austin Bike Police After “Woke” Employees Complain

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/07/2020 – 19:45

    Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

    A bike store in Austin, Texas has cancelled its contract with the Austin Police bike patrol unit after three ‘woke’ employees complained that the bikes were being used for crowd control during Black Lives Matter protests.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In a Facebook post (since deleted), Christopher Carlisle explains how for eight years he maintained a contractual relationship with Mellow Johnny’s Bike store in downtown Austin to provide bikes and other equipment for the Down Town Area Command (DTAC) Bike Patrol and the Bicycle Public Order Team.

    Now thanks to the last two months of BLM social justice protests in the aftermath of the death of George Floyd, that relationship is apparently over.

    “Today I received a call the sales manager I have worked with for years at MJ’S, he informed me that they have three employees who work for them that are complaining about providing bikes to the police department in this time of social unrest in protest and disturbances,” writes Carlisle.

    “They stated to ownership that they did not like the fact that we use bicycles to help us manage crowds and crowd movement.”

    Carlisle asserts that the store caved in to the woke employees by canceling the contact with Austin police that had four years left to run, “because three employees do not like police officers and did not like us in the store.”

    The APD had been purchasing around 40 TREK police bikes a year as part of the agreement, meaning the amount of income the store is sacrificing in order to satiate its leftist staffers is reasonably substantial.

    Mellow Johnny’s Bike Shop has since issued a statement on Facebook:

    Dear Austin

    In the context of the current evaluation of community policing in Austin, we have decided to no longer purchase, re-sell, and service police-issue Trek bikes and accessories under a City of Austin RFP the shop was previously awarded.

    We regret not publicizing our decision before it was presented by others on social media. It’s difficult in these times to balance the needs of a business and a community. Our entire employee group was engaged in this dialogue and we delved deep into our community to understand how we could best do our part to keep our customers safe and this city moving in the right direction. These are certainly trying times and we understand people will object to any decision made along these lines.

    Businesses can no longer be non-participants in the communities they serve. We chose what we think will do the most to suture these divides and place our community on the right side of history. We have had to make these choices before when we felt companies whose products we sold put kids at schools at risk of violence. We lost sales due to this choice. We also saw our former vendors later divest of holdings and we’ve returned to selling these products. We will live with the choices our customers make if they want to buy bikes and bike products somewhere else.

    We are committed to the city of Austin and the community of cyclists that we serve every day.

    We are not anti-police. We do believe our local police force will protect us from the very threats we are receiving right now.

    We wish this entire community peace and progress and togetherness at the conclusion of these trying times. And we intend to be a part of the discourse, struggle, and growth for Austin, as we have since we opened our doors in 2008.

    Tim Enlow responded to the news by posting, “That is their absolute right as business owners. It’s also every citizen’s right to decide to take their bicycle business elsewhere,” calling for a boycott of the store.

    *  *  *

    There is a war on free speech. Without your support, my voice will be silenced. Please sign up for the free newsletter here. Donate to me on SubscribeStar here. Support my sponsor – Turbo Force – a supercharged boost of clean energy without the comedown.

  • 100 Children Shot In Philadelphia Year-To-Date
    100 Children Shot In Philadelphia Year-To-Date

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/07/2020 – 19:25

    100 children have been shot in Philadelphia so far this year, according to police, who say they will take a ‘multi-pronged approach’ to keep them safe.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    7-year-old Zamar Jones was fatally shot last weekend

    This culture of violence where we have adults are willing to shoot indiscriminately into crowds of people without care or concern for women or children,” said Philadelphia Police First Deputy Commissioner, Melvin Singleton, according to CBS Philly.

    Police say there is a plan in place to curb the violence, but it will take some time.

    “Now we have to be strategic, targeted, identify our repeat offenders and target those folks,” Singleton said. –CBS Philly

    Last weekend, 7-year-old child Zamar Jones was fatally shot on his front porch around 7:40 p.m. when he was caught in the crossfire of a shootout where at least 16 shots were fired. Jones was shot in the head.

    27-year-old Christopher Linder was taken into custody later that night after he attempted to recover his bullet-ridden truck, while antother man, 30-year-old Michael Banks, turned himself in.

    While involved in the manhunt for the suspect in the Jones murder, police were called to another West Philadelphia shooting where a 6-year-old girl playing with friends was shot in the chest.

    She is currently in the hospital in stable condition while her shooter remains at large. Both shootings happened less than three miles apart.

  • Fighting Over Kashmir Could Blow Up The Planet
    Fighting Over Kashmir Could Blow Up The Planet

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/07/2020 – 19:05

    Authored by T.J.Coles via Counterpunch.org,

    Jammu and Kashmir, widely referred to as Kashmir, has had many designations since India and Pakistan were partitioned by Britain and gained their respective independence from the Empire: a Princely State, a State, a Union Territory.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The 86,000 mile, Muslim-majority region sits in the Himalayas on the border with China. It is of strategic significance to both India and Pakistan, primarily because of the Siachen Glacier which brings freshwater the drought-ridden nations.

    India and Pakistan have nuclear weapons: armaments of such destruction that even a “minor” regional war would cause more than a decade of global nuclear winter.

    Both countries have already fought several times over Kashmir.

    With India going down the route of Hindu fanaticism and Pakistan gripped by Islamism, both nations compound their irrationalities with a different form of religious extremism exported from the West, namely neoliberal economics. The chances of global survival diminish.

    The question is what we in the West can do to pressure our governments to de-escalate the conflict and cease exacerbating it.

    JAMMU AND KASHMIR

    The princely state of Kashmir was ruled by a Hindu Maharaja, Hari Singh. Following independence from Britain in 1947, Pakistani fighters invaded Kashmir. Singh signed the Instrument of Accession to India, igniting war between India and Pakistan, which lasted for two years. Two-thirds of Kashmir fell under Indian control. Both states violated UN Security Council Resolution 47: India refused to hold an election, which would have allowed the Muslim-majority population to decide their future, and Pakistan never withdrew its troops. India subsequently opposed UN involvement in the dispute.

    In 1965, Pakistan infiltrated troops into the Indian zones in an apparent effort to incite a counter-India insurgency. Around 6,000 people were killed during the 17-day Indian counter-offensive. The war ended with the so-called Line of Control, created by the Simla Agreement of 1972, which followed another conflict in Kashmir and basically existed until India’s annexation of Kashmir in 2019. Following a growing independence movement among Kashmiris, India passed the Jammu and Kashmir Public Safety Act 1978, which led to the disappearances of around 8,000 Kashmiris and the indefinite detention of hundreds more.

    In a repeat of 1965, India tried to seize the high ground of Kargil in 1999. A few years later, two Kashmiri groups based in Pakistan, Lashkar-e-Taiba and Jaish-e-Mohammad, attacked the Indian Parliament, nearly triggering war. A so-called Composite Dialogue was established, seeking to bring the more moderate independence groups into negotiations. This led to a ceasefire.

    In 2007, a bilateral peace plan was nearly finalized, but collapsed due to Pakistan’s internal problems. Pro-independence demonstrations ended in violence in 2010. Tensions rose again in 2016, with India’s murder of Burhan Wani, the leader of the group Hizbul Mujahedin. Hundreds were detained and dozens killed, following more protests. In 2017, the Indian government declared its lack of interest in peace talks as curfews were imposed. However, India employed the ex-intelligence officer, intelligence official, Dineshwar Sharma, to seek a consensus for peace. This was scuppered by Pakistan’s decision to release from house arrest, Hafiz Saaed of Lashkar-e-Taiba.

    In 2019, India bombed Pakistan in retaliation for an SUV attack in Kashmir, attributed to the Pakistan-based Jaish-e-Mohammad. In August, India’s ultra-Hindu nationalist BJP party revoked Article 370 of the Constitution, effectively ending Jammu and Kashmir’s formal autonomy and leading to its de facto annexation.

    RESPONSES

    How are Britain and the U.S. responding?

    In 2017, the UK exported £370m-worth of military equipment to India, including components for aerial targeting equipment, RADAR, technology for military space craft, viruses (yes, viruses), and nuclear detection equipment and graphite; an element used in nuclear weapons production.

    In the same year, the UK exported £14m-worth of military equipment to Pakistan, including aerial targeting equipment and deuterium compounds, which can also be used in nuclear reactors. After the declaration of ceasefire in 2018, the UK continued to feed the war machine.

    In that year, it exported £164m-worth of similar military equipment to India and £19m-worth to Pakistan.

    India has had the atomic bomb since 1974, when it conducted an underground test (“Smiling Buddha”). In 1998, India began testing again, allegedly prompting Pakistan to test and formally declare possession. Like Israel, neither country is party to the Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty. During the 1980s, the U.S. Reagan administration allowed Pakistan’s dictator Zia ul-Haq to develop nuclear weapons, partly in exchange for using Pakistan as a base to recruit and transport anti-Soviet Mujahiddeen, later rebranded “al-Qaeda” by the CIA. In 2006, the U.S. lifted sanctions on India, enabling it to import nuclear materials.

    In July, shortly before India’s unilateral annexation, Trump told India’s PM Modi that the U.S. would be willing to act as a moderator between the two states over Kashmir. This gave Modi leverage to annex: the logic being that India seizes the main prize and “negotiates” smaller ones. This tactic is modelled on Israel’s theft of Palestine and its sham “peace process.” Indeed, these events occurred around the time that Israeli PM Netanyahu was greenlighted by Trump to formally annex parts of Palestine.

    India is mimicking Israel in other ways. Just as Israel holds 1.8m Gazans hostage behind a wall, India is keeping Bangladeshis locked into their poverty by constructing a “security fence” on the border. Just as Israel cries “anti-Semitism” whenever pressure is put upon it to treat Palestinians with minimal decency, BJP apologists accuse Modi opponents of “Hinduphobia.”

    As Britain’s Lord Desai signed a letter denouncing alleged anti-Semitism within the UK Labour Party under the lefty leader and anti-occupation activist, Jeremy Corbyn, Desai appeared on television in praise of India’s lockdown Kashmir. Labour’s new leader, Keir Starmer, seems to be to the left of the party on social issues (at the moment), thanks to pressure from the grassroots. But Starmer is a Blarite in his approach to foreign policy. A lawyer and former head of the Crown Prosecution Service, Sir Keir said: 

    “Any constitutional issues in India are a matter for the Indian Parliament, and Kashmir is a bilateral issue for India and Pakistan to resolve peacefully.”

    CONCLUSION

    Every few years, scientists model nuclear winter. Recently, climatologists modelled “the potential effects” of nuclear powers detonating “50 Hiroshima-size bombs—less than 1 percent of the estimated world arsenal.” They found that at least five million tons of soot would block out the Sun for fifteen years and reduce global crop production by 11 percent. In 2015, Pakistan declared that it had developed tactical nukes, which are usually of a small yield and therefore more dangerous because they increase the likelihood of being used. India’s nukes are more advanced and capable of being delivered from sea, on land, and dropped from the air.

    Nearly three decades ago, Hindus razed a mosque in Ayodhya, India, said to have been built on the site of the Hindu god, Ram. Today, Modi is back at the site to inaugurate the construction of a Hindu temple. Zafaryab Jilani, General Secretary of the All India Muslim Personal Law Board, says: 

    “It is against the letter and spirit of India’s secular constitution for the prime minister in his official capacity to attend such a religious event.”

    With these underlying cultural tensions creating a psychology of illogicality, a war sparked in Kashmir over, for instance, access to water from the Siachen Glacier, could prove fatal for us all. We will have ourselves to blame, in part, for not pressuring our leaders to forge peace: if there’s anyone left to blame after the atoms are split.

  • Mentally Ill Professor Invented Bisexual Native American Persona Who 'Died' Of COVID-19
    Mentally Ill Professor Invented Bisexual Native American Persona Who ‘Died’ Of COVID-19

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/07/2020 – 18:45

    A former assistant professor who was denied tenure at Vanderbilt University for sending threats to colleagues was busted running a years-long ‘hoax’ – in which she invented an online persona on Twitter claiming to be an oppressed bisexual, Native American geologist.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    BethAnn McLaughlin created the persona, @Sciencing_Bi, in 2016 while working as an assistant professor of neurology at Vanderbilt. After being denied tenure in 2017, McLaughlin left the university in July of 2018 – going on to found MeTooSTEM, a nonprofit organization aimed at advising scientists who are the victims of sexual harassment.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Illustratiopn by Anita Kunz via Science

    But McLaughlin was doing much more than harassing coworkers and failing to earn promotions.

    According to the New York Times:

    The anonymous account, @Sciencing_Bi, was an active participant in the corner of Science Twitter that frequently discusses issues of sexual misconduct in the sciences. It claimed on at least one occasion to have grown up in Alabama, to have “fled the south because of their oppression of queer folk,” and to have attended Catholic school. The account began to pointedly make reference to being Native American and, earlier this year, began to identify as Hopi.

    Then, McLaughlin decided to kill off @Sciencing_Bi, announcing in April that she had contracted coronavirus – which she publicly blamed on Arizona State University, which she says made her teach in a lecture hall with 200 people.

    Last Friday, BethAnn McLaughlin announced that @Sciencing_Bi had died of the virus.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Then it gets really weird (via HotAir.com)

    After her “death” BethAnn McLaughlin suggested that she’d been in an intimate relationship with the woman known only as @Sciencing_Bi. “Looking at her side of the bed and crying. Just a lot of crying.”

    But pretty quickly McLaughlin’s story began to really fall apart as people noticed that details @Sciencing_Bi had claimed about Arizona State University were false, e.g. she didn’t know the correct dates for the school’s closing. Also, looking back over her tweets it seemed that she had only referenced her Native American ancestry fairly recently.  

    What’s more, people caught McLaughlin using stock photos.

    In the end, Twitter suspended McLaughlin’s personal account and her @Sciencing_Bi persona, while ASU told BuzzFeed that they had no record of any such person.

    As the questions swirled, the account settings were switched to private. Then late on Sunday, Twitter suspended both McLaughlin’s and the @Sciencing_Bi accounts.

    “We’re aware of this activity and have suspended these accounts for violating our spam and platform manipulation policies,” a Twitter spokesperson told BuzzFeed News by email. The company declined to comment on whether it had any forensic evidence linking the two accounts to the same device or person.

    A spokesperson from ASU told BuzzFeed News they had no record of any faculty matching @Sciencing_Bi’s description. And other parts of @Sciencing_Bi’s accounts did not match up: The university closed its campus in March, switching to online instruction, and did not implement salary cuts.

    We have been looking into this for the last 24 hours and cannot verify any connection with the university,” ASU spokesperson Katie Paquet told BuzzFeed News by email on Sunday. “We have been in touch with several deans and faculty members and no one can identify the account or who might be behind it.” -BuzzFeed

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jsFinally, McLaughlin admitted to being behind the anonymous account.

    “I take full responsibility for my involvement in creating the @sciencing_bi Twitter account. My actions are inexcusable. I apologize without reservation to all the people I hurt,” she said in a statement to the New York Times, adding that she’s aware she needs mental health treatment.

    “As I’ve reflected on my actions the last few days, it’s become clear to me that I need mental health treatment, which I’m pursuing now.”

  • Ignorance Prevails Once Again!
    Ignorance Prevails Once Again!

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/07/2020 – 18:25

    Authored by Simon Black via SovereignMan.com,

    Are you ready for this week’s absurdity? Here’s our Friday roll-up of the most ridiculous stories from around the world that are threats to your liberty, risks to your prosperity… and on occasion, inspiring poetic justice.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Yale Study tests the best Covid vaccine propaganda

    Is guilt, self-interest, or anger the most effective way to convince people to get a Covid vaccine?

    A Yale study will attempt to answer that question, by studying which message resonates most with the general population. It’s called Persuasive Messages for COVID-19 Vaccine Uptake.

    There is no actual vaccine yet. But the study is already testing to see which method of propaganda will most effectively convince people to get a vaccine… whenever that happens to be.

    The study will also measure how confident the propaganda makes people feel about a vaccine, and if it makes participants want to persuade others to take the vaccine.

    Finally, researchers want to see if the propaganda produces fear in the unvaccinated, and how much social judgment it will cast on those who choose to remain unvaccinated.

    Just in case you start to see a “spontaneous” groundswell of popular support for a brand new untested vaccine…

    Click here to read about the study on clinicaltrials.gov.

    *  *  *

    Bed and Breakfast removes insensitive Norwegian flag

    Being Norwegian is now racially insensitive.

    At least that’s true for people who can’t tell the difference between the Norwegian and Confederate flag.

    A bed and breakfast in Michigan calls itself the Nordic Pineapple. The owners used to hang a Norwegian flag out front (next to the American flag) to celebrate the heritage of co-founder Kjersten Offbecker.

    But the red flag with a blue and white cross drew criticism from some guests, passers-by, and of course, the Twitter-mob.

    The couple who owns the B&B says they received substantial hate mail, bad reviews, and angry phone calls from people who thought they were flying the Confederate flag of the former Confederate States of America during the Civil War.

    They had originally tried to educate people that, in fact, THE NORWEGIAN FLAG IS NOT THE CONFEDERATE FLAG.

    (Honestly– take a look. The Norwegian flag looks NOTHING like the confederate flag. You have to be totally blind to confuse the two.)

    But they quickly realized that the Twitter mob has no mind (or soul) and is hence incapable of being educated.

    Ignorance prevails again!

    Click here to read the full story.

    *  * *

    Scottish Hate Crime bill could outlaw the Bible and theater performances

    The Catholic Church has expressed concern that the Bible could be outlawed under a section of a Scottish Hate Crime bill.

    The legislation would make it illegal to possess “inflammatory material” which could “stir up hatred” of a person or group based on race, religion, sexual orientation, gender, and so on.

    For instance, if a prosecutor decides that supporting typical gender roles constitutes “stirring up hatred,” the Bible could be considered “inflammatory material” for any number of relationships depicted– or the rules laid out in the Book of Leviticus.

    The bill also specifically takes aim at theater performances, noting that portrayal of fictional characters does NOT exempt an actor or producer from liability.

    An actor, director, or writer could be prosecuted under the law when an offense “is committed during a public performance of a play by a person who is a performer in the play.”

    So if you’re an actor who plays a fictional bigot that uses racist language, you could be prosecuted under this law.

    Of course this gives the government all the power it needs to ban essentially any book or play that they determine stirs up hatred.

    This is yet another nail in the coffin for free speech and expression in the [formerly] civilized world.

    Click here to read the full bill.

    *  *  *

    Illinois Lawmaker wants to ban history class for being racist

    A State Representative from Illinois is leading a charge to abolish history classes and remove history books from public schools.

    He says that these books and lessons currently teach a racist history which promotes systemic racism (similar to how future Nobel Prize laureate Colin Kaepernick called July 4th a “celebration of white supremacy”).

    Until the books can be replaced with something that better indoctrinates– or, uh, teaches– kids about the history that the Marxist censors approve of, these classes should be replaced with classes that better promote today’s zeitgeist.

    Click here to read the full story.

    *  *  *

    Colorado declaring racism a public health crisis

    Colorado has declared racism a public health crisis.

    That will allow the Department of Public Health to take funds that were earmarked for things like, you know, health, and divert those funds towards the eradication of systemic racism.

    But don’t forget about all the glorious powers the state claimed to fight the Covid public health crisis…

    Surely the Governor of Colorado has just as much power to end systemic racism.

    For instance, if you can shut down restaurants for spreading Covid, you could shut down restaurants for spreading racism– or perhaps having too large a proportion of white patrons.

    If you can force the sick to quarantine, you can detain anyone who says something you consider racist– like “All Lives Matter”– until they are cured.

    Remember, one Colorado town even banned property owners from their own vacation properties in the name of Covid-19 safety.

    Don’t support Black Lives Matter (i.e. the organization co-founded by– in their own words–  “trained Marxists” that has taken in hundreds of millions of dollars without a shred of financial transparency) ?

    Well perhaps the town will restrict you from your property for this thought-crime.

    Click here to read the full story.

    *  *  *

    Trader Joe’s backtracks: “we disagree that any of these labels are racist.”

    Trader Joe’s decided that the store will not bow to a teenage girl’s petition we wrote about two weeks ago.

    The Twitter mobsters demanded that Trader Joe’s change the culturally insensitive branding of certain products, like Trader Jose’s Beer, or Trader Ming’s Chinese Food.

    Originally it appeared that Trader Joe’s would bow to the mob when the chain said that, although the brand names were “rooted in a lighthearted attempt at inclusiveness, we recognize that it may now have the opposite effect.”

    But now, Trader Joe’s won’t change the names after all.

    The store now disagrees that its labels are racist, and they will make decisions based on customers, not Twitter mobs.

    “Recently we have heard from many customers reaffirming that these name variations are largely viewed in exactly the way they were intended­—as an attempt to have fun with our product marketing.”

    Click here to read the full story.

    *  *  *

    On another note… We think gold could DOUBLE and silver could increase by up to 5 TIMES in the next few years. That’s why we published a new, 50-page long Ultimate Guide on Gold & Silver that you can download here.

  • Daily Briefing – August 7, 2020
    Daily Briefing – August 7, 2020


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/07/2020 – 18:25

    Real Vision CEO Raoul Pal is joined by senior editor Ash Bennington to discuss the current state of different asset classes at this unique juncture. Raoul shares his view on the dollar, precious metals, and bitcoin. He also provides a strategic update on his unfolding thesis. Raoul guides viewers from the hope event into the insolvency phase as high-frequency data show slowdowns in economic activity. Raoul and Ash discuss why they think bitcoin is a favorable trade, and they explore why buying calls on the VIX and puts on the S&P 500 could ballast a gold-heavy portfolio. In the intro, Jack Farley discusses today’s Employment Situation Report from the Bureau of Labor Statistics.

  • Steele's Source Met With Russian Official Days Before Dossier Fabrication Began
    Steele’s Source Met With Russian Official Days Before Dossier Fabrication Began

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/07/2020 – 18:05

    Christopher Steele’s primary dossier source – alcoholic Russian national Igor Danchenko, who worked at Brookings with a Trump impeachment witness, met with a Russian energy official just four days before Steele produced the first of 17 memos which comprise his infamous opposition research on the Trump campaign.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Notably, Steele’s first memo contained the salacious allegation that the Kremlin was blackmailing President Trump over a video of prostitutes urinating on each other at the Moscow Ritz Carlton in 2013 in a room which the Obamas had previously stayed.

    The debunked accusation has made fake news headlines for years, as propagandists such as the New York Times have squeezed as much mileage as possible out of the dossier’s absurd claims.

    According to the Daily Caller‘s Chuck Ross, Danchenko met with Sergey Abyshev – who was a deputy-director in the energy ministry, as well as the editor-in-chief of a Russian finance website, Ivan Vorontsov. The meeting was documented in a Facebook post by Vorontsov, and confirmed by Abyshev.

    It is unclear what they talked about – but it occurred as Danchenko was in the thick of his work with Christopher Steele, who the Hillary Clinton 2016 campaign and the DNC paid to cook up opposition research on President Trump’s campaign. The dossier was a key component of several FISA warrants issued to spy on former campaign aide Carter Page and his contacts, and was widely distributed by US media outlets in a campaign to discredit Trump.

    Danchenko, a Russian national who lives in Washington, D.C., told the FBI in January 2017 that Steele, a former MI6 officer, tasked him in June 2016 to dig up dirt on Trump. Steele was hired in May 2016 by Fusion GPS, an opposition research firm working for the Clinton campaign and DNC.

    Vorontsov posted a photo on June 16, 2016 from the St. Petersburg International Economic Forum (SPIEF), an annual business conclave, saying he had met the prior evening with Danchenko and Abyshev.

    The night before was so nice with Sergey Abyshev and Igor Danchenko,” Vorontsov wrote. –Daily Caller

    According to Abyshev, the encounter with Danchenko was “an almost accidental meeting in the center of Moscow with three ‘cheerful’ guys,” adding “As a result, I had to listen to a lecture on investment opportunities for about 20 minutes.”

    Read the rest of the report here.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 7th August 2020

  • Chinese Drones Now Deployed In Balkans After Serbia Deal – NATO On Edge
    Chinese Drones Now Deployed In Balkans After Serbia Deal – NATO On Edge

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/07/2020 – 02:45

    China has delivered six military drones to Serbia after the Balkan country moved to purchase them in a controversial deal a year ago which has put NATO on edge. 

    Though Serbia has an official policy of military neutrality vis-a-vis NATO, there’s been increased cooperation over the past few years. However, both the Chinese drone acquirement and Present’s Aleksandar Vucic recently signaling he’d like to acquire the S-400 anti-air defense system from Russia has caused Washington to threaten sanctions.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Serbian President Aleksandar Vucic stands near new military drones purchased from China last month. Via 
    EPA-EFE

    The delivery makes Serbia the first European country in history to deploy Chinese combat drones and thus is raising eyebrows in Brussels, as Bloomberg underscores:

    China’s actions are prodding the North Atlantic Treaty Organization to pivot to Asia, a potential sea change that’s roiling an alliance that was created to protect Europe against the Soviet Union and then Russia. China’s growing influence in the Balkans mirrors its push into other areas previously dominated by Russia. The Belt and Road enterprise already has made it a major player in Central Asian politics.

    President Vucic said of the drones during a photo op after Belgrade took delivery: “They have a long range, they can shoot at targets from a distance of nine kilometers and record the terrain, objects of interest to Serbia deep within enemy territory,” according to Bloomberg.

    The sale, as one US military magazine previously put it, “marks Beijing’s most significant foray into a continent where armed forces have traditionally relied on US and European weapon-makers.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Last year the Serbian president signed several agreements with Beijing to expand the Belt and Road in the country. Under the agreement, China is expected to construct new power plants, lay transmission cables, and fiber optics, build new railways, and ports in the country. 

    As Bloomberg concludes in its reporting, “It’s easy to see why China has NATO leaders rattled. As Belt and Road has expanded across the continent, China has snapped up strategic assets including ports, power utilities and robotics firms from the Mediterranean to the Baltic Sea.

  • China And The EU Vie For Hydrogen Supremacy
    China And The EU Vie For Hydrogen Supremacy

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/07/2020 – 02:00

    Authored by Venand Meliksetian via OilPrice.com,

    Not so long ago the energy transition was primarily an idealistic concept driven by environmentalists and researchers. The most important impediment was the high costs of clean technologies. The drastically reduced price of PVs, for example, has ensured global attention for the solar industry.

    A similar situation could enfold concerning emissions-free hydrogen production as China and the EU are getting ready to dominate the market.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Germany’s trauma 

    The solar industry in Europe’s biggest economy, Germany, experienced a spectacular boom in the  mid-2000s. Renewables were high on Berlin’s agenda who supported businesses with generous subsidies. The success of these policies resulted in the strong presence of German companies on the global stage when a fifth of all photovoltaic cells was produced in the European country.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The situation changed, however, when China’s formidable industrial complex adopted Beijing’s strategy concerning the establishment of a domestic PV-sector. Since the mid-2000s, the Asian country has seen a remarkable rise. Several factors underpinned Beijing’s success: public support, a large domestic market, and a major industrial complex. The EU and Germany have learned from their mistakes and from China’s success, which is being emulated towards the hydrogen economy.

    The EU’s strategy

    Despite the Covid-19 crisis, Europe has seen a flurry of public sector announcements concerning the kick-starting of a hydrogen-based economy both from national and supranational institutions. The guiding principle is Europe’s current technological prowess and the realization that their dominant position could easily be hijacked again if the necessary policies are not enacted on time.

    Germany’s government has ensured a prominent spot for its future hydrogen economy in the economic stimulus packages intended to mitigate the financial fallout of the current health crisis. At least €9 billion will go towards stimulating the development of hydrogen-related technologies. Also, as Germany took over the six-month EU Council Presidency on July 1, Economy Minister Peter Altmaier devoted a significant portion of his speech to green hydrogen.

    Furthermore, the EU’s ‘Green Deal’ is partly dedicated to kickstarting a continental zero-emissions economy. The strategy contains a three-step plan that…

    1. …starts with the implementation of green hydrogen production and consumption in industries such as steel, chemicals, and refineries by 2024.

    2. In the second phase, facilities will be connected to create ‘hydrogen valleys’ by 2030.

    3. In the last phase, the hotspot will be joined and a large European hydrogen infrastructure created.  

    The EU hopes to produce 1 million tonnes from 6 GW of electrolysis capacity by 2024. By 2030, this should have grown towards 10 million tonnes from 40 GW capacity. Germany alone would contribute 5 GW by 2030. Other countries, such as the Netherlands, also intend to contribute and profit from the new hydrogen economy. The Dutch are uniquely positioned with access to the North Sea for the installment of wind turbines and an existing gas network that could be reused for export purposes.

    China in the rearview mirror

    The EU’s strong support for the hydrogen industry is a welcome change from the past. Currently, European companies such as Siemens and Thyssenkrupp deliver a considerable number of electrolysers. Chinese companies, however, are not far behind.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Although the EU is still leading the industry in terms of knowledge and production capacity, it cannot afford to let up. For starters, the Chinese have proven that they can implement industrial policies with ruthless efficiency and dominate the market. A clear disadvantage is that Beijing has not yet set a clear goal for an emissions-free society by 2050 as the EU has.  

    According to a report by Cleantech Group, China’s electric vehicle strategy could be used as a warning sign to competitors. Two decades ago vehicle electrification became an industrial goal and national priority. Currently, Chinese companies lead in sales and production capacity. 

    While the EU is warned to implement the right policies this time, the increasing competition is good news for consumers and the environment in general. The current attention for hydrogen remains a hype that needs to be translated into actual results. The situation is highly promising as public support remains strong and the installment of wind and solar power is gathering pace, which is a precondition for green hydrogen production. 

  • Meanwhile, In Russia…
    Meanwhile, In Russia…

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/07/2020 – 01:00

    A naked man standing in the middle of a bustling Russian street received a stiff knuckle sandwich from a driver who was clearly feeling a little impatient that day.

    Cell phone video shows the pudgy naked man strolling down the middle of a street as cars drive past. Onlookers gawk. The man waves, and continues to waddle down the street, until a white compact stopped in front of the reckless nudist, and a large man with a muscular build and shaved head got out of the car.

    The two exchange words, then suddenly, the clothed man slams his fist into the face of the naked man, who falls to the ground.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The video surfaced last month on Twitter.

  • Payrolls Preview: Just How "Big" Will Friday's "Big Number" Be
    Payrolls Preview: Just How “Big” Will Friday’s “Big Number” Be

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/06/2020 – 23:30

    Going into tomorrow’s July nonfarms payroll, the picture is mixed: The rate of jobless claims rose in the survey week, against expectations it would fall; continuing claims also rose in the reference period, even after stripping out the effect of bi-weekly reporting in some states (subsequent claims data however showed a notable decline in new initial claims). The ADP’s private payrolls number missed expectations badly (it has a poor record of forecasting the official data), and there has recently been a number of upward revisions bringing the series in line with the official data. The signals from the ISM reports are mixed, with the manufacturing survey seeing its employment sub-component rise, though remains under 50.0, while the equivalent within the non-manufacturing PMI fell. Challenger job cuts printed the third largest monthly total in history. Still, the indicators appear at odds with some metrics, like rising auto sales in July; some analysts have reasoned that the jobs market is being pressured by renewed infections, but the recovery is still intact for now.

    Goldman summarized it best saying that high frequency data suggest that the labor market recovery may have paused or stalled over the last 4-6 weeks. Workplace activity measures have generally declined in the Sun Belt, and they have moved sideways in other states since late June.

    Comparing the July to June survey weeks, traditional and Big Data suggest a wide range of plausible outcomes for tomorrow’s report, but as Goldman cautions, on net they are skewed towards a weaker-than-consensus outcome.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Ironically, this comes even as president Trump hinted on Wednesday to expect a “big number”

    So to summarize, the US jobs report will be released at 08:30 EDT and here’s what to expect, courtesy of NewsSquawk:

    • Nonfarm Payrolls exp. 1.6mln (range -280k to +4mln, prev. +4.8mln);
    • Unemployment rate exp. 10.5% (range: 9.5-11.5%, prev. 11.1%);
    • U6 unemployment (prev. 18.0%;
    • Participation (prev. 61.5%);
    • Private payrolls exp. 1.485mln (prev. +4.767mln);
    • Manufacturing payrolls exp. 255k (prev. 356k);
    • Government payrolls (prev. +33k);
    • Average earnings m/m exp. -0.5% (prev. -1.2%);
    • Average earnings y/y exp. +4.2% (prev. 5.0%);
    • Average workweek hours exp. 34.4hrs (prev. 34.5hrs).

    INITIAL JOBLESS CLAIMS: Weekly initial jobless claims rose to 1.416mln in the July employment survey reference week, against expectations for another 1.3mln print. Pantheon Macroeconomics says tough seasonals were the reason why claims rose after a run of 15 declines; “Unadjusted claims usually drop sharply in mid-July because of the end of the automakers’ annual shutdowns, but most plants didn’t shut down this year; automakers needed to make up for lost production in spring, when Covid-19 forced production to stop,” the consultancy writes, “that meant unadjusted claims didn’t rise in early June, but it also meant they didn’t fall as much as usual this week.” With that said, Pantheon notes that the underlying trend in claims since mid-June, before these distortions, seems to have been about flat. Continuing claims data for the BLS reference week rose to 17.018mln from 16.151mln; it was first rise since early May. Analysts generally see continuing claims as a better gauge of how nonfarm payrolls might come in, but much of the increase in the July reference week was a result of the four states which require bi-weekly filings of claims (California, Florida, Pennsylvania, and Texas – plus Puerto Rico), resulting in ‘sawtoothing’ data, Pantheon writes. “After stripping these states out it is clear that continuing claims elsewhere rose, by about 225K,” Pantheon observes, “That’s the first increase since early May.” Using the weekly jobs data as a proxy, the consultancy says that, after making adjustments, says the data are consistent with an increase in July payrolls; but August is at real risk if continuing claims continue to rise.

    ADP: Private sector employment increased by 167k in July, according to data from ADP, significantly missing the consensus 1.5mln; however, the prior June data saw a chunky upward revision to 4.31mln from 2.37mln. The data means that private sector employment is still around 13mln (or about 10%) below the pre-pandemic peak seen in February. ADP said the labour market recovery slowed in the month of July, and that slowdown has impacted businesses across all sizes and sectors. Within the details, the slowdown was a result of the Leisure & Hospitality sector, which Capital Economics says makes sense given the renewed restrictions on bars and restaurants in many states, but other states sectors also saw a sharp slowdown. While ADP’s data is in sync with some high-frequency metrics which portend a slowdown in economic momentum and employment growth, the link between the ADP data and the official BLS employment situation report is tenuous, Capital Economics notes, especially in recent months; the ADP May and June data were both revised up, matching the more optimistic official data. “The apparent weakness of employment growth is also at odds with the strong 11% m/m rise in auto sales last month,” CapEco notes, adding that it is sticking with its forecast for 1mln payrolls to be added to the economy in July; “That would suggest that while the renewed wave of infections is weighing on the economy, the recovery remains intact.”

    MANUFACTURING SECTOR: The ISM manufacturing report’s Employment sub-index rose by 2.2 points in July to 44.3, but remains beneath 50.0. ISM noted it was the twelfth consecutive month of employment contraction, though at slower rate compared to June. It said that only one of the six big industry sectors experienced expansion, as factories were able to achieve significant gains in output with a reduced labour pool. “Long-term labour market growth remains uncertain, but strong new-order levels and an expanding backlog signify potential strength for the rest of the third quarter.” Of the 18 manufacturing industries, the five industries to report employment growth in July were: Apparel, Leather & Allied Products; Printing & Related Support Activities; Furniture & Related Products; Plastics & Rubber Products; and Computer & Electronic Products. One manufacturing business in the transport equipment sector said that “overall business remains down almost 70 percent. We are hanging on to as many employees as possible, but we will have to lay off 30 percent or more for at least two to three months until September or October.”

    SERVICES SECTOR: The ISM non-manufacturing report’s Employment sub-index fell 1 point in July to 42.1. It was the fifth consecutive month of contraction. Comments from respondents included: “Current freeze on all open positions” and “lower due to retirements and departures; limited new hiring at this time,” ISM said. Five industries reported an increase in employment: Arts, Entertainment & Recreation; Agriculture, Forestry, Fishing & Hunting; Retail Trade; Health Care & Social Assistance; and Utilities. A service company in the public administration sector said “phased opening of businesses continues at a slow pace. Spending is down. Unemployment is up this year, though down compared to last month. Unemployment last year was 2.9 percent. Last month, it was 19.2 percent. This month, it is 16.2 percent.”

    JOB CUTS: Job cuts announced by US-based employers jumped in July to 262,649, the third-largest monthly total ever behind April’s 671,129 and May’s 397,016, data from Challenger showed; July’s total is 54% higher than the 170,219 job cuts announced in June, and 576% higher than the July 2019 total of 38,845. Prior to the COVID-19 pandemic, the highest monthly total of job cuts was 186,350 in February 2009, Challenger said. “The lapse in extended unemployment benefits for millions of Americans will significantly impact the economy, as we see more employers announce they are cutting jobs permanently,” Challenger said, “the downturn is far from over, especially as COVID cases rise around the country.” The consultancy added that consumers were buying fewer goods and services, businesses are closing, and bankruptcies are rising.” The majority of cuts continue to come from Entertainment/Leisure companies, including bars, restaurants, hotels, and amusement parks; retailers announced the second-highest number of job cuts this year; and services sector job cuts are significantly up y/y. Challenger said hiring announcements almost equaled the number of jobs cut in July, as companies announced 246,507 hiring plans; Warehousing led. Challenger concluded that many job losses are now permanent, and it will be challenging for many workers to find new jobs and feel safe taking jobs that are public-facing.

    * * *

    So what to expect? As Christophe Barraud writes, looking at high frequency indicators, the signals range from slower improvement to a deterioration. The Census Bureau’s weekly Household Pulse Survey showed that the number of employed Americans declined by about 6.7 million from mid-June through mid-July, including a 4.1 million plunge from the first to the second week of July. In addition, real-time labour estimates produced by academics at Arizona State University and Virginia Commonwealth University showed that the proportion who are employed fell again in July.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, Saint Louis Fed economists, that use real-time data from Homebase to track labour market trend, show “that since the week of June 12, the recovery in employment has slowed down and slightly reverted.” However, as you can see below, by comparing the weeks related to the survey periods, the situation improved a bit from June to July.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Labor Department data also show that employment conditions started deteriorating in mid-July with initial jobless claims snapping a 15-week streak of declines in the week ending July 18. However, latest figures showed an improvement by month-end. Applications for U.S. unemployment benefits fell by 249,000 to 1.19 million in the week ended Aug. 1 (the lowest since the pandemic started).

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Now looking at monthly surveys, results were somehow disappointing. On the one hand, ADP reported Wednesday that private payrolls increased by just 167,000 well below the Bloomberg consensus of 1.2 million and prior figure of 4.314 million in June. In the meantime, the two ISM surveys (Manufacturing and Services) showed that the employment component remained in contraction territory in July, respectively at 44.3 and 42.1 (well below the expansion threshold of 50).

    All in all, most of employment indicators imply that the current consensus for NFP is probably too high at +1.5 million (downwardly revised from +2.0 million), yet, the bright spot is likely to come from State and Local Government (Education) jobs amid positive seasonal adjustment. As Goldman notes, there is a seasonal bias in education categories to boost July job growth by roughly 0.5mn to 0.75mn. Some of the janitors and other school staff who normally finish the school year in June and July stopped working this year in April. Reflecting this, education payrolls will likely decline by less than the BLS seasonal factors anticipate, resulting in a sizeable increase in reported job growth inthe sector

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The other contrarian point came from Trump statements. President Trump said Tuesday and reiterated Wednesday that there is “a big number coming out Friday on jobs”. While presidents usually receive a preview of the employment report before its official release, it tends to be the prior evening.

    To summarize, high frequency and monthly indicators suggest that employment growth was weaker in July with some deterioration seen around mid-July. Due to the survey period, this phenomenom is unlikely to be fully reflected in the report. In addition, seasonal adjustment issues related to Education will boost artificially the headline by several hundred thousand jobs in July. Trump positive comments also imply that the worst scenario (negative print) is very unlikely.

  • Russian S-300 Air Defense System Spotted In Libya?
    Russian S-300 Air Defense System Spotted In Libya?

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/06/2020 – 23:05

    Submitted by SouthFront

    Russia has deployed an advanced S-300 air defense system to Libya to support the forces of Field Marshal Khalifa Haftar against the Turkish military and its proxies, local media reported on August 5.

    According to photos surfacing online, the supposed S-300 system is deployed near the town of Ras Lanuf, a key oil export port controlled by the Libyan National Army (LNA). The town is located more than 200km away from the port city of Sirte, which the LNA is defending against Turkish-led forces.

    The circulating photos supposedly show a 96L6E Cheese Board radar and a transporter erector launcher (TEL) similar to those used in S-300 and S-400 air-defense systems. This 3D early-warning and acquisition radar has a range of 300 km and can track up to 100 targets simultaneously.

    Last month, several Arab sources already reported that an S-300 system had bee deployed in Libya. Egypt, an ally of the LNA, operates a variant of the system that is different from the one allegedly spotted near Ras Lanuf.

    Turkish sources are already crying foul about the cowardly Russians who are aiming to shoot down peaceful Turkish combat drones democratically bombing LNA-controlled cities. At the same time, it should be noted that the photos from the Ras Lanuf area are yet to be verified. In particular, the pictured radar also looks similar to those of the Iranian-made Khordad-15 air defense system, which was used in 2019 to shoot down a RQ-4A Global Hawk BAMS-D surveillance drone of the United States over the Strait of Hormuz. In any case, if any of these versions is confirmed, it will be sad news for the Erdogan sultanate and its proxies.

    Despite active preparations for an attack on Sirte, the Turkish Armed Forces, pro-Turkish Syrian militants and Tripoli forces have not yet launched an attack on the port city, likely fearing a direct military response by Egypt to such a move. Sporadic clashes regularly erupt west of Sirte and sides exchange isolated airstrikes, but the general situation on the frontline has stabilized.

    This means that the conflict has at least temporarily entered into a positional war stage. In these conditions, the main backers of Field Marshal Khaftar – Egypt and the UAE, partially supported by France and Russia, have every chance to take the upper hand in this standoff even without the direct involvement of Russia or other major powers at their side.

  • The Bogus "Recovery", Stress, & Burnout
    The Bogus “Recovery”, Stress, & Burnout

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/06/2020 – 22:35

    Authored by Charles Hugh Smith via OfTwoMinds blog,

    We have three basic ways to counter the destructive consequences of stress.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We have all experienced the disorientation and “brain freeze” that stress triggers. The pandemic and the responses to the pandemic have been continuous sources of stress, i.e. chronic stress, which is the pathway to burnout, the collapse of our ability to cope with the burdens pressing on us.

    Authorities keep promoting a bogus “recovery” narrative. The disconnect between what the authorities are claiming and what people are actually experiencing is widening, and these unbridgeable contradictions lead to meltdown. No wonder more and more people are “losing it” as their neural circuitry melts down under the strain of synthesizing what they experience (crisis) and what they’re told (the “recovery” is already glorious and getting better every day).

    In Survival+ I call this process derealization as our lived experience is derealized (dismissed as not real) by official spin and propaganda.

    Research has illuminated how stress disrupts the default hierarchy of the brain. In the absence of stress, the neocortex-rational-mind functions suppress the more primitive subconscious signals of aggression, hunger, etc. in order to concentrate our effort to complete some planned activity.

    Everyday Stress Can Shut Down the Brain’s Chief Command Center. Neural circuits responsible for conscious self-control are highly vulnerable to even mild stress. When they shut down, primal impulses go unchecked and mental paralysis sets in. (Scientific American; subscription required)

    This helps explain the natural “fight or flight” response we feel when suddenly confronted with danger or potential danger, but more importantly it illuminates how we lose the ability to analyze circumstances rationally when we are “stressed out.” Once our rational analytic abilities are shut down, we are prone to making a series of ill-informed and rash decisions.

    This has the potential to set up a destructive positive feedback loop: the more stressed out we become, the lower the quality of our decision-making, which then generates poor results that then stress us out even more, further degrading our already-impaired rational processes. This feedback loop quickly leads to “losing it” and/or burnout.

    In pondering human development over the past 20,000 years of the transition from hunter-gatherer groups to modern life, it seems self-evident that stress was likely to be resolved in relatively short order in the hunter-gatherer lifestyle: everyone was known to everyone else, conflicts had to be resolved simply because the group survival depended on it, and most threats could be fended off with vigilance, weapons or left behind by a few hours of fast walking.

    Contrast the ancient environment that selected for this stress/conscious self-control feedback with modern life: in the modern urban life and work environment, stress is more or less constant and our ability to resolve stressful situations is limited because we control very little about the macro social-economic waters we’re navigating.

    Though this particular article focuses on short-term stress, there is growing body of evidence that chronic stress has a number of subtle and destructive consequences. In addition to the common-sense connection between chronic stress and hypertension, there is evidence that obesity is also related to stress-caused conditions such as inadequate sleep and chronic inflammation. This makes sense as the stress hormones erode the immune system’s responsiveness.

    Behaviorally, stress breaks down self-control, so it is no surprise that stress leads to bingeing, addictive behavior, impulse buying, etc.–all “knock-on” effects with negative consequences.

    Chronic stress permanently degrades our ability to rationally analyze and plan, and so we act irrationally or erratically, as we are no longer able to stick to a conscious plan of coherent action. With the rational mind and self-control centers permanently suppressed, we are prone to withdrawal and passivity, “sleepwalking” though life. This may help explain Americans’ remarkable passivity as their civil liberties are taken away and their financial insecurity increases.

    Many of the features of post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD) are now visible in “everyday Americans,” and an understanding of how stress erodes rational thought and self-control helps explain why.

    Even before the pandemic, over half of Americans reported that their stress level was usually high. (see chart below) We can guess that this already high percentage is now considerably higher, given that 32 million people are receiving some form of unemployment and thousands of small businesses have closed.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Medical professionals were already burning out before the pandemic. (see chart below) What the status quo must cover up is the reality that the structure of our winner-take-most socio-economic system makes it unlivable, even for professionals (or especially for professionals, in many cases).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We have three basic ways to counter the destructive consequences of stress:

    1) Develop positive physical and mental responses via discipline, habit and practice (for example, regular exercise, gardening, etc.).

    2) Turn off the mainstream media and social media (i.e. eliminate deranging, destructive distractions).

    3) Stay focused on our plans. The simpler and more positive the plan, the more likely it is we can stay focused on it in stressful circumstances.

    I laid out a context for my own planning in May.

    Our Inevitable Collapse: We Can’t Save a Fragile Economy With Bailouts That Increase Fragility May 1, 2020

    Why Assets Will Crash May 4, 2020

    Surviving 2020 #1: Bug-Out Bunkers, Taoism and the Warring States May 5, 2020

    Surviving 2020 #2: 16 Suggestions May 6, 2020

    Surviving 2020 #3: Plans A, B and C May 7, 2020

    The Outlines of a Better World Are Emerging May 8, 2020

    *  *  *

    My recent books:

    Will You Be Richer or Poorer?: Profit, Power, and AI in a Traumatized World ($13)
    (Kindle $6.95, print $11.95) Read the first section for free (PDF).

    Pathfinding our Destiny: Preventing the Final Fall of Our Democratic Republic ($6.95 (Kindle), $12 (print), $13.08 ( audiobook): Read the first section for free (PDF).

    The Adventures of the Consulting Philosopher: The Disappearance of Drake $1.29 (Kindle), $8.95 (print); read the first chapters for free (PDF)

    Money and Work Unchained $6.95 (Kindle), $15 (print) Read the first section for free (PDF).

    *  *  *

    If you found value in this content, please join me in seeking solutions by becoming a $1/month patron of my work via patreon.com.

  • Ohio Governor Mike DeWine Tests Negative For COVID-19 Hours After Testing Positive: Live Updates
    Ohio Governor Mike DeWine Tests Negative For COVID-19 Hours After Testing Positive: Live Updates

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/06/2020 – 22:19

    Summary:

    • Ohio Gov. Mike DeWine tests negative for COVID-19 after testing positive earlier in the day
    • California, Florida see cases decline
    • Goldman’s daily tracker: decline in case totals continues across US
    • Illinois reports most cases since May
    • France repots 1,600+ new cases for 2 days straight; first time since April
    • US lifts global travel advisory; stocks climb
    • Ohio Gov tests positive for COVID before greeting Trump
    • Latest Florida, NY, Arizona numbers hit
    • Global cases near 19 million
    • Deaths top 700k
    • Germany reports more than 1,000 new cases for first time since May
    • Philippines now worst outbreak in Southeast Asia
    • Victoria reports another 471 new cases

    * * *

    Update (1920ET): Ohio Governor Mike DeWine has tested negative for COVID-19, just hours after testing positive before he was set to meet with President Trump in Cleveland.

    His wife, Fran DeWine, also tested negative along with several staff members – after they all underwent a more accurate testing method in Columbus, vs. the rapid-result test which showed DeWine to be positive earlier in the day, according to AP.

    DeWine, an early advocate among Republicans of wearing masks and other pandemic precautions, said he took a test arranged by the White House in Cleveland as part of standard protocol before he was to meet Trump at an airport. He had planned to join the president on a visit to the Whirlpool Corp. plant in northwest Ohio.

    Instead, he received the news he was positive, called his wife, Fran DeWine, and returned to central Ohio where he took the other test that showed him to be negative.

    “A big surprise to me and certainly a big surprise to our family,” DeWine said at a late afternoon news conference broadcast from his porch on his farm in Cedarville in southwestern Ohio, where he planned to quarantine for 14 days. –AP

    The 73-year-old DeWine said he didn’t know how he could have contracted the virus, as he’s been spending most of his time on his farm.

    * * *

    Update (1730ET): A developing trend of declining daily case numbers out of the US took a breather on Thursday as BBG and JHU reported a 1.3% preliminary daily increase to  4.85 million, slightly larger than the 1.2% 7-day average.

    However, that headline number masked some promising details. California’s new cases stayed below the 14-day average, and Florida’s rate of positive tests fell to the lowest level since June 21. Florida reported 510,389 cases, up 1.5% from a day earlier, compared with an average increase of 1.6% in the previous seven days. Deaths reached 7,747, an increase of 120, or 2.4%.

    The most notably daily increase in the US comes out of Illinois, where the state reported its biggest single-day case tally since May 24, with an 11% bump over the previous day, or 1,953 new cases. The seven-day rate of positive tests rose to 4% from 3.9%. Though the state reported 21 deaths, down from 30 a day earlier.

    However, California reported 166 new deaths on Thursday, exceeding the 14-day average of 132, and bringing the Golden State’s total to 9,869. Across Cali, there were 5,258 new cases, below the 14-day average of 7,455 and extending a decline that started more than 2 weeks ago when cases peaked north of 12,000.

    Even outside the US, Thursday afternoon was big for COVID-19-related news. France reported 1,604 new cases, marking the first time since April that the country has reported more than 1,600 cases for 2 days straight. 

    Another seven deaths were also reported, bringing France’s total to 30,312, according to the French Health Ministry.

    Iowa’s Republican Gov Kim Reynolds warned she’d overrule any local officials who impose requirements on mask-wearing outdoors.

    “We don’t believe during a public health emergency that the local governments have the authority to supersede what is in place at the statewide level by the governor,” Reynolds said.

    Texas reported 306 new deaths statewide, with some of the new deaths dating back as far as June 4. Now, there are 7,803 total. The state also reported 7,598 new cases, bringing Texas’s total to 467,485.

    Meanwhile, here’s Goldman’s latest daily COVID-19 tracker, which after the data reported in the US this afternoon, as most states continue to see a decline in new cases.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    • Over the past several days, a majority of states have seen new confirmed coronavirus cases decline on a 14-day basis, suggesting cases are now on a sustained downward trajectory in much of the country. Encouragingly, nearly all states also have cases declining on a 7-day basis and the widespread decline in symptom prevalence is continuing, indicating this downward trajectory may continue at least in the near term.
    • Despite the downward trajectory, the level of new cases remains high in most states. States representing 90% of the population have daily new case levels above 50 per million population, and states representing 70% of the population have levels above 100 per million. Even with further sustained improvement, states may wait for daily new cases to fall to more acceptable levels before loosening reopening policies.
    • However, focusing on the decline in new cases overlooks a few important recent factors. Positive test rates remain very high in some states, and testing volumes have declined over the past two weeks in part due to disruptions from Hurricane Isaias. California also recently announced that a technical issue led to understatement in case counts. Estimates of the effective reproductive number Rt, which account for testing volumes, remain very close to 1.0 nationally.

    * * *

    Update (1500ET): News that the State Department had lifted a global travel advisory established 4 months ago reportedly helped propel US indexes higher in afternoon trading, according to analysts and media reports.

    The department issued the Level 4: Do Not Travel advisory, the highest level of travel advisory, on March 19. The advisory urges US citizens not to travel overseas due to the burgeoning SARS-CoV-2 pandemic. 

    Instead, the State Department plans to issue individual ratings for different countries. It’s widely seen as the first step toward easing international travel restrictions, with the US leading by example.

    Here’s a statement from the State Department via CNN:

    However, “(w)ith health and safety conditions improving in some countries and potentially deteriorating in others, the Department is returning to our previous system of country-specific levels of travel advice (with Levels from 1-4 depending on country-specific conditions), in order to give travelers detailed and actionable information to make informed travel decisions,” a Thursday note from the State Department said.

    “This will also provide U.S. citizens more detailed information about the current status in each country,” the note said. “We continue to recommend U.S. citizens exercise caution when traveling abroad due to the unpredictable nature of the pandemic.”

    The Level 4: Do Not Travel advisory put into effect in March advised “U.S. citizens to avoid all international travel due to the global impact of COVID-19” and urged Americans “in countries where commercial departure options remain available” to “arrange for immediate return to the United States, unless they are prepared to remain abroad for an indefinite period.”

    As commercial flight options disappeared and borders were shuttered to combat the spread of the virus, the department undertook an unprecedented repatriation effort to get Americans back home. Between January 27 and June 10, they coordinated the repatriation of 101,386 Americans on 1,140 flights from 136 countries and territories.

    Of course, US citizens still face travel restrictions imposed by the EU and the UK. The advisory is being lifted as the Trump Administration reportedly considers a travel ban on Communist Party members, which was reported a few weeks back.

    * * *

    Update (1240ET): Ohio Gov. Mike DeWine has tested positive for COVID-19, according to a statement from his office.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    DeWine, 73, took the test as part of the “standard protocol” for greeting President Trump at the tarmac at Burke Lakefront Airport.

    The governor is returning to Columbus, where he and First Lady Fran DeWine will both be tested. DeWine plans to quarantine at his home in Cedarville for the next 14 days. Lt. Governor Jon Husted also took the test, but tested negative.

    He’s at least the second governor to test positive, after Okla. Gov. Kevin Stitt

    * * *

    The number of new coronavirus cases slowed on Thursday, but the global tally of cases neared 19 million, with the outbreak on track to surpass that number by the end of the week.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The biggest news overnight comes out of Europe, where Germany just suffered its largest jump in new cases since May, with more than 1000 new cases reported in a day.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Robert Koch Institute reported 1,045 new cases on Thursday, bringing Germany’s total to 213,067. Its death toll is 9,175. This comes as the RKI warns that any figure above 1,000 a day would make it much more difficult for local health authorities to carry out effective tracking and tracing, and to keep the virus under control, Reuters reports.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    German schools have begun to reopen in some parts of the country, which has been widely blamed for the uptick in new cases.

    Surging case numbers are reviving fears of a return to economically damaging lockdown in Germany.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Health Minister Jens Spahn said on Thursday free compulsory testing would be offered beginning Saturday, although a big factor in the increase on Thursday was a surge in tests being run.

    In neighboring Poland, officials will introduce new containment measures against the virus in some of the most badly affected counties after fresh infections set new records in the past weeks. The country will impose limits on restaurants, sport events, mass transportation and weddings in 19 of its 380 counties starting Saturday, said Health Minister Lukasz Szumowski.

    Typically quiet Southeast Asia is also seeing some alarming new developments as the Philippines surpasses Indonesia for the biggest outbreak in the region, despite imposing the longest, and most strict, lockdown in the entire region earlier this year.The country reported 3,381 new cases on Thursday (these numbers are reported with a 24 hour delay).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    coronavirus cases in the Philippines have now surged to almost 120,000 (119,460 according to Worldometer), eclipsing Indonesia to become the region’s biggest outbreak. The country re-imposed this week a second lockdown on its capital and nearby areas to curb infection spread, even as the economy suffered its deepest contraction on record, shrinking 16.5% in the second quarter from a year ago.

    This comes as Q2 GDP data shows Philippines economy shrank 16.5% in the quarter, descending into a deep recession.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    FInally, Australia’s Victoria state reported 471 new cases as Premier Daniel Andrews dismissed a report by the Australian newspaper that government modeling showed average daily infections would peak at 1,100 by the end of next week. The state reported a record 725 new cases on Wednesday. Additionally, Aussie PM Scott Morrison warned Thursday that the lockdowns in Victoria (including especially restrictive measures in Melbourne) would shave 2.5% off quarterly growth.

  • 'Kansas Should Go F*** Itself': Taibbi Opines On Liberal Arrogance In Lieu Of Introspection
    ‘Kansas Should Go F*** Itself’: Taibbi Opines On Liberal Arrogance In Lieu Of Introspection

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/06/2020 – 22:05

    “America’s financial and political establishment has always been most terrified of an inclusive underclass movement. So it evangelizes a bizarre transgressive politics that tells white conservatives to fuck themselves and embraces a leftist sub-theology that preaches class as a racist canard.” –Matt Taibbi

    Matt Taibbi has written one hell of a book review in advance of a Friday podcast interview with author Thomas Frank, whose new book “The People, No: A Brief History of Anti-Populism” is currently Amazon’s #1 new release in ‘radical political thought.’

    Frank, according to Taibbi, not only predicted the current culture war we currently find ourselves in – he’s hit the nail on the head once again when it comes to the left’s inability to learn from their mistakes – after the party abandoned blue-collar America for condescending, coastal intellectuals.

    Frank published What’s the Matter with Kansas? in 2004, at the height of the George W. Bush presidency. The Iraq War was already looking like a disaster, but the Democratic Party was helpless to take advantage, a fact the opinion-shaping class on the coasts found puzzling. Blue-staters felt sure they’d conquered the electoral failure problem in the nineties, when a combination of Bill Clinton’s Arkansas twang, policy pandering (a middle-class tax cut!) and a heavy dose of unsubtle race politics (e.g. ending welfare “as we know it”) appeared to cut the heart out of the Republican “Southern strategy.”

    Yet Clinton’s chosen successor Al Gore flopped, the party’s latest Kennedy wannabe, John Kerry, did worse, and by the mid-2000s, Bushian conservatism was culturally ascendant, despite obvious failures. Every gathering of self-described liberals back then devolved into the same sad-faced anthropological speculation about Republicans: “Why do they vote against their own interests?” -Matt Taibbi

    And instead of trying to actually figure out what motivates voters from poor swaths of America, the left has chalked it up to ‘racial animus and Christian superstition.

    Taibbi further notes: “The Kansas title alone spoke to one of Frank’s central observations: while red state voters might frame objections in terms of issues like abortion or busing, in a broader sense the Republican voter is recoiling from urban liberal condescension.”

    That Democrats needed Thomas Frank to tell them what conservatives fifteen miles outside the cities were thinking was damning in itself. Even worse was the basically unbroken string of insults emanating from pop culture (including from magazines like Rolling Stone: I was very guilty of this) describing life between the cities as a prole horror peopled by obese, Bible-thumping dolts who couldn’t navigate a Thai menu and polished gun lockers instead of reading.

    Republicans may have controlled government at the time, but when they turned on TV sets or looked up at movie screens, their voters felt accused of something just for living in little towns, raising kids, and visiting church on Sundays. What’s the matter, they were asking, with that? -Matt Taibbi

    And since the 2016 US election, instead of introspection over why Trump resonates with blue-collar America, the left has learned nothing. 

    After 2016 it became axiomatic that the Trump voter, or the Leave voter, was – without exception now – a crazed, racist monster. As detailed here multiple times, ruminations on Republican voter behaviors became not merely uninteresting to pundits after November 2016, but actively taboo. By 2020, the official answer to What’s the Matter with Kansas? was Kansas is a White Supremacist Project and Can Go Fuck Itself. -Matt Taibbi

    Read the rest of Taibbi’s piece here, and check out the Useful Idiots podcast with Frank on Friday.

  • Russia-China "Dedollarization" Reaches "Breakthrough Moment" As Countries Ditch Greenback For Bilateral Trade
    Russia-China “Dedollarization” Reaches “Breakthrough Moment” As Countries Ditch Greenback For Bilateral Trade

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/06/2020 – 21:55

    Late last year, data released by the PBOC and the Russian Central Bank shone a light on a disturbing – at least, for the US – trend: As the Trump Administration ratcheted up sanctions pressure on Russia and China, both countries and their central banks have substantially “diversified” their foreign-currency reserves, dumping dollars and buying up gold and each other’s currencies.

    Back in September, we wrote about the PBOC and RCB building their reserves of gold bullion to levels not seen in years. The Russian Central Bank became one of the world’s largest buyers of bullion last year (at least among the world’s central banks). At the time, we also introduced this chart.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We’ve been writing about the impending demise of the greenback for years now, and of course we’re not alone. Some well-regarded economists have theorized that the fall of the greenback could be a good thing for humanity – it could open the door to a multi-currency basket, or better yet, a global current (bitcoin perhaps?) – by allowing us to transition to a global monetary system with with less endemic instability.

    Though, to be sure, the greenback is hardly the first “global currency”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Falling confidence in the greenback has been masked by the Fed’s aggressive buying, as central bankers in the Eccles Building now fear that the asset bubbles they’ve blown are big enough to harm the real economy, so we must wait for exactly the right time to let the air out of these bubbles so they don’t ruin people’s lives and upset the global economic apple cart. As the coronavirus outbreak has taught us, that time may never come.

    But all the while, Russia and China have been quietly weening off of the dollar, and instead using rubles and yuan to settle transnational trade.

    Since we live in a world where commerce is directed by the whims of the free market (at least, in theory), the Kremlin can just make Russian and Chinese companies substitute yuan and rubles for dollars with the flip of a switch:as Russian President Vladimir Putin once exclaimed, the US’s aggressive sanctions policy risks destroying the dollar’s reserve status by forcing more companies from Russia and China to search for alternatives to transacting in dollars, if for no other reason than to keep costs down (international economic sanctions can make moving money abroad difficult).

    In 2019, Putin gleefully revealed that Russia had reduced the dollar holdings of its central bank by $101 billion, cutting the total in half.

    And according to new data from the Russian Central Bank and Federal Customs Service, the dollar’s share of bilateral trade between Russia and China fell below 50% for the first time in modern history.

    Businesses only used the greenback for roughly 46% of settlements between the two countries. Over the same period, the euro constituted an all-time high of 30%. While other national currencies accounted for 24%, also a new high.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As one ‘expert’ told the Nikkei Asian Review, it’s just the latest sign that Russia and China are forming a “de-dollarization alliance” to diminish the economic heft of Washington’s sanctions powers, and its de facto control of SWIFT, the primary inter-bank messaging service via which banks move money from country to country.

    The shift is happening much more quickly than the US probably expected. As recently as 2015, more than 90% of bilateral trade between China and Russia was conducted in dollars.

    Alexey Maslov, director of the Institute of Far Eastern Studies at the Russian Academy of Sciences, told the Nikkei Asian Review that the Russia-China “dedollarization” was approaching a “breakthrough moment” that could elevate their relationship to a de facto alliance.

    “The collaboration between Russia and China in the financial sphere tells us that they are finally finding the parameters for a new alliance with each other,” he said. “Many expected that this would be a military alliance or a trading alliance, but now the alliance is moving more in the banking and financial direction, and that is what can guarantee independence for both countries.”

    Dedollarization has been a priority for Russia and China since 2014, when they began expanding economic cooperation following Moscow’s estrangement from the West over its annexation of Crimea. Replacing the dollar in trade settlements became a necessity to sidestep U.S. sanctions against Russia.

    “Any wire transaction that takes place in the world involving U.S. dollars is at some point cleared through a U.S. bank,” explained Dmitry Dolgin, ING Bank’s chief economist for Russia. “That means that the U.S. government can tell that bank to freeze certain transactions.”
    The process gained further momentum after the Donald Trump administration imposed tariffs on hundreds of billions of dollars worth of Chinese goods. Whereas previously Moscow had taken the initiative on dedollarization, Beijing came to view it as critical, too.

    “Only very recently did the Chinese state and major economic entities begin to feel that they might end up in a similar situation as our Russian counterparts: being the target of the sanctions and potentially even getting shut out of the SWIFT system,” said Zhang Xin, a research fellow at the Center for Russian Studies at Shanghai’s East China Normal University.

    At times, Russia has prioritized use of the yuan over its own currency in the hopes that his would push Beijing to become more “assertive” in establishing the yuan as an internationalized currency. While the yuan was added to a IMF basket of reserve currencies a few years back, Beijing’s unwillingness to take its hand off the wheel when it comes to managing the currency has stymied its internationalization.

    Russia’s push to accumulate yuan is not just about diversifying its foreign exchange reserves, Maslov explained. Moscow also wants to encourage Beijing to become more assertive in challenging Washington’s global economic leadership.

    “Russia has a considerably more decisive position toward the United States [than China does],” Maslov said. “Russia is used to fighting, it does not hold negotiations. One way for Russia to make China’s position more decisive, more willing to fight is to show that it supports Beijing in the financial sphere.”

    Six years have passed between Russia and China opened FX swap lines between their central banks in 2014. That three year deal was expanded in 2017.

    While trying to assess the long-term risk, remember: Ray Dalio has apparently assigned a whole team of publicists to help spread his concerns about the potential fallout from a US-China “capital war”. It’s worth remembering that China has far more financial firepower with which to vex the US than many pundits are willing to acknowledge.

  • Trump Signs Executive Order Banning TikTok, WeChat In 45 Days
    Trump Signs Executive Order Banning TikTok, WeChat In 45 Days

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/06/2020 – 21:50

    President Trump signed an executive order banning U.S. residents from doing any business with TikTok or the apps’ Chinese owner ByteDance 45 days from now.

    Trump said the U.S. “must take aggressive action against the owners of TikTok to protect our national security”.

    The EO comes as Trump has demanded the divestment of the popular video app, citing national security risks to the U.S, and threatens penalties on any U.S. resident or company that engages in any transactions with TikTok or ByteDance after the order takes effect.

    “This mobile application may also be used for disinformation campaigns that benefit the Chinese Communist Party,” Trump said in the order, released Thursday by the White House and seen by Bloomberg.

    The data collection through TikTok “threatens to allow the Chinese Communist Party access to Americans’ personal and proprietary information — potentially allowing China to track the locations of Federal employees and contractors, build dossiers of personal information for blackmail, and conduct corporate espionage.”

    TikTok has denied accusations it is controlled by or shares data with the Chinese government.

    The order released today reads: “I, Donald J Trump President of the United States of America, find that additional steps must be taken to deal with the national emergency with respect to the information and communications technology and services….Specifically, the spread in the United States of mobile applications developed and owned by companies in the People’s Republic of China continues to threaten the national security, foreign policy, and economy.

    “At this time, action must be taken to address the threat posed by one mobile application in particular, Tik Tok.”

    He has also banned WeChat.

    The President claims the app’s data collection “threatens to allow the Chinese Communist Party access to Americas’ personal and proprietary information – potentially allowing China to track the locations of Federal employees and contractors, build dossiers of personal information for blackmail, and conduct corporate espionage.”

    And now we wait for China’s response to this latest escalation, even if so far Beijing has indicated it is willing to be a pushover when it comes to Trump’s pre-election campaigning and is unwilling to aggressively pursue any retaliation.

    In kneejerk reaction, Tencent shares dropped after signed an executive order “addressing the threat posed by WeChat.” The stock fell as much as 1.5% in opening minutes of Hong Kong trade. It remains up 46% YTD.

     

  • Freddie Mac Warns Apartment Loan Supply May Plunge As Virus Crushes Working-Poor 
    Freddie Mac Warns Apartment Loan Supply May Plunge As Virus Crushes Working-Poor 

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/06/2020 – 21:25

    Freddie Mac’s multi-year lending outlook for apartment buildings reveals the economic devastation among the working poor due to the virus-induced recession. 

    Multi-family loan origination volume for apartment buildings could plunge as much as 40% in 2020 compared with 2019. 

    Freddie said the “magnitude of the decline would be tied to the recovery of the economy and ability to contain the virus.” 

    We’ve highlighted, in recent weeks, the recovery has already reversed, as per the latest Goldman Sach’s high-frequency data. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The financial well-being of the working poor has been crushed in the downturn. At least 30 million folks are still collecting unemployment benefits. Renters’ hardships were realized one week before the month ended, with a rent moratorium expired, indicating landlords can now start collecting past rents and begin the eviction process for millions of folks.

    “Renters are expected to be more impacted than homeowners from this recession given their susceptibility to the industries harder hit from the lockdowns,” Freddie said.

    Many renters make low wages and have low skilled jobs, primarily in service sectors like retail, hospitality, and travel. As we’ve highlighted, millions of jobs aren’t coming back, which will leave folks unemployed for an extended period, unable to make rent payments and service debt.

    As the recovery reverses, a fiscal cliff underway, and an eviction wave just beginning, the latest jobs report reveals initial and continuing jobless claims are now on the rise, signaling the labor market has been thrown into reverse. 

    International Financing Review (IFR) said, “falling rent collection, together with any pickup in evictions, may cause banks to pare lending to apartment owners to refinance and developers to build new multi-family properties.” 

    The ripple effect of renters skipping out on monthly payments has caused apartment building operators to also skip out on mortgage payments, resulting in a surge of multi-family property delinquencies among specific CMBS series. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Rising delinquencies in multi-family properties and hotels are pressuring CMBS series 9. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    When the cycle breaks, that is, the renter fails to pay the landlord, well the whole system implodes. The multi-family housing boom has been put on hold this year. Now, the government is working on a bailout for the CMBS industry. Also, the second round of stimulus and a rent moratorium extension could save the working-poor in the short run, but as it becomes increasingly clear, the ability for millions to pay rent has yet to be resolved. The crisis is far from over. 

  • Voting Fraud Is Real: The Electoral System Is Vulnerable
    Voting Fraud Is Real: The Electoral System Is Vulnerable

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/06/2020 – 21:05

    Authored by Philip Giraldi via The Strategic Cultuire Foundation,

    The United States national election is now only three months away and it should be expected that the out-and-out lies emanating from both parties will increase geometrically as the polling date nears. One of the more interesting claims regarding the election itself is the White House assertion that large scale voting by mail will permit fraud, so much so that the result of the voting will be unreliable or challenged. To be sure, it is not as if voter fraud is unknown in the United States. The victory of John F. Kennedy 1960 presidential election has often been credited to all the graveyards in Mayor Richard Daley’s Chicago voting to swing Illinois into the Democratic camp.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Democrats are insisting that voting by mail is perfectly safe and reliable, witness the use of absentee ballots for many years. The assertions by Democratic Party-affiliated voting officials in several states and also from friends on the federal level have been played in the media to confirm that fraud in elections has been insignificant recently. That may be true, up until now.

    The Democrats, of course, have an agenda. For reasons that are not altogether clear, they believe that voting by mail would benefit them primarily, so they are pushing hard for their supporters to register in their respective states and cast their ballots at the local mail box. Nevertheless, there should be some skepticism whenever a major American political party wants something. In this case, the Democrats are likely assuming that people at lower income levels who will most likely vote for them cannot be bothered to register and vote if it requires actually going somewhere to do it. They have spoken of “expansion of voting,” presumably to their benefit. The mail is a much easier option.

    A Fox News host has rejected the impelling logic behind the mail option, saying “Can’t we just have this one moment to vote for one candidate every four years, and show up and put a ballot in without licking an envelope or pressing on a stamp? If you can shop for food, if you can buy liquor, you can vote once every four years.”

    The fundamental problem with the arguments coming from both sides is that there is no national system in the United States for registering and voting. Elections are run at state level and the individual states have their own procedures. The actual ballots also differ from voting district to voting district. To determine what safeguards are actually built into the system is difficult as how electoral offices actually function is considered sensitive information by many, precisely because it might reveal vulnerabilities in the process.

    To determine how one might actually vote illegally, I reviewed the process required for registering and voting by mail in my own state of Virginia. In Virginia one can both register and vote without any human contact at all. The registration process can be accomplished by filling out an online form, which is linked here. Note particularly the following: the form requires one to check the box indicating U.S. citizenship. It then asks for name and address as well as social security number, date of birth and whether one has a criminal record or is otherwise disqualified to vote. You then have to sign and date the document and mail it off. Within ten days, you should receive a voter’s registration card for Virginia which you can present if you vote in person, though even that is not required.

    But also note the following: no documents have to presented to support the application, which means that all the information can be false. You can even opt out of providing a social security number by indicating that you have never been issued one, even though the form indicates that you must have one to be registered, and you can also submit a temporary address by claiming you are “homeless.” Even date of birth information is useless as the form does not ask where you were born, which is how birth records are filed by state and local governments. Ultimately, it is only the social security number that validates the document and that is what also appears on the Voter’s ID Card, but even that can be false or completely fabricated, as many illegal immigrant workers in the U.S. have discovered.

    In a state like Virginia, the actual mail-in ballot requires your signature and that of a witness, who can be anyone. That is also true in six other states. Thirty-one states only require your own signature while only three states require that the document be notarized, a good safeguard since it requires the voter to actually produce some documentation. Seven states require your additional signature on the ballot envelope and two states require that a photocopy of the voter ID accompany the ballot. In other words, the safeguards in the system vary from state to state but in most cases, fraud would be relatively easy.

    And then there is the issue of how the election commissions in the states will be overwhelmed by tens of thousands of mail-in ballots that they might be receiving in November. That overload would minimize whatever manual checking of names, addresses and social security numbers might otherwise take place. Jim Bovard has speculated how:

    “The American political system may be on the eve of its worst legitimacy crisis since the Civil War. Early warning signals indicate that many states could suffer catastrophic failures in counting votes in November… Because of the pandemic, many states are switching primarily to mail-in voting even though experiences with recent primaries were a disaster. In New York City, officials are still struggling to count mail-in ballots from the June primary. Up to 20% of ballots ‘were declared invalid before even being opened, based on mistakes with their exterior envelopes,’ the Washington Post noted, thanks largely to missing postmarks or signatures. In Wisconsin, more than 20,000 ‘primary ballots were thrown out because voters missed at least one line on the form, rendering them invalid.’ Some states are mailing ballots to all the names on the voting lists, providing thousands of dead people the chance to vote from the grave.”

    Add into the witch’s cauldron the continued use of easily hacked antiquated voting machines as well as confusing ballots in many districts, and the question of whether an election can even be run with expectations of a credible result becomes paramount. President Trump has several times claimed that the expected surge in mail-in voting could result in “the most corrupt vote in our nation’s history.” Trump is often wrong when he speaks or tweets spontaneously, but this time he just might be right.

  • NRA Slams "Baseless, Premeditated Attack" As NY AG Seeks To "Dismantle" Guns Rights Organization
    NRA Slams “Baseless, Premeditated Attack” As NY AG Seeks To “Dismantle” Guns Rights Organization

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/06/2020 – 20:55

    Update (1300ET): And the NRA responds…

    * * *

    Update (1235ET): Just as we anticipated…Trump has spoken out to slam the lawsuit as “a terrible thing”.

    • Trump: New York Lawsuit Against NRA ‘A Terrible Thing’
    • Trump: NRA Should Move to Texas
    • Trump: NRA Has Been ‘Decimated’ by Costly Legal Actions

    * * *

    Update (1140ET): James is starting off the hearing by detailing a state lawsuit against the NRA and seeking the dissolution of the pro-second amendment organization, one of several subjects she was expected to address today.

    James alleges the the organization violated non-profit laws by diverting “millions of dollars away from the charitable mission of the organization for personal use by senior leadership,” who awarded contracts that benefited friends and family. That would be a slam-dunk if she were going after politicians. But at a non-profit, things are more blurry.

    BBG published an update on the lawsuit almost immediately, suggesting that the financial news organization – owned by a former mayor of NYC – had the story under embargo ahead of time. Here’s a snippet from their reporting, which accuses NRA of “massive fraud”.

    New York is seeking to dissolve the National Rifle Associationas the state attorney general accused the gun rights group and four senior officials of engaging in a massive fraud against donors.

    A sprawling lawsuit filed Thursday in state court in Manhattan alleges the NRA diverted charitable donations for years to enrich the organization’s top executives in violation of laws governing nonprofits, New York Attorney General Letitia James said in a statement. The state is also demanding millions of dollars in restitution and penalties.

    The case may pose one of the biggest legal threats the NRA has faced since its founding in New York in 1871. The turmoil began with a power struggle last year between former NRA president Oliver North and longtime leader Wayne LaPierre, which led to allegations of self dealing. A subsequent state probe found wrongdoing blamed for more than $64 million in losses in the last three years alone, James said.

    “The NRA’s influence has been so powerful that the organization went unchecked for decades while top executives funneled millions into their own pockets,” James, a Democrat, said in the statement. “The NRA is fraught with fraud and abuse.”

    For those who aren’t familiar, this is the culmination of what Trump once called “an illegal investigation” by Cuomo and the AG, which stems from a power struggle that rocked the NRA last year.

    The news sent shares of gun makers lower.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The NRA must “get its act together quickly, stop the internal fighting, & get back to GREATNESS – FAST!” Trump tweeted at the time.

    We imagine he’ll be chiming in on Twitter about this new lawsuit any minute now.

    * * *

    New York Attorney General Letitia James is delivering a press briefing on Thursday where it’s widely suspected that she will share “bombshell” allegations about President Trump and his finances, after subpoenaing documents from Deutsche Bank.

    In recent days, stories about DB scrutinizing Trump’s former banker, and the Manhattan AG subpoenaing the bank over records pertaining to Trump, have stoked suspicions that something “big” might be coming.

    Will this briefing live up to the hype? We’re about to find out.

  • Walmart Is Turning Its Parking Lots Into Drive-In Movie Theaters For Its Customers
    Walmart Is Turning Its Parking Lots Into Drive-In Movie Theaters For Its Customers

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/06/2020 – 20:45

    In an announcement that will certainly come as welcome news for the homeless and unemployed already living in their cars in Walmart parking lots, the retailer said yesterday that effective August 14, it is going to be kicking off the “Walmart Drive-in movie theater experience”. 

    The retailer’s “first ever drive-in” movie theater will debut at 160 different Walmart stores across the country starting this month in a partnership with the Tribeca Film Festival. Because showing Disney movies to overweight Walmart customers eating McDonald’s in their Dodge pickup trucks is basically synonymous with the elite crowds that attend the Tribeca Film Festival. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Better yet, you know the drive-ins will attract an elite crowd, because Walmart is offering them as “free to Walmart customers”. 

    Janey Whiteside, Walmart’s chief customer officer, said: “We recognize the challenges our customers and their families have faced over the last few months, and we wanted to create an experience where they could come together safely to create new memories. The Walmart Drive-in is one small way we’re supporting the communities we serve.”

    The drive-ins will feature filmmakers and surprise guests making appearances at “select showings”, the retailer says. The company says the films will include:

    • “Inspiring sports stories” like Friday Night Lights, The Karate Kid and Space Jam
    • “Blockbuster franchises” including Black Panther, Pokémon Detective Pikachu, The Lego Batman Movie, Spider-ManTM: Into The Spider-Verse, Spy Kids, Teen Titans GO! To the Movies and Wonder Woman
    • “Out-of-this-world stories” like E.T. the Extra-Terrestrial, Ghostbusters and Men in BlackTM: International
    • “Nostalgic favorites” including Back to the Future, Beetlejuice, The Goonies and The Wizard of Oz
    • “Inspiring true stories” from Dolphin Tale to Selena
    • “Animated features every member of the family can enjoy” like CarsThe Iron Giant, The Lego Movie and Madagascar
    • Ahead of each feature presentation, audiences will screen one of a number of short films, including Bilby, Bird Karma, Brooklyn BreezeCROW: The LegendFire in Cardboard CityINVASION!, Looney Tunes’ Boo! Appetweet and Marooned

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Drew Barrymore will serve as virtual host for all events, welcoming guests to a fun family night experience. She will also make a surprise in-person appearance at one location. Families will be also be treated to surprise virtual or in-person appearances from Peter Berg, Jennifer Garner, LeBron James and Chrissy Metz at select showings,” the company said.

    You can go to TheWalmartDriveIn.com for information on showings. 

  • John Cleese: Woke People Have "Zero Sense Of Humour"; They're Killing Comedy
    John Cleese: Woke People Have “Zero Sense Of Humour”; They’re Killing Comedy

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/06/2020 – 20:25

    Authored by Steve Watson via Summit News,

    Legendary British comedian John Cleese has hit out at permanently offended woke people, insisting that they have no sense of humour and are contributing to the death of comedy.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In an appearance on the Daily Beast’s The Last Laugh Podcast, Cleese noted that woke people simply do not understand the intricacies of comedy.

    “There’s plenty of people who are PC now who have absolutely zero sense of humour. I would love to debate, in a friendly way, a couple of ‘woke’ people in front of an audience. And I think the first thing I would say is, please tell me a good ‘woke’ joke,” Cleese urged.

    “What they don’t understand is that there’s two types of teasing,” Cleese continued, noting that “There’s really nasty teasing, which is horrible, and we shouldn’t do it, full stop. But the other type of teasing is affectionate. You can tease people hugely affectionately and it’s a bonding mechanism.”

    “All humour is critical. You cannot get laughs out of perfect human beings,” Cleese continued, adding that “If you’ve got someone up on the screen who is perfect, intelligent and kind and flexible and a good person, there’s nothing funny about that. So we only laugh at people’s frailties, but that’s not cruel. You can laugh at people’s frailties in very funny and generous ways.”

    Cleese was recently at the centre of a ‘woke’ storm when his Fawlty Towers show, made some 40 years ago was temporarily canceled after complaints that it featured a ‘racist’ character.

    Cleese called the BBC “cowardly and gutless” for removing an episode of the show, pointing out that the racist character in question was the target of ridicule in the show.

    Cleese has previously warned that political correctness will lead to the death of comedy, noting that “If you start to say we mustn’t, we mustn’t criticize or offend them then humor is gone. With humor goes a sense of proportion. And then as far as I’m concerned you’re living in 1984.”

    Cleese has been acutely aware of the threat cancel culture poses for decades:

    After daring to question the diversity overlords, Cleese also recently found himself being labeled a ‘racist’:

    His staunch refusal to deviate from his views has made Cleese the target of harassment.

  • Farmageddon Continues As Bankruptcies Rise 8% 
    Farmageddon Continues As Bankruptcies Rise 8% 

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/06/2020 – 20:05

    The American Farm Bureau Federation (AFBF) released a new report Tuesday (Aug. 4) showing farm bankruptcies continue to increase. 

    AFBF found bankruptcies rose 8% over the last 12 months (from June 2019 to June 2020), with 580 filings. The Midwest, Northwest, and Southeast recorded the most bankruptcies, representing 80% of all filings across the US. Wisconsin was the epicenter for filings, followed by Nebraska, Georgia, and Minnesota.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Filings slowed in 1H20 partly because of financial assistance provided by the Coronavirus Aid, Relief & Economic Security (CARES) Act, including direct payments to farmers via the Coronavirus Food Assistance Program (CFAP), along with Paycheck Protection Program (PPP) loans. 

    Farmers are on government life-support. 

    AFBF’s President Zippy Duvall said the new rounds of farm aid helped cushion farmers from the economic impact of the virus-induced recession. 

    AFBF’s Chief Economist John Newton said CARES Act assistance was only a “bandage,” warning filings could increase if aid programs are not continued. 

    AFBF said, “approximately 60% of farm bankruptcies have been completed successfully – the highest successful percentage of all the reorganization chapters.” 

    Even before the virus pandemic, a global farm glut pressured agricultural prices. Farm incomes imploded, and bankruptcies began to increase in 2016. President Trump then unleashed a trade war against China, which in itself forced Chinese buyers to abandon US markets for South American ones. 

    Even with a phase one trade deal, China continues to abandon US markets. We noted earlier this week that purchases are significantly lagging

    Missouri’s Food and Agricultural Policy Research Institute expects the Trump administration to dish out a record $33 billion in aid payments to farmers this year. What this all means is that farmers are on government life-support. 

  • Water Wars And America's Fate
    Water Wars And America’s Fate

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/06/2020 – 19:45

    Authored by Martin Sieff via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    India versus China, Egypt versus Ethiopia, Israel versus the Palestinians – the Water Wars are already here in the US also, yet American and European policymakers remain disastrously blind to them.

    This is certain to have catastrophic consequences for the wealthy, arrogant and ludicrously complacent elites of the West.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The problem is particularly acute in the United States: Indeed, it has been growing for half a century but has reached such enormous dimensions in the 21st century that neocon imperialist Republican, neoliberal imperialist Democratic and Green policymakers are all oblivious to it.

    How can this be? It is because all three sets of ideologues and opinion-shapers overwhelmingly live on the East and West Coasts of the United States. In both areas, water has always been plentiful and climate mild.

    These regional prejudices go back a very long way: They explain why Theodore Roosevelt practiced arrogant elitist imperialism against not only the unfortunate peoples of Central America and Northeast Asia during his fateful presidency but also against the inhabitants of his own country’s Heartland. For it was Roosevelt who initiated the bizarre practice of cutting off vast quantities of prime land across the nation from human usage and declaring it National Parks, worshipped blindly by all liberals as well Greens to this day.

    Theodore Roosevelt’s policies were followed by later presidents, most notably Ronald Reagan.

    So today, an amazing 95 percent of the population of the United States remains concentrated on only seven percent of its land area in truly tiny concentrated suburban bubbles around a handful of great cities. Yet more than twice that area is cut off from any productive use by the American population because it is designated as National Parks.

    However, these empty places are also extremely dangerous ones. They swarm with predators, human as well as animal: Thousands of people, especially young campers disappear in them every year. It is virtually impossible to get reliable statistics on this from the federal government which has a vested interest in hiding its own criminal incompetence and failure to portect its own people.

    At the very least, usually unarmed, romantic suburbanites who dream about the nurturing joys of Nature are at a complete loss on how to survive in the wild when they get lost and wander even a few hundred yards away from major roads.

    Yet the Republican hegemony across the Heartland United States has been based on the hatred of scores of millions of people cut off from key resources by these romantic and arrogant imperialist policies.

    This conflict indeed decided the 2016 U.S. presidential election. It explains why all the Heartland states including many with generations-long “blue” Democratic traditions unexpectedly swung “red” behind Donald Trump. The ineffably and reliably stupid Democratic candidate Hillary Clinton made the conflict far worse with her “war” on coal as a fuel. (U.S. policymakers have a childish and disgusting habit of calling all non violent conflicts “war” making them uniquely inept at the real thing).

    Because the population of the United States is so urban and concentrated, the Heartland outside major urban areas is now less densely populated, incredibly than it was 200 years ago when land hungry settlers were spreading across it like human locusts.

    This means that the great populations concentrated in Los Angeles, New York City, Chicago, San Francisco and Miami have no idea of the true environmental realities that exist behind their romantic Green policy dreams. They have no sense of how much fresh water they consume or how limited its supply always was, even before Global Climate Change started to dramatically shrink the water tables.

    This development is long term very good news for Russia and Canada since it is already freeing up enormous areas of land and resources undreamed of in their national histories. But it means that American neo-imperialist dreamers waste their military resources on crazy misadventures from Afghanistan to Ukraine when they should really be deploying them to safeguard the water resources of New York City in the Appalachian Mountains or those of Los Angeles from the water-hungry Western states.

    It also means water conflicts around the world are not fashionable enough for the self-imagined geniuses of the Washington think tanks and media platforms to pay any serious attention to. They would far rather lecture Russia (which handles its water resources extremely well) or China (which faces enormous challenges from the changing climate, and whose leaders now fully recognize the problem) then face the problems in their own backyard.

    So when it comes to mediating the conflicts between India and China over the rapidly shrinking glaciers and fresh water reserves of the Himalaya watershed, or the remorseless escalating conflict between Ethiopia (not to be underestimated) and Egypt (which has had zero success over the past 200 years in projecting its own military power that far south up the Nile River), Washington policymakers do not have a clue.

    The wars of water are already with U.S.: And they are likely to erupt with the most unexpected virulence in the United States first.

    The now likely victory of Democrat Joe Biden in this November’s U.S. presidential election will rip civic bonds apart over this and related issues, though as usual Russia and China will be scapegoated for the inept failures of Washington policymakers to anticipate or deal with the crisis.

    Fresh water is the ultimate essential resource for the aquatic mammal known as the human race: Loss of it will be fatal for hundreds of millions. For the American people, those Inconvenient Facts are about to impact – hard.

  • SEC Enforcement Co-Director Steven Peikin To Abruptly Leave Agency On August 14
    SEC Enforcement Co-Director Steven Peikin To Abruptly Leave Agency On August 14

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/06/2020 – 19:25

    It has been several weeks since Elon Musk blatantly taunted the Securities and Exchange Commission by telling them to “s*** his c***”. As a result, what has happened since then?

    A) A just application of the law has held Musk accountable for his previous actions.

    B) A stern warning was issued to Tesla’s Board of Directors to get Musk under control. 

    C) A co-director of the agency’s enforcement division picks up and leaves the agency days after Jay Clayton kisses Musk’s ass live on CNBC by saying he has “no comment” about Musk’s remarks. 

    If you guessed option “C”, you’re right! 

    It was announced yesterday that co-director of enforcement at the SEC, Steven Peikin, is leaving the agency in relatively abrupt fashion on August 14. He is leaving after more than 3 years in his role, which co-director Stephanie Avakian will now absolve, according to an SEC statement. 

    Peikin said: “Serving as Co-Director of the Division of Enforcement has been an incredible honor, and I am immensely grateful to Chairman Clayton for his confidence in me, for giving me the opportunity to again serve the public, and for his unwavering support of vigorous enforcement of the federal securities laws.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    He continued: “I am tremendously proud of the accomplishments of the women and men of the Division of Enforcement, whose knowledge, expertise, and dedication to protecting investors and preserving market integrity inspired and impressed me every day.  It has been a privilege to serve among them.”

    During his tenure, the agency says over $13.5 billion in disgorgement and penalties was obtained by the agency. Peikin was formerly a managing partner at Sullivan & Cromwell.

    SEC Chairman Jay Clayton praised Peikin in a press release: “Their investor-first efforts have resulted in thousands of actions that have righted wrongs and, more importantly, both returned illicit gains to harmed investors and eliminated improper fees, providing lasting savings for years to come.”

    We took a stab at writing a more accurate statement, which might sound something like: “Our team has allowed frauds to operate unfettered until such time as either the fraud implodes or it is completely obvious to the public, at which point we try to save our reputation by collecting perfunctory and menial fees to keep our agency’s lights on while expensive lawyers, paid for with money obtained through fraud, impose their will on us for immaterial settlements with their clients.” 

    The SEC didn’t comment on Peikin’s future plans, nor did Peikin comment beyond his official statement to the SEC. We wonder if he knows there’s a General Counsel position available at Tesla…

  • Senate Bill To Curb Invasive Facial Recognition Software After Rite Aid Deployed In 200 Stores
    Senate Bill To Curb Invasive Facial Recognition Software After Rite Aid Deployed In 200 Stores

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/06/2020 – 19:05

    Authored by Julia Conley via CommonDreams.org,

    New legislation put forward by Sens. Jeff Merkley and Bernie Sanders on Tuesday would curb the use of facial recognition software by corporations and help to slow the spread of “abusive” surveillance, according to leading privacy advocates.

    Similar to Illinois’ Biometric Information Privacy Act, which has been in place since 2008, the Merkley-Sanders legislation would bar corporations from using facial recognition without the knowledge and explicit affirmative consent of customers

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Stock photo, Getty Images

    “Do we really want to live under constant surveillance by unaccountable corporations? I don’t. We cannot allow Orwellian facial recognition technology to continue to violate the privacy and civil liberties of the American people,” Sanders told Business Insider Tuesday.

    The Illinois law has resulted in $650 million in fines for Facebook over its use of facial recognition-enabled tagging in the state, and was cited by the ACLU in May when the group sued Clearview AI over its collection and storing of the data of residents without their knowledge of consent.

    The digital rights group Fight for the Future, which launched its nationwide campaign demanding a federal ban on all facial recognition technology last year, expressed support for the National Biometric Information Privacy Act even though it falls short of an outright ban.

    “We believe most private and corporate uses of facial recognition should be banned entirely, but this new legislation will play an important role in slowing down the unfettered creep of this technology into our daily lives, giving us time to have a meaningful debate about whether artificial intelligence powered surveillance systems should be used at all all in a free and open society,” Evan Greer, deputy director of Fight for the Future, said in a statement. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Merkley and Sanders introduced the legislation days after Reuters reported that the Rite-Aid drugstore chain has spied on customers in about 200 stores across the U.S. using facial recognition over the past eight years. Many of the stores equipped with the technology, without the knowledge of consumers, are in low-income, largely-minority neighborhoods. 

    Facial recognition has been shown to disproportionately misidentify people of color, according to a landmark federal study published last year. 

    “Right now in most states in the U.S., it would be totally legal for a big box store to set up surveillance cameras, scan the faces of everyone entering the store and compare them to a public mugshot database,” said Greer. “That would be enormously invasive, and exacerbate existing forms of discrimination. If this legislation passes, that sort of creepy corporate surveillance would be impossible, because the store would have to obtain the affirmative consent of every customer before scanning their face.”

    Under Merkley and Sanders’ legislation, companies would need consent to gather biometric data including retina or iris scans, voiceprints, faceprints including those derived from a photograph, fingerprints or palm prints, and any “uniquely identifying information based on the characteristics of an individual’s gait or other immutable characteristic of an individual.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Rite Aid store is shown in downtown Los Angeles, via Reuters.

    “We can’t let companies scoop up or profit from people’s faces and fingerprints without their consent,” Merkley told Recode. “We have to fight against a ‘big brother’ surveillance state that eradicates our privacy and our control of our own information, be it a threat from the government or from private companies.” 

    Fight for the Future, which has also fought the use of facial recognition by law enforcement and other government agencies, warned that Americans should be just as concerned about the use of the technology by private companies

    “From targeting people with creepy and discriminatory advertisements based on their face to harvesting and selling our sensitive biometric data, there are so many ways corporations can abuse our rights with facial recognition,” said Greer.

    “Unless we organize to stop it, the surveillance dystopia of our nightmares may be offered up by corporations in the name of convenience, rather than imposed by an authoritarian government.”

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 6th August 2020

  • War Drums Beat In The Middle East After Thousands Of Casualties In Beirut Explosion
    War Drums Beat In The Middle East After Thousands Of Casualties In Beirut Explosion

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/06/2020 – 02:50

    Submitted by SouthFront

    On the evening of August 4th, a massive explosion rocked the port of the Lebanese capital of Beirut, causing devastating damage and leaving thousands of casualties. The explosion sent a shockwave across the city and blew out windows up to 10 kilometers away. It was felt as far away as Cyprus in the Mediterranean Sea.

    As of the morning of August 5th, the number of reported fatalities exceeded 100, with at least 4,000 people reported  injured. At least 48 staff members of the United Nations and 27 members of their families were among the injured. 10 rescuers involved in the operation to contain the damage and to help people have been reported killed.

    Initial reports suggested that the explosion may have been caused by an incident in the firework storage area. However, later, Lebanon’s Prime Minister Hassan Diab said that 2,750 metric tons of ammonium nitrate, which is typically used as an agricultural fertilizer, had been stored for six years at a port warehouse without proper safety measures, “endangering the safety of citizens.”

    This statement was backed by General Security chief Abbas Ibrahim, who said a “highly explosive material” had been confiscated years earlier and stored in the warehouse, just minutes’ walk from Beirut’s shopping and nightlife districts.

    It is still unclear what caused the explosion itself thus laying the ground for various speculations in mainstream media outlets and on social media platforms. In particular, reports suggested that a number of Hezbollah members were in the port area at the moment of the explosion. This immediately caused reports that this may have been a result of some Israeli attack, for example sabotage actions or a somehow unnoticed missile strike, and that the site of the explosion was in fact a part of the Hezbollah military infrastructure.

    The Israeli Defense Forces did not officially comment on these speculations. Israeli media, which are often eager to promote supposed Israeli military victories, claimed that Israeli forces did not attack Beirut. In their turn, Hezbollah denounced reports that the explosion happened on one of their sites saying that there was no Israeli attack on August 4.

    Nonetheless, it seems that the US leadership has a quite different point of view. Commenting on the situation after a meeting with military officials, President Donald Trump claimed that the incident was an attack. “They seem to think it was an attack. It was a bomb of some kind,” Trump said.

    Whatever the real cause of the tragedy turns out to be, the Beirut explosions have already fueled tensions in the region. And despite comments by Hezbollah and Israeli media that it was not a military incident, the warring sides are actively accusing each other. Comments by the US President about a supposed attack on the Beirut port do not make the situation any easier.

    Taking into account the recent series of military incidents on the Israeli-Lebanese contact line, and in the Israeli-occupied area of the Golan Heights, any new border provocation may easily lead to a larger escalation. The years of war propaganda and military confrontations together with increased tension within Israeli and Lebanese society respectively have already created conditions in which a further, even small, military incident may appear to be enough to provoke a larger war in the region. This large war is in no interest of Tel Aviv or Hezbollah because it will obviously have a devastating impact on both Israel and Lebanon. In this light, it is especially interesting that the Trump administration is making statements that would contribute to this scenario. There is a chance that in a time of a deepening social and political crisis in the US on top of a complicated economic situation in the runup to the next US Presidential election, some hotheads may believe that a new, theoretically ‘victorious’ war in the Middle East, could help them to remain in power.

  • UK Gives Town Councils Power To Bulldoze 'Contaminated' Homes To Contain Outbreak
    UK Gives Town Councils Power To Bulldoze ‘Contaminated’ Homes To Contain Outbreak

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/06/2020 – 02:00

    Britons were shocked and angered this week when an internal government guide meant to inform local councils and town authorities on possible strategies in dealing with rising coronavirus cases throughout the country explored scenarios wherein demolition of ‘contaminated’ homes would be allowed

    It’s unclear if the UK guide, called Covid-19 Contain Framework and produced by the Department of Health and Social Care, was intended to gain broad public circulation, given it contains what’s widely seen as oppressive overkill measures that are absolutely Orwellian and downright tyrannical in terms of the power assumed by local councils.

    Here’s the headline in The Telegraph that went viral late in the day Tuesday: Councils can demolish contaminated buildings under powers to stop second coronavirus wave.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Illustrative file image, via Inside Edition

    This as London fears greater spread from a second wave and hopes to avoid another nationwide lock down. The idea behind the government strategy is that by giving local councils unprecedented powers to curb local spread, more sweeping national measures could be avoided. 

    But citizens are not impressed, given ‘demolition orders’ could theoretically be issued for the very roofs over people’s heads. The Telegraph report detailed shockingly of the government document:

    Local authorities will be able to order the demolition of buildings at the centre of coronavirus outbreaks under draconian powers to contain a potential second wave.

    Cars, buses, trains and aeroplanes could also be destroyed subject to the approval of magistrates.

    The report flatly states that even retirement or nursing homes and private residences could be “bulldozed” if such interventions are deemed necessary.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The report continues by quoting a passage that seems straight out of some banana republic dictatorship, which it appears the UK is on its way toward becoming (with laws like this):

    The document, published by the Department of Health and Social Care, advises councils that, under the Public Health (Control of Disease) Act 1984, they can apply to a magistrate “to impose restrictions or requirements to close contaminated premises; close public spaces in the area of the local authority; detain a conveyance or movable structure; disinfect or decontaminate premises; or order that a building, conveyance or structure be destroyed“.

    It raises the possibility that care homes, factories, offices or even private homes could be bulldozed as a last resort if the virus starts to run out of control, although such measures have not been considered necessary during the outbreak.

    We wonder, with such immense decision-making authority in the hands of local councils, who will provide checks and balances over those local bodies? 

    Bulldozers ready to roll through living rooms? It appears that London literally foresees that as a “legitimate” scenario given reference to the Public Health (Control of Disease) Act 1984, and applied within the context of the COVID-19 pandemic.

    Currently the UK has over 300,000 confirmed COVID-19 cases, including more than 46,000 deaths. A moderate increase in infections has been observed over the past days, further worrying officials and the public that the next round of drastic lock-down measures are in store.

    But hopefully no one’s house is getting bulldozed anytime soon. 

  • Antifa Protesters Sue Seattle Over 'Forced' Armor Upgrades
    Antifa Protesters Sue Seattle Over ‘Forced’ Armor Upgrades

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/05/2020 – 23:30

    A lawsuit has been filed against the city of Seattle by several protesters, who claim that the Seattle Police Department’s “indiscriminate” us of chemical and less-lethal crowd control measures forced them to buy “expensive” protective gear in order to withstand the tactical response to their violent resistance, according to KIRO7.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Oakland, CA Antifa members John Cookenboo and Vincent Yochelson aren’t doing much better…

    “Because the Seattle Police Department has acted above and outside the law in dispensing its unbridled force, and the City has failed to prevent same, the government effect is to establish a de facto protest tax,” reads the legal complaint, filed Monday. “Individual protesters subjected to SPD’s unabated and indiscriminate violence now must purchase cost-prohibitive gear to withstand munitions – even when peacefully protesting – as a condition to exercising their right to free speech and peaceable assembly.”

    The suit, filed on behalf of five protesters who attended the July 25 protest on Capitol Hill that police later declared a riot, seeks an order from a judge to stop the city from using controversial crowd control tactics on protesters, including blast balls and pepper spray.

    It’s the latest lawsuit against the city of Seattle for its handling of protests that have continued in the wake of George Floyd’s killing. In response to a separate case related to these tactics, involving Black Lives Matter Seattle-King County, the city has argued officers’ actions were directed at individuals and were not indiscriminate. –KIRO7

    “But the continued misuse of war munitions by SPD against civilians turns the streets – a public forum and site of protest – into a pay-to-protest racket where only a privileged few who are wealthy enough or popular enough to crowdsource funds to purchase gear akin to that used by the police department they fund can truly be in the streets,” the lawsuit continues.

    The Seattle City Attorney’s Office told KIRO7 that they would be looking into the claims, adding “The relief these plaintiffs seek is related to recent orders issued by Judge Robart and Judge Jones, so we’ll be filing a Notice of Related Cases with the court.”

    Perhaps they need to speak with thir Comrades to the South and borrow some shields and whatnot:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

  • US Cruise Operators Halt Voyages Until Oct. 31 After 2 Ships Hit By Outbreaks Amid Restart
    US Cruise Operators Halt Voyages Until Oct. 31 After 2 Ships Hit By Outbreaks Amid Restart

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/05/2020 – 23:00

    No doubt among the hardest hit industries globally has remained cruise ships. As late as May and June there were still cruise ships essentially stranded as ports refused them entry while outbreaks on board raged among passengers and crew.

    Even as some companies have tepidly tried to resume operations in the past weeks, the moment a single COVID-19 case appears on board, all operations have had to be suspended as we noted days ago with the Amundsen.

    “One of the first cruise ships to resume overnight sailing in U.S. waters since the coronavirus shut down the cruise industry earlier this year has reported one case of COVID-19 on board,” USA Today reports Wednesday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It happened on board UnCruise Adventures’ Wilderness Adventurer ship, and all aboard have been ordered to remain in their rooms on ship “until the State of Alaska deems it safe for them to return home,” according to an alert on the cruise line’s website.

    And then there’s this ongoing disaster first reported Monday:

    At least 41 passengers and crew on a Norwegian cruise ship have tested positive for Covid-19, officials say.

    Hundreds more passengers who travelled on the MS Roald Amundsen are in quarantine and awaiting test results, the company that owns the ship said.

    The ship, which belongs to the Norwegian firm Hurtigruten, docked in the port of Tromso in northern Norway on Friday.

    That number has since grown, and is expended to rise as more tests come back in.

    The fact that already two ships have been hit by separate outbreaks a mere few weeks after the industry attempted to restart has resulted in US cruise operators, through the Cruise Lines International Association (CLIA), jointly agreeing to suspend all ocean voyages with passengers until at least October 31.

    Reuters reports of the major Wednesday announcement:

    The Cruise Lines International Association said its members, which include the three biggest U.S. cruise operators Carnival Corp, Norwegian Cruise Line Holdings Ltd and Royal Caribbean Group, would revisit a possible further extension on or before Sept. 30.

    The U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) has a no-sail order for all cruise ships through next month’s end.

    The cruise industry has been among the worst hit by the pandemic, with ships in Japan, Australia and California making headlines for the spread coronavirus cases onboard.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “This is a difficult decision as we recognize the crushing impact that this pandemic has had on our community and every other industry,” CLIA said. “CLIA cruise line members will continue to monitor the situation with the understanding that we will revisit a possible further extension,” the statement said. “At the same time, should conditions in the U.S. change and it becomes possible to consider short, modified sailings, we would consider an earlier restart.” 

    Norway and some other European countries have also taken steps to stop or at least limit cruise ships from disembarking temporarily.

    While the airline industry has also suffered major slowdowns and setbacks, passenger airplanes have remained largely immune from the types of clearly traceable outbreaks that have devastated the cruise ship industry. 

    Many speculate that its not only the long term close quarters nature of a cruise ship, including buffets, tight hallways, and elevators, but also possibly the common ventilation systems aboard. 

  • How Central Banks Made The COVID Panic Worse
    How Central Banks Made The COVID Panic Worse

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/05/2020 – 22:35

    By Kristoffer Mousten Hansen of Mises,org

    Historical events are complex phenomena, and monocausal explanations are therefore by definition wrong when explaining history. Many factors go into explaining why people and the world’s governments reacted as they did to the coronavirus. It is, however, my contention that examining the inflationary policies pursued by central banks and governments are fundamental to understanding how the current corona hysteria developed.

    Calling it hysteria may sound harsh. When the coronavirus first started to draw attention back in February, and when most Western countries instituted extremely restrictive measures in March, one could make a plausible argument that the world was dealing with an unknown and seemingly catastrophic disease and that therefore extreme measures were justified. To be sure, this does not mean that the measures implemented were in any way effective, nor that the sacrifices imposed were morally justified; but there was at least an argument to be made.

    At this point in time, however, the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) has repeatedly cut the COVID-19 fatality rate, and it is now comparable to a bad year of the seasonal flu (see the useful aggregation of studies and reports by Swiss Propaganda Research). The glaring question therefore is: Why do governments across the West act as if they were still dealing with an unprecedented threat? It is no good to simply reply that what politicians really want is power and that they are just using coronavirus as an excuse for extending government control. While a plausible claim, it does not explain why vast majorities in most countries support whatever policies their rulers have thought good. Given the extreme restrictions placed on social and economic life and the mendacious, ever shifting narrative used to justify them, one would think that there would be widespread opposition after four months. So why is there practically none?

    Inflation in the Age of Corona

    We can better understand this strange phenomenon if we consider the inflationary policies pursued by central banks across the world. I’ll here cleave to the old definition of the term inflation and the one still favored by Austrian school economists: an increase in the quantity of money. The rise in prices which is commonly referred to as inflation is simply the effect of such an increase. While the complexities of modern central banking can sometimes obscure the realities of the process, there can be no doubt that the last couple of months have seen very high levels of inflation.

    Modern central banks are no longer content with the classic role of lender of last resort. As the financial system has evolved, central banks have assumed the role of market maker of last resort—that is, they have either implicitly or explicitly assumed the responsibility of making sure that there is always a buyer for financial assets—and first of all government bonds. Thus the Federal Reserve’s balance sheet has ballooned from just over $4 trillion at the beginning of March to now just below $7 trillion; the Bank of England’s has increased from about £580 billion in March to about £780 billion; and the European Central Bank has increased its holdings from about €4.6 trillion to about €6.3 trillion. The balance sheets of the largest central banks thus expanded by between 35 and 75 percent in about five months.

    Inflated central bank balance sheets suggest inflation is coming, but actual inflation of the money supply naturally lags behind, since central bank purchases of bonds and securities do not necessarily result in an immediate expansion of the stock of money. The American money stock (measured by the monetary aggregate M2) grew from $15.5 trillion to $18.4 trillion (March–July 13), the British one from £2.45 trillion to about £2.67 trillion (January–May) and the euro area money stock from €12.4 trillion to almost €13.2 trillion (January–June). The annualized rates of inflation in the major monetary areas during the corona episode is then between about 13 (eurozone) and about 50 (USA) percent, well above the norm.1 If we look at the Austrian, “true” measure of the money supply (TMS) for the United States, we see a similar picture, as the TMS in June grew 34.5 percent year over year (YOY).

    The Effects of the Present Inflation

    Inflation is not an act of God; it is the outcome of a determined policy on the part of governments and central banks. Such a policy has both long-run and short-run effects, which brings us to the first and most obvious way in which inflation has fueled corona hysteria: by essentially putting freshly printed money at the disposal of governments, these latter have been able to first shut down their countries and then pose as saviors as they distributed largesse to workers and businesses. The states have often reimbursed the costs of furloughing employees, either directly or through (sometimes forgivable) loans to companies, or they have distributed generous unemployment benefits to the workers. This, and not any economic collapse, is the story behind the unprecedented spike in unemployment claims in the United States. The central bank has also created facilities to lend to municipal governments and the Main Street Lending Program to “support lending to small and medium-sized businesses and nonprofit organizations that were in sound financial condition before the onset of the COVID-19 pandemic.”

    The effect of these programs and policies and others like them in other countries has been to mitigate the direct impact of government-imposed shutdowns. Businesses may have no revenues, but government aid and loans allow them to meet their contractual payments; workers may be unemployed, but generous unemployment subsidies allow them to maintain themselves comfortably; government support of furloughing schemes hides the true extent of unemployment caused by the shutdowns. And all this seemingly at no cost, since no one notices the inevitable dilution of the purchasing power of the monetary unit.

    In the absence of these inflationary policies, the consequences of the shutdown would be much more immediately apparent. Workers would have to spend out of their saved cash and liquidate their savings, while businesses earning no revenues would start to default on their contractual payments. A drastic fall in the prices of real and financial assets would have resulted. The pressure to end the restrictions would have been much stronger. Instead, it looks to most people as if they can go on at their old standard of living indefinitely—or at least as long as they continue to receive their government checks. The economic effects of the shutdown are still the same, however: dislocation of the production structure and capital consumption on a vast scale, but these have been hidden—papered over by inflation and government support.

    To the individual business owner and worker, the economic reality is hidden. Inflation leads to a fundamental disconnect with reality. Paul Cantor has previously described “the web of illusions endemic to the era of paper money” and how inflation destroys people’s sense of reality.2 In our case, inflationary monetary policy has hidden the costs of engaging in pandemic hysteria, and hence people do not—indeed, cannot—take account of economic realities when assessing the coronavirus and the shutdowns. Governments at all levels can continue to pose as saviors, inventing new mandates and restrictions to combat the nonexistent threat. Germophobes and busybodies can obsess over other people trying to go about their normal lives, since both the costs to them personally and to society as a whole are completely hidden. How many Karens would have the time to boss peaceful citizens around if they had to actually work to earn a living?

    Eventually and pretty quickly, these policies will result in price inflation and a hollowing out of the standard of living. Not only has production been severely restricted, as seen in the drastic fall in US GDP figures; insofar as the newly printed money is used on unemployment compensation in different forms, it will quickly reach normal consumers and be spent on consumer goods. If the programs go on much longer, consumer price inflation, as a result of the fiat money inflation, cannot be far off. Once that happens, only increased rates of inflation can keep the programs going—for a time.

    The Effects of the Inflationary System

    The effects of the inflationary system as such are much more far-reaching than economic dislocation and destruction, however. Fiat money produced out of thin air by central bankers leads to a long-run change in social attitudes and personal character. Joseph Salerno in a stimulating paper discusses how hyperinflation leads to the destruction of personality,3 and following Guido Hülsmann,4

     

     I would argue that fiat inflation entails the erosion of culture and character. This is perhaps most fully in evidence in Japan, where people have suffered under artificially low interest rates for decades. What are some of the consequences of an inflationary fiat standard and the culture it brings about, and what is the connection to the corona crisis? There is first of all a change in time preferences, as inflation leads to repressed interest rates and hence less incentive to save and invest. People’s time horizons change, as they increasingly discount long-run value creation and instead focus on present enjoyments and short-run yields. The changing role of central banks only intensifies this development. Instead of “lenders of last resort,” central banks are now “market makers of last resort.” That is to say, stock markets and bond prices cannot be allowed to fall, and it is the role of the banks to make sure they don’t. As a consequence, investors increasingly turn to the pursuit of short-run yields.

    This change in time preference has effects beyond the market. Since a premium is placed on short-term thinking in market affairs, naturally people transfer the same attitude to their nonmarket pursuits. Present benefits and present dangers are both emphasized at the expense of future costs and benefits, respectively. It is not hard to see the connection to the virus: since there is a possibility that the virus may potentially be very dangerous, people get frightened and act to make the fear go away. No matter the future consequences of their actions, the present danger of the virus trumps all.

    Closely connected to this change in time preferences is a skewed perception of reality. Inflation alters what constitutes successful action, since it is increasingly no longer productive endeavors but closeness to the source of inflation that determines the individual’s success in life. Since the ability of the central banks to create paper wealth seems virtually boundless, naturally people come to have unrealistic expectations of what is possible. Of course we can have a shutdown. We’ll have a central bank–fueled “v-shaped” recovery once it’s over. Of course governments can and should do whatever it takes to protect us from the virus. They can just finance spending with paper money for however long it takes. Whatever costs there are to these courses of action are hidden or far in the future.

    Conclusion

    There are many reasons for the corona crisis and the present almost total government control of the economy and society. But if we want to understand why states across the Western world have met virtually no resistance in their quest for power, we need to understand the role of inflation in enabling governments: directly through hiding the real costs and pain of the shutdowns, but also more fundamentally by distorting culture and personal character.

    • 1. Trading Economics, www.tradingeconomics.com; Federal Reserve Bank of St. Louis, FRED, www.fred.stlouisfed.org.
    • 2. Paul A. Cantor, “Hyperinflation and Hyperreality: Thomas Mann in Light of Austrian Economics,” Review of Austrian Economics 7, no. 1 (1994): 3–29.
    • 3. Joseph T. Salerno, “Hyperinflation and the Destruction of Human Personality,” Studia humana 2, no. 1 (2013): 15–27.
    • 4. Jörg Guido Hülsmann, “Cultural Consequences of Monetary Interventions,” Journal des économistes et des études humaines 22, no. 1 (2016).​

  • Study Finds 98 "Long-Term" COVID-19 Symptoms Including Baldness
    Study Finds 98 “Long-Term” COVID-19 Symptoms Including Baldness

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/05/2020 – 22:10

    Epidemiologists readily admit that viruses are chock full of puzzles. And COVID-19 is no exception. Earlier today, Dr. Fauci himself lamented the fact that nearly half of those who get the virus don’t see symptoms, which is one reason why young people have been so reckless, purportedly helping to spread the virus.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And in a study published recently by the University of Indiana School of Medicine happened on a surprising finding: those who suffer from long-term symptoms of the coronavirus – a group that the researchers nicknamed “long haulers” after a Facebook group where many go for help – can experience all kinds of surprising symptoms, including baldness (for both men and women).

    The study was conducted by a doctor at the Indiana University School of Medicine and the grassroots COVID-19 survivor group Survivor Corps using a Facebook poll that was shared with a group of “long haulers”, whom the researchers thanked for sharing their time and experience.

    The CDC has identified only 17 persistent COVID-19 symptoms, but the survey of more than 1,500 patients found 98 possible symptoms, according to Dr. Natalie Lambert, an associate research professor who worked on the study.

    “The new symptoms our study identified include severe nerve pain, difficulty concentrating, difficulty sleeping, blurry vision and even hair loss,” Lambert said in a written statement.

    While the CDC guidelines are helpful for the vast majority of COVID-19 sufferers, for those who are severely affected by the virus, a much broader world of potential symptoms opens up. Many of these symptoms aren’t included on the CDC’s list of common COVID-19 symptoms. And until now, the medical community hadn’t really recognized these symptoms as potentially tied to SARS-CoV-2.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In the report, the authors wrote that “the mismatch between the health problems people are experiencing and the information that they can find from official health sources is noticeable and a potential cause for concern,” outlining the motivation for their study.

    To be sure, media reports have documented a degree of versatility in virus symptoms. Some seriously ill patients experienced damage to their hearts along with the lungs and the vascular system – these symptoms, and the puzzle they presented for epidemiologists, were widely reported.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But the team from the Indiana University School of Medicine wrote that other symptoms, including “brain, whole body, joints, eye, and skin symptoms are also frequent-occurring health problems for people recovering from COVID-19”, they wrote in the study.

    Another finding of the survey is that many “long haulers” who suffer from these extended symptoms report high levels of pain – 26.5% reported painful symptoms.

    Read the rest of the study below:

    2020+Survivor+Corps+COVID-19+’Long+Hauler’+Symptoms+Survey+Report+(revised+July+25.1) by Zerohedge on Scribd

  • Is Turkey Drilling For Oil & Gas In The Wrong Sea?
    Is Turkey Drilling For Oil & Gas In The Wrong Sea?

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/05/2020 – 21:45

    By Viktor Katona of OilPrice.com

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Whilst most of European media have narrowed down the deterioration in EU-Turkey relations to the issues of the “refurbished” Hagia Sophia and the protracted Libyan proxy war, their energy ties were just as crippled by Turkey’s intensive drilling campaign in Cyprus’ offshore, generating bad blood between the Old Continent and Ankara.

    Driven by its purported objective to drill 26 wells in the Eastern Mediterranean, every one of Turkey’s wildcats in Cypriot waters has gauged Europe’s unity and shed light on its ill-preparedness to confront Turkish actions. Now Turkey has started to drill its initial objective along its northern coast, the Black Sea – the one offshore area that is undeniably Turkish.

    The reticence of Turkish authorities to drill their Black Sea first might explain a lot as to why drilling in the Mediterranean might be more beneficial.  The Turkish Fatih drillship has started prospecting works within Turkey’s Black Sea shelf this July and is assumed to have spud the Tuna-1 wildcat on July 20. Tuna-1 will be drilled in water depth of more than 2km, having been pinpointed as a potential drilling site following 3D seismic surveying in the area in April-May 2019 (by means of the Polar Empress vessel). The location of the Tuna-1 well is peculiar as TPAO has decided to go at it right next to the quadrangle of the Romanian-Bulgarian-Ukrainian-Turkish maritime border, within the deepwater Block 26. It seems that the wildcat’s location not far away from Ukraine’s Skifsky block and (perhaps more importantly) from the largest-so-far offshore discovery of the Black Sea deepwater, the OMV-operated Neptun field in Romania, is a deliberate attempt to maximize the success potential of the well by drilling as close as possible to proven commercial discoveries.

    At first glance, TPAO is taking the correct step politically – it was the Fatih drillship that has become Turkey’s first-ever own drillship (until 2018 the vessel was operated on the Norwegian Continental Shelf), it was the first to drill a Turkish wildcat in the Eastern Mediterranean (in waters that are internationally recognized as belonging to Cyprus). Moving the ominous drillship into waters that are actually internationally recognized as Turkish alone might shift the prevailing focus a bit. As of today, TPAO owns 2 similar drillships – Yavuz (the sister ship of Fatih) and Kanuni (built a year after the two in 2012, also in South Korea) – so continuing its objectionable drilling program in the Eastern Mediterranean need not come at the detriment of other activities in the Black Sea. 

    The Turkish upstream segment is quite interesting in that it defies the prevailing logic of the Eastern Mediterranean. Ever since the first exploration well was drilled in 1954, more than 250 companies were active in its upstream sector yet throughout the years Turkey’s national oil company TPAO remained the main driller, surveyor and appraiser (75-80% of all exploratory and development works have been done by TPAO). There have been sporadic surges in interest, be it Turkey’s alleged shale bounty or its continental shelf, however the country’s fast-growth prospects were marred by the mostly viscous, low-gravity barrels it wields (Turkey’s largest oil fields have an API gravity of 13-15°). Moreover, Turkey’s recovery rate hovers around a meagre 20% – no surprise then that as of today, Turkey’s own oil production meets 9% of its consumption and 2% of its natural gas needs (already accounting for the COVID-induced demand drop, otherwise would be even lower). 

    Turkey’s focus on its Black Sea potential emerged in the 2000s as the country’s energy needs surged amidst stagnant (and low) production rates. TPAO joined ranks with BP to spud the Hopa-1 wildcat in Block 3534, the easternmost of Turkey’s Black Sea offshore next to the maritime border with Georgia, assuming a 10 TCf gas potential, however they were compelled to abandon the drilling as poor reservoir quality and overpressure issues have rendered further activities pointless. At the heyday of Black Sea appraisal, ExxonMobil, Chevron, Petrobras, BP were all involved, making it the Black Sea’s hottest region in terms of major participation. Despite some minor discoveries in the shallow waters of the Black Sea (Akcakoca), the Turkish authorities’ ambitious claims of 10 billion barrels lying at the bottom of the sea waiting to be discovered turned out to be largely pipe dreams as no deepwater drilling wielded any commercial discovery so far. 

    Turkey’s dedication to its Black Sea acreage serves a double purpose. First and foremost, drilling the Tuna wildcat and any other exploration well distracts the layman from Turkey’s activities in the Eastern Mediterranean – concurrently to the Tuna-1, TPAO drilled another deepwater well in the Mediterranean Sea (Seljuk-1) by means of its Yavuz drillship, located within Cyprus’ Block 06 that is jointly held by Total and ENI. By searching for Seljuk-1, one barely finds any media mention of it, perhaps attesting to the media becoming indifferent to the seemingly inextricable Cyprus dilemma. All the while obfuscating its Cyprus-related dealings, the second reason for launching the Black Sea drilling is non-political: underexplored and out of majors’ sight, consolidating its internal powers to assess the Black Sea’s potential might still spring an implausible surprise. 

  • Yates Throws "Rogue" Comey Under The Bus Over Flynn Investigation
    Yates Throws “Rogue” Comey Under The Bus Over Flynn Investigation

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/05/2020 – 21:20

    Former Deputy Attorney General Sally Yates threw former FBI Director James ‘higher loyalty’ Comey under the bus on Wednesday, telling the Senate Judiciary Committee that the FBI’s January, 2017 interview of former national security adviser Michael Flynn was done without her authorization – and she was upset when she found out about it.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I was upset that Director Comey didn’t coordinate that with us and acted unilaterally,” Yates said.

    We would note that Yates wasn’t too upset to warn the incoming Trump administration about Flynn just 48 hours after the FBI launched a perjury trap against him.

    Committee Chairman Lindsey Graham (R-SC) asked Yates: “Did Comey go rogue?” – to which Yates replied “You could use that term, yes.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Yates said she also took issue with Comey for not telling her that Flynn’s communications with then-Russian Ambassador Sergey Kislyak were being investigated and that she first learned about this from President Barack Obama during an Oval Office meeting. Yates said she was “irritated” with Comey for not telling her about this earlier.

    That meeting, which took place on Jan. 5, 2017, was of great interest to Graham, who wanted to know why Obama knew about Flynn’s conversations before she did. Graham and other Republicans have speculated that Obama wanted Flynn investigated for nefarious purposes. Yates claimed that this was not the case, and explained why Obama was aware of the calls at the time. –Fox News

    Yates testified that Obama wanted to find out why the Kremlin suddenly backed down from threats to retaliate against sanctions over 2016 election meddling, leading to the DOJ’s discovery of the communications between Flynn and the ambassador, Sergei Kislyak.

    “The purpose of this meeting was for the president to find out whether – based on the calls between Ambassador Kislyak and Gen. Flynn – the transition team needed to be careful about what it was sharing with Gen. Flynn,” said Yates – who suggested that the meeting was not about influencing an investigation, which she added would have “set off alarms for me.

    Logan Act

    Yates was also asked whether former VP Joe Biden brought up the 1799 Logal Act at a January 5 Oval Office meeting about the Flynn investigation, which prohibits American citizens from communicating with foreign governments or officials without authorization “in relation to any disputes or controversies with the United States, or to defeat the measures of the United States.”

    Yates said she couldn’t recall if Biden mentioned it – but had a vague recollection of Comey bringing it up either at the Oval Office meeting or later.

    FISA Fiasco

    Later during testimony, Yates said that she had no idea that the FISA applications to spy on the Trump campaign were riddled with false evidence – and also denied knowledge that her own deputy, Bruce Ohr, had facilitated meetings between the FBI and UK operative Christopher Steele, who assembled the infamous Clinton-funded dossier which was used to support the FISA warrant against former campaign aide Carter Page.

    Yates claimed that if she knew this was the case, she wouldn’t have signed off on the warrant.

    Meanwhile, Sen. Hawley called for a “cleaning of house” at the FBI and DOJ. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  • LA Mayor Threatens To Shut Off Water And Power At Homes Hosting Parties: Virus Updates
    LA Mayor Threatens To Shut Off Water And Power At Homes Hosting Parties: Virus Updates

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/05/2020 – 21:18

    Summary:

    • Another US lawmaker tests positive for COVID
    • Texas positivity rate hits 3-week high
    • California suffers second deadliest day
    • NC ‘pauses’ reopening plans
    • US cases climb 1.1%
    • Gilead issues info on remdesivir pricing
    • California new cases, deaths climb
    • France suffers biggest jump in new cases in 2 months
    • California has been “significantly” undercounting numbers for weeks
    • Dr Fauci says people without symptoms are driving infections in US
    • Dr. Fauci says FDA won’t cut corners on approving vaccine
    • NJ Gov says positivity rate is “too high”
    • Florida cases top 500k
    • NYC institutes “check points” for travelers
    • Chicago public schools to reopen online only this fall
    • UK invests $18mil in Scottish vax factory
    • JNJ strikes huge vax deal with White House
    • COVID deaths top 700k
    • US to send DHHS Secretary Alex Azar on historic visit to Taiwan
    • Czech Republic reports biggest jump in new cases since June
    • Poland suffers record deaths
    • WHO sends team of 43 to South Africa
    • Uganda is Africa’s standout COVID success story
    • WHO says first “confirmed” North Korea COVID cases “inconclusive”
    • Queensland, Australia bars travelers from all Eastern states

    * * *

    Update (2115ET): Okay, maybe public officials’ fixation with young partiers as the primary source of new COVID-19 infections is starting to become counter productive.

    As a bevy of states ratchet up fines on anyone found hosting parties or other events where large numbers of people are violating social distancing rules, LA Mayor Eric Garcetti warned during his Tuesday briefing that he would shut off the water and power of any homes suspected of throwing house parties.

    The briefing started off by recognizing what may have been the first teenage death in LA County.

    Here’s more on that from KTLA:

    Los Angeles Mayor Eric Garcetti opened his daily briefing Tuesday recognizing what may have been the first teenage COVID-19 death in L.A. County and went on to announce actions against nonessential businesses that don’t close and a new portal for recruiting medics.

    He reminded young people that the virus can hit them too, urging them to stay at home and practice social distancing.

    “Your behavior can save a life and take a life,” Garcetti said. “And that life could be yours.”

    The mayor addressed President Trump’s remarks from earlier Tuesday about having the nation “opened up and just raring to go by Easter.” Garcetti said he didn’t think L.A. would be back to normal “in that short time.”

    “We won’t extend it one day longer than we need to,” Garcetti said, but emphasized that the “safer at home” measure had to be followed through.

    The mayor said L.A. is six to 12 days behind New York in being hit with a wave of positive cases.

    “The peak is not here yet,” he said. “It will be bad.”

    Garcetti emphasized the need for medical workers who can test, treat, heal and tend to coronavirus patients. He announced that together with L.A. County, the city has opened up a portal for medical personnel recruitment, with both paid and pro-bono positions.

    “We need to be prepared for some of the darkness that is ahead,” the mayor said. “Each one of us can be a light. We can light a match of hope. We can navigate that tunnel with each other and not alone. And more importantly, what we do can ensure that more people exit that tunnel together… and that our city will rise again.”

    The mayor went on to announce the “business ambassadors program” — an effort to get nonessential businesses to close.

    “This behavior is irresponsible and selfish,” he said of those that remain open.

    He said the Department of Water and Power will shut off services for the businesses that don’t comply with the “safer at home” ordinance.

    Neighborhood prosecutors will implement safety measures and will contact the businesses before issuing further action, according to Garcetti.

    “The easiest way to avoid a visit is to follow the rules,” he said.

    We look forward to the chorus of apoplectic critics howling about “he can’t do that!”. Yeah…we know.

    * * *

    Update (2100ET): Another member of Congress – Illinois Rep. Rodney Davis, a Republican – has tested positive for COVID, becoming 15th member to do so (7 Dems and now 8 GOP have been sickened).

    Here’s more from WaPo:

    Rep. Rodney Davis (R-Ill.) has tested positive for the coronavirus, becoming the latest lawmaker to be infected by the virus that is dominating Capitol Hill’s legislative agenda.

    Davis announced his positive test on Wednesday evening, saying that he has a higher-than-normal temperature but is otherwise symptom-free.

    “My staff and I take covid-19 very seriously,” Davis said in a statement. “My wife is a nurse and a cancer survivor, which puts her in an at-risk category like so many Americans. My office and I have always followed and will continue to follow CDC guidelines, use social distancing, and wear masks or face coverings when social distancing cannot be maintained.”

    The congressman has been wearing a mask while working on the Hill, a practice that House Speaker Nancy Pelosi (D-Calif.) recently mandated.

    Davis’s district is in central Illinois, beginning southeast of Peoria and stretching down to just north of St. Louis. He said his office will cancel public events while he quarantines at home.

    “During these challenging times, protecting the public health is my highest priority,” Davis said. “If you’re out in public, use social distancing, and when you can’t social distance, please wear a mask. All of us must do our part. That’s what it will take to get through this pandemic.”

    According to a tally by Reuters, at least 14 other members of the House and Senate — seven Democrats and seven Republicans — have tested positive.

    Only a matter of time before his colleagues lambast him for not wearing masks enough.

    * * *

    Update (1750ET): This is not great.

    As President Trump insists that the outbreak in the Sun Belt is finally starting to ‘go away’, Texas just reported its highest positivity rate in weeks.

    The number of deaths reported Wednesday was also alarmingly high.

    Texas’s positive-test rate climbed for a 4th-consecutive day to 15.58%, the highest reading in almost three weeks, according to state health department data.

    The state reported another 8,706 new cases, bringing the Lone Star state’s total to 459,887.

    235 new deaths were reported, bringing the state’s total to 7,497, though thanks to recent changes in the way deaths are counted (which critics allege was intended to obscure a rising rate of fatalities) it’s difficult to tell how many of these are really from the last 24 hours.

    In other news, cases in the US increased by 1.1% to 4.79 million, according to the early reading from JHU and BBG.

    That’s compared with an average of 1.3%. Deaths rose 0.8% to 157,416.

    North Carolina has paused its reopening plan, announcing that it will stay in ‘Phase 2’ for another 5 weeks.

    * * *

    Update (1545ET): Gilead has released its latest pricing info for its drug remdesivir, eliciting accusations of price gouging from angry twitter lefties, one of whom accused the pharma company of being the “Vampire Squid” of Big Pharma (a reference to Goldman Sachs’ nickname).

    * * *

    Update (1405ET): California just reported its latest daily COVID-19 numbers, with both deaths and cases rising at a faster pace than the prior day. The state reported 5,295 new cases, and 202 new deaths, its second-highest reading on deaths since the outbreak started.

    This comes one day after a top California official admitted that a technical problem had caused a lag in California’s tally of coronavirus test results, causing “significant undercounting of virus cases for weeks” and casting doubt on the accuracy of recent data showing improvements in the infection rate and number of positive cases, said Health and Human Services Secretary Dr. Mark Ghaly. He added that, in recent weeks, California has not been receiving a complete accounting of tests and tests conducted due to unresolved issues.

    * * *

    Update (1345ET): Dr. Fauci gives a lot of interviews, but a sit-down interview with Dr. Sanjay Gupta at Harvard’s school of public health (named after Mark Zuckerberg’s wife), is making headlines on Wednesday.

    As more attention is paid to the virus’s means of transmission as schools start to reopen for the fall semester, Dr. Fauci told his interviewer that the issue of aerosol and airborne transmissions definitely require closer study – although we’re fairly certain that the virus spreads via droplets in the air. But to “prove” that the virus transmits via aerosols – ie large droplets that linger in the air after a person coughs or sneezes – requires rigorous scientific standards and a Biosafety Level 3 facility.

    Fauci said that he and the team at the task force are looking closely at aerosol transmission, and he also reminded people to keep windows open when possible.

    Responding to Trump’s insistence that the virus will “go away as all things go away”, Dr. Fauci insisted that the US has been hit as hard as anyone, if not harder. “When you look at the number of infections and the number of deaths, it really is quite, quite concerning.”

    The doctor also complained about a “degree of anti-science feeling in the US” and said he and his family had to hire security due to a flood of “death threats” they have received.

    Finally, Dr. Fauci said the fact that 40% of people are asymptomatic is actually a huge factor in why the virus has proven so difficult to contain. That’s because it has allowed many people – even many who have been infected or know people who have been infected – not to take it seriously. He also insisted the FDA isn’t cutting corners on safety.

    “As long as you have any member of society, any demographic group, who’s not seriously trying to get to the end game of suppressing this, it will continue to smolder and smolder and smolder, and that will be the reason why, in a non-unified way, we’ve plateaued at an unacceptable level,” he said.

    Meanwhile, coronavirus cases ticked higher in France in one of the biggest single-day increases seen in more than two months.

    • CORONAVIRUS – FRANCE SAYS NUMBER OF CONFIRMED CASES UP BY 1,695 OVER 24 HOURS, AT 19, VERSUS +1,039 ON TUESDAY
    • CORONAVIRUS – FRENCH HEALTH MINISTRY SAYS TOTAL DEATH TOLL (HOSPITALS AND NURSING HOMES) RISES TO 30,305 FROM 30,296 ON TUESDAY

    It’s simply the latest sign that European infection numbers are making a comeback.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It comes as the Times of London reports on the hard-partying atmosphere as “hordes of youthful French sunseekers” have flocked to vacation hotspots and parties after the strict lockdown was lifted. Videos of packed beach parties in places like St Tropez led one French magazine to quip “here’s how infections are born.”

    Here’s a recap from the Times of London about how party hotspots have been driving the outbreak.

    The supposed irresponsibility of youth was much in the news in France last week as a sharp rise in new cases was blamed in several regions on young people behaving badly. Of 68 new cases reported in Brittany on Wednesday, almost half were among people aged 18 to 25.

    The mayor of the Breton port of Saint-Malo issued a decree on Thursday requiring all visitors to wear masks outdoors as well as indoors — even on the walled city’s windswept ramparts. On the peninsula of Quiberon on the Atlantic coast, access to beaches was restricted after an outbreak of 72 cases, more than half of them in the 18-25 age group. France’s health minister, Olivier Véran, lamented that “young people are paying less attention” as official figures showed a 54% spike in new cases, with the most worrrying rise for those aged 20-30.

    Then, the writer asked.

    So, are French kids somehow managing to have fun without endangering the nation’s health? Is dancing and drinking outdoors safer than it looks on a magazine page? Or will Mediterranean madness soon land France — and European visitors — with more lockdown misery?

    That question has apparently been answered.

    It appears that young people would prefer to live “a short and interesting life” rather than a “long and boring one”, one official says.

    * * *

    Update (1255ET): New Jersey Gov. Phil Murphy has been beating the “impending disaster” drum for a little over a week now as the positivity rate and New Jersey’s “R” – a variable measuring the rate of spread/contraction – have crept higher. And during Wednesday’s press briefing, he complained that the state’s positivity rate is “too high”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    New Jersey reported 378 new cases and 8 additional deaths on Wednesday, Murphy said.

    The state’s positivity rate is 2.57%, which is “too high because it’s over 2%,” Murphy said.

    New Jersey has a statewide total of 183,327 cases of COVID-19 and 13,989 deaths from the virus.

    “Let’s keep up what we are doing to keep the virus down,” Murphy said.

    He shared the latest data in a series of tweets as well:

    His remarks come after the state added Rhode Island (but removed Washington DC and Delaware) from its quarantine list.

    * * *

    Update (1110ET): In other big vaccine-related new from Wednesday, the UK agreed to invest $18 million in a Scottish vaccine-manufacturing plant early Wednesday.

    Here’s more on that from The Scotsman:

    The UK Government and the drugs firm are investing in the Livingston plant, with 75 new jobs expected to be created. The Government had struck a deal for early access to Valneva’s “promising” vaccine candidate.

    If clinical trials are successful, the site could provide up to 100 million doses of the vaccine across the UK and internationally.

    Business Secretary Alok Sharma will visit the factory this afternoon to hear about plans to scale-up production.

    Valneva’s vaccine, which is called VLA2001, is one of four potential vaccines which the UK Government has secured rights for.

    Mr Sharma said: “I’m incredibly grateful to our highly-skilled scientists and technicians in Livingston who are supporting the global effort to research, develop and manufacture a safe and effective coronavirus vaccine.

    “The multimillion-pound upfront investment we have agreed with Valneva today means that their vaccine can be manufactured in quantity right here in Scotland.

    “If clinical trials are successful, millions of people in priority groups across the UK will be protected by their life-saving vaccine.”

    Speaking on the BBC’s Good Morning Scotland radio programme ahead of his visit, Mr Sharma said the French company hoped to secure regulatory approval for its vaccine in the second half of next year.

    Meanwhile, Moderna announced Wednesday that it has already booked $400 million in deposits from various governments for quantities of its vaccine, as the world waits to see if the US (via BARDA) will reward Moderna with even more money via vaccine preorders, after already pumping nearly $1 billion into the company for its vaccine (which is reportedly being priced at a premium, despite all the government aid).

    In New York, Andrew Cuomo released the latest data from the city.

    The more interesting news out of the city on Wednesday comes from the New York City Test and Trace Corps, (aka de Blasio’s contact tracing army) which says that 1/5th of all new cases have been linked to travelers coming in from other states, according to Dr. Ted Long, the head of the service. In response, Mayor de Blasio said he will enforce travel “checkpoints” to monitor visitors from the 35 states and territories on the quarantine list. Travelers will need to complete a “travel disclosure form” before passing through these checkpoints back into the city.

    Travelers will need to disclose their information, or face a $2,000 fine. Here’s more from de Blasio:

    “Travelers coming in from those states will be given information about the quarantine, they will be reminded that is required and not optional. They will be reminded that failure to quarantine is a violation of state law and it comes with serious penalties.” de Blasio said.

    The checkpoints will be at major bridge and tunnel crossings, according to New York City Sheriff Joseph Fucito.

    The announcement comes after Mayor de Blasio said that the New York City’s positivity rate has been below 3% since June 10.

    “This is serious stuff and it’s time for everyone realizes it. If we are going to hold at this level at health and safety in this city and get better we have to deal with the fact that the quarantine must be applied consistently” de Blasio added.

    The checkpoints will be set up Wednesday, de Blasio said.

    Chicago Public Schools will start the upcoming school year with fully remote learning for all its students, the district announced Wednwsday during in a press briefing. The decision is expected to stave off a strike from the Chicago teacher’s union. The school district will rely on 100% remote learning through the first quarter, which ends Nov. 9.

    Florida reported 502,739 virus cases on Wednesday, up 1.1% from a day earlier, compared with an average 1.7% increase over the last week, making it the second state (after Cali) to surpass 500,000 cases.

    Deaths among residents reached 7,627, an increase of 225, or 3%, according to the report, which includes data through Tuesday. The rate of people testing positive for the first time was steady at 10.9%, though the state reported a record 621 new hospitalizations, despite trends showing ICU and bed occupancy falling in most areas across the state. Arizona, meanwhile, reported another 1,698 new cases.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While ICU occupancy declined to 83%, the lowest level since late June.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    * * *

    Update (0910ET): JNJ shares are soaring in premarket trading after the company announced that it had struck a deal for 100 million doses of its COVID-19 vaccine candidate, the latest in a string of blockbuster deals for vaccine candidates as governments, including the US, UK, EU and Japan, scramble to stockpile vaccine doses before they’re even approved.

    BARDA, the US agency in charge of these deals, is pledging $1 billion+ for this deal, at roughyl $10/dose, making JNJ’s one of the cheaper vaccine candidates.

    Here’s more on that from Reuters:

    Johnson & Johnson announced Wednesday that it will develop and deliver 100 million doses of its coronavirus vaccine for the U.S. in a deal totaling more than $1 billion.

    The deal gives the U.S. the option to order an additional 200 million doses, the company said.

    “We are scaling up production in the U.S. and worldwide to deliver a SARS-CoV-2 vaccine for emergency use,” said Paul Stoffels, chief science officer at Johnson & Johnson, in a statement.

    * * *

    As new COVID-19 cases continued to slow in the US and Brazil on Tuesday, the number of confirmed deaths worldwide passed the 700,000 mark, while the number of confirmed cases hit, according to data from JHU and Bloomberg.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Perhaps the biggest news overnight comes out of the US, where Health and Human Services Secretary Alex Azar said he plans to visit Taiwan to discuss the international response to the pandemic. The trip will happen in the coming days. It will almost certainly lead to a further deterioration in the relationship between the US and China, as Azar’s visit will be the highest-level visit by an American Cabinet official since the break in formal diplomatic relations between Washington and Taipei in 1979.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Czech Republic reported its biggest daily jump in cases since the end of June on Wednesday. The 290 new cases pushed its national total to 17,286, with 383 deaths. Roughly 1/4th of the new cases – 77 – were in the eastern region of Moravia-Silesia, bordering Poland, where many miners and their families have been infected. It comes as Poland reported several consecutive days of record case numbers. Poland, meanwhile, reported 18 new virus-linked deaths, the most in a day since June 30, raising the country’s death toll to 1,756

    North Korea’s suspected first coronavirus patient – a defector who recently snuck back in to the closed off country – has tested inconclusive for the virus, according to the WHO rep who works with North Korea (a reliable, independent, source of information, we’re sure.

    “The person was tested for Covid-19, but test results were inconclusive,” Dr Edwin Salvador, the WHO representative for North Korea, told Reuters on Wednesday.

    As many as 64 first contacts and 3,571 secondary contacts of the suspected case have been identified and quarantined in government facilities for a period of 40 days, Salvador said. Kaesong remains under lockdown and household doctors continue to conduct surveillance in the city, he said.

    Australia has tightened its lockdown in the troubled state of Victoria to resemble the restrictions that forced hundreds of millions of Europeans to remain indoors for months. While it could take weeks for these measures to have some impact, the state is already nearly 4 weeks in to a ‘partial lockdown’ imposed when the latest cluster in Melbourne first emerged.

    The Associated Press described how Australia’s streets “drained of life” this week as the state of Victoria imposed the country’s toughest lockdown yet.

    And despite all of this, Victoria premier Daniel Andrews announced 725 new cases in the state and 15 new deaths, making the last 24 hours the deadliest day yet for the Australian outbreak, and the second-worst day for new cases across the country (it was the worst day for Victoria). Though, to be sure, South Australia processed a record number of COVID-19 tests on Tuesday, and are expected to exceed that again today, as thousands flock to testing.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The outbreak in Victoria is creating more paranoia nationally as the state of Queensland on Wednesday announced that it would shut its state border with the rest of Australia’s East Coast, after having already banned travelers from Victoria. Travelers from New South Wales and the Australian Capital Territory won’t be allowed to travel to Queensland starting Aug. 8. This despite the fact that the ACT currently has no active cases.

    NSW also announced that all residents returning from Victoria will need to hotel quarantine for 14 days at their own expense.

    As WHO plays down the outbreak in North Korea, its Africa arm is sending a team of 43 specialists to South Africa, a country that has quietly climbed the coronavirus rankings as Africa’s most industrialized nation is also home to its largest outbreak – or, to put it more accurately, the continent’s largest number of confirmed infections: As of Wednesday morning, the country had 521,318 cases, the fifth-highest number in the world, and more than half of all reported infections in Africa, which is now close to the 1 million milestone. South Africa’s health minister on Wednesday heralded the country’s decreasing infection rate, but warned that the people must stay vigilant to stave off “a renewed surge”. SA has recorded 8,884 COVID-19 deaths, although studies of excess mortality rates indicate the actual toll could be higher.

    Like in India and many other poor countries, the virus spread like wildfire through South Africa’s overcrowded urban slums in Cape Town, Johannesburg and other cities. For weeks, it threatened to overwhelm public hospitals, but Health Minister Zwelini Mkhize told reporters Wednesday that the health care system in the country will be able to cope.

    “Our hospitals have been battered but we have not breached our hospital capacity,” he said. “Our wards are full and our ICU beds are full, but not to complete capacity. And the field hospitals that we constructed still have space.” There have been adequate supplies of oxygen for severely affected patients, he said.

    After reporting the latest updates from South Africa, Reuters on Wednesday published a lengthy story about Uganda, one of the largest countries in Africa, and how its experience with deadly viruses like Ebola and Marburg shaped its handling of coronavirus. Uganda – a nation of 42 million – has recorded just a handful of deaths due to the restrictive and sometimes brutally enforced lockdown imposed by the authoritarian government.

    Despite crumbling public hospitals, doctors’ strikes and corruption scandals, the African nation has largely succeeded in containing the virus: It has recorded just 1,200 cases and five deaths since March. Per Reuters, Uganda’s experience “shows what can be accomplished when a government with a firm grip on power acts quickly and enforces a strict lockdown. But its success came at a cost, critics say.
    Jobs were lost, and economic growth is set to plunge to as low as 0.4% in 2020, from 5.6% last year, according to the World Bank.”

    Meanwhile, Africa’s 54 countries have recorded a total of roughly 975,000 cases and 21,000 deaths from the virus.

    As a result of the lockdown, some pregnant women died in labor, unable to reach hospitals in time due to travel restrictions, while security forcesbeat and arrested some scofflaws who disobeyed the lockdown.

    “A jobless person is better than a dead person,” state minister for health Robinah Nabbanja told Reuters. “The lockdown was completely justified.”

    Not everyone agreed: “I go hungry sometimes and eat only once in a day,” he said. “Coronavirus hasn’t killed us but the hell of going hungry is not that far from death.”

    Moving on to Asia, perhaps the biggest news overnight amounts to a disturbing echo of the initial coronavirus outbreak in Wuhan. Japanese Economy Minister Yasutoshi Nishimura warned on Wednesday that Japan is facing a “second wave”, and that Japanese citizens should exercise caution when traveling for the upcoming Obon Holiday that starts next week. He asked any Japanese with symptoms to please stay home. The holiday – like the Chinese New Year holiday that coincided with the initial phase of the outbreak – typically sees millions of Japanese return to their hometowns to visit family.

  • Millions Worth of PPP Loans Went to Chinese-Owned Companies, Report Finds
    Millions Worth of PPP Loans Went to Chinese-Owned Companies, Report Finds

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/05/2020 – 20:55

    Authored by Cathy He via The Epoch Times

     

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A man looks at a J-31 gyrfalcon stealth fighter plane model designed by Aviation Industry Corporation of China (AVIC) at the Beijing International Aviation Expo in Beijing on Sept. 17, 2015. (WANG ZHAO/AFP via Getty Images)

    Hundreds of millions of U.S. taxpayer dollars went to Chinese companies from the Paycheck Protection Program (PPP), which was designed to help small businesses survive during the pandemic, according to a new report.

    A review of public PPP loan data by consultancy firm Horizon Advisory found that $192 million to $419 million in loans were given to more than 125 Chinese-owned or -invested companies operating in the United States. Many of the loans were substantial, with at least 32 Chinese-owned firms receiving more than $1 million under the program, totaling between $85 million and $180 million, it found.

    The recipients included Chinese state-owned enterprises, companies that supported Beijing’s military development program, firms identified by the United States as national security threats, and media outlets controlled by the Chinese Communist Party (CCP), the report said. Many were based in critical industries such as aerospace, pharmaceuticals, and semiconductor manufacturing. These are sectors that the CCP has slated for aggressive development to achieve global dominance, with the goal of supplanting competitors in the United States and other countries.

    The report concluded that “without appropriate policy guardrails and monitoring of U.S. tax dollars intended for relief, recovery, and growth of the U.S. economy, there is a significant risk that funds will support foreign strategic rivals, namely China.”

    Many of these Chinese-linked firms could have tapped into other sources of capital from public or private markets to support their American operations, the report said.

    Their PPP participation saved U.S.-based jobs, but likely at the expense of other U.S. small businesses.

    Horizon Advisory’s findings come amid rising scrutiny of Chinese companies, particularly tech firms, in the United States. President Donald Trump said on Aug. 3 that he would ban Chinese-owned short video app TikTok on Sept. 15 if it’s not sold to Microsoft or another American company. His administration is also considering barring other Chinese social media apps, citing national security risks. U.S. officials have raised the alarm that these apps could be used to spy on Americans, given that Chinese laws compel all companies to cooperate with security agencies when asked.

    Meanwhile, the Trump administration is also reviewing whether Chinese companies listed on American exchanges should be compelled to abide by U.S. audit laws. The Chinese regime denies U.S. regulators access to audit books of Chinese firms, citing the information as state secrets.

    About $517 billion of PPP loans have been issued since March, when the measure was introduced to help businesses with 500 or fewer workers pay their staff and bills during the economic downturn as a result of the COVID-19 pandemic. The program drew criticism after reports that large companies that could have had access to other forms of credit received loans, prompting the Treasury Department to warn that bigger companies could face penalties if they couldn’t show the loan was essential.

    The report said that loans went to affiliates of three Chinese companies that featured on a Pentagon list of 20 firms that are owned or controlled by the Chinese military. It found that six recipients were affiliated with state-owned companies that supply arms to China’s People’s Liberation Army, including Aviation Industry Corp. of China, China Aerospace Science and Industry, and China North Industries Group Corporation (Norinco Group).

    Chinese-linked biotech companies were also identified, including California-based Dendreon Pharmaceuticals, which received between $5 million to $10 million in PPP loans. Dendreon is owned by Nanjing Xinbai, a Chinese state-invested company that is controlled by a tech conglomerate with close ties to the CCP.

    California-based robotics and AI company CloudMinds Technology Inc. received between $1 million to $2 million in loans. It is a subsidiary of Beijing-based CloudMinds, which was added to the commerce department’s trade blacklist over their ties to the Chinese military back in May.

    Loans also went to a U.S. subsidiary of Hong Kong-based Phoenix TV, a pro-Beijing media outlet. While the company is private, a 2019 report by the Hoover Institution at Stanford University said Phoenix TV is “fully controlled by [the] Chinese government.”

    Congress and the Trump administration are currently negotiating a second stimulus package that is likely to include more funding for PPP. A Senate Republican recently proposed that the stimulus bill disqualify entities affiliated with China from the loan program, though it remains to be seen if this will be included in the final package.

    The Treasury Department did not respond to a request for comment.

    Follow Cathy on Twitter: @CathyHe_ET

  • Massive Beirut Explosion Sinks Nearby Cruise Ship
    Massive Beirut Explosion Sinks Nearby Cruise Ship

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/05/2020 – 20:30

    Tuesday’s massive explosion in Beirut, Lebanon, has so far claimed the lives of 135 people and injured around 5,000. The cause of the explosion was 2,700 tons of ammonium nitrate, sitting unsecured in a warehouse at the Port of Beirut. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Beirut’s governor, Marwan Abboud, said damage from the blast is widespread and extends over half of the city, with the cost of the damage estimated to be more than $3 billion. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For more color on the sheer destruction, Dutch newspaper De Telegraaf cited Lebanese news agency National News Agency (NNA), which reports the blast also sunk a nearby cruise ship.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Orient Queen, owned by Abou Merhi Cruises, measures an overall length of 400 feet long, was sunk by the ammonium nitrate explosion.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    After the explosion, the vessel was severely left listing to the starboard, with two crew members killed and several injured.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The vessel eventually capsized hours later. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here’s a video of the capsized vessel.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    A satellite image via Maxar captured the sunken cruise ship. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    One can only speculate this wasn’t a normal ‘explosion’.  

  • The Difference Between Good Economics And Bad
    The Difference Between Good Economics And Bad

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/05/2020 – 20:05

    Submitted by Michael Lebowitz and Jack Scott of Real Investment Advice

    The Difference Between Good Economics and Bad

    “Real protection means teaching children to manage risks on their own, not shielding them from every hazard.” ― Wendy Mogel, The Blessing of a Skinned Knee

    In the five weeks from February 19 to March 26, 2020, the S&P 500 fell 33.9%. Because of all the bizarre things we have seen since then, that seems like such a long time ago. Despite serious questions about how quickly the economy will ultimately rebound from the global shutdown, investors are pricing the stock and bond markets for perfection. Many individual stocks sit at new all-time highs, and credit spreads are tighter today than before the COVID-19 outbreak.

    Meanwhile, Treasury yields have fallen to levels well below those seen before the pandemic. Mortgage rates for a 30-year term are below 3.00%. Eerily, equity volatility remains quite elevated suggestive of investor anxiety and illiquidity.

    As investors, we tend to draw conclusions based on market behavior. When Treasury yields fall, for example, it is not unreasonable to think it portends undetected economic weakness. If credit spreads tighten, it is plausible to believe that the cause is strengthening corporate revenue and earnings.

    What if, however, signals are misleading as described above? What if the market’s traffic lights are green and red at the same time? Dare we ask, what happens when good economics become bad.

    The Visible Hand

    Beginning in February, the Federal Reserve (Fed) initiated several policy programs resulting in massive surge of their balance sheet. In just 13 weeks, the Fed provided over $3 trillion of liquidity to financial markets. The Fed’s efforts in 2008 pale in comparison.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While such a policy did not forestall a recession, the objective is clearly to mitigate damage in risky asset markets. Actions of this sort are becoming increasingly routine for frightened policymakers. In the name of expedience, they aim to “rescue” financial markets.

    On the other hand, in Congressional testimony (those with whom oversight of the Fed resides) and in media appearances, Fed members apply vacuous counter-factual arguments. “Had we not taken forceful action, things would be much worse,” always goes uncontested by elected officials. Uncontested because wealthy individuals and corporations are their primary source of campaign funds. Re-election odds for incumbents correlate well with market direction.

    Secondary Consequences

    The other issue, the one we write about here, is how that policy response sets the table for other problems. Henry Hazlitt, in his profound book, Economics in One Lesson, describes it this way.

    “…a main factor that spawns new economic fallacies everyday…is the persistent tendency of men to see only the immediate effects of a given policy, or its effects only on a special group, and to neglect to inquire what the long-run effects of that policy will be not only on that special group but on all groups. It is the fallacy of overlooking secondary consequences.”

    Hazlitt immediately continues-

    “In this lies the whole difference between good economics and bad.”

    The Federal Reserve’s pragmatism is driven by the influence of wealthy men, corporate executives, and political donors. By insisting that every action be taken with no regard for long-term effects makes certain the influencers’ wealth is protected.

    Using the opening quote as an analogy, the Fed has become a notoriously overprotective helicopter parent to the stock market since the financial crisis, shielding it from every hazard. Just as in the case of child-rearing, their actions are responsible for producing an extraordinarily petulant and fragile system.

    Drawing again from Wendy Mogel –

    “If a child is distressed and sees Mom react with panic, he knows he should wail; if she’s compassionate but calm, he tends to recover quickly.”

    This long-term “parental” panic pattern results in a variety of adverse consequences. The worst of them may be the extreme surge in passive investing. As we wrote in a Passive Fingerprints are all over This Crazy Market, the influence of passive investing on the current market is extreme.

    Other Factors

    In 2014 Steve Bregman at Horizon Analytics, enlightened us to what he calls the ETF (exchange-traded fund) divide. His argument highlights the passive, indiscriminate nature of ETF investors. The monumental shift away from discretionary (active) value-oriented strategies was well underway but not yet diagnosed in a way that Bregman astutely observed.

    Since then, the wave of passive investing has become a tsunami. Passive, or index strategies, attract massive capital at the expense of discretionary or active mutual fund managers.

    That re-allocation means two things:

    1. Money is leaving active managers who regularly hold 5% cash on average and is going into passive ETFs which hold less than 0.10% cash
    2. Active managers have historically been the cops on the beat patrolling overvalued stocks and selling them when those conditions are clear. Those cops are being systematically “defunded,” and there is no consideration of “value” in the passive index world.

    Seismic Shift

    Why are these issues so important?

    First, when $3 or 4 trillion dollars move from funds managed with 5% cash  to funds with near-zero cash, $150 to $200 billion of “new money” leads to an explosive upside effect on individual stocks targeted in passive funds.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Second, when money is removed from discretionary hands and reallocated to index funds, there is no consideration for price, ever. When a passive S&P 500 or NASDAQ 100 fund receives one dollar to invest, it immediately invests in all of the underlying stocks. It does so at whatever price is available. The top decile, ranked by market cap, perpetually benefits the most as the inflows occur. The bottom decile also benefits via overvaluation, but to a lesser extent.

    Stocks that do not benefit are those not in passive ETF/indexes. Those are stocks that enjoy none of the indiscriminate flows of capital and frequently become undervalued.

    Blame Game

    The Fed is responsible for market inefficiencies in the same way a parent is responsible for the demeanor of an entitled child. If policymakers repeatedly rush to the care of markets anytime difficulties arise, then investors never see problems. Prudence and risk management are put aside and neglected.  The buy-the-dip mentality goes beyond a humorous meme, it becomes a doctrine.

    Over time and with plenty of Fed parenting, passive investors outperform the prudence and diligence of discretionary value managers. When the pattern repeats for a decade, then the chart above of net flows is the result. The concentration of passive investing becomes acute, and its effects on valuations extreme.

    As Bregman pointed out in 2014, a proliferation of the ETF divide had, even then, begun to reveal itself in unhealthy ways. Those circumstances persist. The strong correlation of large S&P 500 components to the S&P 500 is now stark. The table below adds recent data from 2020 to Bregman’s original table.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The dramatic rise in correlation means there is less benefit to diversification than historically has been the case. Owning a variety of stocks and being well-diversified makes sense unless the benefits of that strategy no longer exist. Based on current data, diversification using index funds is futile. 

    Summary

    Central bankers are prone to applying a convenient narrative to justify their actions. Their dialogue is usually laced with contempt for those who cast doubt. That is not a sign of confidence; it is a sign of deep insecurity. A sign of confidence would be humility, a characteristic one never sees out of Fed leadership.

    Markets are more fragile today because of a hovering Fed parent, shielding investors from every hazard. The second and third-order effects continue to evolve, but the volatility in the first quarter offered a glimpse of disturbing possibilities.

  • Hezbollah Linked To Stockpiles Of Ammonium Nitrate Uncovered In Europe: Report
    Hezbollah Linked To Stockpiles Of Ammonium Nitrate Uncovered In Europe: Report

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/05/2020 – 19:40

    In the immediate aftermath of the massive explosion that rocked Beirut yesterday, killing over 100 and leaving more than 4,000 injured while leveling an entire district of the city, and leaving destruction up to miles away, both the Israeli government and Hezbollah denied having anything to do with it, or that it was the result of missile attack, sabotage, or bombing.

    The official Lebanese government explanation emerged after the prime minister identified that the blast that produced a shockwave and mushroom cloud that even briefly blocked out the sun, was linked to 2,750 tons of ammonium nitrate which had unsafely sat in storage on the port going back to 2013.

    But now Israeli and Western media sources are taking a fresh look at Hezbollah’s activities related to the chemical compound commonly used in fertilizer, and which it should be noted was the same used in the Oklahoma City bombing on April 19, 1995.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via BBC/Reuters: An ammonium nitrate explosion can release toxic gases, feared in the wake of the Beirut explosion that leveled parts of the city.

    The Jerusalem Post reports Wednesday:

    Hezbollah kept three metric tons of ammonium nitrate, the explosive thought to be behind the mega blast in Beirut this week, in a storehouse in London, until MI5 and the London Metropolitan Police found it in 2015.

    The Lebanese terrorist group also stored hundreds of kilograms of ammonium nitrate in southern Germany, which were uncovered earlier this year.

    While ultimately the report presents no evidence that Hezbollah stores were involved or to blame in Tuesday’s tragic disaster which wiped out the economically vital port area, Israeli media is strongly suggesting there could be a link.

    And the report details further based on UK media sources:

    A source was quoted in The Telegraph saying the ammonium nitrate was to be used for “proper organized terrorism” and could have caused “a lot of damage.”

    MI5 arrested a man in his 40s for allegedly planning terrorist attacks, but did not find evidence that the terrorists were planning an attack in the UK.

    …A foreign government reportedly tipped off MI5 to the explosives stockpile. KAN reported that the Mossad gave the UK the information.

    “MI5 worked independently and closely with international partners to disrupt the threat of malign intent from Iran and its proxies in the UK,” an intelligence source told The Telegraph.

    The investigation that uncovered alleged Hezbollah stockpiles of ammonium nitrate had the involvement of Mossad as well.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via IRNA

    All this suggests of course that the narrative surrounding the precise cause of the blast is anything but settled. In the coming days accusations and counter-accusations will likely continue to grow as old enemies in the region find new suspicions and reasons to accuse.

    Add to all this that President Trump added fodder in terms of suspicions there was terrorism, foul play, or even a state actor at work when he said Tuesday evening that his generals “seem to think it was an attack. It was a bomb of some kind.”

    Given the new UK and Israeli media accusations that Hezbollah has long been seeking and storing highly explosive ammonium nitrate, it will be interesting to see if Pompeo’s State Department runs with any of this. Will the accusations be used to bring Hezbollah in Washington’s cross hairs once again?

    However, we struggle to see what Hezbollah could stand to gain in blowing up its own country, where the Shia paramilitary group even has members represented in parliament, and maintains hospitals in Beirut.

  • Robot Uses Face Scanning AI To Ask People To Wear A Mask
    Robot Uses Face Scanning AI To Ask People To Wear A Mask

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/05/2020 – 19:15

    By Paul Joseph Watson of SummitNews

    With masks now becoming mandatory in many countries inside supermarkets, public buildings and transport systems, SoftBank Robotics Europe has reprogrammed its “cutesy” Pepper android to help enforce the new rules.

    A video demonstration shows the robot scanning people’s faces and then telling individuals not wearing a mask to put one on, while thanking those who are already wearing them.

    “Using an image recognition AI and Single Shot Detector, Pepper can scan the faces of up to five people at once,” reports Engadget.

    “On Pepper’s tablet, a green circle will appear around an image of anyone wearing a mask, and a red circle will appear around the image of anyone without a mask. Pepper can thank people for wearing masks or remind someone to put a face covering on.”

    The company asserts that no personal data is used or stored, although face scanning technology is widely used by both companies and governments in dictatorial states like China to enforce compliance and punish social credit score dissenters.

    The efficacy of masks continues to be hotly debated, with experts in both the Netherlands and Sweden saying they are pointless while others arguing that they may even help spread the disease because wearers touch them often and are more likely to ignore social distancing.

    In a wider context, the mask has become a symbol of compliance while also facilitating many to virtue signal and express righteously indignant and sometimes violent vitriol towards refusniks.

  • Twitter Follows Facebook, Deletes Trump Campaign Post Over COVID-19 "Misinformation"
    Twitter Follows Facebook, Deletes Trump Campaign Post Over COVID-19 “Misinformation”

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/05/2020 – 18:44

    Update (2052ET): Hours after Facebook nuked a clip of President Trump telling “Fox & Friends” that children are “almost immune” to COVID-19, Twitter has followed suit – reportedly locking the Trump campaign account and deleting the offending tweet, according to the Washington Post (which erroneously reported that Twitter had banned Trump’s personal account).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Twitter spokesperson Liz Kelley told the Post that the tweet “is in violation of the Twitter Rules on COVID-19 misinformation. The account owner will be required to remove the Tweet before they can Tweet again.”

    As of this report, the tweet appears to have been removed from the @teamtrump timeline. It is unclear if the account can post once again.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    *  *  *

    Just when Mark Zuckerberg really looked to be making inroads with Trump and his inner circle by resisting a corporate ad boycott on the grounds that it was a misguided attempt to push more conservative voices off the world’s most popular social media platform, Facebook on Wednesday removed a post from the president’s page for containing allegedly “false and misleading” information about the coronavirus.

    The post that was removed contained a snipped from a Fox & Friends morning interview with Trump from earlier Wednesday where the president claimed young children are “almost immune” to the virus.

    “This video includes false claims that a group of people is immune from COVID-19 which is a violation of our policies around harmful COVID misinformation,” a Facebook spokesman said.

    Twitter kicked off the trend of tagging, altering or removing Trump’s social media posts, alleging lies and inaccuracies that have always existed in political communication, but are now, for some reason, considered “harmful” or otherwise wrong.

    Then again, the partisans alleging “harm” here are the same ones who slammed the NYT for “putting black journalists lives in jeopardy” by running an editorial written by a sitting US Senator.

    Trump responded to Twitter’s practice of tagging his tweets with an executive order threatening to remove a liability shield from social media platforms that interfere with the content of users.

    This is the first time Facebook has removed any content posted by the president’s official or campaign account for allegedly violating the social network’s policies.

     

     

     

     

  • Leftists Go After Two Plus Two Equals Four
    Leftists Go After Two Plus Two Equals Four

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/05/2020 – 18:25

    By Andrea Wilburg

    In George Orwell’s dystopian Nineteen Eighty-Four, the concept that two plus two equals four had extraordinary symbolic weight.  The State, as embodied in Big Brother, controlled everything that people could think or say.

    Part of how the rebellious Winston Smith fought back against this totalitarianism was to remind himself that, no matter what the State said, two plus two does, in fact, equal four.  To the all-powerful State, though, Smith’s belief in objective math was a threatening form of insanity.  The State therefore used a mixture of torture and cajoling to force Smith to embrace a State-sanctioned “sanity” that denied reality:

    “You are a slow learner, Winston.”

    “How can I help it? How can I help but see what is in front of my eyes? Two and two are four.”

    “Sometimes, Winston. Sometimes they are five. Sometimes they are three. Sometimes they are all of them at once. You must try harder. It is not easy to become sane.”

    By the novel’s end, with the State’s torture having broken him, Smith readily conceded that, yes, if the State said that two plus two equals five, that would be the correct answer.

    Judging by a comprehensive Twitter thread, we have reached the Orwellian world of Big Brother.  This is a world in which those who represent power for the sake of power are working overtime to convince their fellow Americans to dismiss reality and concede that two plus two does not equal four but, instead, equals five:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The left knows, and truly hates, the fact that reality tells Americans some important things:

    • Humans cannot control the enormousness of our climate.
    • Except for a minute subset of people born with damaged DNA, boys are boys and girls are girls.
    • Penalties help deter criminal activity.  Without penalties, crime gets worse, and people engage in vigilante conduct that is worse for criminals than the rule of law.
    • Race is real, but it’s only as a superficial construct (different skin color, different eyes, etc.).  What is infinitely more important is that we are all members of the same human species, and that’s true whether or not one believes we are made in God’s image or reached this point through pure evolution.
    • America has raised up more people around the world from poverty and into liberty than any other country in history.
    • Socialism has failed everywhere it’s been tried.  As a reminder, socialism succeeded in Europe as long as it did only because America funded Europe during the Cold War.  All of you, with your 80-hour work weeks, helped bring Europeans their 35-hour work weeks and mediocre cradle-to-grave “free” medical care.

    If leftists are to convince Americans that socialism has succeeded, they must convince them to deny all those other things that Americans know are true and real.  If boys aren’t boys, if race is the only thing that matters, and if America is evil, then socialists can also make us accept that socialism is a workable system that just “hasn’t been done right before.”

    In 2020, as the election looms, Americans must have a death grip on reality.  Two plus two equals four, no matter how much the critical race theorists (the ones who hold that the only reality is power and what the powerful deem true) claim otherwise.  If we do not hang on to the life raft of reality, socialism offers no life vest and we will all drown.

  • Daily Briefing – August 5, 2020
    Daily Briefing – August 5, 2020


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/05/2020 – 18:25

    Senior editor, Ash Bennington, joins managing editor, Ed Harrison, to discuss some of the latest data coming out, revealing the health of the US economy. They go over the July ADP Nonfarm Payroll number, what the disappointing results say about where the economy stands, and why the pandemic really is something to seriously consider as a market driver. They also talk about the uptick of coronavirus cases globally, the Swedish outcome, and how the world would get closer to a new normal. They wrap up their discussion by exploring bifurcation, the divide between the real economy and the financial economy, and when that reality becomes important to markets as well as the bifurcation between the market winners and losers during the pandemic.

  • Jeff Bezos Just Sold Over $3 Billion In Amazon Stock
    Jeff Bezos Just Sold Over $3 Billion In Amazon Stock

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/05/2020 – 18:12

    In a sale which we are confident will be defended as just “selling for tax purposes” or “considering charitable giving” and certainly not “an admission that Amazon is overpriced”, Jeff Bezos took to the open market this week to dump a million shares of Amazon stock, worth just over $3 billion, company SEC filings revealed on Wednesday.

    Bezos sold the majority of the shares between $3,106 and $3,167, decreasing the number of shares he beneficially owns from 55,488,700 to 54,488,700. The company’s CEO of Amazon Web Services, Andrew R. Jassey, also sold 6,945 shares on August 3, 2020 at a price of $3,183, netting him about $2.2 million.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The latest sales comes after Bezos dumped $1.8 billion worth of stock back between January 31 and February 3.

    Bloomberg calculated back in February that in the 15 years after Amazon went public, Bezos sold a fifth of the company for $2 billion. So in February he sold shares equal to roughly one-hundreth of this stake for similar proceeds. Today, he sold about two tenths of a percent of the company for 1.5x times the same proceeds.

    The 54.5 million shares that Bezos still owns are worth about $174 billion. Other recent transaction by Bezos include the sale of $2 billion in 2017 and $2.8 billion in 2019.

    Here is a look at Bezos’ sales prior to today:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    To account for this week’s sale, just add another $3.1 billion to the 2020 total.

  • 3 Reasons Treasury Rates Can Still Hit 0%: Part II
    3 Reasons Treasury Rates Can Still Hit 0%: Part II

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/05/2020 – 17:40

    By Eric Basmajian of EPB Macro Research

    • Deflation remains a more credible risk, not inflation. The output gap suggests core inflation could sink below 0.5% in the coming years.
    • FX hedged Treasury yields remain higher than yields at home. This will increase foreign appetite for US rates.
    • From a longer-term secular standpoint, economic growth will fall into a new regime, sub 2%, which will weigh on bond yields.
    • Further stimulus from the fiscal side will delay the full extent of the deflationary output gap but will not change the end result in the final analysis.
    • As part of your balanced portfolio, long-term Treasury bonds are still a valuable holding as the path to 0% remains a probable scenario.

    In Part II of this three-part series, we continue to explore three main factors that will continue to push Treasury rates lower, possibly near 0% on the long-end of the curve. 

    In Part I, we covered the inflation vs. deflation debate and argued that deflation was the more immediate risk. First, we covered a variety of the common inflationary arguments and debunked many of the poorly formed hypotheses before highlighting the output gap as the most reliable variable for long-run inflation analysis. 

    Part II will cover FX-hedged Treasury yields and show that US yields are higher than yields at home for Japanese and European investors after considering the currency hedge. Many analysts make the mistake of comparing US yields to Japanese yields without accounting for the currency hedge, which is not an “apples to apples” comparison. 

    Below we’ll cover the current situation regarding FX-hedged US rates and why this is another factor that will help keep a lid on US interest rates or continue to push them closer to the zero-lower-bound “ZLB.”

    FX-Hedged Treasury Rates

    When comparing cross border investments, accounting for fluctuations in the currency cross rate is a critical yet overlooked part of the puzzle. 

    If an investor in Japan wants to consider buying 10-year Japanese government bonds “JGBs” or 10-year US Treasury bonds “USTs,” comparing the yield on each is not sufficient. 

    If a Japanese investor buys JGBs, they take on interest rate risk. If the same Japanese investors cross the border and buy USTs, they now take both US interest rate risk and the risk of currency fluctuation between the US Dollar and the Yen. Therefore, we cannot compare two risks to one risk. 

    The chart below shows the 10-year US Treasury yield (white) and the 10-year JGB yield (yellow). 

    For the last 10-years, UST yields were higher than JGB yields, but this does not mean that “Japanese yields were keeping US rates low” as the common argument flows. 

    US Rates Vs. Japanese Rates (10-Year %):

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    To make a direct comparison between one risk factor, interest rates, we must account for the cost of hedging the currency fluctuation between the US Dollar and the Yen. 

    This applies less to individual retail investors looking to invest their savings in various global bonds as compared to institutional investment funds allocating billions of dollars. 

    If we net out the cost of the currency hedge and therefore remove the currency risk of the USD vs. Yen, we can see that the remaining yield on a UST drops from its current ~60bps to ~11bps (red line). The Japanese investor now can consider US interest rate risk and a yield of ~11bps or Japanese interest rate risk for a yield of ~1bps. The currency risk is hedged. 

    The bottom panel in the chart below takes the difference between US yields after the currency hedge and Japanese yields. When the bottom panel is in green, UST yields are higher than JGB yields even after accounting for the currency hedge. A set up in which foreign investors can take no currency risk but gain extra yield with US rates will increase flows into US assets, all else equal. 

    US Rates (Hedged) Vs. Japanese Rates (10-Year %):

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    A similar dynamic can be observed below when comparing UST yields to German Bund yields and accounting for the cost of hedging the moves between the USD and the Euro. 

    US Rates (Hedged) Vs. German Rates (10-Year %):

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    While the same concepts apply, for the rest of this note, we’ll be analyzing USTs vs. JGBs. 

    A classic currency hedge takes the difference between 3-month LIBOR rates and adds the cross-currency basis.

    The chart below shows USD 3M LIBOR (in pink), JPY 3M LIBOR (in yellow), and the difference between the two rates (in green). 

    When US short-term interest rates were rising, the spread between USD 3M LIBOR and JPY 3M LIBOR was several hundred basis points wide, adding to what was a costly currency hedge. 

    USD 3M Libor vs. JPY 3M LIBOR:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    The chart below shows the JPY-USD basis, the last factor in the standard currency hedge. 

    A “blow-out” in the currency basis in March increased the hedging cost for foreign investors and may have contributed to a sharper sell-off in US Treasury bonds. 

    JPY-USD BS (3M v 3M) 3M:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    The chart below shows the estimated cost of the currency hedge for a Japanese investor in US Treasury bonds. At the end of 2018, when US short-term interest rates peaked and held the widest spread over Japanese short-term rates, the currency hedge was over 300bps. 

    Chris Whalen of The Institutional Risk Analyst recently wrote an article on MMT and negative interest rates. In that article, Whalen quotes Ralph Delguidice of Pavilion Global Markets discussing the interplay between the Treasury General Account “TGA,” the Federal Reserve Balance Sheet, and USD funding markets. 

    Delguidice forecasts

    ”The key takeaway here now becomes clear. If a 25% contraction in system-wide reserves was insufficient to raise USD funding costs in any of the money markets used to provide leverage to buyers of US assets, what is the likely impact of a huge reversal in these liquidity flows when the Treasury spends down the account? Funds will flow back into a global USD market still saturated with cheap funding, and carry trades will become that much more attractive to foreign buyers as hedge costs fall and even go negative.”

    Estimated Cost of Currency Hedge JPY-USD (Bps):

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg, EPB Macro Research

    Delguidice is suggesting that the cost of the currency hedge, which has fallen from over 3% to under 50bps, may continue to fall and even move into negative territory. 

    Such a development would entice foreign buyers to push UST rates lower until the hedged rate no longer looked attractive. 

    The chart below shows the difference between unhedged UST rates and JGB rates (in pink) and hedged UST rates vs. JGB rates (in green/red). The effective Federal Funds rate is graphed in blue. 

    Despite the widest spread between unhedged yields (in pink) at the end of 2018, the spread between hedged yields was negative and thus suggested that foreign buyers found US rates unattractive. Federal Reserve custody data of Foreign holdings of USTs corroborated that view. 

    10-Year Yield vs. 10-Year JBG Yield (Nominal & Hedged) & EFFR:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    The following chart shows the spread between the market-implied policy rate two years ahead for the US and Japan. As the bond market becomes increasingly convinced that the Fed will be unable to raise short-term interest rates again, the spread between the US and Japan implied policy rates will converge to zero. 

    US & Japan 2-Year Forward Market Implied Policy Rate (Spread):

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    As Delguidice notes, among other factors, this will continue to reduce the hedging cost and allow foreign investors to pick up “free” extra yield with US rates until the market removes the delta between hedged USTs and JGBs. If the hedging cost moves closer to 0%, this implies that UST rates may also compress near JGB yields around the ZLB. 

    Other factors play into UST rates, including future policy expectations and inflation expectations. If the market becomes convinced that US short-term rates are going to be stuck at zero, and the US continues on a path of disinflation outlined in Part I, we should see the belly of the UST curve compress to the ZLB.

    To read more and learn how we translate this research into a low-volatility portfolio, click the link for a two-week free trial of EPB Macro Research on Seeking Alpha.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 5th August 2020

  • Champagne Sales Fizzle, Worse Than Great Depression 
    Champagne Sales Fizzle, Worse Than Great Depression 

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/05/2020 – 02:45

    Champagne sales fizzled during lockdowns as restaurants were closed, weddings canceled, and international travel halted, reported AP News

    The world’s top producers, based in France’s eastern region, are now warning they’ve lost an estimated $2 billion in sales this year. They say turnover has fallen by a third, with some of the worst-selling conditions since the Great Depression. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The industry expects 100 million bottles will be unsold this year as a virus-induced downturn has severely damaged winemakers. 

    “We are experiencing a crisis that we evaluate to be even worse than the Great Depression of 1929,” said Thibaut Le Mailloux of the Champagne Committee (CIVC), who represents 16,000 winemakers.

    CIVC will announce to members at an upcoming meeting (Aug. 18) that harvests will be capped this year to avoid overproduction that would ultimately result in bottle price declines. 

    AP said small winemakers are alarmed by CIVC’s caps because they’re more susceptible to output declines than larger wineries. 

    Anselme Selosse, of Jacques Selosse Champagnes, was angered by the prospects that some of his harvests will have to be destroyed this year. 

    “We are to destroy (the grapes) and we pay for them to be destroyed,” Selosse said, referring to the industry as a whole. “It’s nothing but a catastrophe.”

    “Champagne has never lived through anything like this before, even in the World Wars,” Selosse added. “We have never experienced … a sudden one-third fall in sales. Over one hundred million bottles unsold.

    Top champagne producer Vranken-Pommery said the virus-induced downturn could damage the industry for years.

    “It should not be forgotten that (champagne) has lived through every single war,” said Paul-Francois Vranken, founder of Vranken-Pommery Monopole. “But with the other crises, there was a way out. For now, there is no way out — unless we find a vaccine.”

    Vranken said with fewer parties, gatherings, and festivals, champagne marketing must change from a celebratory drink to one that is like wine. 

    “Even if the bars and the nightclubs are closed for five years, we don’t plan on missing out on customers … There will be a very big change to our marketing that highlights the grandeur of our wines,” Vranken said.

    The champagne industry will remain pressured through the end of this year as virus cases and deaths flare-up. This will likely result in a bankruptcy wave among winemakers. 

     

     

     

  • Turkish-Backed Forces On Guard For Liberal Values And Same-Sex Marriages In Syria
    Turkish-Backed Forces On Guard For Liberal Values And Same-Sex Marriages In Syria

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/05/2020 – 02:00

    Via Southfront.org,

    Democracy and liberal values are on the rise in the opposition-held part of Syria’s Greater Idlib region.

    On July 31, forces of Hayat Tahrir al-Sham (formerly the Syrian branch of al-Qaeda) raided positions of the Syrian Army in the vicinity of the town of al-Ruwaihah in southern Idlib. Following the attack, Hayat Tahrir al-Sham also launched unguided rockets at army positions near the town of Maarat al-Numan. Pro-militant sources claimed that 5 Syrian soldiers were killed or injured in the attacks. Pro-government sources denied these claims.

    On August 1 and August 2, militants shelled the government-controlled villages of Kafr Nabel and Hazzarin.

    The army responded to these actions on August 2 and August 3 by targeting Hayat Tahrir al-Sham positions at Kafr Uwayd, al-Barah and Wadi al-Butah. It also deployed reinforcements to the frontline in the Zawiya Mountian area. Pro-Turkish and pro-militant sources claim that these actions signal that the Syrian military is preparing an offensive operation in the area.

    At the same time, they emphasize that Idlib rebels are adamant to secure gains of the so-called Syrian revolution from attacks of the Assad regime. On August 1, Idlib rebels even held a special performance dedicated to this on the frontline. A thermal surveillance system of the Syrian Army recorded two militants having gay sex on the roof of a building at a frontline position in the vicinity of the town of Enkawi‏ in southern Idlib.

    The town is jointly controlled by Hayat Tahrir al-Sham and the National Front for Liberation. Both these groups pretend to be promoting hardcore conservative, Islamic values (often similar to al-Qaeda-styled ideology). However, the practice, specially with multiple sex scandals over the recent years, demonstrates that their members and leadership have their own version of this ‘conservative ideology’.

    On August 1 and August 2, ISIS cells attacked Syrian Army positions in the provinces of Homs and Deir Ezzor. The first attack took place in the outskirts of the town of al-Sukhnah, while another one erupted west of Deir Ezzor city. At least 5 pro-government fighters were killed and several others were injured.

    In a strange coincidence, the ISIS attacks increased just after the so-called Self-Administration in North and Northeast Syria, an administrative body of Kurdish militias controlling the northeast, reached a deal with the US oil company Delaware-based Delta Crescent Energy LLC. The company will manage oil trading in the territory controlled by US-backed Kurdish forces and modernize the oil fields that they and the US-led coalition currently control.

    Kurdish militias and US troops control a larger part of the Syrian oil resources, including al-Rmelan and al-Omar oil fields. The development of the cooperation between the Syrian Democratic Forces and the US in the field of oil business is setting conditions for a further separation of the territories controlled by US-backed forces from the rest of Syria.

  • Virgin Galactic Unveils Concept Images Of Supersonic Commercial Jet
    Virgin Galactic Unveils Concept Images Of Supersonic Commercial Jet

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/05/2020 – 01:00

    Shares of Virgin Galactic Holdings were up 3.5% on Monday afternoon following a press release earlier in the day announcing its partnership with Rolls-Royce to develop a high-speed commercial aircraft.

    Virgin entered a non-binding Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) with Rolls-Royce to design and develop engine propulsion technology for a commercial airliner that can fly at speeds over March 3.

    But shares quickly tumbled after the company announced it is planning a new share sale and will delay plans to carry founder Richard Branson into space until early next year – a milestone flight seen as the beginning of the company’s tourism business.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Branson’s trip will occur in the first quarter of 2021 instead of this year, assuming two test flights “demonstrate the expected results,” Virgin Galactic said in a statement Monday as it reported earnings. The company said the share offering would generate gross proceeds of about $460 million, to be used for general purposes.

    But, Virgin also released a few fantastic conceptual designs of the new supersonic commercial aircraft that would have the capacity for 9 to 19 people at an altitude above 60,000 feet. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The now-retired Concorde flew at average cruising speed around Mach 2, which would mean the Virgin aircraft could hit speeds over 2,300 mph, or about 50% faster. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Supersonic travel for commercial use was paused in 2000 when Air France Flight 4590 crashed shortly after takeoff. However, there’s been an effort to revive supersonic travel in the late 2020s, with even talks of hypersonic flight after 2030. 

    Virgin announced in May it would work with NASA on supersonic travel for commercial use. NASA has been developing a plane with new technology that would transform supersonic booms into a sonic thump, or as loud as a car door. 

    Another company, developing a supersonic commercial jet, is Boom Supersonic, set to unveil its supersonic demonstrator this fall.  

    George Whitesides, Chief Space Officer, Virgin Galactic, said:

     “We are excited to complete the Mission Concept Review and unveil this initial design concept of a high-speed aircraft, which we envision as blending safe and reliable commercial travel with unrivaled customer experience. We are pleased to collaborate with the innovative team at Rolls-Royce as we strive to develop sustainable, cutting-edge propulsion systems for the aircraft, and we are pleased to be working with the FAA to ensure our designs can make a practical impact from the start. We have made great progress so far, and we look forward to opening up a new frontier in high-speed travel.”

    Rolls-Royce North America Chairman & CEO Tom Bell said: 

    “We are excited to partner with Virgin Galactic and TSC to explore the future of sustainable high-speed flight. Rolls-Royce brings a unique history in high-speed propulsion, going back to the Concorde, and offers world-class technical capabilities to develop and field the advanced propulsion systems needed to power commercially available high-Mach travel.”

    The good news for Virgin and Boom is that, none of their supersonic planes will fly passengers until the late 2020s, if not early 2030s. We’ve noted on several occasions, the travel and tourism industry could take 3 to 5 years to recover. 

  • P Is For Predator State: The Building Blocks Of Tyranny From A To Z
    P Is For Predator State: The Building Blocks Of Tyranny From A To Z

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/05/2020 – 00:05

    Authored by John Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

    “When a population becomes distracted by trivia, when cultural life is redefined as a perpetual round of entertainments, when serious public conversation becomes a form of baby-talk, when, in short, a people become an audience and their public business a vaudeville act, then a nation finds itself at risk; a culture-death is a clear possibility.”

    – Professor Neil Postman, Amusing Ourselves to Death: Discourse in the Age of Show Business

    While mainstream America continues to fixate on the drama-filled reality show scripted by the powers-that-be, directed from the nation’s capital, and played out in high definition across the country, the American Police State has moved steadily forward.

    Nothing has changed.

    The COVID-19 pandemic has been a convenient, traumatic, devastating distraction.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The American people, the permanent underclass in America, have allowed themselves to be so distracted and divided that they have failed to notice the building blocks of tyranny being laid down right under their noses by the architects of the Deep State.

    Trump, Obama, Bush, Clinton: they have all been complicit in carrying out the Deep State’s agenda. Unless something changes to restore the balance of power, the next president—the new boss—will be the same as the old boss.

    Frankly, it really doesn’t matter what you call the old/new boss—the Deep State, the Controllers, the masterminds, the shadow government, the corporate elite, the police state, the surveillance state, the military industrial complex—so long as you understand that no matter who occupies the White House, it is a profit-driven, an unelected bureaucracy that is actually calling the shots.

    If our losses are mounting with every passing day—and they are—it is a calculated siege intended to ensure our defeat at the hands of a totalitarian regime.

    Free speech, the right to protest, the right to challenge government wrongdoing, due process, a presumption of innocence, the right to self-defense, accountability and transparency in government, privacy, media, sovereignty, assembly, bodily integrity, representative government: all of these and more are casualties in the government’s war on the American people.

    Set against a backdrop of government surveillance, militarized federal police, SWAT team raids, asset forfeiture, overcriminalization, armed surveillance drones, whole body scanners, stop and frisk searches, and the like—all of which have been sanctioned by Congress, the White House and the courts—our constitutional freedoms are being steadily chipped away at, undermined, eroded, whittled down, and generally discarded.

    As a result, the American people have been treated like enemy combatants, to be spied on, tracked, scanned, frisked, searched, subjected to all manner of intrusions, intimidated, invaded, raided, manhandled, censored, silenced, shot at, locked up, and denied due process.

    None of these dangers have dissipated in any way.

    They have merely disappeared from our televised news streams.

    It’s time to get educated on what’s really going on. Thus, in the interest of liberty and truth, here’s an A-to-Z primer that spells out the grim realities of life in the American Police State that no one seems to be talking about anymore.

    A is for the AMERICAN POLICE STATE. A police state “is characterized by bureaucracy, secrecy, perpetual wars, a nation of suspects, militarization, surveillance, widespread police presence, and a citizenry with little recourse against police actions.”

    B is for our battered BILL OF RIGHTS. In the militarized police culture that is America today, where you can be kicked, punched, tasered, shot, intimidated, harassed, stripped, searched, brutalized, terrorized, wrongfully arrested, and even killed by a police officer, and that officer is rarely held accountable for violating your rights, the Bill of Rights doesn’t amount to much.

    C is for CIVIL ASSET FORFEITURE. This governmental scheme to deprive Americans of their liberties—namely, the right to property—is being carried out under the guise of civil asset forfeiture, a government practice wherein government agents (usually the police and now TSA agents) seize private property they “suspect” may be connected to criminal activity. Then, whether or not any crime is actually proven to have taken place, the government keeps the citizen’s property and it’s virtually impossible to get it back.

    D is for DRONES. It was estimated that at least 30,000 drones would be airborne in American airspace by 2020, part of an $80 billion industry. Although some drones will be used for benevolent purposes, many will also be equipped with lasers, tasers and scanning devices, among other weapons—all aimed at “we the people.”

    E is for EMERGENCY STATE. From 9/11 to COVID-19, we have been the subjected to an “emergency state” that justifies all manner of government tyranny and power grabs in the so-called name of national security. The government’s ongoing attempts to declare so-called national emergencies in order to circumvent the Constitution’s system of checks and balances constitutes yet another expansion of presidential power that exposes the nation to further constitutional peril.

    F is for FASCISM. A study conducted by Princeton and Northwestern University concluded that the U.S. government does not represent the majority of American citizens. Instead, the study found that the government is ruled by the rich and powerful, or the so-called “economic elite.” Moreover, the researchers concluded that policies enacted by this governmental elite nearly always favor special interests and lobbying groups. In other words, we are being ruled by an oligarchy disguised as a democracy, and arguably on our way towards fascism—a form of government where private corporate interests rule, money calls the shots, and the people are seen as mere economic units or databits.

    G is for GRENADE LAUNCHERS and GLOBAL POLICE. The federal government has distributed more than $18 billion worth of battlefield-appropriate military weapons, vehicles and equipment such as drones, tanks, and grenade launchers to domestic police departments across the country. As a result, most small-town police forces now have enough firepower to render any citizen resistance futile. Now take those small-town police forces, train them to look and act like the military, and then enlist them to be part of the United Nations’ Strong Cities Network program, and you not only have a standing army that operates beyond the reach of the Constitution but one that is part of a global police force.

    H is for HOLLOW-POINT BULLETS. The government’s efforts to militarize and weaponize its agencies and employees is reaching epic proportions, with federal agencies as varied as the Department of Homeland Security and the Social Security Administration stockpiling millions of lethal hollow-point bullets, which violate international law. Ironically, while the government continues to push for stricter gun laws for the general populace, the U.S. military’s arsenal of weapons makes the average American’s handgun look like a Tinker Toy.

    I is for the INTERNET OF THINGS, in which internet-connected “things” monitor your home, your health and your habits in order to keep your pantry stocked, your utilities regulated and your life under control and relatively worry-free. The key word here, however, is control. This “connected” industry propels us closer to a future where police agencies apprehend virtually anyone if the government “thinks” they may commit a crime, driverless cars populate the highways, and a person’s biometrics are constantly scanned and used to track their movements, target them for advertising, and keep them under perpetual surveillance.

    J is for JAILING FOR PROFIT. Having outsourced their inmate population to private prisons run by private corporations, this profit-driven form of mass punishment has given rise to a $70 billion private prison industry that relies on the complicity of state governments to keep their privately run prisons full by jailing large numbers of Americans for petty crimes.

    K is for KENTUCKY V. KING. In an 8-1 ruling, the Supreme Court ruled that police officers can break into homes, without a warrant, even if it’s the wrong home as long as they think they may have a reason to do so. Despite the fact that the police in question ended up pursuing the wrong suspect, invaded the wrong apartment and violated just about every tenet that stands between the citizenry and a police state, the Court sanctioned the warrantless raid, leaving Americans with little real protection in the face of all manner of abuses by law enforcement officials.

    L is for LICENSE PLATE READERS, which enable law enforcement and private agencies to track the whereabouts of vehicles, and their occupants, all across the country. This data collected on tens of thousands of innocent people is also being shared between police agencies, as well as with government fusion centers and private companies. This puts Big Brother in the driver’s seat.

    M is for MAIN CORE. Since the 1980s, the U.S. government has acquired and maintained, without warrant or court order, a database of names and information on Americans considered to be threats to the nation. As Salon reports, this database, reportedly dubbed “Main Core,” is to be used by the Army and FEMA in times of national emergency or under martial law to locate and round up Americans seen as threats to national security. There are at least 8 million Americans in the Main Core database.

    N is for NO-KNOCK RAIDS. Owing to the militarization of the nation’s police forces, SWAT teams are now increasingly being deployed for routine police matters. In fact, more than 80,000 of these paramilitary raids are carried out every year. That translates to more than 200 SWAT team raids every day in which police crash through doors, damage private property, terrorize adults and children alike, kill family pets, assault or shoot anyone that is perceived as threatening—and all in the pursuit of someone merely suspected of a crime, usually possession of some small amount of drugs.

    O is for OVERCRIMINALIZATION and OVERREGULATION. Thanks to an overabundance of 4500-plus federal crimes and 400,000 plus rules and regulations, it’s estimated that the average American actually commits three felonies a day without knowing it. As a result of this overcriminalization, we’re seeing an uptick in Americans being arrested and jailed for such absurd “violations” as letting their kids play at a park unsupervised, collecting rainwater and snow runoff on their own property, growing vegetables in their yard, and holding Bible studies in their living room.

    P is for PATHOCRACY and PRECRIME. When our own government treats us as things to be manipulated, maneuvered, mined for data, manhandled by police and other government agents, mistreated, and then jailed in profit-driven private prisons if we dare step out of line, we are no longer operating under a constitutional republic. Instead, what we are experiencing is a pathocracy: tyranny at the hands of a psychopathic government, which “operates against the interests of its own people except for favoring certain groups.” Couple that with the government’s burgeoning precrime programs, which will use fusion centers, data collection agencies, behavioral scientists, corporations, social media, and community organizers and by relying on cutting-edge technology for surveillance, facial recognition, predictive policing, biometrics, and behavioral epigenetics in order to identify and deter so-called potential “extremists,” dissidents or rabble-rousers. Bear in mind that anyone seen as opposing the government—whether they’re Left, Right or somewhere in between—is now viewed as an extremist.

    Q is for QUALIFIED IMMUNITY. Qualified immunity allows police officers to walk away without paying a dime for their wrongdoing. Conveniently, those deciding whether a cop should be immune from having to personally pay for misbehavior on the job all belong to the same system, all cronies with a vested interest in protecting the police and their infamous code of silence: city and county attorneys, police commissioners, city councils and judges.

    R is for ROADSIDE STRIP SEARCHES and BLOOD DRAWS. The courts have increasingly erred on the side of giving government officials—especially the police—vast discretion in carrying out strip searches, blood draws and even anal and vaginal probes for a broad range of violations, no matter how minor the offense. In the past, strip searches were resorted to only in exceptional circumstances where police were confident that a serious crime was in progress. In recent years, however, strip searches have become routine operating procedures in which everyone is rendered a suspect and, as such, is subjected to treatment once reserved for only the most serious of criminals.

    S is for the SURVEILLANCE STATE. On any given day, the average American going about his daily business will be monitored, surveilled, spied on and tracked in more than 20 different ways, by both government and corporate eyes and ears. A byproduct of the electronic concentration camp in which we live, whether you’re walking through a store, driving your car, checking email, or talking to friends and family on the phone, you can be sure that some government agency, whether the NSA or some other entity, is listening in and tracking your behavior. This doesn’t even begin to touch on the corporate trackers that monitor your purchases, web browsing, Facebook posts and other activities taking place in the cyber sphere.

    T is for TASERS. Nonlethal weapons such as tasers, stun guns, rubber pellets and the like have been used by police as weapons of compliance more often and with less restraint—even against women and children—and in some instances, even causing death. These “nonlethal” weapons also enable police to aggress with the push of a button, making the potential for overblown confrontations over minor incidents that much more likely. A Taser Shockwave, for instance, can electrocute a crowd of people at the touch of a button

    U is for UNARMED CITIZENS SHOT BY POLICE. No longer is it unusual to hear about incidents in which police shoot unarmed individuals first and ask questions later, often attributed to a fear for their safety. Yet the fatality rate of on-duty patrol officers is reportedly far lower than many other professions, including construction, logging, fishing, truck driving, and even trash collection.

    V is for VIRUSES AND FORCED VACCINATIONS. What started out as an apparent effort to prevent a novel coronavirus from sickening the nation (and the world) has become yet another means by which world governments (including the U.S.) can expand their powers, abuse their authority, and further oppress their constituents. With millions of dollars in stimulus funds being directed towards policing agencies across the country, the federal government plans to fight this COVID-19 virus with riot gear, gas masks, ballistic helmets, drones, and hi-tech surveillance technology. The road we are traveling is paved with lockdowns, SWAT team raids, mass surveillance and forced vaccinations. Now there’s talk of mobilizing the military to deliver forced vaccinations, mass surveillance in order to carry out contact tracing, and heavy fines and jail time for those who dare to venture out without a mask, congregate in worship without the government’s blessing, or re-open their  businesses without the government’s say-so.

    W is for WHOLE-BODY SCANNERS. Using either x-ray radiation or radio waves, scanning devices and government mobile units are being used not only to “see” through your clothes but to spy on you within the privacy of your home. While these mobile scanners are being sold to the American public as necessary security and safety measures, we can ill afford to forget that such systems are rife with the potential for abuse, not only by government bureaucrats but by the technicians employed to operate them.

    X is for X-KEYSCORE, one of the many spying programs carried out by the National Security Agency that targets every person in the United States who uses a computer or phone. This top-secret program “allows analysts to search with no prior authorization through vast databases containing emails, online chats and the browsing histories of millions of individuals.”

    Y is for YOU-NESS. Using your face, mannerisms, social media and “you-ness” against you, you are now be tracked based on what you buy, where you go, what you do in public, and how you do what you do. Facial recognition software promises to create a society in which every individual who steps out into public is tracked and recorded as they go about their daily business. The goal is for government agents to be able to scan a crowd of people and instantaneously identify all of the individuals present. Facial recognition programs are being rolled out in states all across the country.

    Z is for ZERO TOLERANCE. We have moved into a new paradigm in which young people are increasingly viewed as suspects and treated as criminals by school officials and law enforcement alike, often for engaging in little more than childish behavior or for saying the “wrong” word. In some jurisdictions, students have also been penalized under school zero tolerance policies for such inane “crimes” as carrying cough drops, wearing black lipstick, bringing nail clippers to school, using Listerine or Scope, and carrying fold-out combs that resemble switchblades. The lesson being taught to our youngest—and most impressionable—citizens is this: in the American police state, you’re either a prisoner (shackled, controlled, monitored, ordered about, limited in what you can do and say, your life not your own) or a prison bureaucrat (politician, police officer, judge, jailer, spy, profiteer, etc.).

    As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, the reality we must come to terms with is that in the post-9/11 America we live in today, the government does whatever it wants, freedom be damned.

    We have moved beyond the era of representative government and entered a new age.

    You can call it the age of authoritarianism. Or fascism. Or oligarchy. Or the American police state.

    Whatever label you want to put on it, the end result is the same: tyranny.

  • Woman Throws Coffee In Man's Face For Not Wearing A Mask, Gets Boyfriend's Ass Beat
    Woman Throws Coffee In Man’s Face For Not Wearing A Mask, Gets Boyfriend’s Ass Beat

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/04/2020 – 23:45

    A woman in Manhattan Beach has been caught on video after throwing a hot cup of coffee in a man’s face after he refused to put on a mask when she demanded that he don one.

    California’s new social distancing requirements order people to wear masks in public even when they’re outside, especially if they’re within six feet of another person. When accosted by the woman, the two men said they didn’t believe in masks, and refused when she demanded that they put one on.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to a report by Fox 11, James Hernandez and his friend Matthew Roy were eating burritos outside while out in public in Manhattan Beach without masks on. They said they had just sat down to eat when a woman – who was walking with her well-dressed boyfriend – stopped and demanded they put their masks on.

    Hernanez caught everything that happened next on camera. He wears a bodycam, he says, because he is frequently accosted for being a Trump supporter, and having the stones to wear his Make America Great Again hat in public.

    Here’s more from Fox 11:

    “Y’all need to be wearing masks,” the woman can be heard saying.

    “No we don’t,” Hernandez replies. “We’re locals here but were on the other side of the fence, we don’t believe in this stuff.”

    “I hadn’t even gotten to start eating the burrito yet before someone wanted to give me a mask lecture,” Roy said.
    “I guess the guy really wanted to impress his girlfriend because I was pretty dismissive, I thought when I turned my back on them they would just move on, but he wanted to stand there and engage me.”

    Roy says the woman then stuck her middle finger in his face, and tensions escalated further until she threw her coffee in his face.

    Roy immediately gets up, and begins punching the woman’s boyfriend in response.

    “She decided to slam her coffee into my head and that’s when I decided to get up and beat up her boyfriend,” Roy said.

    “I got a few licks in and I have brothers at home and as soon as the gentleman or the gentler man said stop, I did, I backed off.”

    The bloodied man called police and reported he’d been assaulted.

    The man called the police to report that he had been assaulted (a total alpha move), but after a brief investigation, neither the man, nor Hernandez, nor the woman, were arrested. The couple in the video haven’t been identified.

    Watch a clip of the attack in the report below:

  • Veteran Virologist Slams Mainstream Media's "Misinformation" About An Effective COVID Treatment
    Veteran Virologist Slams Mainstream Media’s “Misinformation” About An Effective COVID Treatment

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/04/2020 – 23:25

    Authored by Steven Hatfill via RealClearPolitics.com,

    On Friday, July 31, in a column ostensibly dealing with health care “misinformation,” Washington Post media critic Margaret Sullivan opened by lambasting “fringe doctors spouting dangerous falsehoods about hydroxychloroquine as a COVID-19 wonder cure.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Actually, it was Sullivan who was spouting dangerous falsehoods about this drug, something the Washington Post and much of the rest of the media have been doing since for months. On May 15, the Post offered a stark warning to any Americans who may have taken hope in a possible therapy for COVID-19.

    In the newspaper’s telling, there was nothing unambiguous about the science — or the politics — of hydroxychloroquine:

    “Drug promoted by Trump as coronavirus game-changer increasingly linked to deaths,” blared the headline.

    Written by three Post staff writers, the story asserted that the effectiveness of hydroxychloroquine in treating COVID-19 is scant and that the drug is inherently unsafe.

    This claim is nonsense.

    Biased against the use of hydroxychloroquine for COVID-19 – and the Washington Post is hardly alone — the paper described an April 21, 2020, drug study on U.S. Veterans Affairs patients hospitalized with the illness. It found a high death rate in patients taking the drug hydroxychloroquine. But this was a flawed study with a small sample, the main flaw being that the drug was given to the sickest patients who were already dying because of their age and severe pre-existing conditions. This study was quickly debunked. It had been posted on a non-peer-reviewed medical archive that specifically warns that studies posted on its website should not be reported in the media as established information.

    Yet, the Post and countless other news outlets did just the opposite, making repeated claims that hydroxychloroquine was ineffective and caused serious cardiac problems. Nowhere was there any mention of the fact that COVID-19 damages the heart during infection, sometimes causing irregular and sometimes fatal heart rhythms in patients not taking the drug.

    To a media unrelentingly hostile to Donald Trump, this meant that the president could be portrayed as recklessly promoting the use of a “dangerous” drug. Ignoring the refutation of the VA study in its May 15 article, the Washington Post cited a Brazil study published on April 24 in which a COVID trial using chloroquine (a related but different drug than hydroxychloroquine) was stopped because 11 patients treated with it died. The reporters never mentioned another problem with that study: The Brazilian doctors were giving their patients lethal cumulative doses of the drug.

    On and on it has gone since then, in a circle of self-reinforcing commentary. Following the news that Trump was taking the drug himself, opinion hosts on cable news channels launched continual attacks on both hydroxychloroquine and the president. “This will kill you!” Fox News Channel’s Neil Cavuto exclaimed. “The president of the United States just acknowledge that he is taking hydroxychloroquine, a drug that [was] meant really to treat malaria and lupus.”

    Washington Post reporters Ariana Cha and Laurie McGinley were back again on May 22, with a new article shouting out the new supposed news:

    “Antimalarial drug touted by President Trump is linked to increased risk of death in coronavirus patients, study says.”

    The media uproar this time was based on a large study just published in the Lancet. There was just one problem. The Lancet paper was fraudulent and it was quickly retracted.

    However, the damage from the biased media storm was done and it was long-lasting. Continuing patient enrollment needed for early-use clinical trials of hydroxychloroquine dried up within a week. Patients were afraid to take the drug, doctors became afraid to prescribe it, pharmacies refused to fill prescriptions, and in a rush of incompetent analysis and non-existent senior leadership, the FDA revoked its Emergency Use Authorization for the drug.

    So what is the real story on hydroxychloroquine? Here, briefly, is what we know:

    When the COVID-19 pandemic began, a search was made for suitable antiviral therapies to use as treatment until a vaccine could be produced. One drug, hydroxychloroquine, was found to be the most effective and safe for use against the virus. Federal funds were used for clinical trials of it, but there was no guidance from Dr. Anthony Fauci or the NIH Treatment Guidelines Panel on what role the drug would play in the national pandemic response.

    Fauci seemed to be unaware that there actually was a national pandemic plan for respiratory viruses.

    Following a careful regimen developed by doctors in France, some knowledgeable practicing U.S. physicians began prescribing hydroxychloroquine to patients still in the early phase of COVID infection. Its effects seemed dramatic. Patients still became sick, but for the most part they avoided hospitalization. In contrast – and in error – the NIH-funded studies somehow became focused on giving hydroxychloroquine to late-presenting hospitalized patients. This was in spite of the fact that unlike the drug’s early use in ambulatory patients, there was no real data to support the drug’s use in more severe hospitalized patients.

    By April, it was clear that roughly seven days from the time of the first onset of symptoms, a COVID-19 infection could sometimes progress into a more radical late phase of severe disease with inflammation of the blood vessels in the body and immune system over-reactions. Many patients developed blood clots in their lungs and needed mechanical ventilation. Some needed kidney dialysis. In light of this pathological carnage, no antiviral drug could be expected to show much of an effect during this severe second stage of COVID.

    On April 6, 2020, an international team of medical experts published an extensive study of hydroxychloroquine in more than 130,000 patients with connective tissue disorders. They reaffirmed that hydroxychloroquine was a safe drug with no serious side effects. The drug could safely be given to pregnant women and breast-feeding mothers. Consequently, countries such as China, Turkey, South Korea, India, Morocco, Algeria, and others began to use hydroxychloroquine widely and early in their national pandemic response. Doctors overseas were safely prescribing the drug based on clinical signs and symptoms because widespread testing was not available.

    However, the NIH promoted a much different strategy for the United States. The “Fauci Strategy” was to keep early infected patients quarantined at home without treatment until they developed a shortness of breath and had to be admitted to a hospital. Then they would they be given hydroxychloroquine. The Food and Drug Administration cluelessly agreed to this doctrine and it stated in its hydroxychloroquine Emergency Use Authorization (EUA) that “hospitalized patients were likely to have a greater prospect of benefit (compared to ambulatory patients with mild illness).”

    In reality just the opposite was true. This was a tragic mistake by Fauci and FDA Commissioner Dr. Stephen Hahn and it was a mistake that would cost the lives of thousands of Americans in the days to come.

    At the same time, accumulating data showed remarkable results if hydroxychloroquine were given to patients early, during a seven-day window from the time of first symptom onset. If given during this window, most infections did not progress into the severe, lethal second stage of the disease. Patients still got sick, but they avoided hospitalization or the later transfer to an intensive care unit. In mid-April a high-level memo was sent to the FDA alerting them to the fact that the best use for hydroxychloroquine was for its early use in still ambulatory COVID patients. These patients were quarantined at home but were not short of breath and did not yet require supplemental oxygen and hospitalization.  

    Failing to understand that COVID-19 could be a two-stage disease process, the FDA ignored the memo and, as previously mentioned, it withdrew its EUA for hydroxychloroquine based on flawed studies and clinical trials that were applicable only to late-stage COVID patients.

    By now, however, some countries had already implemented early, aggressive, outpatient community treatment with hydroxychloroquine and within weeks were able to minimize their COVID deaths and bring their national pandemic under some degree of control.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In countries such as Great Britain and the United States, where the “Fauci-Hahn Strategy” was followed, there was a much higher death rate and an ever-increasing number of cases. COVID patients in the U.S. would continue to be quarantined at home and left untreated until they developed shortness of breath. Then they would be admitted to the hospital and given hydroxychloroquine outside the narrow window for the drug’s maximum effectiveness.

    In further contrast, countries that started out with the “Fauci-Hahn Doctrine” and then later shifted their policy towards aggressive outpatient hydroxychloroquine use, after a brief lag period also saw a stunning rapid reduction in COVID mortality and hospital admissions.

    Finally, several nations that had started using an aggressive early-use outpatient policy for hydroxychloroquine, including France and Switzerland, stopped this practice when the WHO temporarily withdrew its support for the drug. Five days after the publication of the fake Lancet study and the resulting media onslaught, Swiss politicians banned hydroxychloroquine use in the country from May  27 until June 11, when it was quickly reinstated.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The consequences of suddenly stopping hydroxychloroquine can be seen by examining a graph of the Case Fatality Ratio Index (nr CFR) for Switzerland. This is derived by dividing the number of daily new COVID fatalities by the new cases resolved over a period with a seven-day moving average. Looking at the evolution curve of the CFR it can be seen that during the weeks preceding the ban on hydroxychloroquine, the nrCFR index fluctuated between 3% and 5%.

    Following a lag of 13 days after stopping outpatient hydroxychloroquine use, the country’s COVID-19 deaths increased four-fold and the nrCFR index stayed elevated at the highest level it had been since early in the COVID pandemic, oscillating at over 10%-15%. Early outpatient hydroxychloroquine was restarted June 11 but the four-fold “wave of excess lethality” lasted until June 22, after which the nrCFR rapidly returned to its background value. 

    Here in our country, Fauci continued to ignore the ever accumulating and remarkable early-use data on hydroxychloroquine and he became focused on a new antiviral compound named remdesivir. This was an experimental drug that had to be given intravenously every day for five days. It was never suitable for major widespread outpatient or at-home use as part of a national pandemic plan. We now know now that remdesivir has no effect on overall COVID patient mortality and it costs thousands of dollars per patient.  

    Hydroxychloroquine, by contrast, costs 60 cents a tablet, it can be taken at home, it fits in with the national pandemic plan for respiratory viruses, and a course of therapy simply requires swallowing three tablets in the first 24 hours followed by one tablet every 12 hours for five days.

    There are now 53 studies that show positive results of hydroxychloroquine in COVID infections.

    There are 14 global studies that show neutral or negative results – and 10 of them were of patients in very late stages of COVID-19, where no antiviral drug can be expected to have much effect. Of the remaining four studies, two come from the same University of Minnesota author. The other two are from the faulty Brazil paper, which should be retracted, and the fake Lancet paper, which was.

    Millions of people are taking or have taken hydroxychloroquine in nations that have managed to get their national pandemic under some degree of control. Two recent, large, early-use clinical trials have been conducted by the Henry Ford Health System and at Mount Sinai showing a 51% and 47% lower mortality, respectively, in hospitalized patients given hydroxychloroquine. A recent study from Spain published on July 29, two days before Margaret Sullivan’s strafing of “fringe doctors,” shows a 66% reduction in COVID mortality in patients taking hydroxychloroquine. No serious side effects were reported in these studies and no epidemic of heartbeat abnormalities.

    This is ground-shaking news. Why is it not being widely reported? Why is the American media trying to run the U.S. pandemic response with its own misinformation?

    *  *  *

    Steven Hatfill is a veteran virologist who helped establish the Rapid Hemorrhagic Fever Response Teams for the National Medical Disaster Unit in Kenya, Africa. He is an adjunct assistant professor in two departments at the George Washington University Medical Center where he teaches mass casualty medicine. He is principle author of the prophetic book “Three Seconds Until Midnight — Preparing for the Next Pandemic,” published by Amazon in 2019.

  • The Circle Of Death: Bankrupt Companies "Unfile" To Receive Government Bailouts, Then Immediately File Again
    The Circle Of Death: Bankrupt Companies “Unfile” To Receive Government Bailouts, Then Immediately File Again

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/04/2020 – 23:05

    By now everyone knows that one fifth of LL corporations are “zombies” – companies that should be out of business as they are technically insolvent and don’t even generate enough cash flow to meet their debt obligations, but continue to exist thanks to either record low rates which allow them to issue even more debt and use the proceeds to pay for existing interest expense (and roll over debt maturities), or government handouts which perpetuate their pathetic, deflationary existence.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But did you know that there are now reincarnated zombies: companies which were in such a dire state they did file for bankruptcy despite the Fed’s unprecedented monetary generosity… and yet shortly after they “unfiled” just so they would be eligible for government “stimulus”?

    As Bloomberg’s Steven Church puts it, say your business needs a bailout from the federal Paycheck Protection Program, but you’ve already gone bankrupt, making your firm ineligible. Tough luck, right? Well, maybe not.

    Such is the pathetic state of modern capitalism that some companies have “unfiled” for bankruptcy, arranged a PPP bailout loan, and then almost immediately refiled for bankruptcy. They range from a rural Texas hospital to a group of pizza joints in Tennessee and a Portland, Oregon firm that

    As Church explains, “the logic behind the PPP law was to ensure money went to save jobs, not to prop up failing companies, said Las Vegas bankruptcy attorney Brett Axelrod. But Congress didn’t do its homework. There isn’t any real difference between a company that can’t pay workers during a pandemic without a government loan and one forced into bankruptcy by a pandemic, she said.”

    The government really wasn’t thinking it through,” Axelrod said. “What do companies do in a pandemic? They file for bankruptcy.”

    And in this case, they then unfile to get some more taxpayer cash for which they are only eligible if they are out of bankruptcy court… and then immediately file again!

    According to Bloomberg, a proposed change to the law could make such legal contortions unnecessary, but only if Congress is willing, during an election year, to vote to give federal aid to bankrupt businesses. Faith Community Health System in rural, northern Texas “unfiled” its Chapter 9 case in May, lined up a $1.8 million PPP loan, and went back into bankruptcy about two weeks later.

    “It was a matter of life or death for us,” Faith Community Chief Executive Officer Frank Beaman told Bloomberg. Two nearby hospitals had shut down in recent years, leaving Faith Community the only option within 50 miles for many of Jack County’s 9,000 residents, according to court records. The hospital initially filed bankruptcy in February after losing an arbitration fight with an insurer that refused to pay for lab tests. Covid-19 made things worse.

    Lawyers warned that if U.S. Bankruptcy Judge Mark X. Mullin didn’t dismiss the bankruptcy, it “could jeopardize the lives of citizens who may find themselves suffering with Covid-19 and in dire need of medical treatment.” The judge allowed Faith Community to proceed.

    In the end, however, death won… again.

    One of the first companies to unfile was Starplex Corp, a Portland, Oregon-based provider of security and related services for concerts, fairs and sporting events. Starplex argued that if it had to stay in bankruptcy without a PPP loan, it would most likely have to liquidate. Starplex got a loan and returned to court within a month.

    Henry Anesthesia Associates used the technique even though its original bankruptcy began last September, long before the Covid outbreak. The Stockbridge, Georgia medical service left court protection in June to pursue a PPP loan, and returned on July 28 after getting almost $1 million. The move was justified, Henry said in court papers, because it’s the sole anesthesia provider to the local hospital, and it “continued to be on the front lines fighting the Covid-19 pandemic.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Needless to say, the law is completely broken, bankruptcy lawyers say – and we wholeheartedly agree – but in a world where money is worthless – and in some countries a liability thanks to negative interest rates – that’s the norm. If the program is designed to protect small businesses during the pandemic, it makes no sense to deny a bankrupt company a PPP loan, said Joe Cotterman, one of about 250 small-business trustees empowered by federal law to help companies navigate Chapter  11.

    The U.S. loans are forgivable if the money is used to pay employees or other approved expenses. It’s easier in bankruptcy to ensure a borrower complies with those rules, since borrowers must disclose far more detail when reorganizing in court, Cotterman said.
    “There are a lot more eyes on it,” he said, although how that justifies this epic abuse of taxpayer funds to reincarnate a corporate zombie just to then burn it down again, is a different question entirely.

  • The Underground Bunker Business Is Booming As Global Events Spiral Out Of Control
    The Underground Bunker Business Is Booming As Global Events Spiral Out Of Control

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/04/2020 – 22:45

    Authored by Michael Snyder via TheMostImportantNews.com,

    This is a really good time to be selling underground bunkers.  The COVID-19 pandemic, civil unrest in major U.S. cities, and concern about what else may be coming have combined to create a tremendous amount of demand for “survival real estate”.  In all my years of writing, I have never seen anything like this.  I have been hearing from so many people that suddenly feel a great urgency to prepare for the total collapse of society, and quite a few of them have either recently relocated or plan to do so in the near future.  For some, moving entirely out of the country seems like the best option, but for most others the goal is to find a way to survive the coming chaos here in the United States.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Of course a lot of people are still tied to major population centers by their jobs, and for a lot of those individuals a “survival bunker” in a remote location that they can bug out to if things get crazy enough is an attractive option.

    In South Dakota, one company has established the “largest survival community on Earth”, and the New York Post recently interviewed a 69-year-old man named Tom Soulsby that purchased one of the very first underground bunkers in that community…

    Tom Soulsby, 69, and his wife, Mary, were one of the first to buy a bunker at Vivos xPoint — the self-proclaimed “largest survival community on Earth” — near the South Dakota town of Edgemont. In 2017, he made a $25,000 down payment and signed a 99-year land lease (with fees of $1,000 per year) to occupy an elliptical-shaped, 2,200 square-foot underground concrete bunker once used as a military fortress during World War II to store weapons and ammunition.

    For a while there, sales were not happening too briskly.  But then 2020 happened, and at this point sales of underground bunkers at Vivos xPoint are “up over 600 percent”

    When Soulsby signed on the dotted line, he was one of a handful of new owners. But in 2020, Vivos xPoint has become hotly sought-after real estate. The price has jumped to $35,000, says Robert Vicino, the California developer and CEO of the Vivos Group, which launched in 2008, and bunker sales are “up over 600 percent.”

    I really admire what they are trying to do, and I am sure that having major news stories done about your community helps sales, but it will also make the community a target when things really do hit the fan.

    Another project that has been making a lot of headlines is “the Survival Condo” in central Kansas.  It is completely underground, and it was originally designed to survive a nuclear war

    The Survival Condo has a lot of the hallmarks of your standard fallout shelter. It’s underground (200 feet underground, in the middle of rural Kansas, 200 miles from Kansas City). It was built during the Cold War (as a nuclear missile launch facility). It’s also been retrofitted with nine-foot-thick reinforced concrete walls designed to survive everything from tornadoes to 12-kiloton nuclear warheads dropping half a mile away.

    This converted nuclear silo has been described as an “underground skyscraper”, and this is how author Bradley Garrett described his visit to “Level 11”

    On level 11 of the Survival Condo, about 50 metres underground, Hall and I visit a 1,800 sq ft home. I have had the same feeling as walking into a bedroom in a hotel chain. The apartment has never been used. It has a Navajo print rug, a cushy white sofa set and a stone electric fireplace with a flat panel TV over it. A marble countertop extends to a bar separating the living room from the kitchen, which is filled with high-end appliances.

    It sounds quite lovely, but the units are not cheap.

    In fact, prices start at more than a million dollars

    Half-floor apartments here are $1.5m (£1.2m); full-floor apartments $3m (£2.4m); and a two-level, 3,600 sq ft penthouse has sold for $4.5m (£3.6m). In total, 57 people will be living in 12 apartments, each paying an additional $5,000 (£4,000) a month in residents’ association fees. One apartment, bought with cash, is designed to feel like a log cabin, with a loft looking down on a fake fireplace flanked by a six-screen display of a snow-capped mountain range.

    The company selling the units insists that the location is super secret, but if that is actually the case it probably is not a good idea to let reporters roam around inside the facility with a film crew.

    In any event, only the ultra-wealthy will get to live there, because most Americans could never even dream of being able to afford such an elaborate bug out location.

    But all of us should be doing what we can to get prepared for the hard years that are ahead, because things are about to get really, really crazy.

    We live in truly unprecedented times, and what we have experienced so far is just the beginning.

    As global events spiral out of control, many among the elite will be heading for their underground bunkers, and some are already there

    As coronavirus infections tore across the U.S. in early March, a Silicon Valley executive called the survival shelter manufacturer Rising S Co. He wanted to know how to open the secret door to his multimillion-dollar bunker 11 feet underground in New Zealand.

    The tech chief had neve­r used the bunker and couldn’t remember how to unlock it, said Gary Lynch, general manager of Texas-based Rising S Co. “He wanted to verify the combination for the door and was asking questions about the power and the hot water heater and whether he needed to take extra water or air filters,” Lynch said. The businessman runs a company in the Bay Area but lives in New York, which was fast becoming the world’s coronavirus epicenter.

    It sure must be nice to have a luxury underground bunker in New Zealand.

    Unfortunately, most Americans are going to have to deal with whatever is ahead right where they are currently located.

    But whether you have an underground bunker or not, the truth is that challenging times are coming for all of us, and no amount of money is going to change that.

  • On Verge Of Six-Week Shuttering, Australian Small Businesses Beg: We Can't Survive Another Lockdown
    On Verge Of Six-Week Shuttering, Australian Small Businesses Beg: We Can’t Survive Another Lockdown

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/04/2020 – 22:25

    The reality on the ground in Australia is that many small businesses were struggling even before the coronavirus lockdowns began. Now, with the country on the verge of what Financial Review is calling “Lockdown 2.0”, it could be the last straw for many businesses.

    Nellerichal ‘‘Sree’’ Sreeju, who owns a gift shop in Richmond said: “It was already hard and this has made it five times harder. It’s really uncertain.” 

    He represents a microcosm of businesses in Australia who are begging for some sanity after the country has announced that “non-essential” retailers will once again have to close, starting at midnight on Wednesday this week. 

    ‘‘It has been a roller-coaster. In March, it was really eerie and quiet, and then there was the boost from the stimulus package. Luckily for us, people have been finding us online,’’ he said. His business did “fairly well in July” after pivoting and adapting to the post-virus world.

    Just in time for the government to shut him back down again…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Sreeju

    “We’ve been doing a few corporate jobs and that’s kind of keeping us afloat now but the street income, we’re doing maybe 10 to 20 per cent of what we would have done,” he said.

    The country’s restrictions also mean that barbershops and hairdressers will have to shut down. Joshua Mihan, owner of The Bearded Man barbershop said: “I think for any business owner, six weeks of no trading, the amount of money we’ll lose is quite a lot but at the same time, I think the government has been really good to small business. Without government support, I would definitely be in a terrible position right now.’’

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    He has already been forced to permanently close his second shop. “I acted quickly so the business didn’t suffer as much because I thought I’d rather have one stronger business than two depleted businesses,” he said.

    Now, with another shutdown looming, he has no business. 

    Industry groups are calling this second shutdown the “final nail in the coffin” for many small businesses. Anne Nalder, chief executive of the Small Business Association, said: ‘‘A lot of very good businesses are going to be destroyed. Small business needs to be looked after financially. It’s going to mean a lot out of the government’s purses, but to do nothing, you will have no economy. Full stop.’’

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Council of Small Business chief executive Peter Strong says there’s a “high number” of businesses that simply won’t survive the second lockdown: ‘‘At the moment, we’ve got to work to ensure this lockdown lasts only six weeks and people can open again because if it goes any longer, the damage will keep compounding. You won’t have an extra 10,000 businesses close, it’ll be 20,000 and we’re all afraid to put numbers on it.’’

    Dani Zeini, who founded restaurant chain Royal Stacks and Grand Trailer Park Taverna, is deeply concerned about the toll of another lockdown on his businesses. He said: “The Melbourne CBD, 900,000 workers come to the city every week and that’s just disappeared not to mention there’s no shopping, football, tourists and then on top of that the little remaining workers we had, they can’t come.”

    Meanwhile, we had just pointed out yesterday that Australia was implementing Draconian lockdown rules once again for its residents. Melbourne initiated its most severe restrictions yet, we noted:

    The premier of Victoria plunged the region into a “state of disaster” on Sunday, announcing even stricter lockdown measures, introducing a nightly curfew and banning virtually all trips outdoors after Australia’s second largest state recorded 671 new infections in a single day.

    Daniel Andrews told Victorians at a news conference that “we have to do more, and we have to do more right now,” as the state battles to contain a devastating coronavirus outbreak that had already stripped residents of their freedoms, livelihoods and social interactions and made it an outlier from the rest of the country.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The new rules include: 

    • Where you slept last night is where you’ll need to stay for the next six weeks.

    • Curfew between 8 p.m. and 5 a.m.

    • Only one person per household will be allowed to leave their homes once a day — outside of curfew hours — to pick up essential goods, and they must stay within a 5 kilometer radius of their home unless nearest shop is over 5 KM away.

    • Exercise can be taken for up to an hour a day, with one other person, but still within five kilometers of a person’s home. 

     

  • Understanding The Gravity Of The Russia Hoax
    Understanding The Gravity Of The Russia Hoax

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/04/2020 – 22:05

    Authored by Andrea Widburg via AmericanThinker.com,

    One of the claims Democrats love to tout about the Obama administration is that it was “scandal free.” For those who paid attention to the IRS targeting, Benghazi, Fast & Furious, and the cash smuggled to Iran, to name just a few illegal and/or immoral activities, that was always a peculiar boast. The Obama administration was up to its eyeballs in scandals. It was Obama who finally said what had really happened, which was that “We didn’t have a scandal that embarrassed us.”

    In other words, the issue wasn’t that the administration was scandal-free. The issue was that the media protected the administration from voters’ wrath should they learn about those scandals.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Russia Hoax has benefitted from the media’s continued unwillingness to report on Obama-era scandals. When it looked as if the Russia Hoax could achieve a coup against the Trump presidency, members of the press developed a form of Tourette syndrome that saw them obsessively mouth “Russia, Russia, Russia” all day, every day.

    However, when Robert Mueller’s handpicked Democrat-friendly team, despite two years and 35 million dollars, was unable to find a smidgen of proof that Trump or his administration had colluded with the Russians, leftists inside and outside of the media fell silent. Sure, they’ll still raise the fact that Trump, at a press conference, said, “Russia, if you’re listening, I hope you’re able to find the 30,000 [Hillary Clinton] emails that are missing,” but their hearts aren’t in it.

    They know that normal people understand that Trump was making a pointed joke about the fact that the Russians, the Chinese, and every other hacker on earth had read through Hillary’s emails for years. Aside from leftists being utterly humorless, the media learned that raising this statement periodically was chum to the true believers but not very interesting to anyone else.

    When it came to burying the whole Russia Hoax, the Democrats and their media lackeys were helped by the fact that the story is so gosh-darned complicated. It involved dozens of people (some genuinely bad actors and some useful idiots), several countries, thousands of pages of cryptic papers, and a dizzying timeline. It’s hard to get people who aren’t political junkies excited about something like that, and even harder to arouse them to a sense of outrage over what the Obama administration did.

    And that’s where Andrew C. McCarthy’s latest column comes in. His columns are always interesting because they help explain each new revelation about the hoax. This time, though, McCarthy has opted to open with an overview of the entire scandal and why it matters. With unusual clarity, he explains how the Obama administration used the vast power of the intelligence agencies to spy on an opposition candidate and then try to commit a coup.

    I’ve cherry-picked a few relevant paragraphs, but I urge you to read the whole thing. Once you’ve read it, you’ll understand why the Russia Hoax isn’t just an inside politics thing that ultimately doesn’t matter:

    As I contended in Ball of Collusion, my book on the Trump-Russia investigation, the target of the probe spearheaded by the FBI – but greenlighted by the Obama White House, and abetted by the Justice Department and U.S. intelligence agencies – was Donald Trump. Not the Trump campaign, not the Trump administration. Those were of interest only insofar as they were vehicles for Trump himself. The campaign, which the Bureau and its apologists risibly claim was the focus of the investigation, would have been of no interest to them were it not for Trump.

    [snip]

    You don’t like Donald Trump? Fine. The investigation here was indeed about Donald Trump. But the scandal is about how abusive officials can exploit their awesome powers against any political opponent. And the people who authorized this political spying will be right back in business if, come November, Obama’s vice-president is elected president — notwithstanding that he’s yet to be asked serious questions about it.

    [snip]

    Congress’s investigation was stonewalled. The more revelation we get, the more obvious it is that there was no bona fide national-security rationale for concealment. Documents were withheld to hide official and unofficial executive activity that was abusive, embarrassing, and, at least in some instances, illegal (e.g., tampering with a document that was critical to the FBI’s presentation of “facts” to the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Court).

    [snip]

    The Obama administration and the FBI knew that it was they who were meddling in a presidential campaign – using executive intelligence powers to monitor the president’s political opposition. This, they also knew, would rightly be regarded as a scandalous abuse of power if it ever became public. There was no rational or good-faith evidentiary basis to believe that Trump was in a criminal conspiracy with the Kremlin or that he’d had any role in Russian intelligence’s suspected hacking of Democratic Party email accounts.

    [snip]

    In the stretch run of the 2016 campaign, President Obama authorized his administration’s investigative agencies to monitor his party’s opponent in the presidential election, on the pretext that Donald Trump was a clandestine agent of Russia. Realizing this was a gravely serious allegation for which there was laughably insufficient predication, administration officials kept Trump’s name off the investigative files. That way, they could deny that they were doing what they did. Then they did it . . . and denied it.

    It is to be hoped that John Durham releases his long-promised investigative report sooner, rather than later. The American people need to understand just how scandalous the Obama administration and its holdovers were.

  • Florida Man Arrested After Buying New Porsche, Rolexes, With Fake Checks Printed On His Home Computer
    Florida Man Arrested After Buying New Porsche, Rolexes, With Fake Checks Printed On His Home Computer

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/04/2020 – 21:45

    A Florida man has been arrested for grand theft after purchasing a brand new Porsche – and then several Rolex watches – using checks he printed on his home computer. 

    Perhaps trying to take a page out of the Fed’s book, 42 year old Casey William Kelley has found out the hard way that you can’t print your way to prosperity. According to the Palm Beach Post, he used a nearly $140,000 bogus check at a local car dealership and was taken into custody one day later after trying to buy several Rolex watches with additional checks.  

    He was arrested for grand theft of a motor vehicle and uttering a false bank note.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Photo: Walton County Sheriff’s Office

    After the dealership sold Casey the car, they tried to cash the check. When it bounced, they immediately reached out to police to report the vehicle as stolen. 

    The jeweler kept the watches and the check until the money cleared – which it never did. The checks came back fake but, by then, Kelley had already been arrested by authorities.

    After his arrest, he admitted he had printed the checks at home. 

    We wonder if Neel Kashkari could learning something from this analogue: apparently you can’t just create wealth from a printing press. Who would have guessed?

  • Here Are All The Professors "Cancelled" By The Left
    Here Are All The Professors “Cancelled” By The Left

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/04/2020 – 21:25

    Authored by Cabot Phillips via Campus Reform,

    As we’ve reported extensively at Campus Reform, professors across America are facing mounting pressure to fall in line with the Left’s “Social Justice” movement. While it sounds nice, oftentimes, supporting “social justice” means supporting socialist, Marxist policies and organizations. 

    Increasingly, those within academia who fail to wholeheartedly support such movements are labeled “racists” and “white supremacists” and fired or suspended by their institutions. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here’s a list breaking down some of the most egregious examples of professors being discriminated against because of their unwillingness to support the far-left social justice movement.

    UMass-Lowell

    The Dean of Nursing at UMass-Lowell was fired by the school after saying “everyone’s life matters” in an email to students and faculty, following the protests and riots after the death of George Floyd. 

    In her email, Dean Leslie Neal-Boylan said, “I am writing to express my concern and condemnation of the recent (and past) acts of violence against people of color… I despair for our future as a nation if we do not stand up against violence against anyone. BLACK LIVES MATTER, but also, EVERYONE’S LIFE MATTERS.”

    That email was deemed “racist” by students and community members, and days later, Neal-Boylan said she was fired “without trial.”

    University of North Texas

    A professor at the University of North Texas was fired after making a joke about microaggressions. Nathaniel Hiers, an adjunct professor in the school’s math department, found a flyer in his classroom that warned students against using phrases like “America is a melting pot” and “America is the land of opportunity,” because they were microaggressions. 

    In response, Hiers placed the flyer on the chalkboard, where he wrote “Please don’t leave garbage lying around.”

    The following week, Hiers was “fired without notice.” 

    University of California-Los Angeles

    Gordon Klein, a lecturer at UCLA, was suspended after refusing to lower the grading standards for his Black students. When students demanded special grading privileges for Black students in the wake of the George Floyd protests, Klein told them in an email that it would be wrong to give “preferential treatment” to students based on the color of their skin. 

    This resulted in outrage, with more than 20,000 people signing a petition for his firing, citing his supposed “blatant lack of empathy.”

    West Virginia University

    At West Virginia University, W.P. Chedester, the Chief of Police on campus, was forced to issue an apology after a “Blue Lives Matter” flag was visible in his office during a Zoom call. 

    Students and faculty were outraged by the presence of a pro-law enforcement symbol and demanded he be fired. One professor at the school accused Chedester of sharing “white supremacist” images, while others demanded his termination or resignation. 

    Chedester was allowed to keep his job after issuing a letter of apology and removing the flag.

    Marymount Manhattan College

    Professor Patricia Simon was accused of falling asleep during a campus “anti-racist” Zoom meeting, which resulted in a petition that garnered nearly 2,000 signatures calling for her firing, claiming she must be a racist if she wasn’t taking the call seriously. 

    Simon disputes the claims made against her, saying “I was not asleep as is implied at any point during the meeting. The photo used was taken without permission when I was looking down or briefly resting my Zoom weary eyes with my head tilted back which I must do in order to see my computer screen through my trifocal progressive lenses. I listened with my ears and heard the entire meeting.”

    Cornell University

    Professor William Jacobson, an outspoken conservative professor, says there is “an effort from inside the Cornell community to get me fired.”

    Citing his conservative views and unwillingness to support the Black Lives Matter movement as the main motivation behind efforts to oust him, Jacobson said people are “trying to shut down debate through false accusations of racism.”

    Winthrop University

    Mark Herring, a retiring Dean at Winthrop University, was censored by the school after publishing an op-ed referring to COVID-19 as the “Wuhan Virus” in an op-ed detailing China’s culpability in the current pandemic.

    After complaints of racism and xenophobia, Herring’s op-ed was removed and he was condemned by the school in a university-wide email. In response, Herring told Campus Reform, “If everything is racist, we end up with nothing being racist. And particularly at this time and the horrific murder of George Floyd, I think we really need to be careful about how we label things. 

    Virginia Commonwealth University

    Javier Tapia, an associate professor at Virginia Commonwealth University, has been banned from campus after being accused of racial profiling, despite the fact that an investigation found no signs of racism or discrimination on his part. 

    The controversy began when Tapia allegedly called campus security on his fellow faculty member, Assistant Professor of Art Caitlin Cherry, when he found her in an area restricted to faculty only. A letter from the school says that the two professors “did not know one another” at the time. Cherry believed that Tapia called security on her because she is black, but Tapia claimed that he mistook her for a student, due to her “youthful appearance.”

    An investigation concluded that Tapia had not “initiated the security check based on Professor [Cherry]’s race and/or color.” Despite that fact, he later received a letter from the school informing him he’d been placed on leave, and was banned from appearing on campus or contacting any of his colleagues. 

  • How The Race For A COVID-19 Vaccine Could Go Horribly Wrong For The Market
    How The Race For A COVID-19 Vaccine Could Go Horribly Wrong For The Market

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/04/2020 – 21:05

    The research departments at Wall Street investment banks have every incentive to provide clients with a stream of worrisome (but not too worrisome) reports about the future trajectory of the global coronavirus outbreak. After all, too much unpleasant fearmongering, and they might instead go somewhere else, where another broker can tell them exactly what they want to hear. A lot of people are like that

    Which is why a research note published by Goldman’s top economist Jan Hatzius, who made his bones with a set of bearish calls just before the financial crisis, is so interesting. With public officials in the US, UK, China, Russia and elsewhere promising that a workable vaccine is just around the corner – Dr. Fauci has reassured Congress on multiple occasions that an FDA-approved vaccine by the end of the year is a realistic timeline – the market appears to be pricing in the best-case scenario. Stocks greet every new headline – even headlines that are simple rehashes of previously released early clinical trial data – with a modest rally.

    At the very beginning of Hatzius’s note, he points out that his ‘base case’ calls for a COVID-19 vaccine to be widely available throughout the US and Europe by the end of Q22021, or the end of Q32021, at the very latest. There are more than a hundred vaccine candidates in the making, but all the major candidates are targeting the same protein. This means that once a vaccine succeeds, there should be at least a modest surplus – though, to be sure, governments are striking deals for future vaccine supplies left and right.

    This base case, in turn, supports Goldman Sachs’ ‘house view’ for “above-consensus” global growth in 2021 (after all, so much of economics is influenced by perception).

    But since most of the vaccine candidates are focused on the same approaches and are working off the same assumptions – that is, everything we currently know, or think we know, about SARS-CoV-2 – there is, of course, a risk that some unforeseen obstacle could disrupt this timeline.

    And if that happens, things could go south in a hurry.

    Or as Hatzius puts it: “the risks around this vaccine baseline…are clearly skewed…toward the downside…”

    First, Hatzius starts off the note with a helpful summary of where most of what are seen as the biggest and most credible vaccine projects are at.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Then, Hatzius explains Goldman’s research on vaccine approvals. The firm found that the race to discover a vaccine for HIV was perhaps the best comparable example. Since in the beginning, many competitors were working on similar projects. Typically, the more parties are working on vaccine candidates, the more quickly a vaccine is approved by the FDA. But HIV was one interesting example where this wasn’t the case. Note: this isn’t the only time we’ve brought up HIV in our writings on COVID-19. 

    Since all the big vaccine projects are focusing on one of only a handful of approaches – for example, AstraZeneca/Oxford and Moderna are both focusing on vaccines that rely on messenger RNA (known as mRNA). Others are focusing on antibodies culled from the blood of survivors. Because the number of approaches is so small, the outcomes for these trials are likely highly correlated…

    As the left panel of Exhibit 3 shows, a large number of industry sponsored vaccine attempts typically goes hand in hand with many approvals. This historical relationship would suggest an eventual approval of 43 vaccines. Furthermore, six candidates are already in Phase III. The historic approval odds of a given Phase III vaccine targeting the median disease is 79%. However, the history of trials and the fact that all major vaccines currently target the same spike protein also suggest that vaccine approvals are likely correlated, with either many succeeding or all failing, as for HIV.

    We tentatively expect FDA approval of at least one vaccine this fall. First, six developers running late-stage trials following solid Phase II results are planning to seek approval in 2020Q4. Second, regulators have ramped up the transparency, flexibility, and speed. The FDA, for instance, has released specific safety and effectiveness standards, works directly with developers, analyzes interim results, and can provide Emergency Use Authorization as soon as studies have demonstrated safety and effectiveness. However, conflicting expert views on the odds of 2020 approval highlight the risk to our baseline timeline (Exhibit 4).

    Increasing the risk of an outcome like what we see in the chart below for HIV.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Once a vaccine is discovered, Goldman expects the US, Europe and China will all experience a pronounced economic boost (though Goldman expects the boost to the US to be bigger, since the virus is more widespread).

    By that logic, if a vaccine isn’t forthcoming in the next year or two, the US is likely also the furthest along the path to herd immunity, if such immunity is even possible for COVID-19. Some studies appear to show some decay in antibody levels, though it’s impossible to draw any solid conclusions at this point. Virologists insist that infection definitely confers some level of immunity.

    On the other hand, it’s also possible that another treatment will lessen the need for vaccines by proving to be a reliable and effective treatment for the disease. Dr. Anthony Fauci is now touting a new class of drugs called manufactured antibodies, as Reuters explained on Tuesday.

    These “manufactured” antibodies are grown in bioreactor vats, and essentially replace the antibodies that your body naturally manufactures to fend off infections.

    As the world awaits a COVID-19 vaccine, the next big advance in battling the pandemic could come from a class of biotech therapies widely used against cancer and other disorders – antibodies designed specifically to attack this new virus.

    Development of monoclonal antibodies to target the virus has been endorsed by leading scientists. Anthony Fauci, the top U.S. infectious diseases expert, called them “almost a sure bet” against COVID-19.

    When a virus gets past the body’s initial defenses, a more specific response kicks in, triggering production of cells that target the invader.

    These include antibodies that recognize and lock onto a virus, preventing the infection from spreading.

    Monoclonal antibodies – grown in bioreactor vats – are copies of these naturally-occurring proteins.

    Scientists are still working out the exact role of neutralizing antibodies in recovery from COVID-19, but drugmakers are confident that the right antibodies or a combination can alter the course of the disease that has claimed more than 675,000 lives globally.

    “Antibodies can block infectivity. That is a fact,” Regeneron Pharmaceuticals executive Christos Kyratsous told Reuters.

    A timely vaccine will help drive a recovery and limit “scarring effects” on the economy, Hatzius said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Since the race to find a workable vaccine is so intense, many are worried that a rushed job could produce a vaccine that’s ineffective, or worse, harmful. Even if at least one vaccine is approved before the end of the year as Goldman expects (though it admitted it’s still relatively uncertain on this) it’s possible that we could later find its effectiveness limited. Studies have shown COVID-19 antibodies start to decline after a few months. It’s likely that one’s antibody count doesn’t have much bearing on the body’s ability to fend off infection, since the body can always produce more. But it’s also possible that this could be a sign of fading immunity to the disease.

    “An early approval does not imply full effectiveness or long-run protection,” Goldman writes.

    And even once a vaccine is approved, there’s precedent for the FDA withdrawing its approval – however unlikely that might seem right now.

    An early approval does not imply full effectiveness or long-run protection. On effectiveness, the FDA only requires the vaccine to show a difference of 50% between events, such as infection, in the vaccine versus control arms of the study. The effectiveness for the elderly also remains uncertain, with weaker antibody responses to the CanSino vaccine and no elderly testing for most other vaccine trials so far.4 On the length of protection, little reinfection so far and the potential of T-cells to provide long-lasting immunity are encouraging while a recent Nature study found that antibody levels started to decline after 2-3 months.

    However, as noted by a recent NY Times Op-Ed by leading Yale immunologists, a waning antibody count does not necessarily indicate waning immunity because memory B cells can produce additional antibodies and lead to long-term immunity. Finally, approval could be overturned subsequently as happened with the yellow fever and rotavirus vaccines that were pulled from the market after rare severe side effects.

    Thanks to all the government deals with big pharma, if most of the leading vaccines succeed and achieve their production and purchase targets, the US and the UK will probably have a big surplus, while the EU and Japan – which are currently reportedly in talks with producers – also should have large supplies.

    Despite China’s promise to dole out vaccines to the developing world, the lack of their own pipeline makes the outlook for the EM universe less certain.

    Now, for an equally important question: is the market under-pricing the risk of some delay in the process of finding a vaccine? As Hatzius explained, the ‘diversity’ of vaccine projects doesn’t confer as much security as some might be inclined to expect.

  • California Suffers Fewest COVID-19 Cases Since June; Texas Positivity Rate Climbs For 3rd Day: Live Updates
    California Suffers Fewest COVID-19 Cases Since June; Texas Positivity Rate Climbs For 3rd Day: Live Updates

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/04/2020 – 20:59

    Summary:

    • Goldman warns about rising positivity in some states
    • Texas positivity rate climbs for 3rd day
    • California cases fall to lowest since June
    • Novavax vaccine trial data shows strong antibody response
    • RI added to tri-state quarantine list
    • NYC health chief quits in major blow to de Blasio
    • 45 Florida hospitals see ICUs hit capacity
    • Poland weighs lockdown after another record COVID reading
    • UCLA releases plans for fall
    • Global COVID outbreak slowest spread in 3 weeks
    • Death toll nears 700,000
    • US deaths finally start to edge lower
    • Hong Kong extends lockdown measures, builds temporary hospitals
    • Tokyo reports 300+ new cases
    • India reports more than 50,000 new cases
    • China reports 36 new cases
    • Philippines suffers another record jump in new cases

    * * *

    Update (2030ET): In its latest daily research note about the US COVID-19 outbreak, produced for the benefit of its wealthy corporate and investment-banking clients, Goldman Sachs’ team of researchers highlighted the trend of climbing positivity rates in some states – a trend that got Rhode Island added to the tri-state area’s quarantine list earlier.

    The virus situation continues to improve on net in many states, including those with very high levels of new cases. Over the past few days, several states have seen initial declines in the level of new cases progress to more encouraging 14-day downward trajectories. The federal government and many states want to see this sustained path of improvement before moving forward with reopening plans. Combined with the nationwide decline in the prevalence in COVID-like illness symptoms in late July, this decrease in new cases is driving the average number of federal government-recommended gating criteria that states meet higher.

    The number of states with positivity rates north of 10% is on the rise, even as case numbers fall across the US.

    But at the same time, the share of states with positive test rates above 10% is on the rise slightly, despite the average test rate declining modestly on a national basis. Available hospital capacity has also decreased to less than 30% in an increasing number of states, likely reflecting increases in the number of both COVID and non-COVID patients receiving care. But in most of these states, available capacity still remains above the more critical recommended threshold of 20%.

    And their latest daily tracker:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    * * *

    Update (1730ET): Novovax’s latest report on its vaccine candidate showed that a course of its vaccine, accompanied by the company’s immune-system-boosting technology, could produce an amount of antibodies equivalent to 4x the number produced by the average COVID-19 survivor, Bloomberg reports.

    However, a media misinterpretation of the vaccine’s safety data sent shares of Novovax, which received $1.6 billion from Trump’s “Operation Warp Speeds”, the second-largest slug of government money behind the $2 billion handed to Pfizer in a deal involving the vaccine its developing with BioNTech.

    As far as the big news from the Sun Belt, Texas’s positivity rate climbed for a third straight day to 13.88%, the highest since July 22, according to state health department data. That’s still well below the July 16 peak of 17.43%. Texas also reported 9,167 new cases, bringing the total to date to 451,181. More than 7,000 Texans have died.

    On the bright side, California reported 4,526 new cases, its lowest daily tally since June, and well below the 14-day average of 8,476 infections. There were 113 new deaths, compared with the two-week daily average of 125. That brings the total to 9,501.

    There were other signs of improvement in the Golden State: hospitalizations fell 1.5% and the 14-day average test positivity rate declined to 6.7%, down from 7.5% last week.

    A preliminary reading for new cases on Tuesday showed they were up 1.1% (compared with 1.4% average from the past week), as compared with the same time Monday, to 4.74 million, per BBG & JHU data. Deaths rose 0.7% to 156,133.

    On the political side, a bipartisan group of governors led by Maryland’s Larry Hogan has formed a pact with the Rockefeller Foundation to buy millions of coronavirus antigen tests, a move that was reminiscent of the early days of the outbreak, when states were banding together to secure supplies like ventilators.

    * * *

    Update (1245ET): Are New York, New Jersey and Connecticut getting a little out of control with their quarantine list?

    Visitors from Rhode Island, Connecticut’s tiny New England neighbor, must quarantine for 14 days when traveling to the state, or risk stiff fines, Gov. Ned Lamont threatened.

    There are now 35 states and territories on the list (including Puerto Rico). Delaware and Washington DC, both previously on the list, were taken off. NY and NJ are also adding RI to their lists.

    States listed typically have a positivity rate of higher than 10% over a 7-day rolling average.

    Like NY, Conn. bristled at Rhode Island when the governor moved to crack down on out-of-state visitors traveling to their second, or third properties, many of whom were coming from NY and CT.

    Here’s the full quarantine list, as of Aug. 4:

    • Alaska
    • Alabama
    • Arkansas
    • Arizona
    • California
    • Florida
    • Georgia
    • Iowa
    • Idaho
    • Illinois
    • Indiana
    • Kansas
    • Kentucky
    • Louisiana
    • Maryland
    • Minnesota
    • Missouri
    • Mississippi
    • Montana
    • North Carolina
    • North Dakota
    • Nebraska
    • New Mexico
    • Nevada
    • Ohio
    • Oklahoma
    • Puerto Rico
    • Rhode Island
    • South Carolina
    • Tennessee
    • Texas
    • Utah
    • Virginia
    • Washington
    • Wisconsin

    Meanwhile, Gov Andrew Cuomo of NY released the latest numbers for the Empire State.

    In NYC, Department of Health and Mental Hygiene head Oxiris Barbot resigned following months of disagreements with Mayor Bill de Blasio over the city’s virus policies. She expressed her “deep disappointment” with the bungling mayor, who infamously urged residents to “go about their lives” in early March as the virus was spreading unimpedeed around NYC (where it would eventually infect roughly 1 in 5 people, according to early results from antibody surveillance testing).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Her resignation is the culmination of an ongoing dispute with the mayor’s office, who stripped the Department of Health of responsibility for managing the city’s contact tracing effort. The effort has been criticized as a resounding failure despite the immense resources the city piled into hiring its “army” of some 3,000 contact tracers.

    She slammed the mayor in a statement that was published by the NYT.

    “I leave my post today with deep disappointment that during the most critical public health crisis in our lifetime, that the Health Department’s incomparable disease control expertise was not used to the degree it could have been,” she said in her resignation email sent to Mr. de Blasio, a copy of which was shared with The New York Times.

    “Our experts are world renowned for their epidemiology, surveillance and response work. The city would be well served by having them at the strategic center of the response not in the background.”

    Even the NYT acknowledged that her resignation was a major embarrassment to de Blasio.

    Dr. Barbot’s resignation could renew questions about Mr. de Blasio’s handling of the response to the outbreak, which devastated the city in the spring, killing more than 20,000 residents, even as it has largely subsided in recent weeks. And it comes at a pivotal moment: Public schools are scheduled to partially open next month, which could be crucial for the city’s recovery, and fears are growing that the outbreak could surge again when the weather cools.

    The mayor had been faulted by public health experts, including some within the Health Department, for not moving faster to close down schools and businesses in March, when New York emerged as an epicenter of the pandemic.

    Dave Chokshi will be brought in to replace her, the mayor said in a news conference Tuesday.

    * * *

    Update (0940ET): Poland has recorded yet another record jump in new COVID-19 cases, with 680 reported Tuesday, the largest increase since the beginning of the pandemic. As a result of the rising numbers, the government is considering whether to impose quarantine restrictions on travelers returning from certain countries.

    A communications officer for the Ministry of Health told CNN on Tuesday that the 680 cases mainly came from three regions in the country. At least 30% of these (222 cases) came from the Silesia region, known for its coal mines. Another 88 cases were recorded in the Malopolska region in southern Poland. At least 94 cases were confirmed in the Wielkopolska region in central Poland.

    Finally, UCLA said it will only offer about 8% of fall course on campus in a new hybrid model that will require nearly all classes to shift to remote delivery after Thanksgiving, according to an announcement last night. In June, UCLA planned to offer up to 20% of classes in some sort of in-person format. But “with Los Angeles county experiencing a dramatic rise in COVID-19 infections and hospitalizations, we have found it necessary to adjust our plans to reduce the health risks to our campus community,” according to a statement from the school.

    * * *

    Update (0930ET): Hospital capacity across the state of Florida has improved over the past couple of weeks according to data from the Agency for Health Care Administration. Per the latest update, shared by CNN, at least 45 hospitals in the state have reached ICU capacity and have no ICU beds available. 7 of these are in Miami-Dade, 5 are in Broward County.

    Another 34 hospitals have ICU capacity of 10% or less, which, as we’ve explained in the past, isn’t unusual, since hospitals typically run their ICU units as close to full capacity as possible (since these are typically the most profitable beds).

    Fortunately, according to County-level data, 1,000 ICU beds are available across Miami-Dade County.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Across the state of Florida, 19.6% of ICU beds are available.

    * * *

    *CORRECTION*: Earlier, we reported that the global number of COVID deaths was nearing 7 million. The number of COVID-19 deaths is, in fact, nearing 700,000.

    We apologize for the error.

    * * *

    Globally, the number of new cases reported on Monday (remember, these cases are reported typically with a 24-hour delay) tumbled to the slowest rate of expansion in nearly three weeks, while the global death toll neared 700,000.

    In the US, the death toll surpassed 155,000 yesterday. That comes five days after the US first broke above 150,000 deaths. Though experts like Dr. Fauci and others have warned about the potential for deaths in the US to accelerate, the number of daily deaths has remained anchored at around 1,000.

    Over the past two weeks, the worst-hit countries, including the US and Brazil, have seen new cases turn mercifully lower after a streak of record-shattering single-day infection numbers.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Even the number of daily deaths in the US have moved off their highest levels since April and May, despite experts warnings about a further spike.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Most of the big news out so far on Tuesday comes out of Asia.

    One day after placing Manila and its surrounding area on a strict two-week lockdown, the Philippines reported a record 6,352 new coronavirus infections, a new single-day record, bringing the total to 112,593. The 11 new fatalities reported raised the death toll to 2,115.

    Yesterday, the WHO’s Dr. Tedros revealed during a press briefing (where he also noted that there may be “no silver bullet” vaccine, at least not right away) that the team of independent scientists from the WHO had finished the first part of their fact-finding mission to Wuhan to investigate the origins of the outbreak. According to a Reuters report published Tuesday morning, the team had “extensive discussions” with scientists in Wuhan and “received updates on epidemiological studies, biologic and genetic analysis and animal health research.”

    The mission is the first part of a broader international probe that was demanded by the Trump Administration, Australia, EU and others.

    In Japan, Tokyo Gov. Yuriko Koike announced another 309 new infections, up from 258 on Monday. The SCMP reports that the Hong Kong government is building at least 2 new makeshift hospitals that will add 2,400 new beds to the territory’s COVID-19 capacity. The government announced on Monday that it would extend its social distancing restrictions for another week. Hong Kong’s “third wave” of the virus has also been its deadliest yet. Fortunately, the city reported just 80 cases on Tuesday, on par with yesterday’s number. Yesterday, the city’s health authorities reported fewer than 100 new cases for the first time in nearly 2 weeks. Chief Executive Carrie Lam has sought help from the mainland to increase testing and hospital capacity.

    India reported more than 50,000 cases for the sixth straight day, bringing total infections to over 1.85 million.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The world’s second-most-populous country also reported another 803 deaths, bringing its total to 38,938.

    China reports 36 new cases, down from 43 the previous day. Of those, 28 were in the northwestern region of Xinjiang and two in Liaoning Province in the northeast. Another six were from Chinese arriving from overseas.

    After imposing a curfew earlier this week and shuttering a large swath of its economy in another lockdown, new legal measures go into effect on Tuesday whereby anyone caught outside in breach of Victoria’s isolation orders will face fines from AUS$1,652 ($1,200) to AUS$5,000 ($3,559).

    Officials warned that noncompliance with quarantine and social distancing rules is widespread. Random checks by police on 3,000 infected people had found more than 800 were not home isolating, as they were supposed to be.

    However, the Australian press, for whatever reason, focused on Chief Commissioner Shane Patton’s complaints about a small number of self-declared “sovereign citizens” who have hectored – and in at least one case, attacked – police officers trying to enforce the new orders.

    Victoria Police had seen an “emergence” of “concerning groups of people who classify themselves as ‘sovereign citizens'”, the BBC reported Tuesday.

    Under the current “stage four” lockdown, Melbournians can leave home only to shop, exercise and provide essential medical care, or do frontline work. Residents must shop and exercise within 5 kilometers (3 miles) of their home, and for no longer than 1 hour at a time.

    This, despite a growing body of evidence that the lockdown in Victoria is having little impact on suppressing the growth of cases.

  • Your Phone Is Spying On You: Companies Are Generating Secret "Surveillance Scores" Based On That Data
    Your Phone Is Spying On You: Companies Are Generating Secret “Surveillance Scores” Based On That Data

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/04/2020 – 20:45

    Authored by Michael Snyder via The End of The American Dream blog,

    Nothing that you do on your phone is private.  In this day and age, most of us have become extremely dependent on our phones, and most Americans never even realize that these extremely sophisticated little devices are gathering mountains of information on each one of us. 

    Your phone knows what you look like, it knows the sound of your voice, it knows where you have been, it knows where you have shopped, it knows your Internet searches and it knows what you like to do in your free time.  In fact, your phone literally knows thousands of things about you, and all of that information is bought and sold every single day without you knowing. 

    And as you will see below, there are lots of companies out there that use information collected from our phones to create secret “surveillance scores” that are used for a whole host of alarming purposes.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It is really important to understand that your phone is a surveillance device.  The reason why the advertisements on your phone seem so perfectly tailored for you is because of all the information that your phone has gathered on you previously.

    To this day, many people are still amazed when they see an ad pop up for something that they were just talking with a friend about, but that doesn’t happen by accident.  The following comes from Fox News

    Perhaps you’ve been talking to a friend about an island vacation, when suddenly deals for the Maldives or Hawaii pop up on your Facebook feed. Or you are talking to your co-worker about yard renovations when advertisements for lawnmowers litter your Twitter, or maybe you were talking about why you stopped drinking and a random sponsored article about the growing trend of “elective sobriety” is suddenly in front of your eyes.

    Industry experts insist that our phones are not actively “eavesdropping” on us, but they do admit that our phones are “actually spying on us” in other ways…

    “It’s easy to feel like our phone is spying on us. It is actually spying on us, but it is not eavesdropping,” Alex Hamerstone, Government, Risk and Compliance practice lead at information technology security firm, TrustedSec, told Fox News via email. “The reason why we see ads pop up that seem to be correlated to the exact thing we were just talking about is because technology and marketing companies gather extensive amounts of personal and behavioral data on us, but it’s not from eavesdropping — it’s from surfing the web, shopping, posting on social media, and other things people do online.”

    Most Americans have come to accept targeted ads as a part of life, but what most people don’t realize is that the information our phones gather is being used for far more intrusive purposes.

    “Surveillance scores” are being created, and these “surveillance scores” seem quite similar to the “social credit scores” that China has been compiling since 2014.

    In China, if you do good things like paying your taxes or taking a parent to the doctor, your social credit score will go up.

    But there are also lots of things that will cause your social credit score to go down…

    It aims to punish for transgressions that can include membership in or support for the Falun Gong or Tibetan Buddhism, failure to pay debts, excessive video gaming, criticizing the government, late payments, failing to sweep the sidewalk in front of your store or house, smoking or playing loud music on trains, jaywalking, and other actions deemed illegal or unacceptable by the Chinese government.

    And if your social credit score gets too low, the consequences can be quite dramatic

    Punishments can be harsh, including bans on leaving the country, using public transportation, checking into hotels, hiring for high-visibility jobs, or acceptance of children to private schools. It can also result in slower internet connections and social stigmatization in the form of registration on a public blacklist.

    Here in the United States, private companies are doing something very similar.  Information collected from our phones is being used to create secret “surveillance scores”, and selling those scores has become very big business.  The following comes from the Houston Chronicle

    Operating in the shadows of the online marketplace, specialized tech companies you’ve likely never heard of are tapping vast troves of our personal data to generate secret “surveillance scores” – digital mug shots of millions of Americans – that supposedly predict our future behavior. The firms sell their scoring services to major businesses across the U.S. economy.

    And just like China’s system, high scores come with rewards and low scores come with punishments.

    For example, your scores can determine whether or not someone will rent a property to you, whether or not you will be hired for a job, and even how long you will have to wait for customer service

    CoreLogic and TransUnion say that scores they peddle to landlords can predict whether a potential tenant will pay the rent on time, be able to “absorb rent increases,” or break a lease. Large employers use HireVue, a firm that generates an “employability” score about candidates by analyzing “tens of thousands of factors,” including a person’s facial expressions and voice intonations. Other employers use Cornerstone’s score, which considers where a job prospect lives and which web browser they use to judge how successful they will be at a job.

    Brand-name retailers purchase “risk scores” from Retail Equation to help make judgments about whether consumers commit fraud when they return goods for refunds. Players in the gig economy use outside firms such as Sift to score consumers’ “overall trustworthiness.” Wireless customers predicted to be less profitable are sometimes forced to endure longer customer service hold times.

    To me, all of this is extremely creepy.

    Eventually, it may get to a point where you are basically a societal outcast if you are not willing to conform to a particular set of politically-correct standards, values and behaviors.

    You may not get thrown in jail the moment you do something “unacceptable”, but your phone will be watching you every step of the way.

    Each mistake that you make will be recorded by your phone, and that information will be stored and used against you for the rest of your life.

    I know that all of this sounds very strange, but without a doubt we are living in very strange times.

    My advice would be to only use your phone when necessary, but of course the vast majority of the population will never listen to such advice.

    Most of us have become highly addicted to these marvelous little devices, and in the process we are helping the elite construct a system of surveillance and control that is unlike anything ever seen before in all of human history.

  • Why COVID-19 Will Make A Comeback In NYC This Fall – And Lockdowns Won't Help
    Why COVID-19 Will Make A Comeback In NYC This Fall – And Lockdowns Won’t Help

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/04/2020 – 20:25

    As we noted earlier, Bloomberg on Friday published a story decrying the risks facing NYC as the northern hemisphere moves toward the fall. Three weeks ago, Melbourne entered lockdown that was supposed to last for 6 weeks. However, new infections have only continued to climb, and it’s currently unclear whether officials will abandon the lockdown, or extend it.

    The problem? Some epidemiologists suspect that, since Australia is now in the heart of its winter season, most people are spending the bulk of their days indoors, relying on heat and ventilation systems in multifamily buildings that can, at least in theory, carry the ‘airborne’ virus from apartment to apartment, infecting unsuspecting neighbors without them even needing to leave their homes.

    That’s all speculation at this point, however (though examples of the virus spreading rapidly within apartment blocks abound in Hong Kong and mainland China).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But the fact remains: Since June, the outbreak in Melbourne – suspected to have begun with failures in the hotel quarantine of travelers arriving from overseas – has exploded. Thursday and Friday saw the worst increases yet: 723 and 627 respectively across the state of Victoria, the second-largest state in Australia, where Melbourne serves as the capital.

    These numbers have left Australian health officials stunned: Their models projected that the lockdowns should have crushed the outbreak by now. But even with strict social distancing measures in place, the virus has continued to spread.

    The American press hasn’t done much reporting on the situation in Australia. It’s clear why: Not only is the country on the other side of the world, but it’s also raising uncomfortable questions about the efficacy of lockdowns, particularly as the world heads into the heart of winter/summer (depending on whether one is in the northern or southern hemisphere).

    So, why isn’t Melbourne’s lockdown working? The BBC has some ideas.

    Throughout the state of Victoria, most outbreaks have been traced back to aged care homes, meat factories, schools and public housing estates.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But as Bloomberg reported on Friday, the falling temperatures and growing reliance on air conditioning suggest that NYC could soon see a related comeback – even a Gov Cuomo pledges to investigate “outdoor” gatherings like a drive-thru concert in the Hamptons, while completely ignoring anti-police brutality protests.

    Melbourne, Australia, with 5 million people, offers a case in point. With the Fahrenheit dropping into the 50s, Melbourne has seen an upswing in cases, a foreboding indicator of how tough it may be for cities like New York to control infections as the mercury drops. With fall and winter approaching, it’s “inevitable” Covid-19 cases will tick up, said Ashish Jha, director of Harvard University’s Global Health Institute.

    “I am worried about complacency,” Jha said in an interview. “New York went through such a difficult few months, and I am worried that people are tired. A lot of people are looking at New York over the next six months and saying: ‘Could we possibly see a spike?’”

    New York’s success is seen as somewhat of a beacon for the rest of the country. If the city can keep its rate low as it reopens through the fall and winter, then epidemiologists say its efforts can serve as a model for other big cities nationwide.

    NYC entered Phase 4 of its reopening on July 20. Stores are now open, though capacity is limited, and New Yorkers can enjoy outdoor dining at restaurants, but there’s no clear timeline for the return of indoor dining. The wearing of masks, social distancing and aggressive hygiene practices are still being pushed as mandatory by local officials.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    New York reported just 59 new cases citywide on Tuesday. But it hasn’t eased up yet. On Thursday, Gov Cuomo said the state is making $30 million available to counties to increase contact tracing as well as testing for the coming flu season, which generally hits in the fall and winter. Cuomo has warned that the flu could complicate the COVID-19 response by, among many reasons, upping the strain on laboratories.

    If NYC can suppress a rebound of new cases in the fall, it could stand as a model for the rest of the country. If it fails, then maybe our medical experts will need to rethink their approach.

  • 3 Reasons Treasury Rates Can Still Hit 0%: Part I, Inflation Vs Deflation
    3 Reasons Treasury Rates Can Still Hit 0%: Part I, Inflation Vs Deflation

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/04/2020 – 20:05

    Authored by Eric Basmajian via EPBMacroResearch.com,

    • Deflation remains the more credible risk, not inflation. The output gap suggests core inflation could sink below 0.5% in the coming years.

    • FX hedged Treasury yields remain higher than yields at home. This will increase foreign appetite for US rates.

    • From a longer-term secular standpoint, economic growth will fall into a new regime, sub 2% which will weigh on bond yields.

    • Further stimulus from the fiscal side will delay the full extent of the deflationary output gap but will not change the end result in the final analysis.

    • As part of your balanced portfolio, long-term Treasury bonds are still a valuable holding as the path to 0% remains a probable scenario.

    The inflation vs. deflation debate remains one of the more hotly contested ideas in the marketplace today. The inflation hawks argue precious metals are a one-way street higher while cash is trash, and bonds are worthless. The deflationary crowd continues to play with the multi-decade trend arguing that interest rates are not done falling, and more gains are left with nominal Treasury bonds. 

    In this three-part series, I am going to highlight the main reasons behind why I believe that the path to 0% interest rates is more probable than an inflationary rise to higher yields. Three main factors support the conclusion for lower long-term rates, including:

    1. a more credible risk of deflation compared to inflation,

    2. high and positive FX-hedged Treasury yields,

    3. and a continued decline in trend economic growth. 

    Each part will cover one of these factors in detail. 

    While I reside in the disinflationary camp, I am not one to argue that an inflationary outcome should be disregarded. A blanket denial of the potential for inflation is unwise, but an over-exaggeration of the risks with faulty analysis of historical macroeconomic trends is more dangerous. 

    The best path forward for the long-term, prudent investor is to start with a portfolio that is relatively balanced to each risk, inflation, and deflation. Depending on which risk is more probable over the next 12-36 months, tilting the portfolio from a balanced stance to an overweight stance in favor of the more likely outcome allows an investor to capitalize on the developing opportunity while allowing the possibility of the opposing scenario. 

    A comprehensive review of macroeconomic trends firmly suggests that deflation or disinflation, not inflation, is a more credible risk. Many of the common inflationary arguments we hear today are repeats of decade-old analysis that came about during the first round of Quantitative Easing “QE” or “money printing,” which proved incorrect in assessing the direction of inflation and bond yields. 

    In part I, we’ll review many of the common inflationary theses while arguing that deflation or disinflation is still a more credible threat. 

    Having a balanced portfolio with bonds, gold, stocks, and commodities always makes sense, but it is still premature to rid your strategy of disinflationary bets such as Treasury bonds altogether. 

    Deflation, Not Inflation, Is The Bigger Risk

    Inflation is a highly consensus view among analysts. Typically this takes the form of “deflation now, but inflation later,” acknowledging the severe demand shock caused by the COVID lockdowns across the global economy. The “inflation later” part of the puzzle usually makes reference to Federal Reserve policy actions, including “printing” money and what is now a ubiquitous chart of money supply growth. 

    The Federal Reserve cannot “print” spendable dollars but rather purchase assets using reserves. 

    The inflation crowd has made frequent use of the following chart of money supply growth, quick to point out the record level. 

    Decades ago, with profoundly different circumstances which will be outlined below, significant increases in money supply growth gave reason to be worried about rising inflation. Today, there quite literally exists no correlation between money supply growth and inflation. 

    M2 Money Stock, Year over Year:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Federal Reserve, FRED

    The Federal Reserve quadrupled the size of its balance sheet over the last ten years before the COVID crisis, and the result was below average inflation and a decline in market-derived inflation expectations. Despite what should be considered a well-established fact now, the same arguments for rising Federal Reserve assets and inflation have reemerged. 

    It is incomplete to present an argument regarding money supply growth and inflation without presenting a long-term chart of the velocity of money. To argue that a rise in money supply growth in insolation will cause inflation assumes that the rate at which money changes hands in the economy is stable. 

    Velocity, noted below, has collapsed and will decline further in Q2 2020, which negates the inflationary impact of rising money supply growth. 

    Velocity will undoubtedly rise in Q3 and possibly Q4 of 2020 as a pent-up demand recovery takes hold, but multi-decade secular trends must be respected and understood. 

    It is easy to suggest that the velocity of money will suddenly break the near 30-year trend and start rising, along with a continued increase in money supply growth, but why? Putting money in the hands of consumers to spend on basic necessities such as rent, food, and clothing are not high-velocity uses of capital and will not meaningfully change the long-run trajectory of the ratio.

    Velocity Of M2 Money Stock:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Federal Reserve, FRED

    High velocity uses of capital stem from productive investment into plant & equipment, products or properties that generate a lasting income stream. 

    In order for the growth in money supply to have an increased chance of generating lasting inflation, the velocity of money has to be at least stable. 

    Another consideration in the new era of QE is that the relationship between money supply and reserves in the banking system has meaningfully changed. Looking at the growth rate in money supply and jumping to an inflationary conclusion disregards the fact that the reserve multiplier is far from stable, and completely altered.  

    The chart below is the reserve multiplier or the ratio of broad money supply to total reserves in the banking system. 

    Reserve Multiplier:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Federal Reserve, FRED

    Another ratio that is assumed to be stable in the traditional money supply arguments is the relationship between broad money supply and the monetary base controlled by the Federal Reserve. The ratio of M2 money supply to the monetary base or the “money multiplier” is also highly unstable and has steadily declined over the last few decades. 

    The money multiplier rose through the 1960s, 1970s, and peaked in the 1980s, a stark contrast to the recent multi-decade decline. 

    The money multiplier ratio shows the ability and desire of private sector banks to turn high powered base money into broad spendable dollars. 

    Money Multiplier:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Federal Reserve, FRED

    Dr. Lacy Hunt, in his Q1 2020 Quarterly Review, wrote about both the money multiplier and the velocity of money.

    Two critical equations define the U.S. monetary structure. First, M2 = MB x m where MB stands for the monetary base and m stands for the money multiplier (known as little m). Second, GDP equals M2 multiplied by the velocity of money, or GDP = M2 x V and V is GDP divided by M2. It is important to note that both m and V are complex variables and their operation in determining economic activity is opaque. Our understanding is that the essence of m is that the banks and their customers must reach an agreement that a new loan will be profitable to both. Prior to reducing reserve requirements to zero, swings in currency and time deposits could change m, but that is no longer the case. As long as the required reserve ratio remains zero, total reserves and excess reserves are identical. Swings in Treasury deposits still have a role, albeit minimal. It appears that the key to V is whether a new loan is productive in the sense that it generates an income stream to pay principal and interest. It becomes apparent therefore that the Fed has extremely limited capacity to alter m or V. 

    As a result of the weakening economy and high levels of public and private debt, banks are likely to maintain their reluctance in extending high quantities of new loans. Similarly, the capacity for borrowers to demand new loans for productive investment will remain low. 

    The relationship between the monetary base and the money supply is unstable and currently in a declining trend. The relationship between money supply growth and inflation measured by either the Consumer Price Index or the Personal Consumption Expenditure Index is highly unclear. 

    The chart below shows the relationship between the year over year growth rate in money supply and the year over year change in Core CPI, adjusted for a 12 and 18-month lag. 

    Money Supply Growth Vs. Core CPI Inflation Rate:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Federal Reserve, BLS, EPB Macro Research

    Economists Stephen G. Cecchetti and Kermit L. Schoenholtz of the Money, Banking, and Financial Markets blog complied a more comprehensive chart of money supply growth and the core PCE inflation rate. They concluded:  

    During the early period, when inflation temporarily rose above 10 percent, there was a positive relationship: increases in money growth were associated with higher inflation two years later. For the most recent decade, the period when the Fed’s balance sheet exploded, the two are nearly uncorrelated (see the red dashed line). In other words, at low levels of inflation, inflation appears to be unrelated to money growth. (While we do not show it here, another implication of this chart is that the velocity of money—the ratio of nominal GDP to money—is unstable.)

    Money Supply Growth Vs. Core PCE Inflation Rate:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Money, Banking, and Financial Markets

    Cecchetti and Schoenholtz went on to note the lack of relationship between the size of the Federal Reserve’s balance sheet and long-term market-derived inflation expectations in a chart I recreated below. 

    Fed Balance Sheet Vs. Market Derived Inflation Expectations:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    Using the rate of money supply growth as the base of an inflationary argument has demonstrated poor results over the last ten years due to a multi-decade decline in the velocity of money and an unstable (currently falling) relationship between reserves, broad money and the monetary base (reserve multiplier and the money multiplier.)

    While money supply growth is an unreliable determinant of inflation, the economic output gap has demonstrated a sound relationship to core inflation, particularly over the past two decades, when economic volatility dropped to record lows. 

    The output gap is a measure of the potential growth in an economy relative to actual growth. When an economy is growing below trend potential, the difference is called the “output gap.”

    The output gap is measured by using “potential GDP” and actual or projected GDP.

    Potential GDP is published by the Congressional Budget Office “CBO” through a calculation of potential labor force growth and potential productivity growth.

    The chart below shows nominal GDP in black, potential GDP in blue, and projected GDP through 2030 in red.

    US GDP Vs. Potential GDP (Billions):

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg, CBO, BEA, EPB Macro Research

    The difference between potential GDP and actual or projected GDP is the “output gap,” graphed below. A negative output gap is deflationary because the economy has unutilized capacity, driving down the price of goods and services. Too many workers will drive down wages.

    Using the projected estimates from the CBO, the output gap will reach nearly $2.5 trillion and will last through 2030.

    The output gap after the 2008 recession lasted for roughly 39 quarters.

    Using the projected GDP estimates from the CBO, the deflationary output gap is not only expected to be the largest in modern history but last more than 44 quarters, through 2030.

    The chart below shows the output gap as a percentage of GDP.  

    US Output Gap (% Of GDP):

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg, CBO, BEA, EPB Macro Research

    Over the past ~20 years, the output gap has demonstrated a strong correlation with core inflation. Typically, it takes about a year for underutilized capacity to flow through to consumer inflation.

    The correlation between the output gap and core inflation has increased in recent years as overall economic volatility has compressed due to the increased use of automatic stabilizers such as government transfer payments as well as a general shift away from the more cyclical manufacturing sector.

    Economic Volatility:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg, BEA, EPB Macro Research

    At the trough in growth, the US economy will have an output gap of roughly -11% and a four-quarter average of approximately -7.7%.

    Using the output gap for a point estimate of core inflation can be extremely imprecise and highly dependent on the variables in the analysis. Still, directionally the relationship makes a strong case for record low core inflation over the coming years.  

    US Output Gap (% Of GDP) (4-Quarter Lag) & Core CPI:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg, CBO, BEA, BLS, EPB Macro Research

    Using the output gap to determine the inflation bias over the coming 12-36 months is likely to have more success than arguments centered around the growth rate in money supply with variables that are far different than the 1970s, a common inflationary reference point. 

    In the 1970s, the output gap was mild and oscillating between positive and negative. Over the last 15 years, the economy has been in a persistently negative output gap and expected to remain there through 2030 based on estimates from the CBO. 

    US Output Gap 1960-1980 | US Output Gap 2005 – 2030:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    From 1960-1980, the velocity of money was extremely stable, while the last two decades have shown a downward trend in velocity that hasn’t been experienced since the 1920-1930 period. 

    Velocity Of M2 Money Stock:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Federal Reserve, FRED

    As noted above and presented again below, the money multiplier was stable and rising from 1960-1980 compared to unstable and falling sharply today. 

    Money Multiplier:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Federal Reserve, FRED

    Lastly, total non-financial debt in the economy (government, household, and business) as a percentage of GDP was extraordinarily stable and below 140% from 1960-1980 compared to rising and north of 260% today, breaching critical thresholds discussed here

    Total Non-Financial Debt To GDP Ratio:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Z.1 Financial Accounts, Bloomberg, EPB Macro Research

    High levels of public and private debt hinder economic growth and exert disinflationary pressure on the economy. 

    Summary & Part II

    Money supply growth is an important variable, but it must be used in context to explain future impacts to price inflation. Over the last decade, using the money supply growth or Federal Reserve balance sheet expansion to forecast inflation has been a losing proposition due to the consistent decline in velocity and the changing relationships highlighted by the reserve multiplier and the money multiplier. 

    Commodity prices and other measures can provide a shorter-term indication regarding the direction of inflation, but the outlook over the next 12-36 months is most consistently identified by the output gap and long-term secular forces.  

    Most of the arguments for higher inflation fail to consider rapidly changing relationships in the economy that more often than not stem from an extreme condition of overindebtedness. 

    As mentioned at the start of this note, disregarding the possibility for inflation is unwise, and holding a portfolio with inflation-sensitive assets is a prudent decision for the conservative investor, particularly while short-term inflation indicators such as commodity prices are trending higher. 

    The bias in the economy is still for deflation/disinflation, and holding an overweight investment in Treasury bonds continues to generate strong risk-adjusted returns as well as dampen the volatility of a balanced portfolio by offering a negative correlation to equity prices on average. 

    In part II, we’ll take a look at another force that will keep downward pressure on US interest rates; FX-hedged Treasury yields. 

    Many investors seek to make simple comparisons between US bond yields and foreign bond yields without adjusting for the cost of hedging the currency risk. This is a critical variable and one that we will tackle in the next part of this series. 

    *  *  *

    To read more and learn how we translate this research into a low-volatility portfolio, click here for a two-week free trial of EPB Macro Research on Seeking Alpha.

  • Trump Calls Beirut Explosion "A Terrible Attack – A Bomb Of Some Kind" After Briefed By Generals
    Trump Calls Beirut Explosion “A Terrible Attack – A Bomb Of Some Kind” After Briefed By Generals

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/04/2020 – 19:50

    Lebanon’s health ministry has raised the death toll to over 73 killed, including 3,700 wounded, after late afternoon a blast centered on Beirut’s port unleashed a massive seismic shock and explosion that leveled an entire district of the city and was felt as far away as Cyprus in the Mediterranean. 

    Later in the evening Lebanon’s Prime Minister announced that the explosions were caused by an estimated 2,750 tons of ammonium nitrate left unsecured for 6 years in a warehouse. This came on the heels of a formal Israeli denial that it had anything to do with it, which also seemed be echoed by Hezbollah officials. 

    With the official consensus growing that the massive explosion was horrible accident due to neglect, President Trump’s words on the tragedy once again presented that it could be something more. He said early in the evening that after meeting with top military commanders: “They seem to think it was an attack. It was a bomb of some kind.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This after speculation and conspiracy theories were rampant throughout the day. After all it is Lebanon, which has witnessed decades of bombings, war, and covert intrigue, also as it borders Israel, war-torn Syria, as well as a corner of the Golan Heights. And the blast was so overwhelming in its force, destroying homes up to ten miles away, local residents thought they were under nuclear attack, especially given it briefly blocked out the sun and a mushroom cloud hovered over the city.

    The president further said that it “looks like a terrible attack” — leaving people to again question whether there’s intelligence he’s seen that points to an attack or bombing. According to the AFP:

    Trump says military experts tell him Beirut blast a ‘bomb of some kind’.

    “It was a bomb of some kind, yes” — he emphasized when questioned on it.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    His remarks were made during a Tuesday evening address to reporters:

    Trump said he had been briefed by “our great generals” and that they “seem to feel” that the explosion was not an accident.

    “According to them – they would know better than I would – but they seem to think it was an attack,” Trump told reporters at the White House. “It was a bomb of some kind.”

    This has caused Israeli officials to be vehement in their denials that it could have been the result of Israeli attack, amid recent tensions with Hezbollah along Lebanon’s southern border:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Did Trump just reveal classified information? Was he merely speculating like everyone else? 

    Are his words based on legitimate intelligence information which contradicts the official story that it was an accident? It remains that he specifically invoked “our great generals” when citing the information. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    It will be interesting to see if the Pentagon issues a follow-up in the wake of the president’s unexpected comments.

    Meanwhile Beirut has been declared a ‘disaster zone’ by Lebanon’s defense council, with countries around the world pledging emergency aid.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Secretary of State Mike Pompeo has also pledged aid after the “horrible tragedy”.

    The US Embassy in Lebanon was warned American citizens and residents in the surrounding area of the potential for toxic gases and chemicals in the air.

    “There are reports of toxic gases released in the explosion so all in the area should stay indoors and wear masks if available,” the embassy said on its website.

  • Ultra-Wealthy Northeast Town Sees Surge In COVID-19 Cases After 'Secretive' Teen Parties
    Ultra-Wealthy Northeast Town Sees Surge In COVID-19 Cases After ‘Secretive’ Teen Parties

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/04/2020 – 19:45

    It’s a by now somewhat familiar pattern: upscale posh neighborhood in the northeast takes steps to isolate itself from the pandemic exploding in less fortunate surrounding neighborhoods and areas, only to itself get hit hard through the carelessness of its own residents throwing ‘exclusive’ parties.

    A New York Times profile of one such elite area ravaged by COVID-19 begins as follows: “On a warm summer weekday in the middle of July in Greenwich, Conn., one of the wealthiest communities in the country, a group of teenagers gathered at a house party. Many were seniors who had just finished their final year at two elite private college-preparatory schools, Greenwich Academy and the Brunswick School, as well as the local public high school, Greenwich High School, according to accounts from students and school officials.”

    Though after weeks of lockdown the particular county appeared to have things under control, the story assures, restless teenagers still continued to party, albeit somewhat furtively, at private beach fronts, mansions, and outside of yacht clubs

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    File image via Living Greenwhich

    “It’s summertime,” one local teen interviewed by NYT said. “It’s beach weather. People are out on boats. They are having parties. And I think they are beginning to let their guard down. It’s critically important that young people understand that they can get the virus and they can spread the virus.”

    But local health officials are concerned that a documented “mini-surge” of the virus in Greenwhich is due to groups of carefee, drunk, young people coming together on a regular basis, social distancing be damned.

    Reports the Times:

    Two weeks after the parties, Greenwich is experiencing what health officials called a “mini surge” of infections, an outbreak that has cascaded through the community and underscored how social gatherings among young people are posing fresh challenges to containing the virus.

    More than 20 people between the ages of 16 and 21 have tested positive for the virus, with more cases expected as testing continues, according to Greenwich health officials.

    Contact tracers currently attempting to get a handle on how the outbreak spread said that most teens have refused to admit attending the parties, which apparently are common enough knowledge throughout the community, adding to frustrations.

    The scenario is bringing into further doubt whether the elite private high school in town, the Brunswick School, can reopen in the fall.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “Caroline Baisley, the health director for Greenwich, said officials first realized something was amiss when they began hearing rumors of large parties around the weekend of July 18,” the story continues. 

    “In the following weeks, they started looking at testing data and noted a trend — several young people were testing positive.”

    “When you start to see multiple 18-year-olds and 17-year-olds, then you have to start to wonder what’s going on here,” Baisley told the Times.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via The Hartford Courant: Indian Harbor in Greenwich. The Fairfield County town has recently experienced a small surge in coronavirus cases.

    We should add that perhaps most annoying about this whole trend is that it gives the NY Times and others yet more excuse to compose finger-wagging, moralizing sermons in condemnation of ‘privileged’ northeast suburbs, detailing the ‘evils’ of not staying home. 

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 4th August 2020

  • Spanish Stocks Break Support As Virus Concerns Reemerge
    Spanish Stocks Break Support As Virus Concerns Reemerge

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/04/2020 – 02:35

    Spain’s IBEX 35 Index futures have slumped 11% in 9 trading sessions “as fears of new lockdowns coupled with weaker than expected macro data soured investors’ sentiment,” said Reuters‘ Stefano Rebaudo. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “There is a combination of factors,” said James McKenzie, head of research of Fidentiis in Madrid.

    “Worries about possible new lockdowns as coronavirus cases keep rising, recent bad numbers for Q2 GDP and probably even worse data ahead as the UK quarantine for travelers to Spain will put under further pressure the tourism industry,” McKenzie said.

    Spain reported 1,525 new COVID-19 cases on Friday, making it the most significant increase in cases since June, which was around the time national lockdown was lifted. Countries in Europe are now advising citizens against travel to Spain. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Virus cases have surged across Europe

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Spain’s GDP, like Germany and France, reported last week some of the biggest crashes ever for the second quarter. The eurozone economy contracted by 12.1% in 2Q YoY.

    Depressing data in the eurozone, more importantly, Spain, highlights the collapse in the travel and tourism industry, fading any hopes a quick rebound will be seen. 

    The selloff in Spanish stocks is an eye-opener for world stocks, currently powered by a bubble in US technology stocks. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The virus is re-emerging across the world, maybe the souring of investors’ mood in Spanish stocks is a precursor to a much broader sell-off. 

     

  • American Troops To Leave Germany: Is It Goodbye Or Just Auf Wiedersehen?
    American Troops To Leave Germany: Is It Goodbye Or Just Auf Wiedersehen?

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/04/2020 – 02:00

    Authored by Philip Giraldi via AHTribune.com,

    The continued presence of tens of thousands of American military personnel in Europe seventy-five years after the end of the Second World War is rarely questioned either by politicians or the mainstream media. Currently there is little recollection of how, after the war ended, soldiers from Britain, France, the U.S. and the Soviet Union occupied Germany, each in a designated zone. Germany’s capital Berlin was divided into four sectors, each with a foreign military occupying force. I was a part of that occupation force from 1968 through 1971, serving in the U.S. Army’s Berlin Brigade as part of the 430th Military Intelligence Detachment.

     

    The initial intention to keep postwar Germany in check morphed into the Cold War with the Soviets. The Soviet sector of Berlin became the capital of communist East Germany while the U.S. led efforts to create a military union based in Western Europe that would resist further Russian expansion. That alliance became the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) in 1949, a structure that incorporated the newly minted Federal Republic of Germany, and the Soviets countered with the Warsaw Pact that included nearly all of Eastern Europe. Both the Organization and Pact were ostensibly defensive alliances and the U.S. active participation was intended to demonstrate American resolve to come to the aid of the Europeans. The Cold War between the two alliances continued until 1991 when the Soviet Union collapsed. Germany was reunited, the Berlin wall was torn down, the foreign troops went home and the city again became the country’s capital.

    During my time in Germany the Cold War was decidedly hot, having relatively recently witnessed the Russian denial of Berlin’s occupied city status shared among the four victorious nations by building a wall and confronting U.S. forces at the new border crossing points. My recollection is that in 1970 there were more than 10,000 GIs in Berlin alone and about 200,000 more stationed in West Germany.

    Today there are approximately 36,000 American soldiers and airmen based in a reunited Germany but President Donald Trump decided in early June to withdraw 9,500 of them and to also cap the total U.S. military presence in that country at 24,000, which would involve 2,500 more cuts and might go even deeper depending on what is eventually included in the numbers. Preliminary planning suggests that about 5,600 will be repositioned to other NATO countries, including Italy, Belgium and Poland, while 6,400 will be returned to the U.S., from which point they might go on to the Pacific theater to confront “Chinese ambitions.” Unlike previous Trump pronouncements on reductions in force in Afghanistan and Syria, neither of which has actually been achieved, this latest move regarding Germany appears to be serious.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As some of the soldiers that are being re-positioned elsewhere in Europe will undoubtedly be closer to the border with Russia, there should be no doubt but that the Kremlin is still the designated enemy. Whether Russia is an actual threat is questionable and many observers privately believe that NATO is an anachronism, kept going by the many statesmen and military establishments of the various countries that have a vested interest in maintaining the status quo.

    In spite of the clearly diminished threat in Europe, NATO has expanded to 30 members, including most of the former communist states that made up the Warsaw Pact. The most recent acquisition was Montenegro in 2016, which contributed 2,400 soldiers to the NATO force. Since the demise of the Warsaw Pact, NATO has found work in bombing Serbia, destroying Libya and in helping in the unending task to train an Afghan army, tasks which were not envisioned when the treaty was signed in 1949.

    Trump has also stated his intention to move the European Headquarters of U.S. forces from Stuttgart in Germany to Mons, near Brussels in Belgium. The move would seem to make some limited sense as NATO headquarters is also in Brussels, but there is also a political dimension to it. Trump has been sending the not unreasonable message that if the Europeans want more defense, they should pay for it themselves, though he has wrapped his proposal in his usual insulting and derogatory language. A wealthy Germany currently spends 1.1% of GDP on its military, far less than the 2% that NATO has declared to be a target to meet alliance commitments. That compares with the nearly 5% that the U.S. has been spending globally, inclusive of intelligence and national security costs.

    Trump might actually have a reasonable U.S. perspective on the burden sharing issue, but the European concern is more focused on how Trump does what he does. For example, he announced the downsizing in June without informing any of America’s NATO partners. The Germans were surprised and pushed back immediately. German Foreign Minister Heiko Maas regretted the planned withdrawal, describing Berlin’s relationship with the Washington as “complicated.” Chancellor Angela Merkel was reportedly shocked. And Trump made matters worse last week when he tweeted “Germany pays Russia billions of dollars a year for Energy, and we are supposed to protect Germany from Russia” before maladroitly observing that “The United States has been taken advantage of for 25 years, both on trade and on the military. We are protecting Germany. So we’re reducing the force because they’re not paying their bill. It’s very simple: They’re delinquent. Very simple.”

    The timing of the decision has also been questioned, with many observers believing that Trump deliberately staged the announcement to punish Merkel for refusing to attend a planned G-7 Summit in the U.S. that the president had been trying to arrange. Merkel argued that dealing with the consequences of the coronavirus made it difficult for her to leave home and the G-7 planning never got off the ground, which angered Trump, who wanted to demonstrate his global leadership in an election year.

    Predictably, the Democrats and also some Republicans are piling on Trump over the decision.

    • Joe Biden sees a “profound problem” in the withdrawal while

    • Senator Bob Menendez of the Senate Foreign Relations Committee quipped “Champagne must be flowing freely this evening at the Kremlin.” 

    • Republican Mitt Romney declared the move to be “grave error…a slap in the face at a friend and ally when we should instead be drawing closer in our mutual commitment to deter Russian and Chinese aggression. The move may temporarily play well in domestic politics, but its consequences will be lasting and harmful to American interests.”

    The limited reduction in force actually makes no sense if one believes that NATO itself should instead be terminated due to its lacking any credible threat from Russia or from anyone else.recent opinion poll suggests that keeping U.S. troops in Germany is not considered desirable by the Germans themselves, only 15% of whom support their remaining on national security grounds. And moving troops to Belgium and Italy is going in the wrong direction if one actually considers that there is an active threat from Moscow.

    Nor does moving soldiers from one country that is behind on its 2% “dues” to NATO to other countries that are likewise in arrears make any practical sense but for a president who feels personally affronted by a foreign leader and is choosing to react petulantly as punishment. The disruption to U.S. military facilities that currently provide support to elements in Africa and the Middle East will be considerable, and the move will also not be cost-free. According to the New York Times, “Repositioning the troops will cost several billion dollars. The withdrawal and shifting of forces is likely to take months, if not years.” 

    And, of course, the real kicker is that if Joe Biden is elected president in a little less than three months the whole planned move will be scrapped by the victorious and persistently warlike Democrats.

    No wonder Americans’ trust in the rationality of their government is at an all time low.

  • Parts Of France Impose Outdoor Mask Mandate In Controversial First
    Parts Of France Impose Outdoor Mask Mandate In Controversial First

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/04/2020 – 01:20

    The global pandemic lockdowns and social distancing regulations have produced many new controversial firsts, leading to both disputes between citizens and law enforcement, and among people often wrangling with each other over things like mask wearing or proximity, or even the ability to have gatherings at a park.

    Though we thought we’d seen everything, here’s yet another true first: municipal governments in France have begun mandating the wearing of masks outdoors.

    “Beach resorts along France’s Atlantic coast, picturesque promenades on the Loire River, farmers markets in the Alps — they’re among scores of spots around France where everyone is now required to wear a mask outdoors,” the Associated Press reports.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Mask at the beach? Image via Newsweek

    The sure to be controversial policy in parts of the country comes as a national mask law goes into effect Monday; however, the mask law only mandates the wearing of a face covering indoors.

    Currently, there are fears of a virus resurgence, with the French health authorities reporting 7,000 new cases over the course of the past week.

    This second wave fear, such as the United States has been at the forefront of experiencing, is reportedly putting pressure on the government to go to the extreme of mandating the wearing of masks even outside.

    The AP details further:

    Several sites around France have started requiring masks outdoors in recent days. Starting Monday, 69 towns in the Mayenne region of western France imposed outdoor mask rules, as did parts of the northern city of Lille and coastal city of Biarritz in French Basque country.

    Thus far there’s been a clear scientific consensus that coronavirus is more easily spreadable indoors, while there’s less danger for it’s spread in the outside open air.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Mask while jogging? Getty Images

    The idea that France could soon see a nationwide “outdoor” mask law would prove to be hugely controversial, given that it would require everyone from hikers to joggers to people just walking even in isolation to be masked up.

  • Indian Stocks Break Critical Support As Pandemic Accelerates 
    Indian Stocks Break Critical Support As Pandemic Accelerates 

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/04/2020 – 00:40

    Indian shares have reversed in the last four sessions, breaking critical support, following financials, energy, healthcare, and telecommunication services pressuring the NIFTY 50 lower on Monday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Ahead of the interest rate decision this week, investors have been souring over the prospects of rising coronavirus cases

    NIFTY 50 has fallen 4% since late last week, and this comes after a 50% increase in India’s main equity index since mid-March after it plunged 38% on the eruption of the virus pandemic. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    India’s interior minister said hospitalization with COVID-19 is surging as cases soared Monday above 50,000 for the fifth consecutive day. 

    India’s Ministry of Health and Family Welfare reported 52,972 new confirmed infections on Monday, pushing up the total to 1.8 million, just behind the US and Brazil. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With 771 new deaths, the virus pandemic has killed 38,135 people in the country, including that of a minister on Sunday.

    Zee Business financial analyst Anil Singhvi warned NIFTY 50 downside could be seen if the ₹11,000-level support is violated. The index closed ₹10,891, indicating further downside is ahead. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Singhvi said investors should sell stocks if NIFTY 50 trends below ₹11,000. After the correction, he believes stocks could zoom higher. 

    “11000 most important level … Anil Singhvi said – do not be afraid of a few digit correction after the boom … If the market trades below 11000-10950, neutralize the position of the bull, said – for a big boom beyond 11300 Stay ready,” tweeted Zee Business (translated into English). 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Perhaps waning Indian stocks is a warning sign for the MSCI World Index.   

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Earlier on Monday, Spanish stocks broke critical support after new rounds of lockdowns feared. 

  • The Pentagon's New UFO Disclosures: 75 Years Of MK Ultra Psy Ops
    The Pentagon’s New UFO Disclosures: 75 Years Of MK Ultra Psy Ops

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/04/2020 – 00:05

    Authored by Matthew Ehret via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    In my last few articles, I have found myself writing on the theme of the emerging new system and the battle between two paradigms (multipolar vs unipolar).

    Within that theme, the important issue of psy ops, false solutions and epistemological warfare which is a part of everyone’s’ daily life (whether they know it or not) arose as well. Recent events and announcements have caused me to tackle another aspect of psychological warfare in the modern age.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    UFOs and You

    What would you do if the American and British governments both revealed that their secret UFO programs would declassify material from each nations’ respective National Archives?

    What if you found out that leading politicians like former House Majority speaker Harry Reid had allocated $22 millions of tax payer dollars to UFO research and that Obama’s former chief counsellor (and rampant pedophile) John Podesta has openly called for UFO disclosure on several public occasions since 2002 or that Hillary Clinton herself called for UFO disclosure during her presidential campaign pledges of 2015?

    Would you believe these claims or would you remain skeptical? How would you decide what to do?

    With the July 23 public statement from the Pentagon that “off world vehicles not made on this earth” have been kept secret for decades, this question has become extremely important.

    Major opinion-shapers like Joe Rogan, Tucker Carlson, and even Russia Today have promoted the cause of alien disclosure for the past few years and with the most recent Pentagon announcement, fascination in little grey men has spread like wildfire.

    Who’s Playing this Game?

    For the past several decades, government-sponsored UFO research has largely been driven by the work of private subcontractors like Bigelow Aerospace which was founded by billionaire real estate speculator Robert Bigelow who allocated large swaths of his fortunes to the creation of organizations like the National Institute for Discovery Science which have always worked in a private capacity with governments and academia. One of Bigelow’s biggest tools was Sen. Harry Reid who not only received generous campaign funds from the billionaire between 1998-2009 but also allocated tens of millions in national defense funds to his company starting in 2007.

    In 2014, the creative force driving the “UFO-disclosure cause” has taken the form of a weird organization called To the Stars Academy of Arts and Science run by high level intelligence operatives and using a cardboard cut-out Tom Delonge (former lead singer of the punk band Blink 182). To the Stars has poured millions of dollars into cultural/educational and lobbying projects driven by books, movies, film and documentaries in the cause of “elevating global consciousness” in preparation for a new age of UFO disclosure.

    As Delonge says in his promotional video

    “through a series of meetings I was soon connected to a large group of U.S. government officials. From the CIA, to the Department of Defense to Lockheed Martin Skunkworks. These were the guys involved in the secretive government programs that dealt with these subjects.”

    Some of the shadowy figures affiliated with To the Stars include a former CIA director of operations, former Deputy Assistant secretary for Defense Intelligence, former Director of Information for White House Technology, and former chief of the CIA’s counter-biological weapons program. Both Podesta and Bigelow’s Aerospace have also worked closely with Delonge’s strange group over the past six years.

    Bigelow is not the only billionaire who has allocated their vast fortunes to the cause of “UFO truth”.

    The Rockefeller Project

    In 1993, the Disclosure Initiative was created by none other than financier Laurence Rockefeller (4th son of Standard Oil Founder John D. Rockefeller) which had a two-fold purpose:

    1. Unite all of the largest UFO research organizations in America under one umbrella organization which was promptly accomplished within one year and

    2. Massively lobby the Clinton Administration to declassify millions of documents which was done in 1994, revealing little more than mountains of anecdotal testimonies and correspondences.

    During the heyday of the Rockefeller UFO Disclosure Initiative, the Clintons stayed at the Laurence Rockefeller ranch in Wyoming, during which time an early recruit to the “disclosure mission” was Clinton Chief of Staff John Podesta. Podesta started going public with calls for UFO disclosure in 2002 and has continued to work with figures like Bigelow and To the Stars Academy over the next 18 years.

    A fuller overview of Laurence Rockefeller’s “other” civilization-shifting programs from the 1950s-1990s can be seen here.

    During the Clinton White House years, Laurence Rockefeller recruited a bodybuilding biologist named Stephen Greer to become the controller of the Disclosure Project which has provided his meal ticket to this very day. Greer has given thousands of interviews promoting the narrative that NASA’s Apollo Lunar projects were stopped in 1972 merely because the aliens who have been stationed on the Moon for eons didn’t want the truth to leak out (but were at least kind enough to let U.S. keep the technology they gave U.S. earlier in Roswell in the 1950s). If you believe in Greer’s narrative (which gets much crazier I promise), then human creative thought is actually not as special as “the shadowy forces controlling the government” wanted you to believe since space technology only existed because we stole stuff from ETs. Pretty much any inspired awe in universal creation and the power of the human mind to discover this creation with the effect of making life better through scientific and technological progress would easily be killed from this outlook.

    The questions an intelligent person should now ask are:

    • Why would a leading figure of the Rockefeller dynasty devote the last decades of his life to the cause of “UFO truth”?

    • Did Laurence Rockefeller or those on his payroll or those in the CIA actually care about the right of the people to know hidden truths, or is the plan just designed to mis-direct the minds of credulous and jaded citizens into an invisible cage?

    • Might such a mis-direction prevent people from dealing with issues of America’s conversion into Nazism and accelerating disintegration?

    • Is it possible that these pedophiles, globalists, and Malthusian billionaires care less about the truth and more about inducing Americans to fixate on aliens while the republic is destroyed under economic collapse and war?

    Squaring the Crop Circle

    A large portion of the Disclosure Project’s work has gone into the investigation of crop circles which were first recorded in the early 1970s in Britain, and which have the peculiar characteristic of becoming increasingly well executed and complex over the course of five decades. Live Science reported that “the first real crop circles didn’t appear until the 1970s, when simple circles began appearing in the English countryside. The number and complexity of the circles increased dramatically, reaching a peak in the 1980s and 1990s when increasingly elaborate circles were produced”.

    My question is: If transcendental alien races travelling at faster-than light speed, have been leaving encoded messages to U.S., then why would their artistic skills have improved so dramatically over a few years? Just a question.

    MK Ultra & UFOs

    Most people know of the CIA/MI6-funded mass brainwashing operation known as MK Ultra which was launched in 1953. Very few people have recognized the connection between MK Ultra and the rise of the UFO movement that grew in spades throughout the Cold War.

    While U.S. and UK government UFO investigations did occur in piece meal starting in 1947 under Project Sign (1947), and Project Grudge (1949), it wasn’t until 1950 that official tax payer-funded departments were created in both nations to pursue “UFO research”. These took the form of the USA’s Project Blue Book (1952) which itself was modelled on the work conducted by Britain’s 1950 “Flying Saucer Working Party” spear-headed by Sir Henry Tizard (Chief Science Advisor to the Ministry of Defense and Chairman of Britain’s Defense Research Policy Committee).

    Journalist Naomi Klein stated in her book The Shock Doctrine that Tizard played a leading role in the creation and funding of MK Ultra during a high level meeting in Montreal and Tizard’s Wikipedia entry notes that:

    “One of the most controversial meetings he had to attend in his capacity as chair of the National Research Commission would only emerge many years later with the de-classification of CIA documents, namely a meeting on June 1st, 1951 at the Ritz-Carlton Hotel in Montreal Canada, between Tizard, Omond Solandt (chairman of Defence Research and Development Canada) and representatives of the CIA to discuss “brainwashing”.

    This Ritz-Carleton meeting would lay the seeds for MK Ultra that was not only designed to deal with brainwashing, but created LSD, and explored the matter of breaking down a human mind into a blank slate with the explicit intention of reconstructing minds from scratch. As Klein’s book eloquently showcases, the intention was to use these discoveries on a national scale in order to conduct “shock therapy” on nations in order to break cultures and nations from their historic memories and traditions with the purpose of reconstructing them under a post-nation state (and post truth) neo liberal world order. While MK Ultra was funded by the Americans, the guidance for this operation were always driven by London’s Tavistock Clinic. A bone chilling expose of this clinic was produced by EIR’s Jeffrey Steinberg in 1993 which may keep you up at night.

    As one can imagine, the very act of providing government funds to investigate flying saucers was itself sufficient to legitimize the existence of aliens in the minds of millions of Europeans and Americans during the Cold War years. During these dark years, faith in honest government collapsed under the imperial wars of Korea, Vietnam abroad and the growth of the Military Industrial Complex and McCarthyism at home. The world of secret patents, secret weapons, secret R&D that developed during this period in facilities like Area 51 made the frequent sightings by civilians and even un-vetted military pilots of “unidentified flying aircraft” an expected occurrence.

    Flying Saucers and Area 51

    In her 2012 book Area 51 Uncensored, journalist Annie Jacobson provided lengthy detail of the Cold War experiments, aerospace technology and nuclear bomb testing that took place at Area 51 during this period which largely fed off the earlier social engineering experiment of H.G. Wells’ War of the Worlds emergency broadcast read aloud in 1938. The mass panic that ensued the broadcast provided an insight into the levers of mass psychology that certain social engineers drooled over.

    What could account for observed UFO phenomena?

    In an interview with NPR Radio, Jacobson stated:

    “The UFO craze began in the summer of 1947. Several months later, the G2 intelligence, which was the Army intelligence corps at the time, spent an enormous amount of time and treasure seeking out two former Third Reich aerospace designers named Walter and Reimar Horten who had allegedly created [a] flying disc. 

    …American intelligence agents fanned out across Europe seeking the Horton brothers to find out if, in fact, they had made this flying disc.”

    During WWII, the Horten brothers were associated with the Austrian scientist Viktor Shauberger whose innovative designs for implosion (vs explosion) flying technology utilized water currents, and electromagnetism to generate flying machines that by all surviving accounts flew faster than the speed of sound. While much of his research was confiscated and classified by victor nations after WWII, Schauberger was promised government sponsorship in America which induced the inventor to move across the Ocean where Canada’s Avro Arrow program sought his designs for supersonic nuclear missile delivery aircraft. When he discovered that his work would only be used for military purposes, Schauberger pushed back and over the course of several months, his patents were essentially stolen, and he returned to Austria to die broke and depressed in 1958.

    The Strategic Importance of Space

    It was never a secret that the post-1971 globalized world order championed by the likes of Sir Henry Kissinger, David and Laurence Rockefeller and other Malthusians throughout the 20th century was always designed to collapse. With the mass shock therapy that such a collapse would impose upon the world, it was believed that a deconstruction of the Abrahamic traditions that governed western society for 2000 years could be accomplished and a new society could be socially engineered in the image of the Brave New (depopulated) World that would live like happy sheep forever under the grip of a hereditary alpha class and their technocratic managers.

    The only problem which these social engineers have encountered in recent years is the re-emergence of actual statesmen who are unwilling to sacrifice their people and traditions on the altar of a new global Gaia cult. Such defenders of humanity’s better traditions have launched the multipolar alliance and have driven a policy of long-term growth and advance scientific and technological progress which is embodied brilliantly by the New Silk Road, and its extensions to the Arctic. The most exciting aspect of this New Silk Road/Multipolar Paradigm is the leap into space exploration as the new frontier of human self-development which has not been seen since the days of President Kennedy.

    With China and Russia signing a pact to jointly develop lunar bases and the NASA Artemis Accords calling for international cooperation on Lunar and Mars resource development/industrialization, the age of unlimited growth that was lost with the LSD-driven mass psychosis of 1968’s “live in the now” paradigm shift may finally be recaptured. Programs designed to put humanity’s focus on real objective threats like Asteroid collisions, and solar-induced new ice ages are seriously being discussed by leaders of Russia, China and the USA.

    There are billions of suns and potentially billions of galaxies, and chances are there is indeed life on many of the planets orbiting some of the stars within our growing, creative universe… and there is also a fair chance that cognitive life has also emerged on some of those planets. The best way to find out however is not to sit at home while the world economic system collapses under a controlled disintegration thinking about Rockefeller-funded conspiracy theories, but rather to fight to revive humanity’s open system destiny starting with a cooperative space program to extend human culture and economy to the Moon and Mars, and then onto other planetary bodies followed by missions to deep space.

    If other civilizations exist, maybe it is our duty to take up the torch left to U.S. by JFK and go find them.

  • Shootings, Murders Spike By Record In Portland After Disbanding 'Gun Violence Reduction Team'
    Shootings, Murders Spike By Record In Portland After Disbanding ‘Gun Violence Reduction Team’

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/03/2020 – 23:45

    Violent crime in US metro areas surged this summer amid the pandemic, recession, and social unrest: A perfect storm of distress that is unraveling society.  

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    From Atlanta to Baltimore to New York City to Chicago to Houston to some major Californian metro areas, many of these democratically-controlled cities are facing an eruption in violent crime, including murders and thefts.

    Readers may recall some of the cities listed above are the usual suspects when referring to metros with the most out of control crime in the US. Now Portland’s liberal utopia appears to be imploding, as murders in July jump. 

    Portland Police Bureau has responded to 15 homicides in July, which is a three-decade high, reported The Oregonian. The Portland Metropolitan Area has seen approximately 24 homicides this year. Besides homicides – assaults, burglaries, and vandalism are also increasing over last year’s figures. 

    Verified Non-Suicide Shootings In Portland 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Police Chief Chuck Lovell is concerned by the increase in violent crime. He’s shifted officers from patrols to aid in ongoing homicide investigations. 

    “That’s very concerning. I mean, to know that that many people have been killed in such a short period of time,” Lovell said at a recent virtual press conference.

    At the same time, Lovell said Portland City Hall slashed its budget, which resulted in the massive defunding wave in early July that forced a sizeable cut in its Gun Violence Reduction Team. Also, there’s been at least a month of lawless anarchists destroying property in the area. The federal government sent in personnel to squash the uprising.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Since the Gun Violence Reduction Team was disbanded on July 1, Lovell has repeatedly linked it with the struggle to police the city.

    The loss “forced us into a position where we have to really look at what resources we can bring to bear, absent that structure that we had with the Gun Violence Reduction Team,” he said.

    In another recent press conference about the rise in homicides, Portland Mayor Ted Wheeler admitted the city had seen “an unprecedented escalation of gun violence.”

    In the first 12 days of the month, officials witnessed an over 380 percent spike in such violence, compared to the same time period in 2019.

    “This is the city we live. Portlanders, our neighbors, are being hurt by this violence. They’re being killed. The violence and the loss of life are unacceptable,” Wheeler added.

    Liberal cities, ones that have defunded police and allowed anarchists to run wild, are seeing a perfect storm of distress flare up as the virus-induced downturn has unleashed a social-economic bomb. 

  • Is The Dollar Standard Slipping Out Of Control?
    Is The Dollar Standard Slipping Out Of Control?

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/03/2020 – 23:25

    Authored by Alastair Crooke via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    As commentators focus on the hospitalisations of two Gulf monarchs, and permutate likely succession issues, they may miss the wood for the succession trees: Of course, the death of either the Emir of Kuwait (91 years old) or King Salman of Saudi Arabia (84 years old) is a serious political matter. King Salman’s particularly has the potential to upturn the region (or not).

    Yet Gulf stability today rests less on who succeeds, but rather on tectonic shifts in geo-finance and politics that are just becoming visible. Time to move on from stale ruminations about who’s ‘up and coming’, and who’s ‘down and out’ in these dysfunctional families.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The stark fact is that Gulf stability rests on selling enough energy to buy-off internal discontents, and to pay for supersized surveillance and security set-ups.

    For the moment, times are hard, but the States’ financial ‘cushions’ are just about holding-up (albeit only for the big three: Saudi Arabia, Abu Dhabi and Qatar). For others the situation is dire. The question is, will this present status quo persist? This is where the warnings of shifts in certain global tectonic plates becomes salient.

    The Kuwaiti succession struggle is emblematic of the Gulf rift: One candidate for Emir, (the brother), stands with Saudi Arabia and its Wahhabi-led ‘war’ on Sunni Islamists (the Muslim Brotherhood). Whereas the other, (the eldest son), is actively backed by the Muslim Brotherhood, Qatar and Turkey. Thus, Kuwait sits on firmly on the Gulf abyss – a region with significant, but disempowered Shi’a minorities, and a Sunni camp divided and ‘at war’ with itself over support for the Muslim Brotherhood; or what is (politely called) ‘autocratic secular stability’.

    Interesting though this is, is this really still so relevant?

    The Gulf, perhaps more significantly, is held hostage to two huge financial bubbles. The real risk to these States may prove to come from these bubbles, which are the very devil to prick-down into any gentle, expelling of gas. They are sustained by mass psychology – which can pivot on a dime – and usually end catastrophically in a market ‘tantrum’, or a ‘bust’ – and with consequent risk of depression, should Central Banks ever try to lift the foot off the monetary accelerator.

    The U.S. ubiquitous ‘asset bubble’ is famous. Central Bankers have been worrying about it for years. And the Fed is throwing money at it – with abandon – to keep it from popping. But as indicated earlier, such bubbles are highly vulnerable to psychology – and that may be turning, as the celebrated V-shaped, expected economic recovery recedes into the virus-induced distance. But for now, investors believe that the Fed daren’t let it implode – that the Fed has absolutely no option but go on throwing more and more money at it (at least until November elections … & then what?).

    Less visible is that other vast ‘asset bubble’: The Chinese domestic property market. With its closed capital account, China has a huge sum (some $40 trillion) sloshing around in collective bank accounts. That money can’t go abroad (at least legally), so it rotates around between three asset markets: apartments, stocks, and commodities somewhat whimsically. But investing in apartments is absolutely king! 96% of urban Chinese own more than one: 75% of private wealth is represented by investments in condos – albeit with 21% standing empty in urban China, for lack of a tenant.

    Long story, short, the Chinese massively chase property valuations. Indeed, as the WSJ has noted “the central problem in China is that buyers have figured out the government doesn’t appear to be willing to let the market fall. If home prices did drop significantly, it would wipe out most citizens’ primary source of wealth, and potentially trigger unrest”. Even during the pandemic – or, perhaps because of it as the Chinese piled-in – prices rose 4.9% in June, year on year. The total value of Chinese homes and developers’ inventory hit $52 trillion in 2019, according to Goldman Sachs; i.e. twice the size of the U.S. residential market, and outstripping even the entire U.S. bond market.

    If it sounds just like America’s QE-inflated asset markets, that’s because it is. As things stand, both the Chinese residential and the U.S. equity bubbles are unstable. Which might fracture fist? Who knows … but bubbles are also vulnerable to pop on geo-political events (such as a U.S. naval landing on one of China’s disputed South Sea islands, to which China is promising, absolutely, a military response).

    No one has any idea how Chinese officials can manage the property bubble, without destabilizing the broader economy. And even should the market stay strong, it creates headaches for policy makers, who have had to hold off on more aggressive economic stimulus this year – which some analysts say is needed, partly because of fears it will inflate housing further.

    Ah … there it is: Out in plain view – the risk. The condo-trade has hijacked the entire Chinese economy, tying officials’ hands. This, at the moment when Trump’s trade war has turned into a new ideological cold war targeting the Chinese Communist Party. What if the Chinese economy, under further U.S. sanctions, slides further, or if Covid 19 resurges (as it is in Hong Kong)? Will then the housing market break, causing recession or depression? It is, after all, China and Asia that buy the bulk of Gulf energy: Demand shrinks, and price falls. The fate of the Gulf States’ economies – and stability – is tied to these mega-bubbles not popping.

    Bubbles are one factor, but there are also signs of the tectonic plates drifting apart in a different way, but no less threatening.

    Bankers Goldman Sachs sits at the very heart of the western financial system – and incidentally staffs much of Team Trump, as well as the Federal Reserve.

    And Goldman wrote something this week that one might not expect from such a system stalwart: Its commodity strategist Jeffrey Currie, wrote that “real concerns around the longevity of the U.S. dollar as a reserve currency have started to emerge”.

    What? Goldman says the dollar might lose its reserve currency status. Unthinkable? Well that would be the standard view. Dollar hegemony and sanctions have long been seen as Washington’s stranglehold on the world through which to preserve U.S. primacy. America’s ‘hidden war’, as it were. Trump clearly views the dollar as the bludgeon that can make America Great Again. Furthermore, as Trump and Mnuchin – and now Congress – have taken control of the Treasury arsenal, the roll-out of new sanctions bludgeoning has turned into a deluge.

    But there has also been within certain U.S. circles, a contrarian view. Which is that the U.S. needs to ‘re-boot’ its economic model with a Tech-led, ‘supply-side’ miracle to end growth stagnation. Too much debt suffocates an economy, and populates it with zombie enterprises.

    In 2014, Jared Bernstein, Obama’s former chief economist said that the U.S. Dollar must lose its reserve status, if such a re-boot were to be done. He explained why, in a New York Times op-ed:

    “There are few truisms about the world economy, but for decades, one has been the role of the United States dollar as the world’s reserve currency. It’s a core principle of American economic policy. After all, who wouldn’t want their currency to be the one that foreign banks and governments want to hold in reserve?

    “But new research reveals that what was once a privilege is now a burden, undermining job growth, pumping up budget and trade deficits and inflating financial bubbles. To get the American economy on track, the government needs to drop its commitment to maintaining the dollar’s reserve-currency status.”

    In essence, this is the Davos Great Reset line. Christine Lagarde, in the same year, called too for a ‘reset’ (or re-boot) of monetary policy (in the face of “bubbles growing here and there) – and to deal with stagnant growth and unemployment. And this week, the U.S. Council on Foreign Relations issued a paper entitled: It is Time to Abandon Dollar Hegemony.

    That, we repeat, is the globalist line. The CFR has been a progenitor of both the European and Davos projects. It is not Trump’s. He is fighting to keep America as the seat of western power, and not to accede that role to Merkel’s European project – or to China.

    So why would Goldman Sachs say such a thing? Attend carefully to Goldman’s framing: It is not the Davos line.

    Instead, Currie writes that the soaring disconnect between spiking gold price and a weakening dollar “is being driven by a potential shift in the U.S. Fed towards an inflationary bias, against a backdrop of rising geopolitical tensions, elevated U.S. domestic political and social uncertainty, and a growing second wave of covid-19 related infections”.

    Translation:

    It is about U.S. explosive debt accumulation, on account of the Coronavirus lockdown. In a world where there is already over $100 trillion in dollar-denominated debt, on which the U.S. cannot default; nor will it ever be repaid. It can therefore only be inflated away. That is to say the debt can only be managed through debasing the currency. (Debt jubilees are viewed as beyond the pale.)

    That is to say, Goldman’s man says dollar debasement is firmly on the Fed agenda. And that means that “real concerns around the longevity of the U.S. dollar as a reserve currency, have started to emerge”.

    It is a nuanced message: It hints that the monetary experiment, which began in 1971, is ending. Currie is telling U.S. that the U.S. is no longer able to manage an economy with this much debt – simply by printing new currency, and with its hands tied on other options. The debt situation already is unprecedented – and the pandemic is accelerating the process.

    In short, things are starting to spin out of control, which is not the same as advocating a re-boot. And the debasement of money is inevitable. That’s why Currie points to the disconnect between the gold price (which usually governments like to repress), and a weakening dollar. If it is out of the Fed’s control, it is ultimately (post-November) out of Trump’s hands, too.

    Should confidence in the dollar begin to evaporate, all fiat currencies will sink in tandem – as G20 Central Banks are bound by the same policies as the U.S.. China’s situation is complicated. It would in one way be harmed by dollar debasement, but in another way, a general debasement of fiat currency would offer China and Russia the crisis (i.e. the opportunity), to escape the dollar’s knee pressed onto their throats.

    And for Gulf States? The slump in oil prices this year already has prompted some investors to bet against Gulf nations’ currencies, putting longstanding currency pegs with the dollar under pressure. GCC states have kept their currencies glued to the dollar since the 1970s, but low oil demand, combined with dollar weakness would exacerbate the threat to Gulf ‘pegs’, as their trade deficits blow out. Were a peg to break, it is not clear there would be any obvious floor to that currency, in present circumstances.

    Against such a backdrop, the royal successions underway in Gulf States might perhaps be regarded a sideshow.

  • It's Now Virtually Impossible To Get A Bank Loan As Lending Standards Soar
    It’s Now Virtually Impossible To Get A Bank Loan As Lending Standards Soar

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/03/2020 – 23:05

    One quarter ago we pointed out something concerning: shortly after JPMorgan reported that its loan loss provision surged five fold to over $8.2 billion for the first quarter, the biggest quarterly increase since the financial crisis, in preparation for the biggest wave of commercial loan defaults since the financial crisis (a number which in the latest quarter surged to $10.5 billion along with all other banks’ loan loss provisions)…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … the bank hinted that things are about to get much worse when it first halted all non-Paycheck Protection Program based loan issuance for the foreseeable future (i.e., all non-government guaranteed loans) because as we said “the only reason why JPMorgan would “temporarily suspend” all non-government backstopped loans such as PPP, is if the bank expects a default tsunami to hit coupled with a full-blown depression that wipes out the value of any and all assets pledged to collateralize the loans.”

    Shortly after, the bank also said it would raise its mortgage standards, stating that customers applying for a new mortgage will need a credit score of at least 700, and will be required to make a down payment equal to 20% of the home’s value, a dramatic tightening since the typical minimum requirement for a conventional mortgage is a 620 FICO score and as little as 5% down. Reuters echoed our gloomy take, stating that “the change highlights how banks are quickly shifting gears to respond to the darkening U.S. economic outlook and stress in the housing market, after measures to contain the virus put 16 million people out of work and plunged the country into recession.”

    Finally, just days later, JPM also exited yet another loan product, when it announced that it has stopped accepting new home equity line of credit, or HELOC, applications. The bank confirmed that this change was made due to the uncertainty in the economy, and didn’t give an end date to the pause.

    In short, JPM appeared to be quietly exiting the origination of all interest income generating revenue streams over fears of the coming recession, which prompted us to ask  “just how bad will the US depression get over the next few months if JPMorgan has just put up a “closed indefinitely” sign on its window.

    On Monday, we got confirmation that it was not just JPMorgan but all US commercial  banks that are making the issuance of almost all new credit (with one notable exception) virtually impossible, when the Fed’s July senior loan officer survey showed that banks tightened lending standards across the board for C&I (commercial and industrial loans), CRE (commercial real estate), consumer (credit card and auto loans) and residential real estate (RRE) loans. The loan standards for most products – such as C&I loans, residential mortgages and credit cards – were hiked so much they nearly matched the standards during the financial crisis when it was virtually impossible to get any new loans.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This was the second quarter in a row in which loan officers reported sharply tighter financial conditions.

    Just as concerning, demand for many loan products also slumped, and in the case of auto loans to record lows, with the exception of jumbo (both conforming and non-confirming) loans, which were roughly flat with demand boosted by record low interest rates.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here are the details:

    According to the July Fed’s Senior Loan Officer Opinion Survey (SLOOS), lending standards for commercial and industrial (C&I) loans tightened in the second quarter with a near record 71% of banks on net tightened lending standards for large and medium-market firms (vs. only 42% on net in the previous quarter), while 70% of banks on net tightened lending standards for small firms (vs. 40% on net in the previous quarter). 59% of banks on net increased spreads of loan rates over the cost of funds for large firms, while 54% on net increased spreads for small firms. In short, anything that is not explicitly guaranteed by the government such as PPP loans, banks won’t go near with a ten foot pole for one simple reason: they have zero visibility if and when they will get repaid.

    For banks that tightened credit standards or terms for C&I loans or credit lines:

    • 22% cited a deterioration in the bank’s capital position as playing a role,
    • 97% cited a less favorable or more uncertain economic outlook,
    • 85% cited a reduced tolerance for risk,
    • 31% cited decreased liquidity in the secondary market for loans,
    • 7% cited a deterioration in the bank’s own liquidity position,
    • 26% cited increased concerns about the effects of legislative changes, supervisory actions, or changes in accounting standards.

    More ominously for a consumer driven economy, demand for C&I loans from large- and medium-sized firms weakened after strengthening in Q1. 23% of banks on net reported weaker demand for C&I loans for large and medium-market firms, compared to 8% on net reporting stronger demand in the previous survey.

    The biggest hit was for commercial real estate (CRE) loans, where standard tightened significantly in Q2. 81% (+29pp) of banks on net reported tightening credit standards for construction and land development loans, 78% (+26pp) on net reported tightening standards for loans secured by nonfarm nonresidential properties, and 64% (+15pp) on net reported tightening lending standards for loans secured by multifamily residential properties. Demand for CRE loans fell significantly across all three categories.

    While demand for mortgages rose modestly, banks made it more difficult to get a mortgage by significantly tightening lending standards for mortgage loans. Lending standards for GSE-eligible (+53pp to +55%), non-jumbo, non-GSE eligible (+48pp to 59%), Qualified Mortgage jumbo (+50pp to 69%), non-Qualified Mortgage jumbo (+55pp to 70%), non-Qualified Mortgage non-jumbo (+49pp to +64%), and subprime (+29pp to t43%) mortgages all tightened. In other words, all those pleading the case that housing is exploding due to surging loan demand, are forgetting that there is also supply they need to consider, and contrary to conventional wisdom, banks have rarely been less willing to hand out mortgage loans.

    Finally, banks’ willingness to make consumer installment loans declined significantly in Q2 (-41% on net vs. -20% on net previously). At the same time, credit standards for approving credit card applications tightened (+72% on net vs. +39% previously), while a modest share of banks also tightened standards for auto loans (+55% vs. +16% previously). Demand for credit card loans declined (-65% on net vs. -23% previously), as did demand for auto loans (-49% vs. -35% previously).

  • Shaping Eurasia: Russia – China Bilateral Trade And Cooperation
    Shaping Eurasia: Russia – China Bilateral Trade And Cooperation

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/03/2020 – 22:45

    Submitted by SouthFront

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Relations between Russia and China have gone from strength to strength over the last 10 years. This development is not exclusively due to the increasingly hostile attitude of Western countries, and the US in particularly, to Russia and China, but it has certainly been a major contributing factor. The deepening and diversification of their strategic relationship is apparent in all spheres, but is particularly notable in their economic and military relations.

    There are many factors underpinning the expansion and diversification of trade relations and other forms of economic cooperation between Russia and China. The most important ones include the imposition of sanctions on Russia by Western countries in 2014, the economic stagnation that has characterized most European countries for much of the last 10 years while the Chinese economy has continued to grow, symmetry in economic characteristics of both countries (surpluses in one and corresponding shortages in the other in a variety of sectors), US pressure bringing both countries closer together geo-strategically (which has also produced a mutual interest in shifting away from the US dollar in all transactions), and the consolidation and harmonization of the Chinese ‘One Road One Belt’ initiative and the Eurasian Economic Union

    After a relatively flat period marked by what could be characterized as benign indifference and neglect, the trade relationship between Russia and China has grown rapidly since 2009 in terms of both imports and exports, although there was a sharp decline during 2014-2015 corresponding to a sharp decline in Russia’s overall GDP and trade volumes.

    However, at least as importantly, the growth in trade and other forms of economic cooperation has not just been quantitative but also qualitative, as the governments of both countries have elaborated detailed industrial development strategies and plans over long periods which have channelled both public and private sector investment and production into priority areas.

    This is in sharp contrast to the peculiar form of haphazard, opportunistic and hyper-militarized disaster capitalism that has reigned in the US for many years – arguably at least since the 1990s, when US companies began dismantling the US industrial capacity and offshoring production en masse to raise corporate profits, and the US Congress began to dismantle the anti-trust and financial regulatory frameworks that had been established during the Great Depression of the 1930s to limit the volatility and excesses of the financial sector. (It is also approximately the same period that the US began its post Cold War military adventurism in earnest.)

    Most recently the Trump administration’s ambitious infrastructure investment fund (which appeared to be yet another corporate and political slush fund to a considerable extent, to be divided amongst political and corporate allies and withheld from opponents or intransigents) to modernize the US’ aging infrastructure never materialized, and the attempt to establish something resembling a coherent industrial policy complemented by a set of tariffs on selected imports to stimulate domestic production degenerated into an ad hoc series of punitive tariffs and charges whose main objective seemed to be to punish China for the US’ own economic and industrial failures.

    The only thing the Republicans and Democrats have been able to agree on in recent times, apart from increasing the already astronomical level of military spending, was to establish another disaster capitalism multi-trillion dollar bailout fund (for the Coronavirus this time) for the financial and corporate sectors, which have increasingly fallen under the control of a very limited number of investment funds led by Vanguard and Black Rock.

    In contrast, China’s long-running practice of elaborating and updating five year strategic economic development plans which are implemented by a combination of State-owned and private sector enterprises has proven to be a success. After a catastrophic period of experimentation with disaster capitalism under Boris Yeltsin, Russia has also adopted the strategy of developing a hybrid (or ‘mixed’) economy with substantial State and private sector involvement within the overall framework of strategic planning and industrial policies elaborated by the State in accordance with crucial national interests and objectives.

    The underlying similarity in approaches and objectives – albeit obscured somewhat by China’s continued strong commitment to communism and Russia’s strong renunciation of the same – has provided a solid basis for both countries’ renewed interest in strengthening bilateral relations and cooperation in all spheres.

    While the leadership of both countries have sought to develop and promote a wide range of bilateral trade, investment and R & D projects both by State entities as well as by the private sector, due to their vast scale the bilateral agreements and projects in the energy sector overshadow all others.

    This should not however obscure the importance of cooperation in other sectors and the extent to which the different manifestations and forms of cooperation have continued to proliferate. Most Western analysts emphasize the excellent ties that have developed in terms of military cooperation, involving everything from basic R & D of new technologies and weapons systems to military training and exercises, but the bilateral cooperation goes far beyond these high profile sectors to include education, scientific and technical research, agriculture, manufacturing and services more generally.

    Macroeconomic Data on the Russian Economy

    To contextualize the changes that have taken place in the bilateral economic relations between Russia and China, they are placed against the background of economic developments in Russia more generally. As noted above, Russia’s economy has generally experienced solid if not spectacular growth since the disastrous decade of the 1990s, and although it was significantly impacted by the West’s sanctions imposed in 2014 (as well as by the fall in oil prices that ocurred around the same time) the economy soon stabilized and then recovered quantitative losses on an even more solid fundamental basis given the economy’s increased diversification, self-sufficiency and resistance to external shocks.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Russia’s total GDP and growth rate since 1989; Source

    Overall Russia has performed at least as well as most Western countries since 2000, though of course China’s economic growth has far exceeded them.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    China’s impressive economic growth therefore could explain the steady trend of increasing trade between the two neighbours by and of itself, however as mentioned above bilateral relations have been boosted by external factors (Western hostility and sanctions) and also nurtured and guided by internal factors (strategic economic and industrial planning based on compatible national priorities and objectives, augmented by significant levels of direct State participation in key economic sectors).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source

    Imports and Exports

    The growing economic importance of China to Russia has largely been at the expense of Europe, in part due to the imposition of sanctions against Russia but also a natural consequence of China’s continued economic growth and Europe’s economic stagnation, as well as the complementarity that exists between the Russian and Chinese economies, sectors of comparative advantage and resource endowments.

    The share of the 28 European Union countries in Russian exports dropped from 52% in 2014 to 45% in 2017, and the corresponding shares in Russian imports fell from 41% to 38%. Over the same period, the share of China in Russian exports increased from 7.5% to 12%, and in imports from 11.5% to 21%. Nonetheless, as of 2017 Russian imports from China (EUR 48bn) remained about half the value of imports from the European Union (EUR 87bn). Thus although trade reorientation away from the West and towards China is steadily increasing, Europe remains an integral trade partner for Russia.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The figures for 2019 were very similar. The top 10 sources of imports were:

    China 21% (54 billion US$), Germany 10.1% (25 billion US$), Belarus 5.52% (13.6 billion US$), USA 5.43% (13.4 billion US$), Italy 4.41% (10.9 billion US$), Japan 3.62% (8.96 billion US$), France 3.47% (8.59 billion US$), Korea 3.23% (8 billion US$), Kazakhstan 2.31% (5.71 billion US$), Turkey 2.01% (4.97 billion US$).

    The top 10 export destinations for Russian exports in 2019 were:

    China 13.4% (57 billion US$), Netherlands 10.4% (44 billion US$), Germany 6.57% (28 billion US$), Belarus 5.08% (21 billion US$), Turkey 4.95% (21 billion US$), Korea 3.83% (16.3 billion US$), Italy 3.36% (14.3 billion US$), Kazakhstan 3.34% (14.2 billion US$), United Kingdom 3.11% (13.2 billion US$), USA 3.09% (13.1 billion US$). Source

    The continued importance of Europe to Russia’s economy is particularly evident when the analysis goes beyond the level of trade volumes, to a consideration of the evolution of trade structures by sector, particularly in the case of Russia’s imports. Whereas Russian exports are dominated by mineral fuels in both directions (accounting for more than 76% of exports to the EU and 64% of exports to China), there are important differences in the structure of Russian imports from the EU and China.

    “This reflects the fact that, in certain areas, Russia still needs products and equipment that it can only obtain from Western sources. For example, whereas the HS84 category (nuclear reactors, boilers, machinery and mechanical equipment) represents the largest import item from both the EU and China (with shares in total Russian imports of 23% and 28% in 2017, respectively), the second and third most important categories of imports from the EU: HS87 (vehicles, 11% of Russian imports) and HS30 (pharmaceuticals, 9%) are still largely absent in imports from China…

    Nevertheless, import structures are also converging: between 2014 and 2017 these structural ‘import gaps’ were substantially reduced – most spectacularly in the above mentioned three largest import items. The structure of Russian imports from China is also becoming more sophisticated: the shares of machinery and electrical equipment are already higher than the corresponding shares in imports from the EU. As the EU-China import gap closes for Russia, one can conclude that China is gradually replacing the EU as an import source, even with respect to structural developments (although there remain gaps at more detailed commodity levels).” LINK

    Key Sectors and Major Projects

    The negotiation and execution of structural agreements and operational projects and transactions has taken place within the framework of existing strategic planning elements so as to maximize their compatibility with existing projects and activities and contribution to the realization of national priorities and interests. Although Russia’s efforts to increase economic diversification and self-sufficiency in key sectors received a great boost from the imposition of sanctions in 2014, it had already taken substantial steps in this regard. For instance, a ‘food security doctrine’ has been official government policy since 2010, and the doctrine has been a key element of subsequent government programs for the development of the agriculture and fisheries sectors and the regulation of agri-food markets during the period 2013-2020. LINK

    In the same way, ambitious infrastructure projects announced in the framework of developing bilateral relations – such as the Moscow-Kazan high speed railway, which will eventually be part of a high speed rail network linking China (and probably even southeast Asia) to Europe – are being laid out within the framework of a broader Russian strategy to overhaul and upgrade infrastructure throughout the country. In April 2019 the Moscow Times reported:

    “The Russian government is pursuing a 6.3 trillion ruble ($96 billion) six-year modernization plan to revamp the country’s highways, airports, railways, ports and other transport infrastructure through 2024.

    The comprehensive plan is geared toward improving the connectivity of Russian regions, as well as developing strategic routes including the Europe-Western China transport corridor and the Northern Sea Route.

    The plan stems from President Vladimir Putin’s ambitious domestic goals outlined after his inauguration last May. Under a presidential decree, a 3.5 trillion ruble investment fund was set up last summer to finance around 170 construction and other projects from 2019 to 2024.”

    Of course, both the general plan and specific details have been subject to scepticism by some experts:

    “Bloomberg columnist Leonid Bershidsky has argued that the infrastructure plan risks neglecting underdeveloped regions the Kremlin sees as a “social liability.” Economists interviewed by The Christian Science Monitor have said the revitalization plans are geared toward boosting the export potential of big business and are ill-equipped toward future economic development.” LINK

    Nonetheless, at least Russia is committed to thinking and acting strategically with the intention of improving the country’s stock of assets and capabilities, and early indications are that most of the projects have been thoroughly evaluated for current and future economic and social utility and that implementation is progressing steadily. What would the detractors of Russia’s efforts in this respect make of the non-existent efforts of the ruling classes in the US to undertake a similar national infrastructure modernization project?

    Early on in the preparations for a massive expansion in bilateral ties the underlying financial infrastructure was laid.

    Although still heavily reliant on the US dollar for all bilateral transactions at the time, by 2014 around 100 Russian commercial banks were already offering corresponding accounts for settlements in yuan, and in some ordinary depositors could also open an account in yuan. On November 18 Sberbank became the first Russian bank to begin financing letters of credit in Chinese yuan.

    The settlement in national currencies between China and Russia in bilateral trade amounted to about 2% in 2013. However, the use of the yuan in mutual settlements between China and Russia increased ninefold in annual terms between January and September 2014, according to the Chinese Ministry of Economic Development, and has continued to rise. LINK

    The financial basis for greatly expanded relations has continued to evolve in accordance with progress in other areas.

    Thus, in 2015 Sberbank – Russia’s biggest lender – signed a facility agreement with China’s Development Bank to the amount of $966 million.

    The goal of the agreement is to develop the “long-term cooperation between Sberbank and China Development Bank in the area of financing foreign trade operations between Russia and China.”

    Russia’s state-owned VTB Bank and the Export-Import Bank of China also signed a $483.2 million loan facility agreement to finance trading operations between Russia and China.

    The financial architecture has been further consolidated by broader regional frameworks and agreements for mutually beneficial cooperation.

    In 2015, Russian President Vladimir Putin and Chinese leader Xi Jinping signed a decree to formalize cooperation in linking the development of the Eurasian Economic Union with the “Silk Road” economic project. The Silk Road project is aimed at connecting China with European and Middle Eastern markets.

    “The integration of the Eurasian Economic Union and Silk Road projects means reaching a new level of partnership and actually implies a common economic space on the continent,” Putin said after the meeting with his Chinese counterpart.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Major transport corridors of the Chinese Belt and Road Initiative

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Trans-continental railways

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Russia’s railway network is steadily undergoing a major program of extension and modernization

    Also in 2015, China pledged to invest $5.8 billion in the construction of the Moscow-Kazan High Speed Railway. The railway will be extended to China, connecting the two countries through Kazakhstan. The total cost of the Moscow-Kazan high speed railroad project is $21.4 billion.

    An agreement was signed to create a leasing company which will promote the sale of the Russian Sukhoi Superjet-100 passenger planes to the Chinese and South-East Asian markets, and the two countries agreed to develop a new heavy helicopter, called the Advanced Heavy Lift. LINK

    The broadening of economic relations spearheaded by high profile State-led industrial projects is underpinned by a range of other initiatives. For example, in September 2018 Russian and Chinese businesses agreed to further develop trade and economic cooperation and increase mutual investments at the Eastern Economic Forum in Vladivostok.

    According to a statement from the Russian Direct Investment Fund (RDIF), the sides are considering 73 investment projects worth more than $100 billion in total. The group overseeing the investments is the Russian-Chinese Business Advisory Committee, which includes more than 150 representatives from “leading Russian and Chinese companies.” RDIF said that seven projects worth a total of $4.6 billion have already been implemented as a result of the group’s activities.

    The Russia-China Investment Fund was established in 2012 by China’s state-owned China Investment Corporation and RDIF to focus on projects that foster economic cooperation between Moscow and Beijing. LINK

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Major China – Russia gas routes

    The largest joint project that has been developed is the massive Power of Siberia gas project. In 2014 Gazprom and the China National Petroleum Corporation (CNPC) signed a $400 billion, 30-year framework agreement to deliver 38 billion cubic meters of Russian gas to China annually. According to Russian energy major Gazprom, 119 operational gas wells had been completed by 2017 at the Chayandinskoye field in Yakutia, and the 3,000km of pipelines from Yakutia to the Russian-Chinese border, connected to the Chinese grid via a two-thread underwater crossing of the pipeline across the Amur River, started deliveries as scheduled late in 2019. The deal on the ‘Eastern Route’ took more than a decade to negotiate.

    While Western experts are trying to downplay the merits and prospects for the Power of Siberia project – and the bilateral strategic relationship more generally – the project started supplying gas on schedule and at this stage it appears that the claims of the detractors consist of logistical and operational challenges that the Russians have ample experience in confronting or are largely wishful thinking (the terrain is very inhospitable and operating costs and risks are therefore very high, the project will crowd out smaller producers, Russia is locking itself into an arrangement that eliminates other opportunities, Chinese market power means Russia will have to accept unfavourable conditions, the Asian giant will inevitably swallow up its northern neighbour, bilateral relations are founded on a ‘marriage of convenience’, etc.). LINK

    As the US has continued to intensify its hostility and associated geopolitical and economic pressure on China and Russia, the two countries have continued to expand their military cooperation as well as a strong high-tech partnership spanning telecommunications, artificial intelligence and robotics, biotechnology and the digital economy based on the exploitation of existing and potential synergies.

    The deepening of the bilateral relationship includes more dialogue and exchanges of information, increased academic cooperation and the development of joint industrial science and technology parks. In addition, Russian President Vladimir Putin said Russia would help the Chinese build their own missile early-warning system – a technology that only Russia and the U.S. have successfully implemented so far. LINK

    Conclusion

    The crucial role of strategic economic and industrial planning and direct State participation in key sectors has been emphasized throughout this report. This is not to suggest that such planning and participation has been perfect; of course, significant errors have been made in both planning and execution, unforeseeable external shocks or factors that could have been predicted but were not taken into account have disrupted progress, as in all other countries.

    One area of particular concern is the adverse material impact and effect on morale caused by corruption, which continues to plague both State and private sectors suggesting that the systems of accounting and accountability applying to both require further improvement in both design and implementation. Also, it is arguable that the vision of public forms of economic ownership and participation remains somewhat limited to a strict State/ private company dichotomy and to elitist management structures and procedures within each.

    One aspect of this is that more forms of State participation could be considered at the regional and local levels; another is in terms of inclusion of the workforce of each enterprise in the planning, management and accountability structures and decisions of existing State-owned enterprises.

    Beyond this, there may be scope for the promotion of other forms of organization, such as producer, professional or community-based cooperatives and collectives that can provide an organizational basis for economic projects and activities in a manner that can incorporate other values and objectives beyond the profit motive.

    The basic data for foreign capital flows also suggest a major structural defect which is inherent to the ‘actual existing’ international economy: a vastly disproportionate amount of capital arrives from and departs for small countries that have no clear trade significance or investment capacity of their own, meaning that such capital flows are routed via these jurisdictions either to avoid taxes and other regulations or to deliberately obscure the identity of the owners and beneficiaries of the resources involved.

    According to UNCTAD, between 30% and 50% of all ‘foreign direct investment’ worldwide passes through “conduit” countries, making it hard to determine the source.

    According to data from the Central Bank of Russia for 2017, Russia receives 36.8% of ‘foreign direct investment’ (or more accurately, international capital flows) from Cyprus, 5.8% from the Bahamas, 7.2% from Bermuda, 0.8% from China, 3.4% from France, 4.1% from Germany, 0.5% from Japan, 0.4% from Korea, 4.4% from Luxembourg, 9.2% from Netherlands, 3.7% from Singapore, 2.9% from Switzerland, 4.2% from the UK, 0.7% from the US and 0.8% from the Ukraine.

    According to estimates compiled by UNCTAD, approximately 6.5% of Russia’s ‘FDI’ stock — about $28.7 billion worth based on 2017 data — was actually of Russian origin. The UNCTAD estimates also showed a significantly increased amount of European and US investment. According to the estimates produced, the US is actually the biggest foreign investor in the Russian economy, worth about $39.2 billion.

    While such features of international capital flows can be useful to, for example, elude punitive sanctions from hostile states, they greatly restrict efforts to reduce corruption and improve planning and accountability. The Russian government is no doubt well aware of both the potential advantages as well as the drawbacks involved. For example, Bloomberg reported last year:

    “For Russia, meanwhile, repatriating the capital that’s recorded as foreign but isn’t remains an important policy goal. In the 2019 World Investment Report, Unctad attributes the 2018 drop in Russia’s investment inflows to the government’s effort to get Russian business owners to redomicile their holdings to the home country.” LINK

    While some aspects and consequences of this inimical structural feature of the international economy have been addressed, it remains a major challenge not just for Russia but everywhere.

    Overall, however, the available macro-economic data and preliminary results of major joint projects between Russia and China suggest that their approach has been successful as the Russian economy has withstood the external shocks of sanctions imposed by major trading partners as well as large falls in oil and gas prices, and continued on the path of diversification, deepening and constant improvement of existing production capacities to ensure a core level of resilience and self-sufficiency without going to the other extreme of going xenophobic and renouncing foreign trade and cooperation.

  • Journalist (Who Survived Previous 'Hit') Shot Dead In Mexico While Eating At Restaurant
    Journalist (Who Survived Previous ‘Hit’) Shot Dead In Mexico While Eating At Restaurant

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/03/2020 – 22:25

    A Mexican journalist was shot dead on Sunday in the city of Iguala in the southwestern state of Guerrero, reported Reuters

    Pablo Morrugares, the editor of PM Noticias, was at dinner Sunday evening when a gunman opened fire and killed him on the spot. He was accompanied by his bodyguard who was also shot dead. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Pablo Morrugares

    Morrugares’ PM Noticias focused primarily on reporting crime in the central Guerrero state, which the US State Department has labeled the region a “Level 4: Do Not Travel.” In fact, the state is one of Mexico’s most violent cartel infested regions. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Alleged scene of Pablo Morrugares’ assassination  

    PM Noticias’ Facebook account published a post late Sunday that read: “We are in mourning at PM News but the page will continue with its legacy of our dear friend Pablito.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Reuters notes Morrugares survived a 2016 assassination. The motive behind Sunday’s slaying of the reporter is unknown, but one can only suspect it’s due to the newspaper’s reporting on local crime. 

    The Mexican Association of Displaced and Attacked Journalists said Morrugares was recently threatened. Fellow journalists are in shock over his death. 

    Reporters Without Borders, an international non-profit organization that safeguards the right to freedom of information, indicate three other journalists have been killed in Mexico this year. 

    Reporters Without Borders released a report in 2018 that described Afghanistan, Syria, Mexico, Yemen, and India as the most dangerous areas for reporters. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Besides cartel wars and out of control murders, Mexico is recording the third-highest COVID-19 deaths in the world. 

  • NYC Mayor Admits City Did Not Submit Application To Paint 'Black Lives Matter' Murals
    NYC Mayor Admits City Did Not Submit Application To Paint ‘Black Lives Matter’ Murals

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/03/2020 – 22:05

    Authored by Janita Kan via The Epoch Times,

    New York Mayor Bill de Blasio said on Monday that the Black Lives Matter murals painted around the five boroughs were painted without going through the application process for public art projects.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    His comments come after the city is facing scrutiny for refusing to let other groups to paint similar murals on city streets, with the groups accusing the mayor of depriving them of their First Amendment rights.

    De Blasio told reporters in July that he would not allow Blue Lives Matter and other groups to paint similar messages. He justified his decision by saying that “Black Lives Matter” represents a “seismic moment” in the nation’s history and transcends the message of any one group.

    Meanwhile, a conservative women’s group, Women for America First, sued De Blasio and Transportation Commissioner Polly Trottenberg in July for allegedly blocking their request to paint a mural with the message “Engaging, Inspiring and Empowering Women to Make a Difference!”

    During a press conference, De Blasio appeared to backtrack on his comments, saying that he hadn’t said “no to people.”

    “We’ve said, if you want to apply, you can apply, but there’s a process,” he said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    New York Mayor Bill de Blasio (third from left) participates in painting Black Lives Matter on Fifth Avenue in front of Trump Tower in Manhattan, N.Y., on July 9, 2020. (Mark Lennihan/AP Photo)

    The mayor added that the decision to paint the Black Lives Matter murals came out of a meeting at Gracie Mansion with community leaders and activists who urged the mayor to declare the message official. He justified the decision to not follow the normal permit process, saying that that message “transcends all normal realities because we are in a moment of history where this had to be said and done.”

    “That’s a decision I made,” he said.

    “But the normal process continues for anyone who wants to apply.”

    Trottenberg told reporters during the same press conference that anyone can apply for the public art program but added that the city has the discretion on picking those projects.

    De Blasio drew an inflammatory response from President Donald Trump in June when he decided to paint “Black Lives Matter” in large yellow letters on the street outside of the Trump Tower. City officials have portrayed the location chosen as a way to rebuke the president for his response to the protests in the wake of George Floyd’s death.

    The mayor has previously defended the mural, saying that the Black Lives Matter movement “transcends any notion of politics.”

    “This is about righting a wrong and moving us all forward,” he added.

    City councilors in Tulsa, Oklahoma, are also facing similar requests from groups after a Black Lives Matter mural was painted on a city street. The officials on July 29 agreed to remove a “Black Lives Matter” mural from its Greenwood District, which was painted without a permit, saying that allowing the Black Lives Matter mural to remain on the street would invite other groups to request to have their own messages painted. One of the councilors said he had already received requests from several pro-police groups about painting the words “Back the Blue” in another area in the city, in support of the Tulsa Police Department.

  • Egypt To Elon Musk: No, Aliens Did Not Build The Pyramids
    Egypt To Elon Musk: No, Aliens Did Not Build The Pyramids

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/03/2020 – 21:45

    Continuing with our world’s decade long history of rewarding Elon Musk for obvious idiocy, the Tesla CEO has now been invited to visit Egypt after the “genius” Tweeted late last week that “Aliens built the pyramids”. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Tweet alludes to a popular conspiracy theory about the origins of the pyramids, which many think was a feat unable to be carried out by humans. The topic is often discussed by pseudo-scientist writers and followers of sacred geometry in popular media, like The Joe Rogan Experience.

    Egypt seems unamused by the theories. Raina al-Mashat, Egypt’s Minister of International Co-operation, invited Musk to the country so he could see for himself, according to The Telegraph. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    He said to Musk: “I follow your work with a lot of admiration. I invite you & SpaceX to explore the writings about how the pyramids were built and also to check out the tombs of the pyramid builders. Mr Musk, we are waiting for you.”

    Egyptian archaeologist Zahi Hawass called Musk’s argument a “complete hallucination”. 

    And given rumors of Musk’s drug use, Hawass may not be that far off…

  • Minneapolis Authorities Warn Residents "Prepare" To Be Robbed & Obey Criminals
    Minneapolis Authorities Warn Residents “Prepare” To Be Robbed & Obey Criminals

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/03/2020 – 21:25

    Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

    Authorities in Minneapolis sent out a letter to residents telling them to ‘prepare’ to be robbed and to obey criminals following a recent surge in robberies and carjackings.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Be prepared to give up your cell phone and purse/wallet,” states the email, which also says that if a resident encounters a criminal, they should “do as they say.”

    The advisory comes off the back of over two months of rioting, protests and unrest following the death of George Floyd.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    h/t  @KyleHooten2

    Minneapolis has experienced a 46% increase in carjackings and a 36% increase in robberies compared to this same time last year, while “Police in the city’s Third Precinct alone have received more than 100 reports of robberies and 20 reports of carjackings in just the last month,” reports Alpha News.

    Minneapolis’ Congressional representative Ilhan Omar has also repeatedly called for the police force to be dismantled and replaced with an army of glorified social workers.

    It appears as though authorities in the city have waved a white flag to criminals who will now be emboldened to target more victims who are less likely to put up any resistance.

    *  *  *

    There is a war on free speech. Without your support, my voice will be silenced. Please sign up for the free newsletter here. Donate to me on SubscribeStar here. Support my sponsor – Turbo Force – a supercharged boost of clean energy without the comedown.

  • Soros Infuses $116K Into McCloskey Prosecutor's PAC Days After Charges Filed
    Soros Infuses $116K Into McCloskey Prosecutor’s PAC Days After Charges Filed

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/03/2020 – 21:05

    Just eight days after St. Louis Circuit Attorney Kim Gardner filed charges against a wealthy couple who defended their home against trespassing protesters, George Soros donated $116,000 to a Political Action Committee (PAC) established for the activist prosecutor, according to JustTheNews.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A Saturday filing with the Missouri Ethics Commission revealed the donation made directly from Soros to the Missouri Justice and Public Safety PAC – for which Soros is the only donor so far. The PAC has already spent at least $104,393 – including $77,804 directly on Gardner, and a payoff of accumulated debt. Of note, Gardner has a primary this Tuesday.

    Soros spokesman Michael Vachon told Just The News that Soros has made no secret that he supports prosecutors like Gardner for criminal justice reform.

    Gardner slapped charges on personal injury lawyers Mark McCloskey, 63, and his wife Patricia, 61, who armed themselves and stood outside their mansion as a group of roughly 100 protesters broke down a gate to march down their private road.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For defending their property, the McCloskeys were each charged with a felony count of unlawful use of a weapon. Days after the charges were filed, it emerged that Gardner’s staff ordered a crime lab to tamper with evidence, by reassembling the ‘prop’ pistol Patricia was waving in order to make it “capable of lethal use.”

    This isn’t the first brush with shoddy evidence for Gardner’s office;

    Gardner, a Democrat, was elected in 2016 and supported by Soros-funded PACs, which financially back several prosecutors across America on a progressive criminal justice reform platform. 

    She drew national attention when she filed criminal charges against then-Republican Missouri Gov. Eric Greitens, forcing him to resign, only to reveal later she did not have evidence to substantiate her allegations. She is facing investigation for her conduct in the Greitens case, and her former chief investigator is awaiting trial on tampering charges. –JustTheNews

    Gardner’s decision to prosecute the McCloskeys ignited a controversy over Second Amendment rights, a well as Missouri’s “Castle Doctrine” which governs use of firearms to defend one’s home. Those defending the couple include President Trump, Missouri GOP Senator Josh Hawley, Missouri AG Eric Schmitt, and Gov. Michael Parson (R) who says he’ll pardon the McCloskeys.

    Their attorney, Joel Schwartz, has filed a motion to dismiss both Gardner and her office from moving forward with their prosecution – claiming a conflict of interest, as “that Gardner’s campaign has used the McCloskeys’ incident to further her own financial, personal, and professional gain because Gardner sent out campaign solicitations for her re-election mentioning the McCloskeys,” according to the report.

  • Unheard Stories Of Economic Despair From America's Worst Economic Downturn Since The Great Depression
    Unheard Stories Of Economic Despair From America’s Worst Economic Downturn Since The Great Depression

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/03/2020 – 20:45

    Authored by Michael Snyder via The End of The American Dream blog,

    The economic pain that we are witnessing right now is far greater than anything that we witnessed during the last recession.  U.S. GDP declined by 32.9 percent on an annualized basis last quarter, more than 100,000 businesses have permanently shut down since the COVID-19 pandemic first hit the United States, and more than 54 million Americans have filed new claims for unemployment benefits over the last 19 weeks.  Up until just recently, a $600 weekly unemployment “supplement” and a federal moratorium that prevented many evictions had helped to ease the suffering for millions of American families, but both of those measures have now expired. 

    As a result, a tremendous amount of economic pain which had previously been deferred will now come rushing back with a vengeance.  Millions of American families are no longer going to be able to pay their bills, and experts are warning that we could soon see an “eviction crisis” that is absolutely unprecedented in American history.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    48-year-old Thomas Darnell of West Point, Mississippi never thought that he would be in this position.  He had been a factory worker for over 20 years until he lost his job in May, and since then he hasn’t been able to find another.  And then on top of everything else, everyone in his house caught COVID-19…

    First, he was furloughed for three weeks in April and then laid off in May. Then things got worse: His entire household of seven, including himself, his wife, three kids and daughter-in-law, along with his baby grandson, contracted coronavirus after they saw their immediate family over the Independence Day weekend.

    “I’m tired and shaky. Even after a few weeks, I’m still trying to recover,” Darnell says, who has since been cleared of the virus but still has lingering symptoms.

    He is concerned that employers will be scared away by his recent illness, and he is becoming desperate because he is running out of money.

    With no health insurance and no paychecks coming in, Darnell and his wife have gotten to the point where they have to make a choice between buying insulin or buying groceries

    He can’t afford health insurance, which has added to his anxiety because he and his wife are both diabetic, he says. Like Bolei, Darnell and his wife have been forced to make a grueling decision between either paying for their medications or keeping food on the table.

    “Do we buy insulin or groceries? It’s a hard juggle,” Darnell says. “I’m willing to make less money and start working again to get health insurance, but no one is hiring.”

    The weekly $600 unemployment supplements from the federal government had helped to keep them going for a while, but now those payments have ended, and the immediate future is looking quite bleak.

    In Richmond, Virginia, a mother of eight named Shamika Rollins wasn’t sure how she was going to make it when her hours as a home health aid were reduced.  Unpaid bills started piling up, and then she got an eviction notice a few weeks ago.  The following comes from CBS News

    Shamika Rollins’ eight children share two bedrooms in Richmond, Virginia. But she’s worried about losing their home after she says she received an eviction notice in June.

    “First thing, I panic, and then next thing, I look, and I’m like, I got my kids. And it’s like, okay, now you gotta figure this out,” she told CBS News correspondent Adriana Diaz.

    If a miracle does not happen, Rollins and her eight children will soon be out in the street, and this is causing her to have “a lot of sleepless nights”

    “I have a lot of sleepless nights,” Rollins said. “My mind is constantly racing, you know, what’s your next move?”

    Sadly, there are millions of other Americans in the exact same position.

    In fact, experts are projecting that up to 40 million Americans could be evicted from their homes during this pandemic.

    Many small business owners are also facing heartbreaking choices during this downturn.  A restaurant owner in Delaware named Alex Heidenberger “hasn’t paid the mortgage on his home the past four months” as he desperately tries to keep his once profitable restaurants alive…

    Heidenberger, who typically draws about $20,000 a month in profit from the restaurant, now receives nothing. He says he hasn’t paid the mortgage on his home the past four months. He served lifeguard duty for a couple of weeks, mostly to help a beach crew depleted by COVID-19 quarantines but also to make some cash.

    “I’m working harder than I have ever worked in my life,” he says, adding that he puts in about 80 hours a week at the two restaurants. Yet, “I have no money… This is all I think about. I don’t sleep.”

    The COVID-19 pandemic has hit the restaurant industry particularly hard.  Americans are not eating out as regularly as they once did because of the virus, and it is probably going to remain that way for the foreseeable future.

    In Massachusetts, a restaurant owner named John Pepper once had eight thriving locations, but at this point only two of them remain open

    John Pepper used a PPP loan to pay employees and reopen four of his eight Boloco restaurants when Massachusetts lifted its shutdown order in early May. But with the money spent and business at the restaurants down as much as 70%, Pepper had to again close two locations. The staff of 125 he had before the virus outbreak is down to 50.

    “A lot of this is out of our hands at this point,” Pepper says. “At this moment, I don’t see getting my full payroll back.”

    Overall, we are facing a “restaurant apocalypse” in the U.S. that is unprecedented in size and scope.

    According to one estimate, we could lose more than a third of all of our restaurants by the end of this calendar year

    As many as 231,000 of the nation’s roughly 660,000 eateries will likely shut down this year, according to an estimate from restaurant consultancy Aaron Allen & Associates provided to Bloomberg News. This will bring the industry’s steady growth to a halt and mark the first time in two decades that U.S. restaurant counts don’t climb. Restaurants have already shed millions of jobs this year, economic data show.

    What we are watching is truly horrifying.  So many hopes and dreams went into each one of those restaurants that are shutting down, and countless restaurant owners are going to be completely financially ruined by all of this.

    For other Americans, this economic downturn has put their very lives at risk.  In Colorado, 70-year-old Catherine Azar was already dealing with heart problems and diabetes, and now she is in danger of being thrown out into the street

    “It’s hard for me to conceive of someone being willing to put another person out in the street in the middle of a deadly pandemic, and I’m high risk. I’m 70. I have heart issues and I’m diabetic,” Azar said.

    Rollins and Azar are just two of the 43 million Americans at risk of eviction in the coming months. For context, about 1 million Americans were evicted in 2010, the year after the Great Recession.

    How long do you think that a 70-year-old woman with heart problems and diabetes would last on the street or in a shelter?

    And as millions upon millions of Americans get evicted during the months ahead, the shelters are all going to fill up really fast.

    America simply was not prepared for an economic downturn of this nature, and the truth is that much bigger challenges are still ahead.

    So please do not look down on anyone that needs help right now, because soon you may find yourself in the exact same position.

  • Sotheby's Sales Plunge 25% Despite Bored Millennials Bidding Online 
    Sotheby’s Sales Plunge 25% Despite Bored Millennials Bidding Online 

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/03/2020 – 20:25

    The world’s largest broker of fine and decorative art, jewelry, and collectibles, Sotheby’s, announced Monday that total sales for the first seven months of the year were $2.5 billion, down 25% from the same period a year earlier when it sold $3.3 billion, reported artnet news

    Sotheby’s said $1.9 billion came from auction and online sales (down 30.4%). Private sales totaled $575 million (down 1.5%). 

    The auction house said declining sales might have been worse if it wasn’t for its online segment.

    “The art and luxury markets have proven to be incredibly resilient, and demand for quality across categories is unabated,” said Charles Stewart, Sotheby’s CEO, in a statement.

    Stewart said, “although driven by necessity, it’s clear that our clients’ interest and confidence in technology have fundamentally changed.”

    Sotheby’s said bidders are getting younger, a trend where millennials are starting to become more dominant in online auctions. About a third of bidders over the period were under 40 years old. 

    Ahead of lockdowns, Sotheby’s was already building the infrastructure for virtual-only auctions. By the time lockdowns began, online sales had surged to $285 million, more than tripling its online total for all of 2019.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The virus pandemic’s silver lining is that it helped supercharge global online art sales that were declining ahead of 2020. 

    Bored millennials during lockdowns bid up Michael Jordan’s Nike Air Jordan 1’s to $560,000, expected to sell for around $150,000. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With overall waning sales, Sotheby’s furloughed 12% of its staff in April. Employees in the US and UK were not furloughed but took a 20% pay reduction through summer. 

    “Like many businesses, Sotheby’s is adjusting to the challenging circumstances resulting from COVID-19 and taking the necessary steps to protect our employees and the future of the company,” the auction house said in April. 

    As for rival Christies, well, it sold $1.4 billion worth of art for the first seven months, down 50% over the same period in 2019. 

    Overall, auction houses are seeing slowing sales in a virus-induced recession, as millennial bidders now drive online sales. 

  • The Spreading Feeling "This Is Happening All By Design"
    The Spreading Feeling “This Is Happening All By Design”

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/03/2020 – 20:05

    Authored by Bruce Wilds via Advancing Time blog,

    As events unfold I have witnessed a growing opinion being batted around that something sinister is happening beneath the surface. This includes the feeling we are no longer in control of our fate. More and more the idea that form follows function and the winners were picked before all this started is being injected into the mix. This theory embraces the proposition the bottom half of society is destitute and totally dependent on the government which means they have been removed from the battlefield. Now that these people are no longer a threat, corporate and government collaborators are consolidating power and control.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Is This All happening By Design?

    Like many of the people watching this slow-moving train wreck, I’m beginning to lose perspective. My insight has become blocked by the increasingly irrational actions taking place. The uneasy feeling that things will get far worse is being heightened by the suggestion this is all by design, and when you don’t get that ‘you have no defense’, it is indeed frightening. It is bolstered by the supporting argument we should not listen to what those in charge say but rather that we watch what they do. Much of the growing apprehension is rooted in the domino effects about to be unleashed upon the economy. An example is, the tenant doesn’t pay the landlord and risks eviction. The landlord doesn’t pay his mortgage and risks foreclosure. The bank doesn’t get paid, but that’s OK because taxpayers will bail them out.

    With so much unresolved and hanging in the wind conspiracy theories are taking wing. While I do not endorse the theory this is all developing as planned, it is difficult to deny the situation is dire and the general population remains clueless as to the dangers ahead. Collectively this includes a Fed which is out of control and a polarized government that is dysfunctional at best. Add to this the market manipulation which has reached epic levels. This whole scheme has resulted in a massive huge transfer of wealth and the creation of social chaos. For the “greater good” we have seen rules to further restrict our freedom being instituted and more expected to be imposed in one way or another.

    Economic Hardship Has Many Faces

    Just how unkind the recent Covid-economy has been to the middle-class has been masked by the helicopter money flowing from Washington. This has skewed income and spending across America but little attention has been paid to those taking it on the chin. This includes the owners of small businesses and those making substantially more than before the pandemic hit. The evidence of the pain and damage being inflicted on the Main Street economy is going beginning to become apparent. It can be seen as we drive down the street and see move empty windows and for lease signs which are sprouting up like weeds.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Even the appearance of a coin shortage due to our government being inept is causing people to claim this is all an intentional part of a larger plan. It means businesses are using the coin shortage to stop taking cash. This has left some people wondering if those wanting the demise of paper money are using the virus scam to eliminate cash altogether. The pandemic and warning germs can be transferred on the surface of money mean that suddenly “money” has now been deemed “unsafe.” The rumor is out that Nancy Pelosi has already inserted in one stimulus bill the seeds of “taking our currency digital.”

    This would force everyone into the banking system increasing the government’s ability to tax, track, and control just about everything. The complete transformation to digital currency would mean if the government does not like your business or politics they could just lock you out of the system. They could even charge you to park your money while the bank would be allowed to lend it out and charge interest on it. Eliminating cash is the first step they must adopt for this to work. It would lock money into their system, they would eliminate or control all alternatives to money so it cannot be diverted from or moved out of the banking or financial system.

    Is the plan to crash the US into the most devastating depression we have ever seen? While this could wipe out all US debt and clean the country of past obligations it would result in lost credibility and standing for generations to come. To construct such a calamity is simply insane and would shake the world economy and global financial system to its core. Many people claim a crash was coming anyway and the virus just sped things up. When looking at the alternative paths forward the importance of the forthcoming election could never be more crucial. These people point to the fact you can’t have an economy that is solely built on fast food and shopping, you have to make stuff and export.

    We should at least acknowledge claims by the “it is all happening by design” faction extend to saying that all efforts to halt the coming collapse will not be enough. They contend the question is whether the markets will implode before or after tens of millions of Americans hit rock bottom and become totally destitute and ruined. Judging by the failure of Congress to even grasp the urgency or just how enormous the threat to our future is, perhaps this is the way the entire evil system was designed to unfold.

  • The US Has Started To Identify The Mystery Seeds Being Sent From China
    The US Has Started To Identify The Mystery Seeds Being Sent From China

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/03/2020 – 19:45

    It was just about week ago that we highlighted a mysterious trend that was sweeping the U.S.: citizens were receiving unsolicited packages of seeds, with return addresses from China, for apparently no reason at all.

    Now, the U.S. has started to identify “14 types of plants” that the seeds belonged to, revealing a “mix of ornamental, fruit and vegetable, herb and weed species,” according to the NY Times. Cabbage, hibiscus, lavender, mint, morning glory, mustard, rose, rosemary and sage have all been identified. 

    Osama El-Lissy of the U.S. Department of Agriculture Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service said: “This is just a subset of the samples we’ve collected so far.”

    Art Gover, a plant science researcher at Penn State University said the “risk is low” of the plants being involved in biological warfare, but that the seeds “can be troublesome because they can introduce problematic weeds and diseases”.

    Lisa Delissio, a professor of biology at Salem State University in Massachusetts, said: “If any of the unidentified seeds turned out to be invasive species, they could displace native plants and compete for resources and cause harm to the environment, agriculture or human health.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Bernd Blossey, a professor in the department of natural resources at Cornell University commented: “Obviously planting rosemary or thyme in your garden isn’t something that will endanger our environment. But there may be other things in there that have not been identified yet. Any time you gain something unknown, my suggestion is burning them, not even throwing them in the trash.

    As of now, it seems too early to tell whether or not something nefarious is taking place. But, like Blossey says, we wouldn’t take any chances either. In our prior report, we suggested the mailings could be some sort of agricultural warfare brewing between the U.S. and China – where agriculture remains a key point of trade tensions – and where a cold war of sorts appears to be bubbling up under the surface. 

    After multiple reports in the U.S. media regarding the seeds, China’s Foreign Ministry responded last week by saying that China Post (the country’s state owned mail service) “has strictly followed regulations that ban the sending and receiving of seeds,” according to Bloomberg.

    Further, Chinese Foreign Ministry spokesman Wang Wenbin says that the parcels were “forged” and “not from China”. China has supposedly requested that the U.S. mail the seeds back to China so they could investigate further.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We noted last week that the response is anything but re-assuring. We’re not postmaster generals but we find the idea of being able to forge mailing labels – and get products to their final destination – in this day and age where even the decrepit U.S. postal service is mostly digital, as a difficult one. 

    Recall, we wrote days ago that Americans across the country were starting to report receiving unsolicited packages of different types of seeds that they didn’t order – and don’t know anything about – at their door. The return address on the packages is always from China. 

    The Washington State Department of Agriculture wrote about the phenomenon on their Facebook page on July 24, 2020 and said that the seeds are being shipping in packaging that identifies the contents as jewelry. Similar advisories have been issued in Virginia, Utah, Kansas, Arizona and Louisiana.

    Facebook users have been adding photos in the comments section of the post sharing photographs of seeds they have received from China. “It’s not a joke. I got some the other day!!!” one user commented, stating that the package identified the contents as a “Rose flower stud earring”.  

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Look’s like it’s all across the country,” stated an Indiana resident who also received seeds in the mail unsolicited. 

    At least 40 residents in Utah were said to have been mailed the unsolicited packages, according to the Daily Mail. The Kansas  Department of Agriculture and the Arizona Department of Agriculture also addressed the phenomenon, as did the Louisiana Department of Agriculture and Forestry, who said: 

    “Right now, we are uncertain what types of seeds are in the package. Out of caution, we are urging anyone who receives a package that was not ordered by the recipient, to please call the LDAF immediately. We need to identify the seeds to ensure they do not pose a risk to Louisiana’s agricultural industry or the environment.”

    There had been similar reports from Virginia’s Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services. “The seeds have yet to be identified, but officials speculate that the seeds may be of an invasive plant species and are advising residents not to use them,” Fox News reported.

    “Taking steps to prevent their introduction is the most effective method of reducing both the risk of invasive species infestations and the cost to control and mitigate those infestations,” VDACS wrote in a press release.

    Public Asked To Report Receipt of any Unsolicited Packages of Seeds. Learn more: https://t.co/RY9u4nR1QK pic.twitter.com/ZzNaO2ZaYz

    — VDACS (@VaAgriculture) July 24, 2020

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Twitter is also littered with reports of people receiving these seeds:

    We have received 2 of those packages here in Indiana. One from China, and one from Kyrgystan. pic.twitter.com/Fm6CBxf1mD

    — Don ⭐⭐⭐ (@SmallTownIndy) July 26, 2020

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Washington State Department of Agriculture has advised people on its Facebook page:

    1) DO NOT plant them and if they are in sealed packaging (as in the photo below) don’t open the sealed package.

    2) This is known as agricultural smuggling. Report it to USDA and maintain the seeds and packaging until USDA instructs you what to do with the packages and seeds. They may be needed as evidence.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Anyone who has received seeds in the mail can report them to the United States Department of Agriculture by visiting their website here. The site says:

    If individuals are aware of the potential smuggling of prohibited exotic fruits, vegetables, or meat products into or through the USA, they can help APHIS by contacting the confidential Antismuggling Hotline number at 800-877-3835 or by sending an Email to SITC.Mail@aphis.usda.gov.

    USDA will make every attempt to protect the confidentiality of any information sources during an investigation within the extent of the law.

  • Chicago Man Arrested For Spitting In Cop's Coffee At Dunkin' Donuts
    Chicago Man Arrested For Spitting In Cop’s Coffee At Dunkin’ Donuts

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/03/2020 – 19:25

    Authored by Jonathan Turley,

    We recently discussed the arrest of a Starbucks employee for spitting in the coffee of a police officer. Now, Vincent J. Sessler, 25, has been arrested for the same act at a Chicago Dunkin’ Donuts.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Illinois State Trooper spotted the spit when he opened the coffee to let it cool.  Later surveillance cameras reportedly showed Sessler spitting in the coffee.  

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What is interesting is the comparison of the charges in the two cases. There is also an issue as to whether such crimes constitute tampering with a food product.

    The officer was in uniform and using a marked police car when he visited the Dunkin’ Donuts. According to a social media post, it was a surveillance camera that captured the despicable act.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    According to CBS 2 Chicago, Dunkin Donuts fired Sessler after he was arrested and the owner conducted an independent investigation.

    What drew my attention to the story (besides being my home town) were the charges: disorderly conduct, reckless conduct, and battery to a peace officer.

    Battery is the most serious offense .

    Now consider the three charges in North Carolina: subjecting a law enforcement officer to bodily fluid, purposely tampering with a law enforcement officer’s drink and creating a hazardous environment.

    previously expressed surprise over the North Carolina charges. The Chicago charges are more predictable in these cases. We have seen the use of bodily fluids as a form of battery in attacks on police officers.

    One question that I had was whether the battery would be elevated for aggravated battery under Section 5/12-2:

    § 12-2.  Aggravated assault.

    (a) Offense based on location of conduct.  A person commits aggravated assault when he or she commits an assault against an individual who is on or about a public way, public property, a public place of accommodation or amusement, or a sports venue.

    (b) Offense based on status of victim.  A person commits aggravated assault when, in committing an assault, he or she knows the individual assaulted to be any of the following:

    (4.1) A peace officer, fireman, emergency management worker, or emergency medical services personnel:

    (i) performing his or her official duties;

    (ii) assaulted to prevent performance of his or her official duties;  or

    (iii) assaulted in retaliation for performing his or her official duties.

    The language appears mandatory but there is the key qualification of “performing his or her official duties.”  Is getting coffee while on duty part of his official duties?  The law appears directed as interference with a police activity so, as a criminal defense attorney, I would argue that it does not.

    However, this case would seem an example of “retaliation for performing his or her official duties.”

    Notably, the Chicago charges do not try to use the same COVID angle in North Carolina. In neither case was the person known to be COVID positive, but the prosecutors still used the pandemic as a foundation for the charges.  Even without COVID contamination, it could be argued that saliva carries other dangers but those would also seem to depend on the defendant’s health status.

    What is interesting is also the comparison to product tampering laws.  These laws are designed to not only punish culprits who do things like post videos of licking ice cream in stores. It is also to product stores and businesses from the loss of sales from consumers who are concerned with the safety and purity of products. Such acts can devastate a manufacturer or even an industry.  Notably, in this case, the police said that they will no longer use Dunkin’ Donuts.  That is precisely the reaction that these laws seek to avoid.  However, these defendants allegedly committed these acts with the intent of that the contamination would not be public. Such acts are committed to secretly take joy from knowing that the officer drank contaminated coffee. That makes it different from many cases like the ice cream licking cases where the culprits post videos of the act.

    In Illinois the tampering charge also would raise the foregoing question of the actual risk from saliva:

    Sec. 12-4.5. Tampering with food, drugs or cosmetics.

    (a) A person who knowingly puts any substance capable of causing death or great bodily harm to a human being into any food, drug or cosmetic offered for sale or consumption commits tampering with food, drugs or cosmetics.

    (b) Sentence. Tampering with food, drugs or cosmetics is a Class 2 felony.
    (Source: P.A. 96-1551, eff. 7-1-11.)

    It is not clear if saliva in a hot cup of coffee present a “capacity” (rather than a threat) of “great bodily harm.”

    The Chicago charges are, in my view, a better avenue to avoid such appellate issues.  In the end, these are all serious charges, as they should be.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 3rd August 2020

  • France Remains The World's Most Nuclear-Dependent Nation
    France Remains The World’s Most Nuclear-Dependent Nation

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/03/2020 – 02:45

    France is getting greener.

    A series of measures have been announced aimed at making the economy more environmentally friendly such as a ban on outdoor heaters at bars and restaurants, more efficient domestic heating systems and two regional parks. Most importantly though, as Statista’s Niall McCarthy notes, the country has set a goal to reduce nuclear’s share of electricity generation from its current 70 percent to 50 percent by 2035.

    The change in direction comes amid the controversial construction of the Flamanville EPR nuclear reactor by state-utility EDF which is more than a decade over schedule and is expected to cost €12.4 billion compared to an initial budget of €3.5 billion. It is finally expected to start operation in 2023. France also appointed former green politician and nuclear critic Barbara Pompili minister for the environment earlier this month.

    As this infographic, based on the 2019 World Nuclear Industry Status Report, shows, no country is as reliant on nuclear energy as France.

    Infographic: The Countries Reliant On Nuclear Power | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    It operated 58 reactors last year, second only to the United States’ 97, and they accounted for 71.7 percent of total electricity generation. The U.S. reactors had a 19.3 percent share of total electricity generation.

    After France, the countries most reliant on nuclear power are all concentrated in Eastern Europe. Reactors generate between 50 and 55 percent of all electricity in Slovakia, Ukraine and Hungary. Sweden is also high up on the list with just over 40 percent, with Belgium (39 percent) and Switzerland (37.7 percent) close behind.

  • US Troop Removal From Germany: A NATO-Skeptic POTUS Always Wins
    US Troop Removal From Germany: A NATO-Skeptic POTUS Always Wins

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/03/2020 – 02:00

    Authored by Tim Kirby via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    Is there any good reason why Germany is still occupied by the United States? After 75+ years one could make a strong argument that the Nazi threat is over. Donald Trump would seem to agree with this sentiment and directly stated that he wants to continue to reduce the number of American soldiers on the territory of today’s friendlier tolerant and geopolitically submissive Deutschland. The logic by which U.S. forces are stationed across the globe has been called into question many times and very often has no sellable answer. Trump himself agrees with the dubious nature of the need to have an American army base in every possible location. He even told the graduates of West Point that “We are not the policeman of the world”. This a very unusual statement from an American President, so is Trump’s threat to remove troops from Germany practical, ideological, or some odd reflection of his famed narcissism?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So how exactly did Trump threaten Germany with a troop withdrawal? On his most beloved platform of communication with the masses the President of the United States recently tweeted the following…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The amount of U.S. forces in Germany, even before this demand by Trump was a good number for a flaccid superficial occupation but not a real determining factor in preventing a foreign invasion, but then again Germany is surrounded by allies and Switzerland so maybe one soldier would be good enough. With the Cold War having ended in the early 90s, from 2006-2018 the number of American personal occupying Germany went from around 72,000 to a bit over 32,000. A month before this historic tweet Trump had already threatened to remove 9,500 U.S. soldiers from Germany, shifting many to Poland, i.e. closer to Russia.

    Since Germany did not pay up, after having a month to think about it, it would seem that the manpower shift has been increased to 12,000 men. So if this is a mob-style threat of “pay for protection or pay the price” then it really doesn’t seem worth it for Germany to bother, if they actually have the free will not to pay.

    So what is the difference if Berlin does or does not pay their tribute to NATO?

    Germany refuses to pay up

    • They remain occupied but by less men.

    • They become marginally weaker to a proposed highly unlikely Russian threat.

    Germany decides to pay up

    • They remain occupied by the current number of men.

    • They remain as weak/strong to proposed highly unlikely Russian threat as they were before.

    The threat traditional land based invasion happening between major powers in the 21st century seems impossible. No matter how much the clowns in the Mainstream Media portray modern war through a filter of WWII understanding, this does not make it true.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Photo: Men with guns provide no protection for Germany in a WWIII scenario.

    A conflict between Russia and the West would be conducted by missiles with nuclear warheads. But for the sake of argument let’s say things change and infantry become a viable means of winning big wars again. In this instance having your troops deep in the heartland of the EU away from the Russian front makes no sense. The exception to this would be air force bases as having one’s fighters and bombers off the front line is not a problem, but the idea that “guys with guns” is somehow protecting Germany from Russia is mental even if infantry warfare became viable again.

    Furthermore, what exactly would Russia gain by making a bayonet push the Reichstag actually get Moscow? The opportunity to occupy territory with no resources that traditionally hate them? Moscow has neither the means nor the motive to bother, making a Russian threat a very weak justification to do anything with tanks and men. Soft Power works against Russia, Hard Power cannot.If we look at things from this perspective this threat from Trump, it all seems rather empty and pointless, but if we take a look at it from the perspective of NATO’s future and not Germany’s national security we get a much different picture.

    Germany refuses to pay up

    • They and any who refuse to pay are slowly weaned off of NATO.

    • This can weaken an organization Trump does not like or force the weaker nations to beg for American protection from the Chinese/Russians who are scarier overlords.

    Germany decides to pay up

    • NATO becomes a profitable protection racket that continues to serve American interests without putting so much burden on the back of the core of the organization.

    Trump was very critical of NATO during his electoral campaign and seems to continue to be a skeptic. And perhaps this pressure on the big anti-Russian alliance could be a win-win scenario for Trump. If the member nations start paying up/contributing then this no longer becomes a burden for America while providing the same benefits that it always did. If the nations do not pay up, which could be bad for their health, then Trump does not seem particularly worried about this troublesome organization changing or dying out.

    Certain member nations, especially those close to Russia are very weak and very poor, if they lose NATO protection then their destiny will be in their own hands which should prove to be a very terrifying thought to the leadership of these micronations – having to deal with great powers on their own two feet and not as a vassal of greatness.

    In summation

    It is obvious to everyone that the U.S. has long overstayed its “10-year Allied occupation” of then Nazi Germany, which is a country unrecognizable in comparison to today’s core of the EU. Presenting the need to protect Germany from the Russians makes little sense, but a little is infinitely more than zero.

    Being occupied by ~20,000 U.S. soldiers is not much different than paying up to be occupied by ~30,000 U.S. soldiers from a German perspective.

    Airbases in Germany could matter in a theoretical (and extremely unlikely) traditional conflict with Russia. Posting infantry in the country would contribute nothing in a conflict.

    As a NATO skeptic, putting pressure on the organization is a win-win scenario for Trump as either he pushes it towards the breaking point to get rid of it or forces it to become profitable/beneficial to the United States and thus worth keeping.

    Weaker NATO nations near Russia have no choice but to pay up to the West because their stability rests on being a complete part of it and having its protection.

    Trump may want to coerce the Germans to buy oil/gas products from someone else.

  • Macau's Gaming Revenues Crash 94.5% In July As Recovery Hopes Dim 
    Macau’s Gaming Revenues Crash 94.5% In July As Recovery Hopes Dim 

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/03/2020 – 00:45

    Casino stocks roared back to life in early July on prospects of easing Chinese travel restrictions for Macau would lead to booming tourism in the world’s largest casino hub. But as we found out Saturday morning, via Reuters, that’s wasn’t the case as gaming revenues crashed.

    Gaming revenues for Macau collapsed 94.5% in July, on a YoY basis, despite travel restrictions to the area relaxed. Gambling in a pandemic, or mainly the fear of being around other people in a closed, indoor space was enough to deter Chinese mainlanders. 

    July’s gaming revenue figure was around $163 million and in line with analysts’ expectations of a 95% drop. 

    “Casinos are staring at heavy losses for the second quarter, with not much hope for a near-term recovery as a resurgence in coronavirus cases muddies the outlook for when China will reinstate travel visas,” said Reuters. 

    Even with travel restrictions eased, Macau last month saw about 2,000 visitors per day, or about 98% reduction in traffic from its usually 108,000 daily average in 2019. 

    Shares in MGM Resorts International soared in early July on prospects MGM Macau would see an influx of mainland Chinese as Macau started to reopen. Judging from the continued decline after the pop in optimism, along with Reuters’ Macau gaming revenues for the month, the road to recovery appears to be a bumpy one. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here’s our reporting on collapsing gaming revenue in the gambling hub: 

    MGM Macau is heavily discounting room rates into August. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As for Las Vegas, we noted last week, it could take three years for the gambling city in the US to recover. 

    Macau’s continued plunge in gaming revenue through the summer doesn’t bode well for the global V-shaped recovery narrative.

     

  • How The Billionaires Control American Elections
    How The Billionaires Control American Elections

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/02/2020 – 23:40

    Authored by Eric Zuesse via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    The great investigative journalist Glenn Greenwald gave an hour-long lecture on how America’s billionaires control the U.S. Government, and here is an edited summary of its opening twenty minutes, with key quotations and assertions from its opening — and then its broader context will be discussed briefly:

    “How Congress Maintains Endless War – System Update with Glenn Greenwald” – The Intercept, 9 July 2020

    2:45: There is “this huge cleavage between how members of Congress present themselves, their imagery and rhetoric and branding, what they present to the voters, on the one hand, and the reality of what they do in the bowels of Congress and the underbelly of Congressional proceedings, on the other. Most of the constituents back in their home districts have no idea what it is that the people they’ve voted for have been doing, and this gap between belief and reality is enormous.”

    Four crucial military-budget amendments were debated in the House just now, as follows:

    1. to block Trump from withdrawing troops from Afghanistan.

    2. to block Trump from withdrawing 10,000 troops from Germany

    3. to limit U.S. assistance to the Sauds’ bombing of Yemen

    4. to require Trump to explain why he wants to withdraw from the Intermediate Nuclear Forces Treaty

    On all four issues, the pro-imperialist position prevailed in nearly unanimous votes – overwhelming in both Parties. Dick Cheney’s daughter, Republican Liz Cheney, dominated the debates, though the House of Representatives is now led by Democrats, not Republicans.

    Greenwald (citing other investigators) documents that the U.S. news-media are in the business of deceiving the voters to believe that there are fundamental differences between the Parties. “The extent to which they clash is wildly exaggerated” by the press (in order to pump up the percentages of Americans who vote, so as to maintain, both domestically and internationally, the lie that America is a democracy — actually represents the interests of the voters).

    16:00: The Chairman of the House Armed Services Committee — which writes the nearly $750B annual Pentagon budget — is the veteran (23 years) House Democrat Adam Smith of Boeing’s Washington State.

    “The majority of his district are people of color.” He’s “clearly a pro-war hawk” a consistent neoconservative, voted to invade Iraq and all the rest.

    “This is whom Nancy Pelosi and House Democrats have chosen to head the House Armed Services Committee — someone with this record.”

    He is “the single most influential member of Congress when it comes to shaping military spending.”

    He was primaried by a progressive Democrat, and the “defense industry opened up their coffers” and enabled Adam Smith to defeat the challenger.

    *  *  *

    That’s the opening.

    Greenwald went on, after that, to discuss other key appointees by Nancy Pelosi who are almost as important as Adam Smith is, in shaping the Government’s military budget. They’re all corrupt. And then he went, at further length, to describe the methods of deceiving the voters, such as how these very same Democrats who are actually agents of the billionaires who own the ‘defense’ contractors and the ‘news’ media etc., campaign for Democrats’ votes by emphasizing how evil the Republican Party is on the issues that Democratic Party voters care far more about than they do about America’s destructions of Iraq and Syria and Libya and Honduras and Ukraine, and imposing crushing economic blockades (sanctions) against the residents in Iran, Venezuela and many other lands. Democratic Party voters care lots about the injustices and the sufferings of American Blacks and other minorities, and of poor American women, etc., but are satisfied to vote for Senators and Representatives who actually represent ‘defense’ contractors and other profoundly corrupt corporations, instead of represent their own voters. This is how the most corrupt people in politics become re-elected, time and again — by deceived voters. And — as those nearly unanimous committee votes display — almost every member of the U.S. Congress is profoundly corrupt.

    Furthermore: Adam Smith’s opponent in the 2018 Democratic Party primary was Sarah Smith (no relation) and she tried to argue against Adam Smith’s neoconservative voting-record, but the press-coverage she received in her congressional district ignored that, in order to keep those voters in the dark about the key reality. Whereas Sarah Smith received some coverage from Greenwald and other reporters at The Intercept who mentioned that “Sarah Smith mounted her challenge largely in opposition to what she cast as his hawkish foreign policy approach,” and that she “routinely brought up his hawkish foreign policy views and campaign donations from defense contractors as central issues in the campaign,” only very few of the voters in that district followed such national news-media, far less knew that Adam Smith was in the pocket of ‘defense’ billionaires. And, so, the Pentagon’s big weapons-making firms defeated a progressive who would, if elected, have helped to re-orient federal spending away from selling bombs to be used by the Sauds to destroy Yemen, and instead toward providing better education and employment-prospects to Black, brown and other people, and to the poor, and everybody, in that congressional district, and all others. Moreover, since Adam Smith had a fairly good voting-record on the types of issues that Blacks and other minorities consider more important and more relevant than such things as his having voted for Bush to invade Iraq, Sarah Smith really had no other practical option than to criticize him regarding his hawkish voting-record, which that district’s voters barely even cared about. The billionaires actually had Sarah Smith trapped (just like, on a national level, they had Bernie Sanders trapped).

    Of course, Greenwald’s audience is clearly Democratic Party voters, in order to inform them of how deceitful their Party is. However, the Republican Party operates in exactly the same way, though using different deceptions, because Republican Party voters have very different priorities than Democratic Party voters do, and so they ignore other types of deceptions and atrocities.

    Numerous polls (for examples, this and this) show that American voters, except for the minority of them that are Republican, want “bipartisan” government; but the reality in America is that this country actually already does have that: the U.S. Government is actually bipartisanly corrupt, and bipartisanly evil. In fact, it’s almost unanimous, it is so bipartisan, in reality. That’s the way America’s Government actually functions, especially in the congressional votes that the ‘news’-media don’t publicize. However, since it lies so much, and its media (controlled also by its billionaires) do likewise, and since they cover-up instead of expose the deepest rot, the public don’t even know this. They don’t know the reality. They don’t know how corrupt and evil their Government actually is. They just vote and pay taxes. That’s the extent to which they actually ‘participate’ in ‘their’ Government. They tragically don’t know the reality. It’s hidden from them. It is censored-out, by the editors, producers, and other management, of the billionaires’ ‘news’-media. These are the truths that can’t pass through those executives’ filters. These are the truths that get filtered-out, instead of reported. No democracy can function this way — and, of course, none does.

  • Mysterious Drone Swarm Breached Secure Airspace Over Largest Nuclear Power Plant In US
    Mysterious Drone Swarm Breached Secure Airspace Over Largest Nuclear Power Plant In US

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/02/2020 – 23:15

    A mysterious incident related to a serious breach of secure airspace over America’s largest nuclear power plant has been unearthed through Freedom of Information Act documents gained from the government.

    It’s leading to new fears that America’s energy infrastructure is prone to attack and potentially being knocked offline, akin to the drone and missile attack which temporarily halted all Saudi oil exports last year at Aramco’s Abaqaiq oil processing facility. Forbe’s presents the astonishing details as follows:

    A tiny armada of between four and six unmarked drones flew over the Palo Verde Generating Station nuclear power plant in Arizona on the nights of September 29 and 30, 2019, with plant security proving unable to stop them and authorities still uncertain who was operating them or why.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Palo Verde Generating Station nuclear power plant in Arizona, via Wiki Commons.

    The newly accessed Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) documents had called the incident a “drone-a-palooza” as it involved swarms of inexpensive, likely off-the-shelf drones flying in large numbers over restricted airspace and near sensitive structures of Arizona’s Palo Verde Nuclear Power Plant.

    The documents conclude that it’s still as yet unknown who or what entity sent them or who was operating them during the illegal incursion.

    “Documents gained under the Freedom of Information Act show how a number of small drones flew around a restricted area at Palo Verde Nuclear Power Plant on two successive nights last September,” Forbes writes further. “Security forces watched, but were apparently helpless to act as the drones carried out their incursions before disappearing into the night. Details of the event gives some clues as to just what they were doing, but who sent them remains a mystery.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    File image: Getty/Daily Beast

    The FOIA documents underscore the incident was confusing and chaotic for security on the ground, as the security logs suggest:

    “Officer noticed several drones (5 or 6) flying over the site. The drones are circling the 3 unit site inside and outside the Protected Area. The drones have flashing red and white rights and are estimated to be 200 to 300 hundred feet above the site. It was reported the drones had spotlights on while approaching the site that they turned off when they entered the Security Owner Controlled Area. Drones were first noticed at 2050 MST and are still over the site as of 2147 MST. Security Posture was normal, which was changed to elevated when the drones were noticed. The Licensee notified one of the NRC resident inspectors.”

    And on a subsequent night, the logs indicate:

    Four (4) drones were observed flying beginning at 2051 MST [on Sept. 30, 2019] and continuing through the time of this report (2113 MST). As occurred last night, the drones are flying in, through, and around the owner controlled area, the security owner controlled area, and the protected area. Also, as last night, the drones are described as large with red and white flashing lights. Spotlights have not been noted tonight.

    The licensee has not changed their security posture. The licensee continues to monitor the drones.

    As of 0355 EDT, no drones have been observed at the site since before 0020 MST. LLEA [local law enforcement agency] surveyed the area and were unable to locate drones on the ground or anyone controlling the drones.

    Guards at the high secure facility were without any ability to deter the drones overhead.  Subsequent media reports in the wake of the internal security memos going public say that county police were deployed to scour the area for the drone operator or operators but to no avail. 

    The whole unsolved incident highlights that it appears America’s network of nuclear power sites essentially remain defenseless when it comes to drone incursions

    It appears that at least at the Palo Verde site, the facility was not equipped with drone detection gear or jamming technology which could have disabled the drones. However, the sprawling facility is reportedly due to receive drone and small aircraft detection gear, but it’s unknown whether other sensitive facilities are also due for a security ungrade.

    * * * 

    Some details on America’s largest nuclear power plant at Palo Verde:

  • Cover-Up Continues: Revisiting The Incident At Benghazi 
    Cover-Up Continues: Revisiting The Incident At Benghazi 

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/02/2020 – 22:50

    Authored by Carlton Meyer via AntiWar.com,

    Chris Stevens was an ambitious US State Department employee who volunteered to participate in the overthrow of the Libyan government in 2011.

    He covertly arrived in Libya in early 2011 aboard a Greek cargo ship with CIA personnel and set up operations in Benghazi to coordinate illegal shipments of weaponry into Libya and organized attacks on the Libyan army.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    After Africa’s most prosperous nation was in ruins, Stevens became the US Ambassador to Libya in Tripoli and was given a new mission of shipping tons of arms to Syria to destroy that nation.

    He traveled to Benghazi in September 2012 to check on progress and was attacked. Stevens was captured, beaten, and killed.

    The Obama administration hid these facts and proclaimed Chris Stevens an American hero who had traveled to Benghazi to mediate peace among warring factions when he was killed by terrorists.

    * * *

    Watch how the covert op turned disastrous & into a continuing cover-up:

  • More Than 60% Of Global Debt Now Yields Less Than 1%
    More Than 60% Of Global Debt Now Yields Less Than 1%

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/02/2020 – 22:25

    For all its monetary generosity, despite injecting $3 trillion reserves into the banking system (if not the economy), the Fed remains stuck with two big problems. The first one, as we touched on earlier, is that the newly printed money is unable to make its way into the broader monetary plumbing and spark the much needed inflation that will do away with the trillions in debt, although as we also noted, the Fed now has a plan to deposit digital funds directly into individual US accounts (using a “household app” in the words of former Fed economist Julia Coronado).

    The other problem is that despite all its attempts to stimulate equity animal spirits, the bulk of new fund has flowed into bonds, not stocks. In fact, YTD equity outflows amount to $39BN while inflows to bonds and commodities are over $200BN, with a whopping $1.145 trillion going to cash via money-markets.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And so with so many investors stubbornly buying the one asset class the Fed does not want to be in wide demand (even as it monetized some $3 trillion of it), and even with trillions more in new debt to be paradropped by the US Treasury – something which has failed to taper demand for 10Y Treasurys whose yields just hit an all time low – the hunt for yield is getting harder than ever for fixed-income investors.

    According to the FT, a record 86% of the $60 trillion global bond market tracked by ICE Data Services traded with yields no higher than 2%, with more than 60% of the market yielding less than 1 per cent as of June 30.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    At the same time, global negative yielding debt has soared to $14.6 trillion, from $11 trillion in January, and rapidly approaching the all time high of $17 trillion hit one year ago.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, just 3% of the investable bond universe today yields more than 5%, a share that is close to an all-time low, and represents a precipitous drop from levels seen roughly two decades ago. Consider that in the late 1990s, nearly 75% of bonds traded with yields above 5 per cent, while sub-2% yields comprised under 10%  of the market. That was before central banks took over capital markets, and responded to the a series of financial crises by slashing interest rates to ever lower, and eventually negative rates, and launching trillions in bond-buying programs that fundamentally altered the investing landscape.

    This has pushed investors into riskier segments in search of income, compelling them to lend to lower-quality companies and countries.

    “Yield-chasing behavior has become much more pronounced,” said Matt King, Citi’s legendary credit strategist. “If you are a pension fund or an insurance company, you are forced to go down in quality and take extreme risk.”

    It all came to a head in this year’s Covid-19 crisis, when the Fed again cut interest rates to near zero, and pledged to buy an unlimited quantity of government debt (and has been doing so, monetizing all gross Treasury issuance in 2020). The central bank also launched a number of emergency programs to shore up an unprecedented range of securities — including IG, junk bonds and municipal debt – which sent investment grade prices to all time highs and disconnected them from fundamentals. Investors expect additional stimulus measures to be announced at either this week’s Fed meeting or the next one in September.

    After the latest round of interventions, real yields on US Treasuries — which strip out expectations for inflation — have dropped to all time lows of -1%.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This move “is the direct consequence of all of the central bank support”, said King. “It is the main force driving investors to pile into risky assets” such as gold and cryptos, both of which are at or near all time highs.

  • From Lockdowns To "The Great Reset"
    From Lockdowns To “The Great Reset”

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/02/2020 – 22:00

    Authored by Anthony Mueller via The Mises Institute,

    The lockdown in the wake of the coronavirus pandemic has accelerated the implementation of long-held plans to establish a so-called new world order. Under the auspices of the World Economic Forum (WEF), global policymakers are advocating for a “Great Reset” with the intent of creating a global technocracy. It is not by coincidence that on October 18, 2019, in New York City the WEF participated in “Event 201” at the “high-level” pandemic exercise organized by the John Hopkins Center for Health Security.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This coming technocracy involves close cooperation between the heads of the digital industry and of governments. With programs such as guaranteed minimum income and healthcare for all, the new kind of governance combines strict societal control with the promise of comprehensive social justice.

    The truth, however, is that this new world order of digital tyranny comes with a comprehensive social credit system. The People’s Republic of China is the pioneer of this method of surveillance and control of individuals, corporations, and sociopolitical entities.

    For the individual, one’s identity is reduced to an app or chip that registers almost any personal activity. In order to gain a few individual rights, and be it only to travel to a certain place, a person must balance such apparent privileges with his submission to a web of regulations that define in detail what is “good behavior” and deemed as beneficial to humankind and the environment. For example, during a pandemic, this sort of control would extend from the obligation of wearing a mask and practicing social distancing to having specific vaccinations in order to apply for a job or to travel.

    It is, in short, a type of social engineering which is the opposite of a spontaneous order or of development. Like the mechanical engineer with a machine, the social engineer—or technocrat—treats society as an object. Different from the brutal suppressions by the totalitarianism of earlier times, the modern social engineer will try to make the social machine work on its own according to the design. For this purpose, the social engineer must apply the laws of society the way the mechanical engineer follows the laws of nature. Behavioral theory has reached a stage of knowledge that makes the dreams of social engineering possible. The machinations of social engineering operate not through brute force, but subtly by nudge.

    Under the order envisioned by the Great Reset, the advancement of technology is not meant to serve the improvement of the conditions of the people but to submit the individual to the tyranny of a technocratic state. “The experts know better” is the justification.

    The Agenda

    The plan for an overhaul of the world is the brainchild of an elite group of businessmen, politicians, and their intellectual entourage that used to meet in Davos, Switzerland, in January each year. Brought into existence in 1971, the World Economic Forum has become a megaglobal event since then. More than three thousand leaders from all over the world attended the meeting in 2020.

    Under the guidance of the WEF, the agenda of the Great Reset says that the completion of the current industrial transformation requires a thorough overhaul of the economy, politics, and society. Such a comprehensive transformation requires the alteration of human behavior, and thus “transhumanism” is part of the program.

    The Great Reset will be the theme of the fifty-first meeting of the World Economic Forum in Davos in 2021. Its agenda is the commitment to move the world economy toward “a more fair, sustainable and resilient future.” The program calls for “a new social contract” that is centered on racial equality, social justice, and the protection of the nature. Climate change requires us “to decarbonize the economy” and to bring human thinking and behavior “into harmony with nature.” The aim is to build “more equal, inclusive and sustainable economies.” This new world order must be “urgently” implemented, the promotors of the WEF claim, and they point out that the pandemic “has laid bare the unsustainability of our system,” which lacks “social cohesion.”

    The WEF’s great reset project is social engineering at the highest level. Advocates of the reset contend that the UN failed to establish order in the world and could not advance forcefully its agenda of sustainable development—known as Agenda 2030—because of its bureaucratic, slow, and contradictory way of working. In contrast, the actions of the organizational committee of the World Economic Forum are swift and smart. When a consensus has been formed, it can be implemented by the global elite all over the world.

    Social Engineering

    The ideology of the World Economic Forum is neither left nor right, nor progressive or conservative, it is also not fascist or communist, but outright technocratic. As such, it includes many elements of earlier collectivist ideologies.

    In recent decades, the consensus has emerged at the annual Davos meetings that the world needs a revolution, and that reforms have taken too long. The members of the WEF envision a profound upheaval at short notice. The time span should be so brief that most people will hardly realize that a revolution is going on. The change must be so swift and dramatic that those who recognize that a revolution is happening do not have the time to mobilize against it.

    The basic idea of the Great Reset is the same principle that guided the radical transformations from the French to the Russian and Chinese Revolutions. It is the idea of constructivist rationalism incorporated in the state. But projects like the Great Reset leave unanswered the question of who rules the state. The state itself does not rule. It is an instrument of power. It is not the abstract state that decides, but the leaders of specific political parties and of certain social groups.

    Earlier totalitarian regimes needed mass executions and concentration camps to maintain their power. Now, with the help of new technologies, it is believed, dissenters can easily be identified and marginalized. The nonconformists will be silenced by disqualifying divergent opinions as morally despicable.

    The 2020 lockdowns possibly offer a preview of how this system works. The lockdown worked as if it had been orchestrated—and perhaps it was. As if following a single command, the leaders of big and small nations—and of different stages of economic development—implemented almost identical measures. Not only did many governments act in unison, they also applied these measures with little regard for the horrific consequences of a global lockdown.

    Months of economic stillstand have destroyed the economic basis of millions of families. Together with social distancing, the lockdown has produced a mass of people unable to care for themselves. First, governments destroyed the livelihood, then the politicians showed up as the savior. The demand for social assistance is no longer limited to specific groups, but has become a need of the masses.

    Once, war was the health of the state. Now it is fear of disease. What lies ahead is not the apparent coziness of a benevolent comprehensive welfare state with a guaranteed minimum income and healthcare and education for all. The lockdown and its consequences have brought a foretaste what is to come: a permanent state of fear, strict behavioral control, massive loss of jobs, and growing dependence on the state.

    With the measures taken in the wake of the coronavirus pandemic, a big step to reset the global economy has been made. Without popular resistance, the end of the pandemic will not mean the end of the lockdown and social distancing. At the moment, however, the opponents of the new world order of digital tyranny still have access to the media and platforms to dissent. Yet the time is running out. The perpetrators of the new world order have smelled blood. Declaring the coronavirus a pandemic has come in handy to promote the agenda of their Great Reset. Only massive opposition can slow down and finally stop the extension of the power grip of the tyrannical technocracy that is on the rise.

  • Xi’s Decision To Turn Inward Is Dangerous For Trade
    Xi’s Decision To Turn Inward Is Dangerous For Trade

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/02/2020 – 21:35

    By Ye Xie, Bloomberg macro commentator

    Three things we learned last week:

    1. A major pivot by Xi has China turning inward

    At the Politburo meeting on Thursday, President Xi Jinping reiterated his recent call for “dual circulation,” emphasizing self-sufficiency in supply and demand. The combination of a weak global economy and anti-China sentiment in the West means China has to rely more on itself. The shift suggests China will substitute some imports, including technology, with local supply, and reorient some exports to domestic markets. In other words, global trade, which is already contracting, is likely to remain sluggish due to Xi’s pivot inward. This isn’t good news for countries that sell to China, including Germany and most emerging markets. The chart below shows how closely correlated China and U.S. imports are to the performance of global stocks.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Trade data this week is likely to confirm that imports and exports remain weak in China.

    2. Dollar’s decline is about to slow down

    The Bloomberg Dollar Index fell to a two-year low last week. But its decline may start to slow. The pandemic is showing signs of leveling off in the U.S., and it’s picking up in other countries, including Spain and Japan. A reversal of the virus’s trend globally would remove one of the negatives for the dollar. European stocks underperformed the U.S. last week, underscoring that the dynamics may already be at play.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Still, investors are bracing for radical changes in the Fed policy in September, which sent five-year Treasury yields to record lows. The long-term structural weaknesses for the dollar — including valuation and twin deficits — are still there. That means any respite is likely to be short-lived for the U.S. currency.

    3. Volatility may pick up in August with a looming fiscal cliff in the U.S.

    The U.S. and Europe posted record GDP contraction last quarter. And American jobs data this week is likely to show that employment growth slowed significantly in July. While most companies have managed to beat low expectations for their earnings, U.S. lawmakers are struggling to pass another economic relief package, and the extra federal unemployment benefits of $600 a week that had been helping to prop up the economy have expired. Expect some volatility in August — that’s when it tends to pick up.

    Things to Know:

    • China’s ByteDance Ltd. is prepared to sell its music-video app TikTok’s U.S. operations after President Trump threatened to order the move, according to people with knowledge of the situation
    • The grace period for wealth management rules will be extended to the end of 2021 due to impact of the coronavirus on the finance industry, China’s central bank said in a statement
    • Hong Kong delayed a key Legislative Council election scheduled for September for a year due to a recent surge in Covid-19 cases, fueling more outrage among the city’s opposition
    • The U.S. Treasury announced sanctions against a Chinese company and two individuals linked to it, amid tensions between the two nations over issues ranging from trade to Beijing’s treatment of ethnic minorities
    • Gold surged to a fresh record, fueled by a persistent dollar weakness and low interest rates

  • Vaccine Hunt: Is Injecting Human Volunteers With COVID-19 Ethical?
    Vaccine Hunt: Is Injecting Human Volunteers With COVID-19 Ethical?

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/02/2020 – 21:10

    In the race to find a vaccine for COVID-19, an ethical debate is brewing over whether it’s justifiable to deliberately infect healthy volunteers with the disease in the hopes of achieving a scientific breakthrough sooner, according to the South China Morning Post.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A patient in the US state of New York is injected with a possible Covid-19 vaccine in the world’s largest clinical study. Photo: AP

    And while consenting adults should be allowed to take whatever risks they want, there’s a known unknown regarding this relatively new illness – namely, why do most people who contract coronavirus range from asymptomatic to ‘worst flu of my life,’ only to fully recover, while others – known as ‘long haulers‘ – remain ill for months, experiencing ‘waves’ of debilitating symptoms with no end in sight.

    We don’t know much about long haulers – particularly one’s chances of becoming one if infected with COVID-19.

    Deliberately infecting people for research is done through what’s known as a “human challenge trial” (HCT) – which can be done concurrently with phase III vaccine trials. Deciding on HCTs for COVID-19 will be a panel of experts at the World Health Organization (WHO) – which includes Wuhan ‘Bat Woman’ Shi Zhengli, whose lab has fallen under suspicion as the source of the COVID-19 outbreak despite her repeated denials.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The advisory panel must contend with three ‘particularly contentious’ questions, according to SCMP:

    • First, should such trials be carried out even if there is no cure for Covid-19?
    • Second, the most probable HCT trial would recruit young, healthy volunteers to minimise the chance that they might die or become seriously ill after infection. But studies have found that elderly people, the group most vulnerable to the disease, are less responsive to vaccines. So, would it be worth the potential risks to find a vaccine that may not work for those who need it most?
    • Third, would human challenge trials shorten the time to discover a vaccine? Would scientists gain any distinct advantage by exposing volunteers to the risks?

    The experts in the WHO advisory group were split on the first and third questions, while the majority thought elderly people might not benefit from the findings of the trials. How Shi voted on these questions was not known. She did not reply to an email query from the South China Morning Post. –SCMP

    In 2016, an ethics committee denied a proposal to use HCTs on a Zika virus vaccine over concerns of the risks it posed to volunteers and their sexual partners.

    “The right question is whether challenge trials would increase study participants’ likelihood of similar bad outcomes, compared to two alternative scenarios: non-participation in any trial and participation in standard efficacy trials for the same vaccines,” posed Nir Eyal, a biomedical ethicist at Rutgers Global Health Institute.

    At present, a total of 32,665 people from 140 countries have signed up as volunteers for a potential HCT organized by volunteer group 1Day Sooner.

    We see considerable potential in the use of human challenge studies to accelerate Covid-19 vaccine development, [to help filter] and validate the best candidate vaccines, and optimise vaccination approaches,” said Professor Adrian Hill, director of Oxford University’s Jenner Institute – who is collaborating with 1Day Sooner to prepare for possible HCTs in addition to phase III clinical trials.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Illustration: Perry Tse

    “We’re hoping to be doing challenge trials by the end of the year,” Hill told The Guardian. “This might be in parallel or might be after the phase-three trial is completed. They’re not competing options, they’re complementary.

    Abie Rohrig, a spokesman for 1Day Sooner, said no volunteers had asked to withdraw, despite some new findings pointing to possible long-term damage to organs such as the kidneys, heart and nerves, although they were rare among young adults.

    “I have not heard from any volunteers about withdrawing because of these risks. Every volunteer I have personally spoken with understands that there is a large degree of uncertainty with respect to Covid-19, and they are willing to take on that uncertain risk in a challenge trial,” Rohrig said. -SCMP

    Meanwhile, over 150 scientists and academics, including 15 Nobel laureates, have signed an open letter to the Director of the US National Institutes of Health, Francis Collins, asking the US government to collaborate with international teams to prepare for HCTs. That said, they also called for a ‘high-quality ethical review’ before they could start, according to the report.

    “HCTs for Covid-19 have a tremendous amount of advocacy behind them that is unprecedented, for two main reasons. First, the advocacy group 1Day Sooner has been working hard to keep media attention focused on HCTs. Second, the widespread damage that has already been done by Covid-19 leaves the public grasping for any way to speed up vaccine development,” said Northwestern University bioethicist, Seema Shah – the primary author of the Zika ethics panel report.

    Some scientists, however, have voiced serious concerns over whether the risks to volunteers is justified.

    In an opinion piece published on the US medical website STAT, Michael Rosenblatt, chief medical officer of Flagship Pioneering and former chief medical officer of pharmaceutical giant Merck, wrote: “These authors, like 1Day Sooner’s volunteers, are well-intentioned but wrong.”

    Rosenblatt, who is also an adviser to Moderna, said HCTs took months to prepare and Covid-19 vaccine development would not be accelerated by testing young volunteers.

    The volunteers might end up having risked their own health without truly helping those who are in greatest need of vaccine protection,” he said, referring to the elderly.

    “An equally disturbing scenario is what if one of the first volunteers dies, either due to the play of chance, a problem with the vaccine, or the individual’s genetic make-up? This is unlikely to happen, but it can, and did, in another setting with consequences that stretched far beyond the single tragic death,” he wrote. He was referring to the death of an 18-year-old volunteer in the first gene therapy trials in 1999. The death put similar research on hold for years. -SCMP

    What’s more, since no ‘weakened’ SARS-CoV-2 strains have been manufactured for use in HCTs, volunteers would be injected with ‘wild strains.’

    “If HCTs are green-lighted now, when there is substantial uncertainty about the risks, they could set a new precedent for the level of risk and uncertainty that is tolerated in research,” said Shah. “If there are bad outcomes in these trials, or if the vaccines tested in them have safety issues when given to the general public, HCTs could hurt public trust in vaccines in the longer term.”

  • Millions Locked Down Under Draconian Covid Rules in Australia
    Millions Locked Down Under Draconian Covid Rules in Australia

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/02/2020 – 20:59

    Submitted by Mish Shedlock of MishTalk

    To combat a Covid outbreak, Melbourne initiated its most severe restrictions yet. Victoria, Australia Declares ‘State of Disaster,’ Locking Down Millions in Melbourne.

    The premier of Victoria plunged the region into a “state of disaster” on Sunday, announcing even stricter lockdown measures, introducing a nightly curfew and banning virtually all trips outdoors after Australia’s second largest state recorded 671 new infections in a single day.

    Daniel Andrews told Victorians at a news conference that “we have to do more, and we have to do more right now,” as the state battles to contain a devastating coronavirus outbreak that had already stripped residents of their freedoms, livelihoods and social interactions and made it an outlier from the rest of the country.

    New Rules

    • Where you slept last night is where you’ll need to stay for the next six weeks.
    • Curfew between 8 p.m. and 5 a.m.
    • Only one person per household will be allowed to leave their homes once a day — outside of curfew hours — to pick up essential goods, and they must stay within a 5 kilometer radius of their home unless nearest shop is over 5 KM away.
    • Exercise can be taken for up to an hour a day, with one other person, but still within five kilometers of a person’s home. 

    What’s Going On?

    Australia Total Covid Cases

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Daily New Cases

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Total Coronavirus Deaths 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Questions of the Day

    1. Do these measures fit the outbreak?
    2. What if someone was in a hotel? Someone else’s house? 

    I expect there are some exceptions but we have not seen anything like this outside of China and a few cities in Italy. 

    Meanwhile in the US

    As noted earlier today, Fed’s Kashkari Urges Congress to Hand Out More Free Money

    “If we were to lock down hard for a month or six weeks, we could get the case count down so that our testing and our contact tracing was actually enough to control it,” Kashkari said.

    Fed Independence?

    The Fed hollers every time Trump or Congress meddles in monetary policy, but the Fed repeatedly meddles in fiscal policy.

    And here’s a new one: The Fed is willing to interject its beliefs about medical policy as well.

  • Tech Stock Buybacks Are Surging
    Tech Stock Buybacks Are Surging

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/02/2020 – 20:46

    Two months ago, we showed that contrary to conventional wisdom and corporate reps and warrants that buybacks had effectively been put on hold for the duration of the covid pandemic, not only were companies still repurchasing their shares but it was the tech names – those who have stormed higher since the March lows – that were the biggest culprits.

    Now, two months after we first revealed Wall Street’s worst kept secret, the Financial Times has also noticed that Corporate America is finding it hard to kick the share buyback habit, even after the US slipped into its worst recession in decades.

    While total buybacks are indeed expected to drop this year as the downturn caused by coronavirus saps corporate profits, companies in the S&P 500 that have reported second-quarter earnings so far have reduced the number of their outstanding shares by an average of 0.3 per cent from the previous quarter, according to calculations from Credit Suisse.

    Furthermore, updates showed that some of the largest US multinationals continued to buy back their own stock or even accelerated stock repurchases and nowhere more so than the tech names we first highlighted at the end of May.

    Take Google’s parent company Alphabet, which spent $6.9bn on buybacks for the quarter, up 92% from a year prior, the company revealed in its earnings results last Thursday.

    Microsoft, the second-largest listed US company, purchased $5.8bn of its own stock in the period, up 25% from a year earlier, and likely among the chief reasons for the stock’s amazing surge.

    Elsewhere, Biogen spent $2.8bn on buybacks for the period, up 17% from last year, WR Berkley, an insurer, did not buy any of its shares in the second quarter last year, but spent $97m on its stock in the period this year, and Celanese increased its planned buybacks for the year by $500m to $1.5bn in July, after selling its stake in a Japanese joint venture.

    Of course, the biggest source of buybacks was once again Apple, which repurchased $16BN in the second quarter, down 6% on the period last year, though by far the biggest stock repurchaser among S&P 500 companies in recent years.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As we first noted in May, and as JPM strategist David Lebovitz echoed last week, the buybacks were “not happening everywhere”, but were “driven by specific sectors and stocks”. He added that financial and materials companies were potentially more willing to engage in buybacks through the downturn, because their stocks have not advanced as much as companies in other sectors since the lows in March.

    More marquee names joined the party with Edward Jones estimating that Berkshire Hathaway plowed about $5.3bn into stock repurchases during the quarter. Berkshire reports its earnings next month and if the sum is confirmed it would mark the largest quarterly share repurchase since the company began buying back its stock in 2011.

    In summary after a brief dip in Q1, the buybacks have staged an impressive rebound as shown in the chart below:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As the FT notes, companies expanding repurchase programs – which is most tech names – “run against the grain of the broader market, where many businesses reduced or suspended buybacks as the downturn took hold. Second-quarter EPS for companies in the S&P 500 will probably drop about 39%”, a number that would be even bigger had it not been for buybacks according to Refinitiv.

    And while in April Goldman projected that the amount spent by S&P 500 companies could halve this year, to $371bn from a record $806bn spent on share buybacks in 2018, Goldman’s forecast may prove to be far too low, even though nearly a fifth of companies in the S&P 500 have put buyback programs on ice since March, including the big banks such as Bank of America, Wells Fargo and JPMorgan Chase, who are typically among the biggest buyers of their own stock.

    In any case, the buyback spree doesn’t seem like it will end any time soon: “As long as you’re a company that is earning money greater than your borrowing rate, you can just keep borrowing and buying back shares,” said Stephen Dover, head of equity for Franklin Templeton, the San Mateo-based fund manager.

    That said, sentiment may change now that buybacks have become a hot political topic, especially as Congress debated stimulus programs this spring. Joe Biden and Donald Trump have both spoken out against the practice, noting that big programs have often sucked free cash flow away from businesses, while Democratic senators Bernie Sanders and Chuck Schumer have also called for curbs.

    “Scrutiny around buybacks is already happening and will continue to happen,” said Mr Dover. “It was there before the current crisis and now it’s amplified.”

  • One Of The First Ships To Resume Cruising Is Having A COVID Outbreak
    One Of The First Ships To Resume Cruising Is Having A COVID Outbreak

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/02/2020 – 20:20

    By Gene Sloan of ThePointsGuy

    On second thought, maybe it was too soon. One of the first cruise ships in the world to resume sailing since the coronavirus-caused worldwide halt to cruising in March is experiencing a significant outbreak of the illness that already has sent several people to the hospital.

    Norwegian expedition cruise company Hurtigruten late Friday said four sick crew members from the 535-passenger Roald Amundsen were admitted to the University Hospital of North Norway in Tromsø, Norway, earlier in the day after the vessel docked in the city. All four had tested positive for COVID-19. On Saturday, the line said another 32 crew members had tested positive for the illness.

    The Roald Amundsen on Friday had just finished a seven-night sailing out of Tromsø to the Arctic’s wildlife-filled Svalbard archipelago.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Roald Amundsen

    All four of the hospitalized crew members had been sick for several days while on board the vessel, and all four had been placed in isolation. But the line said their symptoms weren’t consistent with COVID-19. They only tested positive for the illness after the ship docked in Tromsø early Friday.

    It’s unclear if the crew members are seriously ill, or if they only are being hospitalized as a way to keep them isolated.

    The entire ship has now been placed in isolation, and the 154 remaining crew members on board have all been tested for COVID-19. Hurtigruten on Saturday said 122 of the crew members had tested negative for the illness.

    Hurtigruten on Saturday said it had contacted all 178 passengers who left the ship early Friday, and they had been ordered to self-quarantine in line with Norwegian health regulations.

    The company also has contacted another 209 passengers who were aboard the previous sailing of the Roald Amundsen, and they have been told to self-quarantine, too.

    The next voyage of the vessel, which had been scheduled to begin Friday, has been canceled.

    Hurtigruten has been at the forefront of efforts to restart cruising in Europe in the wake of falling coronavirus case counts across the continent. The line started cruises to Norway out of Hamburg, Germany, in June with a single ship, the 530-passenger Fridtjof Nansen. It added cruises to Svalbard on the Roald Amundsen and the 335-passenger Spitsbergen in July.

    The trips only have been open to local travelers from select European countries. No Americans have been on board the vessels.

    “We are now focusing all available efforts in taking care of our guests and colleagues,” Hurtigruten spokesperson Rune Thomas Ege said in a statement posted Saturday at the line’s website. “We work closely with the Norwegian national and local health authorities for follow-up, information, further testing, and infection tracking.”

    Hurtigruten had implemented a wide range of new health and safety measures on Roald Amundsen and the other ships it brought back into operation, including enhanced cleaning, added medical screenings for passengers and crew, and an end to buffets. All the vessels were operating at a sharply reduced capacity, below 50% of normal, to ensure social distancing.

    The measures were similar to what many lines have been touting as the solution to keeping coronavirus off ships as cruising resumes.

    The Roald Amundsen trips included Zodiac landings for wildlife sightseeing in the Svalbard archipelago as well as kayaking and other expedition-related activities.

    Huirgruten pioneered cruises to Svalbard in 1896.

    Cruises to Svalbard and other parts of the Arctic were thought to be somewhat simpler to run during a pandemic as they don’t involve much passenger interaction with other humans. The typical Arctic voyage is an expedition-style sailing that involves landings and Zodiac excursions to see wildlife, glaciers and floating ice formations.

    The Roald Amundsen currently is scheduled to begin sailings around the British Isles for U.K. residents in early September. Hurtigruten didn’t say whether those trips would go ahead.

    Hurtigruten is just one of several cruise companies in Europe that have been starting to bring back sailings since June. Until now, no cruise operators in North America have resumed sailings. But one small-ship cruise company, UnCruise Adventures, plans to resume trips out of Juneau, Alaska, on Saturday.

  • Another Market Top Indicator: "Blank Check" IPO Issuance Explodes
    Another Market Top Indicator: “Blank Check” IPO Issuance Explodes

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/02/2020 – 19:55

    The similarities with the housing bubble boom-bust are growing by the day. Not only are stocks at all time highs, to which we can now add record low yields and an all time high gold price as the 10Y real yield just dropped to an unprecedented minus 1% all time low…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … and risk-on euphoria is rampant among the retail investing community, but over the past year there has also been a veritable explosion of “blank check” companies  which are shell companies that have no operations but plan to go public with the intention of acquiring or merging with a company with the proceeds of the SPAC’s initial public offering. Investment in SPACs usually surges near market peaks, when there is broad consensus among the professional investing community that equities are overvalued as there is now – as a reminder the June Fund Manager Survey from BofA found that a record 78% of Wall Street professionals believe that stocks are overvalued.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The last time we saw such a surge in SPACs? 2007.

    And while the SPAC bubble burst in 2008 along with the rest of the housing/credit bubble, it has slowly recovered, and as Goldman’s David Kostin writes in his latest Weekly Kickstart, SPAC capital raising has soared YTD.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Some statistics: since the start of 2020, 51 SPAC offerings have been completed raising $21.5 billion, up 145% from the comparable year-ago period. In 2019, 51 SPAC IPOs were completed totaling $13.2 billion and 2018 witnessed 35 offerings for $9.3 billion. SPACs have accounted for one-third of all US IPO activity since the start of 2019.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As noted above, a SPAC is a “blank-check” company formed with the intention of acquiring or merging with another company. The SPAC needs to complete an acquisition within two years or the capital raised must be returned to investors, as such it mostly represents a vote of confidence in the sponsor or investor behind the SPAC and in their ability to find future deals that would generate a high ROI.

    According to Goldman, completed SPAC offerings currently searching for acquisitions exceeds $38 billion. In a typical SPAC structure, the sponsor raises initial capital by issuing units consisting of 1 share and ½ or ⅓ of a warrant. The shares are generally priced at $10 and the warrants are typically struck 15% out of the money ($11.50) with a 5-year term and an $18 forced exercise.

    And while by definition a SPAC is a blank-check, it comes with an embedded put option as Kostin explains:

    Because the acquisition target is unknown at the time of the IPO, potential value creation is completely dependent on the ability of the sponsor to identify a target (typical private) company and negotiate the purchase. The SPAC purchase represents the de facto IPO for the acquired firm. However, in exchange for not knowing ahead of time the specific company that will be acquired, SPAC investors receive two benefits.

    • First, the right to evaluate the pending purchase and elect to hold or redeem the initial investment at cost (plus accrued interest) two days before the vote.
    • Second, warrants.

    The decisions are separate. A SPAC investor may choose to retain both the shares and warrants, or redeem the shares and hold the warrants, or sell both.

    The SPAC sponsor is typically compensated with a promote equal to 20% of pro forma equity and warrants. In a US SPAC, the sponsor’s promote is not contingent upon meeting any financial targets. However, the sponsors of some recent SPACs have put their equity promote into an earn-out that is only received if the company achieves certain performance objectives, further aligning the financial incentives of the SPAC sponsor and shareholders.

    European SPACs are structured slightly differently. First, since they lack a redemption feature, they are truly “blank check” firms. The European SPAC investor owns the shares regardless of whether the investor likes the acquisition or not. Second, the sponsor does not receive a 20% promote up front. Instead, the sponsor only earns a promote if the company achieves certain return targets.

    Once the IPO is complete, and the SPAC sponsor – now with millions in fresh funds in the bank – finds a suitable target, he or she negotiates a non-binding term sheet. Depending on the size of the transaction, the sponsor may wall cross potential new outside investors to raise a PIPE (private investment in public equity). The transaction is then announced to the public and an 8-K is filed.

    Curiously, the SPAC investor base is highly fluid and as Goldman writes, many SPACs experience nearly a full rotation in their shareholder base during the time between the announcement of the deal and closing of the acquisition (transition from merger arbitrage traders and hedge funds to longer-term fundamental investors).

    The sponsor will then file a proxy with the SEC, conduct a pre-merger roadshow, receive redemption notices (if any), and hold a shareholder vote. Redemption notices are due 2 days prior to the shareholder vote, and shareholders will typically determine whether or not to redeem based on where shares are trading at the time redemption notices are due. If the vote passes, the SPAC merges with the target company and will often undergo a ticker change to reflect the name of the target business.

    On the other hand, if the vote fails, the sponsor will resume searching for a suitable target. After 24 months from the capital raise the SPAC will be closed and the capital returned to investors if a merger has not been completed.

    So why the interest in SPACs?

    As Goldman explains, from a capital raiser’s perspective SPACs offer companies a path to the public markets as an alternative to a traditional IPO. Two features of the SPAC process are notable: Forecasts and proceeds.

    • First, in the traditional IPO process, issuers are prohibited from including any forward-looking guidance in their Form S-1 registration. As a result, prospective investors are required to evaluate the merits of an issue based on backward-looking results and their own expectations. In contrast, the SPAC due diligence process allows a target company to present forecasts and enhances the ability of a SPAC to acquire early-stage companies or those with complicated business models. This can be useful in businesses like sports betting, cannabis, electric vehicles, or other nascent industries that lack meaningful comparisons in the traditional IPO market. Of course, it is a given that the target company will present the most optimistic projections to potential investors, which is why removing the investor diligence aspect of the process is usually a sign of complacent groupthink whereby the investor base is willing to believe anything the target company presents similar to how i) rating agencies assessed all pre-crisis debt as stellar even if it was generally garbage and ii) investors are willing to engage in groupthink when someone else does their “diligence” job for them.
    • Second, in a traditional IPO, the amount of new capital raised is limited, typically to 20%-25% of the value of a company. But in a SPAC transaction, no limit exists on potential proceeds. A SPAC may acquire a majority or minority interest in the target firm and the concurrent PIPE capital raise may be any size.

    According to Goldman, whose taks is to spin SPACs as an attractive investment opportunity instead of yet another market top signal, investing in SPACs – from a portfolio manager’s perspective – “offers upside potential with downside protection.” And yes, ultimately, the upside potential is a function of the sponsor’s ability to identify the target, negotiate terms, inject needed external capital, and create long-term value. Which of course is also an admission by the provider of capital that they can’t find any other attractive investment opportunities and the money is bestowed upon someone who supposedly is good at finding the kinds of deals that have become especially scarce in the public markets. Meanwhile, the redemption option limits downside.

    Some more statistics: Goldman analyzed 56 SPACs that completed mergers/de-SPAC transactions since January 2018. Tech and Industrials dominated the targets, followed by Energy and Financials.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The typical deal value was $920 million. During the 1-month and 3-month periods following the acquisition announcement, the average SPAC outperformed the S&P 500 by 1 percentage point and 11 %, respectively, and beat the Russell 2000 by 6% and 15%, respectively. That’s the good news.

    Now the bad news: the average SPAC underperformed both indexes during the 3, 6, and 12-months after the merger completion.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As shown in the chart above, the performance distribution is extremely wide, with the 75th percentile SPAC outperforming the S&P 500 by 22% while the 25th percentile transaction lagged by 69%. The comparable returns vs. Russell 2000 were from +37% to -63 %.

    In other words, just like with regular IPOs, SPAC returns are a coin-toss and since they tend to underperform the broader market several months after the merger and after the initial euphoria fades one may as well just buy the SPY, which unlike a SPAC, is now actively managed by the Fed whose mandate is to never allow another market drop again. It’s also another indicator that a market top has been reached, although while in the past this would be a signal to take profits at this time – when the Fed is actively managing equity risk and making any material declines virtually impossible – this time is not only different, but the recent explosion in SPACs issuance may simply be an indicator to add on even more risk, with the Fed’s blessing of course.

  • Microsoft Says Talks To Buy TikTok Are Back On As White House Ups Pressure
    Microsoft Says Talks To Buy TikTok Are Back On As White House Ups Pressure

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/02/2020 – 19:44

    Word on the street – according to WSJ – is that Microsoft and TikTok-owner ByteDance were on the cusp of a deal for the software giant to buy TikTok’s business (which encompasses all global markets except China) when President Trump’s comment about barring the app from the US (which followed repeated hints that the administration was “looking into” some kind of action) prompted both sides to put things on hold, barring more concrete guidance from the administration.

    It’s reasonable to suspect that any deal for Microsoft to buy TikTok would require dependable assurances from the administration that Microsoft would be protected should lawmakers try to turn around and target Microsoft alongside Amazon, Facebook and Alphabet, as anti-trust probes into the Silicon Valley titans ramp up.

    And, apparently, the “OK” has been handed down, because Microsoft, which has, until now, refused to comment on the record about the purported deal, has reportedly just affirmed that it’s moving ahead with deal talks to potentially buy TikTok, which a private group of investors recently valued at $50 billion. The deal may involve outside investors from the US as well.

    In sum: At a time when Congress is beating the tech antitrust drum louder than at any other time since the late 1990s during the landmark Microsoft antitrust case, the tech giant, which has a market cap of $1.6 trillion and already owns one social media platform with more than half a billion members (LinkedIn), is about to get even bigger.

    To be sure, even with Trump’s blessing, a deal with TikTok would still be a risk for Microsoft, should Democrats take back control and redouble their anti-trust efforts. But right now, with the administration threatening to drop the hammer, the company might be able to get a reasonably good deal.

    Microsoft is now planning to wrap up the deal talks by the middle of September:

    • MICROSOFT SAYS IT WILL CONTINUE TALKS ABOUT US TIKTOK BUY
    • MICROSOFT SAYS IT WILL MOVE QUICKLY ON TIKTOK TALKS
    • MICROSOFT SAYS IT WILL FINISH TALKS NO LATER THAN SEPT 15
    • MICROSOFT SAYS DEAL WOULD ALSO INCLUDE TIKTOK IN CA, NZ AND AUS
    • MICROSOFT SAYS MAY INVITE OTHER U.S. INVESTORS FOR TIKTOK DEAL

    Earlier today, Sec Pompeo dropped the latest threats about potential action against TikTok, WeChat and other Chinese apps.

  • Stockman Slams "Lockdown Lunacy" – Your Government Ordered Depression Has Arrived
    Stockman Slams “Lockdown Lunacy” – Your Government Ordered Depression Has Arrived

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/02/2020 – 19:30

    Authored by David Stockman via Contra Corner blog,

    Well, the Virus Patrol sure has done it. In a fit of reckless overkill they have managed to vaporize six years of economic growth during the last 90 days. And that’s just by the mechanical reckoning of the GDP accounts, where total output in Q2 weighed in at essentially the same level as Q4 2014.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The real damage is far deeper, however, and is reflected in millions of small businesses permanently destroyed, tens of millions of households wiped-out financially and the vicious daisy chain of delinquencies, deferrals and defaults just beginning to rip through the $78 trillion edifice of debt which entombs the US economy.

    Real GDP Level

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Of course, most of the Wall Street talking heads were nonplussed by this week’s release because, well, Q2 results are claimed to be ancient history: Reality is purportedly the “V”-shaped recovery on their spreadsheets, which really can’t fail to happen because it’s always two quarters out regardless of conditions at the moment.

    So let’s get something straight. What is happening is an economic catastrophe the likes of which we have never seen before, even during the Great Depression of the 1930s.

    In fact, the worst annual decline back then was a 14.8 percent drop in 1932, while the entire peak-to-trough real GDP decline between 1929 and the 1933 bottom was 30.5 percent.

    So it would be fair to say that measured at an annualized rate, the idiotic Dr. Fauci and his Virus Patrol have now delivered a 32.9 percent GDP plunge, which single-handedly tops the entire contraction of the Great Depression.

    Needless to say, the Q2 result also leaves the recessionary drops since 1950 way back in the dust. Even the auto industry induced plunge of Q1 1958 didn’t make the double-digit threshold. It clocked in at a 9.986 percent annualized decline or less than one-third of today’s cliff dive.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What was especially notable, however, was the vaporization of personal consumption spending on services, which ordinarily accounts for upwards of 70 percent of total PCE; and which is also ballyhooed by the paint-by-the-numbers Wall Street economist as the ballast the keeps GDP moving ever higher.

    Not this time!

    Services spending literally fell through the trapdoor, contracting at a 43.4 percent annualized rate. That compares with the 11 recessions since 1950 where real spending on services never went negative, save for the pinprick decline of -1.6 percent annualized during the Q1 2009 bottom of the Great Recession.

    By every account, the economic plunge in the winter of 2008-2009 was the worst since the 1930s, but this week the Commerce Department reported a PCE-services drop that was 28X deeper!

    Our purpose here is not to marshal scary numbers, even as they surely are.

    Rather, our point is that what is coursing through the Q2 numbers is not anything that resembles a normal chain-of-reactions macroeconomic cycle. For instance, where job losses cascade through to shrinking incomes, thereby causing consumer confidence and spending wherewithal to diminish and household spending to be curtailed.

    To the contrary, what is depicted below is essentially economic martial law. Agencies of the state commanded airports, restaurants, bars, hair salons, gyms, movies, dentist offices, theme parks, sporting events etc. to close or operate at drastically reduced capacity, which meant, in turn, that day-in-and-day out commerce and economic output vanished instantly.

    Stated differently, this 43 percent plunge in services spending didn’t happen for the ordinary reason that people were short on cash. As we show below, personal income during the quarter – thanks to the massive flow of free stuff from Washington (aka government transfer payments) – clocked in at a record level!

    Consequently, there will be no rebound in the plunging red line below no matter how much fiscal and monetary “stimulus” Washington pumps into the main street economy.

    The services sector accounts for nearly 66 percent of total PCE, which, in turn, accounts for 68 percent of measured GDP. So the latter will not recover until the Virus Patrol gets its foot off the neck of what we call the social congregation activities of daily economic life; and also until it and its MSM collaborationist desist from fanning the false claim that the Covid is the equivalent of the Black Plague, thereby causing people to voluntarily quarantine out of misplaced fear.

    Of course, you don’t have to listen to Dr. Fauci and the Scarf Lady for long – yes, they have not yet been locked up in padded cells where they belong – to realize that the Virus Patrol is on a once-in-a lifetime power trip.

    In ultra-busy body/Nanny State fashion they are virtually regimenting the comings and goings of a $20 trillion economy – even as they keep the US economy on indefinite idle waiting for the vaccines and antivirals from their allies in Big Pharma and the Gates Complex to ride to the (mandatory) rescue.

    Annualized Change In Personal Consumption Expenditures, Services, 1950-2020

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We don’t expect the Virus Patrol to be put out of business any time soon because the Donald is too confused and weak to shut them down.

    Moreover, if he keeps shooting himself in the kneecaps via tweets like this week’s “lets-postpone-the-election” numbskullery, he will guarantee an even worse scenario: Namely, that while Sleepy Joe is being oxygenated and propped-up behind the Resolute Desk for daily Oval Office photo ops, the left-wing health Nazis who surround him will really go to town on Lockdown Nation.

    Nor is that any kind of unhinged trashing of the camarilla of out-and-out statists who will form the core of the Biden Administration. The fact is, the Donald’s malpacticing doctors, the MSM and the Blue State mayors and governors have now unleashed a full-on public hysteria that is self-fueling.

    It is now transforming ordinary sheeples into obedient and unquestioning brown-shirts. Even in the purportedly enlightened, socialist republic of Aspen, where we are sheltering for the duration, we see them “mask-up” even with no one in sight, while pumping strenuously up the mountain side on a fat-tired bike.

    One manifestation of the Covid-Hysteria is the soaring level of “testing” going on as people either try to get a hall pass in order to return to work or just plain run to the nearest testing station every time the media sends off new alarm bells.

    During April, for instance, which was the very worst month of the contagion in terms of serious illnesses and deaths, 5.2 million new tests were reported or 175,000 per day.

    By contrast, in July to date (thru the 29th), there have been 21.5 million new tests reported or an average of 745,000 per day.

    In a population that has been thoroughly exposed to the virus after five months, it is a given that with the number of tests soaring, the number of positive cases will rise proportionately. But that’s a misdirection because the real issue is the true medical severity of the new cases, and that has dropped precipitously.

    The death rate has dropped from 1,800 per day in April to 780 in July; and whereas 15-20 percent of new cases were being hospitalized in most states during April, that figure has now fallen to 2-4 percent.

    That is, after the Grim Reaper’s original romp through the most vulnerable populations – especially the nursing homes and long-term care facilities in March/April – the preponderant share of the remaining populations being infected and testing positive appear to have stronger immune defenses, and are mainly either asymptomatic or treating and recovering at home in the normal flu-season manner.

    So on the facts, the Hysteria should be dying out, but, alas, the facts are of small moment in the context of a runaway public hysteria that is being turbocharged by a severely aggravated anti-Trump partisanship that has no modern precedent, or any at all.

    We are constantly reminded that there are less than 100 days until the election, but probably of even more salience is that the next flu season will be arriving even sooner in October. And it won’t matter whether the obvious herd immunities building up against the SARS-Cov-2 cause the next flu season to be unusually mild or not.

    That’s because the Virus Patrol will be at shrill alert for the “second wave” in the run-up to October, keeping the suffocated economy evident in today’s GDP report on its back foot for the balance of the year, at least. That means the ballyhooed V is now surely dead-as-a-door nail.

    In this context, it needs be recalled that the services sector of the US economy is bearing the brunt of the Lockdown orders, but that it now counts for fully $8.7 trillion or 45 percent of GDP. That compares to a mere 26 percent back in the days of America’s industrial might in the mid-1950s.

    In the big picture context, therefore, national policy – especially at the Eccles Building – caused the off-shoring and hollowing-out of the US industrial economy over the last three decades. In turn, that has left main street especially vulnerable to a state-orchestrated attack on its new services sector center of gravity such as outpatient surgery clinics, Pilates studios and tapas bars.

    Again, an economic martial law attack on the new epicenter of the US economy means that the issue is not traditional stimulus, but clearing the decks and clearing the air of the Virus Patrol orders and Covid-Hysteria, which was the real culprit behind the Q2 GDP disaster.

    Nominal GDP (light brown) Versus Service Sector PCE (dark brown), 1955-2020

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Perhaps nowhere is the impact of economic martial law more evident, ironically, than in the health care sub-sector of the services economy.

    The former, of course, has been the workhorse of US GDP growth for decades. However, after peaking at $2.50 trillion in Q4 2019, it weighed in at just $1.89 trillion in Q2 2020. That’s a $608 billion decline, reflecting an astounding -24 percent contraction.

    And this is supposed to be the worst medical crisis to hit America since the Spanish Flu of 1918!

    But, actually, the government’s data mill is telling an absolutely opposite, nay crazy, story. Namely, that the single largest sector of the US economy plunged at a 61.6 percent annualized rate in Q2 – meaning that the figure gives the notion of being “off the charts” of history an altogether new definition.

    Needless to say, health care spending is not now and never has been amenable to Washington’s vaunted stimulus machines. The overwhelming share of spending is government funded directly through Medicare/Medicaid et al or through the $300 billion per year tax shelter for employer health plans; and whether public or private, consumer health payments are overwhelming made by third-parties, thereby further limiting the efficacy of the cheap money from the Fed and free money from Uncle Sam.

    The plunging red line below, therefore, is the doing of the Virus Patrol and its orders to shutdown most so-called discretionary healthy care services, such as cancer screenings. So until it is put out of business and the public Covid-Hysteria is substantially abated, the rebound of the health services sector is likely to the contained and protracted.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In short, what we have is a government-ordered depression, not a macroeconomic recession that is purportedly remediable by a huge dose of monetary and fiscal stimulus. So the truth is, the Virus Patrol, not the Fed and Washington’s everything bailout brigade, is in charge of the recovery from the Q2 disaster, and they are not much interested in letting it happen.

    To take another salient example, the go-to strategy of the Virus Patrol has been to shutdown large scale public gatherings entirely, but that’s obviously the venue of the recreation sector.

    So it is not surprising that the PCE spending rate for this sector has given “cliff-diving” a run for its money. Compared to the $590 billion annualized rate of spending in Q4 2019, the current quarter clocked in at just $272 trillion.

    The amounted to a 53.4 percent decline from Q4 and an out-of-this-world contraction of 61 percent annualized in the current quarter. Or alternatively, recreation spending in Lockdown Nation during Q2 reverted to the level first crossed in Q2 2002.

    That’s 18 year’s worth of growth gone in a virtual economic heartbeat.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Of course, there was one thing that was way up in Q2 – transfer payments and personal income. And every dime of the massive increase in transfer payments shown below was borrowed by Uncle Sam and monetized by the Fed.

    Yet the only thing it accomplished was to further balloon the public debt because the current depression does not flow from the want of means or desire to spend: It’s the product of economic martial law ordered up by the Virus Patrol.

    Still, it is worth noting that wage and salary income (brown line) was down by $680 billion at an annual rate in Q2, while the Washington spending machine boosted transfer payments at a $2.4 trillion annual rate, or by nearly four times more!

    Once upon a time, that would have been considered insane overkill, and at least caused Republicans to screech at the top of their lungs about fiscal profligacy.

    Alas, as they put up their $1.2 trillion Everything Bailout 5.0 against the House Dems’ $3.3 trillion alternative in the days just ahead, the chart below will be nowhere seen in the porkers’ lounges of Capitol Hill.

    Change From Prior Quarter In Billions: Transfer Payments (purple line) Versus Wages and Salaries (brown line)

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

  • College Expels Student For "Racist" Social Media Post, Then Discovers What Actually Happened
    College Expels Student For “Racist” Social Media Post, Then Discovers What Actually Happened

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/02/2020 – 19:15

    Authored by Dean Barker via Campus Reform,

    A student at Georgia’s Wesleyan College was reinstated after initially being expelled for social media posts that the school says it now realizes she did not make.

    After an investigation and appeal from the student at the all-female campus, the school found that “new information” revealed that the expelled student was not involved in the posts in question.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On June 4, the student, who is remaining nameless, was expelled from the school for allegedly putting out a social media post that contained the n-word. The post was put out by an account claiming to be a student at Wesleyan. The same account also made a Halloween-related post featuring a woman in a green “Border Patrol” shirt posing as if she were arresting a man in a sombrero and serape. The photo was captioned “border?…secured. found him, met him & and just had to get a pic.” 

    According to Wesleyan College Alumnae Board of Managers member Jan Lawrence, the board was told that the student provided information proving that a high school photo of the student had been downloaded and reposted by a third party who included the caption.

    On the morning we learned of the information, we launched an investigation and expelled the student that afternoon, giving her the right to appeal as provided in our policies,” college president Vivia Fowler said in an Instagram post

    The student did appeal, and was reinstated after the university found that “the student did not post the racist content.”

    “On July 10, the Wesleyan Student-Faculty Judicial Board, comprised of two faculty members, two staff members and two members of student government, ruled in the student’s favor, overturning the expulsion effective immediately,” Fowler said.

    The committee considered new information that we learned in the weeks following the student’s expulsion, which called into question the accuracy of the original information. This information shows that the student did not post the racist content in early June while enrolled at Wesleyan.”

    A version of the statement posted by the Wesleyan College Alumnae Association includes a paragraph lamenting the fact that the process for the investigation was not carried out in a more equitable manner:

    “We must be better in how we think, communicate, and act. This passionate call for introspection is very much for the good. But with action comes the responsibility to make decisions rooted in careful analysis, sound consideration, open dialogue, and above all, fairness

    Those principles help form the very core of higher education and scientific and cultural inquiry. There is no place for racism at Wesleyan College, and we take seriously our responsibility to combat that scourge across all aspects of our institution.”

    The school then used this opportunity to tout its diversity efforts, assuring the community that “even though” a student was wrongly expelled, “that will not deter us from doing our part to denounce racism and hate.”

    “In addition, we will continue our work, particularly over the last few years, of promoting diversity, equity and inclusion. We are proud of our diverse student body,” said Fowler in the same announcement. “We are one of the first higher education institutions to offer trainings and workshops on the harmful impact of white privilege.”

    “We recently created a Cabinet-level position of Chief Diversity Officer, who also serves as Assistant Dean for Equity and Inclusion,” Fowler added.

    Fowler did not respond to Campus Reform’s request for comment in time for publication.

  • Deutsche Bank Launches Investigation Into Personal Banker To Trump, Kushner Over 2013 Transaction
    Deutsche Bank Launches Investigation Into Personal Banker To Trump, Kushner Over 2013 Transaction

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/02/2020 – 19:05

    Deutsche Bank has launched an internal investigation into Rosemary Vrablic, the longtime personal banker of President Trump and Jared Kushner after a Friday disclosure by Trump’s son-in-law revealed what may have been an inappropriate real estate transaction between Vrablic, two Deutsche Bank colleagues, and a company part-owned by Kushner in 2013.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On Friday, Kushner disclosed in an annual personal financial report that he and wife Ivanka Trump received between $1 million and $5 million in 2019 from a company called Bergel 715 Associates.

    The New York Times did some digging and uncovered that in 2013 Vrablic and her Deutsche Bank colleagues purchased a Park Avenue apartment for approximately $1.5 million from Bergel at the time Kushner held an ownership stake in the entity, posing a potential conflict of interest which may have violated firm rules.

    When Ms. Vrablic and her colleagues bought the apartment on Manhattan’s Upper East Side, Mr. Trump and Mr. Kushner were her clients at Deutsche Bank. They had received roughly $190 million in loans from the bank and would seek hundreds of millions of dollars more.

    Typically banks restrict employees from doing personal business with clients because of the potential for conflicts between the employees’ interests and those of the bank. –NYT

    According to the report, Deutsche Bank was unaware of the potentially inappropriate nature of the transaction until the Times contacted them.

    “The bank will closely examine the information that came to light on Friday and the fact pattern from 2013,” said bank spokesman Daniel Hunter.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Christopher Smith, general counsel at Kushner Companies, told the Times that “Kushner is not the managing partner of that entity and has no involvement with the sales of the apartments.”

    Kushner’s stake in Bergel – which has sold dozens of high-end condos in the Park Avenue building since the 1980s – is unknown, though at least one apartment was sold to the Kushner family’s real estate company according to the report.

    Bergel 715’s main owners include George Gellert, a close friend of the Kushner family and an investor in numerous deals with Kushner Companies.

    There is no indication that the three Deutsche Bank employees bought the apartment — described on Zillow as a 908-square-foot, one-bedroom, one-bath unit with a balcony overlooking Park Avenue — at a below-market price.

    In 2014, the deed for the apartment, Unit 12A, was transferred to a limited liability company registered to Ms. Vrablic’s home address, according to property records. The next year, the apartment was sold for $1.85 million — a not-unheard-of 22 percent increase from the 2013 purchase price. –NYT

    The Kushner family has a long relationship with Vrablic predating her employment at Deutsche Bank which began in 2006. As one of New York’s leading private bankers, Kushner brought Vrablic to meet his father-in-law in 2011 at a time when many banks avoided business with Trump over his previous bankruptcies.

    “I introduced him to this woman Rosemary,” Kushner told the House Intelligence Committee during closed-door testimony in 2017. “She is one of the biggest private wealth bankers, probably in the world. Amazing banker, amazing woman. Very smart banker. And she banked my family for a long time.”

  • US Announces New Action Against "Array" Of Chinese Software Companies
    US Announces New Action Against “Array” Of Chinese Software Companies

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/02/2020 – 18:53

    Update (1850ET): The SCMP is reporting that WeChat, a popular chat app developed and run by Chinese tech giant Tencent, will also be targeted by the Trump administration along with TikTok.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    * * *

    As the White House teased in a media trial balloon yesterday, the administration has just announced its latest initiative to hector Beijing, and the Chinese technology sector, as the Trump Administration ratchets up the retaliatory pressure in a burst of election-year fervor.

    The Trump administration will announce measures shortly against “a broad array” of Chinese-owned software that pose a “national security risk”, according to Mike Pompeo, Trump’s Secretary of State.

    Ever since President Trump said late Friday that a ban on the popular social media app TikTok was “imminent”, talks between ByteDance, the owner of TikTok and a separate app called “Douyin” – (equivalent to “TikTok” in English) which is similar to TikTok in many ways, but is a different app built to operate on the Chinese Internet – have apparently collapsed. Media reports claimed that, after being courted by a group of VC firms, ByteDance was in advanced talks to sell TikTok to Microsoft.

    But those talks have apparently stalled. Treasury Secretary Steven Mnuchin said earlier that the app must either be “sold or blocked”, and it appears that Beijing has soured on the optics of appearing to kowtow to Trump just before the election – god forbid President Xi be accused of intervening on Trump’s behalf.

    Pompeo signaled he expects a Trump announcement “shortly.” He added that Chinese software companies doing business in the US are working with Chinese State Security: “whether it’s TikTok or WeChat, there are countless more,” Pompeo said during an interview on Fox New’s “Sunday Morning Futures” program.

    Trump “will take action in the coming days with respect to a broad array of national-security risks that are presented by software connected to the Chinese Communist Party,” Pompeo added.

    From placing new restrictions and pressures on Huawei – including successfully pressing allies like the UK to walk back their earlier support for allowing Huawei parts to be incorporated into “non-core” parts of their 5G networks – as well as taking shots at foreign students studying in the US, among other things.

Digest powered by RSS Digest